A1 1 / 70

Modern Standard Arabic and the dialects

الفُصْحى والعامِّيَّة

In short

Arabic is not a language you write the way you speak it. Every Arab lives with two forms of it at the same time. الفُصْحى - Modern Standard Arabic, MSA - is the written and formal language: books, newspapers, websites, contracts, road signs, school, the news bulletin, the Friday sermon, the university lecture, every exam ever set. العامِّيَّة is the language people actually speak - at home, in the taxi, with friends - and it changes from country to country. Linguists call this arrangement diglossia, and Arabic is the case they always cite.

This lesson is orientation, not morphology; there is nothing here to conjugate. What you need to carry out of it is what الفُصْحى covers, what it does not, how far the spoken varieties sit from it, and one structural fact that decides what this path prints on the end of every single word: the dialects have no case endings at all.

The rule

Two forms, two jobs, one name. Arabs call both of them “Arabic”, and they are right to - these are not two languages but two registers of one. الفُصْحى is the high register: it is written, read, broadcast and used whenever the occasion is formal or the audience is pan-Arab. العامِّيَّة is the low register: spoken, local, unwritten in any official sense, and the one everybody is fluent in from birth. The two are not in competition. The same journalist writes an article in الفُصْحى at eleven and argues about it over lunch in العامِّيَّة at one.

الفُصْحى is nobody’s mother tongue. No child anywhere grows up speaking it at home. It is acquired at school, the way arithmetic is, by every literate Arab from Morocco to Oman, and the level people reach in it varies exactly as it varies for writing skills in any country. This has a consequence you should hear clearly: when you speak الفُصْحى you are not speaking “the way natives speak”. You are speaking the way natives write and lecture. That is not a defect - it is precisely why it works everywhere - but it explains why a fluent الفُصْحى sentence in a market can sound to the seller like someone ordering vegetables in the language of the evening news.

العامِّيَّة is everybody’s mother tongue. The spoken varieties form a chain across the map, and neighbours understand each other easily while the two ends do not. They are conventionally grouped in five families: مِصْرِيّ، شامِيّ، خَليجِيّ، عِراقِيّ، مَغْرِبِيّ. The differences are not just accent. They run through the pronouns, the negation, the verb prefixes, the words for “want”, “now”, “what” and “there is” - that is, through the most frequent machinery of the sentence, which is why a Moroccan speaking naturally can lose a Kuwaiti completely.

Classical and Modern Standard are one grammar. فُصْحى التُّراثِ (the Classical language of the Qur’an, the poets and the mediaeval library) and فُصْحى العَصْرِ (what you are learning) share essentially the whole grammatical system: same cases, same moods, same root-and-pattern morphology, same agreement rules. What changed over fourteen centuries is vocabulary and style - modern Arabic has words for a parliament and a browser, prefers shorter sentences, and has quietly retired a set of constructions that are still perfectly grammatical but now read as archaic or scriptural. So the grammar in this path is also the grammar you need for older texts; the reverse is not true, which is why this path does not teach the archaic corners.

الفُصْحى is the base every dialect departs from. Structurally that is how it works out: each spoken variety is most economically described as a set of departures from the standard - endings dropped, vowels shifted, particles replaced or shortened. (Historically the picture is messier. The dialects are not simply worn-down Classical Arabic; they continue older spoken Arabic that ran alongside the written language, mixed in the garrison towns of the conquests, and picked up the local languages they replaced.) That direction of travel matters for a learner. Learn الفُصْحى and each dialect becomes a set of substitutions on top of something you already know. Learn a dialect first and you have a working tongue in one country, no access to anything written anywhere, and no framework to see what the next dialect is doing. It is also simply the only door: newspapers, exams, subtitles, official forms, literature and this grammar path are all in الفُصْحى.

The structural difference that matters: dialects have no إِعْراب. The case and mood endings this path spends so much time on - the ـُ، ـَ، ـِ and the تَنْوين ـٌ ـً ـٍ - do not exist in any spoken dialect. Not “are pronounced differently”: they are absent from the system. A dialect noun does not change its ending according to its job in the sentence, exactly like an English noun. So الكِتابُ / الكِتابَ / الكِتابِ, three MSA forms distinguishing subject, object and object of a preposition, correspond to one single spoken form الكِتاب. Everything this path teaches you about الإِعْرابُ is therefore a فُصْحى-only system. It is real, it is required in writing and formal speech, and it is one of the things that makes الفُصْحى precise - but you will never hear it in a café.

How dialect is written in this lesson. Every فُصْحى word in the tables and example sentences of this path carries its full vowel marks and its final case ending. Dialect citations here carry the vowel marks but no case ending, because there is none to carry: مِشْ، عايِزْ، بِدّي، إيه، شو. A final sukūn on a dialect form is not laziness, it is the fact. If you ever see a hybrid like عايِزٌ or بِدّي كِتابًا, you are looking at something that exists in no variety of Arabic at all.

In between, there is a middle. Educated speakers do not switch cleanly between two boxes. An academic on a talk show typically speaks عامِّيَّةُ المُثَقَّفينَ: dialect skeleton, MSA vocabulary, MSA phrases dropped in whole, and - decisively - no case endings. Even a formal MSA speech drops the ending at every pause, and many speakers leave off a good deal more, which the path takes up in [Reading Arabic without the vowel marks, and the pausal form__XLINK__. Expect a spectrum, not a switch.

What this means for you, practically. Write and read الفُصْحى from day one; it is what your sources are in. Expect that when you speak it, you will be understood everywhere and answered in dialect. Later - realistically after A2 - pick one dialect on the basis of where you are going or who you love, and learn it as a layer over what you already have. Do not try to learn two at once, and do not try to learn one before you have the base.

Forms & patterns

The five dialect groups

اللَّهْجَةWhere it is spokenNotes for a learner
المِصْرِيَّةُEgyptMost widely understood variety - a century of films, songs and television exported it
الشّامِيَّةُSyria, Lebanon, Jordan, PalestineSecond most exported, largely through drama serials; close to MSA in feel
الخَليجِيَّةُKuwait, Bahrain, Qatar, the UAE, Oman, eastern Saudi ArabiaKeeps some older features the others lost
العِراقِيَّةُIraqIts own group; some shared ground with both Gulf and Levantine
المَغْرِبِيَّةُMorocco, Algeria, Tunisia, LibyaHardest for easterners: heavy vowel loss plus Berber and French vocabulary

Sudanese, Yemeni and Hasaniya are usually treated as further groups, and every group splits into city and country speech. This grid is a map, not a taxonomy to memorise.

The contrast that shows the size of the gap

Dialect forms below carry vowel marks but no case ending, as explained above.

الفُصْحى (MSA)مِصْرِيّ (spoken Egyptian)شامِيّ (spoken Levantine)
“what?”ماذا؟إيه؟شو؟
“not”لَيْسَ before a noun; لا، ما، لَمْ before a verbمِشْ before a noun; ما … ش around a verbمِشْ، مو before a noun; ما before a verb
”I want”أُريدُعايِزْبِدّي
”there is”هُناكَفيهفي
the letter ق/q/, a k made far back in the throat/ʔ/, a glottal stop/ʔ/ in the big cities, /g/ or /k/ in rural and bedouin speech

Four of these five rows are among the commonest words in any conversation, which is the point: the divergence is not in rare vocabulary but in the words you cannot build a sentence without.

Which variety belongs where

Situationالفُصْحىالعامِّيَّة
Newspapers, books, websites, subtitlesyesalmost never
The television news bulletinyesno
Talk shows, drama, filmsnoyes
Lectures, sermons, conferencesyes, usually with dialect leaking inpartly
Speeches, contracts, official forms, examsyesno
Family, market, taxi, friendsnoyes
Songsa few classicsoverwhelmingly
Chat and social mediasomemost

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الفُصْحى لُغَةُ الكِتابَةِ في كُلِّ البِلادِ العَرَبِيَّةِ.Standard Arabic is the language of writing in all the Arab countries.
تَبْدَأُ نَشْرَةُ الأَخْبارِ بِالفُصْحى دائِمًا.The news bulletin always begins in Standard Arabic.
لا أَحَدَ يَتَكَلَّمُ الفُصْحى في بَيْتِهِ.Nobody speaks Standard Arabic at home.
العامِّيَّةُ لُغَةُ البَيْتِ والشّارِعِ والسّوقِ.The dialect is the language of the home, the street and the market.
لِكُلِّ بَلَدٍ عَرَبِيٍّ لَهْجَتُهُ.Every Arab country has its own dialect.
يَفْهَمُ الطُّلّابُ الفُصْحى ولكِنَّهُمْ لا يَتَحَدَّثونَ بِها كَثيرًا.Students understand Standard Arabic, but they do not speak it much.
اللَّهْجَةُ المِصْرِيَّةُ مَعْروفَةٌ في العالَمِ العَرَبِيِّ كُلِّهِ بِسَبَبِ الأَفْلامِ.The Egyptian dialect is known all over the Arab world because of the films.
الفَرْقُ بَيْنَ الفُصْحى والعامِّيَّةِ كَبيرٌ.The difference between Standard Arabic and the dialect is big.
لَيْسَتِ العامِّيَّةُ لُغَةً خاطِئَةً.The dialect is not a wrong language.
لا يُوجَدُ إِعْرابٌ في العامِّيَّةِ.There is no case system in the dialect.
يَتَعَلَّمُ الطِّفْلُ العامِّيَّةَ في البَيْتِ والفُصْحى في المَدْرَسَةِ.The child learns the dialect at home and Standard Arabic at school.
تُدَرَّسُ الفُصْحى في كُلِّ المَدارِسِ مِنَ المَغْرِبِ إِلى العِراقِ.Standard Arabic is taught in every school from Morocco to Iraq.
الأَغاني غالِبًا بِالعامِّيَّةِ.Songs are mostly in dialect.
الفُصْحى واحِدَةٌ والعامِّيّاتُ كَثيرَةٌ.Standard Arabic is one; the dialects are many.

Common mistakes

  • العامِّيَّةُ عَرَبِيَّةٌ مَكْسورَةٌ. -> لِلْعامِّيَّةِ قَواعِدُها الخاصَّةُ. - a dialect is not damaged Arabic. Each has a consistent, learnable system of its own; it simply is not the written one.
  • أَنا مِشْ طالِبٌ. -> لَسْتُ طالِبًا. - مِشْ is Egyptian and Levantine speech. In anything written, the ordinary way to negate a nominal sentence is لَيْسَ, and its predicate goes into the accusative.
  • أَنا عايِزْ ماءً. -> أُريدُ ماءً. - عايِزْ is spoken Egyptian. Nothing that carries a case ending can hang off it, so mixing it with تَنْوين produces a form from no variety at all.
  • بِدّي كِتابًا. -> أُريدُ كِتابًا. - same fault from the Levantine side. Case endings belong to الفُصْحى only; a dialect verb with a تَنْوين on its object is a hybrid nobody says or writes.
  • شو تَقْرَأُ؟ -> ماذا تَقْرَأُ؟ - شو is the spoken Levantine “what”. The written question word is ماذا before a verb, and ما before a noun.
  • فيه كِتابٌ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ. -> هُناكَ كِتابٌ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ. - فيه for “there is” is Egyptian. In writing, use هُناكَ.
  • أَلْبي -> قَلْبي - reading ق as a glottal stop is a Cairene and urban Levantine habit carried into MSA. When reading الفُصْحى aloud, ق is its own sound, made far back in the throat.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلى المَطارِ. (to a taxi driver in Cairo) -> المَطار، لَوْ سَمَحْتْ. - the first sentence is flawless Arabic and lands like a news anchor asking for a lift. Short register-neutral phrases work far better in the street; note the spoken form takes no ending.
  • اللَّهْجَةُ الفُصْحى -> العَرَبِيَّةُ الفُصْحى - لَهْجَة is the word for a spoken variety. الفُصْحى is not one of them, so the two words do not combine.
  • سَوْفَ أَذْهَبَنَّ إِلى المَكْتَبَةِ. -> سَوْفَ أَذْهَبُ إِلى المَكْتَبَةِ. - the emphatic نون التَّوْكيد is at home in the Qur’an and in poetry and is hardly ever used in modern prose. Reaching for Classical ornaments there is as wrong a register as reaching for dialect.

Tips

  • Judge by the channel, not the topic. As a rough rule, anything written, broadcast as news, or delivered as a prepared address is الفُصْحى; anything said to a person in front of you is العامِّيَّة.
  • Do not choose a dialect yet. Choose it when you know where you are going; until then every hour on الفُصْحى pays off in all of them, and none of it will be wasted.
  • If you want the widest passive reach later, Egyptian and Levantine are the two that other Arabs have grown up hearing. That is a fact about media exposure, not about the languages.
  • Get news bulletins into your ears now, before you understand them. They are the purest and most predictable الفُصْحى input there is, carefully articulated and repeated hourly.
  • Do not try to learn dialect from text. What is written down is mostly الفُصْحى, and dialect spelling is unstandardised, so dialect is learned by ear.
  • When someone answers your careful الفُصْحى in dialect, nothing has gone wrong. They understood you; they are simply speaking the way people speak. Keep going.
  • Ignore Maghrebi for a long time. Its distance from الفُصْحى is a known difficulty for Arabs from the east too, so struggling with it says nothing about your progress.
  • Keep the two systems physically apart in your notes. One page for المِصْرِيَّة، الشّامِيَّة and the rest, another for the standard - mixing them on a page is how hybrids get memorised.

A1 2 / 70

The nominal sentence: subject and predicate

الجُمْلَةُ الاسْمِيَّةُ: المُبْتَدَأُ والخَبَر

In short

Arabic builds a complete statement out of two nouns and nothing in between. “The house is big” is البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ - word for word “the-house big”. Arabic has no present-tense copula - no word for “is” standing between the halves - so there is nothing to leave out and nothing to conjugate. A sentence that opens with a noun like this is a جُمْلَةٌ اسْمِيَّةٌ, a nominal sentence, and it is the first full sentence type you can produce: give it a definite first half and an indefinite second half and you are already saying something.

The engine of the whole thing is definiteness, not word order. البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ is a sentence, but البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ - the same two words, with الـ added to the second one - is not a sentence at all; it is the phrase “the big house”. One little الـ is the difference between making a claim and merely naming a thing, and it has no equivalent in English. Get that contrast into your ear now, because every A1 sentence you write for the next twenty lessons rests on it.

The rule

Two slots, no verb. The first half is the المُبْتَدَأ, literally “the thing started with” - the subject you are talking about. The second half is the الخَبَر, “the report” - what you say about it. Between them there is silence: no copula, no linking word, no particle. English needs “is”; Arabic needs a pause.

البَيْتُكَبيرٌ
مُبْتَدَأخَبَر

Both halves are in the رَفْع case. The مُبْتَدَأ and the خَبَر both take the ضَمَّة ـُ as their ending. On a definite noun that is a bare ـُ: البَيْتُ. On an indefinite noun it is doubled into tanwīn ـٌ: كَبيرٌ. So the visible difference between البَيْتُ and كَبيرٌ is not a difference of case - both are مَرْفوع - it is the difference between definite and indefinite. Do not read the tanwīn as “a second case”.

These endings are audible only in careful, formal reading; in ordinary speech the final vowel of the last word is dropped at a pause, and in ordinary writing the marks are not printed at all. The pronunciation guide’s lesson on reading unvocalized text deals with both facts. This path prints every ending anyway, because the ending is the grammar being taught, and you cannot learn what you cannot see.

The definiteness asymmetry is the sentence. This is the rule to memorise:

  • definite + indefinite = a sentence. البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. “The house is big.”
  • definite + definite = normally a phrase. البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ. “the big house.”

In the second one the adjective has copied the الـ of its noun, and copying definiteness is exactly what a describing adjective does (that is lesson 8). A خَبَر does not copy; it stays نَكِرَة, indefinite, and that is how the reader knows a claim is being made. Whenever a sentence of yours feels like it never lands, check the second word: an الـ you did not mean to write has turned your sentence into a label.

The خَبَر may be a noun or an adjective. Both behave identically - indefinite, مَرْفوع, tanwīn: سَميرٌ مُهَنْدِسٌ “Samir is an engineer” (noun) and البابُ مَفْتوحٌ “the door is open” (adjective). Arabic does not sort these into two constructions the way English sorts “is a teacher” from “is tired”.

Where the tanwīn is written. On a masculine خَبَر the two ḍammas sit on the last consonant: كَبيرٌ، جَديدٌ، مُهَنْدِسٌ. On a feminine خَبَر ending in ة they sit on the ة itself, after the fatḥa of the syllable before it: جَميلَةٌ، نَظيفَةٌ، مُتْعَبَةٌ. The ة is a real letter and takes the ending like any other; it is never dropped and never replaced by ه when you are writing vocalized Arabic.

The مُبْتَدَأ is normally definite, and at this stage you have three ways to be definite. It can carry الـ (البِنْتُ), it can be a proper name (سَميرٌ، مُحَمَّدٌ), or it can be a pronoun (أَنا، هُوَ). Note that many proper names keep a tanwīn - مُحَمَّدٌ، سَميرٌ - and are still definite: tanwīn marks indefiniteness on ordinary nouns, but a name is definite by nature. (A whole class of names - أَحْمَدُ، فاطِمَةُ - takes no tanwīn at all; that is lesson 41.) An indefinite first word on its own gives you no sentence: بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ is just “a big house”.

A pronoun as مُبْتَدَأ carries no case ending. أَنا مُدَرِّسٌ، هُوَ مَشْغولٌ، هِيَ مُتْعَبَةٌ. The personal pronouns are مَبْنِيّ - “built”, frozen - so they never take ـُ or any other case vowel; the final vowel you see in هُوَ or أَنْتَ is part of the word itself, not an ending. Only the خَبَر after them shows its tanwīn. Lesson 6 gives the full set.

The خَبَر agrees in gender. A feminine مُبْتَدَأ takes a feminine خَبَر, normally with the ending ة: البِنْتُ جَميلَةٌ، الحَقيبَةُ ثَقيلَةٌ، القَهْوَةُ ساخِنَةٌ. Agreement in number waits for the plural lessons (13-16); apart from the plural pronouns, keep both halves singular for now.

ضَميرُ الفَصْل: when the خَبَر has to be definite. Sometimes what you want to say really does need a definite second half - “Muhammad is the manager”, not “a manager”. Written bare, مُحَمَّدٌ المُديرُ is ambiguous: it reads just as easily as the phrase “Muhammad the manager”, a name plus a title. Arabic clears this up with a pronoun slipped in between the two halves, ضَميرُ الفَصْل, “the pronoun of separation”:

مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ المُديرُ. اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ هِيَ الأَجْمَلُ.

The separating pronoun agrees with the مُبْتَدَأ in gender: هُوَ for a masculine subject, هِيَ for a feminine one. It is not the subject, it is not the predicate, and - this is the trap - it is not a translation of “is”. You reach for it when the خَبَر is definite. With a normal indefinite خَبَر there is nothing to disambiguate and no ضَميرُ الفَصْل is used: البَيْتُ هُوَ كَبيرٌ is not how the thought is expressed.

Not in this lesson. Saying a nominal sentence is not so needs لَيْسَ (lesson 23); putting it in the past needs كانَ (lesson 32); “I have” and “there is” need a predicate moved to the front (lesson 17). Resist the urge to reach for them - everything on this page works without a single verb.

Forms & patterns

The two slots, with both endings marked

المُبْتَدَأ - definite, ـُالخَبَر - indefinite, ـٌEnglish
البَيْتُكَبيرٌThe house is big.
الطّالِبُجَديدٌThe student is new.
الجَوُّجَميلٌThe weather is lovely.
الدَّرْسُسَهْلٌThe lesson is easy.
أَنامُدَرِّسٌI am a teacher.
سَميرٌمُهَنْدِسٌSamir is an engineer.

Note الطّالِبُ and الدَّرْسُ: ط and د are sun letters, so the ل of the article is not pronounced and the letter after it doubles. That is lesson 4; here just copy the shadda.

Sentence or phrase? One الـ decides

ArabicWhat it isEnglish
البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.جُمْلَةٌ - a statementThe house is big.
البَيْتُ الكَبيرُa phrase, not a statementthe big house
المَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ.جُمْلَةٌ - a statementThe city is beautiful.
المَدينَةُ الجَميلَةُa phrase, not a statementthe beautiful city
السُّؤالُ سَهْلٌ.جُمْلَةٌ - a statementThe question is easy.
السُّؤالُ السَّهْلُa phrase, not a statementthe easy question

Gender agreement between the halves

مُذَكَّر (masculine)مُؤَنَّث (feminine)
الطّالِبُ جَديدٌ.الطّالِبَةُ جَديدَةٌ.
الوَلَدُ نَشيطٌ.البِنْتُ نَشيطَةٌ.
البابُ مَفْتوحٌ.الغُرْفَةُ مَفْتوحَةٌ.
هُوَ مَشْغولٌ.هِيَ مَشْغولَةٌ.

A pronoun in the first slot - the pronoun never changes, only the خَبَر does

مُبْتَدَأخَبَرEnglish
أَنامُدَرِّسٌ / مُدَرِّسَةٌI am a teacher.
أَنْتَمَشْغولٌYou are busy. (to a man)
أَنْتِمَشْغولَةٌYou are busy. (to a woman)
هُوَطالِبٌHe is a student.
هِيَطالِبَةٌShe is a student.
نَحْنُطُلّابٌWe are students.

With أَنا the خَبَر follows the speaker’s own gender, so a woman says أَنا مُدَرِّسَةٌ. The full pronoun set, including the dual and the plurals, is lesson 6.

ضَميرُ الفَصْل - the separating pronoun

مُبْتَدَأضَميرُ الفَصْلخَبَر (definite)English
مُحَمَّدٌهُوَالمُديرُMuhammad is the manager.
خالِدٌهُوَالطَّبيبُKhalid is the doctor.
القاهِرَةُهِيَالعاصِمَةُCairo is the capital.
الأُسْتاذَةُهِيَالمُديرَةُThe professor is the director.

Only the singular هُوَ / هِيَ is tabled here. The dual and plural separating pronouns (هُما، هُمْ، هُنَّ) work the same way, but they wait for lessons 9-16, where their nouns are taught.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.The house is big.
الطّالِبُ جَديدٌ.The student is new.
الجَوُّ جَميلٌ.The weather is lovely.
أَنا مُدَرِّسٌ.I am a teacher.
البِنْتُ جَميلَةٌ.The girl is beautiful.
الحَقيبَةُ ثَقيلَةٌ.The bag is heavy.
البابُ مَفْتوحٌ والغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةٌ.The door is open and the room is clean.
القَهْوَةُ ساخِنَةٌ جِدًّا.The coffee is very hot.
سَميرٌ مُهَنْدِسٌ.Samir is an engineer.
هِيَ مُتْعَبَةٌ اليَوْمَ.She is tired today.
مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ المُديرُ.Muhammad is the manager.
القاهِرَةُ هِيَ العاصِمَةُ.Cairo is the capital.
اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ هِيَ الأَجْمَلُ.The Arabic language is the most beautiful.
البَحْرُ هادِئٌ والسَّماءُ صافِيَةٌ.The sea is calm and the sky is clear.

Common mistakes

  • البَيْتُ يَكونُ كَبيرًا. -> البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - Arabic has no present-tense copula. يَكونُ exists, but it says “it comes to be / it is habitually so”, not the plain “is” of this sentence, and inserting it here is the single most recognisable beginner’s sentence.
  • البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ. (meaning “the house is big”) -> البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - With الـ on the second word you have written the phrase “the big house”. The خَبَر must stay indefinite for the sentence to say anything.
  • البَيْتُ هُوَ كَبيرٌ. -> البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - هُوَ is not “is”. The separating pronoun belongs with a definite خَبَر, which كَبيرٌ is not.
  • مُحَمَّدٌ المُديرُ. (meaning “Muhammad is the manager”) -> مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ المُديرُ. - Without هُوَ the words are ambiguous, and the reader is likely to take المُديرُ as a title attached to the name, “Muhammad the manager”. The pronoun is what forces the reading you want.
  • البِنْتُ جَميلٌ. -> البِنْتُ جَميلَةٌ. - The خَبَر agrees with the مُبْتَدَأ in gender; a feminine subject needs the ة on the predicate.
  • بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ. (meaning “the house is big”) -> البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - Two indefinite words in a row are a noun phrase, “a big house”. In a plain two-word sentence the مُبْتَدَأ has to be definite.
  • الطّالِبُ جَديدًا. -> الطّالِبُ جَديدٌ. - Both halves are مَرْفوع. The accusative ـً belongs to the خَبَر of كانَ, which is lesson 32, not here.
  • الجَوُّ جَميلُ. -> الجَوُّ جَميلٌ. - For an ordinary noun like جَميل, indefinite and مَرْفوع means the doubled ـٌ, never the bare ـُ. (One class of nouns does take a bare ـُ while indefinite; that is lesson 41.)
  • اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ هُوَ الأَجْمَلُ. -> اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ هِيَ الأَجْمَلُ. - The separating pronoun matches the gender of the subject, not of the predicate.
  • أَنا مُدَرِّسًا. -> أَنا مُدَرِّسٌ. - أَنا itself is frozen and takes no ending, but the خَبَر after it is a normal indefinite مَرْفوع noun.

Tips

  • Read the sentence as an equation: X = Y. The equals sign is not written, it is silence, and English “is” is what you supply when translating out - never when translating in.
  • Listen for the tanwīn. In careful reading, ـٌ at the end of the second word is the audible signal “this is a statement”. الـ at the start of it is the signal “this is only a label”.
  • Cover the second word of anything you write and ask: did I mean to describe, or to claim? Describe takes الـ, claim takes tanwīn. This single test prevents most A1 errors.
  • Build a small stock of paired adjectives you can drop straight into the خَبَر slot: كَبيرٌ / صَغيرٌ، جَديدٌ / قَديمٌ، سَهْلٌ / صَعْبٌ، مَفْتوحٌ / مُغْلَقٌ. Learn each with its feminine in ة from the first day.
  • Remember that a name is already definite even though it wears a tanwīn: مُحَمَّدٌ طالِبٌ is a perfectly formed sentence.
  • Use ضَميرُ الفَصْل as a fixed pair with a definite predicate: the moment you mean a definite second half, reach for هُوَ or هِيَ. Arabic can manage without it, but with it your sentence can no longer be misread as a phrase.
  • Ignore the pronunciation of the endings for now if it slows you down. Read them aloud when you are drilling grammar, drop them at a pause when you are talking - the pronunciation guide’s lesson on the pausal form formalises this.
  • Do not try to negate or move these sentences into the past yet. Everything you need for that arrives in lessons 23 and 37; using this pattern in the present is a complete skill on its own.

A1 3 / 70

Noun, verb, particle: what the endings do

أَقْسامُ الكَلِمَة: الاسْمُ والفِعْلُ والحَرْف

In short

English sorts words into eight or nine parts of speech. Arabic sorts every word in the language into exactly three: اسْم (noun), فِعْل (verb) and حَرْف (particle). There is no separate class for adjectives, no class for pronouns, none for demonstratives, and none for most adverbs - in Arabic terms all of those are اسْم. Three boxes, and every word goes into one of them. You choose the box by a grammatical test, not by what the word means.

The second half of the lesson is about the little vowel that sits on the last letter. It is not decoration and it is not part of the word’s spelling: it is a job label. On a noun that final vowel says which case the noun is in - that is, what job it is doing in the sentence. On a verb the same three vowels say something completely different: mood, not case. On a particle there is no label at all, because a particle never changes. At this stage your task is only to recognise these endings when they are printed. You are not yet expected to produce them.

The rule

One word, one class - decided by test. Do not ask “what does this word mean?” Ask “what can this word do?” مَريضٌ (“ill”) feels like an adjective to an English speaker, but it takes tanwīn, takes الـ (المَريضُ) and can follow a preposition (عَنِ المَريضِ), so it is an اسْم. Meaning did not decide; behaviour did.

Test 1 - does it take الـ? Only an اسْم can. الكِتابُ، البَيْتُ، الجَديدُ، المَدْرَسَةُ are all nouns. A verb never takes الـ; a particle never takes الـ. If you can prefix the article, you have a noun and you can stop testing.

Test 2 - does it take tanwīn (ـٌ ـً ـٍ)? Only an اسْم can: كِتابٌ، وَلَدًا، بَيْتٍ. Tanwīn is the indefinite mark; verbs never carry it, and neither does any particle you will meet at this level. (Lesson 4 shows that a noun never carries الـ and tanwīn at the same time.)

Test 3 - can it follow a preposition? Whatever comes directly after مِنْ، في، عَلى، إِلى، عَنْ is an اسْم - or, later on, a whole clause standing in for one (lesson 34). في البَيْتِ، مِنَ المَدينَةِ، عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ. This test is the one that catches nouns which fail tests 1 and 2 - see the note on fixed words below.

الاسْم carries case. A noun in a fully vocalized text normally ends in one of three vowels, and that vowel tells you its job: ـُ for the doer, ـَ for the object, ـِ after a preposition. Arabic grammar calls this إِعْراب. English shows the same distinction only on pronouns (he / him), Arabic shows it on every noun.

الفِعْل carries tense and person, and its final vowel is mood, not case. كَتَبَ (“he wrote”) and يَكْتُبُ (“he writes”) are verbs: they say when and who. They refuse الـ and refuse tanwīn. The ـُ on يَكْتُبُ is real and you must print it, but it does not mean “nominative”. It is the default mood ending, and it changes to ـَ or to a sukūn when certain particles come in front of the verb - لَمْ يَكْتُبْ، أَنْ يَكْتُبَ. Those are lessons 33 and 40; here just register that a verb’s last vowel belongs to a different system.

الحَرْف is invariable and means nothing on its own. مِنْ، في، عَلى، إِلى، هَلْ، لا، وَ، أَنْ never take an ending of their own; the most they do is swap a final sukūn for a helping vowel when the next word opens with الـ (مِنَ البَيْتِ). Say مِنْ out loud and you have said nothing - “from” what? A particle only does its work when it is attached to something else. The class is a small closed list of a few dozen words, so you can genuinely learn it; اسْم and فِعْل are open classes with hundreds of thousands of members.

Parse a sentence, word by word. Take ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ (“the boy went to school”). Four words, three classes: ذَهَبَ is a فِعْل (tense and person, no الـ), الوَلَدُ is an اسْم (it has الـ) ending in ـُ because it is the doer, إِلى is a حَرْف (fixed, meaningless alone), and المَدْرَسَةِ is an اسْم ending in ـِ because it follows a preposition. Every Arabic sentence you will ever read decomposes exactly like this.

The case trio, on one noun. Keep the noun and change its job, and only the last vowel moves: ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ (he is the one going) - رَأَيْتُ الوَلَدَ (he is what I saw) - نَظَرْتُ إِلى الوَلَدِ (he comes after a preposition). Same three consonants, three different endings, three different jobs. That is the whole idea of إِعْراب in one line.

Recognise, do not produce. For now: when you read a vocalized text, notice the ending and let it tell you who did what. When you speak, you may stop before the ending - pausing on the bare word is what native speakers do at the end of a sentence anyway - that is the pausal form, in the pronunciation guide. The full system, with all its sub-markers, is lesson 40. Nothing between here and there asks you to case-mark spontaneously.

Adjectives, pronouns and demonstratives are all nouns. الجَديدُ (“the new one”) takes الـ and case -> اسْم. هُوَ، أَنا، أَنْتَ can stand as the subject and can follow a preposition (مِنْهُ) -> اسْم. هٰذا، هٰذِهِ point at things and behave like nouns -> اسْم. Time and place words such as اليَوْمَ، غَدًا، أَمامَ، تَحْتَ are nouns too, standing in the ـَ case (lesson 31). If you are tempted to invent a fourth class for any of these, resist: Arabic has three.

مَبْنِيّ: the words with a frozen ending. A مُعْرَب word changes its final vowel with its job (الكِتابُ / الكِتابَ / الكِتابِ). A مَبْنِيّ word is fixed - it keeps one shape everywhere. Every حَرْف is مَبْنِيّ, the past-tense verb is مَبْنِيّ (ذَهَبَ ends in ـَ in every sentence), and a small set of nouns is مَبْنِيّ too: the pronouns, the demonstratives, الَّذي. That is why هٰذا and هُوَ fail tests 1 and 2 and are still nouns - test 3 catches them.

And all of it is invisible in real text. Newspapers, novels and websites print almost no vowel marks: ذهب الولد إلى المدرسة. The endings are still grammatically there and an educated reader supplies them, but nothing on the page shows them. This path prints full تَشْكيل precisely so that you can see the grammar you are being taught; do not expect the outside world to be so generous (reading bare text is its own lesson in the pronunciation guide).

Forms & patterns

The three-way test. One “yes” in the first three rows settles the class immediately.

Testالاسْمالفِعْلالحَرْف
takes الـyes - الكِتابُnevernever
takes tanwīn ـٌ ـً ـٍyes - كِتابٌnevernever
follows a prepositionyes - في الكِتابِnevernever
shows tense and personnoyes - كَتَبَ / يَكْتُبُno
means something on its ownyesyesno
what its final vowel showscase (إِعْراب)moodnothing - it is fixed

A sentence parsed word by word: ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ.

WordClassWhyIts ending
ذَهَبَفِعْلpast tense, third person masculine singularـَ - fixed (a past verb is مَبْنِيّ)
الوَلَدُاسْمcarries الــُ - it is the doer
إِلىحَرْفfixed shape, no meaning alonenone - invariable
المَدْرَسَةِاسْمcarries الـ and follows a prepositionـِ - it follows إِلى

The case trio on one noun - recognition only; the full inventory is lesson 40.

EndingIndefiniteDefiniteTypical jobExample
ـُ / ـٌوَلَدٌالوَلَدُthe doer / subjectذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ.
ـَ / ـًوَلَدًاالوَلَدَthe objectرَأَيْتُ الوَلَدَ.
ـِ / ـٍوَلَدٍالوَلَدِafter a prepositionنَظَرْتُ إِلى الوَلَدِ.

The same three vowels on a verb are a different system. Do not read these as cases.

FormEndingWhere it turns up
يَكْتُبُـُthe plain, default form (lesson 14)
أَنْ يَكْتُبَـَafter أَنْ and لَنْ (lessons 33-39)
لَمْ يَكْتُبْsukūnafter لَمْ and in commands (lessons 35-41)

Fixed (مَبْنِيّ) or variable (مُعْرَب)?

WordClassBehaviour
الكِتابُاسْممُعْرَب - الكِتابُ / الكِتابَ / الكِتابِ
هٰذااسْممَبْنِيّ - one shape everywhere
هُوَاسْممَبْنِيّ
الَّذياسْممَبْنِيّ
ذَهَبَفِعْلمَبْنِيّ - its ending never reacts to the word’s job in the sentence
يَذْهَبُفِعْلمُعْرَب - but for mood, not case
فيحَرْفمَبْنِيّ - like every particle

The particles you already need. This is a closed list; a dozen of them carry most of your early reading. The prepositions are covered properly in lesson 16.

الحَرْفMeaningNote
مِنْfromthe noun after it takes ـِ
فيin, atفي البَيْتِ
عَلىonwritten with ى
إِلىto, towardsends in ى, opens with the hamza إِ
عَنْabout, away fromعَنِ الكِتابِ
بِـwith, by means ofjoined to its noun: بِالقَلَمِ
لِـfor, belonging tojoined to its noun: لِلْوَلَدِ
وَandjoined to the next word: وَالبِنْتُ
هَلْ(yes/no question)changes nothing else in the sentence; هَلِ البَيْتُ before الـ
لاno, notlesson 23
أَنْthat, tolesson 34
سَوْفَwilllesson 24

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ.The boy went to school.
رَأَيْتُ الوَلَدَ في المَدْرَسَةِ.I saw the boy at the school.
نَظَرْتُ إِلى الوَلَدِ.I looked at the boy.
يَكْتُبُ الطّالِبُ اليَوْمَ.The student is writing today.
قَرَأَ الوَلَدُ كِتابًا.The boy read a book.
الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ.The book is on the table.
المُعَلِّمُ في الغُرْفَةِ.The teacher is in the room.
هَلِ البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ؟Is the house big?
البَيْتُ الجَديدُ جَميلٌ.The new house is beautiful.
هٰذا بابٌ.This is a door.
الرِّسالَةُ مِنْهُ.The letter is from him.
الوَلَدُ وَالبِنْتُ في البَيْتِ.The boy and the girl are in the house.
سَأَلَ الطّالِبُ الأُسْتاذَ.The student asked the professor.
ذَهَبْتُ مِنَ البَيْتِ إِلى السّوقِ.I went from the house to the market.

Common mistakes

  • الطّالِبُ الْيَدْرُسُ -> الطّالِبُ يَدْرُسُ - a verb can never take الـ. To say “the student who studies” you need a relative clause (lesson 39), not an article glued to a verb.
  • يَكْتُبٌ -> يَكْتُبُ - tanwīn belongs to nouns only. No verb in Arabic ever ends in ـٌ ـً ـٍ.
  • لَمْ يَكْتُبُ -> لَمْ يَكْتُبْ - the last vowel of a verb is mood, not case, so a particle in front of it can cut it to a sukūn. A noun’s ending would never react to لَمْ.
  • ذَهَبَ الوَلَدَ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ. -> ذَهَبَ الوَلَدُ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ. - the doer takes ـُ. With ـَ you have said that someone went the boy, which is nonsense.
  • إِلى المَدْرَسَةُ -> إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ - whatever follows a preposition is a noun in the ـِ case. (A small class of nouns writes that same case with ـَ instead - إِلى مِصْرَ - but that is lesson 41; everything you meet now takes ـِ.)
  • مِنْ هٰذا الكِتابُ -> مِنْ هٰذا الكِتابِ - هٰذا is a noun, not a particle; it sits after مِنْ as a fixed (مَبْنِيّ) form, and the noun that follows still has to show the ـِ.
  • الرِّسالَةُ مِنْ هُوَ. -> الرِّسالَةُ مِنْهُ. - pronouns are nouns and can follow a preposition, but the attached form is used there, never the standalone one (lesson 7).
  • هَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبًا؟ -> هَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبٌ؟ - هَلْ is a حَرْف: it adds a question and touches no ending. The predicate of a nominal sentence stays as it was (lesson 2).
  • ذَهَبْتُ إِلى. -> ذَهَبْتُ إِلى المَدْرَسَةِ. - a particle cannot end a sentence, because it means nothing by itself. إِلى must be followed by its noun.

Tips

  • Run the الـ test first. It is one second of thought and it separates nouns from everything else faster than any other question.
  • Two vowels, two questions. On a noun the final vowel answers “what job?”; on a verb it answers “what mood?”. Never let a verb’s ـُ tempt you into calling it a subject.
  • Memory hook: name, act, glue. اسْم names a thing, فِعْل acts, حَرْف glues the other two together and does nothing on its own.
  • Learn the particles as vocabulary, not as grammar. There are only a few dozen and you meet the same twelve constantly; every other word you will ever meet is a noun or a verb.
  • Stop translating English word classes. “Adjective”, “pronoun”, “adverb” and “article” have no Arabic box of their own - filing them under اسْم removes about half of the confusion at A1.
  • Read case endings aloud when you read a vocalized text, and drop them when you speak spontaneously. Recognition now, production much later (lesson 40).
  • Do not panic about unvocalized text. The endings are invisible there, and word order plus context carry you; this path prints them so you can watch the machinery work.
  • When a sentence confuses you, parse it like the table above: class, then reason, then ending. Four columns and the fog usually lifts.

A1 4 / 70

Definite and indefinite: al-, sun letters, tanwin

أَداةُ التَّعْريفِ والنَّكِرَةُ والمَعْرِفَة

In short

English puts a small word in front of the noun: “a house”, “the house”. Arabic marks the same difference in two other places - at the very end of the noun and at its very front - with two signs that can never sit on the same word. The doubled vowel sign called tanwīn says the noun is indefinite: بَيْتٌ. The prefix الـ says it is definite: البَيْتُ. You choose one. Writing both, as in *الْبَيْتٌ, is one of the commonest beginner errors, and it is not a small slip: it is like writing “a the house”.

الـ is spelled identically in front of every noun, but it is not always heard the same way. In front of fourteen letters called حُروف شَمْسِيَّة the ل goes silent and the following consonant doubles instead - الشَّمْسُ. In front of the other fourteen, the حُروف قَمَرِيَّة, the ل is pronounced normally - القَمَرُ. On top of that, a whole family of nouns is already definite without الـ: names, pronouns, demonstratives, and anything carrying a possessive ending.

The rule

1. One noun, one mark. Definiteness is a two-way switch, and Arabic will not let you throw both levers at once:

  • indefinite: بَيْتٌ (a house), كِتابٌ (a book), مَدْرَسَةٌ (a school)
  • definite: البَيْتُ (the house), الكِتابُ (the book), المَدْرَسَةُ (the school)

Notice what happens to the ending. The indefinite noun ends in the doubled sign ـٌ; the definite noun ends in the single sign ـُ. Tanwīn is exactly the case vowel plus an ن sound that is heard but never written as a letter. So *الْبَيْتٌ and *الْكِتابًا are impossible: the moment الـ goes on the front, the ending loses its second stroke.

2. Tanwīn exists in all three cases. The lesson before this one introduced the three noun endings. Each of them has an indefinite twin, and the pairing is completely regular:

CaseIndefiniteDefinite
مَرْفوعبَيْتٌالبَيْتُ
مَنْصوببَيْتًاالبَيْتَ
مَجْروربَيْتٍالبَيْتِ

Do not think of tanwīn as “the ending for indefinite nouns” in the singular; think of it as the whole set ـٌ ـً ـٍ, each one carrying its case and the message “indefinite”. Which case a noun takes in a given sentence is decided by the sentence, not by this lesson.

3. الـ never changes its spelling. Whatever follows it - a sun letter, a moon letter, a hamza - you always write أَلِف + لام, joined to the noun with no space: البَيْتُ، الشَّمْسُ، الأُسْتاذُ. Arabic has no separate word for “the”, and no space is ever left after الـ.

4. Sun letters: the ل is written but not pronounced. Fourteen consonants swallow the ل of the article. When one of them follows الـ, the ل is not heard at all; instead the sun letter itself is doubled, and you mark that doubling with a shadda:

الشَّمْسُ، الرَّجُلُ، النّورُ، السَّلامُ، الطّالِبُ، الدَّرْسُ، الزَّيْتُ، الصَّديقُ

In fully vocalized writing the ل of a sun-letter article carries no sign at all - no vowel and no sukūn - because there is nothing there to pronounce. The shadda on the next letter is your instruction: hold that consonant twice as long.

5. Moon letters: the ل is pronounced. The other fourteen leave the article intact. Here the ل is heard and the following letter is single. Strict vocalization puts a sukūn on that ل - الْقَمَرُ - though most printing, this lesson’s lists included, leaves it unmarked:

القَمَرُ، الكِتابُ، البَيْتُ، المَدْرَسَةُ، الوَلَدُ، الجَبَلُ، العَيْنُ، الهاتِفُ

The two names come from the two example words themselves: شَمْس begins with a sun letter and قَمَر with a moon letter, so each word demonstrates its own class.

6. Why the split is not arbitrary. Every one of the fourteen sun letters is produced with the tip or the blade of the tongue against the teeth or the ridge behind them - the very same region where ل is made. A consonant made in the same place simply absorbs its neighbour. The moon letters are made elsewhere: on the lips, in the throat, at the back of the mouth. So your tongue will usually predict the class for you - but the classes were fixed on an older pronunciation, so check the list where you are unsure. ج is the trap: today it is made at the front of the mouth like a sun letter, yet it is lunar - الجَبَلُ, never *الجَّبَل. And note the neatest case of all: ل is itself a sun letter, so it doubles into itself - اللُّغَةُ، اللَّيْلُ، اللَّوْنُ.

7. هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل: the alif drops after a preceding word. The alif of الـ is a “connecting” alif (the pronunciation guide’s hamza lesson). It is pronounced only when the article opens the utterance. As soon as another word comes in front of it, the alif is not pronounced at all and the article leans directly on the last vowel of that word - the two run together as one breath:

  • قَرَأْتُ الْكِتابَ - the ending of قَرَأْتُ runs straight into the ل
  • ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى الْمَدْرَسَةِ
  • الوَلَدُ فِي الْبَيْتِ
  • خَرَجْتُ مِنَ الْبَيْتِ - مِنْ ends in a consonant, so it borrows a fatḥa to link up

That sukūn on the ل is there in either position; what changes mid-sentence is only the alif, which stops being pronounced - so الْ inside a sentence is read straight off the previous word’s vowel. The Qur’an and other sacred texts mark the silent alif with a waṣla, the head of a small ص written over it (ٱ); ordinary printing, including this lesson, leaves the alif bare. With a sun letter nothing extra is visible at all, because the ل had no sign to begin with: رَأَيْتُ الشَّمْسَ.

8. Writing tanwīn fatḥ. The accusative tanwīn is the only one that changes the spelling of the word: an extra alif is added as a seat for it, and that alif is silent.

  • كِتابًا، بَيْتًا، وَلَدًا، جَديدًا

Two positions are in use in print - over the last letter (كِتابًا) or over the added alif (كِتاباً). They are the same thing; write it the first way and read both. Three groups of words take no extra alif:

  • words ending in ة: مَدْرَسَةً، سَيّارَةً، كَلِمَةً
  • words ending in ء that already sits on a long alif: ماءً، سَماءً، دَواءً
  • words ending in ى: فَتًى، مَعْنًى، مَقْهًى

But a hamza that does not follow a long alif behaves like any other consonant and does take the seat: شَيْئًا، جُزْءًا، عِبْئًا.

9. Definite without الـ. Do not reach for الـ every time English says “the”. Several classes of word are inherently definite and reject the article:

  • proper names: مُحَمَّدٌ، فاطِمَةُ، مِصْرُ، لُبْنانُ - so *الْمُحَمَّد is wrong. (A number of place names do carry the article as part of the name itself: القاهِرَةُ، المَغْرِبُ، العِراقُ. Learn those as spelled.)
  • pronouns: هُوَ، هِيَ، أَنا، أَنْتَ (lesson 6)
  • demonstratives: هٰذا، هٰذِهِ، ذٰلِكَ (lesson 13)
  • nouns with a possessive ending: كِتابي، بَيْتُكَ، سَيّارَتُها (lesson 7) - “my book” is already the specific one, so *الْكِتابي is impossible
  • the first term of an إِضافَة: بابُ الْبَيْتِ، مِفْتاحُ السَّيّارَةِ (lesson 20) - the first word takes neither الـ nor tanwīn; it draws its definiteness from the second word, so بابُ بَيْتٍ is “a door of a house”

One honest wrinkle: a fully declinable proper name still shows tanwīn - مُحَمَّدٌ، خالِدٌ. There the tanwīn is only the ordinary full ending of the word; it is not saying “indefinite”, because a name points at one person by nature. This is the one place where tanwīn and definiteness coexist, and it costs you nothing at A1: just do not delete the tanwīn from names that have it.

10. Flag for later. A class of nouns called المَمْنوع مِنَ الصَّرْف never takes tanwīn at all, in any case: فاطِمَةُ، أَحْمَدُ، مَدارِسُ. Their endings work differently and lesson 41 handles them. For now, if a word you meet has no tanwīn where you expected one, suspect this group rather than a misprint.

Forms & patterns

The two marks side by side, with a feminine noun added so you can see that ة changes nothing about the system:

Caseنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعكِتابٌالكِتابُمَدْرَسَةٌالمَدْرَسَةُ
مَنْصوبكِتابًاالكِتابَمَدْرَسَةًالمَدْرَسَةَ
مَجْروركِتابٍالكِتابِمَدْرَسَةٍالمَدْرَسَةِ

The fourteen حُروف شَمْسِيَّة - the ل disappears and the letter doubles:

الحَرْفنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَةEnglish
تتِلْميذٌالتِّلْميذُpupil
ثثَوْبٌالثَّوْبُgarment
ددَرْسٌالدَّرْسُlesson
ذذَهَبٌالذَّهَبُgold
ررَجُلٌالرَّجُلُman
ززَيْتٌالزَّيْتُoil
سسَلامٌالسَّلامُpeace
ششَمْسٌالشَّمْسُsun
صصَديقٌالصَّديقُfriend
ضضَيْفٌالضَّيْفُguest
ططالِبٌالطّالِبُstudent
ظظُهْرٌالظُّهْرُnoon
للُغَةٌاللُّغَةُlanguage
ننورٌالنّورُlight

The fourteen حُروف قَمَرِيَّة - the ل keeps its sukūn and is pronounced:

الحَرْفنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَةEnglish
ء / اأَبٌالأَبُfather
ببَيْتٌالبَيْتُhouse
ججَبَلٌالجَبَلُmountain
ححَقيبَةٌالحَقيبَةُbag
خخُبْزٌالخُبْزُbread
ععَيْنٌالعَيْنُeye
غغُرْفَةٌالغُرْفَةُroom
ففِكْرَةٌالفِكْرَةُidea
ققَمَرٌالقَمَرُmoon
ككِتابٌالكِتابُbook
ممَدْرَسَةٌالمَدْرَسَةُschool
ههاتِفٌالهاتِفُtelephone
ووَلَدٌالوَلَدُboy
ييَدٌاليَدُhand

The article at the start of an utterance against the article inside one:

Standing aloneAfter another word
الكِتابُقَرَأْتُ الْكِتابَ
المَدْرَسَةُذَهَبْتُ إِلَى الْمَدْرَسَةِ
الأُسْتاذُسَأَلْتُ الْأُسْتاذَ
الشَّمْسُرَأَيْتُ الشَّمْسَ
النّافِذَةُفَتَحْتُ النّافِذَةَ

The accusative tanwīn and its seat:

Word ends inIndefinite مَنْصوبExtra alif?
a plain consonantبَيْتًا، وَلَدًا، كَبيرًاyes
ةمَدْرَسَةً، كَلِمَةًno
ء on a long alifماءً، سَماءًno
ىفَتًى، مَقْهًىno
ء elsewhereشَيْئًا، جُزْءًاyes

Examples

العربيةEnglish
هٰذا بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ.This is a big house.
البَيْتُ الجَديدُ قَريبٌ.The new house is nearby.
الشَّمْسُ حارَّةٌ اليَوْمَ.The sun is hot today.
القَمَرُ بَعيدٌ جِدًّا.The moon is very far away.
أَيْنَ الطّالِبُ الجَديدُ؟Where is the new student?
قَرَأْتُ الْكِتابَ أَمْسِ.I read the book yesterday.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ كِتابًا جَديدًا.I bought a new book.
شَرِبْتُ ماءً بارِدًا.I drank cold water.
مُحَمَّدٌ طالِبٌ مُجْتَهِدٌ.Muhammad is a hard-working student.
اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ جَميلَةٌ.The Arabic language is beautiful.
بابُ الْمَدْرَسَةِ مَفْتوحٌ.The school door is open.
هٰذا كِتابي، وذٰلِكَ كِتابُكَ.This is my book, and that is your book.
فِي الْغُرْفَةِ نافِذَةٌ صَغيرَةٌ.In the room there is a small window.
ذَهَبْنا إِلَى الْقاهِرَةِ فِي الصَّيْفِ.We went to Cairo in the summer.

Common mistakes

  • الْبَيْتٌ -> البَيْتُ (the house) or بَيْتٌ (a house) - a noun can never carry the article and tanwīn at the same time. Decide which one you mean.
  • هٰذا كِتابُ. -> هٰذا كِتابٌ. - an indefinite noun ends in the doubled sign, not a plain ḍamma. A single ـُ with no article means the word is definite by something else.
  • الْشَّمْسُ -> الشَّمْسُ - before a sun letter the ل takes no sukūn, because it is not pronounced. Only the shadda on the ش is written.
  • الشَمْسُ -> الشَّمْسُ - and do not leave the shadda out either; without it a reader has to guess, and a beginner will pronounce the ل.
  • القَّمَرُ -> القَمَرُ - moon letters never take the article’s ل into themselves, so they never carry a shadda from it. The ل stays audible and the ق stays single.
  • الْمُحَمَّدُ -> مُحَمَّدٌ - a personal name is definite in itself, so it refuses the article; and here the tanwīn is simply the word’s normal full ending.
  • الْكِتابي -> كِتابي - a possessive ending already makes the noun definite; الـ and a suffix cannot share one word.
  • الْبابُ الْبَيْتِ -> بابُ الْبَيْتِ - the first word of an إِضافَة takes neither الـ nor tanwīn, even when English says “the door of the house”.
  • كِتابً -> كِتابًا - the accusative tanwīn needs its silent alif seat.
  • مَدْرَسَةًا / ماءًا -> مَدْرَسَةً / ماءً - but never after ة، and never after a ء that already sits on a long alif.

Tips

  • Store every new noun in your memory with its tanwīn attached: بَيْتٌ، كِتابٌ، مَدْرَسَةٌ. If you learn it bare, you will later have to guess whether it is definite.
  • Say the sun-letter words out loud while watching the shadda. The shadda is not decoration - it is the pronunciation instruction, and hearing الرَّجُلُ with a long ر is the whole point.
  • Use the tongue test to cut the list down: if the consonant is made at the teeth or just behind them - where ل is made - it is solar. Lips, throat and back of the mouth are lunar. Learn ج by heart as the exception: it feels solar today, but it is lunar.
  • Remember that ل is solar itself. اللُّغَةُ is not an exception; it is the rule applied to the article’s own letter.
  • Stop looking for an Arabic word for “a”. Indefiniteness is a sound at the end of the noun, not a word at the front of it.
  • Before writing any noun, run the two-second check: does it begin with الـ? Then it cannot end in tanwīn - and vice versa.
  • Ignore for now which case a noun should be in. This lesson only asks you to pair the right definite form with the right indefinite one: البَيْتُ with بَيْتٌ، البَيْتَ with بَيْتًا.
  • In ordinary unvocalized text - the pronunciation guide’s own subject - الـ is still plain to see, but the tanwīn vanishes except for the alif of كتابا. Reading definiteness there is mostly reading the front of the word.

A1 5 / 70

Masculine and feminine

التَّذْكيرُ والتَّأْنيث

In short

Arabic sorts every noun and every adjective into one of two boxes, مُذَكَّر and مُؤَنَّث. There is no third box and no opting out. Nothing at all marks the masculine - it is just the bare word: وَلَدٌ، كِتابٌ، كَبيرٌ. The feminine is the marked member of the pair, and in the great majority of words the mark is a single letter sitting at the end, ة, called التّاءُ المَرْبوطَةُ. Put it on طالِبٌ and you have طالِبَةٌ; put it on كَبيرٌ and you have كَبيرَةٌ.

Two facts make this less mechanical than it sounds. A short list of very common nouns is feminine with no mark whatsoever - شَمْسٌ، أَرْضٌ، يَدٌ - and a shorter list of nouns ends in ة while being masculine - خَليفَةٌ، حَمْزَةُ. Both lists are vocabulary, not logic, and both are worth an hour of memorising now. Gender also refuses to stay put on the noun: it spreads to the adjective, the pronoun, the demonstrative and the verb, so one wrong guess about a noun surfaces as four wrong words in the sentence.

The rule

1. The masculine is unmarked. Do not look for a masculine ending, because there is none. A noun or adjective with no feminine marker is masculine unless it belongs to one of the memorised lists in point 4:

بَيْتٌ، كِتابٌ، قَلَمٌ، وَلَدٌ، بابٌ، طالِبٌ، كَبيرٌ، جَديدٌ، جَميلٌ

The tanwīn on the end of these words says “indefinite” (lesson 4). It says nothing about gender.

2. The feminine marker you will meet nine times out of ten is ة. It attaches to the bare masculine form and does not change anything before it:

  • طالِبٌ -> طالِبَةٌ، مُدَرِّسٌ -> مُدَرِّسَةٌ، مُهَنْدِسٌ -> مُهَنْدِسَةٌ، طَبيبٌ -> طَبيبَةٌ
  • كَبيرٌ -> كَبيرَةٌ، صَغيرٌ -> صَغيرَةٌ، جَديدٌ -> جَديدَةٌ، مُجْتَهِدٌ -> مُجْتَهِدَةٌ

Note the fatḥa on the letter in front of the ة: مُدَرِّسَةٌ, never *مُدَرِّسْةٌ. The vowel before a ة is always an a - either the short fatḥa, as here, or the long ā written with an alif: فَتاةٌ، حَياةٌ.

Careful, though: ة is not a switch you may flip on any noun to make a female version. With people and animals it usually does exactly that. Elsewhere it is simply part of the word, and the pair of words may not be related in meaning at all: مَكْتَبٌ is a desk or an office, while مَكْتَبَةٌ is a library. Both are ordinary nouns; only the second is grammatically feminine.

3. Two further feminine endings. They are much rarer than ة, but they are not exotic - you will meet them in your first month, in colours and in a few everyday nouns.

  • ـاء, called أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَمْدودَةُ: صَحْراءُ (desert), حَمْراءُ (red, feminine), بَيْضاءُ (white, feminine), خَضْراءُ (green, feminine).
  • ـى, called أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَقْصورَةُ: كُبْرى (biggest, feminine), صُغْرى (smallest, feminine), ذِكْرى (memory, anniversary), بُشْرى (good news), الدُّنْيا (the world - after a yāʾ this same ending is written with a plain alif; the pronunciation guide’s hamza lesson has the rule).

Two practical warnings. First, these words carry no tanwīn: you write صَحْراءُ and حَمْراءُ, not *صَحْراءٌ. Words ending in a feminine ـاء or ـى belong to a class that refuses tanwīn altogether; lesson 41 explains why, and until then simply do not write it. Second, not every ـاء is this ending. In ماءٌ (water) and سَماءٌ (sky) the ء is part of the root, so those words behave normally and do take tanwīn - and ماءٌ, in spite of its shape, is masculine.

4. The unmarked feminines: a list to memorise. These nouns carry no feminine marker and are feminine anyway. There is no rule behind most of them, and there are not many, so learn them as a block. They fall into four groups:

  • female beings: أُمٌّ، بِنْتٌ، أُخْتٌ, and women’s names with no ة - مَرْيَمُ، زَيْنَبُ، هِنْدُ، سُعادُ
  • a fixed set of everyday nouns: شَمْسٌ، نارٌ، أَرْضٌ، دارٌ، ريحٌ، حَرْبٌ، نَفْسٌ
  • body parts that come in pairs: يَدٌ، عَيْنٌ، رِجْلٌ، أُذُنٌ، قَدَمٌ، سِنٌّ. This is a strong tendency rather than a law, and it still pays for itself: most paired organs are feminine, and the single ones are masculine - أَنْفٌ، رَأْسٌ، فَمٌ، لِسانٌ، قَلْبٌ. The exceptions to note are حاجِبٌ (eyebrow) and مِرْفَقٌ (elbow), which come in pairs and are masculine anyway.
  • names of countries and cities: مِصْرُ، دِمَشْقُ، بَغْدادُ، القاهِرَةُ، بَيْروتُ. City names are reliably feminine. A few country names go the other way and are treated as masculine - العِراقُ، السّودانُ، المَغْرِبُ، لُبْنانُ - so learn a country’s gender with its name.

5. The reverse trap: masculine nouns that end in ة. A ة on the end is strong evidence of feminine gender, not proof of it. Two groups end in ة while referring to men, and they take masculine agreement throughout:

  • titles and intensive descriptions: خَليفَةٌ (caliph), عَلّامَةٌ (great scholar), رَحّالَةٌ (great traveller). The ة here is an old intensifier - it makes the description stronger, not female.
  • men’s given names: حَمْزَةُ، أُسامَةُ، طَلْحَةُ، مُعاوِيَةُ. These are men, so everything that agrees with them is masculine: حَمْزَةُ كَريمٌ, never *حَمْزَةُ كَريمَةٌ.

The lesson to take from points 4 and 5 together: gender is a property of the word, and the ending is a very good clue to it, not a definition of it. When the two disagree, meaning wins.

6. Gender surfaces in four places. The noun by itself rarely gives you trouble. What gives you trouble is everything that has to match it:

  • the adjective follows its noun and copies its gender: وَلَدٌ صَغيرٌ / بِنْتٌ صَغيرَةٌ، بَيْتٌ جَديدٌ / سَيّارَةٌ جَديدَةٌ. Full details in lesson 8.
  • the pronoun: هُوَ for a masculine noun, هِيَ for a feminine one - and this holds for objects too, so a book is هُوَ and a car is هِيَ. Lesson 6.
  • the demonstrative: هٰذا كِتابٌ / هٰذِهِ مَدْرَسَةٌ. Lesson 13.
  • the verb: the present-tense prefix changes, يَكْتُبُ for he and تَكْتُبُ for she - الوَلَدُ يَقْرَأُ / البِنْتُ تَقْرَأُ. Lessons 14 and 23.

This is why the memorised lists matter so much. Getting شَمْسٌ wrong is not one mistake; it is a mistake repeated in every adjective, pronoun and verb that points back at it.

7. How ة is pronounced. The letter is a ه wearing the two dots of a ت, and it behaves like both, depending on what follows it.

  • In pause - when the word ends the utterance and you drop the case ending, which is what people actually do in speech, and what the pronunciation guide calls the pausal form - the ت is not heard at all. You hear only the fatḥa in front of it: مَدينَة.
  • With a case ending or a tanwīn on it, the ت is fully pronounced, and the ending follows it: مَدينَةٌ، مَدينَةً، مَدينَةٍ. This is one reason the vowel marks in this path are printed on every word - they are the only thing that tells you whether the ت is spoken.
  • Before an attached pronoun, the ة is rewritten as a plain ت and pronounced: سَيّارَةٌ becomes سَيّارَتي; مَدينَةٌ becomes مَدينَتُهُ. Lesson 7.
  • As the first term of an إِضافَة, the ت is always pronounced, even at a pause, because the word is not finished: مَدينَةُ القاهِرَةِ، سَيّارَةُ المُدَرِّسِ، غُرْفَةُ الطَّعامِ. This is the classic giveaway that a speaker has understood the construction (lesson 20).

8. Writing ة correctly. It is always word-final; it never begins or sits inside a word, and it never joins to a following letter. The two dots are obligatory: مَدْرَسَةٌ is a school, مَدْرَسَه is nothing. Leaving the dots off is a widespread habit in casual typing and an outright error in written Arabic, so form the habit now. Note also that the accusative tanwīn on a ة takes no extra alif: مَدينَةً, not *مَدينَةًا (lesson 4).

9. Flagged, not taught: plurals. Everything above is about the singular. Arabic plurals do something that will look bizarre from here - the plural of a non-human noun is treated as feminine singular, so الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ is correct for “the books are new”, with a feminine adjective on a masculine noun. Do not try to reason it out now, and do not let it shake the singular rules. Lessons 9 to 15 build it up properly.

Forms & patterns

The three feminine endings, each against its masculine partner:

العَلامَةمُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثEnglish
ةطالِبٌطالِبَةٌstudent
ةكَبيرٌكَبيرَةٌbig
ـاءأَحْمَرُحَمْراءُred
ـاءأَبْيَضُبَيْضاءُwhite
ـىأَكْبَرُكُبْرىbiggest
ـىأَصْغَرُصُغْرىsmallest

Ordinary pairs built with ة - nouns for people, then adjectives:

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثEnglish
مُدَرِّسٌمُدَرِّسَةٌteacher
مُهَنْدِسٌمُهَنْدِسَةٌengineer
طَبيبٌطَبيبَةٌdoctor
صَديقٌصَديقَةٌfriend
جَديدٌجَديدَةٌnew
صَغيرٌصَغيرَةٌsmall
جَميلٌجَميلَةٌbeautiful
مُجْتَهِدٌمُجْتَهِدَةٌhard-working

A few pairs use two unrelated words instead of an ending:

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثEnglish
رَجُلٌاِمْرَأَةٌman / woman
أَبٌأُمٌّfather / mother
اِبْنٌبِنْتٌson / daughter
أَخٌأُخْتٌbrother / sister

Feminine without any marker - the list to memorise:

الاسْمEnglishWhy
أُمٌّmotherfemale being
بِنْتٌgirl, daughterfemale being
أُخْتٌsisterfemale being
مَرْيَمُ، زَيْنَبُ، هِنْدُwomen’s namesfemale being
شَمْسٌsunby convention
نارٌfireby convention
أَرْضٌearth, groundby convention
دارٌhouse, dwellingby convention
ريحٌwindby convention
حَرْبٌwarby convention
نَفْسٌsoul, selfby convention
يَدٌhandpaired body part
عَيْنٌeyepaired body part
رِجْلٌleg, footpaired body part
أُذُنٌearpaired body part
قَدَمٌfootpaired body part
سِنٌّtoothpaired body part
مِصْرُ، دِمَشْقُ، القاهِرَةُcountries, citiesplace name

Masculine in spite of the ة:

الاسْمEnglish
خَليفَةٌcaliph
عَلّامَةٌgreat scholar
رَحّالَةٌgreat traveller
حَمْزَةُHamza (man’s name)
أُسامَةُUsama (man’s name)
طَلْحَةُTalha (man’s name)

Where the gender becomes visible:

It shows onمُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّث
the adjectiveوَلَدٌ صَغيرٌبِنْتٌ صَغيرَةٌ
the pronounهُوَ طالِبٌهِيَ طالِبَةٌ
the demonstrativeهٰذا كِتابٌهٰذِهِ مَدْرَسَةٌ
the verbالوَلَدُ يَقْرَأُالبِنْتُ تَقْرَأُ

The ة and its four environments:

EnvironmentExampleIs the ت heard?
in pause, ending droppedمَدينَةno
with a case endingمَدينَةٌ، مَدينَةً، مَدينَةٍyes
before an attached pronoun (written ت)مَدينَتُهُyes
first term of an إِضافَةمَدينَةُ القاهِرَةِyes, always

Examples

العربيةEnglish
مُحَمَّدٌ طالِبٌ، وَفاطِمَةُ طالِبَةٌ.Muhammad is a student, and Fatima is a student.
هٰذِهِ بِنْتٌ جَميلَةٌ.This is a beautiful girl.
الشَّمْسُ ساطِعَةٌ اليَوْمَ.The sun is bright today.
هٰذِهِ يَدٌ صَغيرَةٌ.This is a small hand.
الأَرْضُ جافَّةٌ في الصَّيْفِ.The ground is dry in summer.
ريحٌ بارِدَةٌ تَهُبُّ مِنَ الشَّمالِ.A cold wind is blowing from the north.
مِصْرُ جَميلَةٌ، وَالقاهِرَةُ كَبيرَةٌ.Egypt is beautiful, and Cairo is big.
عُمَرُ خَليفَةٌ عادِلٌ.Umar is a just caliph.
حَمْزَةُ رَجُلٌ شُجاعٌ.Hamza is a brave man.
الصَّحْراءُ واسِعَةٌ جِدًّا.The desert is very vast.
هٰذِهِ سَيّارَةٌ حَمْراءُ.This is a red car.
هُوَ مُدَرِّسٌ وَهِيَ مُدَرِّسَةٌ.He is a teacher and she is a teacher.
الوَلَدُ يَكْتُبُ وَالبِنْتُ تَكْتُبُ.The boy is writing and the girl is writing.
مَدينَةُ القاهِرَةِ قَديمَةٌ.The city of Cairo is old.

Common mistakes

  • بِنْتٌ جَميلٌ -> بِنْتٌ جَميلَةٌ - the noun carries no ة, but it is feminine, and the adjective must show that. Never let the shape of the noun decide the adjective for you.
  • الشَّمْسُ حارٌّ -> الشَّمْسُ حارَّةٌ - شَمْسٌ heads the memorised list of unmarked feminines. The same goes for أَرْضٌ، نارٌ، ريحٌ، حَرْبٌ.
  • هٰذا بِنْتٌ -> هٰذِهِ بِنْتٌ - the demonstrative agrees just as the adjective does, so an unmarked feminine noun still takes هٰذِهِ.
  • الخَليفَةُ العادِلَةُ (of a man) -> الخَليفَةُ العادِلُ - خَليفَةٌ ends in ة and is masculine. The ة on it is an intensifier, not a gender mark.
  • أُسامَةُ ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى السّوقِ -> أُسامَةُ ذَهَبَ إِلَى السّوقِ - a man’s name in ة takes a masculine verb. Meaning outranks spelling every time.
  • مَدْرَسَه -> مَدْرَسَةٌ - write the two dots. ة and ه are different letters, and dropping the dots turns a school into nothing at all.
  • صَحْراءٌ واسِعَةٌ -> صَحْراءُ واسِعَةٌ - a word ending in the feminine ـاء takes no tanwīn. The single ḍamma is its full and correct ending.
  • كُبْرًى -> كُبْرى - the same applies to the feminine ـى: no tanwīn, and nothing is written above the alif maqṣūra.
  • مِصْرُ جَميلٌ -> مِصْرُ جَميلَةٌ - city names, and most country names, are feminine, however masculine the word looks.
  • مَدينَه القاهِرَةِ -> مَدينَةُ القاهِرَةِ - in an إِضافَة the first word is not at a pause, so its ة is written properly and its ت is pronounced, followed by the case ending.

Tips

  • Never store a noun on its own. Store it with a matching adjective - شَمْسٌ حارَّةٌ، بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ - and the gender comes back with the word instead of being guessed at.
  • The exception list is genuinely short. Fifteen or so unmarked feminines and half a dozen masculines in ة cover almost everything you will meet before B1. Spend one sitting on them.
  • Use the body rule as a real shortcut: if the organ comes in a pair it is feminine, if there is only one of it, it is masculine. It works often enough to be worth trusting.
  • When you meet a new word ending in ة, ask what it refers to before you assume. A person? Then the ة almost certainly marks a woman. A man, or a title of a man? Then it does not.
  • Say every ة word twice out loud: once in pause and once with its ending. That single habit builds the reflex you need for the إِضافَة later.
  • If a dictionary entry looks masculine but a text keeps giving it feminine adjectives, believe the text - you have found one of the unmarked feminines.
  • Ignore plurals completely for now, including anything you notice about feminine adjectives on plural objects. That belongs to lessons 9 to 15 and will only muddle the singular.
  • Do not hunt for logic in شَمْسٌ or حَرْبٌ. Gender assignment for non-living things is history, not meaning, and a learner’s time is better spent on the list than on the reason.

A1 6 / 70

Independent personal pronouns

الضَّمائِرُ المُنْفَصِلَة

In short

English has one word for “you” and one for “they”. Arabic has five of the first and three of the second. The independent personal pronouns - الضَّمائِرُ المُنْفَصِلَةُ - sort every person by gender and by number, and Arabic counts in three numbers, not two: one, exactly two, and three or more. That gives twelve words where English gets by with seven, and all twelve have to be learned, because the choice is not a matter of style or politeness. Saying أَنْتَ to a woman is not formal or old-fashioned; it is simply wrong, the way “she is my brother” is wrong.

The consolation is that this is the easiest paradigm in the language. These twelve words never change their shape: no case endings, no tanwīn, no plural of a plural. Learn them once and they are done. Better still, the endings you meet here - ـتَ against ـتِ، ـمْ against ـنَّ، ـما for two

  • are the same signals that will come back on the attached pronouns of lesson 7 and on every verb you ever conjugate. This is the paradigm that teaches you the shape of all the others.

The rule

1. “Independent” means it is a word of its own. Arabic keeps two families of pronouns. A ضَميرٌ مُنْفَصِلٌ stands alone with a space on each side, like any other word: هُوَ طالِبٌ. A ضَميرٌ مُتَّصِلٌ is glued onto the end of another word and cannot be said by itself: the ـي of كِتابي “my book”, the ـكَ of بَيْتُكَ “your house”. Those are lesson 7. This lesson is the free family only - the pronouns you use to start a sentence.

2. Three persons, three numbers, two genders - but the grid is not full. Three persons times three numbers times two genders would be eighteen cells. Arabic fills twelve of them, and the gaps are worth knowing in advance:

  • the first person makes no gender distinction at all - أَنا is said by a man and by a woman;
  • the first person has no dual - two speakers use نَحْنُ, exactly as thirty would;
  • the two duals, أَنْتُما and هُما, each cover both genders.

So gender only ever matters in the second and third persons, and only outside the dual.

3. The first person: أَنا and نَحْنُ. أَنا is “I”, نَحْنُ is “we”. Nothing about the speaker’s gender is visible in either, which is why a written أَنا مُتْعَبٌ tells you the speaker is male - not from the pronoun, but from the adjective at the other end of the sentence.

4. The second person: five forms. أَنْتَ to one man, أَنْتِ to one woman, أَنْتُما to any two people, أَنْتُمْ to three or more men (or to a mixed group), أَنْتُنَّ to three or more women. A group of women plus a single man is أَنْتُمْ: in Arabic the masculine plural is the default for mixed company. The choice is by gender and number only, not by politeness: there is no ordinary “polite you” the way French has vous, and أَنْتَ or أَنْتِ is what you say to one person whatever their rank. Very formal correspondence does address a single official in the plural, but it does so through a courtesy noun - سِيادَتُكُمْ، سَعادَتُكُمْ - rather than by putting أَنْتُمْ in front of one person in ordinary prose.

5. The third person: five forms, and no word for “it”. هُوَ، هِيَ، هُما، هُمْ، هُنَّ line up exactly like the second person. English “it” has no equivalent, because Arabic has no neuter: a thing is referred to by the gender its noun happens to have (lesson 5). الْكِتابُ is masculine, so a book is هُوَ; السَّيّارَةُ is feminine, so a car is هِيَ. And one rule you will meet properly in lesson 11: a plural of non-human things is referred to with the feminine singular هِيَ, not with هُمْ. Books, on their own, are هِيَ.

6. أَنْتَ and أَنْتِ differ by a single ḥaraka. The masculine ends in fatḥa, the feminine in kasra. Nothing else about the word changes - the consonants are the same three letters أ، ن، ت in both. In ordinary Arabic writing, where the vowel marks are not printed, the two are therefore the same word on the page, and only the context tells you which one is meant. Usually the rest of the sentence gives it away, because the predicate agrees: the reading “you are a teacher” is settled by مُدَرِّسٌ or مُدَرِّسَةٌ standing after it. In speech there is no ambiguity at all - you hear the ending. The same one-vowel contrast runs through the whole language: ـكَ against ـكِ on nouns (lesson 7), ـتَ against ـتِ on past-tense verbs (lesson 18). Wherever that pair turns up in the second person singular, fatḥa is the masculine and kasra the feminine - which is a rule about this one slot, not about the two vowels in general.

7. Pronouns are مَبْنِيَّةٌ: their ending is frozen. Lesson 3 sorted words into those whose final vowel changes with the job they do in the sentence (مُعْرَبٌ) and those whose ending is fixed for life (مَبْنِيٌّ). Every pronoun belongs to the second group. هُوَ is هُوَ whether it is the subject of the sentence, part of the predicate, or standing alone as an answer. Two practical consequences: never put tanwīn on a pronoun, and never “change the case” of one. Where an English speaker expects a shift from “he” to “him”, Arabic switches to a different family of pronouns altogether (lessons 7 and 34), rather than re-inflecting هُوَ.

8. Two points of spelling and linking. First, أَنا ends in a written alif that is normally not read as a long vowel: in the flow of speech the word is two light syllables and the alif is a spelling convention only. (Only in pause, at a full stop, is that final vowel drawn out - the pausal form, which the pronunciation guide covers.) Note also that it opens with هَمْزَةُ القَطْعِ, so the first letter must be written أ, never a bare alif. Second, أَنْتُمْ and هُمْ end in a sukūn, and a sukūn cannot be followed by the sukūn of the article’s ل. When one of these two pronouns is followed directly by a word with الـ - or by any other word opening with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ - the م takes a ḍamma to bridge the gap: هُمُ الْمُدَرِّسونَ، أَنْتُمُ الْفائِزونَ. This is pronunciation, not a change of form - the pronoun is still هُمْ.

9. The main use: a pronoun as المُبْتَدَأ. Lesson 2 built the nominal sentence out of a definite first half and an indefinite second half. A pronoun is inherently definite (lesson 4 listed it among the words that refuse الـ), so it drops straight into the first slot:

  • أَنا طالِبٌ. - “I am a student.”
  • هِيَ مُدَرِّسَةٌ. - “She is a teacher.”
  • نَحْنُ مِنْ مِصْرَ. - “We are from Egypt.”
  • هُمْ عَرَبٌ. - “They are Arabs.”

There is still no verb “to be” anywhere in these sentences; the English “am/is/are” corresponds to the silence after the pronoun. The predicate agrees with the pronoun in gender and number, so أَنْتِ selects مُدَرِّسَةٌ and هُمْ selects a masculine plural. In نَحْنُ مِنْ مِصْرَ the predicate is a preposition plus a noun rather than a single word - lesson 17 comes back to that type - and مِصْرَ ends in a fatḥa where you would expect a kasra after مِنْ, because it belongs to a class of nouns that decline differently. Take that on trust until lesson 41; the same is true of لُبْنانَ، بَيْروتَ، أَحْمَدَ.

10. ضَميرُ الفَصْلِ: the pronoun that keeps a sentence a sentence. Lesson 2’s rule was that definite + indefinite makes a statement, while definite + definite makes a phrase. So what do you do when the predicate really is definite - when you want to say not “Muhammad is a manager” but “Muhammad is the manager”? Put مُحَمَّدٌ الْمُديرُ on the page and it reads as a label, “Muhammad the manager”. Arabic solves this by dropping a third-person pronoun between the two halves:

  • مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ الْمُديرُ. - “Muhammad is the manager.”
  • فاطِمَةُ هِيَ الْمُديرَةُ. - “Fatima is the manager.”
  • الطُّلّابُ هُمُ الْفائِزونَ. - “The students are the winners.”

That pronoun is called ضَميرُ الفَصْلِ, “the pronoun of separation”. It agrees with the first half in gender and number, it carries no case ending of its own, and it adds a shade of exclusivity - Muhammad and no one else. It is not a copula. Its job is to stop a definite predicate from being read as an attribute, so it belongs between two definite halves and nowhere else at this level. With an ordinary indefinite predicate there is nothing to disambiguate and it is left out: الْبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ stays as it is, and الْبَيْتُ هُوَ كَبيرٌ is not how the sentence is said.

11. With a verb, the pronoun usually disappears. This lesson is about nominal sentences, but a word of warning for the ones ahead. An Arabic verb already spells out its own subject in its prefixes and suffixes: كَتَبْتُ can only mean “I wrote”, كَتَبوا can only mean “they wrote”. The pronoun is therefore left out unless you want emphasis or contrast - أَنا كَتَبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ, “I wrote the letter (not him)”. Beginners coming from English attach a pronoun to every verb out of habit, and it makes the Arabic sound insistent and odd. Lessons 14 and 22 build the verb paradigms; keep the pronouns for nominal sentences and for emphasis.

12. What this lesson deliberately leaves out. Two further sets of pronouns exist. The attached possessive endings ـي، ـكَ، ـهُ and their relatives are lesson 7. A second independent set, built on إِيّا (إِيّايَ، إِيّاكَ، إِيّاهُ), exists for object position when nothing else can carry the pronoun; it is rare in modern prose and belongs with the direct object in lesson 29. Until then, treat the twelve words below as the whole story.

Forms & patterns

The full set, arranged the way Arabic grammars arrange it - by person down the side, by number across the top. Learn the grid as a shape, not as a list:

الشَّخْصُالمُفْرَدُالمُثَنّىالجَمْعُ
المُتَكَلِّمُ (both genders)أَنانَحْنُنَحْنُ
المُخاطَبُ المُذَكَّرُأَنْتَأَنْتُماأَنْتُمْ
المُخاطَبَةُ المُؤَنَّثَةُأَنْتِأَنْتُماأَنْتُنَّ
الغائِبُ المُذَكَّرُهُوَهُماهُمْ
الغائِبَةُ المُؤَنَّثَةُهِيَهُماهُنَّ

Counting distinct words rather than cells, that is twelve: أَنا، نَحْنُ، أَنْتَ، أَنْتِ، أَنْتُما، أَنْتُمْ، أَنْتُنَّ، هُوَ، هِيَ، هُما، هُمْ، هُنَّ.

The same twelve against their English coverage, which is where the mismatch shows:

الضَّميرRefers toEnglish
أَناone speaker, any genderI
نَحْنُtwo or more speakerswe
أَنْتَone manyou
أَنْتِone womanyou
أَنْتُماtwo people, any genderyou (two)
أَنْتُمْthree or more, men or mixedyou (all)
أَنْتُنَّthree or more womenyou (all)
هُوَone male, or one masculine thinghe, it
هِيَone female, one feminine thing, or non-human pluralsshe, it, they
هُماtwo of anything, any genderthey (two)
هُمْthree or more, men or mixedthey
هُنَّthree or more womenthey

The two forms that are identical on paper without vowel marks, and the predicate that resolves them:

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّث
أَنْتَ مُدَرِّسٌ.أَنْتِ مُدَرِّسَةٌ.
أَنْتَ مِصْرِيٌّ.أَنْتِ مِصْرِيَّةٌ.
أَنْتَ مَشْغولٌ.أَنْتِ مَشْغولَةٌ.

And the endings themselves, which are worth seeing stripped of everything else, because they recur across the whole language:

SignalMeaningSeen in
ـَmasculine singular addresseeأَنْتَ
ـِfeminine singular addresseeأَنْتِ
ـماdual, gender-neutralأَنْتُما، هُما
ـمْmasculine pluralأَنْتُمْ، هُمْ
ـنَّfeminine pluralأَنْتُنَّ، هُنَّ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَنا طالِبٌ فِي الْجامِعَةِ.I am a student at the university.
أَنا مُدَرِّسَةٌ جَديدَةٌ.I am a new teacher.
نَحْنُ مِنْ مِصْرَ.We are from Egypt.
أَنْتَ طَبيبٌ مَشْهورٌ.You are a famous doctor.
أَنْتِ طَبيبَةٌ مَشْهورَةٌ.You are a famous doctor.
أَنْتُما طالِبانِ مُجْتَهِدانِ.You two are hard-working students.
أَنْتُمْ مُوَظَّفونَ فِي الشَّرِكَةِ.You are employees at the company.
أَنْتُنَّ مُدَرِّساتٌ فِي الْمَدْرَسَةِ.You are teachers at the school.
هُوَ رَجُلٌ كَريمٌ.He is a generous man.
هِيَ مِنْ لُبْنانَ.She is from Lebanon.
هُما مُهَنْدِسانِ.They two are engineers.
هُمْ عَرَبٌ.They are Arabs.
هُنَّ فِي الْبَيْتِ الآنَ.They are at home now.
مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ الْمُديرُ.Muhammad is the manager.

Common mistakes

  • انا طالِبٌ. -> أَنا طالِبٌ. - the word opens with هَمْزَةُ القَطْعِ, so the alif must carry its hamza. A bare alif here is a spelling error, not a shortcut.
  • أَنْتَ مُدَرِّسَةٌ. -> أَنْتِ مُدَرِّسَةٌ. - أَنْتَ is masculine only. Addressing a woman with it is an error of grammar, not of register, and the mismatched predicate makes it obvious.
  • هُمْ طالِبانِ. -> هُما طالِبانِ. - for exactly two, Arabic has its own number. هُمْ starts at three. The dual is compulsory, never a stylistic option.
  • هُنَّ مُدَرِّسَتانِ. -> هُما مُدَرِّسَتانِ. - the same trap on the feminine side: two women are هُما, because both duals are gender-neutral.
  • نَحْنانِ مِنَ الْمَغْرِبِ. -> نَحْنُ مِنَ الْمَغْرِبِ. - there is no first-person dual to build. Two speakers say نَحْنُ.
  • أَنْتُنَّ مُوَظَّفونَ. -> أَنْتُمْ مُوَظَّفونَ. - أَنْتُنَّ is for a group of women only. One man in the room and the whole group is addressed with the masculine plural.
  • الْبَيْتُ هُوَ كَبيرٌ. -> الْبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - هُوَ is not the verb “is”. The separating pronoun appears only when the predicate is definite; with an indefinite predicate the two halves sit side by side in silence.
  • مُحَمَّدٌ الْمُديرُ. (meaning “Muhammad is the manager”) -> مُحَمَّدٌ هُوَ الْمُديرُ. - two definite halves with nothing between them read as a phrase, “Muhammad the manager”. Insert the pronoun to make it a statement.
  • هُوٌ طالِبٌ. -> هُوَ طالِبٌ. - pronouns are مَبْنِيَّةٌ: no tanwīn, ever, and no case ending to adjust. Only the noun after it declines.
  • الْمَكْتَبُ كَبيرٌ، وهِيَ جَديدَةٌ. -> الْمَكْتَبُ كَبيرٌ، وهُوَ جَديدٌ. - do not reach for هِيَ because English said “it”. The pronoun follows the gender of the Arabic noun, and مَكْتَبٌ is masculine.

Tips

  • Chant the twelve in this fixed order: أَنا، نَحْنُ / أَنْتَ، أَنْتِ، أَنْتُما، أَنْتُمْ، أَنْتُنَّ / هُوَ، هِيَ، هُما، هُمْ، هُنَّ. It is the order the paradigm tables in these lessons use, so the effort is repaid at lesson 14 and again at lesson 18. (Arabic grammars of the traditional kind run the other way round, from الغائِب to المُتَكَلِّم, so do not be thrown when a table you meet elsewhere starts at هُوَ.)
  • Learn the five endings rather than twelve separate words: ـما means two, ـمْ means many men, ـنَّ means many women. Those three signals cover six of the twelve forms.
  • Fix fatḥa = masculine, kasra = feminine in your ear now. That single pair decides أَنْتَ against أَنْتِ here, ـكَ against ـكِ in lesson 7, and ـتَ against ـتِ in lesson 18.
  • Whenever you meet a new noun, decide immediately whether it is a هُوَ or a هِيَ. Storing the gender with the word costs nothing now and saves every later agreement.
  • Practise with real pairs of people around you. The dual feels artificial until you have said هُما once about two actual friends; after that it stops being a grammar item.
  • Do not look for a word meaning “it”, and do not look for a polite “you” for everyday use. Neither exists as a pronoun of its own, and hunting for them produces sentences no Arab writes.
  • Ignore for now the إِيّا pronouns and everything about pronoun objects. In this lesson a pronoun only ever stands at the front of a nominal sentence, or between its two halves.
  • When reading unvocalized text, do not stop at أ ن ت wondering which “you” it is - read on. The adjective or noun after it almost always settles the question.

A1 7 / 70

Attached pronouns: my, your, his

الضَّمائِرُ المُتَّصِلَةُ بِالأَسْماء

In short

English owns things with a separate little word in front: “my book”, “her car”. Arabic owns them with an ending glued to the back of the noun: كِتابي، سَيّارَتُها. There is no space, no apostrophe and no extra word - the pronoun becomes part of the noun, and the noun grows a syllable or two. The previous lesson gave you the free-standing pronouns أَنا، أَنْتَ، هُوَ; this lesson gives you their attached twins, which are the forms you will actually write most of the time.

Two consequences follow immediately, and they are what makes this lesson worth reading twice. First, a noun carrying one of these endings is already definite - “my book” is a particular book - so it refuses الـ and it refuses tanwīn. Second, the very same endings attach to prepositions: لَهُ، مِنْهُ، عَلَيْها، مَعَنا. Learn the set once and you have covered nouns and prepositions together, with only small, predictable adjustments at the seam.

The rule

1. Twelve endings, one set. Arabic has an attached pronoun for every person that the independent pronouns cover: ـي، ـكَ، ـكِ، ـهُ، ـها، ـنا، ـكُما، ـكُمْ، ـكُنَّ، ـهُما، ـهُمْ، ـهُنَّ. They are written joined to the host word, never separated by a space, and the host keeps its own vowelling in front of them: كِتابُكَ is one word of four syllables. Notice the internal logic - ك means “you” throughout, ه means “he / she / they”, ن means “us”, ي means “me”. Everything after that first consonant is just the number-and-gender tail you already met on the independent pronouns.

2. ـي swallows the case ending. Eleven of the twelve endings sit on top of the noun’s normal final vowel: كِتابُ + كَ = كِتابُكَ, with the ḍamma still audible. The first-person ـي is different. It takes the last consonant of the noun for itself, and the case ending disappears underneath it:

  • كِتابٌ / الكِتابُ → كِتابي - never *كِتابُي، never *كِتابٌي
  • بَيْتٌ → بَيْتي، صَديقٌ → صَديقي، اِسْمٌ → اِسْمي

The result is invariable. Whatever the sentence does with the word, “my book” stays كِتابي: كِتابي جَديدٌ (subject), قَرَأْتُ كِتابي (object), فِي كِتابي (after a preposition). That is one form to learn instead of three, so the most useful ending in the language is also the easiest.

3. A suffixed noun is definite - no الـ, no tanwīn. This is the rule beginners break most often. The ending points at a specific owner, which makes the noun specific, so the two ordinary markers of definiteness and indefiniteness are both blocked:

  • الكِتابي is impossible - the article and the suffix cannot share a word
  • كِتابٌي and كِتابًكَ are impossible - tanwīn cannot survive a suffix

An adjective describing such a noun must agree in definiteness, and since the noun is definite the adjective takes الـ: كِتابي الجَديدُ “my new book”, سَيّارَتُها الحَمْراءُ “her red car”. Drop that article and you have changed a phrase into a sentence: كِتابي جَديدٌ means “my book is new”. Both are correct Arabic; only one of them is what you meant. (Definiteness itself is lesson 4; adjectives are lesson 8.)

If you really do want an indefinite “a book of mine”, Arabic does not use a suffix on the noun at all - it says كِتابٌ لي, keeping the tanwīn and putting the pronoun on a preposition instead.

4. ة becomes ت. The tied tāʾ marbūṭa exists only at the very end of a word. The moment anything is added behind it, it unties into an ordinary ت and takes the case vowel normally:

  • سَيّارَةٌ → سَيّارَتي، سَيّارَتُكَ، سَيّارَتُها
  • مُعَلِّمَةٌ → مُعَلِّمَتُهُ، غُرْفَةٌ → غُرْفَتُنا، مَدْرَسَةٌ → مَدْرَسَتُهُمْ

Write *سَيّارَةي and you have written a letter that cannot occur in that position. This same untying will come back in the إِضافَة (lesson 20), so it is worth fixing now.

5. The host keeps its own case. The suffix does not freeze the noun. Whatever ending the sentence calls for is still there, sitting between the noun and the suffix:

  • كِتابُهُ جَديدٌ - subject, so مَرْفوع
  • قَرَأْتُ كِتابَهُ - object, so مَنْصوب
  • فِي كِتابِهِ - after a preposition, so مَجْرور

Three different words, one meaning. In unvocalized writing all three are spelled كتابه, so only the context tells you which one is meant. Speech is kinder here than the page: the suffix shelters the case vowel, so even when you stop at the end of a sentence and drop the last vowel - كِتابُهْ، كِتابَهْ، كِتابِهْ - the three stay apart, even in the pausal form. So this distinction is real grammar that the writing hides - which is exactly why this path prints every vowel.

6. هُ harmonizes to هِ. The third-person endings that begin with ه change their vowel when what comes immediately before them is a kasra, a long ī, or the diphthong ay. The ḍamma flips to a kasra to match:

  • بِ + هُ = بِهِ، في + هُ = فيهِ، عَلى + هُ = عَلَيْهِ
  • كِتابِ + هُ = كِتابِهِ، فِي بَيْتِهِمْ، مِنْ مُعَلِّمَتِهِنَّ

All four ه-forms behave this way: هُ → هِ، هُما → هِما، هُمْ → هِمْ، هُنَّ → هِنَّ. After a fatḥa, a ḍamma, a long ā or a sukūn, they keep the ḍamma: كِتابُهُ، كِتابَهُ، مِنْهُمْ، عِنْدَهُنَّ. This is pure sound harmony - the tongue stays where it already is - and once you notice it you will stop having to think about it.

7. The same endings on prepositions. Prepositions take the identical set - and so do مَعَ and عِنْدَ, which are strictly ظُروف rather than حُروف جَرّ (lesson 16) but carry the endings in exactly the same way. Preposition plus pronoun is written as one word:

  • لِ (to, for): لي، لَكَ، لَهُ، لَها، لَنا، لَكُمْ، لَهُمْ
  • بِ (with, by): بي، بِكَ، بِهِ، بِها، بِنا، بِكُمْ، بِهِمْ
  • مَعَ (with): مَعي، مَعَكَ، مَعَهُ، مَعَنا، مَعَكُمْ
  • عِنْدَ (at, by): عِنْدي، عِنْدَكَ، عِنْدَهُ، عِنْدَنا

Four seams need attention, and they are all small:

  • مِنْ and عَنْ double their ن before ـي and ـنا: مِنّي، مِنّا، عَنّي، عَنّا. With every other ending they are unchanged: مِنْكَ، مِنْهُ، عَنْها، عَنْكُمْ.
  • لِ switches its kasra to a fatḥa in front of every ending except ـي: لَكَ، لَهُ، لَنا، لَهُنَّ - but لي, where the lām keeps its original kasra.
  • عَلى and إِلى turn their final ى back into a ي: عَلَيْكَ، عَلَيْها، إِلَيْنا، إِلَيْهِمْ. With the first person the two yāʾs fuse into one doubled letter: عَلَيَّ، إِلَيَّ.
  • في does the same in the first person only: فِيَّ, against plain فيكَ، فيهِ، فينا.

8. What this lesson is not. Three neighbouring topics use the same endings or the same idea, and each has its own lesson. Attaching a pronoun to a verb to say “he saw me, I asked him” is lesson 29 - the set is nearly identical, with one difference worth waiting for. Owning something by putting two nouns together - بابُ الْبَيْتِ, “the door of the house” - is the إِضافَة, lesson 20. And saying “I have a car” with عِنْدي or لي is lesson 17. Here we stay with the plain suffix on a noun or a preposition.

9. Flags for later. A dual host and a sound masculine plural host both drop their final ن before a suffix (كِتابانِ → كِتاباهُ، مُعَلِّمونَ → مُعَلِّموهُ); meet the forms in lessons 12 and 13 and the mechanism in lesson 40. A small group of very common nouns - أَبٌ، أَخٌ and their like - stretch the case vowel into a long letter before a suffix: أَبوهُ، أَخوهُ، أَباهُ، أَبيهِ. The one you need today is the harmless first person: أَبي “my father”, أَخي “my brother”.

Forms & patterns

The full set on a masculine noun in the nominative. The dual rows are printed for completeness - recognize them, but expect to use the other ten far more often.

الضَّميراللّاحِقَةمَعَ «كِتاب»English
أَناـيكِتابيmy book
أَنْتَـكَكِتابُكَyour book (m.sg.)
أَنْتِـكِكِتابُكِyour book (f.sg.)
هُوَـهُكِتابُهُhis book
هِيَـهاكِتابُهاher book
نَحْنُـناكِتابُناour book
أَنْتُماـكُماكِتابُكُماyour book (you two)
أَنْتُمْـكُمْكِتابُكُمْyour book (m.pl.)
أَنْتُنَّـكُنَّكِتابُكُنَّyour book (f.pl.)
هُماـهُماكِتابُهُماtheir book (those two)
هُمْـهُمْكِتابُهُمْtheir book (m.pl.)
هُنَّـهُنَّكِتابُهُنَّtheir book (f.pl.)

Nouns ending in ة, across four of the endings. The pattern is the same for all twelve:

الاسْم+ ـي+ ـكَ+ ـها+ ـهُمْ
سَيّارَةٌسَيّارَتيسَيّارَتُكَسَيّارَتُهاسَيّارَتُهُمْ
مَدْرَسَةٌمَدْرَسَتيمَدْرَسَتُكَمَدْرَسَتُهامَدْرَسَتُهُمْ
غُرْفَةٌغُرْفَتيغُرْفَتُكَغُرْفَتُهاغُرْفَتُهُمْ
مُعَلِّمَةٌمُعَلِّمَتيمُعَلِّمَتُكَمُعَلِّمَتُهامُعَلِّمَتُهُمْ

The host’s own case ending survives underneath the suffix - and drags the ه-forms with it:

الحالَةهُوَهُمْهُنَّأَنا
مَرْفوعكِتابُهُكِتابُهُمْكِتابُهُنَّكِتابي
مَنْصوبكِتابَهُكِتابَهُمْكِتابَهُنَّكِتابي
مَجْروركِتابِهِكِتابِهِمْكِتابِهِنَّكِتابي

The endings on five common prepositions:

الضَّميرلِبِمِنْمَعَعِنْدَ
أَناليبيمِنّيمَعيعِنْدي
أَنْتَلَكَبِكَمِنْكَمَعَكَعِنْدَكَ
أَنْتِلَكِبِكِمِنْكِمَعَكِعِنْدَكِ
هُوَلَهُبِهِمِنْهُمَعَهُعِنْدَهُ
هِيَلَهابِهامِنْهامَعَهاعِنْدَها
نَحْنُلَنابِنامِنّامَعَناعِنْدَنا
أَنْتُمْلَكُمْبِكُمْمِنْكُمْمَعَكُمْعِنْدَكُمْ
هُمْلَهُمْبِهِمْمِنْهُمْمَعَهُمْعِنْدَهُمْ
هُنَّلَهُنَّبِهِنَّمِنْهُنَّمَعَهُنَّعِنْدَهُنَّ

And on the four that reshape themselves at the seam:

الضَّميرعَلىإِلىفيعَنْ
أَناعَلَيَّإِلَيَّفِيَّعَنّي
أَنْتَعَلَيْكَإِلَيْكَفيكَعَنْكَ
أَنْتِعَلَيْكِإِلَيْكِفيكِعَنْكِ
هُوَعَلَيْهِإِلَيْهِفيهِعَنْهُ
هِيَعَلَيْهاإِلَيْهافيهاعَنْها
نَحْنُعَلَيْناإِلَيْنافيناعَنّا
أَنْتُمْعَلَيْكُمْإِلَيْكُمْفيكُمْعَنْكُمْ
هُمْعَلَيْهِمْإِلَيْهِمْفيهِمْعَنْهُمْ
هُنَّعَلَيْهِنَّإِلَيْهِنَّفيهِنَّعَنْهُنَّ

The dual slots into both preposition tables exactly where you would expect: لَكُما، لَهُما، مِنْكُما، مِنْهُما، عَلَيْكُما، عَلَيْهِما، فيكُما، فيهِما.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
بَيْتُنا قَريبٌ مِنَ الْمَدْرَسَةِ.Our house is near the school.
سَيّارَتُها الجَديدَةُ سَريعَةٌ.Her new car is fast.
أَيْنَ مِفْتاحُكَ؟Where is your key?
ما اسْمُكِ؟What is your name?
صَديقي مِنْ لُبْنانَ.My friend is from Lebanon.
كِتابُهُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.His book is on the table.
الحَقيبَةُ الصَّغيرَةُ لَها.The small bag is hers.
الرِّسالَةُ مِنْهُ، والجَوابُ مِنّي.The letter is from him, and the reply is from me.
السَّلامُ عَلَيْكُمْ.Peace be upon you.
أُمّي وأَبي فِي بَيْتِهِما.My mother and my father are in their house.
مُعَلِّمَتُنا الجَديدَةُ مِنْ تونِسَ.Our new teacher is from Tunisia.
الطُّلّابُ فِي صَفِّهِمْ.The students are in their classroom.
هٰذا الكِتابُ لَكُمْ، وذٰلِكَ لَهُنَّ.This book is for you, and that one is for them.
غُرْفَتُكُما نَظيفَةٌ جِدًّا.Your room (you two) is very clean.

Common mistakes

  • كِتابُي -> كِتابي - the first-person ي takes the last consonant for itself and the case vowel vanishes. There is no ḍamma to write.
  • الكِتابي -> كِتابي - a suffix already makes the noun definite, so الـ has nothing left to do. One definiteness marker per word.
  • بَيْتٌكَ -> بَيْتُكَ - tanwīn cannot stand in front of a suffix either. The doubled sign becomes a single case vowel.
  • سَيّارَةي -> سَيّارَتي - ة exists only word-finally. Add anything behind it and it unties into ت.
  • كِتابي جَديدٌ (meaning “my new book”) -> كِتابي الجَديدُ - the noun is definite, so the adjective needs الـ. Without it you have written the full sentence “my book is new”.
  • بِهُ / فيهُ / عَلَيْهُ -> بِهِ / فيهِ / عَلَيْهِ - after a kasra, a long ī or ay, the ه-endings take a kasra to match.
  • فِي كِتابُهُ -> فِي كِتابِهِ - the preposition still governs the noun underneath the suffix, and that kasra then pulls هُ down to هِ as well.
  • مِنْي / عَنْي -> مِنّي / عَنّي - the ن of مِنْ and عَنْ doubles before ـي and ـنا. Same for مِنّا، عَنّا.
  • عَلَيْي / إِلَيْي -> عَلَيَّ / إِلَيَّ - the two yāʾs merge into one letter with a shadda, and the fatḥa before them stays.
  • لِكَ / لِهُمْ -> لَكَ / لَهُمْ - لِ takes a fatḥa in front of every ending but ـي.
  • كِتاب أَنا -> كِتابي - the independent pronouns of lesson 6 never mark possession. That job belongs to the attached set only.

Tips

  • Chant one noun straight through all twelve: كِتابي، كِتابُكَ، كِتابُكِ، كِتابُهُ، كِتابُها… Then do it again with سَيّارَة so the ة → ت switch becomes automatic rather than remembered.
  • Hook the consonants, not the whole endings: ك = “you”, ه = “he / she / they”, ن = “we”, ي = “me”. The rest of each ending is the same tail you learned on the independent pronouns.
  • Two of the twelve are duals. Learn to recognize ـكُما and ـهُما in reading; you can leave producing them until lesson 12.
  • Before you write الـ on any noun, check whether it already ends in a suffix. If it does, stop - the word is finished.
  • Read كِتابُهُ، كِتابَهُ، كِتابِهِ aloud as a set. The vowel harmony of هُ / هِ is easier to hear than to memorize.
  • Ordinary Arabic prints كتابه with no vowels at all, so context - not the spelling - tells you the case. Do not let that worry you; that is what the pronunciation guide’s lesson on reading unvocalized text is for.
  • Ignore for now what happens when the host is a dual or a sound masculine plural, and ignore the pronoun-on-a-verb set entirely. Both arrive later with their own lessons.
  • The prepositions are worth over-learning early: لي، لَهُ، مَعَهُ، عِنْدَها، مِنْهُمْ، عَلَيْكُمْ turn up in every conversation, and they never change afterwards.

A1 8 / 70

The adjective and its noun

النَّعْتُ والمَنْعوت

In short

English puts the adjective in front of its noun and then leaves it alone: “a big house”, “the big house”, “in a big house” - “big” never changes shape. Arabic does the opposite on both counts. The adjective comes after the noun, and it copies it: بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ, literally “a house, a big one”. Arabic grammar calls the adjective النَّعْت, the describer, and the noun it hangs on المَنْعوت, the described. The نَعْت is a follower: it repeats the noun’s gender, its number, its definiteness and its case, so almost every adjective you write ends in the same sound as the word before it.

Of those four, the one that decides what your two words actually mean is definiteness. Put الـ on both and you have a phrase: البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ, “the big house” - a label, not yet a statement. Put it on the first word only and you have the nominal sentence of lesson 2: البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ, “the house is big”. Three letters of difference, and one of them is a whole sentence. Learn the pair together from the first day and this stops being a trap.

The rule

1. The adjective comes second, always. In Modern Standard Arabic the نَعْت stands after its noun. There is no version of the phrase with the adjective in front, and in the phrases of this lesson the two words sit side by side - the one thing that regularly comes between them is an إِضافَة, which waits for lesson 20:

  • بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ - a big house
  • كِتابٌ جَديدٌ - a new book
  • مَدينَةٌ جَميلَةٌ - a beautiful city

*كَبيرٌ بَيْتٌ is not a “poetic” order or a rare one. It is not a phrase at all - a reader would try to parse it as a sentence, “a big one is a house”, and give up.

2. Four things get copied. The نَعْت matches its noun in:

  • gender - مُذَكَّر or مُؤَنَّث
  • number - singular, dual or plural
  • definiteness - both bare, or both with الـ
  • case - مَرْفوع، مَنْصوب، مَجْرور

Number is on the list for completeness; in this lesson every noun is singular, so there is nothing to do with it yet. Plurals bring a genuine surprise (lesson 11) and the dual has its own endings (lesson 12). For now, three boxes to tick.

3. Gender: the feminine adjective takes ة. Nearly every adjective you meet at A1 forms its feminine by adding ـة to the masculine, exactly like the nouns of lesson 5:

  • الوَلَدُ الصَّغيرُ - the small boy
  • البِنْتُ الصَّغيرَةُ - the small girl

What the adjective copies is the noun’s grammatical gender, not what the thing is. A noun that is feminine without any ة still takes a feminine adjective: شَمْسٌ حارَّةٌ، يَدٌ صَغيرَةٌ. Look the gender up once, store it with the word, and the adjective follows automatically.

One honest exception to flag and then ignore: a small family of adjectives on the pattern أَفْعَل - colours and physical traits - makes its feminine differently and takes no tanwīn at all: أَحْمَرُ / حَمْراءُ، أَبْيَضُ / بَيْضاءُ. They belong with the special declension classes of lesson 41. Everything in this lesson uses the ordinary ة.

4. Definiteness: both, or neither. This is the rule that carries the lesson. A نَعْت and its مَنْعوت must agree on definiteness, and there are exactly two legal shapes:

  • both indefinite: بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ - a big house
  • both definite: البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ - the big house

A mixed pair is broken Arabic. *بَيْتٌ الكَبيرُ says nothing in any reading - not “a big house”, not “the big house”, not a sentence. It ranks with writing الـ and tanwīn on the same word among the commonest beginner errors.

5. Case: the adjective echoes, it does not choose. Whatever the sentence does to the noun, the adjective wears the same ending - including the tanwīn when the noun is indefinite:

  • مَرْفوع: البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ قَريبٌ. - the phrase is the subject
  • مَنْصوب: رَأَيْتُ البَيْتَ الكَبيرَ. - the phrase is the object
  • مَجْرور: سَكَنْتُ في بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍ. - the phrase follows a preposition

Notice that the case is decided for the phrase, by the sentence around it, and then applied twice. You never ask “what case should كَبير take?” - you ask what case the noun is in and copy it. This is why an adjective is a تابِع, a “follower”, in Arabic grammar.

6. The الـ test: phrase or sentence? Two words, one noun and one adjective, give three different results depending on where the article lands:

ArabicWhat it isEnglish
بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌa phrasea big house
البَيْتُ الكَبيرُa phrasethe big house
البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.a sentenceThe house is big.

The third line is the nominal sentence of lesson 2, and it is built from the same two words. The mechanism is simple: a definite noun followed by an indefinite describing word is a claim about that noun, because the mismatch means the second word cannot be a follower. Make them match and the claim collapses back into a label.

Drill the pair back to back until it is automatic. المَدينَةُ الجَميلَةُ - the beautiful city. المَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ - the city is beautiful. الدَّرْسُ السَّهْلُ - the easy lesson. الدَّرْسُ سَهْلٌ - the lesson is easy.

7. Definite without الـ: the suffix trap. Lesson 7 gave you كِتابي، بَيْتُكَ، سَيّارَتُها. Lesson 4 said that a noun carrying a possessive ending is already definite - and rule 4 does not care how the noun got that way. So the adjective still needs its الـ:

  • كِتابي الجَديدُ - my new book
  • بَيْتُكَ القَديمُ - your old house
  • سَيّارَتُها الصَّغيرَةُ - her small car

Write *كِتابي جَديدٌ intending “my new book” and you have written a complete sentence instead: “My book is new.” The same switch as in rule 6, just with the definiteness coming from a suffix rather than from an article. Proper names are definite in their own right, so an adjective on a name also takes الـ: القاهِرَةُ القَديمَةُ, “Old Cairo”.

There is one more source of definiteness, the إِضافَة (بابُ البَيْتِ, “the door of the house”), where an adjective raises a question of which noun it describes. That construction is lesson 20 and the adjective question is handled there; do not build such phrases yet.

8. Two articles, two independent sun-letter decisions. Each الـ obeys the letter it happens to sit in front of, so one phrase can easily have one assimilated article and one pronounced one. Write the shadda, and leave the ل of a sun-letter article with no sign at all:

  • البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ - moon, moon
  • الطّالِبُ الجَديدُ - sun, moon
  • المَدينَةُ الصَّغيرَةُ - moon, sun
  • الرَّجُلُ الطَّويلُ - sun, sun

9. Stacking adjectives. More than one describer simply lines up after the noun, and each one repeats the whole set of endings:

  • بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ جَديدٌ - a big new house
  • البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ الجَديدُ - the big new house
  • قِصَّةٌ قَصيرَةٌ وسَهْلَةٌ - a short and easy story

The وَ between two adjectives is optional; the old preference is to write it when the two qualities are far apart in meaning and to leave it out when they are close. Nothing about the agreement changes: whatever you did to the first adjective, do to the second.

10. Left for later. Plural agreement, including the rule that non-human plurals take a feminine singular adjective, is lessons 9-15; the dual is lesson 12. Adjectives made from place and people names (مِصْرِيٌّ، عَرَبِيٌّ) are the نِسْبَة of lesson 21 - they agree exactly like the ones here. “Bigger” and “the biggest” are a different word shape altogether, lesson 28. And an adjective can also land in the accusative as the predicate of كانَ (lesson 32) or as a حال (lesson 55). All of them run on the agreement you are learning now.

Forms & patterns

بَيْت (masculine) with كَبير - the full grid

الحالَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعبَيْتٌ كَبيرٌالبَيْتُ الكَبيرُ
مَنْصوببَيْتًا كَبيرًاالبَيْتَ الكَبيرَ
مَجْروربَيْتٍ كَبيرٍالبَيْتِ الكَبيرِ

مَدينَة (feminine) with كَبيرَة - the same grid, one ة heavier

الحالَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعمَدينَةٌ كَبيرَةٌالمَدينَةُ الكَبيرَةُ
مَنْصوبمَدينَةً كَبيرَةًالمَدينَةَ الكَبيرَةَ
مَجْرورمَدينَةٍ كَبيرَةٍالمَدينَةِ الكَبيرَةِ

What puts the phrase in each case

CaseWhyExample
مَرْفوعit is the subjectالمَدينَةُ الكَبيرَةُ بَعيدَةٌ.
مَنْصوبit is the object of a verbرَأَيْتُ المَدينَةَ الكَبيرَةَ.
مَجْرورit follows a prepositionسَكَنْتُ في مَدينَةٍ كَبيرَةٍ.

Stock adjectives - learn each row as one unit

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثWith الـEnglish
كَبيرٌكَبيرَةٌالكَبيرُbig
صَغيرٌصَغيرَةٌالصَّغيرُsmall
جَديدٌجَديدَةٌالجَديدُnew
قَديمٌقَديمَةٌالقَديمُold
جَميلٌجَميلَةٌالجَميلُbeautiful
طَويلٌطَويلَةٌالطَّويلُlong, tall
قَصيرٌقَصيرَةٌالقَصيرُshort
سَهْلٌسَهْلَةٌالسَّهْلُeasy
صَعْبٌصَعْبَةٌالصَّعْبُdifficult

Four of the definite forms - الصَّغيرُ، الطَّويلُ، السَّهْلُ، الصَّعْبُ - begin with a sun letter, so their ل is silent and the shadda is doing the work.

Phrase against sentence - drill these in pairs

نَعْت - a phraseEnglishجُمْلَة - a sentenceEnglish
البَيْتُ الكَبيرُthe big houseالبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.The house is big.
المَدينَةُ الجَميلَةُthe beautiful cityالمَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ.The city is beautiful.
الدَّرْسُ السَّهْلُthe easy lessonالدَّرْسُ سَهْلٌ.The lesson is easy.
الطّالِبُ الجَديدُthe new studentالطّالِبُ جَديدٌ.The student is new.
السَّيّارَةُ الصَّغيرَةُthe small carالسَّيّارَةُ صَغيرَةٌ.The car is small.

When the noun is definite by a suffix, not by الـ

نَعْت - a phraseEnglishجُمْلَة - a sentenceEnglish
كِتابي الجَديدُmy new bookكِتابي جَديدٌ.My book is new.
بَيْتُكَ القَديمُyour old houseبَيْتُكَ قَديمٌ.Your house is old.
سَيّارَتُها الصَّغيرَةُher small carسَيّارَتُها صَغيرَةٌ.Her car is small.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
هٰذا بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ.This is a big house.
البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ قَريبٌ.The big house is nearby.
البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.The house is big.
المَدينَةُ الجَميلَةُ بَعيدَةٌ.The beautiful city is far away.
المَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ.The city is beautiful.
سَكَنْتُ في بَيْتٍ صَغيرٍ.I lived in a small house.
رَأَيْتُ البَيْتَ الجَديدَ أَمْسِ.I saw the new house yesterday.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ سَيّارَةً صَغيرَةً.I bought a small car.
الطّالِبُ الجَديدُ في الغُرْفَةِ.The new student is in the room.
كِتابي الجَديدُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ.My new book is on the table.
الرَّجُلُ الطَّويلُ مُهَنْدِسٌ.The tall man is an engineer.
في المَدينَةِ القَديمَةِ سوقٌ كَبيرٌ.In the old city there is a big market.
قَرَأْتُ قِصَّةً قَصيرَةً وسَهْلَةً.I read a short and easy story.
البِنْتُ الصَّغيرَةُ نَشيطَةٌ.The little girl is lively.

Common mistakes

  • البَيْتُ كَبيرُ. -> البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. (The house is big.) or البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ (the big house) - a bare ḍamma with neither الـ nor tanwīn is not a possible ending on this word. Decide whether you are making a claim or writing a label, and mark it.
  • بَيْتٌ الكَبيرُ -> بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ or البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ - definiteness must match on both words. A half-definite pair is not a phrase and not a sentence; it is nothing.
  • كَبيرٌ بَيْتٌ -> بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ - English order. The describing word never goes in front of the noun in Arabic.
  • كِتابي جَديدٌ (meaning “my new book”) -> كِتابي الجَديدُ - the possessive ending has already made the noun definite, so the adjective must carry الـ. What you wrote is the sentence “My book is new.”
  • المَدينَةُ الكَبيرُ -> المَدينَةُ الكَبيرَةُ - gender is copied too. A feminine noun takes the ة form of the adjective, even when the two words look nothing alike.
  • في البَيْتِ الكَبيرُ -> في البَيْتِ الكَبيرِ - the preposition puts the whole phrase in the genitive, not just its first word. The adjective always wears the same ending.
  • رَأَيْتُ بَيْتًا كَبيرٌ -> رَأَيْتُ بَيْتًا كَبيرًا - the copy includes the tanwīn. Indefinite accusative on the noun means indefinite accusative on the adjective, alif seat and all.
  • سَيّارَةٌ جَديدَةً -> سَيّارَةٌ جَديدَةٌ - two different tanwīns in one phrase means one of them was not copied. Read the noun’s ending aloud before you write the adjective.
  • الطالِبُ الجَديدُ -> الطّالِبُ الجَديدُ - ط is a sun letter: its ل is silent and takes no sign, and the ط carries a shadda. The second article sits on ج, a moon letter, and is pronounced normally.
  • المَدينَةُ الجَميلَةُ. (meaning “the city is beautiful”) -> المَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ. - with الـ on both words you have described a city, not said anything about one. The predicate stays indefinite.

Tips

  • Learn every adjective as a pair, masculine and feminine together: كَبيرٌ / كَبيرَةٌ، صَعْبٌ / صَعْبَةٌ. Half an adjective is unusable, because half your nouns are feminine.
  • Count the articles before you decide what you have written. Two الـ = a phrase. One الـ, on the first word only = a sentence. None = an indefinite phrase.
  • Treat the adjective as an echo: say the noun with its full ending out loud, then say the adjective with that same ending. If the two do not rhyme, something is wrong.
  • Write in that order too - noun first, complete with its ending, then the adjective. Choosing the adjective’s ending independently is what produces mismatches.
  • The trap that survives longest is the already-definite noun: كِتابي، بَيْتُكَ، a name. Whenever the noun has a suffix, reach for الـ on the adjective automatically.
  • Keep everything singular for now. If you need to describe more than one thing, wait for lessons 9-16 rather than guessing - the plural rules include one genuinely counter-intuitive case.
  • Ignore “bigger” and “the biggest” as well. أَكْبَر is not built by adding anything to كَبير, and it agrees by different rules (lesson 28).
  • A memory hook for the word order: read بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ to yourself as “a house - a big one”. Once that phrasing feels natural, the Arabic order stops feeling backwards.

A1 9 / 70

Sound masculine and feminine plurals

جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِمِ وجَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السّالِم

In short

Arabic has two regular ways of making a plural, and they are called “sound” - سالِم - because the singular survives inside them untouched. You add an ending and nothing else moves. One of them, ـونَ / ـينَ, is reserved for male human beings: مُعَلِّمٌ becomes مُعَلِّمونَ. The other one, ـات, replaces the feminine ة and is far more generous: مُعَلِّمَةٌ becomes مُعَلِّماتٌ, and so does سَيّارَةٌ, which is not a person at all. Between them these two endings cover a very large slice of the plurals you will need at A1, and they are the only plurals you can build yourself from the singular without looking anything up.

The reason to learn them together is that they behave the same way in one important respect and differ in another. Both have two endings covering three cases, not three endings - so each one collapses two cases into a single form - and it is the same pair in both: the accusative merges into the genitive. The masculine plural uses one form for the subject and another for everything else; the feminine plural uses one form for the subject and another for everything else too, and that second form carries a kasra, never a fatḥa. رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتِ is correct and *رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتَ is not, no matter how much your ear wants the fatḥa of an object.

The rule

1. Three kinds of plural, two of them regular. Arabic builds plurals in three ways: the two sound plurals of this lesson, which glue an ending onto the intact singular, and the broken plural, which reshapes the word from the inside (كِتابٌ → كُتُبٌ). Broken plurals are lesson 10 and they are the commonest kind, so do not conclude from this lesson that Arabic pluralizes regularly. Conclude the narrower and more useful thing: when a word takes a sound plural, you can produce it on the spot.

2. جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِم: ـونَ for the subject, ـينَ for everything else. Take the singular exactly as it stands, remove its case ending, and attach the plural ending:

  • مُعَلِّمٌ → مُعَلِّمونَ (مَرْفوع) / مُعَلِّمينَ (مَنْصوب and مَجْرور)
  • مُهَنْدِسٌ → مُهَنْدِسونَ / مُهَنْدِسينَ
  • مُدَرِّسٌ → مُدَرِّسونَ / مُدَرِّسينَ
  • مُسْلِمٌ → مُسْلِمونَ / مُسْلِمينَ

Three things about the ending itself. The و and the ي are long vowels, so the endings are two full syllables and impossible to miss. The ن always carries a fatḥa - مُعَلِّمونَ, never *مُعَلِّمونُ. And this plural takes no tanwīn at all, in any case: the indefinite مُعَلِّمونَ and the definite المُعَلِّمونَ differ only by the article. That ن is doing the job tanwīn does elsewhere, which is why the two never appear together.

3. Who is allowed this plural. Two groups only:

  • nouns for male human beings: مُعَلِّمٌ، مُهَنْدِسٌ، مُوَظَّفٌ، لاعِبٌ، مُواطِنٌ
  • adjectives and participles describing male human beings: مَشْغولونَ، مُجْتَهِدونَ، مِصْرِيّونَ

Nothing else, apart from one short closed list: a few words borrow the ending without belonging to the class - the tens عِشْرونَ، ثَلاثونَ and odd nouns such as سِنونَ “years” and أَهْلونَ “family” - and grammar books file them separately as مُلْحَق بِجَمْعِ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِم, “annexed to” the sound masculine plural. Outside that list a book, a car, a table, a dog and a mountain are permanently excluded, and so is every feminine noun. *كِتابونَ and *سَيّارونَ are not clumsy Arabic, they are impossible Arabic.

Note the direction of the restriction carefully: being a male human makes a noun eligible, not obliged. Plenty of male-human nouns have a broken plural instead - رَجُلٌ → رِجالٌ، وَلَدٌ → أَوْلادٌ، طالِبٌ → طُلّابٌ. The words that reliably take ـونَ are the derived ones: participles of the derived and quadriliteral verb patterns, active (مُعَلِّم، مُهَنْدِس) and passive (مُوَظَّف) alike - lesson 53 - and nisba adjectives in ـِيّ (lesson 21). If a male-human noun is short and basic, expect a broken plural and check it in the dictionary.

4. جَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السّالِم: drop the ة, add ـات. The recipe is mechanical:

  • مُعَلِّمَةٌ → مُعَلِّماتٌ
  • طالِبَةٌ → طالِباتٌ
  • سَيّارَةٌ → سَيّاراتٌ
  • لُغَةٌ → لُغاتٌ

The ة never survives - you cannot write *مُعَلِّمَةاتٌ - because ـات already contains the feminine ت, now standing on its own two feet as a full consonant. Nouns that have no ة to begin with simply take ـات as it is: اِمْتِحانٌ → اِمْتِحاناتٌ، حَيَوانٌ → حَيَواناتٌ.

5. Its two endings, and the trap that defines this lesson. The feminine plural does take tanwīn, so it has four shapes in all - but only two vowels:

  • مَرْفوع: طالِباتٌ / الطّالِباتُ - ḍamma, as you would expect
  • مَنْصوب: طالِباتٍ / الطّالِباتِ - kasra
  • مَجْرور: طالِباتٍ / الطّالِباتِ - kasra, the same form again

The sound feminine plural never takes a fatḥa. Where any ordinary noun would show مَنْصوب with a fatḥa, this plural shows a kasra instead and looks identical to the genitive:

  • رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتِ - I saw the students (object, and still a kasra)
  • رَأَيْتُ طالِباتٍ - I saw some students
  • سَأَلْتُ المُعَلِّماتِ - I asked the teachers

*رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتَ is wrong. This is not an exception in the sense of an oddity to be memorised blindly; it belongs to a small family of endings called العَلاماتُ الفَرْعِيَّة, “substitute markers”, where a case is signalled by something other than its usual vowel. Lesson 40 collects them. For now, one sentence is enough: for ـات, accusative borrows the genitive’s kasra.

6. What the ـات plural covers. Much more than the masculine one:

  • female human beings: مُعَلِّماتٌ، طالِباتٌ، مُهَنْدِساتٌ، مُمَرِّضاتٌ
  • things and abstractions, whatever their gender: سَيّاراتٌ، ساعاتٌ، كَلِماتٌ، لُغاتٌ، جامِعاتٌ، مَطاراتٌ

Covering is not the same as claiming, though: a ة on the singular no more guarantees ـات than being male guarantees ـونَ, and many everyday feminine nouns take a broken plural instead - مَدينَةٌ → مُدُنٌ، مَدْرَسَةٌ → مَدارِسُ.

This is also the living, productive plural of the language: new words, technical terms and borrowings usually take ـات rather than being fitted to a broken pattern. When you coin or import a noun and need it plural, ـات is the safe bet.

7. Agreement: with people, everything goes plural. Lesson 8 taught that an adjective copies its noun in definiteness, case and gender. Add number to that list. When the plural refers to human beings, the adjective is plural too:

  • المُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُ - the new teachers (جُدُدٌ is the broken plural of جَديدٌ)
  • المُعَلِّماتُ الجَديداتُ - the new female teachers (a sound plural adjective)
  • مُهَنْدِسونَ مِصْرِيّونَ - Egyptian engineers

The same applies to the predicate of a nominal sentence, which is مَرْفوع and normally indefinite: المُوَظَّفونَ مَشْغولونَ، الطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٌ. And the pronoun that stands for such a plural is هُمْ for men and هُنَّ for women (lesson 6).

Notice that the adjective does not have to use the same plural as its noun. المُعَلِّمونَ is a sound plural, الجُدُدُ is a broken one; each word takes whichever plural it happens to have. What must match is the grammatical number, not the shape.

One flag, because it will trip you otherwise: this plural-agreement rule holds for humans. A plural of non-human things takes a feminine singular adjective - سَيّاراتٌ كَثيرَةٌ, not *سَيّاراتٌ كَثيراتٌ. That rule is the whole of lesson 11; here just register that the two cases are different.

8. The ن disappears in an إِضافَة. When a sound masculine plural is the first term of a possessive construct, its ن drops:

  • المُعَلِّمونَ → مُعَلِّمو الْمَدْرَسَةِ - the school’s teachers
  • المُعَلِّمينَ → مُعَلِّمي الْمَدْرَسَةِ - (object or after a preposition)

Two spelling points. The و of مُعَلِّمو is followed by nothing - no silent alif, unlike verb forms such as كَتَبوا. And the first term of a construct takes no article, so *المُعَلِّمو is impossible. The feminine plural keeps its ت and its case vowel in the same position and drops only the tanwīn, as any first term does: مُعَلِّماتُ الْمَدْرَسَةِ. When and why any of this happens is lesson 20; recognise the shape now so it does not look like a typo.

9. Which of these endings will you actually hear? This matters more than it sounds. In ordinary formal speech, final short vowels are dropped before a pause - the pausal form - so most case endings are silent.

  • ـونَ and ـينَ: audible. What separates the two cases here is the long vowel و / ي inside the ending, not a final short vowel, so the contrast between مُعَلِّمونَ and مُعَلِّمينَ survives in real speech - even in pause, where the fatḥa on the ن does itself drop. This is one of the very few places in MSA where you can hear case with your ears.
  • ـاتُ / ـاتِ / ـاتٌ / ـاتٍ: not audible at the end of a phrase. What you hear is plain ـات. The vowel returns as soon as another word follows and the phrase runs on.

So: get the masculine endings right because people will hear them, and get the feminine endings right because you will need them the moment you write.

10. What this lesson deliberately leaves out. Broken plurals, which are the majority, are lesson 10. Agreement with non-human plurals is lesson 11. Two of something is neither singular nor plural in Arabic - the dual is lesson 12. And a family of nouns that refuses tanwīn altogether, among them names such as فاطِمَةُ and broken plurals such as مَدارِسُ, is lesson 41.

Forms & patterns

جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِم, with the singular alongside so you can see what the ending replaces:

الحالَةالمُفْرَدجَمْع نَكِرَةجَمْع مَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعمُعَلِّمٌمُعَلِّمونَالمُعَلِّمونَ
مَنْصوبمُعَلِّمًامُعَلِّمينَالمُعَلِّمينَ
مَجْرورمُعَلِّمٍمُعَلِّمينَالمُعَلِّمينَ

جَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السّالِم - note that the bottom two rows are identical:

الحالَةالمُفْرَدجَمْع نَكِرَةجَمْع مَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعطالِبَةٌطالِباتٌالطّالِباتُ
مَنْصوبطالِبَةًطالِباتٍالطّالِباتِ
مَجْرورطالِبَةٍطالِباتٍالطّالِباتِ

Words that take the sound masculine plural:

المُفْرَدمَرْفوعمَنْصوب / مَجْرورEnglish
مُعَلِّمٌمُعَلِّمونَمُعَلِّمينَteacher
مُدَرِّسٌمُدَرِّسونَمُدَرِّسينَinstructor
مُهَنْدِسٌمُهَنْدِسونَمُهَنْدِسينَengineer
مُسْلِمٌمُسْلِمونَمُسْلِمينَMuslim
مُوَظَّفٌمُوَظَّفونَمُوَظَّفينَemployee
لاعِبٌلاعِبونَلاعِبينَplayer
مِصْرِيٌّمِصْرِيّونَمِصْرِيّينَEgyptian
مَشْغولٌمَشْغولونَمَشْغولينَbusy
مُجْتَهِدٌمُجْتَهِدونَمُجْتَهِدينَhard-working

Words that take the sound feminine plural - people first, then things:

المُفْرَدالجَمْعEnglish
مُعَلِّمَةٌمُعَلِّماتٌfemale teacher
طالِبَةٌطالِباتٌfemale student
مُهَنْدِسَةٌمُهَنْدِساتٌfemale engineer
صَديقَةٌصَديقاتٌfemale friend
سَيّارَةٌسَيّاراتٌcar
ساعَةٌساعاتٌhour, watch
كَلِمَةٌكَلِماتٌword
لُغَةٌلُغاتٌlanguage
جامِعَةٌجامِعاتٌuniversity
اِمْتِحانٌاِمْتِحاناتٌexam
حَيَوانٌحَيَواناتٌanimal
مَطارٌمَطاراتٌairport

Agreement, singular against plural:

المُفْرَدالجَمْعEnglish
المُعَلِّمُ الجَديدُالمُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُthe new teachers
المُعَلِّمَةُ الجَديدَةُالمُعَلِّماتُ الجَديداتُthe new female teachers
مُهَنْدِسٌ مِصْرِيٌّمُهَنْدِسونَ مِصْرِيّونَEgyptian engineers
المُوَظَّفُ مَشْغولٌالمُوَظَّفونَ مَشْغولونَthe employees are busy
الطّالِبَةُ مُجْتَهِدَةٌالطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٌthe female students are hard-working

The ن in and out of an إِضافَة (recognition only - lesson 20 owns the rule):

On its ownAs the first term of an إِضافَة
المُعَلِّمونَمُعَلِّمو الْمَدْرَسَةِ
المُعَلِّمينَمُعَلِّمي الْمَدْرَسَةِ
المُهَنْدِسونَمُهَنْدِسو الشَّرِكَةِ
المُعَلِّماتُمُعَلِّماتُ الْمَدْرَسَةِ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
المُعَلِّمونَ مَشْغولونَ الْيَوْمَ.The teachers are busy today.
المُهَنْدِسونَ الْجُدُدُ مِنْ مِصْرَ.The new engineers are from Egypt.
سَأَلْتُ الْمُدَرِّسينَ عَنِ الدَّرْسِ.I asked the instructors about the lesson.
جَلَسْتُ مَعَ الْمُوَظَّفينَ.I sat with the employees.
هُمْ لاعِبونَ مَشْهورونَ.They are famous players.
هٰذا بَيْتُ الْمُهَنْدِسينَ.This is the engineers’ house.
الطّالِباتُ الْجَديداتُ مُجْتَهِداتٌ.The new female students are hard-working.
رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتِ أَمامَ الْجامِعَةِ.I saw the female students in front of the university.
سَلَّمْتُ عَلَى الْمُمَرِّضاتِ.I greeted the nurses.
فِي الْمَدْرَسَةِ مُعَلِّماتٌ كَثيراتٌ.There are many female teachers at the school.
فِي الشّارِعِ سَيّاراتٌ كَثيرَةٌ.There are many cars in the street.
مُعَلِّمو الْمَدْرَسَةِ فِي الْمَكْتَبَةِ.The school’s teachers are in the library.
سَأَلْتُ مُعَلِّمي الْمَدْرَسَةِ.I asked the school’s teachers.
المُوَظَّفاتُ الْجَديداتُ مِنْ لُبْنانَ.The new female employees are from Lebanon.

Common mistakes

  • رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتَ -> رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتِ - the sound feminine plural never takes a fatḥa. Its accusative is spelled and pronounced exactly like its genitive.
  • رَأَيْتُ طالِباتاً -> رَأَيْتُ طالِباتٍ - and the indefinite accusative is kasratān, so there is no silent alif to add either. The ـات ending simply has no fatḥa form.
  • رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّمونَ -> رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّمينَ - ـونَ is only for the subject. The object, and anything after a preposition, takes ـينَ.
  • مَعَ الْمُهَنْدِسونَ -> مَعَ الْمُهَنْدِسينَ - same rule seen from the other side: a preposition puts its noun in the مَجْرور, and for this plural that is ـينَ.
  • مُعَلِّمينٌ -> مُعَلِّمينَ - the sound masculine plural takes no tanwīn in any case. Only الـ marks it definite; without الـ it is already indefinite.
  • مُعَلِّمونُ -> مُعَلِّمونَ - the ن of this plural always carries a fatḥa, whichever case the word is in.
  • مُعَلِّمَةونَ -> مُعَلِّماتٌ - a feminine noun can never take ـونَ. Drop the ة and add ـات; that is the only regular plural it has.
  • كِتابونَ / سَيّارونَ -> كُتُبٌ / سَيّاراتٌ - ـونَ is for male humans only. A book takes a broken plural (lesson 10), a car takes ـات.
  • رَجُلونَ -> رِجالٌ - a male human, yes, but this particular noun has a broken plural. Eligibility is not obligation; learn each noun’s plural with the noun.
  • المُعَلِّمونَ الْجَديدُ -> المُعَلِّمونَ الْجُدُدُ - an adjective describing a human plural must itself be plural, even when its plural is of the other kind.
  • المُعَلِّماتُ الْجَديدَةُ -> المُعَلِّماتُ الْجَديداتُ - feminine singular agreement is for non-human plurals (lesson 11). Women are human, so the adjective is plural.
  • المُعَلِّمونَ الْمَدْرَسَةِ -> مُعَلِّمو الْمَدْرَسَةِ - in an إِضافَة the ن drops and the first term loses its article.

Tips

  • Learn the masculine plural as a pair of sounds, not as a table: ـونَ for the doer, ـينَ for everyone else. Say a dozen nouns aloud both ways until the swap is automatic.
  • Store every new noun with its plural, the way you already store it with its tanwīn: مُهَنْدِسٌ - مُهَنْدِسونَ، سَيّارَةٌ - سَيّاراتٌ. Guessing costs more than memorising.
  • The single fact worth over-learning from this lesson is that ـات has no fatḥa. Write out رَأَيْتُ الطّالِباتِ a few times; the error it prevents is the one examiners look for.
  • A quick eligibility test for ـونَ: could you point at the group and say “these men”? If not - if it is women, objects, animals or ideas - the ending is out of the question.
  • ـات is your fallback. When you genuinely do not know a plural and the noun is feminine or inanimate, ـات is more often right than any broken pattern you might invent.
  • Do not try to hear the feminine case endings in speech; they vanish before a pause. Treat them as something you produce in writing and in careful reading.
  • Ignore for now what happens when these plurals meet a number, and what a group of two takes - numbers are lesson 26 and the dual is lesson 12.
  • When you meet مُعَلِّمو or مُهَنْدِسي in a text and the ن seems to be missing, look at the next word: it will be the second half of an إِضافَة.

A1 10 / 70

Broken plurals and collective nouns

جَمْعُ التَّكْسيرِ واسْمُ الجِنْس

In short

The previous lesson gave you plurals you build by adding something to the end of the word: ـونَ / ـينَ for men, ـاتٌ for women and for many feminine things. Those are the tidy ones, and they are the minority. Most Arabic nouns make their plural a different way entirely: they keep their consonants and rebuild everything else. كِتابٌ becomes كُتُبٌ. بَيْتٌ becomes بُيوتٌ. مَدْرَسَةٌ becomes مَدارِسُ. Nothing was appended - the word was poured into a new mould. Arabic grammar calls this جَمْعُ التَّكْسير, “the plural of breaking”, because the singular is broken up and reassembled. English keeps three or four fossils of the same idea (foot/feet, mouse/mice); in Arabic it is the normal way to make a plural.

There is one piece of bad news and one piece of good news. The bad: you cannot work out which mould a noun uses. قَلْبٌ and كَلْبٌ have exactly the same shape, and their plurals are قُلوبٌ and كِلابٌ. The mould is part of the word, like gender, and it has to be learned with the word. The good: a small number of moulds cover most of what you will read. Nine of them are tabled below, and after a few weeks you will recognise a broken plural on sight even in a word you have never met. The lesson ends with a related trick - collective nouns like شَجَرٌ and سَمَكٌ, where the plain word is the mass and the ending ة cuts one unit out of it.

The rule

1. Two plural systems; the broken one is the bigger. A sound plural (lesson 9) leaves the singular untouched and adds an ending: مُهَنْدِسٌ ← مُهَنْدِسونَ، مُعَلِّمَةٌ ← مُعَلِّماتٌ. A broken plural changes the vowels inside the word, and often adds a consonant at the front (أ or م) or a long vowel in the middle. Compare:

  • sound: طَبيبَةٌ ← طَبيباتٌ (nothing inside the word moved)
  • broken: طَبيبٌ ← أَطِبّاءُ (every vowel is different, and a new أ appeared)

Which system a noun uses is a fact about that noun. Sound masculine plurals are mostly limited to male human beings and participles; ـاتٌ is common but far from automatic. Everything else - including the great majority of everyday concrete nouns - breaks.

2. The mould belongs to the word, not to a rule. This is the point to accept early, because fighting it wastes months. Two nouns of identical shape routinely take different moulds:

  • قَلْبٌ ← قُلوبٌ but كَلْبٌ ← كِلابٌ
  • بَيْتٌ ← بُيوتٌ but شَيْخٌ ← شُيوخٌ and عَيْنٌ ← عُيونٌ (here they happen to agree)
  • وَلَدٌ ← أَوْلادٌ but جَبَلٌ ← جِبالٌ

So treat the plural as a second half of the dictionary entry. When you write a new noun in your notebook, write two words: قَلَمٌ - أَقْلامٌ. Never one.

3. The nine moulds worth knowing first. They are set out in full in the next section. In prose, what each one is typically for:

  • أَفْعال - the workhorse for short three-consonant nouns: قَلَمٌ ← أَقْلامٌ، وَلَدٌ ← أَوْلادٌ، بابٌ ← أَبْوابٌ، يَوْمٌ ← أَيّامٌ.
  • فُعول - equally common, especially from nouns shaped فَعْل or فِعْل: بَيْتٌ ← بُيوتٌ، قَلْبٌ ← قُلوبٌ، دَرْسٌ ← دُروسٌ، عِلْمٌ ← عُلومٌ.
  • فِعال - people and things alike: رَجُلٌ ← رِجالٌ، جَبَلٌ ← جِبالٌ، بَحْرٌ ← بِحارٌ. It also serves as the plural of the adjective فَعيل: كَبيرٌ ← كِبارٌ، صَغيرٌ ← صِغارٌ.
  • فُعُل - typically from singulars with a long vowel: كِتابٌ ← كُتُبٌ، مَدينَةٌ ← مُدُنٌ، سَبيلٌ ← سُبُلٌ.
  • فُعَل - the plural of the shape فُعْلَة, and here you may actually predict: غُرْفَةٌ ← غُرَفٌ، صورَةٌ ← صُوَرٌ. A handful of فَعْلَة nouns join them: دَوْلَةٌ ← دُوَلٌ.
  • فُعّال - the plural of the human agent noun فاعِل: طالِبٌ ← طُلّابٌ، عامِلٌ ← عُمّالٌ، كاتِبٌ ← كُتّابٌ، ساكِنٌ ← سُكّانٌ.
  • مَفاعِل - from four-letter singulars beginning with م: مَكْتَبٌ ← مَكاتِبُ، مَدْرَسَةٌ ← مَدارِسُ، مَسْجِدٌ ← مَساجِدُ.
  • مَفاعيل - the same, when the singular has a long vowel before its last consonant: مِفْتاحٌ ← مَفاتيحُ، مَوْضوعٌ ← مَواضيعُ، مَشْروعٌ ← مَشاريعُ.
  • أَفْعِلاء - human nouns and qualities shaped فَعيل: صَديقٌ ← أَصْدِقاءُ، طَبيبٌ ← أَطِبّاءُ، غَنِيٌّ ← أَغْنِياءُ.

4. Where prediction does work. The moulds are unpredictable for short, basic nouns. They are much more regular for longer, derived ones, and this is worth exploiting:

  • A noun of four consonants or more almost always goes to مَفاعِل or مَفاعيل (or their twins فَعالِل / فَعاليل when the first letter is not م): صُنْدوقٌ ← صَناديقُ، مَلْعَبٌ ← مَلاعِبُ. The standing exception is the participles of lesson 9 - مُهَنْدِسٌ ← مُهَنْدِسونَ، مُعَلِّمَةٌ ← مُعَلِّماتٌ - which are long but take the sound plural. The rule of thumb: long singular, long plural, with ـا after the second letter.
  • فاعِل naming a person usually goes to فُعّال or فَعَلَة: عامِلٌ ← عُمّالٌ، طالِبٌ ← طَلَبَةٌ. The sound plural stays available beside it (طالِبونَ، عامِلونَ).
  • فَعيل naming a person or a human quality goes to أَفْعِلاء or فُعَلاء: كَريمٌ ← كُرَماءُ.
  • فُعْلَة goes to فُعَل: نُقْطَةٌ ← نُقَطٌ.

Lesson 22 will show you the machinery behind all of this - the three-consonant root and the patterns poured over it. For now use these four tendencies as guesses, and check them.

5. A broken plural is an ordinary noun grammatically. This is the part beginners get wrong after learning ـونَ. A broken plural takes the ordinary singular-style endings ـٌ ـَ ـِ (with tanwīn when indefinite), takes الـ when definite, and never takes ـونَ or ـينَ on top:

  • كُتُبٌ - كُتُبًا - كُتُبٍ, exactly like بَيْتٌ - بَيْتًا - بَيْتٍ

For agreement, a broken plural of male human beings behaves like a plural: الطُّلّابُ مُجْتَهِدونَ، الرِّجالُ كِرامٌ. A broken plural of things does something surprising, and lesson 11 is entirely about it - do not worry when you see a feminine singular adjective after a plural noun in the examples below.

6. Three of the nine take no tanwīn: the diptote flag. مَفاعِل، مَفاعيل and أَفْعِلاء belong to a class called المَمْنوع مِنَ الصَّرْف - “barred from full inflection”. Two things change:

  • they never carry tanwīn: مَدارِسُ, not *مَدارِسٌ; مَفاتيحُ, not *مَفاتيحٌ
  • in the genitive they take a fatḥa, not a kasra: دَرَسْتُ فِي مَدارِسَ كَثيرَةٍ

The second departure switches off the moment the word becomes definite with الـ or heads an إِضافَة (lesson 20): فِي المَدارِسِ، فِي مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ - the ordinary kasra is back. The first never arises there, since a definite noun carries no tanwīn in any case. That is all you need at A1; lesson 41 gives the whole class and the rest of its members.

7. Collective nouns work the other way round. A small but very frequent group of nouns - plants, fruit, animals, small countable stuff - has its bare form standing for the kind or the mass, and adds ة to pick out one of them. The bare form is called اسْمُ الجِنْسِ الجَمْعِيّ, the ة-form اسْمُ الوَحْدَة:

  • شَجَرٌ “trees, tree-stuff” - شَجَرَةٌ “a tree”
  • تُفّاحٌ “apples” - تُفّاحَةٌ “an apple”
  • سَمَكٌ “fish (as a kind or a dish)” - سَمَكَةٌ “a fish”
  • بَقَرٌ “cattle” - بَقَرَةٌ “a cow”

Note the direction: the ة does not make it feminine-and-plural, it subtracts a unit from a mass. This is the opposite of what ة normally does, which is why it trips people up.

8. The bare collective takes singular agreement. Grammatically شَجَرٌ is a singular noun, however plural it feels in English, and masculine is the default: الشَّجَرُ جَميلٌ، السَّمَكُ لَذيذٌ، البَقَرُ كَبيرٌ. Never *الشَّجَرُ جَميلونَ. (Arabic also allows some collectives to be treated as feminine - هٰذا نَخْلٌ and هٰذِهِ نَخْلٌ are both attested - but stay with the masculine at A1.)

9. And the unit noun has its own plural. Once you have singled out one unit, you can count several of them, and then a real plural appears - broken for some words, sound ـاتٌ for others: شَجَرَةٌ ← أَشْجارٌ، سَمَكَةٌ ← أَسْماكٌ، تُفّاحَةٌ ← تُفّاحاتٌ. So each of these words has three forms, and each does a different job: the mass, one item, several items.

Forms & patterns

The nine high-yield moulds. Every plural here is given with its full ending, so you can see at a glance which ones refuse tanwīn:

الوَزْنSingularPluralEnglishTypical of
أَفْعالقَلَمٌأَقْلامٌpenshort three-consonant nouns
أَفْعالوَلَدٌأَوْلادٌboy
أَفْعالبابٌأَبْوابٌdoor
فُعولبَيْتٌبُيوتٌhousenouns shaped فَعْل
فُعولقَلْبٌقُلوبٌheart
فُعولدَرْسٌدُروسٌlesson
فِعالرَجُلٌرِجالٌmanpeople, things, adjectives
فِعالجَبَلٌجِبالٌmountain
فُعُلكِتابٌكُتُبٌbooksingulars with a long vowel
فُعُلمَدينَةٌمُدُنٌcity
فُعَلغُرْفَةٌغُرَفٌroomsingulars shaped فُعْلَة
فُعَلدَوْلَةٌدُوَلٌstate, countrya few فَعْلَة nouns too
فُعّالطالِبٌطُلّابٌstudenthuman فاعِل nouns
فُعّالعامِلٌعُمّالٌworker
مَفاعِلمَكْتَبٌمَكاتِبُdesk, officefour-letter nouns in م
مَفاعِلمَدْرَسَةٌمَدارِسُschool
مَفاعيلمِفْتاحٌمَفاتيحُkey” + a long vowel
أَفْعِلاءصَديقٌأَصْدِقاءُfriendhuman nouns shaped فَعيل
أَفْعِلاءطَبيبٌأَطِبّاءُdoctor

The three endings, side by side, for an ordinary plural and a diptote one. Read the third row first - it is the only place the two systems really part company:

Caseكُتُبٌ (ordinary)مَدارِسُ (diptote, indefinite)المَدارِسُ (with الـ)
مَرْفوعكُتُبٌمَدارِسُالمَدارِسُ
مَنْصوبكُتُبًامَدارِسَالمَدارِسَ
مَجْروركُتُبٍمَدارِسَالمَدارِسِ

Collectives in their three forms:

اسْمُ الجِنْس (the mass)اسْمُ الوَحْدَة (one unit)Plural of the unitEnglish
شَجَرٌشَجَرَةٌأَشْجارٌtrees / a tree / several trees
تُفّاحٌتُفّاحَةٌتُفّاحاتٌapples / an apple / several apples
سَمَكٌسَمَكَةٌأَسْماكٌfish / a fish / several fish
بَقَرٌبَقَرَةٌأَبْقارٌcattle / a cow / several cows
وَرَقٌوَرَقَةٌأَوْراقٌpaper / a sheet / several sheets
بَيْضٌبَيْضَةٌبَيْضاتٌeggs / an egg / several eggs

Left out on purpose: the moulds فَواعِل، فُعَلاء، فَعالِلَة and a dozen rarer ones, and the distinction Arabic makes between a “plural of few” and a “plural of many”. You will meet them naturally, word by word.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الرِّجالُ فِي الغُرْفَةِ الكَبيرَةِ.The men are in the big room.
الأَوْلادُ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ الآنَ.The boys are at school now.
أَصْدِقائي كِرامٌ جِدًّا.My friends are very generous.
الطُّلّابُ مُجْتَهِدونَ وَالأَطِبّاءُ مَشْغولونَ.The students are hard-working and the doctors are busy.
عَلَى المَكْتَبِ كُتُبٌ وَأَقْلامٌ.There are books and pens on the desk.
فِي المَدينَةِ بُيوتٌ قَديمَةٌ وَمَدارِسُ جَديدَةٌ.In the city there are old houses and new schools.
هٰذِهِ مَفاتيحُ، وَتِلْكَ أَقْلامٌ.These are keys, and those are pens.
دَرَسْتُ فِي مَدارِسَ كَثيرَةٍ.I studied at many schools.
بَيْنَ الجِبالِ طَريقٌ ضَيِّقٌ.Between the mountains there is a narrow road.
الشَّجَرُ جَميلٌ فِي الرَّبيعِ.The trees are beautiful in spring.
أَكَلْتُ تُفّاحَةً وَشَرِبْتُ الشّايَ.I ate an apple and drank the tea.
السَّمَكُ لَذيذٌ، وَالسَّمَكَةُ الكَبيرَةُ غالِيَةٌ.Fish is delicious, and the big fish is expensive.
فِي الحَديقَةِ أَشْجارٌ كَثيرَةٌ.There are many trees in the garden.
فَتَحْتُ الأَبْوابَ وَالنَّوافِذَ.I opened the doors and the windows.

Common mistakes

  • كِتابونَ -> كُتُبٌ - the ending ـونَ belongs to male human beings, so a noun for a thing never takes it, whatever its plural looks like.
  • الطُّلّابونَ -> الطُّلّابُ - and you certainly cannot use both systems at once. طُلّابٌ is already the plural; adding ـونَ plurals it twice.
  • بَيْتاتٌ -> بُيوتٌ - ـاتٌ is not a general-purpose plural ending. Use the broken plural the word actually has; بَيْتٌ has بُيوتٌ and nothing else.
  • مَدْرَساتٌ -> مَدارِسُ - the ending ة does not guarantee an ـاتٌ plural. (The word مُدَرِّساتٌ that you may have met is the plural of مُدَرِّسَةٌ “female teacher” - a different word.)
  • أَقْلابٌ -> قُلوبٌ - you cannot copy a mould from a similar-looking word. قَلَمٌ takes أَفْعال and قَلْبٌ takes فُعول, and only the dictionary knows.
  • مَدارِسٌ / مَفاتيحٌ -> مَدارِسُ / مَفاتيحُ - these moulds are مَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْف and never take tanwīn, in any case.
  • فِي مَدارِسِ كَثيرَةٍ -> فِي مَدارِسَ كَثيرَةٍ - an indefinite diptote takes fatḥa after a preposition. Note that the adjective is a normal word and keeps its kasra.
  • فِي مَدارِسَ المَدينَةِ -> فِي مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ - but as soon as the word is definite or heads an إِضافَة, the kasra comes back. The fatḥa rule is for the bare indefinite form only.
  • أَكَلْتُ تُفّاحٌ كَبيرَةٌ. -> أَكَلْتُ تُفّاحَةً كَبيرَةً. - if you mean one apple you need the ة; the bare collective means apples in general.
  • الشَّجَرُ جَميلونَ. -> الشَّجَرُ جَميلٌ. - a bare collective counts as singular, not plural, whatever it means.

Tips

  • Learn every noun as a pair, out loud, from the first day: قَلَمٌ - أَقْلامٌ، بَيْتٌ - بُيوتٌ، مَدْرَسَةٌ - مَدارِسُ. Retro-fitting plurals onto a hundred nouns you learned bare is miserable.
  • Recognise, do not derive. Your task with broken plurals at A1 is to hear مَفاتيحُ and think “plural of something”, not to produce it from مِفْتاحٌ by rule.
  • Use the shape as a first guess: an أ in front plus a long ـا usually means a plural; ـا after the second consonant in a long word almost always does; a doubled middle consonant with ـُ in front (طُلّاب، عُمّال) is usually a plural of people - though not always, as تُفّاح shows.
  • Length is your friend. Short words are wild; long words are tame. If the singular has four consonants, guess مَفاعِل / مَفاعيل and you will usually be right.
  • Tie the diptote flag to the shape, not to a list: مَدارِسُ، مَفاتيحُ، أَصْدِقاءُ. If a plural looks like one of those three moulds, expect no tanwīn and fatḥa in the genitive.
  • With collectives, ask yourself “the whole kind, or one of them?” before you write. That single question decides between سَمَكٌ and سَمَكَةٌ - and it is the same question in تُفّاح، بَقَر، بَيْض، وَرَق.
  • Ignore for now how the adjective agrees with a plural of things. It is genuinely odd, and the very next lesson is about nothing else.
  • Counting these plurals (three books, ten schools) has its own rules and its own lesson - 31. Until then, use them without a number in front.

A1 11 / 70

Non-human plurals take feminine singular agreement

جَمْعُ غَيْرِ العاقِل

In short

English has one “they”, and it covers everyone and everything: the teachers are new, the books are new, they are new. Arabic asks a question English never asks. The moment a noun is plural, Arabic wants to know whether the plural stands for people or for anything else - things, animals, ideas, places, machines. People are called العاقِل and keep ordinary plural agreement. Everything else is غَيْرُ العاقِل, and Arabic treats its plural as a feminine singular: not “the books are new” but, quite literally, “the books is new” - الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ.

This is not a curiosity you can meet later. It reaches the adjective (الكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُ), the verb (وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ), the pronoun (أَيْنَ الكُتُبُ؟ - هِيَ عَلى المَكْتَبِ) and the demonstrative (هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ). It is also the single rule learners break most often, because the English “they” keeps leaking in and produces *الكُتُبُ جُدُدٌ or *الكُتُبُ هُمْ. Fix one habit - when the plural is not people, think هِيَ - and a dozen different errors disappear at once.

The rule

1. Two classes of plural: العاقِل and غَيْرُ العاقِل. Arabic grammar sorts plural nouns by what they refer to, not by how they are spelled:

  • العاقِل - human beings: مُعَلِّمونَ، طُلّابٌ، رِجالٌ، نِساءٌ، أَطْفالٌ، مُهَنْدِساتٌ.
  • غَيْرُ العاقِل - everything else: كُتُبٌ، أَبْوابٌ، سَيّاراتٌ، مُدُنٌ، أَشْجارٌ، أَفْكارٌ، قِطَطٌ، كِلابٌ، لُغاتٌ، أَسْئِلَةٌ.

Note where animals fall. عاقِل means “possessing reason”, so it covers people only; cats, dogs, birds and horses are غَيْرُ العاقِل and follow the rule of things.

2. The rule itself, in one line. A plural of غَيْرِ العاقِل behaves, for every kind of agreement, exactly like a feminine singular noun. Whatever you would say about مَدْرَسَةٌ, you say about كُتُبٌ.

Compare a real feminine singular with a non-human plural and you will see they move together:

  • المَدْرَسَةُ الجَديدَةُ - المَدارِسُ الجَديدَةُ
  • المَدْرَسَةُ كَبيرَةٌ - المَدارِسُ كَبيرَةٌ
  • المَدْرَسَةُ قَريبَةٌ، وَهِيَ جَميلَةٌ - المَدارِسُ قَريبَةٌ، وَهِيَ جَميلَةٌ

3. How the plural was formed makes no difference. Lessons 9 and 14 gave you two machines for building plurals. Neither one changes this rule:

  • broken plural: الكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُ، الأَبْوابُ مَفْتوحَةٌ، المُدُنُ الكَبيرَةُ جَميلَةٌ
  • sound feminine plural: السَّيّاراتُ كَبيرَةٌ، اللُّغاتُ الأَجْنَبِيَّةُ مُهِمَّةٌ

The ending ـات on السَّيّارات is very tempting: it looks like a feminine plural, so learners give it a feminine plural adjective, *السَّيّاراتُ كَبيراتٌ. Wrong. The shape of the noun decides nothing here; the referent decides everything, and cars are not people.

4. The gender of the singular makes no difference either. كِتابٌ is masculine, سَيّارَةٌ is feminine - once they are plural and non-human, both take the same feminine singular agreement: الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ، السَّيّاراتُ جَديدَةٌ. You can forget the singular’s gender at that point.

5. The adjective. Both jobs of the adjective from lesson 8 work as they always did; the adjective simply appears in its feminine singular form:

  • attributive (inside the noun phrase, copying definiteness and case): الأَسْئِلَةُ الصَّعْبَةُ
  • predicate (in a nominal sentence, indefinite and مَرْفوع): الأَسْئِلَةُ صَعْبَةٌ

Case and definiteness still behave normally, so the adjective changes its ending with the noun:

  • مَرْفوع: الكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُ عَلى المَكْتَبِ.
  • مَنْصوب: قَرَأْتُ الكُتُبَ الجَديدَةَ.
  • مَجْرور: في الكُتُبِ الجَديدَةِ صُوَرٌ كَثيرَةٌ.
  • indefinite: هٰذِهِ كُتُبٌ جَديدَةٌ.

6. The verb. A non-human plural subject takes a feminine singular verb - the same form you would use for هِيَ:

  • past: وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ. / الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلَتْ.
  • present: تَصِلُ الطّائِراتُ في الصَّباحِ. / الطّائِراتُ تَصِلُ في الصَّباحِ.

Do not write *الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلوا or *الطّائِراتُ يَصِلونَ. Those are the human forms. The order of verb and subject in a verbal sentence, and what agreement a human subject triggers when it follows its verb, are the subject of lesson 19; all you need now is that the feminine singular verb is right for non-human plurals in either order.

7. The pronoun. Refer back to a non-human plural with هِيَ, and attach ـها to nouns and particles:

  • أَيْنَ الكُتُبُ؟ - هِيَ عَلى المَكْتَبِ.
  • المُدُنُ القَديمَةُ جَميلَةٌ، وَشَوارِعُها ضَيِّقَةٌ.
  • الحَقائِبُ ثَقيلَةٌ، لٰكِنَّها صَغيرَةٌ.

English “they” and “them” become هِيَ and ـها here, never هُمْ and ـهُمْ.

8. The demonstrative. “These books” is هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ, exactly as you would say هٰذِهِ المَدْرَسَةُ. هٰؤُلاءِ is for people only. Take this as recognition for now - the demonstratives get their own lesson at step 17.

9. The human column, so the contrast is visible. People keep full plural agreement, and the adjective, verb and pronoun all match their gender:

  • المُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُ وَصَلوا. هُمْ في الغُرْفَةِ. هٰؤُلاءِ المُعَلِّمونَ.
  • المُعَلِّماتُ الجَديداتُ وَصَلْنَ. هُنَّ في الغُرْفَةِ. هٰؤُلاءِ المُعَلِّماتُ.

جُدُدٌ is the plural of جَديدٌ used for people; in modern Arabic it does not describe books. جَديداتٌ is the feminine plural used for people; it does not describe cars. Keep each word in its own column.

10. Nouns that name groups of people. Some non-human nouns have people inside them: الدُّوَلُ (states), الحُكوماتُ (governments), الشَّرِكاتُ (companies), الفِرَقُ (teams), الجامِعاتُ (universities). The noun names the entity, not the persons, so it follows the non-human rule: الشَّرِكاتُ الكَبيرَةُ، الفِرَقُ الرِّياضِيَّةُ جاهِزَةٌ، الدُّوَلُ العَرَبِيَّةُ.

11. Where the rule does not reach. It is a rule about plurals only. A singular non-human noun keeps ordinary agreement by its own gender - الكِتابُ الجَديدُ، البابُ مَفْتوحٌ - and the dual has a system of its own, which is the next lesson. Nothing here applies to الكِتابانِ.

12. Recognition only: the feminine plural is also attested. In poetry, older prose and some set expressions you will meet a non-human plural with a feminine plural adjective: الجِبالُ الشّامِخاتُ، اللَّيالي الطَّويلاتُ. It is not an error, and it is worth being able to read. But in modern writing the feminine singular is overwhelmingly the norm - الجِبالُ الشّاهِقَةُ - so produce that one and only that one. Treat the plural version the way you treat an old-fashioned English spelling: recognise it, do not imitate it.

Forms & patterns

The core contrast. Read it down the two columns, not across the rows:

Agreementغَيْرُ العاقِل (كُتُبٌ)العاقِل (مُعَلِّمونَ)
Attributive adjectiveالكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُالمُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُ
Predicate adjectiveالكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌالمُعَلِّمونَ جُدُدٌ
Past verbالكُتُبُ وَصَلَتْالمُعَلِّمونَ وَصَلوا
Present verbالكُتُبُ تَصِلُالمُعَلِّمونَ يَصِلونَ
Independent pronounهِيَهُمْ
Attached pronounـهاـهُمْ
Demonstrativeهٰذِهِ الكُتُبُهٰؤُلاءِ المُعَلِّمونَ

The singular’s own gender is irrelevant once the noun goes plural:

SingularIts genderPluralAgreement
كِتابٌمُذَكَّرالكُتُبُالكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ
بابٌمُذَكَّرالأَبْوابُالأَبْوابُ مَفْتوحَةٌ
سُؤالٌمُذَكَّرالأَسْئِلَةُالأَسْئِلَةُ صَعْبَةٌ
سَيّارَةٌمُؤَنَّثالسَّيّاراتُالسَّيّاراتُ كَبيرَةٌ
مَدينَةٌمُؤَنَّثالمُدُنُالمُدُنُ جَميلَةٌ
قِطَّةٌمُؤَنَّثالقِطَطُالقِطَطُ صَغيرَةٌ

The adjective still carries case and definiteness in the ordinary way:

PositionExample
definite, مَرْفوعالنَّوافِذُ المَفْتوحَةُ
indefinite, مَرْفوعنَوافِذُ مَفْتوحَةٌ
definite, مَنْصوبأَغْلَقْتُ النَّوافِذَ المَفْتوحَةَ
definite, مَجْرورجَلَسْتُ قُرْبَ النَّوافِذِ المَفْتوحَةِ
predicateالنَّوافِذُ مَفْتوحَةٌ

Human plurals, for comparison only - both genders keep their own plural forms:

Human pluralAdjectivePronounDemonstrative
المُعَلِّمونَالجُدُدُهُمْهٰؤُلاءِ
الطُّلّابُالمُجْتَهِدونَهُمْهٰؤُلاءِ
الرِّجالُالكِرامُهُمْهٰؤُلاءِ
المُعَلِّماتُالجَديداتُهُنَّهٰؤُلاءِ
الطّالِباتُالمُجْتَهِداتُهُنَّهٰؤُلاءِ

Left out here: the dual (lesson 12), the relative pronoun that agrees the same way (lesson 39), and the agreement of a verb that stands before a human subject (lesson 19).

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُ عَلى المَكْتَبِ.The new books are on the desk.
الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ وَغالِيَةٌ.The books are new and expensive.
السَّيّاراتُ في الشّارِعِ كَبيرَةٌ.The cars in the street are big.
الأَبْوابُ مَفْتوحَةٌ مُنْذُ الصَّباحِ.The doors have been open since the morning.
المُدُنُ الكَبيرَةُ جَميلَةٌ لٰكِنَّها غالِيَةٌ.Big cities are beautiful but expensive.
وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ أَمْسِ.The letters arrived yesterday.
تَصِلُ الطّائِراتُ في السّاعَةِ التّاسِعَةِ.The planes arrive at nine o’clock.
أَيْنَ الكُتُبُ؟ - هِيَ عَلى المَكْتَبِ.Where are the books? - They are on the desk.
هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ لِلطُّلّابِ الجُدُدِ.These books are for the new students.
القِطَطُ الصَّغيرَةُ نائِمَةٌ تَحْتَ الشَّجَرَةِ.The little cats are asleep under the tree.
الأَسْئِلَةُ صَعْبَةٌ، وَالدُّروسُ طَويلَةٌ.The questions are hard, and the lessons are long.
الشَّرِكاتُ الكَبيرَةُ قَريبَةٌ مِنَ المَطارِ.The big companies are near the airport.
المُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُ في الغُرْفَةِ، وَهُمْ مُجْتَهِدونَ.The new teachers are in the room, and they are hard-working.
المُعَلِّماتُ الجَديداتُ وَصَلْنَ، وَهُنَّ سَعيداتٌ.The new (female) teachers have arrived, and they are happy.

Common mistakes

  • الكُتُبُ جُدُدٌ. -> الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ. - جُدُدٌ is the human plural of جَديدٌ. Books are not people, so the adjective goes into the feminine singular.
  • السَّيّاراتُ كَبيراتٌ. -> السَّيّاراتُ كَبيرَةٌ. - the ـات on the noun is a trap: the ending shows how the plural was built, not who it refers to. Cars still take كَبيرَةٌ.
  • أَيْنَ الكُتُبُ؟ - هُمْ عَلى المَكْتَبِ. -> هِيَ عَلى المَكْتَبِ. - the English “they” leaking in. A non-human plural is referred to with هِيَ.
  • هٰؤُلاءِ الكُتُبُ. -> هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ. - هٰؤُلاءِ points at people only; things in the plural take the feminine singular هٰذِهِ.
  • الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلوا. -> الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلَتْ. - وَصَلوا is “they (men) arrived”. A plural of things takes the same verb form as هِيَ.
  • الطّائِراتُ يَصِلونَ في الصَّباحِ. -> الطّائِراتُ تَصِلُ في الصَّباحِ. - the present tense follows the same rule: تـ, not يـ … ـونَ.
  • الأَبْوابُ مَفْتوحونَ. -> الأَبْوابُ مَفْتوحَةٌ. - the sound masculine plural ending belongs to people; doors get the feminine singular ة.
  • الكِلابُ صِغارٌ. -> الكِلابُ صَغيرَةٌ. - animals are غَيْرُ العاقِل however alive they are, so صِغارٌ (a human plural) is out of place.
  • المُعَلِّمونَ الجَديدَةُ. -> المُعَلِّمونَ الجُدُدُ. - the rule runs one way only. Do not put people into the feminine singular; they keep full plural agreement.
  • الكِتابُ الجَديدَةُ. -> الكِتابُ الجَديدُ. - one book is not a plural. The feminine singular agreement is triggered by the plural, never by the singular noun.

Tips

  • Before choosing any adjective, verb or pronoun, silently replace the plural with هِيَ. If الكُتُبُ = هِيَ, then هِيَ جَديدَةٌ، هِيَ وَصَلَتْ، هٰذِهِ - every choice follows.
  • Run the two-question check: is the noun plural? are they people? Only “yes, yes” unlocks plural agreement; “yes, no” means feminine singular, every time.
  • Learn the pair of adjectives together and keep them apart: جَديدَةٌ for things, جُدُدٌ for people. The same for صَغيرَةٌ / صِغارٌ and كَبيرَةٌ / كِبارٌ.
  • A useful phrase to memorise as a whole: الكُتُبُ الجَديدَةُ against الطُّلّابُ الجُدُدُ. Say them back to back until the wrong one sounds wrong.
  • Do not read the noun’s ending for the answer. سَيّاراتٌ ends in ـات and مُدُنٌ does not, yet both take exactly the same feminine singular agreement.
  • When you read, use the rule backwards: a lone تـ verb or a feminine singular adjective with no feminine singular noun in sight usually means a plural of things is the subject.
  • Ignore for now the literary feminine plural (الجِبالُ الشّامِخاتُ). Recognise it in a text and keep producing the feminine singular yourself.
  • Leave the dual out of this entirely - it has its own agreement, and it is the next lesson.

A1 12 / 70

The dual

المُثَنّى

In short

English counts in twos: one, two, many. Arabic counts in threes: one, exactly two, three or more. “Exactly two” is not built with a number word - it is built into the noun itself. Add ـانِ to كِتابٌ and you get كِتابانِ, and that single word already means “two books”. There is no word for “two” in it, and none is needed. This third number is called المُثَنّى, the dual, and it is not an ornament of high style: it is compulsory. Saying كُتُبٌ when you mean two books is as wrong as saying “book” when you mean several.

The good news is that the dual is the tidiest corner of Arabic morphology. Every noun in the language forms it the same way, with no broken patterns and barely a handful of exceptions, and it has only two endings instead of three: ـانِ for the subject case, ـَيْنِ for everything else. The work is not in building the form - it is in remembering to use it, and in dragging along everything that has to agree with it: the adjective, the pronoun, the verb.

The rule

1. Two endings, not three. Singular nouns have three case endings; the dual collapses them into two. The nominative (مَرْفوع) ends in ـانِ; the accusative (مَنْصوب) and the genitive (مَجْرور) share one ending, ـَيْنِ:

  • كِتابٌ -> كِتابانِ (nominative) / كِتابَيْنِ (accusative and genitive)
  • طالِبٌ -> طالِبانِ / طالِبَيْنِ

So you use كِتابانِ when the word is the subject of a sentence, and كِتابَيْنِ when it is an object or follows a preposition:

  • عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ كِتابانِ. - two books are on the table (subject)
  • قَرَأْتُ كِتابَيْنِ. - I read two books (object)
  • فِي كِتابَيْنِ - in two books (after a preposition)

Note the vowel on the ن: it is a kasra in both forms - ـانِ، ـَيْنِ. The sound masculine plural of lesson 9 looks similar but puts a fatḥa there - ـونَ، ـينَ. Dual nūn = kasra, plural nūn = fatḥa. That one contrast keeps المُعَلِّمانِ (“the two teachers”) apart from المُعَلِّمونَ (“the teachers”).

2. Building it: take the singular, drop the tanwīn, add the ending. There is nothing else to do. The dual never takes tanwīn - not in any case, not ever - and the article changes nothing about the ending:

  • بَيْتٌ -> بَيْتانِ / بَيْتَيْنِ ; البَيْتانِ / البَيْتَيْنِ
  • قَلَمٌ -> قَلَمانِ / قَلَمَيْنِ ; القَلَمانِ / القَلَمَيْنِ

One spelling change, and only one: a feminine noun ending in ة opens that ة into a full ت before the ending, because it is no longer at the end of the word:

  • مُعَلِّمَةٌ -> مُعَلِّمَتانِ / مُعَلِّمَتَيْنِ
  • سَيّارَةٌ -> سَيّارَتانِ / سَيّارَتَيْنِ
  • مَدينَةٌ -> مَدينَتانِ / مَدينَتَيْنِ

A small family of very short nouns brings back a weak letter that the singular had lost: أَبٌ -> أَبَوانِ، أَخٌ -> أَخَوانِ. Learn those two as they come; they are not a productive pattern.

3. The dual is obligatory - there is no phrase “two books”. This is the point that decides whether your Arabic sounds native. Where English needs a number, Arabic needs a form:

EnglishArabic
two booksكِتابانِ
two teachers (f)مُعَلِّمَتانِ
the two housesالبَيْتانِ
both handsاليَدانِ

You never say اِثْنانِ كُتُبٍ, “two of books”, the way you might in English or French. The plural كُتُبٌ means three or more, so using it for a pair is a real mistake, not a stylistic choice. And when English says “both”, Arabic usually just says the dual: رَأَيْتُ الوَلَدَيْنِ covers both “I saw the two boys” and “I saw both boys”. (There is a dedicated word for “both”, كِلا / كِلْتا, but it belongs with the quantifiers in lesson 42.)

4. اِثْنانِ only adds emphasis. The number word اِثْنانِ / اِثْنَتانِ does exist, and it declines like any dual (اِثْنَيْنِ / اِثْنَتَيْنِ in the other cases). But it does not count the noun the way “two” does in English. It comes after the already-dual noun and simply insists on the number:

  • طالِبانِ اثْنانِ فَقَطْ - only two students, no more
  • سَأَلْتُ رَجُلَيْنِ اثْنَيْنِ - I asked two men (exactly two)

Drop it and you lose nothing but the emphasis. All other numbers behave completely differently and are the business of lesson 26.

5. Adjectives go dual too - and lesson 11 does not apply here. An adjective matches its noun in number, gender, case and definiteness (lesson 8), and “dual” is a number like any other:

  • كِتابانِ جَديدانِ - two new books
  • الطّالِبَتانِ الجَديدَتانِ - the two new students (f)
  • اِشْتَرَيْتُ قَميصَيْنِ أَبْيَضَيْنِ - I bought two white shirts

The previous lesson taught you that non-human plurals take feminine singular agreement - كُتُبٌ جَديدَةٌ. That rule is about plurals only. A dual is never treated as a feminine singular, however inanimate the noun is, so كِتابانِ جَديدَةٌ is wrong and كِتابانِ جَديدانِ is right. The same goes for verbs: السَّيّارَتانِ تَقِفانِ أَمامَ البَيْتِ, not تَقِفُ.

6. Pronouns: هُما and أَنْتُما - and no feminine dual. The independent pronouns of lesson 6 have dual members, and the attached pronouns of lesson 7 have matching endings:

  • هُما - they two, both genders
  • أَنْتُما - you two, both genders
  • ـهُما - their (of two), them two: كِتابُهُما، مَعَهُما
  • ـكُما - your (of two), you two: بَيْتُكُما، لَكُما

This is where Arabic’s usual masculine/feminine split disappears. هُما serves two men, two women and one of each; أَنْتُما likewise. There is no هُنَّما and no separate feminine suffix. Nouns and adjectives still show gender in the dual (طالِبانِ vs طالِبَتانِ) - it is the pronouns that give it up. There is also no first-person dual at all: two people speaking say نَحْنُ, the ordinary plural.

The suffix ـهُما follows the same vowel-harmony rule as ـهُ: after a kasra or a يْ it becomes ـهِما - عَلَيْهِما، فيهِما، بِهِما، إِلَيْهِما، مِنْ بَيْتِهِما.

7. The verb: a frame for now. Verbs have dual forms too, and in the third person they do keep the gender distinction the pronouns gave up - not in the present-tense ending, which is ـانِ either way, but in the prefix (the second person, أَنْتُما, stays common-gender like its pronoun):

  • هُما يَكْتُبانِ - they two (m) are writing
  • هُما تَكْتُبانِ - they two (f) are writing
  • أَنْتُما تَكْتُبانِ - you two are writing

Recognise these three; the full present-tense table is lesson 14, and the past tense (كَتَبا، كَتَبَتا، كَتَبْتُما) is lesson 18. What matters here is only that a dual subject forces a dual verb: الوَلَدانِ يَلْعَبانِ, never يَلْعَبونَ and never يَلْعَبُ.

8. The ن drops in إِضافَة. When a dual noun is the first term of a possessive construct, its ن falls off - exactly as the sound masculine plural loses its ن. What is left is كِتابا (from كِتابانِ) and كِتابَيْ (from كِتابَيْنِ):

  • كِتابا الطّالِبِ - the student’s two books (nominative)
  • والِدا مُحَمَّدٍ - Muhammad’s parents
  • عَيْنا الطِّفْلِ - the child’s eyes
  • فِي يَدَيْ مُحَمَّدٍ - in Muhammad’s hands (genitive, so ـَيْ)

When that ـَيْ runs into a following الـ, it picks up a kasra to link the two words: قَرَأْتُ كِتابَيِ الطّالِبِ. The construct itself - why the first word takes no article and the second goes genitive - is lesson 20; here just register that the missing ن is a signal, not a typo.

9. Paired body parts are naturally dual. Anything the body has two of is normally spoken of in the dual, and Arabic reaches for the dual where English reaches for a plural:

عَيْنانِ (eyes)، يَدانِ (hands)، رِجْلانِ (legs)، أُذُنانِ (ears)، قَدَمانِ (feet)، شَفَتانِ (lips)، كَتِفانِ (shoulders)

English says “he opened his eyes”, but Arabic is counting: two eyes, so the dual. The same instinct covers natural pairs outside the body - والِدانِ (parents)، جَناحانِ (wings) - while anything the language sees as one object stays singular, as with سِرْوالٌ for a pair of trousers.

10. In the dialects the dual is much narrower. Spoken Egyptian, Levantine and Gulf Arabic still put a dual ending on nouns - يَوْمينْ، كِتابينْ، إيدينْ - most readily on time words, measures and everyday countables, though a number plus a plural is often preferred instead. What the dialects have dropped is the agreement: the adjective, the verb and the pronoun go plural, not dual. Maghrebi Arabic goes further and normally says زوجْ (“pair”) plus a plural. Written and formal Arabic has followed none of this: in الفُصْحى the dual is fully alive, fully obligatory and drags all its agreement with it, so do not let a dialect habit talk you out of it.

Forms & patterns

Nouns - the whole system, masculine and feminine:

المُفْرَدمَرْفوعمَنْصوب ومَجْرورEnglish
كِتابٌكِتابانِكِتابَيْنِtwo books
طالِبٌطالِبانِطالِبَيْنِtwo students
بَيْتٌبَيْتانِبَيْتَيْنِtwo houses
قَلَمٌقَلَمانِقَلَمَيْنِtwo pens
مُعَلِّمَةٌمُعَلِّمَتانِمُعَلِّمَتَيْنِtwo teachers (f)
سَيّارَةٌسَيّارَتانِسَيّارَتَيْنِtwo cars
مَدينَةٌمَدينَتانِمَدينَتَيْنِtwo cities
أَخٌأَخَوانِأَخَوَيْنِtwo brothers

With the article, nothing about the ending changes:

نَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
وَلَدانِالوَلَدانِ
وَلَدَيْنِالوَلَدَيْنِ
مُعَلِّمَتانِالمُعَلِّمَتانِ
مُعَلِّمَتَيْنِالمُعَلِّمَتَيْنِ

Noun plus adjective, all four combinations:

مَرْفوعمَنْصوب ومَجْرور
indefinite, mكِتابانِ جَديدانِكِتابَيْنِ جَديدَيْنِ
definite, mالكِتابانِ الجَديدانِالكِتابَيْنِ الجَديدَيْنِ
indefinite, fمُعَلِّمَتانِ نَشيطَتانِمُعَلِّمَتَيْنِ نَشيطَتَيْنِ
definite, fالطّالِبَتانِ الجَديدَتانِالطّالِبَتَيْنِ الجَديدَتَيْنِ

The pronoun grid, with the dual column filled in:

مُفْرَدمُثَنّىجَمْع
هُوَهُوَهُماهُمْ
هِيَهِيَهُماهُنَّ
أَنْتَأَنْتَأَنْتُماأَنْتُمْ
أَنْتِأَنْتِأَنْتُماأَنْتُنَّ
أَناأَنا-نَحْنُ

Attached pronouns, singular next to dual:

مُفْرَدمُثَنّى
كِتابُهُ / كِتابُهاكِتابُهُما
كِتابُكَ / كِتابُكِكِتابُكُما
لَهُ، مَعَهُ، مِنْهُلَهُما، مَعَهُما، مِنْهُما
عَلَيْهِ، فيهِ، بِهِعَلَيْهِما، فيهِما، بِهِما

The verb frame - recognition only, the tables are lessons 14 and 22:

Subjectالمُضارِع
هُما (m)يَكْتُبانِ
هُما (f)تَكْتُبانِ
أَنْتُماتَكْتُبانِ

The ن of the dual inside an إِضافَة:

FreeIn إِضافَة
كِتابانِكِتابا الطّالِبِ
كِتابَيْنِكِتابَيِ الطّالِبِ
والِدانِوالِدا مُحَمَّدٍ
يَدانِيَدا الرَّجُلِ
عَيْنَيْنِعَيْنَيِ الطِّفْلِ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ كِتابانِ جَديدانِ.There are two new books on the table.
قَرَأْتُ كِتابَيْنِ فِي الأُسْبوعِ الماضي.I read two books last week.
الطّالِبَتانِ الجَديدَتانِ فِي الصَّفِّ.The two new students are in the classroom.
سَأَلْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ عَنِ الدَّرْسِ.I asked the two students about the lesson.
هُما مُهَنْدِسانِ مِصْرِيّانِ.The two of them are Egyptian engineers.
أَنْتُما طالِبَتانِ مُجْتَهِدَتانِ.You two are hard-working students.
سَيّارَتُهُما أَمامَ البَيْتِ.Their car is in front of the house.
الوَلَدانِ يَكْتُبانِ الدَّرْسَ.The two boys are writing the lesson.
عَيْنا الطِّفْلِ زَرْقاوانِ.The child’s eyes are blue.
والِدا صَديقي مِنْ لُبْنانَ.My friend’s parents are from Lebanon.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ قَميصَيْنِ أَبْيَضَيْنِ.I bought two white shirts.
فِي الغُرْفَةِ نافِذَتانِ كَبيرَتانِ.There are two big windows in the room.
طالِبانِ اثْنانِ فَقَطْ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.Only two students are in the library.
تَحَدَّثْتُ مَعَهُما أَمْسِ.I spoke with the two of them yesterday.

Common mistakes

  • عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ كِتابَيْنِ. -> عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ كِتابانِ. - a subject is مَرْفوع, so it takes ـانِ. Learners default to ـَيْنِ because that is the form they hear in اِثْنَيْنِ and in the weekday الاثْنَيْنِ.
  • رَأَيْتُ كِتابانِ. -> رَأَيْتُ كِتابَيْنِ. - a direct object is مَنْصوب, and the dual spells مَنْصوب and مَجْرور the same way.
  • اِثْنانِ كُتُبٍ -> كِتابانِ - Arabic has no “two + plural” phrase. The number lives inside the noun, and كُتُبٌ starts at three.
  • كِتابانِ جَديدَةٌ -> كِتابانِ جَديدانِ - the feminine-singular agreement of lesson 11 is for non-human plurals only. A dual always agrees as a dual.
  • مُعَلِّمَةانِ -> مُعَلِّمَتانِ - the ة is no longer final, so it opens into a written ت.
  • الطّالِبَتانِ جَديدَتانِ (meaning “the two new students”) -> الطّالِبَتانِ الجَديدَتانِ - an attributive adjective copies the article too; without it the phrase is a sentence, “the two students are new”.
  • هُمْ طالِبانِ. -> هُما طالِبانِ. - هُمْ is three or more. Two people are always هُما, whatever their gender.
  • بَيْتُهُمْ (of two people) -> بَيْتُهُما - the same slip on the attached pronoun; and after a kasra it becomes بَيْتِهِما.
  • هُما يَكْتُبونَ -> هُما يَكْتُبانِ - a dual subject takes a dual verb, never the plural.
  • كِتابانِ الطّالِبِ -> كِتابا الطّالِبِ - the ن of the dual drops before the second term of an إِضافَة.

Tips

  • Learn the two endings as a pair of sounds, ـانِ and ـَيْنِ, and attach them to any noun you like. Apart from the أَبَوانِ / أَخَوانِ handful there are no irregular duals to memorise - the whole system is these two syllables.
  • Test yourself with the subject/object question, not with a grammar term: is this word doing something (ـانِ) or having something done to it, or sitting after a preposition (ـَيْنِ)?
  • The dual is the one ending you can still see in ordinary unvocalized text, because it is written with letters: ان and ين. Reading معلمين, though, you must decide between the dual مُعَلِّمَيْنِ and the sound plural مُعَلِّمينَ - reading unvocalized text, in the pronunciation guide, is about exactly that guessing game.
  • Say “kasra on the nūn” out loud a few times. Dual ـانِ / ـَيْنِ against plural ـونَ / ـينَ is the whole difference in speech.
  • Get in the habit of doubling everything downstream. If the noun goes dual, the adjective, the pronoun and the verb follow automatically - that reflex is more valuable than the ending itself.
  • Body-part vocabulary is free practice: عَيْنانِ، يَدانِ، رِجْلانِ، أُذُنانِ are dual by nature, so drill them and you have drilled the pattern.
  • Ignore اِثْنانِ for now, and ignore كِلا / كِلْتا entirely. Two of anything is the bare dual; the extra words only add emphasis you do not yet need.
  • The demonstratives (هٰذانِ، هاتانِ) and the relative pronouns (اللَّذانِ، اللَّتانِ) have dual forms with the same ـانِ / ـَيْنِ switch. You will meet them in lessons 13 and 44 - the ending will already be familiar.

A1 13 / 70

This and that

أَسْماءُ الإِشارَة

In short

Arabic points with two families of words: a near one built on هٰذا “this”, and a far one built on ذٰلِكَ “that”. Each family has a masculine and a feminine form, a dual, and a plural, and you choose between them the same way you chose an adjective in lesson 8 - by looking at the thing you are pointing at. The good news is that these words barely inflect: apart from the duals, every demonstrative in the language is مَبْنِيّ, frozen in one shape whatever the sentence does to it.

The whole lesson then turns on one very small thing: whether the noun after the demonstrative wears الـ. هٰذا كِتابٌ is already a complete sentence - “this is a book”. هٰذا الكِتابُ is not a sentence at all; it is the two-word phrase “this book”, still waiting for someone to say something about it. One article is the difference between making a statement and merely naming an object, and beginners get it wrong constantly. Fix the pair now and everything else in this lesson is bookkeeping.

The rule

1. The near series. These point at what is close - in space, in time, or simply on the page in front of you: هٰذا (m.sg.)، هٰذِهِ (f.sg.)، هٰذانِ / هٰذَيْنِ (m.du.)، هاتانِ / هاتَيْنِ (f.du.)، هٰؤُلاءِ (plural, people). Inside them you can still see the joints: ها is the old particle of drawing attention, and ذا، ذِهِ، ذانِ، تانِ are the pointing words proper. That is why the feminine dual is هاتانِ and not *هٰذَتانِ - it is ها + تانِ.

2. The far series. These point at what is further away, or - very often in modern prose - back at something already mentioned: ذٰلِكَ (m.sg.)، تِلْكَ (f.sg.)، أُولٰئِكَ (plural, people). Here too the parts are visible: ذا + لِ + كَ. The ل is the marker of distance, and the final كَ is addressed to the person you are speaking to, roughly “that one over there, as you can see”. Modern writing keeps ذٰلِكَ fixed for every listener; only old and very formal texts vary that final letter.

3. Everything but the duals is frozen. A demonstrative is مَبْنِيّ - it does not take case endings at all. هٰذا is هٰذا as subject, after a preposition, everywhere; هٰؤُلاءِ always ends in a kasra; ذٰلِكَ always ends in a fatḥa; تِلْكَ never changes. Only the dual forms behave like real duals and show the alif / yāʾ alternation you met in lesson 12:

  • هٰذانِ الوَلَدانِ صَديقانِ. - nominative, so the alif form
  • أَنا مَعَ هٰذَيْنِ الوَلَدَيْنِ. - after a preposition, so the yāʾ form
  • هاتانِ الغُرْفَتانِ نَظيفَتانِ. / فِي هاتَيْنِ الغُرْفَتَيْنِ

Notice that the demonstrative and the noun move together: both are nominative, or both oblique. They are one unit, so they cannot disagree.

4. هٰذا كِتابٌ - the sentence. Put a demonstrative in front of an indefinite noun and you have a complete nominal sentence of the kind you built in lesson 2. The demonstrative is the مُبْتَدَأ, the indefinite noun is the خَبَر, and English has to supply a verb that Arabic does not need:

  • هٰذا بَيْتٌ. - This is a house.
  • هٰذِهِ سَيّارَةٌ سَريعَةٌ. - This is a fast car.
  • ذٰلِكَ مُهَنْدِسٌ. - That is an engineer.
  • هٰؤُلاءِ طُلّابٌ. - These are students.

The tanwīn on the second word is doing real work: it marks that noun as indefinite, and an indefinite noun after the pointer can only be the predicate - the sentence is finished.

5. هٰذا الكِتابُ - the phrase. Put the same demonstrative in front of a noun that carries الـ and nothing has been stated yet. The two words simply stand side by side as one naming expression, “this book”, and the sentence is still to come:

  • هٰذا البَيْتُ - this house
  • هٰذِهِ السَّيّارَةُ - this car
  • تِلْكَ المَدينَةُ - that city
  • هٰؤُلاءِ الطُّلّابُ - these students

The reason is worth keeping, because it explains every case in this lesson: a demonstrative is definite by nature. Definite pointer + definite noun = one referring phrase. Definite pointer + indefinite noun = subject + predicate = a sentence. Definiteness decides, not intonation.

6. Both constructions at once. Once you have the phrase, you can say something about it - and what you add is, of course, indefinite:

  • هٰذا البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. - This house is big.
  • هٰذِهِ السَّيّارَةُ قَديمَةٌ. - This car is old.
  • هٰؤُلاءِ الطُّلّابُ مِنْ مِصْرَ. - These students are from Egypt.

And if you want an adjective inside the phrase rather than a predicate after it, the adjective agrees in definiteness and takes الـ as well (lesson 8): هٰذا البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ “this big house”, which can then get its own predicate - هٰذا البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ قَديمٌ “this big house is old”. Three words, one article missing or present, three different meanings; read the pair aloud until the difference is audible.

7. Non-human plurals point with هٰذِهِ. This is lesson 11 turning up again, and it is the second big trap. Anything that is not a person - books, cars, houses, ideas - is treated in the plural as a feminine singular, so it takes the feminine singular demonstrative:

  • هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ. - These books are new.
  • تِلْكَ السَّيّاراتُ غالِيَةٌ. - Those cars are expensive.
  • هٰذِهِ مُدُنٌ كَبيرَةٌ. - These are big cities.

هٰؤُلاءِ and أُولٰئِكَ are for people only: هٰؤُلاءِ الأَوْلادُ، أُولٰئِكَ المُعَلِّماتُ، هٰؤُلاءِ المُهَنْدِسونَ. Writing *هٰؤُلاءِ الكُتُبُ is the kind of mistake a native speaker notices instantly, and it is entirely avoidable: ask yourself “are these human?” before you reach for the plural demonstrative.

8. An already-definite noun still gives you a sentence. A noun made definite by an attached pronoun (lesson 7) cannot take الـ - one definiteness marker per word. So when such a noun follows a demonstrative, the phrase reading is simply not available, and what you get is the sentence:

  • هٰذا كِتابي. - This is my book. (never “this book of mine”)
  • هٰذِهِ مَدْرَسَتُنا. - This is our school.
  • هٰذا أَحْمَدُ. - This is Ahmad.

To say “this book of mine”, you flip the order and put the demonstrative after the noun: كِتابي هٰذا جَديدٌ “this book of mine is new”، سَيّارَتُها تِلْكَ “that car of hers”. The same flip is what you will use with the إِضافَة in lesson 20. With an الـ noun, though, keep the normal order - هٰذا البَيْتُ, not البَيْتُ هٰذا.

9. The noun carries the visible grammar. Because the demonstrative is frozen, the case of the phrase shows up on the noun alone:

  • هٰذا الكِتابُ جَديدٌ. - nominative on الكِتابُ
  • المِفْتاحُ فِي هٰذِهِ الحَقيبَةِ. - genitive after the preposition, on الحَقيبَةِ
  • مَعَ هٰؤُلاءِ الطُّلّابِ - genitive again, while هٰؤُلاءِ keeps its own kasra

The duals are the exception, as in point 3: there both words move. Everything else you write once and forget.

10. The dagger alif. هٰذا، هٰذِهِ، هٰؤُلاءِ، ذٰلِكَ، أُولٰئِكَ all contain a long ā that is pronounced but not written as an alif. In fully vocalized text it appears as a small vertical stroke, the أَلِف خَنْجَرِيَّة (dagger alif), and this path prints it. In ordinary Arabic you will see هذا، هذه، هؤلاء، ذلك، أولئك with no mark at all - the vowel is still there in the pronunciation. Never “help” the spelling by writing a full alif: *هاذا and *ذالك are wrong. Two more oddities in the same family: أُولٰئِكَ contains a silent و that is written and never pronounced, and هٰذِهِ ends in a real ه, not a ة.

11. Left to other lessons. “This is the book which I read” needs الَّذي - lesson 39. “There is a book here / over there” with هُنا and هُناكَ belongs to lesson 17. Both are neighbours of this topic, and neither is needed to point at something.

Forms & patterns

The near series, in full. The right-hand column shows the shape you will actually write.

المُشارُ إِلَيْهِالقَريبمِثال
مُفْرَد مُذَكَّرهٰذاهٰذا الوَلَدُ
مُفْرَد مُؤَنَّثهٰذِهِهٰذِهِ البِنْتُ
مُثَنّى مُذَكَّر (مَرْفوع)هٰذانِهٰذانِ الوَلَدانِ
مُثَنّى مُذَكَّر (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)هٰذَيْنِمَعَ هٰذَيْنِ الوَلَدَيْنِ
مُثَنّى مُؤَنَّث (مَرْفوع)هاتانِهاتانِ البِنْتانِ
مُثَنّى مُؤَنَّث (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)هاتَيْنِمَعَ هاتَيْنِ البِنْتَيْنِ
جَمْعُ العاقِل (مُذَكَّر ومُؤَنَّث)هٰؤُلاءِهٰؤُلاءِ الأَوْلادُ
جَمْعُ غَيْرِ العاقِلهٰذِهِهٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ

The far series, exactly parallel:

المُشارُ إِلَيْهِالبَعيدمِثال
مُفْرَد مُذَكَّرذٰلِكَذٰلِكَ الرَّجُلُ
مُفْرَد مُؤَنَّثتِلْكَتِلْكَ المَدينَةُ
مُثَنّى مُذَكَّر (مَرْفوع)ذانِكَذانِكَ الرَّجُلانِ
مُثَنّى مُذَكَّر (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)ذَيْنِكَمَعَ ذَيْنِكَ الرَّجُلَيْنِ
مُثَنّى مُؤَنَّث (مَرْفوع)تانِكَتانِكَ الطّالِبَتانِ
مُثَنّى مُؤَنَّث (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)تَيْنِكَمَعَ تَيْنِكَ الطّالِبَتَيْنِ
جَمْعُ العاقِل (مُذَكَّر ومُؤَنَّث)أُولٰئِكَأُولٰئِكَ المُعَلِّماتُ
جَمْعُ غَيْرِ العاقِلتِلْكَتِلْكَ السَّيّاراتُ

The four far duals are printed for completeness only. They are genuinely rare in modern writing - recognize them if you meet them and do not spend memory on producing them. The three you must own are ذٰلِكَ، تِلْكَ، أُولٰئِكَ.

The two constructions, side by side. This is the table to memorize:

البِناءالمِثالEnglish
إِشارَة + نَكِرَةهٰذا بَيْتٌ.This is a house. (a sentence)
إِشارَة + مَعْرِفَة بِـ«الـ»هٰذا البَيْتُthis house (a phrase)
إِشارَة + مَعْرِفَة + خَبَرهٰذا البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.This house is big.
إِشارَة + مَعْرِفَة + نَعْتهٰذا البَيْتُ الكَبيرُthis big house (a phrase)
إِشارَة + مَعْرِفَة + نَعْت + خَبَرهٰذا البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ قَديمٌ.This big house is old.
إِشارَة + اسْم بِضَميرٍهٰذا بَيْتي.This is my house. (a sentence)
اسْم بِضَميرٍ + إِشارَةبَيْتي هٰذاthis house of mine (a phrase)

Frozen singular against declining dual - watch which words change:

الحالَةمُفْرَدمُثَنّى
مَرْفوعهٰذا الكِتابُ جَديدٌ.هٰذانِ الكِتابانِ جَديدانِ.
مَجْرورفِي هٰذا الكِتابِفِي هٰذَيْنِ الكِتابَيْنِ

The accusative of the dual uses the same هٰذَيْنِ / هاتَيْنِ forms as the genitive; you will start writing it in lesson 29, once verbs have objects.

Spelling: what this path prints, and what you will see everywhere else.

مَعَ الأَلِفِ الخَنْجَرِيَّةالكِتابَةُ المُعْتادَة
هٰذاهذا
هٰذِهِهذه
هٰذانِ، هٰذَيْنِهذان، هذين
هٰؤُلاءِهؤلاء
ذٰلِكَذلك
أُولٰئِكَأولئك
هٰكَذاهكذا
لٰكِنْلكن

Examples

العربيةEnglish
هٰذا كِتابٌ، وهٰذِهِ حَقيبَةٌ.This is a book, and this is a bag.
هٰذا الكِتابُ جَديدٌ جِدًّا.This book is very new.
هٰذِهِ السَّيّارَةُ الحَمْراءُ سَريعَةٌ.This red car is fast.
ما هٰذا؟What is this?
هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ قَديمَةٌ.These books are old.
تِلْكَ السَّيّاراتُ أَمامَ المَدْرَسَةِ.Those cars are in front of the school.
ذٰلِكَ الرَّجُلُ مُهَنْدِسٌ.That man is an engineer.
هٰؤُلاءِ الطُّلّابُ مِنْ مِصْرَ.These students are from Egypt.
أُولٰئِكَ مُعَلِّماتٌ فِي مَدْرَسَتِنا.Those women are teachers at our school.
هٰذانِ الوَلَدانِ أَخَوانِ.These two boys are brothers.
أَنا مَعَ هاتَيْنِ الطّالِبَتَيْنِ.I am with these two students.
هٰذا كِتابي، وذٰلِكَ كِتابُكِ.This is my book, and that is yours (f.).
كِتابي هٰذا مِنَ المَكْتَبَةِ.This book of mine is from the library.
المِفْتاحُ فِي هٰذِهِ الحَقيبَةِ.The key is in this bag.

Common mistakes

  • هٰذا كِتابٌ (meaning “this book”) -> هٰذا الكِتابُ - with an indefinite noun you have written the whole sentence “this is a book”. The phrase needs الـ on the noun.
  • هٰذا الكِتابُ (meaning “this is a book”) -> هٰذا كِتابٌ - the reverse error. With الـ nothing has been said yet; you have only named the object.
  • هٰذا البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ (meaning “this house is big”) -> هٰذا البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ - a predicate is indefinite. Put الـ on the adjective and it joins the phrase instead.
  • هٰؤُلاءِ الكُتُبُ -> هٰذِهِ الكُتُبُ - هٰؤُلاءِ is for people. Non-human plurals take the feminine singular, exactly as in lesson 11.
  • أُولٰئِكَ المُدُنُ -> تِلْكَ المُدُنُ - same rule in the far series: cities are not people.
  • هٰذِهِ الكِتابُ -> هٰذا الكِتابُ - كِتاب is masculine, so the pointer is masculine. Check the noun’s gender before you point.
  • هٰذا كِتابي (meaning “this book of mine”) -> كِتابي هٰذا - a noun carrying a pronoun suffix cannot take الـ, so the demonstrative has to follow it to make a phrase.
  • فِي هٰذانِ الكِتابَيْنِ -> فِي هٰذَيْنِ الكِتابَيْنِ - the dual demonstrative is the one form that declines, and after a preposition it must match its noun.
  • هٰذَيْنِ الطّالِبانِ نَشيطانِ -> هٰذانِ الطّالِبانِ نَشيطانِ - subject position, so both words take the alif form.
  • هاذا / ذالك -> هٰذا / ذٰلِكَ (written هذا / ذلك) - the long ā of these words is never written as a full alif.
  • أُلٰئِكَ -> أُولٰئِكَ - the silent و is part of the spelling even though you do not pronounce it.

Tips

  • One question decides everything: does the noun after the demonstrative wear الـ? With الـ it is a phrase; without it, you have made a statement. Say هٰذا بَيْتٌ / هٰذا البَيْتُ out loud as a pair until the choice is reflex.
  • Learn هٰذا and هٰذِهِ first and thoroughly. هٰذِهِ alone covers feminine singulars and every non-human plural in the language, which makes it the most useful of them all.
  • Remember that ال after a demonstrative is هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل: هٰذا الكِتابُ runs together as one unbroken group, with no glottal stop and no extra vowel between the two words.
  • Keep writing the shadda on sun letters inside the phrase: هٰذا الطّالِبُ، هٰذِهِ السَّيّارَةُ، ذٰلِكَ الرَّجُلُ.
  • Hook the far series on its own shape: ذا + لِ + كَ. The ل of distance shows up only in ذٰلِكَ and تِلْكَ, but every far form ends in that كَ.
  • Do not practise producing the far duals ذانِكَ، تانِكَ. Recognizing them is enough; even careful modern writers reach for something else.
  • Print the dagger alif while you are learning, then drop it when you write real Arabic - but never drop the sound. هذا is two syllables with a long first one.
  • Pointing at a person you can see, and pointing back at something said three lines earlier, use the same words. In news and academic prose ذٰلِكَ is usually the second kind, and it is one of the commonest words on the page.

A1 14 / 70

The present tense

الفِعْلُ المُضارِع

In short

Every sentence you have built so far has been a nominal sentence - a subject and a predicate with no verb at all: البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ، هٰذِهِ سَيّارَتي. This lesson gives you the verb. Arabic runs on two tenses only, and the one called المُضارِع is the one that does the present: أَكْتُبُ “I write”, نَدْرُسُ “we study”, يَشْرَبونَ “they drink”. Learn its thirteen forms and you can say what anybody is doing.

The machinery is unusually tidy. A letter in front of the verb tells you the person - أ for “I”, نـ for “we”, تـ for “you”, يـ for “he” - and an ending at the back tells you the number and the gender. English needs a separate pronoun and an auxiliary to say “she is writing”; Arabic says تَكْتُبُ and is finished. The one thing you cannot work out for yourself is the vowel in the middle of the stem, and for that there is a dictionary.

The rule

1. One Arabic tense, two English ones. المُضارِع covers both the habit and the thing happening right now. أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ is “I study Arabic” (every week, as a fact about me) and “I am studying Arabic” (at this moment, with the book open). Arabic has no separate progressive conjugation and needs none - a word like الآنَ “now” or كُلَّ يَوْمٍ “every day” supplies the difference when it matters. Do not go looking for an equivalent of “am/is/are + -ing”; there isn’t one, and that is one whole English tense you never have to translate.

2. The prefix carries the person. Four letters, glued to the front of the stem, and in Form I each carries a fatḥa:

  • أَـ = I - أَكْتُبُ
  • نَـ = we - نَكْتُبُ
  • تَـ = you (any number, any gender), plus “she” and “they two” (f.) - تَكْتُبُ
  • يَـ = he, plus “they” (m.) and “they” (f.pl.) - يَكْتُبُ

This is the opposite of the past tense you meet in lesson 18, where everything happens at the back of the word. Here you read the front of the verb first.

3. The suffix carries number and gender. Five of the thirteen cells take no suffix at all and simply end in a ḍamma - four shapes, because تَكْتُبُ serves two of them: أَكْتُبُ، نَكْتُبُ، تَكْتُبُ، يَكْتُبُ. The rest add one of four endings:

  • ـينَ - you, one woman: تَكْتُبينَ
  • ـانِ - any two people: تَكْتُبانِ، يَكْتُبانِ
  • ـونَ - a group of men (or a mixed group): تَكْتُبونَ، يَكْتُبونَ
  • ـْنَ - a group of women: تَكْتُبْنَ، يَكْتُبْنَ

Prefix plus suffix together identify the cell. تَـ alone is ambiguous; تَـ + ـينَ is not.

4. تـ does the heaviest work, and it is genuinely ambiguous. تَكْتُبُ, with nothing on the end, is both “you write” (to one man) and “she writes”. Nothing in the form distinguishes them - the sentence does. If the subject is expressed, you can see it: سَلْمى تَكْتُبُ is unmistakably “Salma writes”. If it is not, the person you are speaking to is normally “you” and anybody else is “she”. Arabic tolerates this because in a real conversation the two never collide. Get used to asking, every time you meet a تَـ verb, “you - or she?”

5. The stem vowel is dictionary information. Between the second and third root letters of a Form I verb sits a single short vowel, and for the commonest past shape, فَعَلَ, it is not predictable. كَتَبَ and ذَهَبَ look identical in the past; their imperfects are يَكْتُبُ and يَذْهَبُ. This is why an Arabic dictionary always tells you the imperfect vowel - printing the verb twice, or the bare vowel in brackets - and why you must learn a verb as a pair - كَتَبَ - يَكْتُبُ - and never as a single word. Only three vowels are possible (ـُ، ـَ، ـِ), and two hints narrow the guess: a verb with a kasra in the past (فَهِمَ، شَرِبَ) almost always takes a fatḥa in the present (يَفْهَمُ، يَشْرَبُ), and a throat letter as second or third radical often pulls a fatḥa too (ذَهَبَ - يَذْهَبُ). Everything else you simply look up. The eight verbs tabled below carry you through A1.

Note also that the first radical of the stem carries a sukūn throughout: يَكْـتُبُ، يَشْـرَبُ، يَجْـلِسُ. The stem never changes shape across the thirteen cells - only the vowel that sits in it, once, forever.

6. The final ـُ and the ن are a mood, not decoration. The plain form printed here is called المُضارِعُ المَرْفوعُ, the indicative, and it is marked in two ways: by the ḍamma on the last letter (أَكْتُبُ), or, in the forms that take an ending, by the ن of ـينَ / ـانِ / ـونَ. Both markers are removable. After certain particles the ḍamma turns into a fatḥa and those three ن’s fall off altogether - يَكْتُبَ، تَكْتُبي، يَكْتُبوا; that is the subjunctive of lesson 33. Another set of particles drops the ḍamma to a sukūn instead - يَكْتُبْ - and that is the jussive of lesson 35. You do not need either yet; you need to know that the ن you are learning is information and not padding, so that dropping it later feels like a rule and not like a typo.

Two cells are exempt: تَكْتُبْنَ and يَكْتُبْنَ. Their ـنَ is the feminine-plural pronoun itself, not a mood marker, so these two forms are the same in every mood and never change.

7. The pronoun is optional - and never carries the person. Because the prefix already says who, أَكْتُبُ on its own is a complete sentence, “I write”. Adding أَنا is possible, but it is emphasis or contrast, not grammar: أَنا أَكْتُبُ وهُوَ يَقْرَأُ “I write and he reads”. What you may never do is put a pronoun in front of a verb that disagrees with it. أَنا يَكْتُبُ is not a sentence; يـ marks a third person and can never mean “I”.

When the subject is a noun placed before the verb, as in الطُّلّابُ يَدْرُسونَ, the verb agrees with it fully, exactly as above. Arabic also likes to put the verb first, and that order changes the agreement rules - that is lesson 19, and until then keep your subject in front.

8. Three ready-made frames. Three of the most useful things a beginner says - want, must, can

  • are built the same way in Arabic: a first verb, then the particle أَنْ, then a second verb whose ḍamma has become a fatḥa. Learn these as fixed blocks now and take the grammar later (lessons 33 and 39):

  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - “I want to go”

  • يَجِبُ أَنْ نَدْرُسَ - “we must study”

  • يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أَكْتُبَ - “I can write”

Three practical points. First, the two verbs carry the same person: أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ, but تُريدُ أَنْ تَذْهَبَ, نُريدُ أَنْ نَذْهَبَ. Second, يَجِبُ is impersonal - it does not change for person; you move the person onto the second verb: يَجِبُ أَنْ تَدْرُسَ، يَجِبُ أَنْ يَدْرُسوا. Third, يُمْكِنُ needs an attached pronoun (lesson 7) to say whose ability it is: يُمْكِنُني، يُمْكِنُكَ، يُمْكِنُها.

You may notice that أُريدُ and يُمْكِنُ take a ḍamma on the prefix, not the fatḥa of rule 2. That is because they are not Form I verbs. The system behind that is lesson 46; for now the frames are vocabulary.

9. What is deliberately not here. Verbs whose root contains و or ي (قالَ، مَشى، وَصَلَ) reshape their stem and are lessons 49-56. Verbs of the derived forms (دَرَّسَ، اسْتَقْبَلَ) build different stems and are 51-53. Both keep exactly the prefixes and suffixes of this lesson, which is why learning them here pays for itself many times over. Negating a present verb with لا is lesson 23; turning it into a future with سَـ / سَوْفَ is lesson 24; giving an order is lesson 36.

Forms & patterns

The full thirteen cells of the indicative, on the sound Form I verb كَتَبَ - يَكْتُبُ.

الضَّميرالمُضارِع المَرْفوعEnglish
أَناأَكْتُبُI write
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُyou write (m.sg.)
أَنْتِتَكْتُبينَyou write (f.sg.)
هُوَيَكْتُبُhe writes
هِيَتَكْتُبُshe writes
نَحْنُنَكْتُبُwe write
أَنْتُماتَكْتُبانِyou two write (m. or f.)
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَكْتُبانِthose two write (m.)
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَكْتُبانِthose two write (f.)
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبونَyou write (m.pl.)
أَنْتُنَّتَكْتُبْنَyou write (f.pl.)
هُمْيَكْتُبونَthey write (m.pl.)
هُنَّيَكْتُبْنَthey write (f.pl.)

The same thirteen taken apart, so you can see that only the frame changes:

الضَّميرالسّابِقَةاللّاحِقَةمَعَ «شَرِبَ»
أَناأَـ-أَشْرَبُ
نَحْنُنَـ-نَشْرَبُ
أَنْتَتَـ-تَشْرَبُ
أَنْتِتَــينَتَشْرَبينَ
أَنْتُماتَــانِتَشْرَبانِ
أَنْتُمْتَــونَتَشْرَبونَ
أَنْتُنَّتَــْنَتَشْرَبْنَ
هُوَيَـ-يَشْرَبُ
هِيَتَـ-تَشْرَبُ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَــانِيَشْرَبانِ
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَــانِتَشْرَبانِ
هُمْيَــونَيَشْرَبونَ
هُنَّيَــْنَيَشْرَبْنَ

Eight Form I verbs to carry you through A1. The middle column is the one to memorize; the third column is the vowel you cannot guess.

الماضيالمُضارِعحَرَكَةُ العَيْنEnglish
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُـُto write
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُـُto study
سَكَنَيَسْكُنُـُto live, to reside
ذَهَبَيَذْهَبُـَto go
فَهِمَيَفْهَمُـَto understand
شَرِبَيَشْرَبُـَto drink
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُـِto sit
أَكَلَيَأْكُلُـُto eat

Three of them in the nine cells you will use most. أَكَلَ is included because its first radical is a hamza: everything is regular except the first person, where أَ + أْ collapses into a madda - آكُلُ, not أَأْكُلُ.

الضَّميرذَهَبَجَلَسَأَكَلَ
أَناأَذْهَبُأَجْلِسُآكُلُ
أَنْتَتَذْهَبُتَجْلِسُتَأْكُلُ
أَنْتِتَذْهَبينَتَجْلِسينَتَأْكُلينَ
هُوَيَذْهَبُيَجْلِسُيَأْكُلُ
هِيَتَذْهَبُتَجْلِسُتَأْكُلُ
نَحْنُنَذْهَبُنَجْلِسُنَأْكُلُ
أَنْتُمْتَذْهَبونَتَجْلِسونَتَأْكُلونَ
هُمْيَذْهَبونَيَجْلِسونَيَأْكُلونَ
هُنَّيَذْهَبْنَيَجْلِسْنَيَأْكُلْنَ

The dual rows are left out of this last table only to keep it readable; they behave exactly as in the كَتَبَ paradigm above (تَذْهَبانِ، يَذْهَبانِ، تَجْلِسانِ، يَأْكُلانِ).

The three frames. أُريدُ is printed across its persons because you will need all of them; its own stem is irregular in ways that wait for lesson 50, so take the shapes as they are.

القالَبمِثالEnglish
أُريدُ أَنْ …أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَI want to go
تُريدُ أَنْ …تُريدُ أَنْ تَذْهَبَyou (m.) want to go
تُريدينَ أَنْ …تُريدينَ أَنْ تَذْهَبيyou (f.) want to go
يُريدُ / تُريدُ أَنْ …يُريدُ أَنْ يَشْرَبَhe wants to drink
نُريدُ أَنْ …نُريدُ أَنْ نَجْلِسَwe want to sit
يُريدونَ أَنْ …يُريدونَ أَنْ يَأْكُلواthey want to eat
يَجِبُ أَنْ …يَجِبُ أَنْ نَدْرُسَwe must study
يَجِبُ أَنْ …يَجِبُ أَنْ تَفْهَمَyou must understand
يُمْكِنُ + ضَمير أَنْ …يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أَكْتُبَI can write
يُمْكِنُ + ضَمير أَنْ …يُمْكِنُكِ أَنْ تَجْلِسيyou (f.) can sit
يُمْكِنُ + ضَمير أَنْ …يُمْكِنُها أَنْ تَذْهَبَshe can go

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَدْرُسُ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.I study Arabic every day.
أَخي يَسْكُنُ فِي بَيْروتَ.My brother lives in Beirut.
أَنْتِ تَفْهَمينَ الدَّرْسَ جَيِّدًا.You understand the lesson well.
هِيَ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى السّوقِ الآنَ.She is going to the market now.
الطُّلّابُ يَجْلِسونَ أَمامَ الأُسْتاذِ.The students are sitting in front of the teacher.
البِنْتانِ تَشْرَبانِ القَهْوَةَ.The two girls are drinking coffee.
نَحْنُ نَأْكُلُ فِي البَيْتِ، وهُمْ يَأْكُلونَ فِي المَطْعَمِ.We eat at home, and they eat at the restaurant.
الطّالِباتُ يَكْتُبْنَ فِي دَفاتِرِهِنَّ.The (female) students are writing in their notebooks.
أَنا أَجْلِسُ هُنا وأَنْتَ تَجْلِسُ هُناكَ.I am sitting here and you are sitting there.
آكُلُ الخُبْزَ وأَشْرَبُ الشّايَ فِي الصَّباحِ.I eat bread and drink tea in the morning.
أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.I want to go to the library.
يَجِبُ أَنْ نَدْرُسَ هٰذِهِ اللَّيْلَةَ.We must study tonight.
يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أَكْتُبَ بِالعَرَبِيَّةِ قَليلًا.I can write a little in Arabic.

Common mistakes

  • أَنا يَكْتُبُ -> أَنا أَكْتُبُ - the prefix, not the pronoun, carries the person, and يـ marks a third person, never “I”. The pronoun must match the verb or be left out.
  • أَنْتِ تَكْتُبُ -> أَنْتِ تَكْتُبينَ - the feminine singular “you” must have ـينَ. Without it the form has silently become “you (m.)” or “she”.
  • هِيَ يَدْرُسُ -> هِيَ تَدْرُسُ - “she” takes the تـ prefix, not يـ. The يـ of “he” is one of the commonest beginner slips because English “he/she” sit side by side.
  • أَنا أَذْهُبُ -> أَنا أَذْهَبُ - the stem vowel of ذَهَبَ is a fatḥa. It cannot be derived from the past tense; it is learned with the verb.
  • يَجْلُسُ -> يَجْلِسُ - and جَلَسَ takes a kasra. Same past-tense shape as كَتَبَ and ذَهَبَ, three different stem vowels.
  • أَأْكُلُ -> آكُلُ - the prefix hamza and the root hamza merge into a madda in the first person of أَكَلَ. Every other cell is regular: تَأْكُلُ، يَأْكُلونَ.
  • يَكْتُبوا (as a plain statement) -> يَكْتُبونَ - the ن is the mark of the indicative. The ن-less form is real Arabic, but it belongs to lessons 33 and 40.
  • نَحْنُ يَدْرُسونَ -> نَحْنُ نَدْرُسُ - “we” is نـ with no ending at all. Do not let the plural meaning pull a plural suffix onto the verb.
  • الطّالِباتُ يَكْتُبونَ -> الطّالِباتُ يَكْتُبْنَ - a group of women has its own ending ـْنَ. ـونَ is for men and for mixed groups.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - inside the frame the second verb ends in a fatḥa, never a ḍamma. Memorize the block whole and the ending comes with it.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ يَذْهَبَ (meaning “I want to go”) -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - both verbs carry the same person. As written, your sentence means “I want him to go”.
  • يُمْكِنُ أَنْ أَكْتُبَ (meaning “I can write”) -> يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أَكْتُبَ - يُمْكِنُ needs an attached pronoun to say whose ability is in question.

Tips

  • Learn every verb as a pair, past and present, out loud: كَتَبَ - يَكْتُبُ، ذَهَبَ - يَذْهَبُ. A single word is half a verb, and it is the half that cannot be guessed.
  • Drill the eight verbs in three blocks by their vowel - u, a, i - rather than alphabetically. The vowel sticks to a group far better than to a list.
  • Chant one verb straight down the five singular cells until it is reflex: أَكْتُبُ، تَكْتُبُ، تَكْتُبينَ، يَكْتُبُ، تَكْتُبُ. Add نَكْتُبُ and the four plurals next; leave the duals last.
  • Read the front of a verb before the back. The prefix answers “who?” in one letter: أَـ and نَـ settle the cell outright, يَـ narrows thirteen possibilities to four and تَـ to seven.
  • When you see تَـ, ask “you or she?” and let the subject or the conversation decide. This ambiguity is permanent - it is not something you will later learn to resolve inside the word.
  • Keep writing the final ḍamma even though a speaker stopping at the end of a sentence will not pronounce it, because of the pausal form. It is the mood, and in a few lessons you will be changing it on purpose.
  • Do not try to build “I am writing” out of separate pieces. One Arabic form covers both English presents, so the mental work here is subtraction, not addition.
  • Take أُريدُ أَنْ، يَجِبُ أَنْ and يُمْكِنُني أَنْ as three unanalysed blocks, and slot any verb you know behind them with a fatḥa on the end. That single trick buys you most of what an A1 speaker needs to say.

A1 15 / 70

Asking questions

الاسْتِفْهام

In short

Arabic asks questions the easy way. You take a finished statement, put one small word in front of it, and you are done - nothing is inverted, no auxiliary appears, no word order changes. أَنْتَ طالِبٌ “you are a student” becomes هَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبٌ؟ “are you a student?” by adding three letters, and تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ becomes هَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟ the same way. English has to reach for do, does, did and then shuffle the subject; Arabic has nothing that corresponds to any of that.

The rest of the lesson is a vocabulary list with two pieces of grammar attached. The list is the question words - مَنْ، ما، ماذا، مَتى، أَيْنَ، كَيْفَ، لِماذا، كَمْ، أَيّ - and it is short enough to learn in an afternoon. The grammar is what trips everyone up: ما and ماذا are not interchangeable, and كَمْ and أَيّ each force a particular ending on the word after them. Get those three facts right and your questions will read as Arabic, not as translated English.

The rule

1. Two particles for yes-or-no questions. A yes-or-no question is a plain statement with a question particle glued to the front. The statement itself is untouched - same words, same order, same endings.

  • هَلْ is the everyday particle. It is a separate word, written with a space after it, and it works in front of both sentence types you know: the verbal one (هَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟) and the nominal one (هَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبٌ؟، هَلِ الْبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ؟). If you learn one thing from this lesson, learn هَلْ.
  • أَ is a prefix - a single hamza written onto the first word of the sentence, with no space: أَتَعْرِفُ الْجَوابَ؟ “do you know the answer?” It is shorter, a little more formal, and it is what you will meet in headlines and in writing that wants to sound crisp.

Notice the small sound rule in هَلِ الْبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ؟: هَلْ ends in a sukūn and the hamza of الـ is not pronounced, so a helping kasra on the لام of هَلْ keeps the two consonants apart.

2. Where هَلْ cannot go, أَ can. The two particles are not fully interchangeable. هَلْ refuses to sit in front of a negated sentence, in front of إِنَّ, or in front of a conditional; أَ has no such restriction, and that is exactly why it survives in modern writing:

  • لَسْتَ طالِباً “you are not a student” → أَلَسْتَ طالِباً؟ “aren’t you a student?”
  • لَيْسَ هٰذا صَحيحاً “this is not correct” → أَلَيْسَ هٰذا صَحيحاً؟ “isn’t this correct?”
  • The tag everyone uses: أَلَيْسَ كَذٰلِكَ؟ “isn’t that so?”

هَلْ لَسْتَ طالِباً؟ is not Arabic. The same block applies to إِنَّ-sentences, which you meet in lesson 44 - هَلْ إِنَّ… is impossible, and there too the particle is أَ. لَيْسَ itself is lesson 23; all you need here is that its predicate takes the accusative, which is why the example reads طالِباً and not طالِبٌ. One further note on أَ: on a word that itself starts with a hamza it gives you two in a row - أَأَنْتَ مِنْ مِصْرَ؟ - which is correct but awkward, and most writers prefer هَلْ أَنْتَ مِنْ مِصْرَ؟ there.

3. Three answers, not two. Arabic has an extra answer word that English lacks, and it exists precisely for negative questions:

  • نَعَمْ - yes, confirming what was asked.
  • لا - no.
  • بَلى - “yes I am / yes it is”, contradicting a negative question.

The third one matters. Asked أَلَسْتَ طالِباً؟ “aren’t you a student?”, answering نَعَمْ agrees with the negative - it means “right, I am not”. To say “yes, I am” you must say بَلى، أَنا طالِبٌ. Note the spelling: بَلى ends in alif maqṣūra, never *بلا.

4. Information questions: the question word goes first, and nothing else moves. For a question with a question word, put the word - together with whatever it governs, see points 6 and 8 - at the front of the sentence, and leave the rest exactly as a statement would have it:

  • تَسْكُنُ فِي الْقاهِرَةِ → أَيْنَ تَسْكُنُ؟
  • يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ فِي السّاعَةِ التّاسِعَةِ → مَتى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟

There is no inversion (تَسْكُنُ أَنْتَ أَيْنَ؟ is nothing), and there is no do-support. The verb keeps the person ending it already had, and a nominal sentence keeps its subject and predicate in place: مَنْ هٰذا الرَّجُلُ؟ كَيْفَ حالُكَ؟

Most of these words never change their ending, whatever their job in the sentence: مَنْ، ما، ماذا، مَتى، أَيْنَ، كَيْفَ، كَمْ are all fixed forms. The one exception is أَيّ, which declines like an ordinary noun - see point 8.

5. ما before a noun, ماذا before a verb. This is the central trap of the lesson, and it is where nearly every beginner’s first mistake lives. Both words mean “what”. They are not interchangeable:

  • ما introduces a nominal sentence - it is followed by a noun, a pronoun or a demonstrative: ما اسْمُكَ؟ “what is your name?” ما هٰذا؟ “what is this?” ما رَأْيُكَ؟ “what is your opinion?” ما هُوَ الْفَرْقُ؟ “what is the difference?”
  • ماذا introduces a verb: ماذا تُريدُ؟ “what do you want?” ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟ “what are you doing?” ماذا يَحْدُثُ؟ “what is happening?”

So ماذا اسْمُكَ؟ is wrong, and it is the commonest error English speakers make here, because English uses one word for both. The mechanical test: look at what comes next. Noun or pronoun → ما. Verb → ماذا. ما in front of a verb is not gibberish, but a modern reader will not take it as a question: ما تُريدُ reads either as a negation, “you do not want”, or as a relative phrase waiting for its sentence, “what you want” (lessons 39 and 73).

مَنْ has no such split. “Who” is مَنْ in front of anything: مَنْ أَنْتَ؟ (pronoun), مَنْ هٰذِهِ الْمَرْأَةُ؟ (noun phrase), مَنْ يَعْرِفُ الْجَوابَ؟ (verb).

6. A preposition travels with its question word. Arabic never leaves a preposition stranded at the end the way English does. The preposition and the question word move to the front together, as a unit:

  • مِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ؟ “where are you from?” - not أَيْنَ أَنْتَ مِنْ؟
  • إِلى أَيْنَ تَذْهَبُ؟ “where are you going (to)?”
  • مَعَ مَنْ تَسْكُنُ؟ “who do you live with?”
  • لِمَنْ هٰذِهِ الْحَقيبَةُ؟ “whose bag is this?”
  • فِي أَيِّ يَوْمٍ نَبْدَأُ؟ “on what day do we start?”

With ما there is a spelling twist: after a preposition, interrogative ما loses its alif and fuses with the preposition - عَنْ + ما = عَمَّ، فِي + ما = فيمَ، بِ + ما = بِمَ، لِ + ما = لِمَ. Hence عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ؟ “what are you looking for?” Those are the formal forms; modern writing very often keeps ماذا whole instead - بِماذا تَشْعُرُ؟، عَنْ ماذا تَبْحَثُ؟ - and that is perfectly acceptable. The one everybody uses without thinking is already fused: لِماذا is لِ + ماذا, “for what” → “why”, and its answer normally starts with لِأَنَّ (lesson 44).

7. كَمْ takes one singular indefinite accusative. “How many books do you have?” is كَمْ كِتاباً عِنْدَكَ؟ - singular كِتاب, indefinite, with an accusative tanwīn. Not a plural. Not كَمْ كُتُبٍ, not كَمْ كِتابٌ:

  • كَمْ ساعَةً تَعْمَلُ؟ - how many hours do you work?
  • كَمْ طالِباً فِي الصَّفِّ؟ - how many students are in the class?
  • كَمْ مَرَّةً فِي الأُسْبوعِ؟ - how many times a week?
  • كَمْ لُغَةً تَعْرِفُ؟ - how many languages do you know?

That noun has a name - تَمْييز, the accusative of specification - and the numbers 11-99 take the same thing (lesson 26; the full theory is lesson 61). For now treat it as a fixed shape: كَمْ + singular + ـاً. It sounds strange to an English ear (“how many book?”) and it is entirely regular. Three everyday questions skip the تَمْييز, because there كَمْ is itself the predicate - learn them whole: كَمْ عُمْرُكَ؟ “how old are you?”, كَمِ السّاعَةُ؟ “what time is it?”, بِكَمْ هٰذا؟ “how much is this?”

8. أَيّ heads an إِضافَة, so the noun after it is genitive. أَيّ “which” is not a particle but a noun, and it is bound to whatever follows it in a genitive construct (lesson 20). Two consequences:

  • The following noun is مَجْرور and normally indefinite: أَيُّ كِتابٍ؟ “which book?” أَيُّ لَوْنٍ؟ “which colour?” Never أَيُّ الْكِتابُ. With a definite plural you get “which of the…”: أَيُّ الْكُتُبِ؟ “which of the books?”
  • أَيّ itself declines according to its own job: أَيُّ / أَيَّ / أَيِّ, tabled below.

A feminine form أَيَّة exists (أَيَّةُ لُغَةٍ تَدْرُسُ؟), but the masculine أَيّ is correct with either gender, so you can recognize أَيَّة and simply use أَيّ throughout.

9. Punctuation, and the choice-question “or”. Every question ends in the Arabic question mark «؟», which faces the other way from the English one because the line runs right-to-left; never an ASCII ”?” in an Arabic sentence. In speech a statement said with rising intonation can serve as a question, as in English, but in writing use هَلْ or أَ - the particle is what warns the reader at the start that a question is coming. And in an either-or question the “or” is أَمْ, not أَوْ: أَتَشْرَبُ الشّايَ أَمِ الْقَهْوَةَ؟ “do you drink tea or coffee?” (the rest of coordination is lesson 25).

10. What this lesson leaves alone. مَنْ and ما are also relative pronouns - “the one who”, “that which” - which is lesson 39; the numbers whose تَمْييز behaves like كَمْ’s are lesson 26; and questions in the past tense wait for lesson 18.

Forms & patterns

The two yes-or-no particles:

الأَداةالشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
هَلْseparate word, verbal sentenceهَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟Do you speak Arabic?
هَلْseparate word, nominal sentenceهَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبٌ؟Are you a student?
هَلْ+ الـ, helping kasraهَلِ الْبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ؟Is the house big?
أَprefixed, no spaceأَتَعْرِفُ الْجَوابَ؟Do you know the answer?
أَbefore لَيْسَ, where هَلْ is blockedأَلَسْتَ طالِباً؟Aren’t you a student?

The answers:

الجَوابُيُسْتَعْمَلُEnglish
نَعَمْconfirming any questionyes
لاdenying any questionno
بَلىcontradicting a negative questionyes (I am / it is)

The question words. This is the whole working set at A1:

الأَداةEnglishيَأْتي بَعْدَهامِثال
مَنْwhonoun, pronoun or verbمَنْ هٰذا الرَّجُلُ؟
ماwhatnoun or pronounما اسْمُكَ؟
ماذاwhatverbماذا تُريدُ؟
مَتىwhenanythingمَتى يَبْدَأُ الدَّرْسُ؟
أَيْنَwhereanythingأَيْنَ الْمَطارُ؟
مِنْ أَيْنَwhere fromanythingمِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ؟
إِلى أَيْنَwhere toverbإِلى أَيْنَ تَذْهَبُ؟
كَيْفَhowanythingكَيْفَ حالُكَ؟
لِماذاwhyverbلِماذا تَدْرُسُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟
كَمْhow manysingular indefinite accusativeكَمْ ساعَةً؟
أَيّwhichindefinite genitive nounأَيُّ كِتابٍ؟
لِمَنْwhose, for whomnoun phraseلِمَنْ هٰذِهِ الْحَقيبَةُ؟
مَعَ مَنْwith whomverbمَعَ مَنْ تَسْكُنُ؟

أَيّ takes the case its own job requires, while its noun stays genitive:

الحالَةالشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
مَرْفوعأَيُّأَيُّ كِتابٍ أَفْضَلُ؟Which book is better?
مَنْصوبأَيَّأَيَّ كِتابٍ تَقْرَأُ؟Which book are you reading?
مَجْرورأَيِّفِي أَيِّ ساعَةٍ؟At what time?

Examples

العربيةEnglish
هَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟ - نَعَمْ، قَليلاً.Do you speak Arabic? - Yes, a little.
هَلْ أَنْتَ طالِبٌ فِي الْجامِعَةِ؟Are you a student at the university?
أَلَسْتَ مِنْ لُبْنانَ؟ - بَلى، أَنا مِنْ بَيْروتَ.Aren’t you from Lebanon? - Yes, I am from Beirut.
ما اسْمُ الْمُدَرِّسَةِ الجَديدَةِ؟What is the new teacher’s name?
ماذا تَفْعَلُ الآنَ؟What are you doing now?
مَنْ يَعْرِفُ الْجَوابَ؟Who knows the answer?
مَتى تَصِلُ الطّائِرَةُ؟When does the plane arrive?
مِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتُمْ؟Where are you (pl.) from?
كَيْفَ تَكْتُبُ اسْمَكَ بِالْعَرَبِيَّةِ؟How do you write your name in Arabic?
لِماذا تَدْرُسُ اللُّغَةَ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟Why are you studying Arabic?
كَمْ كِتاباً فِي الْحَقيبَةِ؟How many books are in the bag?
أَيَّ لُغَةٍ تَتَكَلَّمُ فِي الْبَيْتِ؟Which language do you speak at home?
مَعَ مَنْ تَذْهَبُ إِلَى السّوقِ؟Who are you going to the market with?
عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ فِي هٰذا الْكِتابِ؟What are you looking for in this book?

Common mistakes

  • ماذا اسْمُكَ؟ -> ما اسْمُكَ؟ - a noun follows, so the word is ما. ماذا is reserved for a following verb. This is the error to fix first.
  • ما تَفْعَلُ؟ (as a question) -> ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟ - in front of a verb, MSA asks with ماذا. Left as ما, the phrase reads as a negation, “you are not doing”, or as the relative “what you are doing” - either way, not a question.
  • كَمْ كُتُبٍ عِنْدَكَ؟ / كَمْ كِتابٌ عِنْدَكَ؟ -> كَمْ كِتاباً عِنْدَكَ؟ - كَمْ never takes a plural, and the noun after it is accusative. The ـاً is the construction.
  • أَيُّ الْكِتابُ تَقْرَأُ؟ -> أَيَّ كِتابٍ تَقْرَأُ؟ - أَيّ heads a construct, so its noun is indefinite and genitive; and أَيّ here is the object, so it is accusative itself.
  • هَلْ لَسْتَ جائِعاً؟ -> أَلَسْتَ جائِعاً؟ - هَلْ cannot stand in front of a negation. The prefixed أَ is the particle that can.
  • أَلَسْتَ طالِباً؟ - نَعَمْ، أَنا طالِبٌ. -> بَلى، أَنا طالِبٌ. - نَعَمْ after a negative question agrees with the negative. To contradict it you need بَلى.
  • أَيْنَ أَنْتَ مِنْ؟ -> مِنْ أَيْنَ أَنْتَ؟ - Arabic does not strand prepositions at the end. The preposition moves to the front with its question word.
  • تَتَكَلَّمُ أَنْتَ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟ -> هَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الْعَرَبِيَّةَ؟ - there is no inversion and no auxiliary. Add a particle at the front and change nothing else.
  • كَيْفَ حالُكَ. -> كَيْفَ حالُكَ؟ - a question ends in «؟», the Arabic mark, never a full stop and never an ASCII question mark.

Tips

  • Default to هَلْ. It fits in front of any plain affirmative statement of either type, which covers nearly everything you will want to ask. Add أَ to your active use for negative questions, where هَلْ is blocked.
  • Memorize the pair ما اسْمُكَ؟ / ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟ as one unit. Every other case of “what” follows the pattern of one of those two, and the pair is faster to recall than the rule.
  • Say كَمْ ساعَةً؟ كَمْ مَرَّةً؟ كَمْ كِتاباً؟ out loud until the -an ending arrives by itself. It is a rhythm, not a calculation.
  • Watch the vowels: مَنْ “who” and مِنْ “from” are the same three letters unvocalized. Position usually settles it - مَنْ opens the question, مِنْ sits inside it.
  • Collect preposition + question word as ready-made chunks: مِنْ أَيْنَ، إِلى أَيْنَ، مَعَ مَنْ، لِمَنْ، فِي أَيِّ. They behave as single words in practice.
  • Ignore أَيَّة for now, and read عَمَّ، فيمَ، بِمَ without producing them - بِماذا and عَنْ ماذا serve perfectly well until they feel natural.
  • Build an answer bank alongside the question words: نَعَمْ، لا، بَلى، طَبْعاً “of course”, لا أَعْرِفُ “I don’t know”. A question you cannot answer is half a conversation.

A1 16 / 70

Prepositions

حُروفُ الجَرّ

In short

Prepositions are the small words that place one thing in relation to another: in the house, from the school, to the city, with a friend. Arabic needs about a dozen of them, and they are among the first words you will recognize in any text. English prepositions are famously unpredictable; the Arabic ones are unpredictable too when it comes to meaning - but their grammar is a single mechanical rule that never has an exception.

That rule is in the name. جَرّ means “pulling”, and a حَرْفُ جَرّ pulls the noun behind it into the genitive case: the noun becomes مَجْرور and normally ends in a kasra. فِي بَيْتٍ، فِي البَيْتِ، إِلَى المَدينَةِ - every one of them ends in the same sound. So this lesson is really a short vocabulary list plus one ending, wrapped in three spelling habits: three of these words are written stuck to the next word, one of them changes shape in front of الـ, and all of them take the attached pronouns you met in lesson 7.

The rule

1. The one rule: whatever follows is مَجْرور. Put a preposition in front of a noun and the noun’s final vowel becomes a kasra (point 6 has the one class of nouns that shows the same genitive with a fatḥa instead). Nothing else about the noun changes - it keeps its article or its tanwīn, it keeps its gender and number - only the case ending moves:

  • indefinite, so the kasra is doubled (tanwīn kasra, ـٍ): فِي بَيْتٍ، مِنْ مَدْرَسَةٍ، مَعَ صَديقٍ
  • definite with الـ, so a single kasra (ـِ): فِي البَيْتِ، مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ، إِلَى المَدينَةِ
  • definite by a pronoun suffix, same single kasra underneath the suffix: فِي بَيْتِهِ، مَعَ صَديقِنا

An adjective describing that noun follows it into the genitive, exactly as lesson 8 said it would: فِي البَيْتِ الكَبيرِ “in the big house”, فِي بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍ “in a big house”. The adjective copies both the case and the definiteness, so the two words rhyme.

This is the first place in the path where a case ending is forced on you by another word. Learn it as a reflex: preposition first, kasra second, no thinking in between.

2. The thirteen you actually need. Arabic textbooks list around seventeen حُروف جَرّ, several of which you will meet only in poetry and oaths. The working set is in the table below. A few notes worth having before you use them:

  • في is both “in” and “at” - Arabic does not split them the way English does.
  • بِـ is the instrument (“with a pen”), the means (“by car”), and often just “in / at” with places and prices.
  • مَعَ is company - “with a friend” - and never an instrument. English “with” covers both, so this is the pair you will mix up first.
  • عِنْدَ is “at someone’s place, in someone’s possession”; it is also how Arabic says “to have” (lesson 17).
  • لِـ is “for, to, belonging to”; كَـ is “like, as”.

Three rows at the bottom of the table need a footnote. بَعْدَ and قَبْلَ are not really حُروف جَرّ at all - they are ظُروف, adverbials of time and place, and so are مَعَ and عِنْدَ if you are being strict. حَتَّى does belong to the traditional list of prepositions, but most of the time you will meet it in front of a verb as “until / so that” instead (lesson 33). They are all printed here for one practical reason: whatever their label, the word after them is genitive, so the learner’s job is identical. Their own behaviour - why they themselves carry a fatḥa, بَعْدَ and قَبْلَ used without a following noun - is lesson 31.

3. Three of them are prefixes: بِـ، لِـ، كَـ. These are single letters, and a single letter cannot stand alone in Arabic writing. They are joined to the following word with no space at all, and no space is an error you can see:

  • بِ + قَلَمٍ = بِقَلَمٍ “with a pen”، بِ + سَيّارَةٍ = بِسَيّارَةٍ “by car”
  • لِ + مُديرٍ = لِمُديرٍ “for a director”، كَ + نَهْرٍ = كَنَهْرٍ “like a river”

In front of الـ, بِـ and كَـ simply sit down on top of it and the alif stays where it is: بِالقَلَمِ، بِالسَّيّارَةِ، كَالشَّمْسِ، كَالنَّهْرِ.

لِـ is the exception: the alif of الـ disappears. لِ + الطّالِبِ is written لِلطّالِبِ - two lāms and no alif - and لِ + المُديرِ is written لِلْمُديرِ. If the noun itself begins with ل you would in principle get three lāms; Arabic writes only two: لِ + اللُّغَةِ = لِلُّغَةِ “for the language”. No other preposition does this, and it is a spelling change only - the word is pronounced exactly as you would expect.

Two smaller habits of لِـ. In front of a noun it keeps its kasra (لِطالِبٍ، لِلْمُديرِ), but in front of a pronoun it switches to a fatḥa: لَهُ، لَها، لَكُمْ - except the first person, لي. And كَـ, alone among these, is not used with a pronoun suffix in normal Modern Standard Arabic: for “like him” you say مِثْلَهُ, not كَهُ.

4. مِنْ becomes مِنَ in front of الـ. The lām of the article carries a sukūn, and the ن of مِنْ carries a sukūn, and Arabic will not pronounce two vowelless consonants in a row. The first one therefore borrows a vowel: مِنْ + البَيْتِ = مِنَ البَيْتِ، مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ، مِنَ الصَّباحِ.

The ordinary helping vowel is a kasra, and that is what عَنْ takes: عَنِ الكِتابِ، عَنِ الرِّحْلَةِ. مِنْ is the odd one out with its fatḥa. Both are pronunciation facts that the vocalization prints; the spelling of the letters never changes.

The same collision quietly shortens the long vowel of في، عَلى and إِلى before the article - فِي البَيْتِ is said “fi-l-bayt” - but nothing at all changes in writing, so you can simply let your mouth do it.

5. Pronouns attach, exactly as in lesson 7. A preposition plus a pronoun is one word, and the pronoun is sitting in the genitive slot even though you cannot see a kasra on it: لي، لَهُ، بِهِ، مِنّي، عَنّي، مَعَها، عِنْدَهُمْ. Three seams to remember, all of them from lesson 7:

  • مِنْ and عَنْ double their ن before ـي and ـنا: مِنّي، مِنّا، عَنّي، عَنّا.
  • عَلى and إِلى turn their final ى back into a ي: عَلَيْهِ، عَلَيْكَ، إِلَيْها، إِلَيْنا. In the first person the two yāʾs fuse: عَلَيَّ، إِلَيَّ. And في does the same once only: فِيَّ, against plain فيهِ، فيها.
  • هُ becomes هِ after a kasra or a ي: بِهِ، فيهِ، عَلَيْهِ، إِلَيْهِمْ - but مِنْهُ، عَنْهُ، مَعَهُ، عِنْدَهُ.

6. The diptote trap: some nouns take a fatḥa here, not a kasra. A small but very common class of nouns - الاسْمُ المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ, “the noun forbidden to inflect fully” - refuses tanwīn and uses a fatḥa where everything else uses a kasra. So after a preposition you get:

  • إِلى مَكَّةَ، مِنْ مِصْرَ، مَعَ أَحْمَدَ، لِفاطِمَةَ - place names and personal names
  • فِي مَدارِسَ، فِي مَساجِدَ، بِمَفاتيحَ - broken plurals of the مَفاعِل / مَفاعيل shape
  • فِي بَيْتٍ أَخْضَرَ - the أَفْعَل colour and elative shapes
  • مَعَ أَصْدِقاءَ - and nouns ending in a long ـاء, such as the أَفْعِلاء plurals

The rescue clause: put الـ on such a noun, or make it the first word of an إِضافَة, and it behaves normally again - فِي المَدارِسِ، فِي مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ. Which nouns belong to the class, and why, is lesson 41. For now recognize the families above and do not force a kasra onto them.

7. You cannot hear it, and usually cannot see it. Two honest warnings. When a speaker stops at the end of a phrase, the final vowel is simply not pronounced - فِي البَيْتْ - so the kasra you are learning is audible only when the sentence keeps going. And ordinary Arabic writing prints no vowel marks at all: في البيت is what you will actually read. The ending is still grammatically there, and it still decides how the sentence is parsed; it is just invisible. That is what the pronunciation guide’s lesson on reading unvocalized text is for, and it is exactly why this path vocalizes everything.

8. What this lesson deliberately does not do. Which preposition a given verb demands - why it is بَحَثَ عَنْ for “look for” and حَصَلَ عَلى for “obtain” - is a different topic and has its own lesson (35); such a preposition is part of the verb’s dictionary entry, not a matter of logic. Saying “I have” with عِنْدي or لي is lesson 17. And two nouns glued into “the door of the house”, which also produces a genitive, is the إِضافَة of lesson 20 - a different mechanism with the same visible ending.

Forms & patterns

The thirteen prepositions. The last three rows are the borderline ones described above.

الحَرْفEnglishمِثالEnglish
فيin, atفِي الغُرْفَةِin the room
مِنْfrom, ofمِنَ اليَمَنِfrom Yemen
إِلىto, towardsإِلَى البَحْرِto the sea
عَلىon, upon, againstعَلَى الجِدارِon the wall
عَنْabout, away fromعَنِ الرِّحْلَةِabout the trip
بِـwith (an instrument), by, inبِالسَّيّارَةِby car
لِـfor, to, belonging toلِلْمُديرِfor the director
كَـlike, asكَالنَّهْرِlike the river
مَعَwith (in company)مَعَ صَديقٍwith a friend
عِنْدَat, by, in the possession ofعِنْدَ النّافِذَةِat the window
حَتَّىuntil, up toحَتَّى النِّهايَةِuntil the end
بَعْدَafterبَعْدَ الدَّرْسِafter the lesson
قَبْلَbeforeقَبْلَ الفَجْرِbefore dawn

The three that are written joined. Note the empty cell: كَـ does not take a pronoun.

الحَرْف+ نَكِرَة+ الـ+ ضَمير
بِـبِقَلَمٍبِالقَلَمِبِهِ
لِـلِطالِبٍلِلطّالِبِلَهُ
كَـكَنَهْرٍكَالنَّهْرِ(مِثْلَهُ)

What the genitive looks like on different kinds of noun. The first five are the ones you need today; the last three are printed so you can recognize them, and they are explained in lessons 40 and 46 - the sound feminine plural takes the ordinary kasra, but the sound masculine plural and the dual are marked by a letter, not by a vowel.

نَوْعُ الاسْممِثالالعَلامَة
مُفْرَد نَكِرَةفِي بَيْتٍـٍ
مُفْرَد مَعْرِفَةفِي البَيْتِـِ
مَعَ ضَميرفِي بَيْتِهِـِ
مَمْنوع مِنَ الصَّرْفإِلى مَكَّةَـَ
مَمْنوع مَعَ الـفِي المَدارِسِـِ
جَمْع مُؤَنَّث سالِممَعَ المُعَلِّماتِـاتِ
جَمْع مُذَكَّر سالِممَعَ المُعَلِّمينَـينَ
مُثَنّىمَعَ الوَلَدَيْنِـَيْنِ

The pronoun endings, first on the four that behave plainly:

الضَّميرلِبِمِنْعَنْ
أَناليبيمِنّيعَنّي
أَنْتَلَكَبِكَمِنْكَعَنْكَ
أَنْتِلَكِبِكِمِنْكِعَنْكِ
هُوَلَهُبِهِمِنْهُعَنْهُ
هِيَلَهابِهامِنْهاعَنْها
نَحْنُلَنابِنامِنّاعَنّا
أَنْتُمْلَكُمْبِكُمْمِنْكُمْعَنْكُمْ
هُمْلَهُمْبِهِمْمِنْهُمْعَنْهُمْ

And on the ones that reshape themselves at the seam:

الضَّميرعَلىإِلىفيمَعَعِنْدَ
أَناعَلَيَّإِلَيَّفِيَّمَعيعِنْدي
أَنْتَعَلَيْكَإِلَيْكَفيكَمَعَكَعِنْدَكَ
أَنْتِعَلَيْكِإِلَيْكِفيكِمَعَكِعِنْدَكِ
هُوَعَلَيْهِإِلَيْهِفيهِمَعَهُعِنْدَهُ
هِيَعَلَيْهاإِلَيْهافيهامَعَهاعِنْدَها
نَحْنُعَلَيْناإِلَيْنافينامَعَناعِنْدَنا
أَنْتُمْعَلَيْكُمْإِلَيْكُمْفيكُمْمَعَكُمْعِنْدَكُمْ
هُمْعَلَيْهِمْإِلَيْهِمْفيهِمْمَعَهُمْعِنْدَهُمْ

The feminine plurals and the duals slot in where you would expect: لَكُنَّ، لَهُنَّ، لَكُما، لَهُما، مِنْهُنَّ، عَلَيْهِما، فيهِنَّ، عِنْدَهُما. Lesson 7 has the full set.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.The book is on the table.
الطّالِبَةُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.The student is in the library.
هُمْ فِي بَيْتٍ صَغيرٍ.They are in a small house.
أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.I go to school.
صَديقي مِنَ المَغْرِبِ.My friend is from Morocco.
أَكْتُبُ بِالقَلَمِ الأَزْرَقِ.I write with the blue pen.
هٰذِهِ الهَدِيَّةُ لِلطّالِبِ الجَديدِ.This gift is for the new student.
وَجْهُهُ مُشْرِقٌ كَالشَّمْسِ.His face is bright like the sun.
المِفْتاحُ مَعي، والحَقيبَةُ عِنْدَ البابِ.The key is with me, and the bag is by the door.
أَسْأَلُ عَنِ المُديرِ الجَديدِ.I ask about the new director.
أَقْرَأُ قَبْلَ النَّوْمِ، وأَعْمَلُ حَتَّى المَساءِ.I read before sleeping, and I work until the evening.
الرِّسالَةُ مِنْها وإِلَيْهِ.The letter is from her and to him.
يُسافِرُ إِلَى مَكَّةَ فِي الصَّيْفِ.He travels to Mecca in the summer.
الأَوْلادُ فِي مَدارِسَ مُخْتَلِفَةٍ.The children are in different schools.

Common mistakes

  • فِي البَيْتُ -> فِي البَيْتِ - the preposition forces a kasra on the noun. A ḍamma after a preposition is always wrong, however natural the dictionary form feels.
  • فِي بَيْتٌ -> فِي بَيْتٍ - an indefinite noun keeps its tanwīn, but it must be the genitive tanwīn: two kasras, not two ḍammas.
  • مِنْ المَدْرَسَةِ -> مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ - the ن of مِنْ cannot keep its sukūn in front of the vowelless lām of الـ, so it takes a fatḥa. Compare عَنِ الكِتابِ, which takes a kasra instead.
  • لِ الطّالِبِ / لِالطّالِبِ -> لِلطّالِبِ - لِـ is glued on, and the alif of the article drops. Two lāms, no space, no alif.
  • ب القَلَمِ -> بِالقَلَمِ - the same gluing for بِـ and كَـ, though these two keep the alif. A single letter never stands alone as a word.
  • إِلى مَكَّةِ -> إِلى مَكَّةَ - مَكَّة is a diptote, so its genitive is a fatḥa. Same for مِنْ مِصْرَ، مَعَ أَحْمَدَ.
  • فِي المَدارِسَ -> فِي المَدارِسِ - and the reverse error: once a diptote carries الـ, it takes the ordinary kasra again.
  • مِنْي / عَنْي -> مِنّي / عَنّي - both double their ن in front of ـي and ـنا.
  • عَلىهِ / إِلىها -> عَلَيْهِ / إِلَيْها - the alif maqṣūra becomes a ي as soon as anything is attached behind it.
  • مَعَ أَنا / لِ هُوَ -> مَعي / لَهُ - an independent pronoun never follows a preposition. The attached set of lesson 7 is the only option.

Tips

  • Over-learn one reflex: preposition, then kasra. If you can do that automatically you have ninety percent of this lesson, and it will still be true at C1.
  • Store each preposition inside a whole phrase - فِي البَيْتِ، مِنَ المَدْرَسَةِ، عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ - not as a bare word with an English gloss. The ending then comes free.
  • Write بِـ، لِـ، كَـ attached from the very first day. If your hand wants to leave a space, you have filed them as words instead of as letters.
  • Say لِلطّالِبِ aloud as one word until the missing alif stops feeling like a typo.
  • بِـ versus مَعَ is the pair to drill: بِالسِّكّينِ “with a knife” (instrument), مَعَ أَخي “with my brother” (company).
  • Ignore for now which nouns are diptotes. Recognize two families - foreign or feminine proper names, and مَفاعِل-shaped plurals - and let lesson 41 do the rest.
  • Do not expect a preposition to map onto one English word. Arabic verbs pick their own prepositions and you will learn those pairs verb by verb, starting in lesson 30.
  • Practise the endings mid-sentence, not at the end of one. In pause the final vowel disappears, so a phrase you always say in isolation teaches you nothing about the case.

A1 17 / 70

Kinds of predicate: having something, and 'there is'

أَنْواعُ الخَبَرِ وتَقْديمُهُ والتَّعْبيرُ عَنِ المِلْكِيَّة

In short

Lesson 2 gave you a خَبَر that was one word: البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. That is only the smallest of its three shapes. A خَبَر can also be a whole clause (البَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ, “the house - its door is wide”) or a preposition with its noun (الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ). Nothing new is added to the sentence: it is still مُبْتَدَأ plus خَبَر, still verbless, still a جُمْلَةٌ اسْمِيَّةٌ. Only the second slot has grown.

The third shape is the one that pays off immediately, because it is how Arabic says “I have”. There is no verb that does the work of English “to have” - not at A1, not later. Instead you take a prepositional predicate, move it to the front, and let the thing owned follow as an indefinite subject: عِنْدي كِتابٌ, “with-me a-book”. The same move gives you “there is”: في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ، هُناكَ مُشْكِلَةٌ. Learn one small mechanism here and two of the most frequent sentence types in Arabic come with it.

The rule

1. The خَبَر comes in three shapes. Arabic grammar names them, and the names are worth knowing because every later lesson uses them.

  • خَبَرٌ مُفْرَدٌ - a single word, a noun or an adjective, normally indefinite, and مَرْفوع: البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ، سَميرٌ مُهَنْدِسٌ. This is lesson 2.
  • خَبَرٌ جُمْلَةٌ - a complete sentence doing the job of the predicate: البَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ، الوَلَدُ يَلْعَبُ في الحَديقَةِ.
  • خَبَرٌ شِبْهُ جُمْلَةٍ - “quasi-sentence”: a preposition plus its noun (جارٌّ ومَجْرورٌ) or a place/time word (ظَرْفٌ): الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ، المُدَرِّسُ في الصَّفِّ، الحَقيبَةُ تَحْتَ السَّريرِ.

2. A خَبَر that is a clause needs a pronoun pointing back. In البَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ the predicate clause is بابُهُ واسِعٌ, itself a miniature nominal sentence with its own مُبْتَدَأ (بابُهُ) and خَبَر (واسِعٌ). What ties it to البَيْتُ is the little ـهُ on بابُ. That pronoun is called الرّابِط, “the link”, and it is compulsory: remove it and the two halves fall apart. It agrees with the outer مُبْتَدَأ in gender and number: الشَّقَّةُ نَوافِذُها كَبيرَةٌ، الطّالِبُ خَطُّهُ جَميلٌ، المَدينَةُ شَوارِعُها نَظيفَةٌ.

You write no case ending on the clause as a whole - a sentence has no vowel to carry. The grammarians say it stands فِي مَحَلِّ رَفْعٍ, “in the position of the nominative”. For now that is a label, not a task.

3. Word order flips when the مُبْتَدَأ is indefinite. The default is مُبْتَدَأ then خَبَر. But lesson 2 also said the مُبْتَدَأ must be definite - and “I have a book” needs an indefinite one, because the book is new information. Arabic resolves the conflict by moving the شِبْهُ الجُمْلَةِ to the front:

عِنْدي كِتابٌ. / لي أَخٌ. / في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ.

The fronted predicate is now a خَبَرٌ مُقَدَّمٌ (“advanced predicate”) and the noun behind it a مُبْتَدَأٌ مُؤَخَّرٌ (“delayed subject”). This is not stylistic preference and not emphasis: with an indefinite subject the fronting is required. *كِتابٌ عِنْدي is not a sentence a native writer produces.

With a definite subject both orders are available and both are normal: الكِتابُ عِنْدي and عِنْدي الكِتابُ. Then, though, the meaning is different - “the book is with me”, about a book already under discussion. So عِنْدي الكِتابُ can never be your translation of “I have a book”.

4. The delayed subject stays مَرْفوع and indefinite. It is the subject of the sentence, not an object of anything, so it wears ـٌ: عِنْدي كِتابٌ، لي أَخٌ، في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ. Watch the two different endings sitting side by side in one short sentence: the noun after the preposition is مَجْرور (الغُرْفَةِ, with a kasra) while the delayed subject is مَرْفوع (رَجُلٌ, with tanwīn ḍamma). Neither one ever takes a fatḥa here.

5. عِنْدَ and مَعَ keep their fatḥa. Both are ظَرْف words - a place word and an accompaniment word - and both stand in the accusative, which is where their fatḥa comes from. It stays put in front of the attached pronouns: عِنْدَكَ، عِنْدَهُ، مَعَنا، never *عِنْدُكَ or *عِنْدِكَ. The one exception is the first person, where the ـي pulls a kasra in front of itself here as it does everywhere else (lesson 7): the د of عِنْدي and the ع of مَعي carry that kasra, not a fatḥa - never *عِنْدَي، *مَعَي. The only other place عِنْدَ changes shape is after مِنْ, which pulls it into the genitive: مِنْ عِنْدِهِ “from his place”. As always a final short vowel is inaudible at a pause: someone answering هَلْ عِنْدَهُ قَلَمٌ؟ with a bare نَعَمْ، عِنْدَهُ stops on عِنْدَهْ. The ḍamma is still written.

Meanwhile لِـ behaves as lesson 7 described: it switches its kasra to a fatḥa in front of every suffix except the first person - لَكَ، لَهُ، لَها، لَنا، لَهُمْ, but لي.

6. Three words for “have”, and they are not interchangeable. English flattens all of this into one verb; Arabic makes you choose.

  • عِنْدَ - “in one’s keeping”. Things you possess or have available: money, a car, a question, an appointment, time, an idea. عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ، عِنْدَنا اِمْتِحانٌ غَدًا، عِنْدَها فِكْرَةٌ. This is the everyday default for objects.
  • لِـ - ownership in the fuller sense, plus kinship, rights and inherent properties. Relatives take لِـ, not عِنْدَ: لي أَخٌ “I have a brother”. So do rights and characteristics: لَهُ حَقٌّ في ذٰلِكَ، لَها صَوْتٌ جَميلٌ، لِلْمَدينَةِ تاريخٌ طَويلٌ.
  • مَعَ - “on me right now”, physically in hand or in pocket. هَلْ مَعَكَ قَلَمٌ؟ asks whether you are carrying a pen this second; هَلْ عِنْدَكَ قَلَمٌ؟ asks whether you own one. مَعي المِفْتاحُ means the key is on my person.

The line between عِنْدَ and لِـ is not absolute in modern usage, and عِنْدي أَخٌ is heard. But the pairs عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ / لي أَخٌ are the safe, standard defaults, and كِتابٌ لي “a book of mine” (lesson 7) is only ever لِـ.

7. Followed by a noun instead of a pronoun. All three take a full noun as easily as a suffix, and the noun that follows is مَجْرور with a kasra: عِنْدَ الطَّبيبِ وَقْتٌ، مَعَ سَميرٍ حَقيبَةٌ، لِـ الطُّلّابِ حُقوقٌ - written as one word, لِلطُّلّابِ. After لِـ that kasra comes from the preposition itself (lesson 16); after عِنْدَ and مَعَ it comes from a construct, the إِضافَة of lesson 20. Same visible result either way.

8. هُناكَ for “there is”. هُناكَ is the “there” of lesson 13, the far demonstrative of place, and modern Arabic uses it exactly as English uses existential “there”:

هُناكَ مُشْكِلَةٌ. / هُناكَ مَطْعَمٌ قَريبٌ. / هُناكَ طالِبٌ في المَكْتَبِ.

Structurally it is the same sentence you have just learned: a fronted predicate with a delayed indefinite subject, still مَرْفوع, still tanwīn’d. The word هُناكَ itself never changes - no gender, no number, no ending. And its subject is normally indefinite: *هُناكَ الرَّجُلُ فِي الغُرْفَةِ is not “the man is in the room”; for that you write الرَّجُلُ فِي الغُرْفَةِ, a plain nominal sentence with a definite subject.

Where the location is stated, plain fronting is just as good and slightly more elegant: في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ، أَمامَ البَيْتِ حَديقَةٌ صَغيرَةٌ. Use هُناكَ when there is no location to name.

9. أَنا عِنْدي - grammatical, but not the default. Learners add the pronoun because English has “I”. Arabic does not need it: the ـي inside عِنْدي already says who. Written out, أَنا عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ is in fact a خَبَرٌ جُمْلَةٌ from rule 2 - أَنا is the مُبْتَدَأ, عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ is a whole sentence serving as its predicate, and the ي is the link pronoun. So it is well formed, and it reads as contrastive: “I have a car (whatever the others have).” As a neutral statement, drop أَنا.

10. Not in this lesson. Saying you do not have something needs لَيْسَ عِنْدي, which is lesson 23. Saying you had something needs كانَ عِنْدي, lesson 32 - and that one also changes the endings. The formal يوجَدُ / لا يوجَدُ “there exists”, a passive verb, waits for lesson 52. Everything on this page is present, positive and verbless.

Forms & patterns

The three shapes of خَبَر

ShapeExampleEnglish
مُفْرَد - one wordالبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.The house is big.
مُفْرَد - one wordسَميرٌ مُهَنْدِسٌ.Samir is an engineer.
جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّةالبَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ.The house has a wide door.
جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّةالوَلَدُ يَلْعَبُ في الحَديقَةِ.The boy is playing in the garden.
شِبْهُ جُمْلَةٍ - جارٌّ ومَجْرورٌالكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ.The book is on the table.
شِبْهُ جُمْلَةٍ - ظَرْفٌالحَقيبَةُ تَحْتَ السَّريرِ.The bag is under the bed.

عِنْدَ، لِـ، مَعَ with the attached pronouns

الضَّميرعِنْدَلِـمَعَEnglish
أَناعِنْديليمَعيI have / with me
أَنْتَعِنْدَكَلَكَمَعَكَyou have (m.sg.)
أَنْتِعِنْدَكِلَكِمَعَكِyou have (f.sg.)
هُوَعِنْدَهُلَهُمَعَهُhe has
هِيَعِنْدَهالَهامَعَهاshe has
نَحْنُعِنْدَنالَنامَعَناwe have
أَنْتُمْعِنْدَكُمْلَكُمْمَعَكُمْyou have (m.pl.)
هُمْعِنْدَهُمْلَهُمْمَعَهُمْthey have (m.pl.)

The remaining four persons are built the same way and are left out only to keep the table readable: عِنْدَكُنَّ، عِنْدَهُنَّ، لَكُنَّ، لَهُنَّ، مَعَكُنَّ، مَعَهُنَّ for the feminine plural, and عِنْدَكُما، عِنْدَهُما، لَكُما، لَهُما، مَعَكُما، مَعَهُما for the dual. Note that هُ keeps its ḍamma throughout here, because a fatḥa comes before it (lesson 7).

The fronted pattern, slot by slot

خَبَرٌ مُقَدَّمٌمُبْتَدَأٌ مُؤَخَّرٌEnglish
عِنْديكِتابٌI have a book.
عِنْدَهاسَيّارَةٌShe has a car.
ليأَخٌI have a brother.
لِلْمَدينَةِتاريخٌ طَويلٌThe city has a long history.
مَعَناوَقْتٌWe have time (on us).
في الغُرْفَةِرَجُلٌThere is a man in the room.
عَلى الطّاوِلَةِكِتابٌ جَديدٌThere is a new book on the table.
هُناكَمُشْكِلَةٌThere is a problem.

Choosing between the three

SayWhenExample
عِنْدَyou own it, it is available to youعِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ.
عِنْدَappointments, time, ideas, questionsعِنْدَنا اِمْتِحانٌ غَدًا.
لِـfamily and relativesلي أُخْتٌ في القاهِرَةِ.
لِـrights, qualities, things belonging by natureلَها صَوْتٌ جَميلٌ.
مَعَit is on you at this momentهَلْ مَعَكَ قَلَمٌ؟

Examples

العربيةEnglish
عِنْدي كِتابٌ جَديدٌ.I have a new book.
هَلْ عِنْدَكِ سُؤالٌ؟Do you have a question?
عِنْدَنا اِمْتِحانٌ غَدًا.We have an exam tomorrow.
لي أَخٌ وأُخْتٌ.I have a brother and a sister.
لِلْمَدينَةِ تاريخٌ طَويلٌ.The city has a long history.
هَلْ مَعَكَ قَلَمٌ؟Do you have a pen on you?
مَعي المِفْتاحُ والحَقيبَةُ.I have the key and the bag with me.
في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ يَنْتَظِرُ.There is a man waiting in the room.
أَمامَ البَيْتِ حَديقَةٌ صَغيرَةٌ.There is a small garden in front of the house.
هُناكَ مَطْعَمٌ قَريبٌ مِنَ المَحَطَّةِ.There is a restaurant near the station.
هُناكَ مُشْكِلَةٌ في الحاسوبِ.There is a problem with the computer.
البَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ.The house has a wide door.
الشَّقَّةُ نَوافِذُها كَبيرَةٌ.The flat has large windows.
الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ والحَقيبَةُ تَحْتَ السَّريرِ.The book is on the table and the bag is under the bed.

Common mistakes

  • عِنْدي الكِتابُ. (meaning “I have a book”) -> عِنْدي كِتابٌ. - The delayed subject must stay indefinite. With الـ you have said “I have the book”, about one already known to your listener.
  • كِتابٌ عِنْدي. -> عِنْدي كِتابٌ. - An indefinite subject cannot open the sentence. The شِبْهُ الجُمْلَةِ has to be fronted; that is what licenses the indefinite noun.
  • عِنْدي كِتابًا. -> عِنْدي كِتابٌ. - كِتابٌ is the مُبْتَدَأ of the sentence, not an object. There is no verb here to put anything in the accusative.
  • أَنا أَمْلِكُ قَلَمًا. (meaning “I have a pen”) -> مَعي قَلَمٌ. - Do not hunt for a verb “to have”. مَلَكَ - يَمْلِكُ “to own” does exist and is right for real ownership (يَمْلِكُ سَيّارَةً “he owns a car”), but it is too heavy for a pen in your pocket, and it will not translate “I have a question / an exam / a brother” at all.
  • أَنا عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ. (as a neutral statement) -> عِنْدي سَيّارَةٌ. - The ـي already names the owner. أَنا is grammatical but adds contrast you probably did not intend.
  • عِنْدُكَ وَقْتٌ؟ / لِكَ بَيْتٌ جَميلٌ. -> هَلْ عِنْدَكَ وَقْتٌ؟ / لَكَ بَيْتٌ جَميلٌ. - Both words wear a fatḥa in front of a suffix: عِنْدَ keeps the one it always has, and لِـ swaps its kasra for one. The exception is the first-person ـي, which takes a kasra in front of itself in all three: لي، عِنْدي، مَعي.
  • مَعي أَخٌ في القاهِرَةِ. (meaning “I have a brother in Cairo”) -> لي أَخٌ في القاهِرَةِ. - مَعَ would mean he is standing next to you. Relatives belong to لِـ.
  • هُناكَ الرَّجُلُ في الغُرْفَةِ. -> في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ. / الرَّجُلُ في الغُرْفَةِ. - هُناكَ introduces something new, so its noun is indefinite. A definite noun makes a plain nominal sentence instead.
  • البَيْتُ بابُ واسِعٌ. -> البَيْتُ بابُهُ واسِعٌ. - A clause used as a خَبَر needs the link pronoun tying it back to the مُبْتَدَأ. Without ـهُ the two halves are unrelated.
  • الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةُ. -> الكِتابُ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ. - Inside the شِبْهُ الجُمْلَةِ the preposition still governs its noun: kasra, not ḍamma.

Tips

  • Translate “I have” as “with me is” in your head, and the word order sorts itself out before you write anything: with-me a-book, to-me a-brother, in-the-room a-man.
  • Fix the two endings as a pair: kasra behind the preposition, tanwīn ḍamma on the thing owned - في الغُرْفَةِ رَجُلٌ. If both your words end alike, one of them is wrong.
  • Drill the three columns as three short chants - عِنْدي، عِنْدَكَ، عِنْدَكِ، عِنْدَهُ… then لي، لَكَ، لَكِ، لَهُ… then مَعي، مَعَكَ، مَعَكِ، مَعَهُ… They are the same twelve endings you already learned in lesson 7, so this is revision, not new memorising.
  • Sort your vocabulary as you meet it: cars, money, time and questions go with عِنْدَ; brothers, sisters, rights and voices go with لِـ; keys, phones and pens in your pocket go with مَعَ.
  • Whenever a sentence of yours starts with an indefinite noun, stop and reverse it. That single check catches most errors this pattern produces.
  • Use هُناكَ freely for “there is” - it is unmarked, modern and invariable - but prefer plain fronting when you are naming the place anyway.
  • Ignore for now the emphatic fronting of literary style, where the order itself carries the rhetoric (لِلَّهِ الأَمْرُ and the like). It is real, and nothing at A1 needs it.
  • Do not try to negate any of this yet. لَيْسَ عِنْدي reshuffles the endings, and it has a lesson of its own waiting at 28.

A1 18 / 70

The past tense

الفِعْلُ الماضي

In short

Arabic has two tenses, and you already know one of them. Lesson 14 gave you المُضارِع, the present, which marks the person with a prefix - أَكْتُبُ، تَكْتُبُ، يَكْتُبُ. The past, الماضي, does the opposite: the stem stays put and the person is bolted on at the end - كَتَبْتُ، كَتَبْتَ، كَتَبَ. Ten endings for the singular and plural, three more for the dual, and that is the entire tense. There is no “did”, no auxiliary, no irregular list to memorise.

Two things make this lesson worth slowing down for. First, the bare form كَتَبَ is not just “he wrote” - it is the shape every dictionary uses as its headword, so learning the past is learning how to look verbs up at all. Second, this is where the vowel marks stop being decoration. Written without them, كتبت is four different words: “I wrote”, “you wrote” (to a man), “you wrote” (to a woman) and “she wrote”. Only the تَشْكيل - or the surrounding sentence - tells them apart. Everything the path has said about vowelling collects its first real payment here.

The rule

1. The dictionary form is a finished sentence. Arabic has no infinitive. Where an English dictionary prints “to write”, an Arabic one prints كَتَبَ, which literally means “he wrote”. That form is the raw stem with nothing added, and it is the base you build all ten persons from. Three letters, three vowels: كَتَبَ. When this path or any dictionary names a verb, it names it in this shape.

2. الماضي is مَبْنِيٌّ - its ending never varies with the syntax. Nouns change their final vowel according to their job in the sentence (مَرْفوع، مَنْصوب، مَجْرور), and lesson 14’s present tense will later change its ending for mood. الماضي does neither. It is مَبْنِيٌّ, “built” - fixed. كَتَبَ ends in a fatḥa as subject-verb, after a question word, at the start of a sentence, in the middle of one, everywhere. That fatḥa is part of the word, not a case ending you may drop when speaking carefully:

  • كَتَبَ الدَّرْسَ. - he wrote the lesson
  • مَتى كَتَبَ الدَّرْسَ؟ - when did he write the lesson?

3. Consonant suffixes force a سُكون on the last radical. Six of the endings begin with a consonant - ـتُ، ـتَ، ـتِ، ـتُمْ، ـتُنَّ، ـنا - plus ـنَ for هُنَّ and ـتُما for the dual. Arabic does not tolerate the fatḥa of كَتَبَ sitting in front of them, so the third radical goes silent:

كَتَبَ + تُ -> كَتَبْتُ ، كَتَبَ + نا -> كَتَبْنا ، كَتَبَ + نَ -> كَتَبْنَ

Say it as a rhythm: the stem closes into one shut syllable, كَتَبْ, and the ending lands on top of it - كَتَبْتُ، كَتَبْنا، كَتَبْتُمْ. This single sukūn rule generates seven of the ten forms, and the dual كَتَبْتُما with them.

4. Vowel-initial suffixes leave the fatḥa alone. The other endings begin with a vowel, and there the last radical keeps its fatḥa: هِيَ كَتَبَتْ، هُما كَتَبا، هُما كَتَبَتا. The one to look at twice is هُمْ: the last radical rounds to a ḍamma and the و carries it as a long vowel - كَتَبوا. The ت of كَتَبَتْ is تاءُ التَّأْنيثِ السّاكِنَةُ, the feminine ت, and it carries no vowel of its own. (If the next word begins with الـ, that sukūn picks up a helping kasra so the two words can link: ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَةُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. You will hear it constantly; it changes nothing about the form itself.)

5. The silent alif in كَتَبوا. The ا at the end of كَتَبوا is not pronounced and not a vowel. It is a pure spelling device with a name - الأَلِفُ الفارِقَةُ, “the separating alif” - whose only job is to mark the و as واوُ الجَماعَةِ, the plural wāw, rather than a root letter or the word وَ (“and”). Whenever a verb ends in the plural wāw, that alif follows automatically: كَتَبوا، دَرَسوا، ذَهَبوا، جَلَسوا، فَهِموا. Never *كَتَبو. Treat وا as one indivisible two-letter ending and you will never drop it. (It does disappear once an object pronoun is attached to the verb - كَتَبوهُ - but object pronouns are lesson 29; until then, always write the alif.)

6. The ending already says who, so the pronoun is optional. كَتَبْتُ can only mean “I wrote”; no other person of the verb ends in ـْتُ. Adding أَنا is therefore not required, and sprinkling it over every sentence is one of the loudest marks of a beginner:

  • ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السّوقِ. - I went to the market (normal)
  • أَنا ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السّوقِ. - I went to the market (contrast: I did, not you)

The independent pronoun of lesson 6 goes in only when you want that emphasis, or when the sentence sets one person against another: أَنا دَرَسْتُ وهُوَ لَعِبَ. In plain narration, leave it out.

7. The middle vowel is the verb’s own property - only the dictionary knows it. In the dictionary form of an active Form I verb the first radical takes a fatḥa and the last one takes that fixed fatḥa. The middle radical is where verbs differ, and it gives three patterns:

الوَزْنExamples
فَعَلَكَتَبَ، دَرَسَ، ذَهَبَ، جَلَسَ، فَتَحَ، خَرَجَ
فَعِلَشَرِبَ، سَمِعَ، فَهِمَ، لَعِبَ، عَمِلَ
فَعُلَكَبُرَ، كَرُمَ، حَسُنَ

Little in the meaning predicts which one you get - دَرَسَ and شَرِبَ are ordinary transitive verbs with different vowels. You cannot derive it, so you look it up and store it with the word. The good news is that it is stable: whatever vowel the middle radical has in كَتَبَ, it keeps in every one of the thirteen forms. شَرِبَ gives شَرِبْتُ، شَرِبَتْ، شَرِبْنا، شَرِبوا - the kasra never turns into a fatḥa. فَعُلَ is the rare one, and it is mostly qualities rather than actions (“became big”, “became good”).

8. Learn the past and present stems as one item. The past middle vowel does not predict the present one either: كَتَبَ gives يَكْتُبُ with a ḍamma, but جَلَسَ gives يَجْلِسُ with a kasra and ذَهَبَ gives يَذْهَبُ with a fatḥa. Dictionaries print both for exactly this reason. From now on, when you meet a new verb, write down the pair - كَتَبَ / يَكْتُبُ - never just one. Two tendencies help a little: فَعِلَ verbs mostly take a fatḥa in the present - شَرِبَ، سَمِعَ، فَهِمَ، لَعِبَ give يَشْرَبُ، يَسْمَعُ، يَفْهَمُ، يَلْعَبُ - and the rare فَعُلَ verbs always take a ḍamma (كَبُرَ / يَكْبُرُ).

9. كتبت: one skeleton, four words. Strip the vowel marks and كَتَبْتُ (I), كَتَبْتَ (you m.), كَتَبْتِ (you f.) and كَتَبَتْ (she) are all written كتبت. Real Arabic prints them that way. Two of them are especially treacherous because they differ only in where the sukūn sits:

  • كَتَبْتَ - you wrote (to a man): sukūn on the ب, fatḥa on the ت
  • كَتَبَتْ - she wrote: fatḥa on the ب, sukūn on the ت

The same two letters, the same two marks, swapped. In a real text the surrounding words settle it: a noun subject standing after the verb can only be third person - كتبت الطالبة رسالة is “the student wrote a letter” - and elsewhere it is who the paragraph is talking to, or about, that decides. That skill is the pronunciation guide’s business. Here, do the opposite: vocalize everything you write, out loud and on paper, until the two rhythms - كَتَبْتَ with its shut middle syllable against كَتَبَتْ with its open one - are two different sounds in your head rather than one ambiguous spelling.

10. What the tense actually means. الماضي reports an event as finished. It covers the English simple past (“I studied yesterday”), and very often the present perfect too (“I have already studied”), because Arabic does not split those apart. What it never does is describe an action in progress - “I was writing” is not الماضي on its own. String past verbs together and you have narration, which is what this tense is for:

دَخَلْتُ الغُرْفَةَ وجَلَسْتُ وفَتَحْتُ الكِتابَ. - I entered the room, sat down and opened the book.

Everything else about the past comes later: negating it with ما or لَمْ is lesson 37, “was/were” with كانَ is lesson 32, the sharpened “has just done” with قَدْ is lesson 45, and the passive كُتِبَ is lesson 52.

11. Sound verbs here, awkward roots later. Every verb in this lesson is الفِعْلُ الصَّحيحُ السّالِمُ - three solid consonants that never mutate. Verbs whose middle or last radical is و or ي reshape their stem in the past (قالَ، باعَ، مَشى) and are lessons 50 and 56; hamzated and doubled roots are lesson 49; the derived patterns like دَرَّسَ and اِسْتَقْبَلَ are lessons 46-53. None of that touches what you are learning now, because the thirteen endings in the table below are the same for every verb in the language. Only the stem in front of them changes - and with a weak root the stem and the ending can fuse (lessons 50-56).

Forms & patterns

Form I sound verb كَتَبَ (ك-ت-ب, “to write”) - the ten singular and plural persons:

الضَّميرEndingالفِعْلEnglish
أَناـْتُكَتَبْتُI wrote
أَنْتَـْتَكَتَبْتَyou wrote (m sg)
أَنْتِـْتِكَتَبْتِyou wrote (f sg)
هُوَ-كَتَبَhe wrote
هِيَـَتْكَتَبَتْshe wrote
نَحْنُـْناكَتَبْناwe wrote
أَنْتُمْـْتُمْكَتَبْتُمْyou wrote (m pl)
أَنْتُنَّـْتُنَّكَتَبْتُنَّyou wrote (f pl)
هُمْـواكَتَبواthey wrote (m pl)
هُنَّـْنَكَتَبْنَthey wrote (f pl)

The dual (lesson 12), three cells - no first-person dual exists:

الضَّميرEndingالفِعْلEnglish
أَنْتُماـْتُماكَتَبْتُماyou two wrote
هُما (m)ـاكَتَباthey two wrote (m)
هُما (f)ـَتاكَتَبَتاthey two wrote (f)

The three middle-vowel classes, side by side in the cells that show the vowel best:

الوَزْنهُوَهِيَأَنانَحْنُهُمْEnglish
فَعَلَدَرَسَدَرَسَتْدَرَسْتُدَرَسْنادَرَسواstudied
فَعَلَذَهَبَذَهَبَتْذَهَبْتُذَهَبْناذَهَبواwent
فَعِلَشَرِبَشَرِبَتْشَرِبْتُشَرِبْناشَرِبواdrank
فَعِلَسَمِعَسَمِعَتْسَمِعْتُسَمِعْناسَمِعواheard
فَعِلَفَهِمَفَهِمَتْفَهِمْتُفَهِمْنافَهِمواunderstood
فَعُلَكَبُرَكَبُرَتْكَبُرْتُكَبُرْناكَبُرواgrew up

What to write in your vocabulary notebook - both stems, always:

الماضيالمُضارِعVowelsEnglish
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُa - uto write
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُa - uto study
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُa - ito sit
ذَهَبَيَذْهَبُa - ato go
فَتَحَيَفْتَحُa - ato open
شَرِبَيَشْرَبُi - ato drink
سَمِعَيَسْمَعُi - ato hear
فَهِمَيَفْهَمُi - ato understand
عَمِلَيَعْمَلُi - ato work, to do
كَبُرَيَكْبُرُu - uto grow up

One unvocalized skeleton, four readings - the reason this path prints the vowels:

UnvocalizedVocalizedWho
كتبتكَتَبْتُI wrote
كتبتكَتَبْتَyou wrote (to a man)
كتبتكَتَبْتِyou wrote (to a woman)
كتبتكَتَبَتْshe wrote

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كَتَبْتُ رِسالَةً إِلَى صَديقي أَمْسِ.I wrote a letter to my friend yesterday.
هَلْ شَرِبْتِ القَهْوَةَ؟Did you (f) drink the coffee?
دَرَسْنا اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.We studied Arabic at school.
ذَهَبَ إِلَى السّوقِ فِي الصَّباحِ.He went to the market in the morning.
ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.She went to the library after the lesson.
الأَوْلادُ لَعِبوا فِي الحَديقَةِ الصَّغيرَةِ.The boys played in the small garden.
البَناتُ جَلَسْنَ أَمامَ البَيْتِ.The girls sat in front of the house.
ماذا فَعَلْتُمْ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ؟What did you do on Friday?
فَهِمْتُ السُّؤالَ وكَتَبْتُ الجَوابَ.I understood the question and wrote the answer.
سَمِعْنا صَوْتًا غَريبًا فِي اللَّيْلِ.We heard a strange noise in the night.
كَبُرَ الطِّفْلُ بِسُرْعَةٍ.The child grew up quickly.
خَرَجَتا مِنَ الغُرْفَةِ مَعًا.The two of them (f) left the room together.
هَلْ رَجَعْتُما مِنَ السَّفَرِ؟Have you two come back from the trip?
عَمِلْتُ فِي مَطْعَمٍ صَغيرٍ ثُمَّ تَرَكْتُ العَمَلَ.I worked in a small restaurant, then I left the job.

Common mistakes

  • كَتَبو -> كَتَبوا - the plural wāw always drags الأَلِفُ الفارِقَةُ behind it. Write وا as a single two-letter ending and the error cannot happen.
  • كَتَبَتُ -> كَتَبْتُ - a consonant ending forces a sukūn on the last radical. There is no vowel between the ب and the ت.
  • كَتَبَتْ رِسالَةً meaning “you wrote a letter” -> كَتَبْتَ رِسالَةً - كَتَبَتْ is “she wrote”. The two marks are simply swapped: sukūn on the ب for “you (m)”, sukūn on the ت for “she”.
  • كَتَبْ -> كَتَبَ - the final fatḥa is the form itself, not a droppable case ending. (The vowelless ending you may have heard is a spoken-dialect habit, not الفُصْحى.)
  • شَرَبْتُ -> شَرِبْتُ - the middle vowel belongs to the verb, not to the person. شَرِبَ is a فَعِلَ verb in every single cell.
  • كَتَبْتُنَ -> كَتَبْتُنَّ - the ن of أَنْتُنَّ and هُنَّ is doubled; without the shadda the word does not exist.
  • كَتَبْنا meaning “they (f) wrote” -> كَتَبْنَ - ـْنا is نَحْنُ, “we”. هُنَّ takes the bare ـْنَ with no alif.
  • البَناتُ دَرَسوا -> البَناتُ دَرَسْنَ - a human feminine plural takes the feminine plural ending. The lesson-15 rule that lets you use a feminine singular applies to non-human plurals, not to girls.
  • البِنْتانِ كَتَبا -> البِنْتانِ كَتَبَتا - the dual keeps its gender in the verb, even though the pronoun هُما does not.
  • أَنا ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السّوقِ وأَنا رَجَعْتُ بَعْدَ ساعَةٍ. -> ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السّوقِ ورَجَعْتُ بَعْدَ ساعَةٍ. - the ending already carries “I”. Repeating أَنا turns plain narration into insistent contrast.

Tips

  • Memorise the endings, not the verb. Chant ـْتُ، ـْتَ، ـْتِ، ـَ، ـَتْ، ـْنا، ـْتُمْ، ـْتُنَّ، ـوا، ـْنَ once and you can conjugate any verb in Arabic: the derived forms take exactly the same set, and weak roots take it onto a reshaped stem (lessons 50-56).
  • Group the ten by shape: six start with a ت - the five “I / you” persons plus هِيَ’s ـَتْ - two start with a ن (نَحْنُ ـْنا and هُنَّ ـْنَ), and the two masculine third-person cells, كَتَبَ and كَتَبوا, carry neither. Three little families beat one flat list.
  • Vocalize كتبت by hand every time you write it, at least for a week. This is the first place in the path where تَشْكيل earns its keep, and the habit is what makes reading real, unvowelled Arabic possible later.
  • Every new verb enters your notebook as a pair, كَتَبَ / يَكْتُبُ. Recording only the past leaves you unable to say the present, and the vowel is genuinely unguessable.
  • Narrate yesterday out loud in the first person: ذَهَبْتُ، دَرَسْتُ، شَرِبْتُ، عَمِلْتُ، رَجَعْتُ. Five verbs and a couple of time words already make a paragraph.
  • Ignore for now: how to negate a past verb (lesson 37), how to say “was” (lesson 32), and anything with a و or ي inside the root (lessons 50-56). Sound verbs first.
  • Do not hunt for a continuous past. “I was writing” needs a construction Arabic builds differently; الماضي on its own always reports a completed event.

A1 19 / 70

The verbal sentence and verb-subject agreement

الجُمْلَةُ الفِعْلِيَّةُ ومُطابَقَةُ الفِعْلِ لِلْفاعِل

In short

Lesson 2 gave you a sentence with no verb in it (البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ), and lessons 14 and 22 gave you verbs that carry their own subject inside them (أَذْهَبُ، ذَهَبْتُ). This lesson joins the two halves: a verb with a noun as its subject. Arabic’s neutral, unmarked way of doing that is to put the verb first - ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ, word for word “went the students”. A sentence that opens with a verb is called الجُمْلَةُ الفِعْلِيَّةُ, and the noun that does the action is الفاعِل.

The catch, and the whole point of this lesson, is that Arabic gives you two orders and they do not agree the same way. Put the verb first and it stays singular, matching only the gender of the subject: ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ. Put the subject first and the verb agrees with it fully, in gender and number: الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا. Same meaning, same words, two different verb forms. Get this asymmetry into your ear now and you will never write the sentence that Arab grammarians nicknamed after a plague of fleas.

The rule

1. What a verbal sentence is. A جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة begins with the verb. Its two obligatory parts are:

  • الفِعْل - the verb: ذَهَبَ، وَصَلَ، يَجْلِسُ.
  • الفاعِل - the doer, the noun (or pronoun) that performs the action: الطُّلّابُ، الرَّسائِلُ.

Anything else - a prepositional phrase, a time word - normally follows them: ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. In this lesson every verb is either intransitive or takes its complement through a preposition, so that الفاعِل is the only noun whose ending you have to think about.

2. Verb first is the default. In news writing, narrative and neutral statements MSA reaches for فِعْل + فاعِل before anything else: وَصَلَ الضُّيوفُ. English cannot do this at all, so the order feels strange for about a week and then stops feeling like anything. The subject-first order الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا is equally correct Arabic and very common in modern prose, but it is not neutral: it puts the spotlight on the subject, in the way English does with “the students - they went”. Start a plain statement with the verb.

3. Verb first: the verb stays singular and matches gender only. This is the rule that has no English parallel. When the verb comes before its فاعِل, it is always singular, whatever the number of the subject. The only thing it copies is gender - the ت of the feminine:

  • masculine subject, any number: ذَهَبَ الطّالِبُ / ذَهَبَ الطّالِبانِ / ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ
  • feminine subject, any number: ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَةُ / ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَتانِ / ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ

Read the two columns down. The verb never moves. Number lives in the noun and nowhere else, so ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ is not “he went, the students” - the verb is simply neutral about number here, and the plural noun says everything.

The feminine ت is not optional in modern usage. A group of women takes it exactly as one woman does: وَصَلَتِ المُعَلِّماتُ, never *وَصَلَ المُعَلِّماتُ.

4. Subject first: full agreement. Move the noun in front and the verb must match it completely

  • gender and number, using the whole paradigm of lesson 18:

  • الطّالِبُ ذَهَبَ - الطّالِبَةُ ذَهَبَتْ

  • الطّالِبانِ ذَهَبا - الطّالِبَتانِ ذَهَبَتا

  • الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا - الطّالِباتُ ذَهَبْنَ

There is a reason, and it is worth twenty rules of memorization. When the noun comes first, the sentence is really a nominal sentence of the kind you built in lesson 2: الطُّلّابُ is the مُبْتَدَأ, and everything after it is the predicate. The verb ذَهَبوا already contains its own subject - the و is the pronoun “they” - and that pronoun points back at الطُّلّاب. So the verb is not agreeing with a following noun; it is carrying a pronoun, and a pronoun is always fully specified. Verb-first sentences have no such pronoun, because the real doer is standing right there behind the verb.

5. Non-human plurals ignore the whole thing. Lesson 11 taught that a plural of غَيْرِ العاقِل - things, animals, ideas - takes feminine singular agreement. That rule outranks this one and applies in both orders:

  • verb first: وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ. / تَصِلُ الطّائِراتُ فِي الصَّباحِ.
  • subject first: الكُتُبُ وَصَلَتْ. / السَّيّاراتُ وَصَلَتْ.

For a non-human plural, then, the two orders look the same, and you have one form to worry about instead of two. Never *الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلْنَ - ـْنَ is for groups of women.

6. الفاعِل is مَرْفوع - always. The subject of a verbal sentence carries the nominative ending, and a word list or a dictionary will not show it to you. طالب in your vocabulary notebook becomes الطّالِبُ or طالِبٌ the moment it enters a sentence:

  • singular and broken plural: ḍamma - الطّالِبُ، طالِبٌ، الطُّلّابُ، طُلّابٌ
  • sound feminine plural: ḍamma - الطّالِباتُ، طالِباتٌ
  • dual: the ending ـانِ - الطّالِبانِ، طالِبانِ
  • sound masculine plural: the ending ـونَ - المُعَلِّمونَ، مُعَلِّمونَ

Two of these are the traps. المُعَلِّمينَ is a real word, but it is not a فاعِل; as the subject of a verb it must be المُعَلِّمونَ. And a fatḥa on the subject - *ذَهَبَ الطّالِبَ - turns it into something the verb is done to, which is the topic of lesson 29 and is not what you mean here.

7. The junction kasra: ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ. The feminine past ending ـَتْ has a sukūn. The article الـ opens with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل, which disappears in the flow of speech and leaves its lām - or, before a sun letter, the doubled consonant - with a sukūn of its own. Two sukūns cannot meet: this is اِلْتِقاءُ السّاكِنَيْنِ. Arabic breaks the collision by giving the first one a kasra:

  • ذَهَبَتْ + الطّالِباتُ → ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ
  • وَصَلَتْ + الرَّسائِلُ → وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ
  • خَرَجَتْ + النِّساءُ → خَرَجَتِ النِّساءُ

It is audible - the extra vowel is clearly heard - but it is visible only in vocalized text, so in an ordinary newspaper the word still looks like ذهبت. The sukūn comes straight back when the next word does not begin with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل: ذَهَبَتْ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ، وَصَلَتْ أَمْسِ. Nothing like this happens with masculine ذَهَبَ, which already ends in a vowel.

8. Pronoun subjects need no noun at all. If the doer is a pronoun, the verb form is the subject: ذَهَبْتُ، ذَهَبْنا، ذَهَبوا. You do not add an independent pronoun to supply it - ذَهَبَ هُمْ is not Arabic - and you do not need one in front of it either. أَنا ذَهَبْتُ is possible, but like أَنا أَكْتُبُ in lesson 14 it is emphasis, not grammar.

9. The rule holds under everything you know so far. A question word or a particle in front does not change what happens between the verb and its subject:

  • هَلْ وَصَلَ الضُّيوفُ؟
  • مَتى رَجَعَتِ المُعَلِّماتُ؟
  • جَلَسَ الرِّجالُ تَحْتَ الشَّجَرَةِ وضَحِكوا.

That last one shows the natural rhythm of Arabic prose: once the subject has been named, the following verbs in the chain refer back to it with a pronoun inside them, so they take the full plural form.

10. The error with a name. Saying *ذَهَبوا الطُّلّابُ - a fully agreeing verb standing before its noun subject - is the classic mistake, and Arab grammarians labelled it أَكَلوني البَراغيثُ, “the fleas ate me”, after the shape of the sentence. A minority of old tribal dialects did it, and grammarians recorded that; standard written Arabic does not accept it. Choose one: verb first with a singular verb, or subject first with a full one.

11. Left for later. The noun that the action is done to - المَفْعولُ بِهِ, with its accusative ending - is lesson 29, and the sentences here avoid it. A verbal sentence with no mentioned doer at all (نائِبُ الفاعِل, “the letter was written”) is lesson 52. Past-tense sentences built on كانَ are lesson 32. The complete system of case endings and their sub-markers is lesson 40.

Forms & patterns

The core table. One verb, six subjects, two orders - the whole lesson is in the difference between the two right-hand columns.

الفاعِلفِعْل + فاعِلفاعِل + فِعْل
الطّالِبُذَهَبَ الطّالِبُالطّالِبُ ذَهَبَ
الطّالِبَةُذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَةُالطّالِبَةُ ذَهَبَتْ
الطّالِبانِذَهَبَ الطّالِبانِالطّالِبانِ ذَهَبا
الطّالِبَتانِذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَتانِالطّالِبَتانِ ذَهَبَتا
الطُّلّابُذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُالطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا
الطّالِباتُذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُالطّالِباتُ ذَهَبْنَ

The same asymmetry in the present tense - المُضارِع behaves exactly like الماضي here:

الفاعِلفِعْل + فاعِلفاعِل + فِعْل
الطّالِبُيَذْهَبُ الطّالِبُالطّالِبُ يَذْهَبُ
الطّالِبَةُتَذْهَبُ الطّالِبَةُالطّالِبَةُ تَذْهَبُ
الطّالِبانِيَذْهَبُ الطّالِبانِالطّالِبانِ يَذْهَبانِ
الطُّلّابُيَذْهَبُ الطُّلّابُالطُّلّابُ يَذْهَبونَ
الطّالِباتُتَذْهَبُ الطّالِباتُالطّالِباتُ يَذْهَبْنَ

Human against non-human, on وَصَلَ. Note that the bottom two rows are identical across the columns: a plural of things has only one shape.

الفاعِلفِعْل + فاعِلفاعِل + فِعْل
الرِّجالُ (عاقِل)وَصَلَ الرِّجالُالرِّجالُ وَصَلوا
النِّساءُ (عاقِل)وَصَلَتِ النِّساءُالنِّساءُ وَصَلْنَ
المُعَلِّمونَ (عاقِل)وَصَلَ المُعَلِّمونَالمُعَلِّمونَ وَصَلوا
الرَّسائِلُ (غَيْرُ العاقِل)وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُالرَّسائِلُ وَصَلَتْ
الكُتُبُ (غَيْرُ العاقِل)وَصَلَتِ الكُتُبُالكُتُبُ وَصَلَتْ
السَّيّاراتُ (غَيْرُ العاقِل)وَصَلَتِ السَّيّاراتُالسَّيّاراتُ وَصَلَتْ

The ending on the فاعِل, definite and indefinite. This is the nominative and nothing else:

النَّوْعمَعْرِفَةنَكِرَةمِثال
مُذَكَّر مُفْرَدالطّالِبُطالِبٌجَلَسَ طالِبٌ فِي الصَّفِّ.
مُؤَنَّث مُفْرَدالطّالِبَةُطالِبَةٌخَرَجَتْ طالِبَةٌ مِنَ الغُرْفَةِ.
مُثَنّىالطّالِبانِطالِبانِوَصَلَ طالِبانِ.
جَمْع مُذَكَّر سالِمالمُعَلِّمونَمُعَلِّمونَعَمِلَ مُعَلِّمونَ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.
جَمْع مُؤَنَّث سالِمالطّالِباتُطالِباتٌوَصَلَتْ طالِباتٌ.
جَمْع تَكْسيرالطُّلّابُطُلّابٌضَحِكَ طُلّابٌ فِي المَلْعَبِ.

The junction kasra, before and after:

قَبْلَ الوَصْلمَعَ الـمَعَ كَلِمَة أُخْرى
ذَهَبَتْذَهَبَتِ الطّالِبَةُذَهَبَتْ إِلَى البَيْتِ
وَصَلَتْوَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُوَصَلَتْ أَمْسِ
خَرَجَتْخَرَجَتِ النِّساءُخَرَجَتْ مِنَ البَيْتِ

Left out here: everything the verb might govern after its subject - objects, adverbials of time and place, and the accusative endings they carry.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.The students went to school.
ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ.The (female) students went to the library.
ذَهَبَ الطّالِبانِ إِلَى المَلْعَبِ.The two students went to the playing field.
الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.The students left after the lesson.
الطّالِباتُ ذَهَبْنَ مَعَ المُعَلِّمَةِ.The (female) students went with the teacher.
الطّالِبانِ ذَهَبا إِلَى البَيْتِ.The two students went home.
وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ فِي الصَّباحِ.The letters arrived in the morning.
الكُتُبُ وَصَلَتْ مِنَ المَكْتَبَةِ.The books arrived from the bookshop.
جَلَسَ الرِّجالُ تَحْتَ الشَّجَرَةِ.The men sat under the tree.
خَرَجَتِ النِّساءُ مِنَ البَيْتِ.The women went out of the house.
المُعَلِّمونَ رَجَعوا مِنَ السَّفَرِ.The teachers came back from the trip.
يَعْمَلُ المُهَنْدِسونَ فِي الشَّرِكَةِ.The engineers work at the company.
الأَوْلادُ يَلْعَبونَ فِي الحَديقَةِ.The boys are playing in the garden.
مَتى وَصَلَ الضُّيوفُ؟When did the guests arrive?

Common mistakes

  • ذَهَبوا الطُّلّابُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. -> ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ. - this is أَكَلوني البَراغيثُ. Before its noun subject the verb is singular; the plural form ـوا already contains a subject of its own.
  • ذَهَبَ الطّالِباتُ. -> ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ. - verb-first drops number, not gender. A feminine subject still pulls the ـَتْ onto the verb.
  • ذَهَبَ الطّالِبَ. -> ذَهَبَ الطّالِبُ. - الفاعِل is مَرْفوع. A fatḥa here says the student was the thing that got gone, which is neither the meaning nor a possible reading of ذَهَبَ.
  • ذَهَبَ المُعَلِّمينَ. -> ذَهَبَ المُعَلِّمونَ. - the nominative of a sound masculine plural is ـونَ. المُعَلِّمينَ is the form for other positions in the sentence.
  • الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبَ. -> الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا. - the asymmetry runs one way only. Once the subject is in front, the verb must agree with it fully.
  • ذَهَبا الطّالِبانِ. -> ذَهَبَ الطّالِبانِ. - the dual is no exception: a verb standing first is singular even when its subject is two people.
  • الطّالِباتُ ذَهَبوا. -> الطّالِباتُ ذَهَبْنَ. - ـوا is for men and mixed groups. A group of women in front of its verb takes ـْنَ.
  • الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلْنَ. -> الرَّسائِلُ وَصَلَتْ. - letters are غَيْرُ العاقِل, so the verb is feminine singular in either order. ـْنَ would make the letters into women.
  • ذَهَبَتْ الطّالِباتُ. (pronounced with a sukūn) -> ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ. - two sukūns cannot meet across the article, so the ت takes a kasra. Write it and say it.
  • ذَهَبَ هُمْ إِلَى السّوقِ. -> ذَهَبوا إِلَى السّوقِ. - a pronoun subject lives inside the verb, and a هُمْ standing after ذَهَبَ cannot do that job for it.

Tips

  • Memorize the contrast as a two-line chant, not as a rule: ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ / الطُّلّابُ ذَهَبوا. Say it until the wrong pairing sounds off.
  • Ask one question before you choose the verb form: “is the subject in front of me or behind me?” Behind → singular, gender only. In front → the full form from the paradigm.
  • Default to verb first when you write. It is the neutral order, and it is also the easier one: you only ever need two shapes of the verb, the plain one and the one with ـَتْ.
  • Watch the ending of the subject as closely as the verb. Most learner sentences that feel “off” to a reader are correct in agreement and wrong in the ـُ / ـونَ / ـانِ on the noun.
  • For non-human plurals, stop thinking about this lesson entirely and think about lesson 11: one feminine singular verb, both orders, done.
  • The kasra of ذَهَبَتِ الطّالِباتُ is worth practising out loud even though you will rarely see it printed. It is one of the small things that makes read-aloud Arabic sound right.
  • Do not try to use this order with an object yet. Keep to verbs of going, arriving, sitting, working and playing, and let lesson 29 add the second noun.

A1 20 / 70

The idafa (genitive construct)

الإِضافَة

In short

English has two ways to link a thing to its owner: “the house’s door” and “the door of the house”. Arabic has one, and it uses no linking word at all - you simply set the two nouns side by side in the order possessed-then-possessor: بابُ البَيْتِ. There is no word for “of” and no apostrophe; the whole grammar of the phrase is carried by the endings. This construction is called الإِضافَة, and it is everywhere: addresses, job titles, room names, dates, headlines. You cannot say “the university library” or “my brother’s car” without it.

What you have to learn is not the word order - that is one sentence long - but the three things the construction does to the endings. The first noun loses its article and its tanwīn, however definite it is. The second noun is locked into the genitive and never leaves it. And the whole phrase counts as definite or indefinite according to the second word, not the first. Get those three right and the rest of Arabic possession is free.

The rule

1. The two positions have names. The first noun - the thing possessed - is the مُضاف. The second noun - the possessor - is the مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ. Word order is fixed and there is nothing between them:

  • بابُ البَيْتِ - the door of the house (مُضاف = بابُ، مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ = البَيْتِ)
  • سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ - the manager’s car
  • كِتابُ الطّالِبِ - the student’s book

English reads the two words in reverse (“the student’s book”), or in the same order with “of” inserted (“the book of the student”). Arabic inserts nothing. Note also that the relationship does not have to be ownership: غُرْفَةُ الطَّعامِ is a room for food, خاتَمُ ذَهَبٍ is a ring made of gold, بابُ البَيْتِ is a part of a whole. Arabic uses one construction for the lot.

2. Iron rule one: the مُضاف takes no الـ and no tanwīn. This is the rule learners break most often, because English says “the door of the house” and the hand reaches for the article. The first word of an إِضافَة is bare: no الـ on the front, no doubled sign at the end, just a single case vowel.

  • بابٌ (a door) + البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - never *بابٌ البَيْتِ
  • البابُ (the door) + البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - never *البابُ البَيْتِ

That single bare vowel is a signal you can read: a noun carrying one vowel, no article and no tanwīn, is nearly always announcing that another noun is coming right behind it. (The one common exception is the diptote, which refuses tanwīn for reasons of its own - lesson 41.)

3. Iron rule two: the مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ is always مَجْرور. Whatever is happening in the rest of the sentence, the second term sits in the genitive and stays there. Its ending is a kasra - ـِ if it is definite, ـٍ if it is indefinite:

  • بابُ البَيْتِ / بابُ بَيْتٍ
  • سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ / سَيّارَةُ مُديرٍ

This is the one fixed point in the phrase. No verb, no preposition and no case in the outer sentence can move it. (One class of nouns shows this genitive with a fatḥa instead of a kasra - دِمَشْقَ below. Those are the diptotes of lesson 41; for now just accept the form as given.)

4. Iron rule three: definiteness comes from the second term. The مُضاف cannot carry الـ, so it cannot announce its own definiteness. The second word decides for the whole phrase:

  • بابُ البَيْتِ - the door of the house (definite: the second term has الـ)
  • بابُ بَيْتٍ - a door of a house (indefinite: the second term has tanwīn)

A proper name or a pronoun in second position also makes the phrase definite, because names and pronouns are definite in themselves: سَيّارَةُ مُحَمَّدٍ (Muhammad’s car), كِتابُهُ (his book). That last one is worth pausing on - every attached pronoun you learned in lesson 7 is the second term of an إِضافَة. You have been building constructs since then without being told.

5. Only the first word moves through the cases. Because the second term is frozen in the genitive, the outer sentence acts on the مُضاف alone. Take one construct and put it in all three slots:

  • هٰذا بابُ البَيْتِ. - the خَبَر of a nominal sentence, so مَرْفوع
  • أَغْلَقْتُ بابَ البَيْتِ. - direct object, so مَنْصوب
  • المِفْتاحُ في بابِ البَيْتِ. - after a preposition, so مَجْرور

Three sentences, one word changing. Drill this trio out loud; it is the whole case behaviour of the construction.

6. Chains: any number of links, one article at the end. The مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ can itself be the مُضاف of a further pair. Every middle word then obeys both rules at once - it is genitive (because it follows a مُضاف) and it is bare of article and tanwīn (because another noun follows it):

مِفْتاحُ بابِ بَيْتِ المُديرِ - the key to the door of the manager’s house

Only the last word may carry الـ, and only the last word decides the definiteness of the whole chain. Read a chain from its first word, adding “of” at each step. Chains of three or four are normal in writing; longer ones, and what happens when a quantifier joins in, are lesson 42.

7. The ة is heard as a ت inside an إِضافَة. A feminine first term keeps its ة in writing, but because the case vowel after it is now obligatory, the letter is pronounced as a full ت: مَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَ، مَكْتَبَةُ الجامِعَةِ، غُرْفَةُ الطَّعامِ. Said on its own, at the end of an utterance, مَدينَة is pronounced with a light final -a and the ت is not heard at all (that is the pausal form, which the pronunciation guide sets out in full). Two consequences:

  • Do not rewrite the letter. It stays ة: مَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَ, never *مَدينَتُ دِمَشْقَ. Before a following noun the ة is only heard as ت. It is actually written ت in the dual (مَدينَتانِ) and before an attached pronoun (مَدينَتُها), but not here.
  • Do not swallow it in speech. مَكْتَبَة الجامِعَة with two silent endings is dialect, not الفُصْحى.

8. The dual and the sound masculine plural drop their ن. Both endings end in a ن that exists only when the word stands free. As soon as the word becomes a مُضاف, the ن falls off:

  • مُعَلِّمانِ -> مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِ - the school’s two teachers
  • مُعَلِّمَيْنِ -> مُعَلِّمَيِ المَدْرَسَةِ - the same, in the accusative or genitive
  • مُعَلِّمونَ -> مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِ - the school’s teachers
  • مُعَلِّمينَ -> مُعَلِّمي المَدْرَسَةِ - the same, in the accusative or genitive

The ـَيْ of the dual picks up a kasra when it runs straight into الـ, which is why you see مُعَلِّمَيِ. Two endings do not drop anything: the sound feminine plural simply loses its tanwīn like any other noun (مُعَلِّماتٌ -> مُعَلِّماتُ المَدْرَسَةِ), and so does a broken plural (كُتُبٌ -> كُتُبُ الطُّلّابِ).

9. An adjective goes after the whole construct - and its case tells you what it describes. Nothing may be wedged between the two terms, so a describing word has to wait until the construct is finished. That leaves a genuine ambiguity in English, which Arabic usually resolves with the ending:

  • بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرُ - the big door of the house (nominative, matching بابُ)
  • بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرِ - the door of the big house (genitive, matching البَيْتِ)

The adjective still obeys every rule of lesson 8: it agrees in gender, number, case and definiteness. Since a definite construct makes its first term definite too, an attributive adjective takes الـ either way - so the case vowel is often the only signal left, which is one more reason this path prints the endings. Gender and number help when they can: سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُ is the manager’s new car, سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدِ is the new manager’s car. When the two terms happen to share their case as well - after a preposition, say - the phrase is simply ambiguous, and only the context decides.

If the construct is indefinite, the adjective is indefinite as well: بابُ بَيْتٍ كَبيرٌ (a big door of a house) against بابُ بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍ (a door of a big house).

10. What an إِضافَة is not. Two nouns in a row are not always a construct. If the first one carries الـ or tanwīn, you are looking at something else - a subject and its predicate (البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ), or a noun and its adjective (البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ). And Arabic does not translate English “of” with مِنْ in this sense: *بابٌ مِنَ البَيْتِ is not “the door of the house”.

Forms & patterns

One construct, all three slots - only the first word moves:

الحالَةالجُمْلَةEnglish
مَرْفوعهٰذا بابُ البَيْتِ.This is the door of the house.
مَنْصوبأَغْلَقْتُ بابَ البَيْتِ.I closed the door of the house.
مَجْرورالمِفْتاحُ في بابِ البَيْتِ.The key is in the door of the house.

Definiteness is decided by the second term:

مُضافمُضافٌ إِلَيْهِThe phraseEnglish
بابُالبَيْتِdefinitethe door of the house
بابُبَيْتٍindefinitea door of a house
سَيّارَةُالمُديرِdefinitethe manager’s car
سَيّارَةُمُديرٍindefinitea manager’s car
كِتابُمُحَمَّدٍdefiniteMuhammad’s book
كِتابُـهُdefinitehis book

What entering the construct does to the first term:

Free formAs مُضافEnglish
بابٌ / البابُبابُ المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s door
مَدينَةٌ / المَدينَةُمَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَthe city of Damascus
مُعَلِّمانِمُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s two teachers
مُعَلِّمَيْنِمُعَلِّمَيِ المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s two teachers (مَنْصوب/مَجْرور)
مُعَلِّمونَمُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s teachers
مُعَلِّمينَمُعَلِّمي المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s teachers (مَنْصوب/مَجْرور)
مُعَلِّماتٌمُعَلِّماتُ المَدْرَسَةِthe school’s teachers (f)
كُتُبٌكُتُبُ الطُّلّابِthe students’ books

Everyday pairs worth learning as single vocabulary items:

الإِضافَةEnglish
مَكْتَبَةُ الجامِعَةِthe university library
غُرْفَةُ الطَّعامِthe dining room
غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِthe bedroom
اِسْمُ الوَلَدِthe boy’s name
رَقْمُ الهاتِفِthe telephone number
مَحَطَّةُ القِطارِthe train station
نِهايَةُ الأُسْبوعِthe weekend
رَئيسُ الشَّرِكَةِthe head of the company

Chains - every middle word is bare and genitive, only the last word carries الـ:

السِّلْسِلَةEnglish
بابُ البَيْتِthe door of the house
بابُ بَيْتِ المُديرِthe door of the manager’s house
مِفْتاحُ بابِ بَيْتِ المُديرِthe key to the door of the manager’s house

The adjective after the construct, and what its ending points at:

العِبارَةIt describesEnglish
بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرُبابُ (مَرْفوع)the big door of the house
بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرِالبَيْتِ (مَجْرور)the door of the big house
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُسَيّارَةُ (feminine)the manager’s new car
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدِالمُديرِ (masculine)the new manager’s car
بابُ بَيْتٍ كَبيرٌبابُ (indefinite)a big door of a house
بابُ بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍبَيْتٍ (indefinite)a door of a big house

Examples

العربيةEnglish
هٰذا بابُ البَيْتِ.This is the door of the house.
أَغْلَقْتُ بابَ البَيْتِ بِهُدوءٍ.I closed the door of the house quietly.
المِفْتاحُ في بابِ البَيْتِ.The key is in the door of the house.
مَكْتَبَةُ الجامِعَةِ كَبيرَةٌ جِدًّا.The university library is very big.
نَأْكُلُ العَشاءَ في غُرْفَةِ الطَّعامِ.We eat dinner in the dining room.
ما اسْمُ الوَلَدِ الجَديدِ؟What is the new boy’s name?
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ أَمامَ المَكْتَبِ.The manager’s car is in front of the office.
هٰذِهِ مَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَ، وهِيَ قَديمَةٌ.This is the city of Damascus, and it is old.
مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِ في اجْتِماعٍ الآنَ.The school’s teachers are in a meeting now.
مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِ غائِبانِ اليَوْمَ.The school’s two teachers are absent today.
فَقَدْتُ مِفْتاحَ بابِ بَيْتِ المُديرِ.I lost the key to the door of the manager’s house.
قَرَأْتُ كُتُبَ الطُّلّابِ كُلَّها.I read all the students’ books.
بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرُ مَفْتوحٌ.The big door of the house is open.
فَتَحْنا بابَ البَيْتِ الكَبيرِ.We opened the door of the big house.

Common mistakes

  • البابُ البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - the first term of an إِضافَة never takes الـ, even when English says “the”. Its definiteness comes from the word after it.
  • بابٌ البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - and it never takes tanwīn either. The مُضاف ends in one bare vowel, always.
  • بابُ البَيْتُ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - the second term is مَجْرور no matter what the sentence around it is doing. It is the fixed point of the construction.
  • بابُ الكَبيرُ البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرُ - nothing may stand between the two terms. The adjective waits until the construct is complete.
  • بابٌ مِنَ البَيْتِ -> بابُ البَيْتِ - Arabic does not translate the English “of” with a preposition here. The link is the bare word order and the genitive.
  • مَدينَةٌ دِمَشْقَ -> مَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَ - a feminine first term drops its tanwīn like any other, and the ة is then pronounced as a full ت.
  • مَدينَتُ دِمَشْقَ -> مَدينَةُ دِمَشْقَ - but do not rewrite the letter. The ة is heard as a ت and still written as a ة; it is really written ت only in the dual (مَدينَتانِ) and before an attached pronoun (مَدينَتُها).
  • مُعَلِّمونَ المَدْرَسَةِ -> مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِ - the ن of the sound masculine plural drops before the second term.
  • مُعَلِّمانِ المَدْرَسَةِ -> مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِ - the same for the dual, in both its forms: مُعَلِّما and مُعَلِّمَيِ.
  • بابُ البَيْتِ كَبيرٌ (meaning “the big door of the house”) -> بابُ البَيْتِ الكَبيرُ - a definite construct takes a definite adjective. Without الـ the words are a full sentence: “the door of the house is big”.

Tips

  • Learn to read the signal, not just the rule: a noun with a single case vowel, no article and no tanwīn is nearly always telling you that another noun is coming. Do not stop at it.
  • Translate a construct backwards into English and check that it makes sense: بابُ البَيْتِ -> “door - of the house”. If your English needs “of”, your Arabic needs nothing.
  • Drill the three-slot trio (هٰذا بابُ البَيْتِ / أَغْلَقْتُ بابَ البَيْتِ / في بابِ البَيْتِ) with five different constructs. When only the first word moves without thinking, you have it.
  • Store real compounds as whole vocabulary items - غُرْفَةُ النَّوْمِ، رَقْمُ الهاتِفِ، نِهايَةُ الأُسْبوعِ - rather than assembling them each time. Half of everyday Arabic is إِضافات.
  • You already know one kind: كِتابي، بَيْتُكَ، سَيّارَتُها. An attached pronoun is a second term, which is exactly why those words refuse الـ.
  • When you want to attach two things to one owner, do not try to coordinate two first terms. Finish the construct, then continue with a pronoun: بابُ البَيْتِ ونافِذَتُهُ. The tidier ways of packing more into one phrase are lesson 42.
  • In unvocalized text the endings vanish, but the construct is still visible: a missing ن on a plural (معلمو المدرسة), or a bare first noun followed by one carrying ال (باب البيت), give it away.
  • Do not worry yet about second terms that take a fatḥa instead of a kasra - دِمَشْقَ، مِصْرَ، فاطِمَةَ. They are the diptotes of lesson 41; copy the form for now.

A1 21 / 70

Nisba adjectives

النِّسْبَة

In short

English builds its “from there / made of that” words with a scatter of endings - Egypt/Egyptian, Lebanon/Lebanese, Japan/Japanese, gold/golden, science/scientific - and you simply have to know which one each word happens to take. Arabic has one ending for all of it: ـِيٌّ, a kasra plus a doubled ya. Add it to a country, a city, a people, a material or an abstract noun and you get an adjective meaning “belonging to that, coming from that, made of that”: مِصْر → مِصْرِيٌّ، ذَهَبٌ → ذَهَبِيٌّ. Arabic grammar calls the ending النِّسْبَة, “the attribution”.

Two facts carry the whole lesson. First, the ya is doubled - the shadda is part of the word, and the case ending still sits on top of it: مِصْرِيٌّ، مِصْرِيًّا، مِصْرِيٍّ. Second, a nisba is an entirely ordinary adjective once it is built, so everything from lesson 8 applies unchanged: ة for a woman (مِصْرِيَّةٌ), الـ when the noun it describes is definite, and the same case as its noun. This one suffix is the fastest vocabulary multiplier in Modern Standard Arabic - a great many of the adjectives in a newspaper sentence are nisbas.

The rule

1. One suffix, two forms. The masculine is ـِيٌّ and the feminine is ـِيَّةٌ. The consonant before the suffix takes a kasra, and the ya carries a shadda:

  • مِصْر → مِصْرِيٌّ (an Egyptian man, Egyptian) - مِصْرِيَّةٌ (an Egyptian woman)
  • لُبْنان → لُبْنانِيٌّ - لُبْنانِيَّةٌ

2. The shadda is the word. ـِيّ is not a long vowel; it is a kasra followed by two ya’s. You can hear it: مِصْرِيٌّ has a held, doubled consonant that a plain final ي does not. In ordinary unvocalized print (مصري) nothing shows, which is exactly why beginners stop pronouncing it - and a nisba said without the doubling sounds wrong to every Arabic ear. Write the shadda in this lesson and say it out loud until your mouth remembers.

3. It still takes a case ending. The nisba declines like any triptote noun or adjective. The ending goes after the shadda, and the indefinite accusative gets its usual alif seat:

  • مَرْفوع: هُوَ مِصْرِيٌّ. / الطّالِبُ المِصْرِيُّ
  • مَنْصوب: رَأَيْتُ طالِبًا مِصْرِيًّا. / رَأَيْتُ الطّالِبَ المِصْرِيَّ.
  • مَجْرور: تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَ طالِبٍ مِصْرِيٍّ. / مَعَ الطّالِبِ المِصْرِيِّ

4. Building it, base by base. Four situations cover almost everything you will meet:

  • Just add it. A base ending in a consonant takes the suffix straight: لُبْنان → لُبْنانِيٌّ، العِراق → عِراقِيٌّ، بَغْداد → بَغْدادِيٌّ.
  • Drop a final ة. The tā’ marbūṭa always disappears first: مَكَّة → مَكِّيٌّ، القاهِرَة → قاهِرِيٌّ، فِضَّة → فِضِّيٌّ.
  • Drop the final ا of a foreign name. Names borrowed with ـا or ـيا cut back to the last real consonant: فَرَنْسا → فَرَنْسِيٌّ، أَمْريكا → أَمْريكِيٌّ، سُورِيا → سُورِيٌّ، أَلْمانِيا → أَلْمانِيٌّ، إيطالِيا → إيطالِيٌّ.
  • Drop the الـ of a country name. When the name carries an article, the article is not part of the nisba: اليابان → يابانِيٌّ، الصّين → صينِيٌّ، المَغْرِب → مَغْرِبِيٌّ، السّودان → سُودانِيٌّ، الكُوَيْت → كُوَيْتِيٌّ.

The article comes back later, for a different reason - when the whole phrase is definite: الطّالِبُ اليابانِيُّ, “the Japanese student”. That الـ is agreement with طالِب (lesson 8), not a leftover from اليابان.

5. Irregulars: a short list to memorise. A handful of very common bases change shape, and several of them grow a و before the suffix. There is a historical reason (a weak final letter, or a shortened stem), but at this stage they are simply items to learn:

  • مَدينَة → مَدَنِيٌّ (urban, civil) - the stem itself shrinks
  • سَنَة → سَنَوِيٌّ (annual), لُغَة → لُغَوِيٌّ (linguistic), يَد → يَدَوِيٌّ (manual)
  • أَخ → أَخَوِيٌّ (brotherly), أَب → أَبَوِيٌّ (paternal), سَماء → سَماوِيٌّ (heavenly)

When you are not sure, look the nisba up rather than inventing one. A dictionary lists it as its own entry.

6. Materials and colours. The same suffix on a substance gives “made of it”, and often “the colour of it” as well:

خَشَبٌ → خَشَبِيٌّ (wooden), زُجاجٌ → زُجاجِيٌّ (glass), قُطْنٌ → قُطْنِيٌّ (cotton), ذَهَبٌ → ذَهَبِيٌّ (gold, golden), فِضَّةٌ → فِضِّيٌّ (silver).

Arabic keeps the older phrasing too - بابٌ مِنْ خَشَبٍ, “a door of wood” - and both are current. What you may not do is mix them: مِنْ takes the plain noun, never the nisba.

7. Far beyond nationalities. Any noun with a field of meaning can produce one, and MSA leans on this constantly: عِلْمٌ → عِلْمِيٌّ (scientific), سِياسَةٌ → سِياسِيٌّ (political), اِقْتِصادٌ → اِقْتِصادِيٌّ (economic), تاريخٌ → تاريخِيٌّ (historical), ثَقافَةٌ → ثَقافِيٌّ (cultural), طَبيعَةٌ → طَبيعِيٌّ (natural), قانونٌ → قانونِيٌّ (legal), رَسْمٌ → رَسْمِيٌّ (official).

Build these from the singular: قَوانينُ is the plural of قانونٌ, and the adjective is قانونِيٌّ, not anything built on the plural. A handful of fixed words do sit on a plural (أَخْلاقٌ → أَخْلاقِيٌّ, “ethical”), but those are vocabulary, not a licence to make your own.

8. It behaves like any other adjective. Nothing about agreement is special. The nisba follows its noun and copies gender, number, definiteness and case:

  • الطّالِبُ المِصْرِيُّ - المِصْرِيَّةُ is what you write for a woman
  • سِفارَةٌ أَلْمانِيَّةٌ - both indefinite
  • في الشَّرِكَةِ الفَرَنْسِيَّةِ - both definite and مَجْرور

9. It is also a noun. مِصْرِيٌّ on its own means “an Egyptian”, exactly as in English. And the feminine nisba, made definite, is how Arabic names a language: العَرَبِيَّةُ، الفَرَنْسِيَّةُ، اليابانِيَّةُ - short for اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ and so on. Both halves of that phrase are feminine, which is why *اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيُّ is impossible.

10. Plurals. For people, the ordinary sound plurals of lesson 9 do the work. The ya keeps its shadda and takes the vowel that the ending requires:

  • masculine: مِصْرِيُّونَ (مَرْفوع) / مِصْرِيِّينَ (مَنْصوب and مَجْرور)
  • feminine: مِصْرِيَّاتٌ / مِصْرِيَّاتٍ

A few very common nationality words are normally pluralised with a broken plural instead of ـُونَ, and these are worth memorising as vocabulary: عَرَبِيٌّ → عَرَبٌ، أَلْمانِيٌّ → أَلْمانٌ، رُوسِيٌّ → رُوسٌ، تُرْكِيٌّ → أَتْراكٌ، كُرْدِيٌّ → أَكْرادٌ (the regular تُرْكِيُّونَ، رُوسِيُّونَ exist too). They are plurals of people, so what follows them is plural too: العَرَبُ الكِرامُ، رَأَيْتُ الأَلْمانَ.

11. Non-human plurals: back to the feminine singular. The rule of lesson 11 outranks everything here. If the noun is a plural of things, its nisba stays feminine singular, however many things there are:

  • كُتُبٌ عَرَبِيَّةٌ - Arabic books
  • السَّيّاراتُ اليابانِيَّةُ - the Japanese cars
  • الدُّوَلُ العَرَبِيَّةُ - the Arab states

The plural مِصْرِيُّونَ is only ever for people.

12. The nisba against the إِضافَة. Lesson 20 gave you one way to link two nouns: سِفارَةُ فَرَنْسا, “the embassy of France”. The nisba gives another: السِّفارَةُ الفَرَنْسِيَّةُ, “the French embassy”. Both are correct Arabic. The difference is that an إِضافَة points at one specific owner, while the nisba describes a kind - and only the nisba can be made indefinite (سِفارَةٌ فَرَنْسِيَّةٌ) or carry الـ of its own.

13. Recognition only. The feminine ending ـِيَّة also builds abstract nouns from the same bases: الحُرِّيَّةُ (freedom), الجِنْسِيَّةُ (nationality), الإِنْسانِيَّةُ (humanity), المَسْؤُولِيَّةُ (responsibility). Read them as words for now; the machinery is the same suffix.

Two neighbouring topics are not here. “More Egyptian than” and “the most famous” use a different word shape altogether (lesson 28), and the “little / dear” endings of التَّصْغير are lesson 57. Note also that many place names - مِصْرُ، لُبْنانُ، بَغْدادُ - take no tanwīn themselves (lesson 41), while their nisbas are perfectly ordinary words that do: مِصْرِيٌّ.

Forms & patterns

Formation by base type

BaseWhat happensمُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثEnglish
لُبْنانُadd the suffixلُبْنانِيٌّلُبْنانِيَّةٌLebanese
العِراقُdrop الـ, addعِراقِيٌّعِراقِيَّةٌIraqi
اليابانُdrop الـ, addيابانِيٌّيابانِيَّةٌJapanese
مَكَّةُdrop ة, addمَكِّيٌّمَكِّيَّةٌMeccan
القاهِرَةُdrop الـ and ةقاهِرِيٌّقاهِرِيَّةٌCairene
فَرَنْساdrop ا, addفَرَنْسِيٌّفَرَنْسِيَّةٌFrench
أَمْريكاdrop ا, addأَمْريكِيٌّأَمْريكِيَّةٌAmerican
سُورِياdrop ا, addسُورِيٌّسُورِيَّةٌSyrian
أَلْمانِياdrop ـيا, addأَلْمانِيٌّأَلْمانِيَّةٌGerman
مَدينَةٌirregular stemمَدَنِيٌّمَدَنِيَّةٌurban, civil

Materials

SubstanceNisbaEnglish
ذَهَبٌذَهَبِيٌّgold, golden
فِضَّةٌفِضِّيٌّsilver
خَشَبٌخَشَبِيٌّwooden
قُطْنٌقُطْنِيٌّcotton
زُجاجٌزُجاجِيٌّglass
حَديدٌحَديدِيٌّiron
حَريرٌحَريرِيٌّsilk
وَرَقٌوَرَقِيٌّpaper

Irregulars worth memorising

BaseNisbaEnglish
مَدينَةٌمَدَنِيٌّurban, civil
سَنَةٌسَنَوِيٌّannual
لُغَةٌلُغَوِيٌّlinguistic
يَدٌيَدَوِيٌّmanual, by hand
أَخٌأَخَوِيٌّbrotherly
أَبٌأَبَوِيٌّpaternal
سَماءٌسَماوِيٌّheavenly
بادِيَةٌبَدَوِيٌّbedouin

The full declension of مِصْرِيّ - the case ending sits after the shadda

الحالةنَكِرَة مُذَكَّرمَعْرِفَة مُذَكَّرنَكِرَة مُؤَنَّثمَعْرِفَة مُؤَنَّث
مَرْفوعمِصْرِيٌّالمِصْرِيُّمِصْرِيَّةٌالمِصْرِيَّةُ
مَنْصوبمِصْرِيًّاالمِصْرِيَّمِصْرِيَّةًالمِصْرِيَّةَ
مَجْرورمِصْرِيٍّالمِصْرِيِّمِصْرِيَّةٍالمِصْرِيَّةِ

Number - people take the sound plurals

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّث
مُفْرَدمِصْرِيٌّمِصْرِيَّةٌ
مُثَنّى (مَرْفوع)مِصْرِيَّانِمِصْرِيَّتانِ
مُثَنّى (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)مِصْرِيَّيْنِمِصْرِيَّتَيْنِ
جَمْع (مَرْفوع)مِصْرِيُّونَمِصْرِيَّاتٌ
جَمْع (مَنْصوب / مَجْرور)مِصْرِيِّينَمِصْرِيَّاتٍ

Nationality words with a broken human plural

NisbaPluralEnglish
عَرَبِيٌّعَرَبٌArabs
أَلْمانِيٌّأَلْمانٌGermans
رُوسِيٌّرُوسٌRussians
تُرْكِيٌّأَتْراكٌTurks
كُرْدِيٌّأَكْرادٌKurds

Left out of these tables: the nisba of a two-word place name, and the no-longer-productive type that adds ـانِيّ (رُوحانِيٌّ). Neither is needed to build nisbas at this level.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَنا لُبْنانِيٌّ، وزَوْجَتي مِصْرِيَّةٌ.I am Lebanese, and my wife is Egyptian.
هٰذا طالِبٌ يابانِيٌّ يَدْرُسُ في القاهِرَةِ.This is a Japanese student who studies in Cairo.
اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ جَميلَةٌ وقَديمَةٌ.Arabic is a beautiful and ancient language.
دَرَسْتُ الفَرَنْسِيَّةَ في المَدْرَسَةِ.I studied French at school.
الجامِعَةُ الأَمْريكِيَّةُ قَريبَةٌ مِنْ بَيْتِنا.The American university is near our house.
الطّالِباتُ السُّورِيَّاتُ في المَكْتَبَةِ.The Syrian students are in the library.
رَأَيْتُ المُهَنْدِسينَ الأَلْمانَ في الشَّرِكَةِ.I saw the German engineers at the company.
هُمْ عَرَبٌ مِنَ المَغْرِبِ.They are Arabs from Morocco.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ خاتَمًا ذَهَبِيًّا لِأُمّي.I bought a gold ring for my mother.
البابُ خَشَبِيٌّ والنّافِذَةُ زُجاجِيَّةٌ.The door is wooden and the window is glass.
عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ كُتُبٌ عَرَبِيَّةٌ كَثيرَةٌ.On the table there are many Arabic books.
أَخي مُهَنْدِسٌ مَدَنِيٌّ في بَغْدادَ.My brother is a civil engineer in Baghdad.
صَديقي رُوسِيٌّ، وهُوَ يَدْرُسُ الأَدَبَ العَرَبِيَّ.My friend is Russian, and he studies Arabic literature.
السَّيّاراتُ اليابانِيَّةُ مَشْهورَةٌ في مِصْرَ.Japanese cars are famous in Egypt.

Common mistakes

  • أَنا مِصْرِيُ. -> أَنا مِصْرِيٌّ. - two things are missing: the shadda on the ya and the tanwīn on top of it. Unvocalized print hides both, but your pronunciation cannot.
  • أَنا لُبْنانُ. -> أَنا لُبْنانِيٌّ. - لُبْنان is the country. Saying it as a predicate claims that you are Lebanon; the person needs the نِسْبَة ending.
  • هِيَ مِصْرِيٌّ. -> هِيَ مِصْرِيَّةٌ. - a woman takes ـِيَّةٌ. This is the most frequent agreement slip in the whole lesson, because the masculine form is the one you learn first.
  • اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيُّ -> اللُّغَةُ العَرَبِيَّةُ - لُغَة is feminine, so its adjective is feminine. The same for السِّفارَةُ الفَرَنْسِيَّةُ، الجامِعَةُ الأَمْريكِيَّةُ.
  • مَكَّةِيٌّ -> مَكِّيٌّ - the ة never survives in front of the suffix. Drop it first, then attach ـِيّ: القاهِرَة → قاهِرِيٌّ، فِضَّة → فِضِّيٌّ.
  • أَمْريكاوِيٌّ -> أَمْريكِيٌّ - most foreign names ending in ـا simply lose that alif and put nothing in its place. The same for فَرَنْسا → فَرَنْسِيٌّ. A few do insert و - النِّمْسا → نِمْساوِيٌّ - so look an unfamiliar name up.
  • هُوَ اليابانِيٌّ. -> هُوَ يابانِيٌّ. - the الـ belongs to the country’s name, not to the adjective, and a word can never carry الـ and tanwīn at the same time.
  • رَأَيْتُ الطُّلّابَ المِصْرِيُّونَ. -> رَأَيْتُ الطُّلّابَ المِصْرِيِّينَ. - the sound masculine plural of a nisba declines like any other: ـُونَ only in the nominative.
  • كُتُبٌ عَرَبِيَّاتٌ -> كُتُبٌ عَرَبِيَّةٌ - books are not people. A plural of things takes a feminine singular adjective, nisba or not.
  • بابٌ مِنْ خَشَبِيٍّ -> بابٌ خَشَبِيٌّ or بابٌ مِنْ خَشَبٍ - two ways of saying “wooden”, and mixing them doubles the marking. مِنْ takes the plain material noun.

Tips

  • Store the country and its nisba as one item in your vocabulary list - مِصْرُ / مِصْرِيٌّ، فَرَنْسا / فَرَنْسِيٌّ. Learning the country alone leaves you unable to say who you are.
  • Say the doubled ya deliberately: مِصْ - رِيّ. If it sounds like an ordinary long ī, you are dropping the shadda, and that habit is much harder to undo later than to avoid now.
  • Automate the feminine. Any time the person is a woman, or the noun is feminine, reach for ـِيَّة before you finish the phrase.
  • Before building, run the base through three questions: does it end in ة? does it end in ا? does it start with الـ? Remove whatever the answer says, then attach ـِيّ.
  • Don’t build a nisba from a plural yourself. Go back to the singular first: قَوانين → قانونٌ → قانونِيٌّ.
  • Collect nisbas from real headlines - سِياسِيّ، اِقْتِصادِيّ، عالَمِيّ، رَسْمِيّ. A large share of the adjectives in a news sentence are built with this one suffix, so each new noun you learn is quietly an adjective too.
  • Leave the handful of irregulars (مَدَنِيّ، لُغَوِيّ، سَنَوِيّ) as vocabulary items. There is no rule you can apply reliably at A1, and there are not many of them.
  • Ignore “more Egyptian” and “the most famous” for now - that is a different word shape entirely, and it arrives at lesson 28.

A1 22 / 70

Roots, patterns and the dictionary

الجَذْرُ والوَزْن

In short

Arabic vocabulary is not a flat list of words. It is a grid. Along one axis sits a small set of consonants - the root, الجَذْر - which carries a field of meaning. Along the other sits a set of moulds - the pattern, الوَزْن - which says what kind of word this is. كِتابٌ، كاتِبٌ، مَكْتَبٌ and مَكْتَبَةٌ all share the root ك-ت-ب, something to do with writing. مَكْتَبٌ، مَلْعَبٌ and مَطْعَمٌ all share the pattern مَفْعَلٌ, “the place where you do it”. Almost every Arabic word sits at one of these intersections, and once you can see both axes, a page of new vocabulary stops looking like noise.

There is also a hard practical reason to learn this now. A serious Arabic dictionary is not ordered by spelling: it is ordered by root. مَكْتَبَةٌ is not under م, it is under ك, inside the block for ك-ت-ب, next to كَتَبَ and كِتابٌ. If you cannot strip a word down to its root you cannot find it, and you will spend your first year unable to look anything up. This lesson gives you the naming system (weighing a word against فعل), the patterns worth recognising at A1, the stripping drill, and the one trap that defeats everybody: roots containing و or ي.

The rule

1. The root is consonants only. Almost every Arabic root has three consonants, in a fixed order. ك-ت-ب, د-ر-س, ك-ب-ر, ل-ع-ب. The vowels are never part of it. A root is not a word and is never pronounced as one - it is an address, the shelf on which a family of words lives. A small minority of roots have four consonants (ت-ر-ج-م, giving تَرْجَمَ “he translated” and مُتَرْجِمٌ “a translator”); you can ignore those until lesson 48.

2. The pattern is the word فعل used as a ruler. Arab grammarians needed a way to talk about word shapes, so they took the root ف-ع-ل (“doing”) and made it a measuring stick. In a pattern, ف stands for your first root letter, ع for your second, ل for your third. Everything else in the mould - extra consonants, all the vowels, a ة, a shadda - stays exactly as printed. So:

  • مَكْتَبٌ: ك fills the ف slot, ت fills the ع slot, ب fills the ل slot. The م and the vowels belong to the mould. The word is on the pattern مَفْعَلٌ.
  • كاتِبٌ: same three letters in the same order, but now with a long ا after the first and a kasra before the last. The word is on the pattern فاعِلٌ.

This is why an Arabic teacher says “it is فاعِل” instead of describing the shape letter by letter. Learn to say the pattern out loud next to the word - كاتِبٌ فاعِلٌ، مَكْتوبٌ مَفْعولٌ - and the shapes start to stick.

3. One root, one family. The table in the next section builds the whole ك-ت-ب family: the past verb, the present verb, the book, the books, the writer, the written thing, the desk, the library and the activity of writing. Nine words, one set of consonants, nine different moulds. Notice that verbs and nouns are in the same family - Arabic does not separate them the way English separates “write” from the unrelated-looking “clerk”, “desk” and “library”.

4. The root gives you a field, not a definition. This is the limit of the system, and it is worth accepting on day one. From ج-م-ع, “gathering”, Arabic builds جَمَعَ “he collected”, مَجْموعَةٌ “a group”, مُجْتَمَعٌ “a society”, جامِعٌ “a mosque” and جامِعَةٌ “a university”. Every one of those is a kind of gathering, and not one of them could have been guessed. مَكْتَبَةٌ is not “a place of writing” - it is a library. From ك-ت-ب Arabic even builds كَتيبَةٌ, an army battalion. So use the root to organise and to look up, never to invent a word or to guess a precise meaning.

5. The stripping drill. To find a root, take the word apart in this order:

  1. Remove الـ and anything attached at the edges: a preposition written onto the front (بِـ، لِـ، كَـ), a pronoun on the back (ـهُ، ـها، ـي).
  2. Remove the ending: the case vowel or tanwīn, a ة, a plural ending (ـونَ، ـينَ، ـاتٌ).
  3. Cross out the long vowels ا، و، ي inside the word. A long ا is never a root letter; a long و or ي usually belongs to the mould, but not always - rule 9 below is about exactly the cases where it is a root letter in disguise.
  4. Cross out any of the ten letters that Arabic uses to build patterns. They are packed into one memorable word: سَأَلْتُمونيها - that is س، أ، ل، ت، م، و، ن، ي، ه، ا.
  5. What is left, in its original order, is the root. Expect exactly three letters.

Worked examples: المَكْتَبَةُ loses الـ and ـةُ, leaving مكتب; the م is a pattern letter and مَفْعَلَةٌ is a known mould, so the root is ك-ت-ب. مُدَرِّسونَ loses ـونَ and the prefix مُـ, leaving درس - the root is د-ر-س. بِكِتابِهِ loses بِـ and ـهِ and the long ا, leaving ك-ت-ب. مَلاعِبُ loses the م and the ا: ل-ع-ب.

6. The mnemonic lists suspects, not convicts. Every one of those ten letters can also be a genuine root letter. مَلِكٌ “a king” is filed under م-ل-ك, not under ل-ك; سَأَلَ “he asked” is س-أ-ل; نَهْرٌ “a river” is ن-ه-ر; مَدينَةٌ “a city” is م-د-ن. The safety check is arithmetic: if stripping leaves you with fewer than three consonants, you have stripped too much - put the most likely one back.

7. A shadda is sometimes one letter and sometimes two. In مُدَرِّسٌ the doubled ر belongs to the mould, and the root is the ordinary three-letter د-ر-س. But in مَرَّ “he passed” and مَدَّ “he stretched” the doubling is the root: م-ر-ر and م-د-د, with the second and third letters identical. Use the same arithmetic as above - if undoubling leaves you with only two consonants, the doubled letter counts twice. Lesson 49 handles this class of verb properly.

8. The dictionary is ordered by root. A real Arabic dictionary is arranged alphabetically by the first root letter, then the second, then the third. Under each root you get a block: the plain verb first, then its relatives, then the nouns. So all nine words of the ك-ت-ب family are printed in one place, under ك - and مَكْتَبَةٌ، مَكْتوبٌ and مُكاتَبَةٌ are not under م. Modern online dictionaries let you paste in the surface word and will find it for you, but they still show you the root, and the root is what lets you see the whole family at once. Organise your own vocabulary notebook the same way and you will halve the work.

9. Weak roots are the trap. In many very common roots, one of the three letters is و or ي, and that letter hides: it turns into a long vowel, or into a ى at the end, or vanishes altogether. The word on the page then looks as if it has only two consonants, and beginners hunt for it in the wrong place:

  • قالَ “he said” is filed under ق-و-ل, not under ق-ا-ل. Alif is never a root letter.
  • باعَ “he sold” is filed under ب-ي-ع.
  • مَشى “he walked” is filed under م-ش-ي.
  • بابٌ is ب-و-ب، بَيْتٌ is ب-ي-ت، دارٌ is د-و-ر.

The recovery trick is to look at a relative of the word, because the hidden letter usually comes back somewhere in the family: يَقولُ shows the و of قالَ، يَبيعُ shows the ي of باعَ، أَبْوابٌ shows the و of بابٌ، دُورٌ shows the و of دارٌ. And if a two-consonant search fails, try inserting و in the empty slot, then ي. One of the two is almost always right.

10. A few words have no root at all. Borrowed words (بَنْكٌ، فيلْمٌ، تِلْفِزْيونٌ) and the little function words (مِنْ، فِي، عَلى، هَلْ) are not built from roots. Dictionaries simply list them alphabetically as whole words. Do not try to strip them.

Forms & patterns

The family of ك-ت-ب, built out in full. Nine moulds, one skeleton:

الكَلِمَةالوَزْنEnglish
كَتَبَفَعَلَhe wrote
يَكْتُبُيَفْعُلُhe writes
كِتابٌفِعالٌa book
كُتُبٌفُعُلٌbooks
كاتِبٌفاعِلٌa writer, a clerk
مَكْتوبٌمَفْعولٌwritten
مَكْتَبٌمَفْعَلٌa desk, an office
مَكْتَبَةٌمَفْعَلَةٌa library, a bookshop
كِتابَةٌفِعالَةٌwriting (the activity)

The patterns worth recognising on sight at A1, with two examples each:

الوَزْنExampleExampleWhat the mould does
فاعِلٌكاتِبٌ (a writer)دارِسٌ (one who studies)the one doing it
مَفْعولٌمَكْتوبٌ (written)مَعْروفٌ (known, well-known)the one it is done to
مَفْعَلٌمَكْتَبٌ (an office)مَلْعَبٌ (a playing field)the place of it
مَفْعَلَةٌمَكْتَبَةٌ (a library)مَدْرَسَةٌ (a school)the place of it, with ة
فِعالٌكِتابٌ (a book)حِسابٌ (a bill, an account)a thing connected with it
فَعّالٌخَبّازٌ (a baker)نَجّارٌ (a carpenter)the trade you practise

Three plural moulds you already met in lesson 10, now with their patterns named:

الوَزْنSingular ← PluralSingular ← Plural
أَفْعالٌقَلَمٌ ← أَقْلامٌبابٌ ← أَبْوابٌ
فُعولٌبَيْتٌ ← بُيوتٌدَرْسٌ ← دُروسٌ
فُعَلٌغُرْفَةٌ ← غُرَفٌدَوْلَةٌ ← دُوَلٌ

Weak roots: where the word is filed, and the relative that shows the و or the ي:

الكَلِمَةالجَذْرThe relative that shows it
قالَق-و-ليَقولُ
باعَب-ي-عيَبيعُ
مَشىم-ش-ييَمْشي
بابٌب-و-بأَبْوابٌ
بَيْتٌب-ي-تبُيوتٌ
دارٌد-و-ردُورٌ
سَيّارَةٌس-ي-ريَسيرُ
مُسْتَشْفًىش-ف-يthe final ى is the ي

Left out on purpose: the nine derived verb patterns (lessons 46-53), the patterns of the verbal noun (lesson 54), and the complete participle-and-place-noun system (lesson 53). At A1 you need to recognise these shapes in a text, not to produce them.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كاتِبُ هٰذِهِ الرِّسالَةِ صَديقي القَديمُ.The writer of this letter is my old friend.
الكُتُبُ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ، وَالقَلَمُ عَلَى المَكْتَبِ.The books are in the library, and the pen is on the desk.
كَتَبَ الطّالِبُ دَرْسَهُ فِي البَيْتِ.The student wrote his lesson at home.
اِسْمُ هٰذا الشّارِعِ مَعْروفٌ فِي المَدينَةِ.The name of this street is well known in the city.
هٰذا مَكْتوبٌ بِاللُّغَةِ العَرَبِيَّةِ.This is written in Arabic.
أَبي خَبّازٌ وَجَدّي نَجّارٌ.My father is a baker and my grandfather is a carpenter.
مَلْعَبُ المَدْرَسَةِ كَبيرٌ وَجَديدٌ.The school’s playing field is big and new.
غُرَفُ البَيْتِ صَغيرَةٌ، وَأَبْوابُها قَديمَةٌ.The rooms of the house are small, and its doors are old.
دُروسُ اليَوْمِ سَهْلَةٌ.Today’s lessons are easy.
مَشى الوَلَدُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ.The boy walked to school.
باعَ التّاجِرُ بَيْتَهُ القَديمَ.The merchant sold his old house.
المُسْتَشْفى قَريبٌ مِنَ المَكْتَبَةِ الجَديدَةِ.The hospital is near the new library.
قالَ المُدَرِّسُ: الكِتابَةُ سَهْلَةٌ.The teacher said: writing is easy.
فِي الجامِعَةِ طُلّابٌ مِنْ كُلِّ دُوَلِ العالَمِ.At the university there are students from all the countries of the world.

Common mistakes

  • مَكْتَبٌ ← م-ك-ت -> مَكْتَبٌ ← ك-ت-ب - the م of مَفْعَلٌ belongs to the mould, not to the root, and a root letter can never be dropped to make room for it.
  • مُسْتَشْفى ← م-س-ت -> مُسْتَشْفًى ← ش-ف-ي - مُسْتَـ is a whole block of pattern letters, and the final ى is the third root letter ي in disguise. The word is filed under ش.
  • الكِتابُ ← ا-ل-ك -> الكِتابُ ← ك-ت-ب - الـ is an article, never part of a root. Strip it before you do anything else.
  • كِتابَةٌ ← ك-ت-ا-ب -> كِتابَةٌ ← ك-ت-ب - a long ا inside a word is a vowel of the mould فِعالَةٌ. Roots are counted in consonants, and there are three.
  • مُدَرِّسٌ ← د-ر-ر-س -> مُدَرِّسٌ ← د-ر-س - here the shadda is part of the pattern, so the ر counts once. (In مَدَّ it is the root itself doubling: م-د-د.)
  • قالَ ← ق-ا-ل -> قالَ ← ق-و-ل - alif is never a root letter. يَقولُ shows you the و that the past tense swallowed.
  • بابٌ ← ب-ا-ب -> بابٌ ← ب-و-ب - same trap in a noun, and the plural أَبْوابٌ hands you the missing letter for free.
  • مَدينَةٌ ← د-ي-ن -> مَدينَةٌ ← م-د-ن - سَأَلْتُمونيها lists letters that may be added, not letters that always are. Strip only as far as three consonants.
  • مَكْتَبَةٌ = “a place where someone writes” -> مَكْتَبَةٌ = “a library, a bookshop” - the root tells you the neighbourhood, never the address. Always confirm the meaning in a dictionary.
  • تِلْفِزْيونٌ ← ت-ل-ف -> تِلْفِزْيونٌ has no root - borrowed words are not built on moulds and are listed alphabetically as they stand.

Tips

  • Write every new word in your notebook with its root in the margin: مَكْتَبَةٌ (ك-ت-ب)، مُدَرِّسٌ (د-ر-س). It costs three seconds and turns a word list into a map.
  • Say the pattern out loud straight after the word - كاتِبٌ فاعِلٌ، مَكْتوبٌ مَفْعولٌ، مَلْعَبٌ مَفْعَلٌ. Naming the shape is what makes you notice it in the next text.
  • Learn one family completely, either ك-ت-ب or د-ر-س, and use it as your template. When you meet an unknown مَـ word, ask “which slot of my template is this?”
  • A word beginning with مَـ or مُـ and having three more consonants is almost never a م-root. Try the last three consonants first; you will be right the great majority of the time.
  • When a lookup fails, count your consonants. Two means you stripped a real root letter, or the root is weak - put و in the gap, then try ي.
  • Use the plural and the present tense as X-rays: بابٌ ← أَبْوابٌ، دارٌ ← دُورٌ، قالَ ← يَقولُ. They expose letters the singular hides.
  • Ignore for now the patterns with extra consonants at the front (تَـ، اِنْـ، اِسْتَـ). You will meet them as whole words for a while, and lessons 46-53 will show you the system behind them.

A1 23 / 70

Basic negation: la, laysa and ghayr

النَّفْيُ بِـ«لا» و«لَيْسَ» و«غَيْر»

In short

English negates almost everything with one word: “not”, propped up by “do”, “does” or “am”. Arabic has no all-purpose “not”. It picks a tool according to what you are negating: a present-tense verb, a verbless sentence, or a single word. This lesson gives you the three tools that cover ordinary A1 speech - لا, لَيْسَ and غَيْر - and at this level each of them has one job.

Two of them are easy. لا sits in front of a المُضارِع verb and changes nothing else: لا أَعْرِفُ. غَيْر sits in front of a single word, usually an adjective, and pulls it into the genitive: غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ. The third, لَيْسَ, is the interesting one. It is the negative of the verbless sentence of lesson 2, it has to be conjugated for its subject, and it puts an audible fatḥa-tanwīn on the predicate: لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا. That ـًا is the first case ending in this path that you can actually hear, so it is worth more attention than its size suggests.

The rule

1. لا in front of a present-tense verb. Put لا immediately before the verb. Nothing else in the sentence moves, nothing changes its ending, and there is no Arabic equivalent of the English helper “do”:

لا أَعْرِفُ. / لا يَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ. / لا نَسْكُنُ هُنا.

The verb keeps the same مَرْفوع ending it had in lesson 14 - the ḍamma on أَعْرِفُ, the ن on يَعْمَلونَ, تَعْمَلينَ, تَعْمَلانِ. لا is a particle (حَرْف) and particles have no endings of their own, so there is nothing to decline and nothing to agree with. One word, one slot, no side effects.

It also carries both English readings at once. لا يَعْمَلُ اليَوْمَ is equally “he does not work today” and “he is not working today”; Arabic does not separate the two.

2. لا negates only the present. لا + المُضارِع is a present-tense tool and nothing else. *لا كَتَبْتُ is not Arabic for “I did not write” - the past has its own negator (ما), and the future has another (لَنْ). Both wait for lesson 37. Until then, if the verb is not مُضارِع, do not reach for لا.

There is a second لا that also stands in front of a مُضارِع verb: the لا of prohibition, لا تَشْرَبْ “don’t drink”. You can tell them apart by the ending - the prohibitive one strips the final ḍamma - and it belongs to lesson 36. Everything on this page keeps the ḍamma.

And لا is of course also the bare word “no”: لا، شُكْرًا. That use needs no grammar.

3. لَيْسَ negates a sentence with no verb in it. A جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّة (lesson 2) has nothing for لا to attach to, so Arabic supplies a special word that behaves like a verb: لَيْسَ, “is not”. It goes at the front of the sentence:

البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. -> لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا.

لَيْسَ is one of أَخَوات كانَ, “the sisters of كانَ” (lesson 43), and like كانَ it takes the old مُبْتَدَأ as its اسْم and the old خَبَر as its خَبَر. Naming them matters because the two slots now behave differently.

4. لَيْسَ must be conjugated. This is the single biggest source of learner errors. لَيْسَ is shaped like a past-tense verb and takes the past-tense person endings of lesson 18: لَسْتُ، لَسْتَ، لَسْتِ، لَيْسَ، لَيْسَتْ، لَسْنا… An unconjugated لَيْسَ with a first-person or feminine subject is simply wrong:

لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا. / لَسْتِ وَحْدَكِ. / لَيْسَتْ جاهِزَةً. / لَسْنا مُتَأَخِّرينَ.

When the subject is a full noun that comes after لَيْسَ, the word stays singular and agrees in gender only - the rule for any verb standing before its subject (lesson 19): لَيْسَ الطُّلّابُ جاهِزينَ، لَيْسَتِ الطّالِباتُ حاضِراتٍ. The plural forms لَيْسوا and لَسْنَ appear when no noun follows, because then the subject is inside the word itself: لَيْسوا جاهِزينَ.

5. The اسْم stays مَرْفوع; the خَبَر turns مَنْصوب. This is the whole grammatical content of لَيْسَ. The subject keeps the ḍamma it always had; the predicate swaps its ḍamma for a fatḥa:

لَيْسَ البَيْتُ (ـُ) كَبيرًا (ـًا). / لَيْسَتِ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً.

Watch the spelling of that ending. Indefinite fatḥa-tanwīn is written on a supporting alif - كَبيرًا، مُدَرِّسًا، سَهْلًا، هادِئًا - but after a final ة no alif is added and the two fatḥas simply sit on the ة itself: نَظيفَةً، جَديدَةً، مَشْغولَةً. (Words ending in ـاء, like ماءً، سَماءً، do without the extra alif too.) The sound plurals do not use a fatḥa at all: the sound masculine plural shows ـينَ (جاهِزونَ -> جاهِزينَ) and the sound feminine plural shows a kasra (حاضِراتٌ -> حاضِراتٍ). A broken plural, on the other hand, behaves like a singular and takes the ordinary fatḥa: لَيْسوا طُلّابًا.

6. This is the first ending you can hear. Case endings are invisible in ordinary writing and inaudible at a pause, which is why they feel abstract. لَيْسَ is the exception a learner meets earliest: this ending survives the pause, because the alif holds it up. Say لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا aloud and you really do end on a long ā - that is the pausal rule that tanwīn fatḥ is read as ā at a stop, never as -n. Say لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسٌ, which stops on a bare مُدَرِّسْ, and any Arabic speaker hears the mistake immediately - it is not a detail hidden in the vowel marks.

7. A بِـ may be added to the خَبَر. A common variant in formal writing puts a redundant بِـ in front of the predicate. The بِـ then governs it, so the word appears in the genitive rather than the accusative, and the meaning is unchanged: لَيْسَ البَيْتُ بِكَبيرٍ = لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا. Recognise it; you do not need to produce it.

8. A شِبْه جُمْلَة predicate is untouched. If the predicate is a preposition with its noun or a word like عِنْدَ (lesson 17), there is no single word to put in the accusative and nothing changes at all. لَيْسَ simply goes in front, and the delayed subject keeps its ḍamma:

عِنْدي وَقْتٌ. -> لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ. في الغُرْفَةِ طالِبٌ. -> لَيْسَ في الغُرْفَةِ طالِبٌ.

So لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتًا is an error, and a frequent one: learners hear “لَيْسَ means accusative” and apply it to the wrong word. وَقْتٌ here is the subject, not the predicate.

9. غَيْر negates one word, not a sentence. غَيْر means “other than”, and it is a noun, not a particle. It forms an إِضافَة (lesson 20) with whatever follows, so the following word is مَجْرور:

غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ “not possible” / نَصٌّ غَيْرُ مُشَكَّلٍ “an unvocalized text” / جَوابٌ غَيْرُ صَحيحٍ “a wrong answer”.

Read it literally - “other-than-possible”, “a text other-than-vocalized” - and the genitive stops feeling arbitrary. Wherever English glues “un-”, “in-” or “non-” onto a word, Arabic usually says غَيْر.

10. غَيْر takes the case of its own slot. Because it is a noun, غَيْر declines normally while the word after it stays fixed in the genitive:

  • subject / predicate slot (مَرْفوع): هٰذا غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ.
  • after a preposition (مَجْرور): جِئْتَ في وَقْتٍ غَيْرِ مُناسِبٍ.
  • object slot (مَنْصوب): قَرَأْتُ كِتابًا غَيْرَ مُفيدٍ.

Two endings sit side by side and they are not the same: غَيْرِ مُناسِبٍ, غَيْرَ مُفيدٍ. Only the second word is frozen.

One more piece: غَيْر is indefinite in form, but annexed to a definite noun it can still describe a definite one, and the phrase as a whole then reads as definite - النَّصُّ غَيْرُ المُشَكَّلِ “the unvocalized text”, الدُّوَلُ غَيْرُ العَرَبِيَّةِ “the non-Arab states”.

11. Not in this lesson. ما، لَمْ and لَنْ - the past and the future - are lesson 37. لا النّافِيَةُ لِلْجِنْس, the لا of لا مانِعَ and لا شَكَّ, is lesson 63, together with the whole system seen from above. And لَيْسَ is جامِد, “frozen”: these past-shaped forms with a present meaning are all it has - no مُضارِع, no imperative, and no past-tense form of its own, so “he was not a teacher” is ما كانَ مُدَرِّسًا (lessons 32 and 42).

Forms & patterns

لَيْسَ conjugated - learn this table

الضَّميرلَيْسَEnglish
أَنالَسْتُI am not
أَنْتَلَسْتَyou are not (m.sg.)
أَنْتِلَسْتِyou are not (f.sg.)
هُوَلَيْسَhe / it is not
هِيَلَيْسَتْshe / it is not
نَحْنُلَسْناwe are not
أَنْتُمْلَسْتُمْyou are not (m.pl.)
أَنْتُنَّلَسْتُنَّyou are not (f.pl.)
هُمْلَيْسواthey are not (m.pl.)
هُنَّلَسْنَthey are not (f.pl.)

The three dual forms are left out of the table only for readability and are built the same way: أَنْتُما لَسْتُما، هُما لَيْسا (m.), هُما لَيْسَتا (f.). Note the split down the middle of the paradigm: the forms whose ending is a consonant-initial subject pronoun - ـتُ، ـتَ، ـتِ، ـتُما، ـتُمْ، ـتُنَّ، ـنا، ـنَ - lose the ـيْ (لَسْتُ، لَسْنا، لَسْنَ), and all the others keep it (لَيْسَ، لَيْسَتْ، لَيْسوا). The ـتْ of لَيْسَتْ is the feminine marker, not a subject ending, which is why that form keeps its ـيْ. This is exactly the behaviour of a hollow verb, which you meet properly in lesson 50.

لا + the present

PositiveNegativeEnglish
أَعْرِفُلا أَعْرِفُI don’t know
يَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَلا يَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَhe doesn’t drink coffee
نَسْكُنُ هُنالا نَسْكُنُ هُناwe don’t live here
تَتَكَلَّمينَ الفَرَنْسِيَّةَلا تَتَكَلَّمينَ الفَرَنْسِيَّةَyou (f.) don’t speak French
يَعْمَلونَ اليَوْمَلا يَعْمَلونَ اليَوْمَthey aren’t working today

What لَيْسَ does to the predicate

Predicate typePositiveNegated
single word, m.البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا.
single word, f.الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةٌ.لَيْسَتِ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً.
sound m. pluralالطُّلّابُ جاهِزونَ.لَيْسَ الطُّلّابُ جاهِزينَ.
sound f. pluralالطّالِباتُ حاضِراتٌ.لَيْسَتِ الطّالِباتُ حاضِراتٍ.
with بِـ (variant)البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.لَيْسَ البَيْتُ بِكَبيرٍ.
شِبْه جُمْلَةعِنْدي وَقْتٌ.لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ.
شِبْه جُمْلَةفي الغُرْفَةِ طالِبٌ.لَيْسَ في الغُرْفَةِ طالِبٌ.

The three tools at a glance

ToolWhat it negatesEffect on the next wordExample
لا + مُضارِعa present-tense verbnoneلا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ.
لَيْسَ (conjugated)a verbless sentenceخَبَر becomes مَنْصوبلَسْتُ مُتْعَبًا.
غَيْر + اسْمa single wordit becomes مَجْرورجَوابٌ غَيْرُ صَحيحٍ.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
لا أَعْرِفُ هٰذا الرَّجُلَ.I don’t know this man.
لا يَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ في اللَّيْلِ.He doesn’t drink coffee at night.
لا نَسْكُنُ هُنا؛ نَسْكُنُ قَريبًا مِنَ المَحَطَّةِ.We don’t live here; we live near the station.
لِماذا لا تَتَكَلَّمينَ مَعَنا؟Why aren’t you talking to us?
لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا، أَنا طالِبٌ.I am not a teacher, I am a student.
لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا، لٰكِنَّهُ جَميلٌ.The house isn’t big, but it is lovely.
لَيْسَتِ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً اليَوْمَ.The room isn’t clean today.
لَسْنا مُتَأَخِّرينَ؛ الدَّرْسُ في التّاسِعَةِ.We aren’t late; the lesson is at nine.
لَيْسوا مِنْ مِصْرَ، هُمْ مِنَ المَغْرِبِ.They aren’t from Egypt, they are from Morocco.
لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ الآنَ.I don’t have time now.
لَيْسَ في المَكْتَبِ أَحَدٌ.There is nobody in the office.
هٰذا غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ في يَوْمٍ واحِدٍ.That is not possible in one day.
قَرَأْتُ نَصًّا غَيْرَ مُشَكَّلٍ لِأَوَّلِ مَرَّةٍ.I read an unvocalized text for the first time.
جَوابُكَ غَيْرُ صَحيحٍ، لٰكِنَّ الفِكْرَةَ جَيِّدَةٌ.Your answer is wrong, but the idea is good.

Common mistakes

  • لا أَنا مُدَرِّسٌ. -> لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا. - لا only negates a verb. A verbless sentence needs لَيْسَ, and لَيْسَ carries the person itself, so أَنا is not needed either.
  • لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. -> لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا. - The اسْم keeps its ḍamma, the خَبَر takes a fatḥa. Leaving the predicate مَرْفوع is the most common لَيْسَ error of all.
  • لا كَتَبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ. -> ما كَتَبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ. - لا cannot negate the past. ما can, and lesson 37 gives you it together with لَمْ and لَنْ.
  • لَيْسَ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً. -> لَيْسَتِ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً. - لَيْسَ is conjugated like a past-tense verb, so a feminine subject needs لَيْسَتْ (with a kasra on the ت before الـ, to break the two silent letters apart).
  • أَنا لَيْسَ طالِبًا. -> لَسْتُ طالِبًا. - Match the form to the person: لَسْتُ for “I”, لَسْتَ / لَسْتِ for “you”. لَيْسَ is the “he” form only.
  • لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتًا. -> لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ. - The predicate here is عِنْدي, a شِبْه جُمْلَة, and it cannot take an ending. وَقْتٌ is the delayed subject and stays مَرْفوع (lesson 17).
  • هٰذا لا مُمْكِنٌ. -> هٰذا غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ. - لا does not attach to an adjective to make an opposite. Word-level negation is غَيْر.
  • نَصٌّ غَيْرُ مُشَكَّلٌ. -> نَصٌّ غَيْرُ مُشَكَّلٍ. - غَيْر is the first half of an إِضافَة, so what follows it is always مَجْرور - here a kasra, never a ḍamma.
  • لا يَشْرَبَ القَهْوَةَ. -> لا يَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ. - Negating with لا leaves the mood alone. The verb keeps the ḍamma it had in the positive sentence.
  • لَيْسَ الطُّلّابُ جاهِزونَ. -> لَيْسَ الطُّلّابُ جاهِزينَ. - The sound masculine plural shows the accusative as ـينَ. There is no fatḥa to write, but the case change is still there.

Tips

  • Ask one question before you negate: is there a verb? A مُضارِع verb takes لا; no verb at all takes لَيْسَ; a single word inside a bigger sentence takes غَيْر.
  • Learn لَيْسَ as a chant with its predicate attached - لَسْتُ مُتْعَبًا، لَسْتَ مُتْعَبًا، لَسْتِ مُتْعَبَةً، لَيْسَ مُتْعَبًا… - so the ـًا is glued to the form from the start and never gets forgotten.
  • The endings of لَيْسَ are the past-tense endings you already drilled in lesson 18 (كَتَبْتُ، كَتَبْتَ، كَتَبْنا). You are not learning a new set, only a new stem.
  • Read غَيْر as “other than” rather than “not”, and the kasra behind it becomes automatic: “other than possible” is a possessive-style phrase, and those end in a kasra.
  • This is one of the first places where a case ending is audible. Practise it out loud - the difference between لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسًا and لَسْتُ مُدَرِّسٌ is heard, not just written.
  • Do not go looking for a مُضارِع, an imperative or a past of لَيْسَ. At this level the word covers the present verbless sentence and nothing else.
  • Ignore ما، لَمْ، لَنْ for now, even if you meet them in a text. Trying to sort out four negators at once is what makes Arabic negation feel harder than it is.
  • If the thing you are negating is a مُضارِع verb, لا is the tool - even when the rest of the sentence is full of nouns and adjectives: لا يَسْكُنُ في بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍ. Do not drop a لَيْسَ into the middle of a verbal sentence.

A1 24 / 70

The future

المُسْتَقْبَل: السّينُ وسَوْفَ

In short

Arabic has no future tense. It has the imperfect you already know and two small markers you put in front of it, and that is the entire system: أَكْتُبُ “I write” becomes سَأَكْتُبُ or سَوْفَ أَكْتُبُ, “I will write”. Nothing inside the verb moves. The thirteen cells of lesson 14 are the same thirteen cells here, with a letter or a word bolted onto the front.

Two things have to be got right, and both are mechanical. سَـ is a prefix, so it is written stuck to the verb with no space at all; سَوْفَ is a free-standing word. And the verb keeps its indicative ending untouched - the ḍamma of سَأَكْتُبُ and the ن of سَيَكْتُبونَ sit exactly where they sat before, because these markers change the time of the verb and never its mood.

The rule

1. Both markers sit on the imperfect, and only on the imperfect. المُضارِع on its own is timeless enough to cover the present; put سَـ or سَوْفَ in front of it and it is pinned to future time. يَدْرُسُ “he studies / he is studying” → سَيَدْرُسُ / سَوْفَ يَدْرُسُ “he will study”. Neither marker may go anywhere near a past-tense verb: سَكَتَبَ is not “he will write”, it is not Arabic at all. If the verb in front of you is a ماضٍ, the future markers have nothing to attach to.

2. سَـ is a prefix. Write it joined. It behaves like the و of “and” and the بِـ of “with”: one letter, carrying a fatḥa, welded to the next word. سَأَذْهَبُ، سَتَكْتُبينَ، سَنَدْرُسُ، سَيَذْهَبونَ - never with a space, never on its own line, and nothing may be inserted between it and its verb. Traditional grammar calls it سينُ التَّنْفيسِ, “the س of expansion”, the idea being that it pushes the action out beyond the present moment. You do not need the name; you do need the habit of typing it as part of the word.

3. The two spellings worth pointing at. In the first person singular the prefix أَ of the verb keeps its hamza, seated on an alif, and the س simply leans against it: سَأَكْتُبُ، سَأَذْهَبُ، سَأَجْلِسُ. With the “he/they” prefix يَـ you get the very frequent shape سَيَـ: سَيَكْتُبُ، سَيَشْرَبُ، سَيَذْهَبونَ. And where the first person already begins with a madda because the root starts with a hamza - آكُلُ from أَكَلَ - the madda stays and the س leans on that: سَآكُلُ, not سَأَأْكُلُ.

4. سَوْفَ is a separate word, and it stands immediately before the verb. سَوْفَ أَذْهَبُ، سَوْفَ تَكْتُبينَ، سَوْفَ نَدْرُسُ. It is written apart, it never joins, and although it is a whole word it is not free to move around the sentence: it comes directly in front of the verb it marks, exactly where سَـ would have gone. أَذْهَبُ سَوْفَ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ is as wrong as putting “will” after the verb in English.

5. The mood does not change: the imperfect stays مَرْفوع. This is the point most learners get wrong, because they expect a marker in front of the verb to do something to the back of it. It does not. The five endingless cells keep their ḍamma - سَأَكْتُبُ، سَتَكْتُبُ، سَيَكْتُبُ، سَنَكْتُبُ - and the cells with an ending keep their ن: سَتَكْتُبينَ، سَيَكْتُبانِ، سَيَكْتُبونَ. So سَأَذْهَبَ and سَيَذْهَبوا are both errors. Later you will meet particles that really do reach into the verb and change its ending (lessons 33 and 40); سَـ and سَوْفَ are not among them, and it is worth registering the contrast now.

6. Choosing between them: mostly free, with a tilt. In modern usage the two are largely interchangeable, and in most sentences you may write either. The tilt is this: سَـ is the lighter, more ordinary marker and suits the near and the concrete - سَأَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ بَعْدَ قَليلٍ. سَوْفَ is heavier. It reads as more remote in time, or more formal, or more emphatic - a promise, a declaration, a headline, a plan for next year rather than for this afternoon. Newspapers and official statements use سَوْفَ freely; a text message to a friend will almost always use سَـ. When in doubt, use سَـ; it rarely sounds out of place, whereas a misplaced سَوْفَ can sound pompous.

What you may never do is use both. سَوْفَ سَأَذْهَبُ is not extra-future, it is a mistake - pick one marker and drop the other.

7. A plain imperfect plus a time word is already a future. Arabic does not insist on the marker. If the sentence contains a word that fixes the time, the bare مُضارِع is perfectly normal future: نَذْهَبُ إِلَى السّوقِ غَدًا “we are going to the market tomorrow”. This works just like the English present used for an arrangement (“we fly on Tuesday”). Adding سَـ is also fine and slightly more explicit; the difference is small. The useful time words for now:

  • غَدًا tomorrow - note the ending: ـً, an accusative with tanwīn.
  • بَعْدَ غَدٍ the day after tomorrow - بَعْدَ takes what follows in the genitive (lesson 20).
  • بَعْدَ قَليلٍ in a little while; بَعْدَ ساعَةٍ in an hour.
  • اللَّيْلَةَ tonight; قَريبًا soon.
  • الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ، الشَّهْرَ القادِمَ، السَّنَةَ القادِمَةَ - next week, next month, next year.

Notice the accusative on the ones that stand on their own - the fatḥa on غَدًا، اللَّيْلَةَ، الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ is not random. Arabic puts a time expression that answers “when?” into the accusative case, and the adjective agrees with it there: الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ, both words with a fatḥa. That is the ظَرْف of lesson 31; for now, learn these expressions as fixed blocks with the fatḥa built in, and resist the pull of the nominative (الأُسْبوعُ القادِمُ).

8. Negation is not done with لا. You have just learnt لا + المُضارِع for “does not” (lesson 23), and the natural move is to put it in front of a future: لا سَأَذْهَبُ. Arabic does not allow this. The future has a negator of its own, لَنْ, which replaces the marker entirely - لَنْ أَذْهَبَ “I will not go” - and it does change the ending of the verb. That is lesson 37, and you do not need it yet. What you need today is the rule in its practical form: a verb carrying سَـ or سَوْفَ is not negated - the two markers attach only to an affirmative verb. Say it in the affirmative, or wait for لَنْ.

9. What is deliberately not here. “It will be” and other future nominal sentences need the verb كانَ, which is lesson 32; until then keep your futures verbal. The combination كانَ سَيَفْعَلُ (“he was going to do”), and the particle قَدْ that shades a verb towards “may” or “has already”, are lesson 45. سَـ on a derived verb (سَيُسافِرُ، سَنَسْتَقْبِلُ) works exactly as it does here, but those stems are lessons 46-53, so the tables below stay with sound Form I verbs.

Forms & patterns

The seven persons you will use most, on the sound Form I verb ذَهَبَ - يَذْهَبُ. The two right-hand columns are the same verb with the same ending; only the marker differs.

الضَّميرمَعَ السّينِمَعَ سَوْفَEnglish
أَناسَأَذْهَبُسَوْفَ أَذْهَبُI will go
أَنْتَسَتَذْهَبُسَوْفَ تَذْهَبُyou will go (m.sg.)
أَنْتِسَتَذْهَبينَسَوْفَ تَذْهَبينَyou will go (f.sg.)
هُوَسَيَذْهَبُسَوْفَ يَذْهَبُhe will go
هِيَسَتَذْهَبُسَوْفَ تَذْهَبُshe will go
نَحْنُسَنَذْهَبُسَوْفَ نَذْهَبُwe will go
هُمْسَيَذْهَبونَسَوْفَ يَذْهَبونَthey will go (m.pl.)

The six cells left out above - the three duals and the two feminine plurals - hold no surprises. The marker is added and the imperfect is untouched, ن and all:

الضَّميرالمُضارِعمَعَ السّينِ
أَنْتُماتَذْهَبانِسَتَذْهَبانِ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَذْهَبانِسَيَذْهَبانِ
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَذْهَبانِسَتَذْهَبانِ
أَنْتُمْتَذْهَبونَسَتَذْهَبونَ
أَنْتُنَّتَذْهَبْنَسَتَذْهَبْنَ
هُنَّيَذْهَبْنَسَيَذْهَبْنَ

The join itself, one line per prefix letter. Four ordinary cases and one that looks odd on paper:

السّينُ + السّابِقَةالنَّتيجَةمِثال
سَ + أَـسَأَـسَأَكْتُبُ
سَ + تَـسَتَـسَتَكْتُبُ
سَ + يَـسَيَـسَيَكْتُبُ
سَ + نَـسَنَـسَنَكْتُبُ
سَ + آ (مِنْ أَكَلَ)سَآسَآكُلُ

Time expressions that carry a future on their own, or alongside the marker. Learn the ending as part of the phrase.

الظَّرْفEnglish
غَدًاtomorrow
بَعْدَ غَدٍthe day after tomorrow
بَعْدَ قَليلٍin a little while
بَعْدَ ساعَةٍin an hour
اللَّيْلَةَtonight
قَريبًاsoon
الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَnext week
الشَّهْرَ القادِمَnext month
السَّنَةَ القادِمَةَnext year
فِي المُسْتَقْبَلِin the future

Examples

العربيةEnglish
سَأَذْهَبُ إِلَى الجامِعَةِ غَدًا.I will go to the university tomorrow.
سَنَدْرُسُ مَعًا بَعْدَ قَليلٍ.We will study together in a little while.
هَلْ سَتَكْتُبينَ الرِّسالَةَ اللَّيْلَةَ؟Will you write the letter tonight?
سَيَجْلِسُ الأُسْتاذُ أَمامَ الطُّلّابِ.The teacher will sit in front of the students.
الطُّلّابُ سَيَفْهَمونَ الدَّرْسَ بَعْدَ ساعَةٍ.The students will understand the lesson in an hour.
سَآكُلُ فِي المَطْعَمِ مَساءً.I will eat at the restaurant in the evening.
أُخْتي سَتَسْكُنُ مَعَنا الشَّهْرَ القادِمَ.My sister will live with us next month.
البَناتُ سَيَشْرَبْنَ القَهْوَةَ فِي البَيْتِ.The girls will drink the coffee at home.
سَوْفَ نَسْكُنُ فِي بَيْتٍ كَبيرٍ فِي المُسْتَقْبَلِ.We will live in a big house in the future.
سَوْفَ تَفْهَمُ كُلَّ شَيْءٍ بَعْدَ سَنَةٍ.You will understand everything a year from now.
سَوْفَ يَذْهَبُ الوَزيرُ إِلَى القاهِرَةِ الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ.The minister will go to Cairo next week.
مَتى سَتَرْجِعينَ إِلَى بَيْتِكِ؟When will you go back home?
نَذْهَبُ إِلَى السّوقِ بَعْدَ غَدٍ.We are going to the market the day after tomorrow.
سَيَكْتُبونَ الواجِبَ فِي الصَّفِّ قَريبًا.They will write the homework in class soon.

Common mistakes

  • سَ أَذْهَبُ -> سَأَذْهَبُ - the س is a prefix, not a word. It is written joined to the verb, with no space, exactly like the و of عَطْف.
  • سَوْفَ سَأَذْهَبُ -> سَوْفَ أَذْهَبُ (or سَأَذْهَبُ) - one marker per verb. Doubling them adds nothing and is simply ungrammatical.
  • سَكَتَبَ -> سَيَكْتُبُ - the markers attach to the imperfect only. A past-tense verb cannot be turned into a future by prefixing anything to it.
  • سَأَذْهَبَ -> سَأَذْهَبُ - the verb stays مَرْفوع. سَـ changes the time, never the mood, so the ḍamma is untouched.
  • سَيَذْهَبوا -> سَيَذْهَبونَ - the ن of the indicative stays for the same reason. Dropping it belongs to lessons 33 and 40, not here.
  • لا سَأَذْهَبُ -> لَنْ أَذْهَبَ - لا negates a plain present. A future is negated with لَنْ, which replaces the marker altogether (lesson 37).
  • سَأَجْلِسُ غَدٌ -> سَأَجْلِسُ غَدًا - a time expression answering “when?” goes into the accusative, and the tanwīn is written ـً.
  • سَأَذْهَبُ الأُسْبوعُ القادِمُ -> سَأَذْهَبُ الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ - same rule with a two-word phrase: the noun takes the fatḥa and the adjective follows it.
  • سَأَأْكُلُ -> سَآكُلُ - the first person of أَكَلَ is آكُلُ with a madda, and the س leans onto that; there is no second hamza to write.
  • سَهِيَ تَذْهَبُ -> هِيَ سَتَذْهَبُ - the marker belongs to the verb, not to the sentence or to the pronoun in front of it.
  • أَذْهَبُ سَوْفَ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ -> سَوْفَ أَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ - سَوْفَ is a separate word but not a mobile one; it stands directly before its verb.

Tips

  • Take any present-tense drill you have already done and run it again with سَـ on the front. That is literally the whole lesson: no new endings, no new stems, thirteen familiar forms.
  • Say the marker and the verb as one word, سَنَدْرُسُ, not “سَ … نَدْرُسُ”. If you hear a pause in your own voice you will write a space in your own text.
  • Default to سَـ. Keep سَوْفَ for when you want weight - a promise, a formal announcement, or something genuinely far off - and you will sound natural in both registers.
  • The two shapes to over-practise are the first person and the third: سَأَـ and سَيَـ. Between them they cover most of what you will actually write.
  • Learn غَدًا، اللَّيْلَةَ، الأُسْبوعَ القادِمَ with their fatḥas glued on, as single vocabulary items. You will meet the rule behind that ending in lesson 31 and it will already feel right.
  • When reading unvocalized text, do not take every initial س for a future marker: سَمِعَ، سَأَلَ، سَيّارَة begin with a root س. Ask whether what follows is a recognisable imperfect - أ / ت / ي / ن plus a stem. If it is not, the س belongs to the word.
  • Do not try to negate a future yet. Rephrase in the affirmative, or use a plain present with لا, until لَنْ arrives in lesson 37.
  • Ignore, for now, every other way Arabic has of talking about the future - قَدْ, كانَ سَيَفْعَلُ, the participle used for an imminent action. Two markers and a time word will carry you through everything an A1 conversation needs.

A1 25 / 70

Joining words and sentences

العَطْف

In short

Every language needs a way to say “and”, “or” and “but”. Arabic keeps a short list of joining particles - the traditional lists count nine or ten - and six of them do almost all the everyday work: وَ، فَـ، ثُمَّ، أَوْ، لٰكِنْ، بَلْ. Each joins two words (tea and coffee) or two whole sentences (I came in and I sat down) with no change of shape. Three of the six are two letters long, and two of them are so common that Arabic prose leans on them the way English leans on full stops.

One piece of grammar comes attached, and it is why this lesson waited until you had the cases: the second item copies the case of the first. جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ has two ـٌ, رَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا has two ـً, and getting that wrong is the single most audible slip in this area. There is also one spelling rule that costs nothing to obey and looks wrong the moment you break it: وَ and فَـ are written stuck to the next word, never with a space.

The rule

1. Three names for the pieces. The joining particle is a حَرْفُ عَطْفٍ. The item in front of it - the one already in the sentence - is the المَعْطوفُ عَلَيْهِ. The item after it, the one being added, is the المَعْطوف:

جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ. - المَعْطوفُ عَلَيْهِ = عَلِيٌّ، حَرْفُ العَطْف = وَ، المَعْطوف = خالِدٌ.

You need the names because they make the next rule sayable in one line, and because Arabic grammar files this construction with the adjective of lesson 8 under التَّوابِع, “the followers” - words whose ending is decided by another word rather than by their own job.

2. The governing rule: المَعْطوف copies the case. This is called تَبَعِيَّة. Whatever ending the first item carries, the second item carries the same one - because the two share one job in the sentence. One pair of names, three sentences:

  • مَرْفوع: جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ. - both are the subject, so both take ـٌ.
  • مَنْصوب: رَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا. - both are the object, so both take ـً.
  • مَجْرور: سَأَلْتُ عَنْ عَلِيٍّ وَخالِدٍ. - one preposition covers both, so both take ـٍ.

The same thing with the article instead of tanwīn: في البَيْتِ وَالمَدْرَسَةِ - the preposition في puts البَيْتِ in the genitive, and المَدْرَسَةِ follows it there. Note what is not copied: only the case travels. Each noun keeps its own definiteness, its own gender and its own number - جاءَ الأَبُ وَأَوْلادُهُ، اِشْتَرَيْتُ الكِتابَ وَقَلَمًا. Compare the adjective of lesson 8, which has to match its noun in all four of case, definiteness, gender and number. المَعْطوف matches in one.

3. وَ and فَـ are written joined - always. These two are single letters, and Arabic never leaves a single-letter word standing alone, exactly as with بِـ، لِـ، كَـ and the سَـ of lesson 24. Write وَالبِنْتُ، وَخالِدٌ، فَجَلَسَ، فَنامَ - never *وَ البِنْتُ، never *فَ جَلَسَ. A space there is as wrong as writing *ال بَيْت.

The other four - ثُمَّ، أَوْ، لٰكِنْ، بَلْ - are ordinary separate words with a space on both sides. Two small sound notes that follow from the writing: before الـ, the alif is هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل and is not pronounced, so وَالمَدْرَسَةِ is heard as one run of sound; and لٰكِنْ and بَلْ end in a sukūn, so when الـ follows they take a helping kasra - لٰكِنِ الحَديقَةُ واسِعَةٌ، بَلِ الكِتابُ الآخَرُ. That is the same helping vowel you met on هَلِ in lesson 15.

4. وَ - plain joining, no order implied. وَ is the workhorse. It adds one thing to another and says nothing at all about which came first or why:

  • Two nouns: القَهْوَةُ وَالشّايُ.
  • Two sentences: أَنا في المَكْتَبِ وَأَخي في البَيْتِ.
  • Two verbs with the same subject: يَقْرَأُ وَيَكْتُبُ.

Two habits of Arabic to copy here. First, in a list Arabic normally gives every item its own وَ, where English uses commas and one final “and”: اِشْتَرَيْتُ خُبْزًا وَجُبْنًا وَزَيْتونًا. Second, Arabic begins sentences and paragraphs with وَ far more freely than English does; the schoolroom rule “never start a sentence with and” has no Arabic equivalent. Because وَ carries no sense of sequence, “and then” needs one of the next two particles instead.

5. فَـ - immediately after, or therefore. فَـ adds a second event that follows the first with no gap, and often because of it. English needs several words for this and Arabic needs one letter:

  • دَخَلَ فَجَلَسَ. - He came in and (at once) sat down.
  • شَرِبَ الدَّواءَ فَنامَ. - He took the medicine and (so) fell asleep.
  • سَقَطَ الكوبُ فَانْكَسَرَ. - The cup fell and (therefore) broke.

The two readings - “and straight away” and “and so” - are not two different particles; context picks one, and often both are true at once. فَـ joins verbs and clauses; joining two nouns with فَـ is rare and means strict order, so at this level use it between verbs.

6. ثُمَّ - then, after a gap. ثُمَّ is also “then”, but with time in between, and with no suggestion that the first event caused the second:

  • شَرِبْتُ القَهْوَةَ ثُمَّ خَرَجْتُ. - I drank the coffee, then (afterwards) I went out.
  • دَرَسْتُ العَرَبِيَّةَ في القاهِرَةِ ثُمَّ عُدْتُ إِلى بَلَدي.

So دَخَلَ فَجَلَسَ is one motion, دَخَلَ ثُمَّ جَلَسَ is a man who came in, did something, and sat down later. Choosing ثُمَّ where فَـ belongs is not a grammar error - it is a meaning error, and it is the one native readers notice.

7. أَوْ - or, and the question trap. أَوْ offers an alternative, in statements, in commands and in ordinary yes-or-no questions:

  • سَأَذْهَبُ إِلى المَكْتَبَةِ أَوْ إِلى السّوقِ.
  • خُذْ هٰذا أَوْ ذٰلِكَ.

But when the question is the choice - when you put two options to someone and ask which - Arabic switches to أَمْ, as you saw in lesson 15: أَتَشْرَبُ قَهْوَةً أَمْ شايًا؟، هَلْ تُريدُ الشّايَ أَمِ القَهْوَةَ؟ The test is simple: if the answer is “yes” or “no”, the word is أَوْ; if the answer has to be one of the two named things, the word is أَمْ. Both obey تَبَعِيَّة exactly like وَ - قَهْوَةً أَمْ شايًا has two ـً.

8. لٰكِنْ - but. لٰكِنْ contrasts, and at this level it is the safe, all-purpose way to say “but”. It sits between two clauses and governs nothing - the words after it keep whatever case their own sentence gives them:

  • أُحِبُّ الشّايَ لٰكِنْ لا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ.
  • البَيْتُ صَغيرٌ لٰكِنِ الحَديقَةُ واسِعَةٌ.

Two notes. The spelling is لٰكِنْ, with the little dagger alif over the ك standing in for a long vowel that is not written as a letter - the dagger alif; *لاكن with a full alif is wrong. And وَلٰكِنْ, with the وَ attached in front, is at least as common as لٰكِنْ alone and means exactly the same thing - treat the two as one item. There is a heavier relative, لٰكِنَّ with a shadda, which forces an accusative on the noun after it; that one belongs with إِنَّ and its sisters in lesson 44, and you do not need it yet.

9. بَلْ - no, rather. بَلْ cancels what was just said and replaces it. Its natural home is right after a negative, where English needs “but rather” or “but instead”:

  • ما جاءَ عَلِيٌّ بَلْ خالِدٌ. - Ali did not come; Khalid did. (ما negating a past verb is lesson 37 - here it is only the frame.)
  • لَسْتُ طالِبًا بَلْ مُدَرِّسًا. - I am not a student but a teacher.
  • لَيْسَ الدَّرْسُ صَعْبًا بَلْ سَهْلًا.

Look at what تَبَعِيَّة does in the last two: لَيْسَ puts its predicate in the accusative (lesson 23), so طالِبًا is مَنْصوب - and مُدَرِّسًا has to be مَنْصوب too. بَلْ after an affirmative sentence upgrades rather than corrects (اِنْتَظَرْتُ ساعَةً بَلْ ساعَتَيْنِ “I waited an hour - no, two”), and in modern prose a sentence-initial بَلْ means “in fact”. Keep the two senses apart: لٰكِنْ contrasts two things that are both true, بَلْ throws the first one away. After a negative both particles are grammatical - ما جاءَ عَلِيٌّ لٰكِنْ خالِدٌ is correct Arabic - but بَلْ is the ordinary modern choice there, so use it.

10. A coordinated pronoun keeps its preposition. This one has no English parallel and is worth memorizing as a shape. An attached pronoun is welded to the word in front of it, so you cannot hang one off a particle. Repeat the preposition instead:

  • مَعي وَمَعَكَ - with me and with you. Never *مَعي وَكَ.
  • بِهِ وَبِها - with it (m) and with it (f). Never *بِهِ وَها.
  • الرِّسالَةُ مِنّي وَإِلَيْكَ.

A related habit: when you add a noun to a subject that is already inside the verb, MSA slips the free pronoun in first as a buffer - ذَهَبْتُ أَنا وَأَخي إِلى المَطارِ, not ذَهَبْتُ وَأَخي. The ـتُ of the verb is too tightly bound to be coordinated with directly, and أَنا gives the وَ something to stand next to.

11. What this lesson leaves alone. لٰكِنَّ with its accusative is lesson 44. The larger connectors that hold a paragraph together - وَلِذٰلِكَ، بِالإِضافَةِ إِلى، مِنْ ناحِيَةٍ أُخْرى - are lesson 66. And there is a وَ that does not join at all but means “while”, opening a background clause; that is الحال, lesson 55.

Forms & patterns

The six particles. Only the first two are written joined:

الحَرْفEnglishالكِتابَةما يَرْبِطُمِثال
وَandjoined to the next wordnouns, verbs, clausesالقَهْوَةُ وَالشّايُ
فَـand then, sojoined to the next wordverbs and clausesدَخَلَ فَجَلَسَ
ثُمَّthen, laterseparate wordverbs and clausesأَكَلْنا ثُمَّ خَرَجْنا
أَوْorseparate wordnouns, verbs, clausesشايٌ أَوْ قَهْوَةٌ
لٰكِنْbutseparate wordclausesصَغيرٌ لٰكِنْ جَميلٌ
بَلْrather, insteadseparate wordnouns and clausesلا هٰذا بَلْ ذٰلِكَ

تَبَعِيَّة - one pair of names, all three cases:

الحالَةالجُمْلَةالمَعْطوفُ عَلَيْهِالمَعْطوفEnglish
مَرْفوعجاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ.عَلِيٌّخالِدٌAli and Khalid came.
مَنْصوبرَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا.عَلِيًّاخالِدًاI saw Ali and Khalid.
مَجْرورسَأَلْتُ عَنْ عَلِيٍّ وَخالِدٍ.عَلِيٍّخالِدٍI asked about Ali and Khalid.

The same with the article, where the ending is a single vowel rather than tanwīn:

الحالَةالعِبارَةEnglish
مَرْفوعالبَيْتُ وَالمَدْرَسَةُ قَريبانِ.The house and the school are close by.
مَنْصوبزُرْتُ البَيْتَ وَالمَدْرَسَةَ.I visited the house and the school.
مَجْرورفي البَيْتِ وَالمَدْرَسَةِ.In the house and in the school.

One pair of events, three particles, three different meanings:

الجُمْلَةالمَعْنىEnglish
دَخَلَ وَجَلَسَ.two facts, no order statedHe came in and sat down.
دَخَلَ فَجَلَسَ.straight away, or as a resultHe came in and sat down at once.
دَخَلَ ثُمَّ جَلَسَ.later, after an intervalHe came in and then, later, sat down.

“Or” in a statement against “or” in a choice question:

النَّوْعالأَداةمِثالEnglish
statementأَوْسَأَشْرَبُ شايًا أَوْ قَهْوَةً.I will drink tea or coffee.
yes-or-no questionأَوْهَلْ عِنْدَكَ قَلَمٌ أَوْ وَرَقَةٌ؟Do you have a pen or paper?
choice questionأَمْأَتَشْرَبُ قَهْوَةً أَمْ شايًا؟Do you drink coffee or tea?
choice questionأَمْهَلْ تُريدُ الشّايَ أَمِ القَهْوَةَ؟Do you want the tea or the coffee?

A pronoun cannot be coordinated bare - the preposition comes again:

الخَطَأالصَّوابEnglish
*مَعي وَكَمَعي وَمَعَكَwith me and with you
*بِهِ وَهابِهِ وَبِهاwith him and with her
*مِنّي وَكَمِنّي وَإِلَيْكَfrom me and to you
*لَهُ وَهالَهُ وَلَهاfor him and for her

Examples

العربيةEnglish
جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ مِنَ المَطارِ.Ali and Khalid came from the airport.
رَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا في السّوقِ.I saw Ali and Khalid in the market.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ خُبْزًا وَجُبْنًا وَزَيْتونًا.I bought bread, cheese and olives.
دَخَلَ الرَّجُلُ فَجَلَسَ بِجانِبِ النّافِذَةِ.The man came in and sat down by the window.
سَقَطَ الكوبُ فَانْكَسَرَ.The cup fell and broke.
قَرَأَ الرِّسالَةَ ثُمَّ كَتَبَ الجَوابَ.He read the letter, then wrote the reply.
دَرَسْتُ في القاهِرَةِ ثُمَّ عُدْتُ إِلى بَلَدي.I studied in Cairo and then went back to my country.
سَأَذْهَبُ إِلى المَكْتَبَةِ أَوْ إِلى السّوقِ.I will go to the library or to the market.
أَتَشْرَبُ قَهْوَةً أَمْ شايًا؟Do you drink coffee or tea?
أُحِبُّ الشّايَ لٰكِنْ لا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ.I like tea but I do not drink coffee.
البَيْتُ صَغيرٌ لٰكِنِ الحَديقَةُ واسِعَةٌ.The house is small but the garden is wide.
لَسْتُ طالِبًا بَلْ مُدَرِّسًا.I am not a student but a teacher.
سَأَتَّصِلُ بِهِ وَبِها غَدًا.I will call him and her tomorrow.
ذَهَبْتُ أَنا وَأَخي إِلى المَطارِ.My brother and I went to the airport.

Common mistakes

  • رَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وخالِدٌ -> رَأَيْتُ عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا - the second name shares the job of the first, so it shares its ending. This is the rule of the lesson; everything else is detail.
  • جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَ خالِدٌ -> جاءَ عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ - the وَ is never written with a space after it. It attaches to the next word like بِـ or الـ.
  • دَخَلَ فَ جَلَسَ -> دَخَلَ فَجَلَسَ - the same for فَـ. A single-letter word does not stand alone in Arabic writing.
  • وَقَعَ الوَلَدُ ثُمَّ صَرَخَ -> وَقَعَ الوَلَدُ فَصَرَخَ - the crying follows the fall instantly and because of it, so the particle is فَـ. ثُمَّ would put a pause in between.
  • مَعي وَكَ -> مَعي وَمَعَكَ - an attached pronoun cannot hang off a particle. Repeat the preposition: بِهِ وَبِها، لَهُ وَلَها، مِنْهُ وَمِنْها.
  • ذَهَبْتُ وَأَخي -> ذَهَبْتُ أَنا وَأَخي - the subject inside ذَهَبْتُ is a bound ending; put the free pronoun أَنا in first and coordinate onto that.
  • هَلْ تُريدُ الشّايَ أَوِ القَهْوَةَ؟ (offering a choice) -> هَلْ تُريدُ الشّايَ أَمِ القَهْوَةَ؟ - when the answer must be one of the two, “or” is أَمْ, not أَوْ.
  • اِنْتَظَرْتُ ساعَةً لٰكِنْ ساعَتَيْنِ -> اِنْتَظَرْتُ ساعَةً بَلْ ساعَتَيْنِ - لٰكِنْ joins two single words only after a negative or a prohibition. To correct or raise an affirmative statement the particle is بَلْ.
  • لَسْتُ طالِبًا بَلْ مُدَرِّسٌ -> لَسْتُ طالِبًا بَلْ مُدَرِّسًا - بَلْ obeys تَبَعِيَّة like every other joining particle. لَيْسَ made طالِبًا accusative, so مُدَرِّسًا is accusative.
  • البَيْتُ صَغيرٌ لاكِنْ جَميلٌ -> البَيْتُ صَغيرٌ لٰكِنْ جَميلٌ - the long vowel in لٰكِنْ is written with the dagger alif over the ك, never with a full alif letter.

Tips

  • File وَ and فَـ with بِـ، لِـ، كَـ and سَـ, not with ثُمَّ and لٰكِنْ. They are prefixes, and once you think of them that way the spacing mistake stops happening.
  • Use the rhyme test. Two coordinated nouns of the same kind normally rhyme: عَلِيٌّ وَخالِدٌ، عَلِيًّا وَخالِدًا، عَلِيٍّ وَخالِدٍ. If your pair does not rhyme, check the second ending.
  • Memory hook for the three “and”s: وَ is a list with no clock, فَـ is the next frame of the film, ثُمَّ is “later that day”.
  • English “and then” is usually فَـ, not ثُمَّ. Reach for ثُمَّ only when you could add “after a while” to the English without changing the meaning.
  • Do not be shy about repeating وَ in lists. خُبْزًا وَجُبْنًا وَزَيْتونًا is normal Arabic; modern print does also use a bare «،» between the items, but repeating وَ is never wrong.
  • Leave لٰكِنَّ alone until lesson 44. لٰكِنْ, and its twin وَلٰكِنْ, will carry every “but” you need through A1 and A2 - and neither one changes any endings.
  • When reading unvocalized text, remember that و is both a word and a letter. In وَلَد، وَقَفَ، وَصَلَ it is part of the root. The test: strip it off and see whether what is left is a word.
  • Starting a sentence with وَ is good Arabic, not sloppy Arabic. Read a few paragraphs of a news site and count how many sentences open with it - the English rule simply does not apply.

A1 26 / 70

Cardinal numbers and the noun they count

الأَعْدادُ الأَصْلِيَّةُ وتَمْييزُها

In short

Counting in English is the easiest grammar there is: pick a number, put a plural after it, done - “three books”, “twenty books”, “a hundred books”. Arabic asks two extra questions every single time. Which shape does the number itself take - and what does the number then do to the noun behind it? The answers change as you climb: 1-2 behave one way, 3-10 another, everything from 11 to 99 a third, and 100 and 1000 go back to a construct of their own. This is the reason learners who can hold a conversation still stumble on “five students”.

The good news is that there are only those few regimes, they are completely regular, and this lesson gives you all of them. The noun after a number even has a technical name - التَّمْييز, “the specifier” - and its whole job is to say what you are counting. Learn which form of التَّمْييز each band of numbers demands, plus the one strange agreement rule that makes ثَلاثَةٌ go with a masculine noun and ثَلاثٌ with a feminine one, and prices, ages, dates and quantities all open up at once.

The rule

1. The counting words themselves. Arabic writes its figures left to right inside a right-to-left sentence, in either of two competing sets of shapes: the 0-9 you already use (the only set in the Maghreb, and increasingly common elsewhere) or the Arabic-Indic shapes still normal in Egypt and much of the Mashriq. Both are read out as the same full words, and this lesson prints 0-9. The words for 0-10 come in two shapes each (the paradigms are in the next section); 11-19 are two-word compounds; 20, 30, 40 … reuse the sound masculine plural ending you met in lesson 9. The word for 100 is traditionally spelled مِائَةٌ, with an alif that is written but not pronounced - a spelling fossil. The modern simplified spelling مِئَةٌ is now perfectly acceptable and increasingly common; both are read the same way. Pick one and be consistent.

2. Regime one - 1 and 2 come after the noun, as adjectives. This is the opposite of English word order, and the most often forgotten rule of the three. واحِدٌ and اِثْنانِ are not counters at all; they are ordinary adjectives that follow their noun and agree with it in gender, case and definiteness, exactly like any adjective from lesson 8:

  • كِتابٌ واحِدٌ - one book
  • طالِبَةٌ واحِدَةٌ - one female student
  • كِتابانِ اثْنانِ - two books

And here is the practical point: you usually do not say them at all. The noun’s own form already carries the information. كِتابٌ on its own means “a book, one book”, and the dual كِتابانِ (lesson 12) means “two books” without any number word. Add واحِدٌ or اِثْنانِ only when you are stressing the count - “only one book”, “two, not three”.

3. Regime two - 3 to 10 build an إِضافَة with a plural genitive. From three upwards the number jumps in front of the noun and takes charge. The pair is a construct of exactly the kind you learned in lesson 20: the number is the مُضاف and the counted noun is the مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ, so the noun goes into the plural and into the genitive:

  • ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ - three books
  • عَشَرَةُ أَيّامٍ - ten days
  • خَمْسُ طالِباتٍ - five female students
  • تِسْعُ سَنَواتٍ - nine years

Because it is a real إِضافَة, the number loses its tanwīn (ثَلاثَةُ, not *ثَلاثَةٌ) and the noun takes the indefinite genitive ـٍ. And because it is a real إِضافَة, the ة of ثَلاثَةُ is pronounced as a full ت - ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ is heard with a hard ت in the middle, not with the light final -a of pausal ثَلاثَة.

4. The gender flip (التَّذْكيرُ والتَّأْنيثُ في العَدَد). For the numbers 3-10 the number takes the opposite gender marking from the thing it counts. A masculine noun pulls the ة onto the number; a feminine noun leaves the number bare:

  • masculine كِتابٌ -> ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ (number carries ة)
  • feminine طالِبَةٌ -> ثَلاثُ طالِباتٍ (number has no ة)

This looks perverse and it is; grammar books call it “polarity” and there is nothing to understand, only to drill. Two working notes:

  • Judge the gender from the singular, not from the plural’s shape. كُتُبٌ looks nothing like a masculine word, but its singular كِتابٌ is masculine, so the number takes ة. سَنَواتٌ has the feminine plural ending, and its singular سَنَةٌ is feminine, so the number stays bare: تِسْعُ سَنَواتٍ. أَيّامٌ is a broken plural of masculine يَوْمٌ: عَشَرَةُ أَيّامٍ.
  • Polarity applies to 3-10 and to the unit part of 13-19 and 23-99. It does not apply to 1, 2, 11 or 12, which simply agree with their noun, nor to the tens or to مِائَةٌ and أَلْفٌ, which never change shape for the gender of what they count.

5. Regime three - from 11 to 99 the noun is singular and accusative. This is the great simplifier. Everything from 11 to 99 takes a singular counted noun in the accusative indefinite, ending in tanwīn fatḥa ـً:

  • أَحَدَ عَشَرَ كِتابًا - eleven books (literally “eleven book”)
  • إِحْدى عَشْرَةَ طالِبَةً - eleven female students
  • عِشْرونَ طالِبًا - twenty students
  • خَمْسَةٌ وعِشْرونَ كِتابًا - twenty-five books

One noun, one ending, from 11 all the way to 99. Note the spelling of that ending: an alif is added after the tanwīn fatḥa (كِتابًا، طالِبًا، يَوْمًا) - but not after a ة, and not after a final hamza that already has an alif before it or under it (طالِبَةً، سَنَةً، مَساءً).

6. Why ـً matters more than the other endings. The pronunciation guide told you that in الوَقْف - stopping at the end of a phrase - the case endings are simply not pronounced. The accusative tanwīn is the famous exception: you drop the tanwīn but you keep the alif, and the word ends in an audible long vowel. So عِشْرونَ كِتابًا really is heard with that ending even in relaxed speech, while the ـٍ of ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ vanishes at a pause. Of all the case endings this path prints, this is the one you will genuinely hear on the radio - which makes counting a good place to start training your ear for إِعْراب.

7. Compound numbers 21-99: unit + وَ + ten. Arabic says the small part first, joined with وَ: “five and twenty”. The unit part behaves as it would on its own (so 3-9 keep their polarity), the ten never changes for gender, and the تَمْييز stays singular accusative:

  • خَمْسَةٌ وعِشْرونَ كِتابًا - 25 books
  • خَمْسٌ وعِشْرونَ طالِبَةً - 25 female students
  • واحِدٌ وثَلاثونَ يَوْمًا / إِحْدى وثَلاثونَ لَيْلَةً - 31 days / 31 nights
  • اِثْنانِ وأَرْبَعونَ رَجُلًا - 42 men

8. What inflects and what is frozen. Three different behaviours, and you need to keep them apart:

  • 3-10 inflect fully, as the first term of an إِضافَة: ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ (مَرْفوع) / قَرَأْتُ ثَلاثَةَ كُتُبٍ (مَنْصوب) / في ثَلاثَةِ كُتُبٍ (مَجْرور). One bare vowel, no tanwīn.
  • 11-19 are مَبْنِيّ - frozen. Both halves sit on a fatḥa whatever the sentence does: أَحَدَ عَشَرَ، ثَلاثَةَ عَشَرَ، تِسْعَةَ عَشَرَ - as a subject, as an object or after a preposition alike. The single exception is 12, whose first half is a dual and therefore swings: اِثْنا عَشَرَ (مَرْفوع) but اِثْنَيْ عَشَرَ (مَنْصوب ومَجْرور).
  • The tens carry the sound masculine plural ending and swing with it: عِشْرونَ when the phrase is مَرْفوع, عِشْرينَ when it is مَنْصوب or مَجْرور - جاءَ عِشْرونَ طالِبًا but رَأَيْتُ عِشْرينَ طالِبًا. The ن here never drops, because the number is not a مُضاف.

9. 100 and 1000 go back to an إِضافَة - with a singular genitive. مِائَةٌ and أَلْفٌ are ordinary nouns, so they take a construct like any other noun, and their counted noun is singular genitive: مِائَةُ كِتابٍ، أَلْفُ سَنَةٍ، مِائَةُ طالِبٍ. مِائَةٌ is feminine, which is why the hundreds are built with the bare unit: ثَلاثُمِائَةٍ، خَمْسُمِائَةٍ (usually written as one word). أَلْفٌ is masculine and counts normally: ثَلاثَةُ آلافٍ. In a long compound the تَمْييز follows the number nearest to it: مِائَةٌ وخَمْسَةٌ وعِشْرونَ كِتابًا, but مِائَةُ كِتابٍ on its own.

10. “The three books” - counting something definite. All of the above counts indefinite things. To count something already definite, keep the noun with its الـ and put the number after it as an adjective, with الـ of its own and the same polarity:

  • الكُتُبُ الثَّلاثَةُ - the three books
  • الطّالِباتُ الخَمْسُ - the five female students

11. Asking “how many”. كَمْ from lesson 15 takes exactly the 11-99 pattern - one singular accusative noun straight after it: كَمْ كِتابًا قَرَأْتَ؟ / كَمْ ساعَةً تَعْمَلُ؟ Answer with a full number phrase, or just the number.

Forms & patterns

0-10. The two columns are chosen by the gender of the counted noun’s singular; from 3 upwards the marking is reversed.

DigitWith a masculine nounWith a feminine noun
0صِفْرٌصِفْرٌ
1واحِدٌواحِدَةٌ
2اِثْنانِاِثْنَتانِ
3ثَلاثَةٌثَلاثٌ
4أَرْبَعَةٌأَرْبَعٌ
5خَمْسَةٌخَمْسٌ
6سِتَّةٌسِتٌّ
7سَبْعَةٌسَبْعٌ
8ثَمانِيَةٌثَمانٍ
9تِسْعَةٌتِسْعٌ
10عَشَرَةٌعَشْرٌ

Those are the free-standing forms, as you would say them counting aloud. In front of a noun the tanwīn goes (ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ). ثَمانٍ is the one awkward word: before a noun it appears as ثَماني نِساءٍ, with ثَمانِيَ in the accusative.

11-19 - two frozen words, both on a fatḥa. The unit half flips gender (polarity), the عَشَرَ half agrees with the noun directly.

DigitWith a masculine nounWith a feminine noun
11أَحَدَ عَشَرَإِحْدى عَشْرَةَ
12اِثْنا عَشَرَ / اِثْنَيْ عَشَرَاِثْنَتا عَشْرَةَ / اِثْنَتَيْ عَشْرَةَ
13ثَلاثَةَ عَشَرَثَلاثَ عَشْرَةَ
14أَرْبَعَةَ عَشَرَأَرْبَعَ عَشْرَةَ
15خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَخَمْسَ عَشْرَةَ
16سِتَّةَ عَشَرَسِتَّ عَشْرَةَ
17سَبْعَةَ عَشَرَسَبْعَ عَشْرَةَ
18ثَمانِيَةَ عَشَرَثَمانِيَ عَشْرَةَ
19تِسْعَةَ عَشَرَتِسْعَ عَشْرَةَ

The tens - one word, two forms, no gender at all.

Digitمَرْفوعمَنْصوب ومَجْرور
20عِشْرونَعِشْرينَ
30ثَلاثونَثَلاثينَ
40أَرْبَعونَأَرْبَعينَ
50خَمْسونَخَمْسينَ
60سِتّونَسِتّينَ
70سَبْعونَسَبْعينَ
80ثَمانونَثَمانينَ
90تِسْعونَتِسْعينَ

Hundreds and thousands - ordinary nouns, so a construct with a singular genitive.

DigitThe numberWith a counted noun
100مِائَةٌ / مِئَةٌمِائَةُ كِتابٍ
200مِائَتانِ / مِئَتانِمِائَتا كِتابٍ
300ثَلاثُمِائَةٍثَلاثُمِائَةِ كِتابٍ
500خَمْسُمِائَةٍخَمْسُمِائَةِ كِتابٍ
1000أَلْفٌأَلْفُ كِتابٍ
2000أَلْفانِأَلْفا كِتابٍ
3000ثَلاثَةُ آلافٍثَلاثَةُ آلافِ كِتابٍ
1000000مِلْيونٌمِلْيونُ كِتابٍ

The four regimes on one page - this is the table to memorise.

NumberWhere it standsForm of التَّمْييزExample
1-2after the nounadjective, agreesكِتابٌ واحِدٌ، كِتابانِ اثْنانِ
3-10before the noun, إِضافَةplural + مَجْرورثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ، خَمْسُ طالِباتٍ
11-99before the nounsingular + مَنْصوبعِشْرونَ كِتابًا، تِسْعَةَ عَشَرَ يَوْمًا
100, 1000before the noun, إِضافَةsingular + مَجْرورمِائَةُ كِتابٍ، أَلْفُ سَنَةٍ

The number 3-10 in all three cases - only the number moves; the تَمْييز is locked in the genitive, exactly as in any إِضافَة.

الحالَةالجُمْلَةEnglish
مَرْفوععَلى الطّاوِلَةِ ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ.There are three books on the table.
مَنْصوبقَرَأْتُ ثَلاثَةَ كُتُبٍ.I read three books.
مَجْروركَتَبْتُ عَنْ ثَلاثَةِ كُتُبٍ.I wrote about three books.

Polarity worked out on real plurals - always check the singular.

The singularIts genderThe count
كِتابٌmasculineأَرْبَعَةُ كُتُبٍ
يَوْمٌmasculineعَشَرَةُ أَيّامٍ
وَلَدٌmasculineسَبْعَةُ أَوْلادٍ
طالِبَةٌfeminineخَمْسُ طالِباتٍ
سَنَةٌfeminineتِسْعُ سَنَواتٍ
مَدينَةٌfeminineثَلاثُ مُدُنٍ
سَيّارَةٌfeminineسِتُّ سَيّاراتٍ
بَيْتٌmasculineثَمانِيَةُ بُيوتٍ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
عِنْدي كِتابٌ واحِدٌ فَقَطْ عَنْ هٰذا المَوْضوعِ.I have only one book on this subject.
في الغُرْفَةِ نافِذَتانِ ولَيْسَ فيها بابٌ ثانٍ.The room has two windows and no second door.
قَرَأْتُ ثَلاثَةَ كُتُبٍ في هٰذا الشَّهْرِ.I read three books this month.
في الصَّفِّ خَمْسُ طالِباتٍ وسَبْعَةُ طُلّابٍ.There are five female and seven male students in the class.
سَأَبْقى في القاهِرَةِ عَشَرَةَ أَيّامٍ.I will stay in Cairo for ten days.
دَرَسَ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ تِسْعَ سَنَواتٍ.He studied Arabic for nine years.
في حَقيبَتي أَحَدَ عَشَرَ كِتابًا.There are eleven books in my bag.
نَجَحَتْ إِحْدى عَشْرَةَ طالِبَةً في الامْتِحانِ.Eleven female students passed the exam.
في السَّنَةِ اثْنا عَشَرَ شَهْرًا.There are twelve months in a year.
يَعْمَلُ في هٰذا المَكْتَبِ عِشْرونَ مُوَظَّفًا.Twenty employees work in this office.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ خَمْسَةً وعِشْرينَ كِتابًا مِنَ المَعْرِضِ.I bought twenty-five books at the fair.
في المَكْتَبَةِ أَكْثَرُ مِنْ أَلْفِ كِتابٍ.There are more than a thousand books in the library.
كَمْ ساعَةً تَنامُ في اللَّيْلِ؟How many hours do you sleep at night?
الطُّلّابُ الثَّلاثَةُ غائِبونَ اليَوْمَ.The three students are absent today.

Common mistakes

  • ثَلاثُ كُتُبٍ -> ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ - the singular is masculine كِتابٌ, so the number takes the ة. Do not judge the gender from the look of the plural.
  • ثَلاثَةُ بَناتٍ -> ثَلاثُ بَناتٍ - and the mirror error: بِنْتٌ is feminine, so from 3 to 10 the number goes bare.
  • عِشْرونَ كُتُبٍ -> عِشْرونَ كِتابًا - from 11 to 99 the counted noun is singular and accusative. The plural genitive belongs to 3-10 only.
  • خَمْسَةُ كِتابٍ -> خَمْسَةُ كُتُبٍ - and the mirror of that: 3-10 demand a plural. A singular here is the 11-99 pattern applied in the wrong band.
  • ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٌ -> ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ - the noun after 3-10 is the second term of an إِضافَة, so it is مَجْرور: tanwīn kasra, never tanwīn ḍamma.
  • ثَلاثَةٌ كُتُبٍ -> ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ - the number is the first term of that same إِضافَة, so it loses its tanwīn and keeps one bare vowel.
  • واحِدُ كِتابٍ -> كِتابٌ واحِدٌ - 1 is not a counter. It follows its noun like an adjective, and most of the time you simply leave it out.
  • اِثْنانِ كُتُبٍ -> كِتابانِ - two of anything is the dual, and the dual says “two” by itself. Add اثْنانِ after it only for emphasis.
  • جاءَ عِشْرينَ طالِبًا -> جاءَ عِشْرونَ طالِبًا - the tens really do inflect: ـونَ for the subject, ـينَ after a verb’s object or a preposition.
  • أَحَدَ عَشَرُ كِتابًا -> أَحَدَ عَشَرَ كِتابًا - 11 to 19 are frozen on a fatḥa in both halves, in every position in the sentence. Only 12 changes (اِثْنا / اِثْنَيْ).
  • مِائَةُ كُتُبٍ -> مِائَةُ كِتابٍ - 100 and 1000 take a singular genitive, not a plural one. The plural pattern stops at 10.

Tips

  • Learn 3-10 as pairs, never as single words: ثَلاثَةٌ/ثَلاثٌ، أَرْبَعَةٌ/أَرْبَعٌ، خَمْسَةٌ/خَمْسٌ. Storing one form and deriving the other under pressure never works.
  • One sentence holds the core of the system: “up to ten the noun is plural and genitive; from eleven it is singular and accusative; one and two come afterwards”. Say it until it is automatic.
  • For polarity, train the reflex “what is the singular, and is it masculine or feminine?” The gender of the plural’s ending is irrelevant - سَنَواتٍ and طالِباتٍ take a bare number because سَنَةٌ and طالِبَةٌ are feminine, not because of the ـاتٌ.
  • Drill with two fixed props, one masculine and one feminine - كِتابٌ and طالِبَةٌ - and count from 1 to 25 with each of them out loud. Ten minutes of that beats any amount of reading.
  • Listen for the ـًا. After 11 it is the one ending that survives a pause, so a real recording will hand you عِشْرينَ طالِبًا with the ending intact. Use it as free إِعْراب practice.
  • Do not swallow the ة of ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ: inside a construct it is a hard ت, and saying it correctly is the quickest way to sound like you know the rule.
  • Phone numbers, room numbers and years-as-figures are read digit by digit or as plain numbers with no counted noun at all, so none of this applies to them. That is a lot of everyday numbers you can use today.
  • Ignore for now the awkward corners: ثَمانٍ, the long compound thousands, and the fact that a few plurals take a fatḥa instead of a kasra in the genitive. They are lesson 41’s business.

A2 27 / 70

Ordinals, fractions, the clock and dates

الأَعْدادُ التَّرْتيبِيَّةُ والكُسورُ والوَقْتُ والتّاريخ

In short

Cardinal numbers say how many; ordinals say which one in the row - the third lesson, the fifth floor, the first time. Grammatically the Arabic ordinal is not a number at all. It is an ordinary adjective cut on the pattern فاعِل, and it behaves exactly like كَبير or جَديد: it follows its noun and it agrees with it. The same handful of roots also yields the fractions (نِصْف، ثُلُث، رُبُع), and the clock and the date are built almost entirely out of ordinals, which is why all four topics live in one lesson.

After the counting rules of lesson 26 this comes as a relief: no reverse gender agreement, no genitive plural to keep track of, nothing to invert. What you actually have to memorize is small

  • two ordinals that are irregular (أَوَّل and ثانٍ), one root that hides its د (سادِس, not anything built on the ت of سِتَّة), and four or five fixed frames for telling the time. Then you can say when the meeting is, when you were born, and how much of the book you have read.

The rule

1. Ordinals 1-10 are cut on فاعِل. Take the cardinal’s root and pour it into the shape فاعِل: ثَلاثَةٌ -> ثالِثٌ، خَمْسَةٌ -> خامِسٌ، سَبْعَةٌ -> سابِعٌ، عَشَرَةٌ -> عاشِرٌ. The feminine is made the ordinary way, by adding ة: ثالِثَةٌ، خامِسَةٌ، عاشِرَةٌ. Two entries do not follow the rule and must be learned as vocabulary: “first” is أَوَّلُ / أُولى (no فاعِل anywhere in it), and “second” is ثانٍ / ثانِيَةٌ, which is regular in shape but irregular in its endings (rule 4).

2. سادِس, and why it has a د. The cardinal سِتَّةٌ looks as if its ordinal should be built on س-ت-ت, but the root is really س-د-س; the د assimilated long ago inside سِتَّة and it comes back in every other word of the family - the fraction سُدُسٌ, the adjective سُداسِيٌّ (six-part). So the ordinal is سادِسٌ / سادِسَةٌ. Learn سِتَّة and سادِس as a pair and the problem disappears.

3. An ordinal is an ordinary نَعْت, so it agrees three ways. Gender, case and definiteness - exactly the agreement of lesson 8, and it comes after its noun, where English puts it before:

  • الدَّرْسُ الثّالِثُ - the third lesson (masculine, nominative, definite)
  • الصَّفْحَةُ الثّالِثَةُ - the third page (feminine)
  • في الفَصْلِ الأَوَّلِ - in the first chapter (genitive after في, so both words end in a kasra)
  • قَرَأْتُ الفَصْلَ الأَوَّلَ - I read the first chapter (accusative)

Definiteness is the rule learners break most: if the noun has الـ, the ordinal must have الـ too. الدَّرْسُ الثّالِثُ is “the third lesson”; الدَّرْسُ ثالِثٌ is a complete sentence, “the lesson is a third one”. An indefinite pair is possible and means what it says: دَرْسٌ ثالِثٌ, “a third lesson”.

4. ثانٍ is an اسْم مَنْقوص - a noun that ends in a weak ي. Its endings behave unusually and this is worth getting right early, because “second” is everywhere:

  • indefinite nominative and genitive: ثانٍ (the ي disappears from the writing entirely)
  • indefinite accusative: ثانِياً (the ي comes back)
  • definite: الثّاني in the nominative and the genitive - the ending is there but silent (مُقَدَّرَة, “estimated”), so nothing is written on the ي - and الثّانِيَ in the accusative

So: جاءَ طالِبٌ ثانٍ، رَأَيْتُ طالِباً ثانِياً، الطّالِبُ الثّاني، رَأَيْتُ الطّالِبَ الثّانِيَ. The feminine ثانِيَةٌ / الثّانِيَةُ is completely regular and is the form you will use most, because it is the one the clock uses. Why the ي behaves like this is the subject of lesson 41; for now copy the four forms.

5. أَوَّل refuses tanwīn. أَوَّلُ is a diptote (مَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْف): when it is indefinite and standing on its own it takes no tanwīn at all, and its genitive is a fatḥa, not a kasra. In practice you meet it in two safe positions where the problem never arises - with الـ (الفَصْلُ الأَوَّلُ، في الفَصْلِ الأَوَّلِ) and as the first word of an إِضافَة (أَوَّلُ مَرَّةٍ، لِأَوَّلِ مَرَّةٍ), because both of those restore the ordinary kasra. The feminine أُولى / الأُولى never changes its ending at all: المَرَّةُ الأُولى، في المَرَّةِ الأُولى. One fixed form is worth memorizing separately: the adverb أَوَّلاً, “first of all, firstly”, which does carry tanwīn.

6. The ordinal can come first, as an إِضافَة. Beside الدَّرْسُ الثّالِثُ, Arabic can say ثالِثُ دَرْسٍ - the ordinal in front, normally masculine even when the noun is feminine, and the noun singular, indefinite and genitive behind it (lesson 20). The meaning is the same but the phrasing is tighter, and with أَوَّل and آخِر it is the normal way to speak: أَوَّلُ يَوْمٍ (the first day)، أَوَّلُ مَرَّةٍ (the first time)، آخِرُ قِطارٍ (the last train)، ثالِثُ طابِقٍ.

7. 11 and 12 are frozen. From eleven to nineteen the ordinal is a compound, and like the cardinal compounds of lesson 26 both halves are locked on a fatḥa and never change for case: الحادِيَ عَشَرَ (m) / الحادِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ (f)، الثّانِيَ عَشَرَ (m) / الثّانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ (f). Note that “eleventh” is الحادي, not الأَحَد. From twenty on, the tens serve as ordinals unchanged (الذِّكْرى العِشْرونَ), and the units are joined in front with وَ: الدَّرْسُ الثّالِثُ وَالعِشْرونَ، القَرْنُ الحادي وَالعِشْرونَ.

8. Fractions are cut on فُعُل. ثُلُثٌ (a third)، رُبُعٌ (a quarter)، خُمُسٌ (a fifth)، سُدُسٌ (a sixth)، ثُمُنٌ (an eighth). Every one of these is equally correct with a sukūn on the middle letter - ثُلْثٌ، رُبْعٌ، خُمْسٌ - and that is the pronunciation you will hear on the clock. “Half” is outside the pattern: نِصْفٌ. The plurals are broken plurals on أَفْعال: أَنْصافٌ، أَثْلاثٌ، أَرْباعٌ، أَخْماسٌ، أَثْمانٌ. To build a compound fraction, count the plural with the rules you already know: ثَلاثَةُ أَرْباعٍ (three quarters)، خَمْسَةُ أَثْمانٍ (five eighths). Two thirds is a dual: ثُلُثانِ, and in an إِضافَة it drops its ن - ثُلُثا الطُّلّابِ. A fraction of something specific is simply an إِضافَة: نِصْفُ الكِتابِ، رُبْعُ السّاعَةِ. Percentages are said with في المِئَةِ (or بِالمِئَةِ): عِشْرونَ في المِئَةِ.

9. The clock runs on feminine ordinals. The frame is السّاعَةُ + a feminine ordinal; the ordinal is feminine because it is agreeing with السّاعَة, which is itself the noun in the phrase: السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ, literally “the hour is the third one”. One o’clock breaks the series - السّاعَةُ الواحِدَةُ, not الأُولى. Minutes are added with وَ and subtracted with إِلّا:

  • السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَالرُّبْعُ / وَالنِّصْفُ / وَعَشْرُ دَقائِقَ
  • السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا رُبْعاً / إِلّا عَشْرَ دَقائِقَ

Two case rules keep this tidy. What follows وَ copies the case of السّاعَة, so it changes when a preposition arrives: السّاعَةُ الثّامِنَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ but في السّاعَةِ الثّامِنَةِ وَالنِّصْفِ. What follows إِلّا is accusative and stays accusative in every position: إِلّا رُبْعاً. (إِلّا is the whole subject of lesson 62; here take the accusative as part of the frame.) Note also that دَقيقَة is feminine, so its numbers behave in reverse as usual - خَمْسُ دَقائِقَ، عَشْرُ دَقائِقَ with no ة on the number. The question is كَمِ السّاعَةُ؟ and the time of day is an accusative adverb: صَباحاً، ظُهْراً، مَساءً، لَيْلاً، or بَعْدَ الظُّهْرِ.

10. Dates: days, months, years. The days are أَيّامُ الأُسْبوعِ, all of them definite and mostly built on numbers themselves - الأَحَد is “the one”, الاثْنَيْن “the two”, الثُّلاثاء “the three”. The working week in much of the Arab world runs مِنَ الأَحَدِ إِلى الخَميسِ. For the months there are two competing sets: the international names (يَنايِر، فِبْرايِر، مارِس …) are standard in Egypt, Sudan, Yemen and the Gulf, while Syria, Lebanon, Jordan, Palestine and Iraq use the old Semitic set (كانونُ الثّاني، شُباط، آذار …) - the same month, a different word, and note that four of those names contain the ordinals الأَوَّل and الثّاني. The Maghreb goes its own way again: Algeria and Tunisia print French-derived names (جانْفي، فيفْري …). Month names are foreign or frozen proper nouns: they take no tanwīn, and most of them show a fatḥa in the genitive (في سِبْتَمْبَرَ), while the ones ending in a long vowel never change (في مايو).

A date is written in figures and read day-month-year: 3 مارِس 2026. (This course writes the figures 0-9; much of the Mashriq prints the Arabic-Indic shapes instead, and reads them the same way.) Two frames cover almost everything you need: the ordinal one, وَصَلَ في الأَوَّلِ مِنْ سِبْتَمْبَرَ, and the year frame, وُلِدَ عامَ 1998 (with عامَ in the accusative as an adverb of time) or وُلِدَ في عامِ 1998 (with في, so genitive). وُلِدَ is a passive verb - lesson 52 - so take it as a phrase for now. The year itself is an ordinary cardinal when you say it out loud, and after عامِ it stands in the genitive: في عامِ أَلْفٍ وَتِسْعِمِئَةٍ وَثَمانِيَةٍ وَتِسْعينَ.

Forms & patterns

The ordinals 1-12, with the cardinal they come from:

العَدَدالعَدَدُ الأَصْلِيّالمُذَكَّرالمُؤَنَّث
1واحِدٌأَوَّلُ / الأَوَّلُأُولى / الأُولى
2اِثْنانِثانٍ / الثّانيثانِيَةٌ / الثّانِيَةُ
3ثَلاثَةٌثالِثٌ / الثّالِثُثالِثَةٌ / الثّالِثَةُ
4أَرْبَعَةٌرابِعٌ / الرّابِعُرابِعَةٌ / الرّابِعَةُ
5خَمْسَةٌخامِسٌ / الخامِسُخامِسَةٌ / الخامِسَةُ
6سِتَّةٌسادِسٌ / السّادِسُسادِسَةٌ / السّادِسَةُ
7سَبْعَةٌسابِعٌ / السّابِعُسابِعَةٌ / السّابِعَةُ
8ثَمانِيَةٌثامِنٌ / الثّامِنُثامِنَةٌ / الثّامِنَةُ
9تِسْعَةٌتاسِعٌ / التّاسِعُتاسِعَةٌ / التّاسِعَةُ
10عَشَرَةٌعاشِرٌ / العاشِرُعاشِرَةٌ / العاشِرَةُ
11أَحَدَ عَشَرَالحادِيَ عَشَرَالحادِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ
12اِثْنا عَشَرَالثّانِيَ عَشَرَالثّانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ

The endings of ثانٍ, the one ordinal whose case marks are irregular:

الحالَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعطالِبٌ ثانٍالطّالِبُ الثّاني
مَنْصوبطالِباً ثانِياًالطّالِبَ الثّانِيَ
مَجْرورلِطالِبٍ ثانٍلِلطّالِبِ الثّاني

The fractions (the sukūn variants ثُلْث، رُبْع، خُمْس are equally correct):

الكَسْرFractionالجَمْعExample
نِصْفٌ1/2أَنْصافٌنِصْفُ الكِتابِ
ثُلُثٌ1/3أَثْلاثٌثُلُثا الطُّلّابِ
رُبُعٌ1/4أَرْباعٌثَلاثَةُ أَرْباعٍ
خُمُسٌ1/5أَخْماسٌخُمُسُ الرّاتِبِ
سُدُسٌ1/6أَسْداسٌسُدُسُ الكَمِّيَّةِ
ثُمُنٌ1/8أَثْمانٌخَمْسَةُ أَثْمانٍ
عُشْرٌ1/10أَعْشارٌعُشْرُ العَدَدِ

Telling the time - one hour, all the usual slices:

الوَقْتالعِبارَة
1:00السّاعَةُ الواحِدَةُ.
3:00السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ.
3:05السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَخَمْسُ دَقائِقَ.
3:10السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَعَشْرُ دَقائِقَ.
3:15السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَالرُّبْعُ.
3:20السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَالثُّلْثُ.
3:25السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَخَمْسٌ وَعِشْرونَ دَقيقَةً.
3:30السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ.
3:40السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا ثُلْثاً.
3:45السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا رُبْعاً.
3:50السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا عَشْرَ دَقائِقَ.
12:00السّاعَةُ الثّانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ.

The days of the week:

اليَوْمEnglish
الأَحَدُSunday
الاثْنَيْنِMonday
الثُّلاثاءُTuesday
الأَرْبِعاءُWednesday
الخَميسُThursday
الجُمُعَةُFriday
السَّبْتُSaturday

The two month sets, side by side (both are Modern Standard Arabic - the split is regional):

الاسْمُ الدَّوْلِيّالمَشْرِقEnglish
يَنايِركانونُ الثّانيJanuary
فِبْرايِرشُباطFebruary
مارِسآذارMarch
أَبْريلنَيْسانApril
مايوأَيّارMay
يونْيوحَزيرانJune
يولْيوتَمّوزJuly
أَغُسْطُسآبAugust
سِبْتَمْبَرأَيْلولSeptember
أُكْتوبَرتِشْرينُ الأَوَّلOctober
نوفَمْبَرتِشْرينُ الثّانيNovember
ديسَمْبَركانونُ الأَوَّلDecember

Examples

العربيةEnglish
نَقْرَأُ اليَوْمَ الدَّرْسَ الثّالِثَ مِنَ الكِتابِ.Today we are reading the third lesson of the book.
الجَوابُ في الصَّفْحَةِ الثّالِثَةِ.The answer is on page three.
مَكْتَبي في الطّابِقِ الخامِسِ.My office is on the fifth floor.
الطّالِبُ الثّاني غائِبٌ اليَوْمَ.The second student is absent today.
زُرْتُ القاهِرَةَ لِأَوَّلِ مَرَّةٍ في 2019.I visited Cairo for the first time in 2019.
الغُرْفَةُ الأُولى عَلى اليَمينِ.The first room is on the right.
نَسْكُنُ في الطّابِقِ الحادِيَ عَشَرَ.We live on the eleventh floor.
كَمِ السّاعَةُ؟ - السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ وَالنِّصْفُ.What time is it? Half past three.
يَبْدَأُ الاجْتِماعُ في السّاعَةِ الرّابِعَةِ إِلّا رُبْعاً.The meeting starts at a quarter to four.
وَصَلَ القِطارُ في السّاعَةِ الثّامِنَةِ صَباحاً.The train arrived at eight in the morning.
نَعْمَلُ مِنَ الأَحَدِ إِلى الخَميسِ.We work from Sunday to Thursday.
اِنْتَظَرْتُ ثَلاثَةَ أَرْباعِ ساعَةٍ أَمامَ البابِ.I waited three quarters of an hour in front of the door.
نَجَحَ ثُلُثا الطُّلّابِ في الامْتِحانِ.Two thirds of the students passed the exam.
وُلِدَتْ عامَ 1998 في مَدينَةِ الرِّباطِ.She was born in 1998 in the city of Rabat.

Common mistakes

  • السّاعَةُ الثَّلاثَةُ -> السّاعَةُ الثّالِثَةُ - the clock takes the ordinal, never the cardinal. الثَّلاثَة is the quantity “three”, الثّالِثَة is “the third one”.
  • السّاعَةُ الأُولى -> السّاعَةُ الواحِدَةُ - one o’clock is the single slot where the clock uses واحِدَة. الأُولى means “the first” and is used of chapters, rooms and times, not of the hour on the dial.
  • الدَّرْسُ ثالِثٌ -> الدَّرْسُ الثّالِثُ - the ordinal is a نَعْت and must copy the definiteness of its noun. Left indefinite it turns the phrase into a sentence: “the lesson is a third one”.
  • الصَّفْحَةُ الثّالِثُ -> الصَّفْحَةُ الثّالِثَةُ - and it must copy the gender. صَفْحَة is feminine, so the ordinal takes ة.
  • في الفَصْلِ الأَوَّلُ -> في الفَصْلِ الأَوَّلِ - and the case. After في both words are مَجْرور; the ordinal is not exempt because it is a number.
  • الطّالِبُ الثّانِيْ -> الطّالِبُ الثّاني - never put a sukūn on the ي of الثّاني. Its nominative and genitive endings are silent, and the ي is simply left bare; only the accusative is written, الثّانِيَ.
  • الفَصْلُ السّائِتُ -> الفَصْلُ السّادِسُ - the ordinal of سِتَّة is built on the root س-د-س, which also gives the fraction سُدُس. There is no ت in it.
  • الدَّرْسُ الأَحَدَ عَشَرَ -> الدَّرْسُ الحادِيَ عَشَرَ - eleventh is الحادي, not the cardinal أَحَد. The second half عَشَرَ never changes.
  • السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا رُبْعٌ -> السّاعَةُ الرّابِعَةُ إِلّا رُبْعاً - whatever follows إِلّا is accusative, in every position in the sentence.
  • في السّاعَةِ الثّامِنَةِ وَالنِّصْفُ -> في السّاعَةِ الثّامِنَةِ وَالنِّصْفِ - what follows وَ copies the case of السّاعَة, so it turns to a kasra after a preposition.

Tips

  • Learn the ordinal as a shape, not as twelve separate words: take the cardinal, keep its three letters, pour them into فاعِل. Only 1, 2 and 6 have to be memorized on their own.
  • Say the time out loud in Arabic every time you check a clock for a week. Four frames (وَالرُّبْعُ، وَالنِّصْفُ، إِلّا رُبْعاً، وَعَشْرُ دَقائِقَ) cover nearly every hour of the day.
  • Memory hook for سادِس: the fraction سُدُس shows you the د that سِتَّة swallowed.
  • When you are unsure of the ending of a clock phrase, ask what case السّاعَة is in. Everything joined with وَ follows it; only the piece after إِلّا refuses and stays accusative.
  • Learn the month set of the region you actually read or travel in, and keep the other for recognition. A news wire will use كانونُ الثّاني and يَنايِر for the same month on the same day.
  • Digits stay digits on the page - 3 مارِس 2026 - and only become words when you speak. Do not try to inflect the figure you have written.
  • Two forms are worth over-learning because they appear on every form you will ever fill in: تاريخُ الميلادِ (date of birth) and رَقْمُ الصَّفْحَةِ (page number).
  • Leave the theory alone for now: why ثانٍ drops its ي and why أَوَّلُ refuses tanwīn is lesson 41, and the grammar of إِلّا is lesson 62. The forms above work without either.

A2 28 / 70

Comparative and superlative

اسْمُ التَّفْضيل

In short

English needs two devices to grade an adjective - the endings -er / -est for short words (big, bigger, biggest) and the helpers more / most for long ones (more useful, most useful) - plus a bag of irregulars (good, better, best). Arabic needs one word shape. Take the three root letters of the adjective and pour them into the pattern أَفْعَلُ: كَبيرٌ becomes أَكْبَرُ, جَميلٌ becomes أَجْمَلُ, سَهْلٌ becomes أَسْهَلُ. That single form covers both “bigger” and “biggest”. Arabic grammar calls it اسْمُ التَّفْضيل, “the noun of preference”.

So the work of this lesson splits in two. First, building أَفْعَلُ - straightforward from a sound root, with two small irregular classes (doubled roots such as قَليلٌ → أَقَلُّ, and weak-final roots such as عالٍ → أَعْلى) and one suppletive pair, خَيْرٌ and شَرٌّ. Second, the frame you put it in: أَفْعَلُ + مِنْ makes a comparative, while الـ or an إِضافَة makes it a superlative. One ending fact runs through everything: an indefinite أَفْعَلُ never takes tanwīn, and its genitive is a fatḥa, not a kasra.

The rule

1. One shape, two jobs. أَفْعَلُ by itself is neither “bigger” nor “biggest” - the sentence around it decides. أَكْبَرُ مِنْ أَخي is “bigger than my brother”; الأَخُ الأَكْبَرُ is “the biggest/eldest brother”; أَكْبَرُ بَيْتٍ is “the biggest house”. Learn the shape once and the two meanings come free.

2. Building it from a sound triliteral. Pull out the three root letters and set them as أَ-فْ-عَ-لُ: a hamza with fatḥa, the first radical with sukūn, the second with fatḥa, the third with the case ending. The long vowel of the adjective disappears completely.

  • كَبيرٌ (ك ب ر) → أَكْبَرُ - صَغيرٌ (ص غ ر) → أَصْغَرُ
  • جَميلٌ (ج م ل) → أَجْمَلُ - طَويلٌ (ط و ل) → أَطْوَلُ
  • سَهْلٌ (س ه ل) → أَسْهَلُ - كَثيرٌ (ك ث ر) → أَكْثَرُ

Note أَطْوَلُ: the و is the middle radical of ط و ل, and in the elative it stays a plain consonant with a sukūn - it is never contracted away. The pattern is stronger than the adjective you started from.

3. Doubled roots (المُضَعَّف) merge into one letter with a shadda. When the second and third radicals are the same, this pattern does not spell them out separately. The two collapse, the shadda appears, and the fatḥa that would have sat on the second radical slides back:

قَليلٌ (ق ل ل) → أَقَلُّ, never *أَقْلَلُ. هامٌّ / مُهِمٌّ (ه م م) → أَهَمُّ. شَديدٌ (ش د د) → أَشَدُّ. عَزيزٌ (ع ز ز) → أَعَزُّ. لَذيذٌ (ل ذ ذ) → أَلَذُّ.

4. Weak-final roots (النّاقِص) end in أَلِف مَقْصورَة and stop declining. When the third radical is و or ي, the elative ends in ـى, and that ending is fixed: أَعْلى is written and pronounced the same as subject, as object and after a preposition. Nothing is ever added to it - no ḍamma, no fatḥa, no tanwīn.

عالٍ (ع ل و) → أَعْلى, غالٍ (غ ل و) → أَغْلى, حُلْوٌ (ح ل و) → أَحْلى, قَوِيٌّ (ق و ي) → أَقْوى, ذَكِيٌّ (ذ ك ي) → أَذْكى, غَنِيٌّ (غ ن ي) → أَغْنى.

5. خَيْرٌ and شَرٌّ: the pair with no أَفْعَل. “Good/better/best” and “bad/worse/worst” are supplied by two words that do not show the أَفْعَلُ shape - historically they are elatives that lost their hamza (أَخْيَرُ → خَيْرٌ، أَشَرُّ → شَرٌّ). Because they look like ordinary nouns, they decline like ordinary nouns and do take tanwīn:

  • الصِّحَّةُ خَيْرٌ مِنَ المالِ. - Health is better than money.
  • الصَّمْتُ خَيْرٌ مِنْ كَلامٍ بِلا فائِدَةٍ. - Silence is better than pointless talk.
  • التَّأْخيرُ شَرٌّ مِنَ الغِيابِ. - Being late is worse than being absent.

Everyday MSA also has two perfectly regular rivals: أَفْضَلُ (from فاضِلٌ / فَضيلٌ) and أَسْوَأُ (from سَيِّئٌ), and these are what you will hear most often. Use أَفْضَلُ / أَسْوَأُ freely; read خَيْرٌ / شَرٌّ, which are commoner in proverbs and formal prose.

6. The comparative: أَفْعَلُ + مِنْ, and the form never moves. This is the point where learners of European languages over-work. اسْمُ التَّفْضيل in a comparative is invariable - one shape for a man, a woman, two people, a crowd:

  • هُوَ أَكْبَرُ مِنْ أَخيهِ. - هِيَ أَكْبَرُ مِنْ أُخْتِها. - هُمْ أَكْبَرُ مِنّا.

مِنْ is the one word Arabic uses for “than” - there is no second option to choose between. Before الـ it takes a helping fatḥa: أَكْبَرُ مِنَ البَيْتِ. With a pronoun it fuses: مِنّي، مِنْكَ، مِنْهُ، مِنْها، مِنّا، مِنْهُمْ.

The comparative can also sit inside a noun phrase as an ordinary adjective: أُريدُ حَقيبَةً أَكْبَرَ, “I want a bigger bag” - and there مِنْ is simply left off.

7. The ending: one ḍamma, no tanwīn, fatḥa for the genitive. أَفْعَلُ belongs to a class of nouns that refuse tanwīn. Say it as a slogan: one ḍamma, never two. So it is أَكْبَرُ, not *أَكْبَرٌ. And - the part that surprises everyone - after a preposition the ending is a fatḥa:

  • سَكَنّا في بَيْتٍ أَكْبَرَ. - We lived in a bigger house.
  • بَحَثْتُ عَنْ سِعْرٍ أَقَلَّ. - I looked for a lower price.

Two situations cancel this and bring the ordinary kasra back: when the word carries الـ, and when it is the first term of an إِضافَة.

  • مِنَ البَيْتِ الأَكْبَرِ - في أَكْبَرِ مَدينَةٍ

(The class has a name, المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ, and a longer membership list; lesson 41 handles it. Here just memorise the behaviour of أَفْعَلُ.)

8. Superlative, shape 1: الأَفْعَلُ / الفُعْلى - a normal agreeing adjective. Put الـ on the elative, attach it to a definite noun, and it behaves exactly like any adjective of lesson 8: same gender, same number, same case. The feminine of أَفْعَلُ is فُعْلى:

  • الأَخُ الأَكْبَرُ - the eldest brother - الأُخْتُ الكُبْرى - the eldest sister
  • الشَّرْقُ الأَوْسَطُ - the Middle East - الدُّوَلُ الكُبْرى - the great powers

In everyday MSA فُعْلى is in real use for only a limited set - الكُبْرى، الصُّغْرى، العُظْمى، الوُسْطى، العُلْيا، الدُّنْيا، القُصْوى - plus a few fixed phrases (الحُسْنى، المُثْلى), so treat it as vocabulary rather than as a rule you apply to any elative. And note that فُعْلى belongs to the superlative only: a comparative with مِنْ never uses it.

9. Superlative, shape 2: أَفْعَلُ + an indefinite singular in the genitive. No article anywhere; the elative is the first term of an إِضافَة, and the noun after it is singular, indefinite and مَجْرور. This is the workhorse of headlines and everyday speech:

  • أَكْبَرُ مَدينَةٍ - the biggest city - أَهَمُّ سُؤالٍ - the most important question
  • أَعْلى جَبَلٍ - the highest mountain - أَسْرَعُ طَريقٍ - the fastest route

The elative here is invariable for gender: هِيَ أَذْكى طالِبَةٍ, not *ذُكْيا.

10. Superlative, shape 3: أَفْعَلُ + a definite plural in the genitive. Same إِضافَة, but the second term is a definite plural. The meaning is “the …-est of the …”:

  • أَكْبَرُ المُدُنِ - the biggest of the cities - أَطْوَلُ الأَنْهارِ - the longest of the rivers - أَفْضَلُ الطُّلّابِ - the best of the students

Shapes 2 and 3 mean much the same thing; shape 2 is the more frequent. What you may not do is mix either with مِنْ - the إِضافَة already carries the “of”.

11. When there is no أَفْعَل to build: أَكْثَرُ / أَشَدُّ + an accusative noun. Two families of adjectives cannot produce an elative. Colours and physical traits are already on the أَفْعَلُ pattern (أَحْمَرُ، أَزْرَقُ، أَعْمى), and adjectives derived from the longer verb forms are too long to compress (مُزْدَحِمٌ، مُفيدٌ، مُنَظَّمٌ). For both, Arabic grades a helper word instead - usually أَكْثَرُ (“more in quantity”) or أَشَدُّ (“more in intensity”) - and turns the adjective into a noun in the accusative:

  • هٰذِهِ الوَرْدَةُ أَشَدُّ حُمْرَةً مِنْ تِلْكَ. - This rose is redder than that one.
  • الشّارِعُ أَكْثَرُ اِزْدِحامًا في الصَّباحِ. - The street is more crowded in the morning.
  • الكِتابُ الثّاني أَكْثَرُ فائِدَةً. - The second book is more useful.

The accusative noun is a تَمْييز, “a specification”; lesson 61 explains the case. For now copy the frame: helper in the elative, adjective-turned-noun with ـً.

12. Two small extras. To say how much more, add بِـ + amount after the elative: أَكْبَرُ بِكَثيرٍ (much bigger), أَغْلى بِقَليلٍ (slightly dearer), أَكْبَرُ مِنّي بِسَنَتَيْنِ (two years older than me). And for “as … as” - equality, not comparison - the elative is not used at all: هُوَ طَويلٌ مِثْلَ أَخيهِ.

Forms & patterns

Sound triliteral adjectives

الصِّفَةالجَذْراسْمُ التَّفْضيلEnglish
كَبيرٌك ب رأَكْبَرُbigger, biggest
صَغيرٌص غ رأَصْغَرُsmaller, smallest
جَميلٌج م لأَجْمَلُmore/most beautiful
طَويلٌط و لأَطْوَلُtaller, longer
قَصيرٌق ص رأَقْصَرُshorter
سَهْلٌس ه لأَسْهَلُeasier
صَعْبٌص ع بأَصْعَبُharder
كَثيرٌك ث رأَكْثَرُmore (in number)
سَريعٌس ر عأَسْرَعُfaster
قَريبٌق ر بأَقْرَبُnearer
بَعيدٌب ع دأَبْعَدُfarther
رَخيصٌر خ صأَرْخَصُcheaper
ثَقيلٌث ق لأَثْقَلُheavier
واسِعٌو س عأَوْسَعُwider, roomier

The two irregular classes, and the suppletive pair

Classالصِّفَةاسْمُ التَّفْضيلNote
مُضَعَّفقَليلٌأَقَلُّdoubled letter, one shadda - not *أَقْلَلُ
مُضَعَّفهامٌّ / مُهِمٌّأَهَمُّsame merge
مُضَعَّفشَديدٌأَشَدُّthe standard “more intense” helper
مُضَعَّفعَزيزٌأَعَزُّdearer
مُضَعَّفلَذيذٌأَلَذُّtastier
ناقِصعالٍأَعْلىends in ى, invariable for case
ناقِصغالٍأَغْلىdearer in price
ناقِصحُلْوٌأَحْلىsweeter
ناقِصقَوِيٌّأَقْوىstronger
ناقِصذَكِيٌّأَذْكىcleverer
ناقِصغَنِيٌّأَغْنىricher
suppletiveجَيِّدٌ / حَسَنٌخَيْرٌ (also أَفْضَلُ)takes tanwīn - not on the أَفْعَلُ shape
suppletiveسَيِّئٌشَرٌّ (also أَسْوَأُ)takes tanwīn

Declension of أَكْبَرُ - one ḍamma, and a fatḥa where you expect a kasra

الحالَةنَكِرَةwith الـمُضاف (superlative)
مَرْفوعأَكْبَرُالأَكْبَرُأَكْبَرُ مَدينَةٍ
مَنْصوبأَكْبَرَالأَكْبَرَأَكْبَرَ مَدينَةٍ
مَجْرورأَكْبَرَالأَكْبَرِأَكْبَرِ مَدينَةٍ

أَعْلى and the other ناقِص elatives have a single form in all nine cells.

Superlative with الـ - it agrees like any adjective

مُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّث
مُفْرَدالأَكْبَرُالكُبْرى
جَمْع (people)الأَكابِرُالكُبْرَياتُ
جَمْع (things)الكُبْرىالكُبْرى

The high-frequency فُعْلى feminines - learn them as words

المُؤَنَّثالمُذَكَّرEnglish
الكُبْرىالأَكْبَرُgreatest, eldest
الصُّغْرىالأَصْغَرُsmallest, youngest
العُظْمىالأَعْظَمُgreatest
الوُسْطىالأَوْسَطُmiddle
العُلْياالأَعْلىhighest, upper
الدُّنْياالأَدْنىlowest, minimum
القُصْوىالأَقْصىfurthest, maximum

No أَفْعَل available - grade a helper instead

الصِّفَةWhyالتَّفْضيل
أَحْمَرُalready أَفْعَلُ (a colour)أَشَدُّ حُمْرَةً
أَزْرَقُalready أَفْعَلُ (a colour)أَشَدُّ زُرْقَةً
مُزْدَحِمٌderived participleأَكْثَرُ اِزْدِحامًا
مُفيدٌderived participleأَكْثَرُ فائِدَةً
مُنَظَّمٌderived participleأَكْثَرُ تَنْظيمًا
مُتْعَبٌderived participleأَشَدُّ تَعَبًا

Left out of these tables: the rare masculine plural الأَفْعَلونَ, and the press habit of putting the feminine plural first (كُبْرَياتُ الشَّرِكاتِ, “the largest companies”) - read them, do not build them yet.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَخي أَكْبَرُ مِنّي بِسَنَتَيْنِ.My brother is two years older than me.
هٰذِهِ الحَقيبَةُ أَثْقَلُ مِنْ حَقيبَتِكَ.This bag is heavier than yours.
هُمْ أَسْرَعُ مِنّا في العَمَلِ.They are faster than us at work.
سَكَنّا في بَيْتٍ أَصْغَرَ وأَرْخَصَ.We lived in a smaller and cheaper house.
القاهِرَةُ أَكْبَرُ مَدينَةٍ في العالَمِ العَرَبِيِّ.Cairo is the largest city in the Arab world.
نَهْرُ النّيلِ أَطْوَلُ أَنْهارِ إِفْريقيا.The Nile is the longest of Africa’s rivers.
هِيَ أَذْكى طالِبَةٍ في الصَّفِّ.She is the cleverest student in the class.
أُخْتي الكُبْرى طَبيبَةٌ في العاصِمَةِ.My eldest sister is a doctor in the capital.
هٰذا أَهَمُّ سُؤالٍ في الدَّرْسِ.This is the most important question in the lesson.
الأَسْعارُ في السّوقِ أَقَلُّ مِنْ أَسْعارِ المَحَلِّ.Prices in the market are lower than the shop’s prices.
هٰذِهِ البِنايَةُ أَعْلى بِنايَةٍ في المَدينَةِ.This building is the tallest building in the city.
الصِّحَّةُ خَيْرٌ مِنَ المالِ.Health is better than money.
الطَّقْسُ اليَوْمَ أَسْوَأُ مِنْ أَمْسِ.The weather today is worse than yesterday.
شارِعُنا أَكْثَرُ اِزْدِحامًا مِنْ شارِعِكُمْ.Our street is more crowded than yours.

Common mistakes

  • هُوَ أَكْبَرٌ مِنْ أَخيهِ. -> هُوَ أَكْبَرُ مِنْ أَخيهِ. - أَفْعَلُ never takes tanwīn. One ḍamma, never two; the same for أَقَلُّ، أَهَمُّ، أَسْوَأُ.
  • هِيَ كُبْرى مِنْ أُخْتِها. -> هِيَ أَكْبَرُ مِنْ أُخْتِها. - the feminine فُعْلى is for the superlative only. In a comparative with مِنْ the elative does not agree with anything.
  • هُمْ أَكْبَرونَ مِنّا. -> هُمْ أَكْبَرُ مِنّا. - no plural either. The comparative has exactly one form for every subject.
  • سَكَنّا في بَيْتٍ أَكْبَرٍ. -> سَكَنّا في بَيْتٍ أَكْبَرَ. - an indefinite أَفْعَلُ takes a fatḥa in the genitive. The kasra comes back only with الـ (البَيْتِ الأَكْبَرِ) or in an إِضافَة (في أَكْبَرِ بَيْتٍ).
  • هٰذا الأَكْثَرُ جَميلٌ. -> هٰذا الأَجْمَلُ. - Arabic does not stack “most” in front of an ordinary adjective. Build the one word أَفْعَلُ; أَكْثَرُ / أَشَدُّ appear only when no أَفْعَلُ can be built.
  • أَقْلَلُ مِنْ ذٰلِكَ -> أَقَلُّ مِنْ ذٰلِكَ - in this pattern a doubled root writes its repeated letter once, with a shadda. Likewise أَهَمُّ, not *أَهْمَمُ.
  • هُوَ أَغْلًى مِنْ هٰذا. -> هُوَ أَغْلى مِنْ هٰذا. - elatives ending in أَلِف مَقْصورَة carry no vowel and no tanwīn at all, in any case.
  • هِيَ أَكْبَرُ مِنَ المُدُنِ. -> هِيَ أَكْبَرُ المُدُنِ. - the superlative إِضافَة already means “of”; adding مِنْ turns it back into a comparison with the cities.
  • أَكْبَرُ مَدينَةً في العالَمِ -> أَكْبَرُ مَدينَةٍ في العالَمِ - the second term of an إِضافَة is genitive, and it stays singular and indefinite.
  • هٰذِهِ الوَرْدَةُ أَحْمَرُ مِنْ تِلْكَ. -> هٰذِهِ الوَرْدَةُ أَشَدُّ حُمْرَةً مِنْ تِلْكَ.
    • أَحْمَرُ is already on the أَفْعَلُ pattern, so it cannot be graded again.
  • الشّارِعُ أَكْثَرُ اِزْدِحامٌ. -> الشّارِعُ أَكْثَرُ اِزْدِحامًا. - the noun after أَكْثَرُ / أَشَدُّ is accusative, with ـً.

Tips

  • Store the pair, not the single word: كَبيرٌ / أَكْبَرُ، قَليلٌ / أَقَلُّ، عالٍ / أَعْلى. The elative is regular enough to derive, but it is faster to have it ready.
  • Chant the ending as a two-word rule - “one ḍamma, fatḥa after a preposition” - and drill the one phrase في بَيْتٍ أَكْبَرَ until it sounds normal. That single habit fixes the commonest error in the lesson.
  • Test yourself with مِنْ: if مِنْ is there, the form is frozen; if الـ or a following noun is there, you are in the superlative and agreement or the genitive matters.
  • Shape 2 (أَكْبَرُ مَدينَةٍ) is the one to make automatic. It is short, it never needs agreement, and it is everywhere in headlines: أَهَمُّ قَرارٍ، أَكْبَرُ شَرِكَةٍ، أَعْلى نِسْبَةٍ.
  • Start the فُعْلى list from the seven words in the table and add others only as you meet them. Inventing a feminine for every elative produces forms nobody uses.
  • When you are stuck for an elative - a long participle, a colour, a borrowed adjective - reach for أَكْثَرُ / أَشَدُّ + noun + ـً. It works for almost any adjective, as long as the noun behind it exists (اِزْدِحام، فائِدَة، حُمْرَة).
  • Do not worry yet about why أَفْعَلُ refuses tanwīn, or about the case name of حُمْرَةً. Both have their own lessons later; the forms above are enough to speak and write now.

A2 29 / 70

The direct object and object pronouns

المَفْعولُ بِهِ وضَمائِرُ النَّصْبِ المُتَّصِلَة

In short

Lesson 19 built a sentence out of two pieces: a verb and the noun that does the action, ذَهَبَ الطُّلّابُ. This lesson adds the third piece, the thing the action is done to - المَفْعولُ بِهِ. It comes after the doer, and it wears the accusative ending: قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ الكِتابَ, “the student read the book”. English keeps subject and object apart by their position in the sentence. Arabic keeps them apart by their endings, which is why a path like this one prints every vowel: the ḍamma on الطّالِبُ and the fatḥa on الكِتابَ are the entire difference between who read and what was read.

The second half of the lesson is what happens when the object is a pronoun. English says “he saw me” with a separate word; Arabic glues the pronoun onto the back of the verb - شاهَدَني. The endings are almost the ones you already learned on nouns in lesson 7, with one addition that has its own name and its own dedicated mistake: نونُ الوِقايَة, the ن that a verb puts between itself and the ـي of “me”. كِتابي is “my book”; سَأَلَني is “he asked me”. Never the other way round.

The rule

1. Verb, doer, object - in that order. The neutral verbal sentence now has three slots: فِعْل + فاعِل + مَفْعول بِهِ. The doer keeps its nominative ḍamma, and the object takes a fatḥa:

  • قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ الكِتابَ.
  • فَتَحَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ البابَ.
  • شَرِبَ الوَلَدُ الحَليبَ.

Everything you learned about agreement in lesson 19 is unchanged: the verb standing in front of its subject stays singular and copies only gender (شَرِبَتِ البَناتُ الحَليبَ). The object does not touch the verb at all - it changes neither the verb’s shape nor its ending.

Only a verb that can reach a noun directly - a فِعْل مُتَعَدٍّ - takes a مَفْعول بِهِ. Verbs like ذَهَبَ and جَلَسَ take none, and a third group reaches its object through a preposition instead (بَحَثَ عَنْ، سَأَلَ عَنْ). Sorting the three groups out is lesson 30; here every verb is one that simply takes the noun.

2. Definite or indefinite, it is still an object. The accusative and definiteness are two separate switches, and both are on at once:

  • قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ الكِتابَ. - a definite object, a plain fatḥa.
  • قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ كِتابًا. - an indefinite object, tanwīn fatḥ (lesson 4).

3. The endings carry the roles, so word order can move. Because the fatḥa marks the object wherever it stands, Arabic can put the object in front of the doer for emphasis - as long as the endings keep the two roles apart: سَأَلَ المُعَلِّمُ الطّالِبَ is “the teacher asked the student”, while سَأَلَ المُعَلِّمَ الطّالِبُ - same three words, two vowels swapped - is “the student asked the teacher”. Read for this; write the plain order. When the endings are not printed, an Arab reader falls back on context and on the default order, which is exactly why the default order matters.

4. The accusative marker changes with the number class. This is the part learners skip and then get wrong for years. A fatḥa is only the marker for the singular and the broken plural. The duals and the two sound plurals mark the accusative with a letter or with a different vowel:

  • مُفْرَد - fatḥa: الكِتابَ، كِتابًا
  • جَمْع تَكْسير - fatḥa: الكُتُبَ، كُتُبًا
  • مُثَنّى - the ending ـَيْنِ: الكِتابَيْنِ، كِتابَيْنِ
  • جَمْع مُذَكَّر سالِم - the ending ـينَ, not a fatḥa: المُعَلِّمينَ
  • جَمْع مُؤَنَّث سالِم - a kasra, not a fatḥa: المُعَلِّماتِ، مُعَلِّماتٍ

Take these as facts for now and drill them; the theory that groups them - العَلاماتُ الفَرْعِيَّة, “the substitute markers” - is lesson 40. Two of them pay for themselves immediately: for a sound masculine plural and a sound feminine plural, the object form and the after-a-preposition form are identical (رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّمينَ / مَعَ المُعَلِّمينَ، رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّماتِ / مَعَ المُعَلِّماتِ). One shape covers both jobs, and only the nominative stands apart.

5. The silent alif and the pausal reading. An indefinite object adds the alif seat you met in lesson 4: كِتابًا، دَرْسًا، مَقالًا - but not on a word ending in ة (رِسالَةً), nor on a word ending in ـى (مَقْهًى), nor on ماءً. That alif is doing real work. All three tanwīns disappear at a full stop, but تَنْوينُ الفَتْحِ leaves something behind: it is read as a long ā. Stop after قَرَأْتُ كِتابًا and you say a word that ends in a long vowel, while قَرَأْتُ الكِتابَ ends in a bare consonant, and رِسالَةً read at a stop ends in the h-sound of the ة. This is the one case vowel that survives الوَقْف - the letter endings ـَيْنِ and ـينَ of rule 4 survive a stop too - so it is the one you will actually hear in careful speech, even in pause.

6. An object pronoun attaches to the verb. When the object is “me, you, him, her, us, them”, Arabic does not put a word after the verb - it hangs the pronoun on the verb’s back, written with no space:

  • شاهَدَ المُديرَ → شاهَدَهُ
  • سَأَلْتُ المُعَلِّمَةَ → سَأَلْتُها
  • أُحِبُّ المَدينَةَ → أُحِبُّها

The independent pronouns of lesson 6 cannot do this job. أُحِبُّ هُوَ and شاهَدَ هُمْ are not Arabic; هُوَ and هُمْ are the free nominative pronouns and never serve as the object of a verb. (Arabic does keep one carrier word, إِيّا, for the rare position where an object pronoun has no verb to lean on: إِيّاهُ، إِيّاكَ. Recognize it in reading and leave it alone in writing at this level.)

7. نونُ الوِقايَة - the ن of protection. All the endings are the ones you learned on nouns except the first person. A noun takes a bare ـي; a verb takes ـني, with an extra ن in front:

  • الاسْم: كِتابي، بَيْتي، سُؤالي، رَأْيي
  • الفِعْل: سَأَلَني، شاهَدَني، فَهِمَني، يَعْرِفُني

The grammarians’ explanation is exact and worth keeping: the ـي of “me” swallows whatever vowel it lands on (this is why كِتابُ + ي gives كِتابي, with the ḍamma gone). A verb’s final vowel is part of its conjugation and must not be eaten, so a ن steps in to take the hit - it “protects” the verb, hence الوِقايَة. The same protective ن is already in your prepositions: مِنّي and عَنّي are مِنْ / عَنْ plus that ن plus ـي, and certain particles use it too (إِنَّني, lesson 44).

Two consequences. First, ـني is for the object: سَمِعَني means “he heard me”, never “my hearing”. Second, the ن appears only in the first person singular - every other pronoun attaches to the verb exactly as it attaches to a noun: شاهَدَكَ، شاهَدَها، شاهَدَهُمْ.

8. هُ or هِ - the same harmony as on nouns. The four ه-endings keep their ḍamma after a fatḥa, a ḍamma, a sukūn, or a long ā / ū, and flip to a kasra after a kasra or a yāʾ:

  • شاهَدَهُ، شاهَدَتْهُ، شاهَدْتُهُ، شاهَدوهُ
  • شاهَدْتِهِ “you (f.sg.) saw him” - the kasra of ـتِ pulls the ending down

This is the same reflex that gives you بِهِ، فيهِ، عَلَيْهِ and كِتابِهِ in lesson 7. On verbs the kasra trigger is rare, so هُ is your default.

9. Small seams on the verb side. Two conjugated forms reshape themselves slightly when a pronoun arrives:

  • the plural ـوا drops its silent alif: شاهَدوا → شاهَدوهُ، سَأَلوا → سَأَلوني
  • the ending ـتُمْ grows a wāw: شاهَدْتُمْ → شاهَدْتُموهُ، سَأَلْتُمْ → سَأَلْتُموني

Nothing else moves. The verb keeps its own vowels, and the pronoun simply follows.

10. A pronoun object jumps in front of a noun subject. An attached pronoun cannot stand on its own, so it stays glued to the verb even when the doer is a full noun. The result looks like this:

  • سَأَلَني المُديرُ عَنِ العَمَلِ. - “the manager asked me about the work”
  • شاهَدَهُمُ الجارُ فِي الحَديقَةِ. - “the neighbour saw them in the garden”

The order is verb + object pronoun + subject noun. It is not a special construction; it is the only place the pronoun can go.

11. Left for later. The fatḥa turns up in several other jobs, each with its own lesson: the predicate of كانَ (كانَ الطّالِبُ مَريضًا) is lesson 32; adverbials of time and place are lesson 31; the cognate accusative المَفْعولُ المُطْلَق is lesson 60. A sentence whose doer is not mentioned at all - “the book was read” - promotes the object to نائِبُ الفاعِل and is lesson 52. Nouns that refuse tanwīn and take a plain fatḥa in place of a kasra (المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْف) are lesson 41. One small family is worth flagging now, because it is very common: أَبٌ and أَخٌ stretch their case vowel into a letter as soon as something is attached to them, so the object forms are رَأَيْتُ أَباهُ، سَأَلْتُ أَخاكَ.

Forms & patterns

The accusative marker across the number classes, on one noun set. Read the two right-hand columns against each other - the nominative is the form your dictionary and lesson 19 gave you:

الصِّنْفمَرْفوع (فاعِل)مَنْصوب (مَفْعول بِهِ)العَلامَة
مُفْرَد مُعَرَّفالكِتابُالكِتابَفَتْحَة
مُفْرَد نَكِرَةكِتابٌكِتابًاتَنْوينُ فَتْح
مُثَنّىالكِتابانِالكِتابَيْنِـَيْنِ
جَمْع تَكْسيرالكُتُبُالكُتُبَفَتْحَة
جَمْع مُذَكَّر سالِمالمُعَلِّمونَالمُعَلِّمينَـينَ
جَمْع مُؤَنَّث سالِمالمُعَلِّماتُالمُعَلِّماتِكَسْرَة
جَمْع مُؤَنَّث سالِم نَكِرَةمُعَلِّماتٌمُعَلِّماتٍكَسْرَتانِ

The full object-pronoun paradigm, on the sound verb شاهَدَ “he watched, he saw”:

الضَّميراللّاحِقَةالفِعْلEnglish
أَناـنيشاهَدَنيhe saw me
أَنْتَـكَشاهَدَكَhe saw you (m.sg.)
أَنْتِـكِشاهَدَكِhe saw you (f.sg.)
أَنْتُماـكُماشاهَدَكُماhe saw you two
أَنْتُمْـكُمْشاهَدَكُمْhe saw you (m.pl.)
أَنْتُنَّـكُنَّشاهَدَكُنَّhe saw you (f.pl.)
هُوَـهُشاهَدَهُhe saw him / it
هِيَـهاشاهَدَهاhe saw her / it
هُماـهُماشاهَدَهُماhe saw those two
هُمْـهُمْشاهَدَهُمْhe saw them (m.)
هُنَّـهُنَّشاهَدَهُنَّhe saw them (f.)
نَحْنُـناشاهَدَناhe saw us

نونُ الوِقايَة in one glance. Same root, same three letters, two different hosts:

الجَذْراسْم + ـيEnglishفِعْل + ـنيEnglish
س-أ-لسُؤاليmy questionسَأَلَنيhe asked me
ع-ل-ممُعَلِّميmy teacherعَلَّمَنيhe taught me
ر-أ-يرَأْييmy opinionرَآنيhe saw me
ز-و-رزِيارَتيmy visitزارَنيhe visited me
ف-ه-مفَهْميmy understandingفَهِمَنيhe understood me

The same two pronouns across the conjugation, so you can see where the seams are. Only the last two rows change anything:

الفِعْل+ هُ+ ني
شاهَدَشاهَدَهُشاهَدَني
شاهَدَتْشاهَدَتْهُشاهَدَتْني
شاهَدْتَشاهَدْتَهُشاهَدْتَني
شاهَدْتِشاهَدْتِهِشاهَدْتِني
شاهَدْتُشاهَدْتُهُ-
يُشاهِدُيُشاهِدُهُيُشاهِدُني
تُشاهِدُتُشاهِدُهُتُشاهِدُني
نُشاهِدُنُشاهِدُهُ-
شاهَدواشاهَدوهُشاهَدوني
شاهَدْتُمْشاهَدْتُموهُشاهَدْتُموني

Left out of these tables: the imperative and the jussive with an attached pronoun (lessons 35 and 41), and what hollow and weak-final verbs do at the seam (lessons 50 and 56).

Examples

العربيةEnglish
قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ الكِتابَ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.The student read the book in the library.
كَتَبَ الصَّحَفِيُّ مَقالًا طَويلًا عَنِ المَدينَةِ.The journalist wrote a long article about the city.
فَتَحَتِ المُعَلِّمَةُ البابَ ودَخَلَتْ.The teacher opened the door and came in.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ الكِتابَيْنِ مِنَ السّوقِ.I bought the two books at the market.
هَلْ تَعْرِفُ المُعَلِّمينَ الجُدُدَ؟Do you know the new teachers?
زارَ الطُّلّابُ المُعَلِّماتِ فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.The students visited the (female) teachers at the school.
شاهَدْنا الأَفْلامَ الجَديدَةَ فِي السّينَما.We watched the new films at the cinema.
سَأَلَني المُديرُ عَنِ العَمَلِ.The manager asked me about the work.
شاهَدَهُمُ الجارُ فِي الحَديقَةِ.The neighbour saw them in the garden.
هٰذِهِ المَدينَةُ جَميلَةٌ وأُحِبُّها كَثيرًا.This city is beautiful and I love it a lot.
كِتابي عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ، والمُعَلِّمُ سَأَلَني عَنْهُ.My book is on the table, and the teacher asked me about it.
هَلْ شاهَدْتِهِ فِي الجامِعَةِ؟Did you (f.) see him at the university?
الأَوْلادُ شاهَدوهُ فِي المَلْعَبِ.The boys saw him on the playing field.
زارَنا أَصْدِقاؤُنا فِي البَيْتِ.Our friends visited us at home.

Common mistakes

  • أَعْرِفُ المُعَلِّمونَ. -> أَعْرِفُ المُعَلِّمينَ. - a sound masculine plural marks the accusative with ـينَ. المُعَلِّمونَ is the subject form and cannot be an object.
  • رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّماتَ. -> رَأَيْتُ المُعَلِّماتِ. - a sound feminine plural takes a kasra as its accusative. The fatḥa you expect here simply does not exist for this class.
  • سَأَلي المُديرُ. -> سَأَلَني المُديرُ. - a verb needs نونُ الوِقايَة before ـي. Without the ن the word looks like a noun with a possessive on it.
  • كِتابْني عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ. -> كِتابي عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ. - the same error backwards. Nouns take the bare ـي; the protective ن belongs to verbs only.
  • كَتَبَ الوَلَدُ الرِّسالَةُ. -> كَتَبَ الوَلَدُ الرِّسالَةَ. - two ḍammas mean two doers. The second noun is what was written, so it takes the fatḥa.
  • قَرَأْتُ الكِتابانِ. -> قَرَأْتُ الكِتابَيْنِ. - the dual’s accusative is ـَيْنِ. ـانِ is the nominative, the form for the doer - and the doer normally stands after the verb, so position alone will not tell you which is which.
  • قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ كِتابَ. -> قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ كِتابًا. - an indefinite object keeps its tanwīn, and tanwīn fatḥ needs its silent alif seat.
  • أُحِبُّ هُوَ. -> أُحِبُّهُ. - an object pronoun is never a free word. هُوَ is a subject pronoun; the object is the ending ـهُ glued to the verb.
  • شاهَدْتُ هُمْ فِي السّوقِ. -> شاهَدْتُهُمْ فِي السّوقِ. - same rule, plural. Write the verb and its pronoun as one word, with no space.
  • هَلْ شاهَدْتِهُ؟ -> هَلْ شاهَدْتِهِ؟ - after the kasra of the feminine ـتِ, the ending هُ harmonizes to هِ, exactly as it does in فيهِ and كِتابِهِ.

Tips

  • Chant the two paradigms side by side: كِتابي، كِتابُكَ، كِتابُهُ… against شاهَدَني، شاهَدَكَ، شاهَدَهُ… Only the first slot differs, and that single mismatch is نونُ الوِقايَة.
  • A memory hook for the ن: the ـي of “me” bites off the vowel in front of it, so the verb puts on a helmet. Nouns are willing to lose their ending; verbs are not.
  • Test any noun after a verb by replacing it with a bare “him/her/it” in English, with no preposition in between. If that works, the Arabic noun is مَنْصوب and needs the accusative.
  • Learn the two sound plurals as a single fact - “everything that is not the subject looks the same”: المُعَلِّمينَ and المُعَلِّماتِ serve as object and as object of a preposition alike.
  • Do not trust a fatḥa to be the whole story. Before you write an object, ask which class the noun belongs to: singular and broken plural take the fatḥa, the other three do not.
  • Practise the pausal reading of كِتابًا out loud. Stopping on a long ā is often the only case vowel you will hear at the end of a sentence, and it is a quick way to sound accurate.
  • Reordered sentences like سَأَلَ المُعَلِّمَ الطّالِبُ are for reading, not for writing yet. Keep producing فِعْل + فاعِل + مَفْعول until the endings are automatic.
  • Ignore for now every other use of the fatḥa - after كانَ, on adverbs, on the cognate object. They arrive with their own lessons and each has its own trigger.

A2 30 / 70

Verbs and their prepositions

اللّازِمُ والمُتَعَدّي وتَعْدِيَةُ الفِعْلِ بِحَرْفِ الجَرّ

In short

English verbs come in two kinds. Some grab their object bare - “I entered the room”, “I thanked him” - and some need a preposition first - “I looked at the picture”, “I listened to the news”. Arabic makes the same split, with its own names for it: a verb that reaches its object directly is مُتَعَدٍّ, one that cannot is لازِم. The two languages draw the line in different places, and that mismatch is the whole of this lesson.

There is nothing to derive here. Which preposition a verb demands is part of its dictionary entry, like the gender of a German noun; you learn بَحَثَ عَنْ and حَصَلَ عَلى as two-word units and never separate them again. What is mechanical is what happens next: a preposition always pulls the following noun into the genitive, so the complement is مَجْرور with a kasra, not مَنْصوب with a fatḥa. Get the pair right and the ending comes free.

The rule

1. لازِم and مُتَعَدٍّ: can the verb hold an object by itself? A فِعْل مُتَعَدٍّ - the word means “passing over” - passes over to a مَفْعول بِهِ with nothing in between, and that object takes the accusative you met in lesson 29: قَرَأَ الوَلَدُ الكِتابَ، شَرِبْتُ القَهْوَةَ. A فِعْل لازِم - “sticking” - has no direct object at all; the action stays with its doer: ذَهَبَ المُديرُ، جَلَسْنا، نامَ الطِّفْلُ.

The quick test is the question ماذا؟ “what?”. If ماذا قَرَأْتَ؟ has a sensible answer that can follow the verb bare, with a fatḥa, the verb is مُتَعَدٍّ. Dictionaries mark the class for you, by printing either the preposition or a pronoun object: بَحَثَ عَنْ، ساعَدَهُ.

2. The third case, which is what this lesson is really about. Plenty of لازِم verbs do have something to say beyond the subject - they simply cannot reach it bare. They reach it through a preposition instead, and the tradition calls this تَعْدِيَةُ الفِعْلِ بِحَرْفِ الجَرّ, “making the verb transitive by means of a preposition”. The preposition plus its noun form one unit, الجارُّ والمَجْرور, and the noun inside it is genitive:

  • بَحَثَ الرَّجُلُ عَنْ عَمَلٍ. - the man looked for work
  • اِعْتَمَدْتُ عَلى صَديقي. - I relied on my friend
  • تَحْتاجُ الأُسْرَةُ إِلى بَيْتٍ أَكْبَرَ. - the family needs a bigger house

Notice the ending in each: عَمَلٍ with tanwīn kasra, صَديقي with an invisible kasra on the ق, hidden under the ـي, أَكْبَرَ with a fatḥa because أَكْبَر is a diptote (lesson 41). The preposition governs the noun exactly as it would after a plain في or مِنْ; the verb changes nothing.

3. The preposition belongs to the dictionary entry, not to logic. English has the same phenomenon - you rely on, listen to, think about - and the two systems do not line up. “Look for” is بَحَثَ عَنْ but “look at” is نَظَرَ إِلى; one English “answer” is أَجابَ عَنْ سُؤالٍ but another is رَدَّ عَلى رِسالَةٍ. So: memorise pairs, and never translate the English preposition.

Worse, swapping the preposition can change the verb’s meaning outright. رَغِبَ في is “to want”; رَغِبَ عَنْ is “to turn away from, to want no part of”. خافَ مِنَ الكَلْبِ is “he was afraid of the dog”; خافَ عَلى ابْنِهِ is “he feared for his son”.

4. Each preposition does have a flavour - use it as a hook, not as a predictor. عَنْ is distance and “about”; عَلى is weight resting on a surface, hence leaning on someone and getting hold of something; إِلى is an arrow pointing at a goal; بِ is contact and the instrument in your hand; في is being inside a domain; مِنْ is the source, and the thing you back away from. These pictures make a pair easy to keep; they will not let you guess it.

5. Trap A - Arabic puts in a preposition where English has none. These are the verbs that make learners write a fatḥa out of habit. The ones to fix now:

  • بَحَثَ عَنْ “to look for” - the thing searched for is never a bare object.
  • سَأَلَ عَنْ “to ask about” a topic (but the person asked is direct - see point 7).
  • أَجابَ عَنْ “to answer” a question.
  • رَدَّ عَلى “to reply to” a letter, a call, a remark.
  • نَظَرَ إِلى “to look at”; اِسْتَمَعَ إِلى “to listen to”.
  • اِحْتاجَ إِلى “to need”. English “need” takes a bare object; the ordinary Arabic pair is with إِلى (a bare accusative is recorded, but it is rare in modern prose).

6. Trap B - Arabic takes a bare object where English needs a preposition. The mirror-image error, and just as common:

  • دَخَلَ الغُرْفَةَ “he entered / went into the room” - not في.
  • شَكَرَ المُعَلِّمَةَ “he thanked the teacher” - the person is the object; what you are grateful for comes afterwards with عَلى.
  • ساعَدَ جارَهُ “he helped his neighbour”; the task helped with takes عَلى or في.
  • اِنْتَظَرَ الحافِلَةَ “he waited for the bus” - the “for” of English is not translated.
  • Two more of the same shape: حَضَرَ الاِجْتِماعَ، قابَلَ المُديرَ.

7. Some verbs take both at once: a person direct, a topic with a preposition. This is where سَأَلَ lives. The human being questioned is the direct object; what you asked about is عَنْ + genitive:

  • سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَ عَنِ الدَّواءِ. - I asked the doctor about the medicine.
  • شَكَرْتُ الجيرانَ عَلى مُساعَدَتِهِمْ. - I thanked the neighbours for their help.
  • ساعَدَ الأَبُ ابْنَهُ عَلَى الحَلِّ. - The father helped his son with the solution.

أَجابَ splits the same way: أَجابَ الأُسْتاذَ is “he answered the professor” (a person, bare), while أَجابَ عَنِ السُّؤالِ is “he answered the question” (a thing, with عَنْ).

8. Pronouns: the seam tells the two constructions apart. A direct object attaches to the verb in the accusative set of lesson 29; a prepositional complement attaches to the preposition in the genitive set of lessons 7 and 20:

  • اِنْتَظَرَني “he waited for me” against بَحَثَ عَنّي “he looked for me”.
  • ساعَدَنا “he helped us” against اِعْتَمَدَ عَلَيْنا “he relied on us”.
  • شَكَرَهُ “he thanked him” against رَدَّ عَلَيْهِ “he answered him”.

The first person is the clearest signal: as a direct object it is ـني (اِنْتَظَرَني), after a preposition a plain ـي (بي، لي، مِنّي، عَنّي، إِلَيَّ، عَلَيَّ). Two seam habits carry over unchanged from lesson 16: مِنْ and عَنْ double their ن before ـي and ـنا, and عَلى and إِلى turn their ى back into ي before any suffix (عَلَيْكَ، إِلَيْهِ), fusing into عَلَيَّ، إِلَيَّ in the first person. And ـهُ becomes ـهِ after a kasra or a ي: بِهِ، فيهِ، إِلَيْهِ، عَلَيْهِ, but عَنْهُ، مِنْهُ.

9. The linking vowel before الـ. The article begins with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل, which is not pronounced once anything precedes it. That leaves the sukūn of عَنْ or مِنْ colliding with the vowelless لـ of الـ, or with the doubled sun letter that replaces it - two sukūns in a row, which Arabic will not allow - so the preposition borrows a vowel: عَنْ + الطَّريقِ is written and said عَنِ الطَّريقِ, and مِنْ takes a fatḥa instead - مِنَ الاِمْتِحانِ. In a full sentence: سَأَلْتُهُ عَنِ الطَّريقِ.

بِ and لِ need nothing - they simply lean on the article (بِالقَلَمِ، لِلْمُديرِ). في، عَلى and إِلى shorten their long vowel in speech before the article; careful vocalization shows this by writing a short vowel on the last letter - a fatḥa on the ى in إِلَى المَحَطَّةِ، عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ, a kasra on the ي in فِي البَيْتِ - while the letters themselves never change.

10. What this lesson leaves alone. Arabic has a second way of making a verb transitive: rebuild it on Form II or Form IV, so that خَرَجَ “he went out” yields أَخْرَجَ “he took out”. That is تَعْدِيَة by pattern rather than by preposition, and it is lessons 46 and 52. The bare accusative noun that says why you did something is المَفْعولُ لِأَجْلِهِ, lesson 60. And when a whole clause follows the preposition (أَرْغَبُ في أَنْ أُسافِرَ), you need أَنْ and the subjunctive: lesson 34, with the verbal noun in lesson 54.

Forms & patterns

The core government list, grouped by preposition. The root and the form number are there so you can see that the government has nothing to do with either: Form VIII verbs alone turn up under three different prepositions.

الفِعْلالجَذْرالوَزْنEnglishمِثال
بَحَثَ عَنْب-ح-ثI فَعَلَto look for, search forيَبْحَثُ عَنْ شَقَّةٍ
سَأَلَ عَنْس-أ-لI فَعَلَ (مَهْموزُ العَيْنِ)to ask aboutسَأَلَ عَنِ السِّعْرِ
أَجابَ عَنْج-و-بIV أَفْعَلَ (أَجْوَف)to answer (a question)أَجابَ عَنْ سُؤالَيْنِ
رَدَّ عَلىر-د-دI فَعَلَ (مُضَعَّف)to reply toرَدَّ عَلَى الرِّسالَةِ
حَصَلَ عَلىح-ص-لI فَعَلَto obtain, getحَصَلَ عَلى وَظيفَةٍ
اِعْتَمَدَ عَلىع-م-دVIII اِفْتَعَلَto rely onنَعْتَمِدُ عَلَى التَّقْريرِ
وافَقَ عَلىو-ف-قIII فاعَلَto agree toوافَقَ عَلَى الشُّروطِ
اِحْتاجَ إِلىح-و-جVIII اِفْتَعَلَ (أَجْوَف)to needأَحْتاجُ إِلى وَقْتٍ
نَظَرَ إِلىن-ظ-رI فَعَلَto look atنَظَرَ إِلَى السَّماءِ
اِسْتَمَعَ إِلىس-م-عVIII اِفْتَعَلَto listen toاِسْتَمَعَ إِلَى الخَبَرِ
وَصَلَ إِلىو-ص-لI فَعَلَ (مِثال)to arrive at, reachوَصَلْنا إِلَى القَرْيَةِ
قامَ بِق-و-مI فَعَلَ (أَجْوَف)to carry out, undertakeقامَ بِواجِبِهِ
اِهْتَمَّ بِه-م-مVIII اِفْتَعَلَ (مُضَعَّف)to be interested in, care aboutتَهْتَمُّ بِالرِّياضَةِ
شَعَرَ بِش-ع-رI فَعَلَto feel (something)شَعَرَ بِالبَرْدِ
اِتَّصَلَ بِو-ص-لVIII اِفْتَعَلَ (مِثال)to contact, phoneاِتَّصَلَ بِالشَّرِكَةِ
فَكَّرَ فيف-ك-رII فَعَّلَto think aboutفَكَّرَ فِي المُسْتَقْبَلِ
رَغِبَ فير-غ-بI فَعِلَto want, desireيَرْغَبُ في تَغْييرٍ
شارَكَ فيش-ر-كIII فاعَلَto take part inشارَكَ فِي المُؤْتَمَرِ
خافَ مِنْخ-و-فI فَعِلَ (أَجْوَف)to be afraid ofيَخافُ مِنَ الكِلابِ

The English traps in the other direction: bare accusative in Arabic, preposition in English.

الفِعْلالجَذْرالوَزْنEnglishمِثال
دَخَلَ + مَفْعولد-خ-لI فَعَلَto enter, go intoدَخَلَ المَكْتَبَ
شَكَرَ + مَفْعولش-ك-رI فَعَلَto thankشَكَرَ زَميلَهُ
ساعَدَ + مَفْعولس-ع-دIII فاعَلَto helpساعَدَ الطُّلّابَ
اِنْتَظَرَ + مَفْعولن-ظ-رVIII اِفْتَعَلَto wait forاِنْتَظَرَ القِطارَ
حَضَرَ + مَفْعولح-ض-رI فَعَلَto attendحَضَرَ الحَفْلَةَ
قابَلَ + مَفْعولق-ب-لIII فاعَلَto meet (with)قابَلَ المُديرَةَ

One verb, two governments, two meanings. This is why the preposition is part of the entry.

الفِعْلالتَّرْكيبُ الأَوَّلالتَّرْكيبُ الثّاني
رَغِبَرَغِبَ في: to want - يَرْغَبُ فِي العَمَلِرَغِبَ عَنْ: to want no part of - رَغِبَ عَنِ الفِكْرَةِ
خافَخافَ مِنْ: to fear - خافَ مِنَ الظَّلامِخافَ عَلى: to fear for - خافَتْ عَلى أَوْلادِها
رَدَّرَدَّ + مَفْعول: to give back - رَدَّ الكِتابَرَدَّ عَلى: to reply to - رَدَّ عَلى سُؤالي
بَحَثَبَحَثَ عَنْ: to look for - بَحَثَ عَنْ مِفْتاحِهِبَحَثَ + مَفْعول: to examine - بَحَثَ القَضِيَّةَ
حَصَلَحَصَلَ عَلى: to obtain - حَصَلَ عَلى نَتيجَةٍحَصَلَ (لازِم): to happen - حَصَلَ حادِثٌ
قامَقامَ: to stand up - قامَ الضُّيوفُقامَ بِ: to carry out - قامَ بِالعَمَلِ
سَأَلَسَأَلَ + مَفْعول: to ask a person - سَأَلَ الشُّرْطِيَّسَأَلَ عَنْ: to ask about - سَأَلَ عَنِ العُنْوانِ

The pronoun seams. Only six persons are printed; أَنْتِ, the dual and the feminine plural (عَنْكِ، عَنْكُما، إِلَيْهِنَّ، بِكُنَّ) follow the pattern of lesson 7.

الضَّميرعَنْعَلىإِلىبِمِنْفي
أَناعَنّيعَلَيَّإِلَيَّبيمِنّيفِيَّ
أَنْتَعَنْكَعَلَيْكَإِلَيْكَبِكَمِنْكَفيكَ
هُوَعَنْهُعَلَيْهِإِلَيْهِبِهِمِنْهُفيهِ
هِيَعَنْهاعَلَيْهاإِلَيْهابِهامِنْهافيها
نَحْنُعَنّاعَلَيْناإِلَيْنابِنامِنّافينا
هُمْعَنْهُمْعَلَيْهِمْإِلَيْهِمْبِهِمْمِنْهُمْفيهِمْ

And the two seams side by side, so the accusative and the genitive suffix do not blur together.

مُتَعَدٍّ بِنَفْسِهِ (مَنْصوب)مُتَعَدٍّ بِحَرْفِ الجَرّ (مَجْرور)
اِنْتَظَرَنيبَحَثَ عَنّي
ساعَدَنااِعْتَمَدَ عَلَيْنا
شَكَرَهُرَدَّ عَلَيْهِ
دَخَلَهانَظَرَ إِلَيْها
قابَلَهُمْاِسْتَمَعَ إِلَيْهِمْ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَبْحَثُ عَنْ شَقَّةٍ صَغيرَةٍ في وَسَطِ المَدينَةِ.I am looking for a small flat in the city centre.
سَأَلْتُ المُوَظَّفَ عَنِ المَوْعِدِ الجَديدِ.I asked the clerk about the new appointment.
هَلْ أَجَبْتَ عَنْ كُلِّ الأَسْئِلَةِ؟Did you answer all the questions?
رَدَّتْ عَلى رِسالَتي بَعْدَ يَوْمَيْنِ.She replied to my letter two days later.
حَصَلَ أَخي عَلى شَهادَةٍ جامِعِيَّةٍ.My brother obtained a university degree.
نَعْتَمِدُ عَلَيْكُمْ في هٰذَا المَشْروعِ.We are relying on you in this project.
أَحْتاجُ إِلى ساعَةٍ مِنَ الرّاحَةِ.I need an hour of rest.
نَظَرَ إِلَيَّ وَابْتَسَمَ.He looked at me and smiled.
أَسْتَمِعُ إِلَى الأَخْبارِ فِي الصَّباحِ.I listen to the news in the morning.
قامَ الفَريقُ بِزِيارَةٍ قَصيرَةٍ لِلْمَتْحَفِ.The team made a short visit to the museum.
تَهْتَمُّ أُخْتي بِالتّاريخِ، وأُفَكِّرُ أَنا في دِراسَةِ الطِّبِّ.My sister is interested in history, and I am thinking about studying medicine.
شارَكْنا فِي المُسابَقَةِ، وخِفْنا مِنَ النَّتيجَةِ.We took part in the competition, and we were afraid of the result.
دَخَلْتُ الغُرْفَةَ وَانْتَظَرْتُ المُديرَ.I entered the room and waited for the manager.
شَكَرْتُهُ عَلى مُساعَدَتِهِ، ثُمَّ اتَّصَلْتُ بِالطَّبيبِ.I thanked him for his help, then I phoned the doctor.

Common mistakes

  • أَبْحَثُ الكِتابَ -> أَبْحَثُ عَنِ الكِتابِ - in the sense “look for”, بَحَثَ reaches its object only through عَنْ, and the noun after a preposition is مَجْرور, so it is a kasra and never a fatḥa.
  • أَنْظُرُ الصّورَةَ -> أَنْظُرُ إِلَى الصّورَةِ - “look at” is نَظَرَ إِلى; نَظَرَ في is a different pair, “to look into, to examine”. A bare object after نَظَرَ is among the most audible of learner errors.
  • دَخَلْتُ في الغُرْفَةِ -> دَخَلْتُ الغُرْفَةَ - the mirror error. دَخَلَ is مُتَعَدٍّ by itself; the في is imported from English “into” and does not belong in front of a place.
  • اِنْتَظَرْتُ لَكَ -> اِنْتَظَرْتُكَ - “wait for” is one verb in Arabic. The pronoun goes onto the verb in the accusative set, not onto a preposition.
  • شَكَرْتُ لَكَ عَلى مُساعَدَتِكَ -> شَكَرْتُكَ عَلى مُساعَدَتِكَ - the person thanked is a direct object; عَلى introduces what you are grateful for. (Classical Arabic also allows شَكَرَ لَهُ, and formal writing still uses it, but the ordinary modern construction is the direct one.)
  • أَحْتاجُ المُساعَدَةَ -> أَحْتاجُ إِلَى المُساعَدَةِ - English “need” takes a bare object; the pair to write is اِحْتاجَ إِلى. Same for the noun: بِحاجَةٍ إِلَى المُساعَدَةِ.
  • أُفَكِّرُ عَنِ المَوْضوعِ -> أُفَكِّرُ فِي المَوْضوعِ - “think about” translates preposition for preposition into a wrong pair. فَكَّرَ lives inside في.
  • حَصَلْتُ الجائِزَةَ -> حَصَلْتُ عَلَى الجائِزَةِ - حَصَلَ without عَلى is a different verb meaning “to happen, to occur”: حَصَلَ خَطَأٌ “a mistake occurred”.
  • سَأَلْتُهُ عَنْ الطَّريقِ -> سَأَلْتُهُ عَنِ الطَّريقِ - the sukūn of عَنْ cannot meet the هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل of الـ, so it takes a kasra. مِنْ does the same with a fatḥa: مِنَ البَيْتِ.
  • يَعْتَمِدُ عَلَيْهُ / سَأَلَ عَنْي -> يَعْتَمِدُ عَلَيْهِ / سَأَلَ عَنّي - ـهُ turns into ـهِ after a ي or a kasra, and عَنْ and مِنْ double their ن in front of ـي and ـنا.

Tips

  • Never put a verb alone on a flashcard. The card says بَحَثَ عَنْ, and the back carries a phrase: أَبْحَثُ عَنْ عَمَلٍ. A verb learned without its preposition has to be learned twice.
  • Learn Trap B as one block - دَخَلَ، شَكَرَ، ساعَدَ، اِنْتَظَرَ، حَضَرَ، قابَلَ. It is short, it covers most of the damage, and everything on it feels wrong to an English ear.
  • When you replace a noun with a pronoun, ask one question first: is it hanging off the verb or off a preposition? اِنْتَظَرَني but بَحَثَ عَنّي - the same ـي, but one hangs off the verb and one off the preposition.
  • Say عَنِ الـ and مِنَ الـ aloud inside whole phrases until the linking vowel is automatic. You will never hear it as a rule, only as a rhythm.
  • Collect pairs from real text, not from lists. One news paragraph a day, underlining every verb plus جارّ ومَجْرور, builds a better inventory than any table.
  • Watch the pairs built on one root: اِتَّصَلَ بِ “to contact” but وَصَلَ إِلى “to arrive at”, both from و-ص-ل. A different form is a different dictionary entry, with its own preposition.
  • Do not worry yet about what happens when a whole clause follows the preposition. Nouns first; أَرْغَبُ في أَنْ أُسافِرَ waits for lesson 34.

A2 31 / 70

Adverbials of time and place

الظَّرْفُ: المَفْعولُ فيهِ لِلزَّمانِ والمَكان

In short

English marks when and where with prepositions: in the morning, at night, in front of the house. Arabic can do that too - في الصَّباحِ is perfectly good - but its own everyday answer is a case ending. You take the noun that names the time or the place and put it in the accusative: صَباحًا “in the morning”, لَيْلًا “at night”, أَمامَ البَيْتِ “in front of the house”. Nothing is written in front of it and nothing is spoken. The old grammarians’ name for such a word says exactly why: المَفْعولُ فيهِ, “the thing the action was done in” - the في is inside the word, in its ending.

The workload here is small and the payoff is immediate, because these are the words you need in every sentence about a day, a place or a habit. There are two endings to control: the fatḥa on the adverbial itself, and - for the place words - the kasra on the noun right after it, because أَمامَ، تَحْتَ، بَعْدَ and their kind are normally the first term of an إِضافَة. Add one spelling rule about where the little alif of the tanwīn goes, and you can say when, where and how.

The rule

1. A ظَرْف is a noun doing an adverb’s job. صَباحٌ is “a morning”, a perfectly ordinary noun. Put it in the accusative and it stops naming a thing and starts naming a time: صَباحًا “in the morning”. Nothing else changes - no particle, no article. This is why lesson 16 warned you that عِنْدَ، مَعَ، قَبْلَ، بَعْدَ are not really حُروفُ جَرّ: a preposition is a حَرْف and has no case at all, while these are أَسْماء that normally sit in the accusative. A ظَرْف answers one of two questions: مَتى؟ (when) or أَيْنَ؟ (where).

2. Time: an indefinite noun with tanwīn-fatḥa. The core set is short and worth memorising as a block: صَباحًا، مَساءً، لَيْلًا، نَهارًا، ظُهْرًا، غَدًا، أَحْيانًا، دائِمًا، أَبَدًا. The same accusative also measures a stretch of time: اِنْتَظَرْتُ ساعَةً “I waited an hour”, دَرَسَ سَنَةً “he studied for a year”. Two practical notes:

  • في + a definite time noun is an equally correct alternative, not a mistake: صَباحًا and في الصَّباحِ both work, and في المَساءِ is as common as مَساءً. What you must not do is use both at once.
  • أَبَدًا needs a negative to mean “never”: لا أُدَخِّنُ أَبَدًا “I never smoke”. On its own it does not carry the negation.

3. The definite type - and two frozen time words. Most time adverbials are indefinite, but a handful are definite and accusative anyway. اليَوْمَ “today” and اللَّيْلَةَ “tonight” carry الـ and still take the fatḥa, because they are still adverbs: اليَوْمَ وَصَلَ الضَّيْفُ. Compare اليَوْمُ جَميلٌ “the day is beautiful” - there the word is the subject of a sentence, so it is مَرْفوع. الآنَ “now” always ends in a fatḥa and never moves. أَمْسِ “yesterday” is مَبْنِيّ: used as an adverb it is frozen with a kasra wherever it stands in the sentence, so there is no *أَمْسًا and no *أَمْسَ - just أَمْسِ. Finally, you can build a definite time phrase as an إِضافَة with the first word in the accusative: يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ “on Friday”, صَباحَ الغَدِ “tomorrow morning”, مَساءَ السَّبْتِ “on Saturday evening”.

4. Place and relation words: fatḥa on the ظَرْف, kasra on the noun after it. This is the single most useful rule in the lesson. The relational words أَمامَ، خَلْفَ، وَراءَ، فَوْقَ، تَحْتَ، بَيْنَ، عِنْدَ، حَوْلَ، داخِلَ، خارِجَ، قَبْلَ، بَعْدَ، خِلالَ، أَثْناءَ do two things at once:

  • they stand in the accusative, so their own ending is a bare fatḥa - the one thing that can change it is a preposition in front, see point 6;
  • they are the first term of an إِضافَة, so everything lesson 20 said applies to them - no الـ, no tanwīn, and the following noun is مَجْرور.

أَمامَ البَيْتِ، خَلْفَ المَدْرَسَةِ، فَوْقَ الطّاوِلَةِ، تَحْتَ السَّريرِ، عِنْدَ البابِ، حَوْلَ المَدينَةِ، قَبْلَ الظُّهْرِ، بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ، خِلالَ الأُسْبوعِ، أَثْناءَ الرِّحْلَةِ. Two vowels, always the same shape: -a … -i. Say them as one unit until the pair is automatic.

بَيْنَ needs two things to sit between, so it is followed by a dual, a plural, or two nouns joined by و: بَيْنَ الطّالِبَيْنِ، بَيْنَ الطُّلّابِ، بَيْنَ البَيْتِ وَالمَدْرَسَةِ. The dual after it is genitive, so it ends in ـَيْنِ, never ـانِ.

5. With a pronoun, the same words take the attached set. Because the ظَرْف is a مُضاف, the pronoun that follows is an ordinary مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ, exactly as in كِتابُهُ: أَمامَهُ “in front of him”, عِنْدَنا “at our place / we have”, بَعْدَكَ “after you”, بَيْنَهُما “between the two of them”, حَوْلي “around me”. Only the first-person ي replaces the fatḥa: أَمامي، عِنْدي، بَعْدي.

6. Do not put في in front of the place words. The في is already inside the word, so *في أَمامِ البَيْتِ is a double preposition and one of the loudest learner errors there is. Say أَمامَ البَيْتِ.

There is a real exception, and it is worth knowing because you will read it: after مِنْ or إِلى these words behave like ordinary nouns and go genitive - مِنْ أَمامِ البَيْتِ “from in front of the house”, مِنْ تَحْتِ الطّاوِلَةِ “from under the table”, مِنْ عِنْدِهِ “from his place”, إِلى جانِبِ النَّهْرِ “to the side of the river”. The everyday word for “next to” is exactly this type: بِجانِبِ البَيْتِ, with بِـ and a kasra. So the test is simple - a preposition in front means genitive, nothing in front means accusative.

One word in the list is fully at home both ways: أَثْناءَ الرِّحْلَةِ and في أَثْناءِ الرِّحْلَةِ are both standard MSA, so do not “correct” the في version when you meet it.

7. قَبْلُ and بَعْدُ standing alone. When the second term is dropped but still understood, these two freeze with a ḍamma: رَأَيْتُهُ مِنْ قَبْلُ “I saw him before”, وَصَلْنا مِنْ بَعْدُ “we arrived afterwards”. This is a fixed idiom, not a case you have to compute; learn the two phrases as vocabulary. With a following noun they are back to normal: قَبْلَ الظُّهْرِ.

8. Manner rides on the same accusative. How something is done uses the very same ending: سَريعًا “quickly”, جَيِّدًا “well”, كَثيرًا “a lot”, قَليلًا “a little”, تَقْريبًا “approximately”, مَعًا “together”, أَيْضًا “also”. Note that Arabic does not make these agree with anything - they are not adjectives here, so *يَتَكَلَّمُ جَيِّدٌ is wrong the way English “he speaks good” is wrong.

Many of them have a twin built from بِـ + a verbal noun in the genitive: بِسُرْعَةٍ، بِهُدوءٍ، بِسُهولَةٍ، بِشَكْلٍ جَيِّدٍ. Both are fully standard. سَريعًا and بِسُرْعَةٍ are interchangeable; for “quietly” and “easily” the بِـ phrase is the ordinary idiom - you will rarely if ever meet a bare accusative in that sense. When in doubt, بِـ + noun is the safe road.

A footnote for later: when the accusative describes the state of a person rather than the manner of an action - “he came back tired”, “she left smiling” - that is الحال, a related but separate construction with its own agreement rules. It is lesson 55, and you do not need it yet.

9. Where the alif of the tanwīn sits. The tanwīn-fatḥa is normally propped up by an alif that you write but never read as a syllable of its own: سَريعًا، كِتابًا، شُكْرًا، صَباحًا. Two endings refuse that alif:

  • a word ending in ة takes the tanwīn on the ة itself: سَنَةً، لَيْلَةً، مَرَّةً - never *سَنَةاً;
  • a word ending in a hamza that already sits after a long alif takes it on the hamza: مَساءً، ماءً، هَواءً. Writing *مَساءاً is a spelling error, not a variant - you would be putting two alifs in a row.

A hamza that is not after a long alif keeps the prop as usual: شَيْئًا، جُزْءًا، بُطْئًا.

10. This is the one ending you can hear. The pronunciation guide taught the pausal form: at the end of an utterance the endings ـُ and ـِ are simply dropped. The adverbial ـً is not - it survives as a long ā. That is why شُكْرًا and جَيِّدًا keep a clear long vowel at the end even from speakers who pronounce no other case ending. Practically: this one ending is worth saying out loud always.

11. Position is free, and a ظَرْف can be the whole predicate. The adverbial may follow the verb (سافَرْتُ صَباحًا) or open the sentence for emphasis (صَباحًا سافَرْتُ). And a place phrase can serve as the خَبَر of a nominal sentence all by itself, exactly like a في phrase in lesson 17: المِفْتاحُ تَحْتَ السَّريرِ، الحَديقَةُ خَلْفَ البَيْتِ.

What this lesson does not cover: joining a whole clause to a time word - عِنْدَما وَصَلَ، بَعْدَ أَنْ أَكَلَ - which is lesson 38, and the accusative that repeats the verb’s own verbal noun for emphasis, which is lesson 60.

Forms & patterns

Time - indefinite noun in the accusative (ظُروفُ الزَّمان):

الظَّرْفEnglish
صَباحًاin the morning
مَساءًin the evening
لَيْلًاat night
نَهارًاin the daytime
ظُهْرًاat noon
غَدًاtomorrow
أَحْيانًاsometimes
دائِمًاalways
أَبَدًاever (with a negative: never)
ساعَةً / سَنَةًfor an hour / for a year (duration)

Time words that do not follow that shape:

الكَلِمَةWhat it isEnglish
اليَوْمَdefinite, yet accusativetoday
اللَّيْلَةَdefinite, yet accusativetonight
الآنَfixed with a fatḥanow
أَمْسِمَبْنِيّ, fixed with a kasrayesterday
يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِaccusative + إِضافَةon Friday
صَباحَ الغَدِaccusative + إِضافَةtomorrow morning

Place and relation - fatḥa on the ظَرْف, kasra on the noun after it (ظُروفُ المَكان):

الظَّرْفُ + المُضافُ إِلَيْهِEnglish
أَمامَ البَيْتِin front of the house
خَلْفَ المَدْرَسَةِbehind the school
وَراءَ الجِدارِbehind the wall
فَوْقَ الطّاوِلَةِon top of the table
تَحْتَ السَّريرِunder the bed
بَيْنَ الطّالِبَيْنِbetween the two students
عِنْدَ البابِat the door
حَوْلَ المَدينَةِaround the city
داخِلَ الغُرْفَةِinside the room
خارِجَ المَدينَةِoutside the city
قَبْلَ الظُّهْرِbefore noon
بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِafter the lesson
خِلالَ الأُسْبوعِduring the week
أَثْناءَ الرِّحْلَةِduring the trip

The same words with an attached pronoun (only ي displaces the fatḥa):

الضَّميرأَمامَعِنْدَبَعْدَ
أَناأَماميعِنْديبَعْدي
أَنْتَأَمامَكَعِنْدَكَبَعْدَكَ
أَنْتِأَمامَكِعِنْدَكِبَعْدَكِ
هُوَأَمامَهُعِنْدَهُبَعْدَهُ
هِيَأَمامَهاعِنْدَهابَعْدَها
نَحْنُأَمامَناعِنْدَنابَعْدَنا
أَنْتُمْأَمامَكُمْعِنْدَكُمْبَعْدَكُمْ
هُمْأَمامَهُمْعِنْدَهُمْبَعْدَهُمْ

The dual and feminine plural rows (ـكُما، ـهُما، ـكُنَّ، ـهُنَّ) work exactly as in lesson 7 and are left out here.

Manner: the accusative and its بِـ twin:

المَنْصوببِـ + مَصْدَرEnglish
سَريعًابِسُرْعَةٍquickly
جَيِّدًابِشَكْلٍ جَيِّدٍwell
-بِهُدوءٍquietly
-بِسُهولَةٍeasily
كَثيرًا-a lot
قَليلًا-a little
تَقْريبًا-approximately
مَعًا-together

Where the tanwīn-fatḥa sits:

الكَلِمَةThe word ends inProp alif?
سَريعًاa plain consonantyes
كِتابًاa plain consonantyes
شُكْرًاa plain consonantyes
سَنَةًةno
لَيْلَةًةno
مَساءًء after a long alifno
ماءًء after a long alifno
شَيْئًاء not after a long alifyes
جُزْءًاء not after a long alifyes

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أَصِلُ إِلى المَكْتَبِ صَباحًا وَأَخْرُجُ مَساءً.I get to the office in the morning and leave in the evening.
أَحْيانًا أَدْرُسُ نَهارًا، وَدائِمًا أَقْرَأُ لَيْلًا.Sometimes I study in the daytime, and I always read at night.
اليَوْمَ عِنْدَنا دَرْسٌ طَويلٌ.Today we have a long lesson.
سافَرَ أَخي إِلى تونِسَ أَمْسِ.My brother travelled to Tunis yesterday.
سَأَزورُكُمْ غَدًا بَعْدَ الظُّهْرِ.I will visit you tomorrow afternoon.
الحَقيبَةُ تَحْتَ السَّريرِ، وَالكِتابُ فَوْقَ الطّاوِلَةِ.The bag is under the bed and the book is on the table.
وَقَفَتِ السَّيّارَةُ أَمامَ البَيْتِ.The car stopped in front of the house.
هُناكَ حَديقَةٌ صَغيرَةٌ خَلْفَ المَدْرَسَةِ.There is a small garden behind the school.
جَلَسْتُ بَيْنَ الطّالِبَيْنِ في الصَّفِّ.I sat between the two students in the classroom.
لا أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ لَيْلًا أَبَدًا.I never drink coffee at night.
يَتَكَلَّمُ العَرَبِيَّةَ جَيِّدًا وَيَكْتُبُها بِسُرْعَةٍ.He speaks Arabic well and writes it quickly.
دَرَسْنا كَثيرًا خِلالَ الأُسْبوعِ وَنِمْنا قَليلًا.We studied a lot during the week and slept little.
مَشَيْنا حَوْلَ المَدينَةِ ساعَةً تَقْريبًا.We walked around the city for about an hour.
الحارِسُ واقِفٌ عِنْدَ البابِ، وَالسَّيّارَةُ أَمامَهُ.The guard is standing at the door, and the car is in front of him.

Common mistakes

  • أَمامُ البَيْتِ -> أَمامَ البَيْتِ - with nothing in front of it the ظَرْف stays in the accusative. Its ending is a fatḥa whatever the verb around it is doing; only a preposition before it (مِنْ أَمامِ البَيْتِ) makes it genitive.
  • أَمامَ البَيْتُ -> أَمامَ البَيْتِ - and the noun after it is genitive, because the ظَرْف is the first term of an إِضافَة. The pattern is always -a … -i.
  • في أَمامِ البَيْتِ -> أَمامَ البَيْتِ - no preposition in front. The في is already built into the adverbial; that is literally what المَفْعولُ فيهِ means.
  • أَمامًا البَيْتِ -> أَمامَ البَيْتِ - a مُضاف takes no tanwīn and no الـ, so *الأَمامَ البَيْتِ is wrong for the same reason.
  • يَتَكَلَّمُ جَيِّدٌ -> يَتَكَلَّمُ جَيِّدًا - a manner word is accusative, not a nominative adjective agreeing with the subject.
  • مَساءاً -> مَساءً - a final hamza after a long alif carries the tanwīn itself; adding a prop alif would give you two alifs in a row.
  • سَنَةاً -> سَنَةً - the same for a word ending in ة. The prop alif is only for words that end in a plain consonant.
  • أَمْسًا -> أَمْسِ - أَمْسِ is مَبْنِيّ: one frozen form with a kasra, no case ending and no tanwīn to add.
  • اليَوْمُ وَصَلَ الضَّيْفُ -> اليَوْمَ وَصَلَ الضَّيْفُ - اليَوْمَ is definite but still an adverb here, so it is accusative. The ḍamma would make it the subject: اليَوْمُ جَميلٌ.
  • بَيْنَ الطّالِبانِ -> بَيْنَ الطّالِبَيْنِ - after بَيْنَ the dual is genitive, so it ends in ـَيْنِ. Nominative ـانِ cannot appear as a مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ.

Tips

  • Drill the place words as a two-vowel chant, never as single words: أَمامَ البَيْتِ، تَحْتَ السَّريرِ، بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ. The pair of endings is the grammar; the meaning is just vocabulary.
  • A quick self-test for any adverbial you are unsure of: could English put “in” or “at” in front of it? If yes, Arabic puts nothing in front and a fatḥa at the end.
  • When you cannot recall whether a manner word exists in the accusative, fall back on بِـ + noun in the genitive: بِسُرْعَةٍ، بِهُدوءٍ، بِسُهولَةٍ. It is never wrong, and it is what most writing uses anyway.
  • Watch the ending after بِـ: it is a preposition, so بِسُرْعَةٍ with a kasra - never *بِسُرْعَةً.
  • Store اليَوْمَ، الآنَ، أَمْسِ as three separate irregular items rather than trying to derive them. Everything else in the time set is regular.
  • Say the ـً out loud even in isolated words. It is the only case ending that survives the pausal form, so شُكْرًا، جَيِّدًا، سَريعًا all end in a clear long vowel when careful speakers say them.
  • In unvocalized text the place words are still recognisable: أمام البيت has no ال and no linking word, which is the visual signature of a construct. Read it as ظَرْف + genitive.
  • Do not reach yet for عِنْدَما or بَعْدَ أَنْ. As long as what follows is a noun, this lesson covers you; a following verb is lesson 38.

A2 32 / 70

kana: the past of the nominal sentence

كانَ وخَبَرُها المَنْصوب

In short

Lesson 2 gave you the sentence with no verb in it: البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ, “the house is big”. Arabic puts two nouns side by side and lets “is” live in the gap between them. Move that sentence into the past and the gap has to be filled - nothing about البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ can be bent into “was”. The word that fills it is كانَ, and it is an ordinary past-tense verb with a very particular effect on the two nouns behind it.

كانَ costs you two things. First, its stem is unstable: كانَ but كُنْتُ. That is not an irregularity to memorise but a rule with one condition, and once you see it you can predict every cell. Second, it re-labels the sentence: the old مُبْتَدَأ keeps its ḍamma, and the old خَبَر swaps its ḍamma for a fatḥa - كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا. You have met that exact machine before, in لَيْسَ (lesson 23). لَيْسَ and كانَ are two members of one family doing the same job in different tenses, so half of this lesson is already in your hands.

The rule

1. كانَ goes in front, and the sentence turns past. Take any verbless sentence and put كانَ before it. Nothing is deleted, nothing is reordered, and no extra word appears:

الجَوُّ جَميلٌ. -> كانَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. / أَخي مُهَنْدِسٌ. -> كانَ أَخي مُهَنْدِسًا.

The English “was / were” is one word and so is كانَ, but the resemblance stops there: كانَ is conjugated like any past-tense verb of the type you drilled in lesson 18, with all ten person-endings, and because the sentence now opens with a verb most grammarians count it as a جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة (lesson 19). The noun behind it is not a فاعِل, though: كانَ names no action, and what follows it is the old مُبْتَدَأ with its own predicate still attached.

2. The two halves get new names. Once كانَ is there, مُبْتَدَأ and خَبَر are no longer the right labels. The first noun becomes اسْمُ كانَ, “the noun of كانَ”, and the second becomes خَبَرُ كانَ, “the predicate of كانَ”. The names matter because from this moment the two slots behave differently, and every later lesson about this family (48, 49, 64) uses them.

3. اسْمُها stays مَرْفوع، خَبَرُها becomes مَنْصوب. This is the whole grammatical content of the lesson. The subject keeps the ending it always had; the predicate changes:

BeforeAfter
البَيْتُ (ـُ) كَبيرٌ (ـٌ)كانَ البَيْتُ (ـُ) كَبيرًا (ـًا)

Four sentences from your own stock, converted:

  • البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. -> كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا.
  • الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةٌ. -> كانَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةً.
  • المُعَلِّمونَ مَشْهورونَ. -> كانَ المُعَلِّمونَ مَشْهورينَ.
  • الطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٌ. -> كانَتِ الطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٍ.

Read the four right-hand columns aloud one after another. Only the second word of each pair moved; the first is untouched in all four.

4. “Accusative” is not always a fatḥa. مَنْصوب names a case, not a mark, and each kind of word shows it differently (the full system is lesson 40; here is the working slice). An indefinite masculine singular takes fatḥa-tanwīn on a supporting alif: كَبيرًا، مُتْعَبًا، مُهَنْدِسًا. A word ending in ة takes the two fatḥas on the ة itself with no alif: مَريضَةً، جَديدَةً، سَعيدَةً. The sound masculine plural does not use a fatḥa at all - it switches ـونَ to ـينَ: مَشْهورونَ -> مَشْهورينَ. The sound feminine plural takes a kasra: مُجْتَهِداتٌ -> مُجْتَهِداتٍ. The dual switches ـانِ to ـَيْنِ: سَعيدانِ -> سَعيدَيْنِ. And a definite predicate simply takes a bare fatḥa with no tanwīn: كانَ هٰذا الرَّجُلُ المُديرَ.

5. The non-human plural keeps its lesson-15 agreement. Putting a sentence into the past does not change who agrees with what. If the subject is a plural of things, the verb is feminine singular and the predicate is feminine singular too:

كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديدَةً. / كانَتِ الغُرَفُ نَظيفَةً.

Not *كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديداتٍ and not *كانوا الكُتُبُ. Two rules are stacked here and learners usually drop the older one: lesson 11 decides the shape of the predicate, this lesson decides its ending.

6. كانَ is أَجْوَف: the stem shortens to كُنْ. The root is ك-و-ن - you can see the و in the present يَكونُ and in the noun كَوْنٌ. In كانَ that و has stretched into the long alif. A long vowel does not survive in a closed syllable in the verb, so the moment you add an ending that begins with a consonant - and every such ending starts with a sukūn on the stem - the alif drops and leaves a short ḍamma behind:

كانَ + ـْتُ -> كُنْتُ ، كانَ + ـْنا -> كُنّا ، كانَ + ـْتُمْ -> كُنْتُمْ

Endings that begin with a vowel leave the alif alone: كانَ، كانَتْ، كانوا، كانا، كانَتا. So the paradigm splits cleanly in two, and *كانْتُ - alif plus sukūn - is not a shape an Arabic verb takes. (One extra detail: هُنَّ adds ـْنَ to كُنْ, and the two نs merge into a shadda: كُنَّ.) The shortening happens in every hollow verb, though the short vowel it leaves behind varies - قالَ gives قُلْتُ, باعَ gives بِعْتُ with a kasra - and lesson 50 turns it into a general rule. Here you only need this one verb.

7. Before a full noun, كانَ agrees in gender only. كانَ is a verb standing in front of its subject, so lesson 19 applies unchanged: it stays singular and matches gender:

كانَ الطُّلّابُ مُتْعَبينَ. / كانَتِ الطّالِباتُ مُتْعَباتٍ.

The plural forms كانوا and كُنَّ appear only when no subject noun follows, because then it is inside the verb itself: كانوا مُتْعَبينَ. And note the little kasra on كانَتِ: the ت of the feminine ending is vowelless, so before الـ it borrows a kasra to link the two words (lesson 18).

8. A شِبْه جُمْلَة predicate does not change at all. If the predicate is a preposition with its noun, or a word like عِنْدَ or هُناكَ (lesson 17), there is no single word that could take an accusative ending, and nothing happens except that كانَ appears:

الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ. -> كانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ. عِنْدي كِتابٌ. -> كانَ عِنْدي كِتابٌ. هُناكَ اِجْتِماعٌ. -> كانَ هُناكَ اِجْتِماعٌ.

Look hard at the last two. كِتابٌ and اِجْتِماعٌ are not predicates - they are the delayed subject, اسْمُ كانَ, so they stay مَرْفوع. *كانَ عِنْدي كِتابًا is a very common error, produced by the reflex “كانَ means accusative” applied to the wrong word. The predicate is عِنْدي, and a preposition-phrase has no ending to give.

9. كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ = “I used to study / I was studying”. The predicate can also be a whole sentence, and the most useful case is كانَ followed by a المُضارِع verb. That combination is how Arabic says the two things a bare الماضي cannot say: a habit in the past and an action in progress in the past.

كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ كُلَّ مَساءٍ. - I used to study Arabic every evening. كانَتْ تَعْمَلُ في مَطْعَمٍ صَغيرٍ. - She was working / used to work in a small restaurant.

Both verbs carry the person, and they must carry the same one: كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ، كُنّا نَدْرُسُ، كانوا يَدْرُسونَ. The مُضارِع keeps its ordinary مَرْفوع ending - there is no case to change, because a sentence has no ending. Use the pattern; do not go looking yet for its relatives.

10. لَيْسَ is the same machine in the present. لَيْسَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا and كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا are built identically: a conjugated verb-like word, an اسْم left مَرْفوع, a خَبَر pulled into the مَنْصوب. Even the conjugations rhyme, because لَيْسَ splits its stem exactly where كانَ does (لَيْسَ / لَسْتُ, كانَ / كُنْتُ). If you can do one, you can do the other; كانَ is simply the family’s head, and lesson 43 introduces the rest of it.

11. The ending you can actually hear. Case endings vanish at a pause - the ـٌ of كَبيرٌ and the ـٍ of مُجْتَهِداتٍ are simply not pronounced when you stop. The accusative ـًا is the exception: in الوَقْف the tanwīn softens but the alif stays, so كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا really does end in an audible long ā. Say كُنْتُ مُتْعَبٌ to an Arabic speaker and the mistake is heard, not merely mis-spelled. This is worth drilling out loud for that reason alone.

12. Not in this lesson. كانَ has a large family and a large future, all of it deliberately postponed: أَصْبَحَ، صارَ، ظَلَّ، ما زالَ - أَخَوات كانَ - are lesson 43; the negative لَمْ يَكُنْ needs the jussive and waits for lessons 35 and 42; كانَ قَدْ فَعَلَ, the past perfect, is lesson 45. One preview is free, because you already have the future (lesson 24): سَيَكونُ does precisely what كانَ does, in the other direction - سَيَكونُ الجَوُّ جَميلًا غَدًا.

Forms & patterns

كانَ in the past - the ten singular and plural persons

الضَّميرالفِعْلEnglish
أَناكُنْتُI was
أَنْتَكُنْتَyou were (m sg)
أَنْتِكُنْتِyou were (f sg)
هُوَكانَhe / it was
هِيَكانَتْshe / it was
نَحْنُكُنّاwe were
أَنْتُمْكُنْتُمْyou were (m pl)
أَنْتُنَّكُنْتُنَّyou were (f pl)
هُمْكانواthey were (m pl)
هُنَّكُنَّthey were (f pl)

The three dual cells are left out above only to keep the table short; they are built the same way: أَنْتُما كُنْتُما، هُما كانا (m.), هُما كانَتا (f.). The endings themselves are exactly the lesson-22 set - nothing new is being learned here except the stem.

Where the stem breaks

The ending begins withStemForms
a consonant (sukūn on the stem)كُنْكُنْتُ، كُنْتَ، كُنْتِ، كُنّا، كُنْتُمْ، كُنْتُنَّ، كُنَّ، كُنْتُما
a vowelكانكانَ، كانَتْ، كانوا، كانا، كانَتا

Converting a nominal sentence

Predicate typePresent (no verb)Past with كانَ
adjective, m. sgالبَيْتُ كَبيرٌ.كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا.
adjective, f. sgالطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةٌ.كانَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةً.
nounأَخي مُهَنْدِسٌ.كانَ أَخي مُهَنْدِسًا.
sound m. pluralالمُعَلِّمونَ مَشْهورونَ.كانَ المُعَلِّمونَ مَشْهورينَ.
sound f. pluralالطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٌ.كانَتِ الطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٍ.
broken plural (human)الطُّلّابُ مُتْعَبونَ.كانَ الطُّلّابُ مُتْعَبينَ.
non-human pluralالكُتُبُ جَديدَةٌ.كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديدَةً.
dualالوَلَدانِ سَعيدانِ.كانَ الوَلَدانِ سَعيدَيْنِ.
شِبْه جُمْلَةالكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.كانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.
شِبْه جُمْلَةعِنْدي كِتابٌ.كانَ عِنْدي كِتابٌ.

How the مَنْصوب shows on the predicate

Shape of the predicateمَرْفوعمَنْصوبMark
indefinite, m. sgكَبيرٌكَبيرًاfatḥa-tanwīn on a supporting alif
ending in ةمَريضَةٌمَريضَةًfatḥa-tanwīn, no alif
definiteالمُديرُالمُديرَplain fatḥa, no tanwīn
sound masculine pluralمَشْهورونَمَشْهورينَـونَ becomes ـينَ
sound feminine pluralمُجْتَهِداتٌمُجْتَهِداتٍkasra, never a fatḥa
dualسَعيدانِسَعيدَيْنِـانِ becomes ـَيْنِ

كانَ + المُضارِع - “used to / was doing”

الماضيالمُضارِعEnglish
كُنْتُأَدْرُسُI used to study / I was studying
كُنْتَتَسْكُنُyou used to live
كانَتْتَعْمَلُshe used to work
كُنّانَلْعَبُwe used to play
كانوايَشْرَبونَthey used to drink

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا وقَريبًا مِنَ المَحَطَّةِ.The house was big and near the station.
كانَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةً أَمْسِ.The student was ill yesterday.
كانَ المُعَلِّمونَ مَشْهورينَ في هٰذِهِ المَدينَةِ.The teachers were famous in this city.
كانَتِ الطّالِباتُ مُجْتَهِداتٍ جِدًّا.The students were very hard-working.
كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديدَةً وغالِيَةً.The books were new and expensive.
كُنْتُ مُتْعَبًا بَعْدَ السَّفَرِ الطَّويلِ.I was tired after the long journey.
كُنّا في المَكْتَبَةِ حَتَّى المَساءِ.We were in the library until the evening.
هَلْ كُنْتِ في البَيْتِ صَباحَ الجُمُعَةِ؟Were you at home on Friday morning?
كانوا طُلّابًا في كُلِّيَّةِ الطِّبِّ.They were students in the faculty of medicine.
كانَ الوَلَدانِ سَعيدَيْنِ بِالهَدِيَّةِ.The two boys were happy with the present.
كانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ، وأَيْنَ هُوَ الآنَ؟The book was on the table, and where is it now?
كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ كَثيرٌ في الصَّيْفِ.I had a lot of time in the summer.
كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ كُلَّ مَساءٍ.I used to study Arabic every evening.
ماذا كُنْتُمْ تَفْعَلونَ في اللَّيْلِ؟What were you doing at night?

Common mistakes

  • كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ. -> كانَ البَيْتُ كَبيرًا. - The اسْم keeps its ḍamma, the خَبَر takes the fatḥa. Leaving the predicate مَرْفوع is by far the most frequent كانَ error.
  • كانَ الطُّلّابُ مُجْتَهِدونَ. -> كانَ الطُّلّابُ مُجْتَهِدينَ. - The sound masculine plural shows the accusative as ـينَ. There is no fatḥa to write, but the case change is real.
  • كانْتُ في البَيْتِ. -> كُنْتُ في البَيْتِ. - A verb stem does not keep a long alif in front of a sukūn. Every consonant-initial ending shortens the stem to كُنْ with a ḍamma.
  • كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديداتٍ. -> كانَتِ الكُتُبُ جَديدَةً. - A plural of non-human things takes feminine singular agreement (lesson 11), and كانَ does not suspend that rule.
  • كانَ عِنْدي كِتابًا. -> كانَ عِنْدي كِتابٌ. - Here عِنْدي is the predicate and كِتابٌ is the delayed اسْمُ كانَ, so it stays مَرْفوع. A شِبْه جُمْلَة predicate has no ending to give.
  • كانَ الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةً. -> كانَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مَريضَةً. - كانَ is a normal verb and must match the gender of the noun after it, with the linking kasra before الـ.
  • كانوا الطُّلّابُ مُتْعَبينَ. -> كانَ الطُّلّابُ مُتْعَبينَ. - A verb placed before its noun subject stays singular (lesson 19). كانوا is for when no subject noun follows.
  • كُنْتُ مُدَرِّسٌ في مَدْرَسَةٍ صَغيرَةٍ. -> كُنْتُ مُدَرِّسًا في مَدْرَسَةٍ صَغيرَةٍ. - The subject is inside كُنْتُ, so the noun after it can only be the خَبَر, and it is مَنْصوب.
  • كُنْتُ دَرَسْتُ العَرَبِيَّةَ كُلَّ مَساءٍ. -> كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ كُلَّ مَساءٍ. - “Used to” is كانَ plus the present. كانَ plus a past verb is a different tense and waits for lesson 45.
  • كانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةَ. -> كانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ. - After a preposition the noun is مَجْرور, whatever else is happening in the sentence.

Tips

  • Ask one question before you convert anything: is the predicate one word, or a phrase with a preposition? One word takes the accusative; a شِبْه جُمْلَة takes nothing at all.
  • The shortcut for the ear: a nominal sentence in the present ends ḍamma-ḍamma, in the past ḍamma-fatḥa. البَيْتُ كَبيرٌ -> البَيْتُ كَبيرًا. Two ḍammas is your alarm that كانَ was ignored.
  • Chant كانَ with its predicate attached, never bare: كُنْتُ مُتْعَبًا، كُنْتَ مُتْعَبًا، كُنْتِ مُتْعَبَةً، كانَ مُتْعَبًا، كانَتْ مُتْعَبَةً… The ـًا then travels with the form and never gets dropped.
  • Sort the paradigm by the first letter of the ending rather than memorising ten items: vowel keeps كان, consonant gives كُنْ. That is two facts instead of ten.
  • Go back to the sentences you wrote for lessons 2, 12 and 21 and put every one of them into the past. Converting your own material is worth more than any new example set.
  • Say the accusative out loud. It is one of the few endings that survives a pause, so it is the cheapest way to make your Arabic sound cased rather than merely written that way.
  • Park the relatives for now: أَصْبَحَ and ما زالَ (lesson 43), لَمْ يَكُنْ (lesson 35) and كانَ قَدْ فَعَلَ (lesson 45). One verb, one case rule, is a complete and useful skill on its own.

A2 33 / 70

The subjunctive of the imperfect

المُضارِعُ المَنْصوب

In short

The imperfect you learned in lesson 14 is not one form but three. The version printed there - أَدْرُسُ، تَدْرُسينَ، يَدْرُسونَ, with a ḍamma or a ن on the end - is only its default dress, المُضارِعُ المَرْفوعُ. Put one of a short list of particles in front of it and the end of the verb changes: أَدْرُسُ becomes لَنْ أَدْرُسَ “I will not study”, يَدْرُسونَ becomes أُريدُ أَنْ يَدْرُسوا “I want them to study”. That second dress is المُضارِعُ المَنْصوبُ, the subjunctive.

There are exactly two changes to learn and one exemption. The ḍamma of the five endingless cells turns into a fatḥa. The five cells that end in a ن - الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ - drop that ن. And يَدْرُسْنَ / تَدْرُسْنَ, the two feminine plurals, are مَبْنِيٌّ: they are frozen and never move in any mood. That is the whole of the machinery. This lesson builds the form and lists the particles that trigger it; what you actually say with أَنْ - want, must, can - is lesson 34.

The rule

1. Mood is not tense. المَنْصوب does not mean past, future or anything temporal. It is a grammatical mood, a shape the verb takes because of the word standing in front of it, exactly as a noun after مِنْ takes a kasra because of مِنْ. Only the imperfect has moods: three of them, and you now have two - المَرْفوع (lesson 14) and المَنْصوب (here). The third, المَجْزوم, is lesson 35. The past tense has no moods at all; ماضٍ is مَبْنِيٌّ and never changes its ending for a particle.

2. Change one: ـُ becomes ـَ. In the five cells that carry no suffix, the final ḍamma is simply replaced by a fatḥa. أَدْرُسُ → أَدْرُسَ، تَدْرُسُ → تَدْرُسَ، يَدْرُسُ → يَدْرُسَ، نَدْرُسُ → نَدْرُسَ. Nothing else about the word moves - the prefix is untouched, the stem keeps its vowel, the sukūn on the first radical stays. One dot of a vowel at the very back, and that is the entire visible difference.

3. Change two: الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ lose their nūn. Five cells of the imperfect end in a ن: تَدْرُسينَ (أَنْتِ), تَدْرُسانِ (أَنْتُما and هُما feminine), يَدْرُسانِ (هُما masculine), تَدْرُسونَ (أَنْتُمْ), يَدْرُسونَ (هُمْ). Arabic grammar gives these five a name of their own, الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ, “the five verbs”, precisely because they behave as a block. In المَنْصوب the ن falls off and the long vowel that was in front of it is all that is left: تَدْرُسي، تَدْرُسا، يَدْرُسا، تَدْرُسوا، يَدْرُسوا. That ن was never part of the pronoun; it was نونُ الرَّفْعِ, a mood marker, and removing it is the same operation as swapping the ḍamma for a fatḥa - just visible from across the room.

4. The silent alif after ـوا. When the ن of ـونَ goes, the word ends in a long ū, and Arabic spelling insists on an otiose alif behind it: يَدْرُسوا، تَدْرُسوا. It is written and never pronounced - the form is said exactly as if the alif were not there. Its job is purely visual, to keep a verb ending ـوا apart from a noun ending in و (compare the plural noun مُدَرِّسو المَدْرَسَةِ, with no alif). Grammarians call it الأَلِفُ الفارِقَةُ, “the distinguishing alif”. Write it every time; a bare يَدْرُسو is a spelling error, not a variant.

5. يَدْرُسْنَ and تَدْرُسْنَ never change. The ـنَ of the feminine plural is not a mood marker at all: it is the subject pronoun, welded to the verb. So these two cells are مَبْنِيَّتانِ - built in place - and they are identical in the indicative, the subjunctive and the jussive. لَنْ يَدْرُسْنَ، أُريدُ أَنْ تَدْرُسْنَ: the form you already know, unchanged. Do not try to make them look “more subjunctive”; there is nothing to do to them.

6. The particles that put the verb into المَنْصوب. They are few, and apart from them - and the jussive particles of lesson 35 - the imperfect stays مَرْفوع. Each one stands immediately before its verb: only the negative لا may come between the two (أَلّا، حَتّى لا - point 8 below), and the subject, if there is one, comes after the verb.

  • أَنْ - “to / that”, the workhorse. It links a first verb to a second: أُريدُ أَنْ أَدْرُسَ “I want to study”, يَجِبُ أَنْ تَنامَ “you must sleep”. Note that English uses an infinitive here and Arabic uses a full verb carrying its own person.
  • لَنْ - “will not”. It negates the future and nothing else: لَنْ أَذْهَبَ “I will not go”. It replaces سَـ / سَوْفَ rather than joining them.
  • كَيْ / لِكَيْ - “in order that, so as to”: نَخْرُجُ مُبَكِّرًا كَيْ نَصِلَ فِي الوَقْتِ. لِكَيْ is simply لِـ + كَيْ; both are current in modern prose and interchangeable here.
  • لِـ التَّعْليل - a single prefixed لام meaning “in order to”, the lightest way to say purpose: ذَهَبْتُ لِأَشْتَرِيَ الخُبْزَ “I went to buy the bread”. It is a prefix, written joined to the verb with no space. Traditional analysis says the verb here is منصوب by an أَنْ that is understood but not written; you can simply learn لِـ as a subjunctive trigger.
  • حَتّى - “until / so that”, when what follows is still ahead at the point the first verb reaches: دَرَسْتُ حَتّى أَنْجَحَ “I studied so that I would pass”. When حَتّى reports a fact that actually did take place it behaves differently; that split is lesson 38.
  • إِذَنْ - “then, in that case”, answering what someone has just said: «سَأَزورُكَ غَدًا.» - «إِذَنْ أَنْتَظِرَكَ فِي البَيْتِ.» It only takes the subjunctive when it opens the reply, refers to future time, and touches its verb directly. It is also spelled إِذًا.

7. Only the second verb changes. In a two-verb sentence the first verb keeps whatever shape it would have on its own - مُضارِع مَرْفوع or ماضٍ - and carries the tense; the particle sits between them and bends only what comes after it. أُريدُ (مرفوع) أَنْ أَدْرُسَ (منصوب). دَرَسْتُ (ماضٍ) حَتّى أَنْجَحَ (منصوب). Learners who put the whole sentence into the subjunctive, or who reach back and change the first verb, are hearing an English “sequence of tenses” that Arabic does not have.

8. أَنْ + لا is written أَلّا. The negative of an أَنْ-clause fuses in writing: أُريدُ أَلّا تَذْهَبَ “I want you not to go”, not أَنْ لا تَذْهَبَ. The verb after it is still منصوب. Keep this as a spelling fact for now; the uses of أَنْ-clauses are lesson 34.

9. Weak-final verbs: sometimes visible, sometimes not. Verbs whose last root letter is و or ي (الفِعْلُ النّاقِصُ) already end in a long vowel in the indicative, where the ḍamma is only theoretical - يَمْشي، يَدْعو، يَنْسى are all pronounced with no audible ending. In المَنْصوب two of the three types wake up: يَمْشي → يَمْشِيَ and يَدْعو → يَدْعُوَ put a real, pronounced fatḥa on the final letter. The third does not: a verb ending in ألف مقصورة, like يَنْسى, has no room for a vowel on that ا, so يَنْسى stays يَنْسى - the mood is genuinely there and genuinely invisible. Their plurals behave like everyone else’s and drop the ن: يَمْشُونَ → يَمْشُوا، يَدْعُونَ → يَدْعُوا، يَنْسَوْنَ → يَنْسَوْا. The full story of these verbs is lesson 51.

10. In الوَقْف the mood disappears. A speaker who stops at the end of a phrase drops the final short vowel, as the pausal form requires, so يَدْرُسُ and يَدْرُسَ are pronounced identically - both come out as يَدْرُسْ. The fatḥa of the subjunctive is therefore audible only in careful reading, in recitation, in a newsreader’s delivery, and whenever the verb is not the last word of the phrase. What is always audible, in every register of الفُصْحى including the most relaxed, is the missing ن: تَدْرُسوا and تَدْرُسونَ can never be confused. This is why الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ are the part of the lesson that pays for itself immediately, and why المَنْصوب is a live rule and not a decoration for textbooks.

11. What is deliberately not here. What أَنْ-clauses are for - want, must, can, and the frames built on them - is lesson 34. Choosing between لَنْ، ما and لَمْ is lesson 37. Full time-and-reason clauses with حَتّى، قَبْلَ أَنْ، بَعْدَ أَنْ are lesson 38. The lookalike particle أَنَّ, which takes a noun in the accusative and is a different word entirely, is lesson 44. And the fact that أَنْ + verb can be swapped for a verbal noun - أُريدُ الذَّهابَ for أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - is lesson 54.

Forms & patterns

The two moods side by side, all thirteen cells, on the sound Form I verb دَرَسَ - يَدْرُسُ. Read down the middle and right columns together: the only changes are ـُ → ـَ and the loss of ن.

الضَّميرالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوعالمُضارِعُ المَنْصوب
أَناأَدْرُسُأَدْرُسَ
أَنْتَتَدْرُسُتَدْرُسَ
أَنْتِتَدْرُسينَتَدْرُسي
هُوَيَدْرُسُيَدْرُسَ
هِيَتَدْرُسُتَدْرُسَ
نَحْنُنَدْرُسُنَدْرُسَ
أَنْتُماتَدْرُسانِتَدْرُسا
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَدْرُسانِيَدْرُسا
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَدْرُسانِتَدْرُسا
أَنْتُمْتَدْرُسونَتَدْرُسوا
أَنْتُنَّتَدْرُسْنَتَدْرُسْنَ
هُمْيَدْرُسونَيَدْرُسوا
هُنَّيَدْرُسْنَيَدْرُسْنَ

الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ on their own, because they are the half of the lesson you can actually hear:

الضَّميرالمَرْفوعالمَنْصوب
أَنْتِتَدْرُسينَتَدْرُسي
أَنْتُما / هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَدْرُسانِتَدْرُسا
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَدْرُسانِيَدْرُسا
أَنْتُمْتَدْرُسونَتَدْرُسوا
هُمْيَدْرُسونَيَدْرُسوا

The particles, one example each. The bold word is the verb they have bent.

الأَداةمِثالEnglish
أَنْأُريدُ أَنْ أَدْرُسَI want to study
لَنْلَنْ أَذْهَبَI will not go
كَيْخَرَجْنا مُبَكِّرًا كَيْ نَصِلَwe went out early in order to arrive
لِكَيْأَقْرَأُ لِكَيْ أَفْهَمَI read in order to understand
لِـ (التَّعْليل)ذَهَبْتُ لِأَشْتَرِيَ الخُبْزَI went to buy the bread
حَتّىدَرَسْتُ حَتّى أَنْجَحَI studied so that I would pass
إِذَنْإِذَنْ أَنْتَظِرَكَthen I will wait for you

Weak-final verbs. Two of the three types show the fatḥa; the third has nowhere to put it.

الفِعْلالمَرْفوع (هُوَ)المَنْصوب (هُوَ)What happens
مَشى - يَمْشييَمْشييَمْشِيَthe final ي takes a real, pronounced fatḥa
دَعا - يَدْعويَدْعويَدْعُوَthe final و takes a real, pronounced fatḥa
نَسِيَ - يَنْسىيَنْسىيَنْسىends in ألف مقصورة: no change, the mood is invisible

The same three across the cells you will meet most. The duals are left out; they follow the masculine plural in dropping the ن: يَمْشِيَا، يَدْعُوَا، يَنْسَيَا. Note that the dual يَدْعُوَا and the plural يَدْعُوا come out with the same letters - only the fatḥa on the و tells them apart, and in the dual that alif is a real long vowel, not the silent one.

الضَّميرمَشىدَعانَسِيَ
أَناأَمْشِيَأَدْعُوَأَنْسى
أَنْتَتَمْشِيَتَدْعُوَتَنْسى
أَنْتِتَمْشيتَدْعيتَنْسَيْ
هُوَيَمْشِيَيَدْعُوَيَنْسى
نَحْنُنَمْشِيَنَدْعُوَنَنْسى
هُمْيَمْشُوايَدْعُوايَنْسَوْا
هُنَّيَمْشينَيَدْعونَيَنْسَيْنَ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
لَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى المَكْتَبَةِ اليَوْمَ.I will not go to the library today.
أُريدُ أَنْ أَدْرُسَ الطِّبَّ فِي القاهِرَةِ.I want to study medicine in Cairo.
ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى السّوقِ لِأَشْتَرِيَ الخُبْزَ.I went to the market to buy bread.
دَرَسْتُ كَثيرًا حَتّى أَنْجَحَ فِي الامْتِحانِ.I studied a lot so that I would pass the exam.
الطُّلّابُ لَنْ يَكْتُبوا الواجِبَ اللَّيْلَةَ.The students will not write the homework tonight.
هَلْ تُريدينَ أَنْ تَجْلِسي بِجانِبِ النّافِذَةِ؟Do you want to sit by the window?
نَخْرُجُ مُبَكِّرًا كَيْ نَصِلَ فِي الوَقْتِ.We leave early in order to arrive on time.
لَنْ تَنْسى أُمّي هٰذا اليَوْمَ.My mother will not forget this day.
يَجِبُ أَنْ يَمْشِيَ المَريضُ كُلَّ صَباحٍ.The patient must walk every morning.
البِنْتانِ تُريدانِ أَنْ تَشْرَبا الشّايَ.The two girls want to drink tea.
الطّالِباتُ لَنْ يَذْهَبْنَ إِلَى الرِّحْلَةِ.The (female) students will not go on the trip.
سافَرَ أَخي لِيَدْرُسَ الهَنْدَسَةَ فِي أَلْمانِيا.My brother travelled in order to study engineering in Germany.
لَنْ يَدْعُوَ المُديرُ أَحَدًا إِلَى الاجْتِماعِ.The director will not invite anyone to the meeting.
«سَأَزورُكَ غَدًا.» - «إِذَنْ أَنْتَظِرَكَ فِي البَيْتِ.»”I will visit you tomorrow.” - “Then I will wait for you at home.”

Common mistakes

  • لَنْ أَذْهَبُ -> لَنْ أَذْهَبَ - لَنْ is a subjunctive particle, so the ḍamma must become a fatḥa. Leaving the indicative ending is the single commonest slip in this lesson.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - the same fault after أَنْ. The first verb keeps its ḍamma; only the verb behind the particle changes.
  • لَنْ يَذْهَبونَ -> لَنْ يَذْهَبوا - one of the five verbs, so the ن of الرَّفْع goes, and the silent alif is written in its place.
  • لَنْ ذَهَبَ -> لَنْ يَذْهَبَ - لَنْ can only stand in front of an imperfect. To negate a past verb you need ما or لَمْ, which is lesson 37.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ تَدْرُسينَ -> أُريدُ أَنْ تَدْرُسي - the feminine singular loses its ن exactly as the plurals do. The remaining ي is enough to mark the person.
  • يَدْرُسو -> يَدْرُسوا - the أَلِف فارِقَة is compulsory in spelling even though it is never pronounced. There is no such thing as a verb ending in a bare و here.
  • لَنْ يَمْشي -> لَنْ يَمْشِيَ - a verb in ـي does show the fatḥa, and it is genuinely pronounced. Only the ـى type (يَنْسى) stays unchanged.
  • لَنْ يَنْسَ -> لَنْ يَنْسى - do not amputate the ألف مقصورة after لَنْ. Shortening the end of the verb is the jussive’s business (lesson 35), not the subjunctive’s.
  • لِ أَشْتَرِيَ -> لِأَشْتَرِيَ - the لام of purpose is a prefix and is written joined, with no space, like the بِـ of bi- and the سَـ of the future.
  • لَنْ الطُّلّابُ يَدْرُسوا -> لَنْ يَدْرُسَ الطُّلّابُ - nothing may come between the particle and its verb; a noun subject follows the verb.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ لا تَذْهَبَ -> أُريدُ أَلّا تَذْهَبَ - أَنْ and لا fuse into one written word.
  • الطّالِباتُ لَنْ يَدْرُسوا -> الطّالِباتُ لَنْ يَدْرُسْنَ - a group of women keeps ـْنَ in every mood, because that ن is the pronoun and not a mood marker.

Tips

  • Learn the change as one sentence you can say to yourself: “fatḥa for the five bare cells, no ن for the five verbs, nothing at all for the two ـْنَ.” Thirteen cells, three instructions.
  • Drill by pairs, out loud, indicative straight into subjunctive: يَدْرُسُ - يَدْرُسَ، تَدْرُسينَ - تَدْرُسي، يَدْرُسونَ - يَدْرُسوا. The pairing is what fixes it, not the list.
  • Memorize the particles as a short chant - أَنْ، لَنْ، كَيْ، لِـ، حَتّى، إِذَنْ - and treat every one of them as a red flag telling your hand what to write on the end of the next verb.
  • لَنْ is worth over-practising on its own. It is the highest-frequency member of the list, and it is the one place where an A2 learner is most likely to be heard making the mistake.
  • When you write ـوا, say “wāw plus a silent alif” in your head. The alif is spelling, not sound, and treating it as a two-part unit stops you from dropping it.
  • Watch out for the accidental lookalikes: تَمْشي is “she walks” in the indicative but “(that) you, one woman, walk” in the subjunctive, and يَدْعُوا (they) differs from يَدْعُوَ (he) by nothing but that silent alif. The sentence, not the shape, resolves them.
  • Do not go hunting for the mood in an unvocalized newspaper. In ordinary Arabic writing the fatḥa is not printed at all, so what you look for is the particle in front and the missing ن behind.
  • Ignore, for now, the question of when to prefer حَتّى over كَيْ, or أَنْ over a verbal noun. Get the ending right first; the choices arrive in lessons 38 and 59.

A2 34 / 70

Clauses with an: want, must, can

«أَنْ» والمُضارِعُ المَنْصوب

In short

English says “I want to go”, “I have to go”, “I can go” - one verb, then a bare infinitive. Arabic has no infinitive. Every Arabic verb is conjugated for a person, always, with no neutral dictionary form to drop into a sentence. So where English hangs an infinitive off the first verb, Arabic hangs a small clause: the particle أَنْ plus a fully conjugated verb in the subjunctive. أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ is literally “I want that I go”.

Lesson 33 built the subjunctive forms; this lesson is about the words that trigger them. There are two groups. Personal verbs - أَرادَ، اِسْتَطاعَ، أَحَبَّ، قَرَّرَ، حاوَلَ، نَسِيَ - conjugate normally and take أَنْ after them. Impersonal modals - يَجِبُ، يُمْكِنُ، عَلَيْهِ، لا بُدَّ - do not conjugate at all: they sit frozen in the 3rd person masculine singular, and the person you are talking about shows up on the second verb. Get that split straight and this whole area, which covers most of what you say every day, becomes mechanical.

The rule

1. The frame: verb + أَنْ + المُضارِعُ المَنْصوب. أَنْ never changes shape and never takes a person. The verb after it carries everything: the person, the number, and the fatḥa (or the dropped ن) that marks the subjunctive.

  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَسْأَلَ سُؤالًا. - I want to ask a question.
  • تُريدُ أَنْ تَسْأَلَ سُؤالًا. - She wants to ask a question.
  • يُريدونَ أَنْ يَسْأَلوا سُؤالًا. - They want to ask a question.

Three things move together and none of them is optional: the first verb agrees with the speaker, أَنْ is present, and the second verb is منصوب. Learners drop the middle one (*أُريدُ أَذْهَبَ) or forget the ending (*أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ). Both are ungrammatical.

2. Same subject or different subject - أَنْ handles both. English has to switch construction (“I want to travel” vs “I want you to travel”). Arabic does not. The second verb simply conjugates for whoever is doing it:

  • أُريدُ أَنْ أُسافِرَ. - I want to travel.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ تُسافِرَ مَعي. - I want you to travel with me.
  • طَلَبَ المُديرُ أَنْ نَحْضُرَ مُبَكِّرينَ. - The manager asked that we come early.

3. The personal governing verbs. These are the ones you will use hourly. Each is a normal verb - learn its root and its measure, because several of them are irregular in a way that has nothing to do with أَنْ.

  • أَرادَ / يُريدُ (ر و د, Form IV, hollow) - to want. أُريدُ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.
  • اِسْتَطاعَ / يَسْتَطيعُ (ط و ع, Form X, hollow) - to be able to. أَسْتَطيعُ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.
  • أَحَبَّ / يُحِبُّ (ح ب ب, Form IV, doubled) - to like to. أُحِبُّ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.
  • قَرَّرَ / يُقَرِّرُ (ق ر ر, Form II) - to decide to. قَرَّرْتُ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.
  • حاوَلَ / يُحاوِلُ (ح و ل, Form III) - to try to. أُحاوِلُ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.
  • نَسِيَ / يَنْسى (ن س ي, Form I, weak-final) - to forget to. نَسيتُ أَنْ أَعْمَلَ.

The same frame works with a long tail of others once you meet them: رَفَضَ أَنْ (refused to), قَبِلَ أَنْ (agreed to), تَعَلَّمَ أَنْ (learned to), خافَ أَنْ (was afraid to), تَمَنّى أَنْ (wished to).

4. The impersonal modals stay in the 3rd person masculine singular - always. This is the single most important point in the lesson. يَجِبُ and يُمْكِنُ are not conjugated for the person who must or can do something. They never become *أَجِبُ or *نُمْكِنُ. Their subject is the whole أَنْ clause that follows, and that clause is grammatically an “it”.

  • يَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. - I have to go. (literally: “that I go” is obligatory)
  • يَجِبُ أَنْ تَذْهَبي. - You (f.) have to go.
  • يَجِبُ أَنْ يَذْهَبوا. - They have to go.
  • يُمْكِنُ أَنْ نَبْدَأَ. - We can start.

Note the root of يَجِبُ: و ج ب, Form I, a مِثال واوِيّ (a verb whose first radical is و). The past is وَجَبَ, with the و in plain sight, but the و drops out of the present: وَجَبَ → يَجِبُ, not *يَوْجِبُ. The same drop happens in وَصَلَ → يَصِلُ and وَقَفَ → يَقِفُ; lesson 49 is where the class is treated properly. يُمْكِنُ is Form IV of م ك ن (أَمْكَنَ / يُمْكِنُ).

5. Naming the person with يَجِبُ and يُمْكِنُ. If the second verb alone is not enough - typically when you want to make the obligation explicit or polite - attach the person to a preposition or a pronoun, and still leave يَجِبُ / يُمْكِنُ untouched.

  • يَجِبُ عَلَيْكِ أَنْ تَدْرُسي. - You (f.) have to study.
  • يَجِبُ عَلى الطُّلّابِ أَنْ يَحْضُروا. - The students have to attend.
  • يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أُساعِدَكَ. - I can help you.
  • هَلْ يُمْكِنُكَ أَنْ تَنْتَظِرَ قَليلًا؟ - Can you wait a little?

يُمْكِنُ takes a direct object pronoun (يُمْكِنُني، يُمْكِنُكَ، يُمْكِنُهُ); يَجِبُ takes عَلى (يَجِبُ عَلَيَّ، يَجِبُ عَلَيْكَ). Do not swap them.

6. عَلَيْهِ أَنْ - obligation with no verb at all. عَلى plus a pronoun, on its own, already means “has to”. It is shorter than يَجِبُ عَلَيْهِ and extremely common in writing:

  • عَلَيَّ أَنْ أَتَّصِلَ بِالشَّرِكَةِ. - I have to call the company.
  • عَلَيْنا أَنْ نَحْجِزَ الغُرْفَةَ اليَوْمَ. - We have to book the room today.

Here the person is visible - it is the attached pronoun on عَلى - and the second verb agrees with it.

7. لا بُدَّ أَنْ / لا بُدَّ مِنْ أَنْ - “there is no way around it”. بُدٌّ is a noun meaning “escape”, negated absolutely by لا. The phrase is fixed and both variants are correct:

  • لا بُدَّ أَنْ تَعْرِفَ الحَقيقَةَ. - You must know the truth.
  • لا بُدَّ مِنْ أَنْ نُغَيِّرَ الخُطَّةَ. - We really have to change the plan.

8. Putting the modals in the past: كانَ + يَجِبُ. The everyday past of يَجِبُ is not its own ماضٍ وَجَبَ - which does exist, but stays in formal and legal prose - but كانَ in front of it, which carries the tense. The result translates as “had to” or “should have”.

  • كانَ يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنْتَظِرَ. - We should have waited. / We had to wait.
  • كانَ يُمْكِنُكَ أَنْ تَسْأَلَني. - You could have asked me.

كانَ stays 3ms too, for the same reason يَجِبُ does. (كانَ and its behaviour: lessons 32 and 48.)

9. Negating: أَنْ + لا = أَلّا. When the second verb is the negated one, أَنْ and لا fuse into one written word, أَلّا, and the verb after it stays منصوب:

  • يَجِبُ أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ. - You must not be late.
  • قَرَّرْتُ أَلّا أَقولَ شَيْئًا. - I decided not to say anything.
  • عَلَيْنا أَلّا نَنْسى المَوْعِدَ. - We must not forget the appointment.

Negating the first verb is a different meaning and needs no fusion: لا أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ (“I don’t want to go”), لا يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أَحْضُرَ (“I can’t come”). And notice the pair يَجِبُ أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ (“you must not be late” - the prohibition is real) versus لا يَجِبُ أَنْ تَتَأَخَّرَ (“it isn’t required that you be late” - much weaker). For a genuine “don’t”, prefer أَلّا.

10. The مصدر: the one place Arabic has something infinitive-shaped. Almost every Arabic verb has a verbal noun, a مَصْدَر, and after verbs like أَرادَ you may use it instead of the whole أَنْ clause. It is a noun, so it takes a case - accusative here, as the direct object:

  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلى السّوقِ. = أُريدُ الذَّهابَ إِلى السّوقِ.
  • قَرَّرَ أَنْ يُسافِرَ. = قَرَّرَ السَّفَرَ.

The two come to the same thing here; the أَنْ version is the lighter one and, crucially, marks the new subject on the verb itself (أُريدُ أَنْ تَذْهَبَ - with the مصدر you would have to hang the person off it, أُريدُ ذَهابَكَ). Because أَنْ + verb does the job of a noun, grammarians call it المَصْدَرُ المُؤَوَّل, “the interpreted مصدر”. Build the مصدر properly in lesson 54; for now just recognise the swap.

11. What does not take أَنْ. A small set of very common verbs is followed by the bare مضارع, still مرفوع, with no particle in between. The verbs of beginning are the ones you will trip over first:

  • بَدَأَ يَكْتُبُ رِسالَةً. - He began to write a letter. (not *بَدَأَ أَنْ يَكْتُبَ)
  • أَخَذَ يَضْحَكُ. - He started laughing.
  • ما زالَ يَعْمَلُ هُنا. - He still works here.

كادَ (“almost”) usually behaves the same way, though كادَ أَنْ يَفْعَلَ is current too, and لا يَزالُ / ما زالَ belong to كانَ وأَخَواتُها. These are lessons 43 and 64. For now: memorise بَدَأَ as the exception that proves the rule.

12. Three particles that look alike - keep them apart. أَنْ takes a verb in the subjunctive (أُريدُ أَنْ تَذْهَبَ). أَنَّ takes a noun or pronoun in the accusative and means “that” after verbs of knowing and reporting (أَعْرِفُ أَنَّكَ مَشْغولٌ) - lesson 44. إِنَّ opens a sentence for emphasis, and it is also what قالَ takes: “he said that …” is قالَ إِنَّ, not قالَ أَنَّ - lesson 44 as well. And قَبْلَ أَنْ / بَعْدَ أَنْ (“before/after”) use the same أَنْ - قَبْلَ أَنْ always with the subjunctive, بَعْدَ أَنْ with a subjunctive or a ماضٍ - but they are time conjunctions: lesson 38.

Forms & patterns

أَنْ + المُضارِعُ المَنْصوب - كَتَبَ / يَكْتُبُ

الضَّميرالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوعأَنْ + المَنْصوب
أَناأَكْتُبُأَنْ أَكْتُبَ
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُأَنْ تَكْتُبَ
أَنْتِتَكْتُبينَأَنْ تَكْتُبي
هُوَيَكْتُبُأَنْ يَكْتُبَ
هِيَتَكْتُبُأَنْ تَكْتُبَ
نَحْنُنَكْتُبُأَنْ نَكْتُبَ
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبونَأَنْ تَكْتُبوا
هُمْيَكْتُبونَأَنْ يَكْتُبوا
أَنْتُنَّ / هُنَّتَكْتُبْنَ / يَكْتُبْنَأَنْ تَكْتُبْنَ / يَكْتُبْنَ

The two feminine plurals are the only cells that do not change at all. The duals (أَنْ تَكْتُبا، أَنْ يَكْتُبا) drop their ن exactly like the plurals and are left out here.

The personal governing verbs

الفِعْلالجَذْرالوَزْنالمُضارِع (أَنا)الماضي (أَنا)English
أَرادَ أَنْر و دIV, أَجْوَفأُريدُأَرَدْتُto want to
اِسْتَطاعَ أَنْط و عX, أَجْوَفأَسْتَطيعُاِسْتَطَعْتُto be able to
أَحَبَّ أَنْح ب بIV, مُضَعَّفأُحِبُّأَحْبَبْتُto like to
قَرَّرَ أَنْق ر رIIأُقَرِّرُقَرَّرْتُto decide to
حاوَلَ أَنْح و لIIIأُحاوِلُحاوَلْتُto try to
نَسِيَ أَنْن س يI, ناقِصأَنْسىنَسيتُto forget to

Watch the two hollow verbs: their long vowel is there in the present (أُريدُ، أَسْتَطيعُ) and gone in the past with a personal ending (أَرَدْتُ، اِسْتَطَعْتُ). Likewise أَحَبَّ, whose shadda unpacks into two letters in أَحْبَبْتُ. Lessons 49 and 55 explain why.

The impersonal modals - frozen in the 3rd person masculine singular

التَّعْبيرSourceEnglishPerson marked by
يَجِبُ أَنْو ج ب, I, مِثال واوِيّ (و drops)must, have tothe second verb
يَجِبُ عَلى … أَنْ+ عَلىsomebody has toعَلى + pronoun/noun
يُمْكِنُ أَنْم ك ن, IV (أَمْكَنَ)can, may, it is possiblethe second verb
يُمْكِنُ + ـني/ـكَ أَنْ+ object pronounI/you canthe attached pronoun
عَلَيْهِ أَنْعَلى + pronounhe has tothe attached pronoun
لا بُدَّ أَنْ / مِنْ أَنْلا + بُدٌّthere is no avoiding itthe second verb
كانَ يَجِبُ أَنْكانَ + يَجِبُhad to, should havethe second verb

عَلَيْـ + أَنْ across the persons

الضَّميرالعِبارَةEnglish
أَناعَلَيَّ أَنْ أَذْهَبَI have to go
أَنْتَعَلَيْكَ أَنْ تَذْهَبَyou (m.) have to go
أَنْتِعَلَيْكِ أَنْ تَذْهَبيyou (f.) have to go
هُوَعَلَيْهِ أَنْ يَذْهَبَhe has to go
هِيَعَلَيْها أَنْ تَذْهَبَshe has to go
نَحْنُعَلَيْنا أَنْ نَذْهَبَwe have to go
أَنْتُمْعَلَيْكُمْ أَنْ تَذْهَبواyou (pl.) have to go
هُمْعَلَيْهِمْ أَنْ يَذْهَبواthey have to go

Irregular stems after أَنْ - where the fatḥa shows and where it hides

النَّوْعالمَرْفوعأَنْ + المَنْصوبNote
أَجْوَفيَزورُأَنْ يَزورَordinary fatḥa
أَجْوَفيَنامُأَنْ يَنامَordinary fatḥa
مُضَعَّفيُحِبُّأَنْ يُحِبَّfatḥa on the shadda’d letter
ناقِص في ـييَشْتَريأَنْ يَشْتَرِيَthe hidden ي reappears with a fatḥa
ناقِص في ـويَدْعوأَنْ يَدْعُوَthe hidden و reappears with a fatḥa
ناقِص في ـىيَنْسىأَنْ يَنْسىno visible change at all
مَهْموزُ اللّاميَقْرَأُأَنْ يَقْرَأَthe hamza keeps its seat

Examples

العربيةEnglish
أُريدُ أَنْ أَتَعَلَّمَ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ.I want to learn Arabic.
هَلْ تَسْتَطيعُ أَنْ تُساعِدَني؟Can you help me?
يَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلى الطَّبيبِ اليَوْمَ.I have to go to the doctor today.
يَجِبُ عَلَيْكِ أَنْ تَدْرُسي كُلَّ يَوْمٍ.You have to study every day.
كانَ يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنْتَظِرَ قَليلًا.We should have waited a little.
قَرَّرَتْ أَنْ تَسْكُنَ في مَدينَةٍ أُخْرى.She decided to live in another city.
أُحِبُّ أَنْ أَقْرَأَ قَبْلَ النَّوْمِ.I like to read before going to sleep.
حاوَلْتُ أَنْ أَفْتَحَ النّافِذَةَ.I tried to open the window.
نَسيتُ أَنْ أَشْتَرِيَ الخُبْزَ.I forgot to buy bread.
يُمْكِنُنا أَنْ نَبْدَأَ الآنَ.We can start now.
لا بُدَّ أَنْ تَعْرِفَ الحَقيقَةَ.You have to know the truth.
يَجِبُ أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ عَنِ العَمَلِ.You must not be late for work.
عَلَيْنا أَنْ نَحْجِزَ الغُرْفَةَ اليَوْمَ.We have to book the room today.
أُريدُ الذَّهابَ إِلى السّوقِ.I want to go to the market.

Common mistakes

  • أُريدُ أَذْهَبَ. -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. - Arabic has no infinitive, so two verbs cannot sit side by side here. أَنْ is what glues them, and it is never optional after أَرادَ.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ. -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. - أَنْ makes the verb منصوب: the final ḍamma becomes a fatḥa. This is the single commonest error in the lesson.
  • أَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. -> يَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. - يَجِبُ does not conjugate for the person who must act. It stays 3ms; “I” lives on أَذْهَبَ.
  • يَجِبونَ أَنْ يَدْرُسوا. -> يَجِبُ أَنْ يَدْرُسوا. - the same rule for plurals. يَجِبُ has no plural in this construction, ever.
  • بَدَأَ أَنْ يَكْتُبَ. -> بَدَأَ يَكْتُبُ. - verbs of beginning take the bare مضارع, still مرفوع. No أَنْ, no fatḥa.
  • تَسْتَطيعُ أَنْ تَذْهَبينَ؟ -> هَلْ تَسْتَطيعينَ أَنْ تَذْهَبي؟ - two errors at once: the first verb must agree with أَنْتِ, and the second drops its ن in the subjunctive.
  • يَجِبُ أَنْ لا تَتَأَخَّرُ. -> يَجِبُ أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ. - أَنْ + لا is written as one word, أَلّا, and the verb after it is still منصوب.
  • يُمْكِنُ عَلَيَّ أَنْ أُساعِدَكَ. -> يُمْكِنُني أَنْ أُساعِدَكَ. - يُمْكِنُ takes an attached object pronoun; عَلى belongs to يَجِبُ (يَجِبُ عَلَيَّ).
  • أُريدُ الذَّهابُ إِلى السّوقِ. -> أُريدُ الذَّهابَ إِلى السّوقِ. - the مصدر is a noun in the object slot, so it is accusative.
  • كانَ يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنْتَظِرُ. -> كانَ يَجِبُ أَنْ نَنْتَظِرَ. - putting the modal in the past changes nothing after أَنْ; the second verb stays منصوب.

Tips

  • Learn the frame as one sound-shape, not three rules: أَنْ + أَ/تَ/يَ/نَ + …َ. Say أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ، يَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ، أَسْتَطيعُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ out loud until the final fatḥa is a reflex.
  • Translate يَجِبُ أَنْ to yourself as “it is necessary that …”, not as “must”. The English word “must” invites you to conjugate it; the Arabic phrase does not conjugate.
  • Store the six governing verbs as pairs - أَرادَ / أُريدُ، اِسْتَطاعَ / أَسْتَطيعُ، أَحَبَّ / أُحِبُّ - because their past and present look nothing alike. The أَنْ part is the easy half.
  • One sentence per person is worth a paradigm: يَجِبُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ، يَجِبُ أَنْ تَذْهَبي، يَجِبُ أَنْ نَذْهَبَ. Rehearse the frozen first word deliberately.
  • For polite requests, هَلْ يُمْكِنُني أَنْ …؟ and هَلْ يُمْكِنُكَ أَنْ …؟ will carry you through almost every everyday exchange. Bank those two openings whole.
  • If you cannot recall a مصدر, you never need it: after the governing verbs of this lesson, أَنْ + verb always works. The مصدر is an economy, not an obligation - lesson 54 takes it apart.
  • Ignore for now the difference between أَنْ and أَنَّ. If the next word is a مضارع it is أَنْ, with a fatḥa on the end of that verb; that is all you need until lesson 44.

A2 35 / 70

The jussive of the imperfect

المُضارِعُ المَجْزوم

In short

The imperfect has three moods, and you already own two. The plain مَرْفوع يَدْرُسُ carries a ḍamma; the مَنْصوب يَدْرُسَ carries a fatḥa and appears after أَنْ، لَنْ، لِـ، حَتّى. The third is the مَجْزوم, and its ending is the absence of an ending - a sukūn: يَدْرُسْ. Like the مَنْصوب, it is never your choice. A particle stands in front of the verb and the ending changes; that is the whole mechanism.

The particle to learn today is لَمْ, and it does something that feels upside-down: it puts a present-tense form in front of you and negates the past. لَمْ يَدْرُسْ is “he did not study”, word for word “not-yet he-study”. The same مَجْزوم endings are the machinery behind commands and prohibitions in the next lesson, so the drilling you do here pays for itself twice.

The rule

1. The جَزْم ending: a sukūn where the ḍamma was. Take the five cells of the imperfect that end in a bare consonant - the أَـ، تَـ، يَـ، نَـ forms - and strip the vowel off the last letter:

أَدْرُسُ → أَدْرُسْ، تَدْرُسُ → تَدْرُسْ، يَدْرُسُ → يَدْرُسْ، نَدْرُسُ → نَدْرُسْ.

That is four distinct shapes covering five cells, because تَدْرُسْ serves both أَنْتَ and هِيَ. The sukūn is the mark of the mood, exactly as the fatḥa was the mark of the مَنْصوب.

2. The الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ drop their ن - the same drop you already learnt. The five forms that end in a نون - تَدْرُسينَ، تَدْرُسانِ، يَدْرُسانِ، تَدْرُسونَ، يَدْرُسونَ - lose that نون in the مَجْزوم and end in the long vowel alone: تَدْرُسي، تَدْرُسا، يَدْرُسا، تَدْرُسوا، يَدْرُسوا. This is not a new rule. It is the identical drop you met after أَنْ and لَنْ in lesson 33, and the resulting forms are letter-for-letter the same. The wāw of the plural still gets its silent alif of support: يَدْرُسوا، لَمْ يَذْهَبوا.

3. The two feminine plurals never move. تَدْرُسْنَ and يَدْرُسْنَ are مَبْنِيّ - built, frozen. They are the same in all three moods: تَدْرُسُ / تَدْرُسَ / تَدْرُسْ change, but يَدْرُسْنَ is يَدْرُسْنَ after لَمْ, after أَنْ, and on its own. Two cells of thirteen that you can stop worrying about.

4. Say it once and remember it: مَنْصوب and مَجْزوم differ only in the cells that take no suffix. Put the paradigms side by side and eight of the thirteen cells are identical - the six cells filled by the ن-dropping الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ and the two frozen ones. In a sound verb the entire visible difference between “that he study” and “he did not study” is fatḥa versus sukūn on أَدْرُسَ/أَدْرُسْ، تَدْرُسَ/تَدْرُسْ، يَدْرُسَ/يَدْرُسْ، نَدْرُسَ/نَدْرُسْ - four shapes covering five cells. Learn the جَزْم as “the مَنْصوب with the fatḥa knocked off the four”, and keep in mind that in a weak verb the sukūn does more than that, as point 7 shows.

5. لَمْ negates the past, with an imperfect verb. لَمْ يَدْرُسْ ≈ ما دَرَسَ - the same basic meaning, “he did not study”. Arabic has two ways of saying it and this is the one that dominates modern written and formal-spoken usage: لَمْ plus a مَجْزوم. Two consequences follow immediately. لَمْ can never be followed by a past-tense verb (لَمْ دَرَسَ is not Arabic), and the imperfect after it is not present time at all - the pastness lives in the particle. If you want the past-tense form of the verb, you must switch particles: ما دَرَسَ, which is lesson 37 along with لَنْ.

6. Two more particles that cause جَزْم - named now, drilled later. لا النّاهِيَة, the “don’t” of prohibition: لا تَدْرُسْ “don’t study” (as opposed to لا تَدْرُسُ “you do not study” - the same لا in writing, and only the ending tells you which). And لامُ الأَمْرِ, the lām that orders a third person: لِيَدْرُسْ “let him study”. Both are lesson 36, together with the imperative proper. Register the shape now, so that when you meet لا تَنْسَ you recognise a jussive form rather than an irregular verb. One more, لَمّا “not yet” (لَمّا يَصِلْ “he has not arrived yet”), also takes the جَزْم and waits for lesson 37.

7. Weak verbs: the sukūn cannot land on a long vowel, so the vowel goes instead. This is where the mood becomes loud, and it is the real content of this lesson. A sukūn means “no vowel here”, and a final ي، و، ا is a vowel - the two cannot coexist. So:

  • Final-weak (النّاقِص): the weak letter is deleted and its short vowel is left standing. يَمْشي → لَمْ يَمْشِ; يَدْعو → لَمْ يَدْعُ; يَنْسى → لَمْ يَنْسَ. Nothing was added; a letter was removed. The verb now ends in a bare consonant with a kasra, a ḍamma or a fatḥa on it, which is why these forms look so short and startle beginners.
  • Hollow (الأَجْوَف): the long vowel in the middle shortens, because the final consonant now carries a sukūn and Arabic will not tolerate a long vowel immediately before it. يَقولُ → لَمْ يَقُلْ; يَبيعُ → لَمْ يَبِعْ; يَكونُ → لَمْ يَكُنْ; يَخافُ → لَمْ يَخَفْ. The short vowel that appears is the short version of the long one: و → ḍamma, ي → kasra, ا → fatḥa.
  • Doubled (المُضَعَّف): three forms are all correct. لَمْ يَرُدَّ (fatḥa, the lightest and the most common), لَمْ يَرُدِّ (kasra, by the general rule below), لَمْ يَرْدُدْ (the shadda undone, the doubled letters written out, the sukūn placed as on a sound verb). Use the first; recognise the other two.

8. But only where the ending is a sukūn. The shortening in point 7 is caused by the sukūn, so the five ن-dropping forms - which end in a long vowel, not a sukūn - keep the verb intact: لَمْ يَقولوا “they did not say”, لَمْ تَبيعي “you did not sell”, لَمْ يَمْشوا “they did not walk”. Compare لَمْ يَقُلْ with لَمْ يَقولوا and you can see the two halves of the rule in one pair. Before the نون of the feminine plural the stem is short for the same reason it always is: لَمْ يَقُلْنَ، لَمْ يَرْدُدْنَ.

9. Two sukūns cannot meet: اِلْتِقاءُ السّاكِنَيْنِ. A jussive ending in a sukūn, followed by a word beginning with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ - above all the article الـ - would give you two vowelless consonants in a row. Arabic breaks the collision by putting a kasra on the verb:

لَمْ يَقُلْ + الحَقيقَةَ → لَمْ يَقُلِ الحَقيقَةَ. لَمْ يَكُنْ + الطَّقْسُ → لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّقْسُ. لَمْ يَدْرُسْ + الوَلَدُ → لَمْ يَدْرُسِ الوَلَدُ.

The kasra is a pronunciation repair, not a change of mood: the verb is still مَجْزوم. You have seen the same repair on مِنْ before the article - مِنَ البَيْتِ - which takes a fatḥa instead; that one is a lexical exception you learn as a word, while verbs take the kasra by rule.

10. In unvocalized text and in pause, the sukūn is invisible. Written يقل and يقول are two different skeletons and you can see the difference; written يدرس is مَرْفوع, مَنْصوب and مَجْزوم at once, and only لَمْ in front of it tells you which. In الوَقْف - stopping at the end of a phrase - the final ḍamma is dropped anyway, so مَرْفوع and مَجْزوم sound identical there too. The practical conclusion: the weak verbs and the five ن-dropping forms are where the mood is actually visible, in speech and in print alike. Those are the ones to master. لَمْ يَقُلْ versus لَمْ يَقولوا, لَمْ يَمْشِ versus لَمْ يَمْشوا - a reader hears the mood there and nowhere else.

11. What is deliberately left out. The imperative فِعْلُ الأَمْرِ (اُدْرُسْ), the prohibition لا تَدْرُسْ and the vocative are lesson 36 - they are built on today’s endings, which is exactly why today comes first. ما and لَنْ, and the full comparison of past and future negation, are lesson 37. The conditional particles إِنْ and مَنْ, which put two verbs into the jussive at once, are lesson 56. And the weak verb classes get their own systematic treatment in lessons 50 and 56; the table below is the working subset you need to read a newspaper sentence with لَمْ in it.

Forms & patterns

The three moods of دَرَسَ - يَدْرُسُ, all thirteen cells. Read it across: the mood is only ever visible at the very end of the word.

الضَّميرمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْزوم
أَناأَدْرُسُأَدْرُسَأَدْرُسْ
أَنْتَتَدْرُسُتَدْرُسَتَدْرُسْ
أَنْتِتَدْرُسينَتَدْرُسيتَدْرُسي
أَنْتُماتَدْرُسانِتَدْرُساتَدْرُسا
أَنْتُمْتَدْرُسونَتَدْرُسواتَدْرُسوا
أَنْتُنَّتَدْرُسْنَتَدْرُسْنَتَدْرُسْنَ
هُوَيَدْرُسُيَدْرُسَيَدْرُسْ
هِيَتَدْرُسُتَدْرُسَتَدْرُسْ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَدْرُسانِيَدْرُسايَدْرُسا
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَدْرُسانِتَدْرُساتَدْرُسا
هُمْيَدْرُسونَيَدْرُسوايَدْرُسوا
هُنَّيَدْرُسْنَيَدْرُسْنَيَدْرُسْنَ
نَحْنُنَدْرُسُنَدْرُسَنَدْرُسْ

The last two columns are identical except where the form takes no suffix - the أَـ، تَـ، يَـ، نَـ shapes, four of them filling five cells. Cover the middle column and you have the paradigm of lesson 33 back.

Weak and doubled verbs, third person masculine singular - the forms where the جَزْم is audible:

الفِعْلالنَّوْعالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوعمَعَ لَمْEnglish
مَشىناقِص (م ش ي)يَمْشيلَمْ يَمْشِhe did not walk
نَسِيَناقِص (ن س ي)يَنْسىلَمْ يَنْسَhe did not forget
دَعاناقِص (د ع و)يَدْعولَمْ يَدْعُhe did not invite
قالَأَجْوَف (ق و ل)يَقولُلَمْ يَقُلْhe did not say
باعَأَجْوَف (ب ي ع)يَبيعُلَمْ يَبِعْhe did not sell
كانَأَجْوَف (ك و ن)يَكونُلَمْ يَكُنْhe was not
خافَأَجْوَف (خ و ف)يَخافُلَمْ يَخَفْhe was not afraid
رَدَّمُضَعَّف (ر د د)يَرُدُّلَمْ يَرُدَّ / يَرُدِّ / يَرْدُدْhe did not reply

The same two verbs across the persons, so you can see the shortening switch itself off wherever the word ends in a long vowel rather than a sukūn:

الضَّميرقالَ - يَقولُمَشى - يَمْشي
أَنالَمْ أَقُلْلَمْ أَمْشِ
أَنْتَلَمْ تَقُلْلَمْ تَمْشِ
أَنْتِلَمْ تَقوليلَمْ تَمْشي
هُوَلَمْ يَقُلْلَمْ يَمْشِ
هِيَلَمْ تَقُلْلَمْ تَمْشِ
هُمالَمْ يَقولالَمْ يَمْشِيا
هُمْلَمْ يَقولوالَمْ يَمْشوا
هُنَّلَمْ يَقُلْنَلَمْ يَمْشينَ
نَحْنُلَمْ نَقُلْلَمْ نَمْشِ

The three particles that cause جَزْم on a single verb. Only the first is yours to use today:

الأَداةالوَظيفَةمِثالEnglish
لَمْنَفْيُ الماضِيلَمْ يَدْرُسْhe did not study
لا النّاهِيَةالنَّهْيُلا تَدْرُسْdon’t study
لامُ الأَمْرِالأَمْرُ لِلْغائِبِلِيَدْرُسْlet him study

The bottom two rows are lesson 36 and are here for recognition only; the verb form in them is the same مَجْزوم you have just tabled.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
لَمْ يَدْرُسْ أَخي أَمْسِ.My brother did not study yesterday.
لَمْ نَذْهَبْ إِلَى السّوقِ هٰذا الصَّباحَ.We did not go to the market this morning.
لِماذا لَمْ تَكْتُبي الرِّسالَةَ؟Why did you not write the letter?
الطُّلّابُ لَمْ يَفْهَموا السُّؤالَ.The students did not understand the question.
لَمْ يَقُلِ الوَزيرُ شَيْئًا لِلصُّحُفِيّينَ.The minister did not say anything to the journalists.
لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا أَمْسِ.The weather was not nice yesterday.
لَمْ أَنْسَ رَقْمَ هاتِفِكَ.I have not forgotten your phone number.
التّاجِرُ لَمْ يَبِعْ سَيّارَتَهُ القَديمَةَ.The merchant did not sell his old car.
لَمْ يَمْشِ الوَلَدُ إِلَى المَدْرَسَةِ اليَوْمَ.The boy did not walk to school today.
لَمْ يَرُدَّ صَديقي عَلى رِسالَتي.My friend did not reply to my message.
البَناتُ لَمْ يَدْرُسْنَ فِي المَكْتَبَةِ.The girls did not study in the library.
لَمْ نَدْعُ أَحَدًا إِلَى البَيْتِ.We did not invite anyone to the house.
الطّالِبانِ لَمْ يَكْتُبا الواجِبَ.The two students did not write the homework.
لَمْ يَخَفِ الأَطْفالُ مِنَ الكَلْبِ الكَبيرِ.The children were not afraid of the big dog.

Common mistakes

  • لَمْ يَدْرُسُ -> لَمْ يَدْرُسْ - لَمْ is a jussive particle, so the ḍamma of the indicative cannot survive it. Sukūn, always.
  • لَمْ دَرَسَ -> لَمْ يَدْرُسْ - لَمْ takes an imperfect verb and turns it into a past meaning. It can never sit in front of a past-tense form; if you want دَرَسَ, the negator is ما.
  • لَمْ يَدْرُسَ -> لَمْ يَدْرُسْ - the fatḥa is the مَنْصوب, which belongs to أَنْ، لَنْ، لِـ، حَتّى. Different particle, different ending.
  • لَمْ يَذْهَبونَ -> لَمْ يَذْهَبوا - the الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ drop their ن in the مَجْزوم exactly as they do in the مَنْصوب, and the silent alif is written after the wāw.
  • لَمْ تَدْرُسينَ -> لَمْ تَدْرُسي - the same drop in the feminine singular. What is left is the long ي on its own.
  • لَمْ يَقولْ -> لَمْ يَقُلْ - a sukūn cannot follow a long vowel, so the و of the hollow verb shortens to a ḍamma. The written و disappears with it.
  • لَمْ يَكونْ -> لَمْ يَكُنْ - the same verb type, and one of the most frequent jussives in the language. Learn لَمْ يَكُنْ as a block.
  • لَمْ يَمْشي -> لَمْ يَمْشِ - in a final-weak verb the weak letter is deleted altogether and only its short vowel stays behind. The word really is that short.
  • لَمْ يَنْسى -> لَمْ يَنْسَ - identical rule with a final ى: the alif maqṣūra goes, the fatḥa remains.
  • لَمْ يَقُلْ الحَقيقَةَ -> لَمْ يَقُلِ الحَقيقَةَ - the sukūn of the verb collides with the hamzat waṣl of الـ, and Arabic resolves it with a kasra on the verb. The mood has not changed.

Tips

  • Drill it as a transformation, not as a new paradigm: say the مَنْصوب form, then knock the fatḥa off. أَدْرُسَ → أَدْرُسْ. Eight of the thirteen cells need no transformation at all.
  • Do not waste practice on sound verbs like دَرَسَ and كَتَبَ - in the endingless cells their jussive is invisible in ordinary text. Spend the time on قالَ، كانَ، مَشى، نَسِيَ، رَأى، دَعا, where the form visibly collapses and where a wrong answer is heard immediately.
  • Memory hook for the weak verbs: the jussive is the short form. Whatever the verb has that can be shortened - a final ي/و/ى, a medial long vowel - the jussive takes it away, but only in the cells that end in a sukūn.
  • لَمْ يَكُنْ deserves its own flashcard. It carries “there was no…”, “he/it was not…” and, with a following participle or imperfect, most past negation in the press.
  • When you are unsure of a weak jussive, rephrase with ما plus the past: ما مَشى is a perfectly good sentence and buys you time while لَمْ يَمْشِ settles.
  • Reading aloud, watch for the article after a jussive and slide into the kasra: لَمْ يَقُلِ الحَقيقَةَ, not a hard stop between the two words.
  • With رَدَّ and its fellow doubled verbs, pick لَمْ يَرُدَّ and stay with it. The other two forms are correct but you only need to recognise them.
  • Ignore for now what else the jussive does. In conditional sentences it appears twice in one sentence with no negation anywhere in sight; that is lesson 56, and it will make sense once the endings are automatic.

A2 36 / 70

Commands, prohibitions and calling someone

فِعْلُ الأَمْرِ والنَّهْيِ والنِّداء

In short

Arabic has no separate “command form” to memorize. Everything here is built out of the مَجْزوم you learned in lesson 35. Take the أَنْتَ jussive, knock its prefix off, and you have an order: تَكْتُبْ becomes اُكْتُبْ. Leave the prefix on and put لا in front, and you have a prohibition: لا تَكْتُبْ. Two operations on one form you already own.

The only genuinely new piece of spelling is the little alif that appears at the front of اُكْتُبْ. It is there because Arabic cannot start a word with a vowelless consonant, and it is a هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل - a bare ا, never أ. The lesson ends with the third way of aiming words at a person: يا, the vocative particle. It looks trivial and it hides one real rule, because the name you call takes an ending you will not have seen anywhere else.

The rule

1. The imperative is the jussive minus its prefix. Start from the second person of the مُضارِع مَجْزوم - the very form lesson 35 drilled - and delete the تـ:

تَكْتُبْ -> كْتُبْ / تَجْلِسْ -> جْلِسْ / تُساعِدْ -> ساعِدْ

That is the whole operation. The imperative exists only in the second person, so there are exactly five of them: one for each of أَنْتَ، أَنْتِ، أَنْتُما، أَنْتُمْ، أَنْتُنَّ.

2. If the stem now opens on a sukūn, prop it up with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل. كْتُبْ is unpronounceable: no Arabic word begins with a vowelless consonant. Arabic solves this by writing a helping alif in front, and that alif is vowelled by a simple echo:

  • if the stem vowel of the مُضارِع is a ḍamma, the alif takes a ḍamma: يَكْتُبُ -> اُكْتُبْ، يَدْخُلُ -> اُدْخُلْ، يَنْظُرُ -> اُنْظُرْ
  • otherwise (kasra or fatḥa) the alif takes a kasra: يَجْلِسُ -> اِجْلِسْ، يَفْتَحُ -> اِفْتَحْ، يَذْهَبُ -> اِذْهَبْ

Look at the middle radical of the present tense and copy its vowel, or fall back to kasra. اُكْتُبْ has two ḍammas, اِجْلِسْ two kasras, اِفْتَحْ a kasra then a fatḥa - never a ḍamma alif over a fatḥa stem.

3. It is a bare ا, never a ء. This is the single most common written error in the whole topic. اُكْتُبْ is spelled with a plain alif carrying only its vowel mark. Writing أُكْتُبْ turns it into a هَمْزَةُ القَطْع, a different letter with a different behaviour - see the pronunciation guide’s hamza lesson. You can hear the difference the moment another word comes first, because a هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل is simply not pronounced there:

وَاكْتُبْ رَقْمَكَ. / ثُمَّ اجْلِسْ. / وَانْتَظِرْ قَليلًا.

The alif stays on the page and goes silent in the mouth: wa-ktub, not wa-uktub.

4. Some stems need no alif at all. If deleting the prefix leaves a consonant that already carries a vowel, you are finished - nothing is added. That covers the derived verbs whose مُضارِع has a ḍamma prefix or a doubled/lengthened opening:

تُعَلِّمْ -> عَلِّمْ / تُساعِدْ -> ساعِدْ / تَتَعَلَّمْ -> تَعَلَّمْ / تَتَعاوَنْ -> تَعاوَنْ

5. Form IV keeps its هَمْزَةُ القَطْع. One family is the exception to rule 3. Verbs of the أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ type carry a real hamza as part of the pattern, and it comes back in the imperative with a fatḥa on أ:

يُرْسِلُ -> أَرْسِلْ / يُغْلِقُ -> أَغْلِقْ / يُعْطي -> أَعْطِ

So أَرْسِلْ with أ is right and اُكْتُبْ with ا is right; they are not inconsistent, they are two different hamzas. The longer patterns that open with اِ - اِنْتَظِرْ، اِسْتَمِعْ - work exactly like اُكْتُبْ. The families themselves are lessons 46-53.

6. Five addressees, and the ن that disappears. Because the imperative is the jussive, the endings are the jussive endings: the نونُ الرَّفْعِ of تَكْتُبينَ، تَكْتُبانِ، تَكْتُبونَ is deleted, and the masculine plural ـوا is written with a silent alif after it.

اُكْتُبْ، اُكْتُبي، اُكْتُبا، اُكْتُبوا، اُكْتُبْنَ

The ن in the last one is not the same ن: نونُ النِّسْوَةِ is the subject pronoun “you women” itself, part of the word, and it never drops. That is why اُكْتُبْنَ keeps its ن while اُكْتُبوا loses one.

7. The irregular verbs are shorter, not harder. Whatever the jussive does, the imperative does. Hollow verbs (الأَجْوَف) lose their long vowel: تَقُلْ -> قُلْ، تَكُنْ -> كُنْ، تَبِعْ -> بِعْ، تَنَمْ -> نَمْ. Since the result opens on a vowelled consonant, no alif is added. The long vowel returns as soon as an ending follows: قولي، قولوا، كونوا.

Three very frequent verbs simply drop their initial hamza: أَخَذَ -> خُذْ، أَكَلَ -> كُلْ، أَمَرَ -> مُرْ. Verbs with a weak final radical (النّاقِص) lose it in the jussive and therefore in the imperative: تَمْشِ -> اِمْشِ، تَنْسَ -> اِنْسَ، تَدْعُ -> اُدْعُ. And a doubled verb (المُضَعَّف) keeps its shadda and normally ends on a fatḥa: يَرُدُّ -> رُدَّ، يَعُدُّ -> عُدَّ - رُدِّ and the pulled-apart اُرْدُدْ are also correct (lesson 35), but the fatḥa is the form you will meet.

8. A final sukūn meets الـ. اُكْتُبْ ends in a vowelless consonant. If the next word begins with a هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل - and الـ is one - two silent consonants would collide, so the imperative takes a kasra to break them apart:

أَغْلِقْ + البابَ -> أَغْلِقِ البابَ / قُلْ + الحَقيقَةَ -> قُلِ الحَقيقَةَ

This is the same repair you saw in لَيْسَتِ الغُرْفَةُ (lesson 23). Attached object pronouns are added without any such fuss: اُكْتُبْهُ، خُذْها، ساعِدْني.

9. Prohibition is لا + the jussive. To forbid, you do not negate the imperative - there is no such thing as *لا اُكْتُبْ. You go back to the second-person مُضارِع مَجْزوم and put لا النّاهِيَة in front of it:

لا تَكْتُبْ، لا تَكْتُبي، لا تَكْتُبا، لا تَكْتُبوا، لا تَكْتُبْنَ

The prefix stays, the ن of the plural and feminine forms still drops, and irregular verbs shorten exactly as they do in the positive: لا تَقُلْ، لا تَكُنْ، لا تَنْسَ، لا تَخَفْ.

10. لا النّاهِيَة and لا النّافِيَة differ by one vowel. The same little word لا stands in front of a مُضارِع verb in two completely different jobs, and only the final vowel separates them:

  • لا تَكْتُبْ. - jussive, sukūn: “Don’t write.”
  • لا تَكْتُبُ. - indicative, ḍamma: “You do not write.”

That is a real ambiguity, not a theoretical one. At a pause the ḍamma is dropped anyway in the pausal form, so the two sound identical when the sentence ends there; and in ordinary unvocalized Arabic both are written لا تكتب. Native readers decide from context, and so will you - a lone لا تدخن on a door is an order, and لا يدخن في المكتب inside a paragraph about office rules is a statement. When you write vocalized Arabic yourself, the vowel is your responsibility.

11. Calling someone: يا + a bare name. The vocative particle is يا, and it is used far more freely than English “O” - it is the normal way to attach a name to what you are saying. A single proper name after it is مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الضَّمِّ: one ḍamma, and crucially no tanwīn, even though مُحَمَّدٌ carries one when it stands on its own.

يا مُحَمَّدُ / يا فاطِمَةُ / يا سَميرُ

The same ending appears when you address someone by role rather than by name - the النَّكِرَة المَقْصودَة, “a specific one of these”: يا سائِقُ، يا مُهَنْدِسُ، يا أُسْتاذُ. Duals and sound masculine plurals keep the shape they would have in the nominative: يا مُهَنْدِسانِ، يا مُهَنْدِسونَ.

12. If the addressee owns something, it turns accusative. The moment the called word is the first half of an إِضافَة (lesson 20), the ḍamma is gone and the word is مَنْصوب:

يا صاحِبَ البَيْتِ / يا مُديرَ المَدْرَسَةِ / يا أَبا عُمَرَ

يا أَبا عُمَرَ shows it clearly: أَبٌ is one of the five nouns whose accusative is a long ـا, so “father of Umar” is أَبا, not أَبو. A pronoun counts as the second half too, which is why يا أُسْتاذي، يا أُمّي، يا صَديقي are accusative as well - you just cannot see the ending under the ي.

13. يا never meets الـ; use أَيُّها. *يا الطّالِبُ is impossible - the one everyday exception is يا اللهُ. To call any other noun that carries the article, Arabic inserts a buffer word: أَيُّها before a masculine noun, أَيَّتُها before a feminine one, and the noun after it stays مَرْفوع:

يا أَيُّها الطّالِبُ / يا أَيُّها النّاسُ / يا أَيَّتُها الطّالِبَةُ

This is the standard opening of any speech or announcement, and there يا is usually left off altogether: أَيُّها السّادَةُ، أَيُّها الحُضورُ.

14. Not in this lesson. There is a way to command a third person or a “we”: لِـ + jussive, called لامُ الأَمْرِ - لِيَكْتُبْ “let him write”, لِنَذْهَبْ “let’s go”, and after وَ or فَ the lām loses its vowel: وَلْيَكْتُبْ. Recognise it; you do not need to produce it. The names of the endings themselves - why the called name is “built” on a ḍamma rather than simply مَرْفوع - belong to the case system in lesson 40.

Forms & patterns

From the present tense to the command

المُضارِع (هُوَ)المَجْزوم (أَنْتَ)prefix removedالأَمْرEnglish
يَكْتُبُتَكْتُبْكْتُبْاُكْتُبْwrite!
يَدْخُلُتَدْخُلْدْخُلْاُدْخُلْcome in!
يَجْلِسُتَجْلِسْجْلِسْاِجْلِسْsit down!
يَذْهَبُتَذْهَبْذْهَبْاِذْهَبْgo!
يَفْتَحُتَفْتَحْفْتَحْاِفْتَحْopen!
يُعَلِّمُتُعَلِّمْعَلِّمْعَلِّمْteach!
يُساعِدُتُساعِدْساعِدْساعِدْhelp!
يَتَعَلَّمُتَتَعَلَّمْتَعَلَّمْتَعَلَّمْlearn!
يُرْسِلُتُرْسِلْرْسِلْأَرْسِلْsend!
يَنْتَظِرُتَنْتَظِرْنْتَظِرْاِنْتَظِرْwait!
يَسْتَمِعُتَسْتَمِعْسْتَمِعْاِسْتَمِعْlisten!

The five addressees, positive and negative

المُخاطَبالمُضارِعالأَمْرالنَّهْي
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُاُكْتُبْلا تَكْتُبْ
أَنْتِتَكْتُبينَاُكْتُبيلا تَكْتُبي
أَنْتُماتَكْتُبانِاُكْتُبالا تَكْتُبا
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبونَاُكْتُبوالا تَكْتُبوا
أَنْتُنَّتَكْتُبْنَاُكْتُبْنَلا تَكْتُبْنَ

Irregular verbs worth knowing by heart

Typeالماضي / المُضارِعأَنْتَأَنْتِأَنْتُمْEnglish
أَجْوَفقالَ / يَقولُقُلْقوليقولواsay!
أَجْوَفكانَ / يَكونُكُنْكونيكونواbe!
أَجْوَفباعَ / يَبيعُبِعْبيعيبيعواsell!
أَجْوَفنامَ / يَنامُنَمْنامينامواsleep!
مَهْموزأَخَذَ / يَأْخُذُخُذْخُذيخُذواtake!
مَهْموزأَكَلَ / يَأْكُلُكُلْكُليكُلواeat!
ناقِصمَشى / يَمْشياِمْشِاِمْشياِمْشواwalk!
ناقِصنَسِيَ / يَنْسىاِنْسَاِنْسَيْاِنْسَوْاforget!
مُضَعَّفرَدَّ / يَرُدُّرُدَّرُدّيرُدّواgive back!
مِثالوَقَفَ / يَقِفُقِفْقِفيقِفواstop!

Note اِمْشِ against اِمْشي: the masculine singular ends in a bare kasra, and the form with a written ي is the one you say to a woman. The dual and the أَنْتُنَّ column are left out here only to keep the table readable; they are built from the jussive like everything else (اِمْشِيا، اِمْشينَ).

Whom you are calling, and what ending it takes

المُنادىEndingExample
a single nameمَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الضَّمِّ, no tanwīnيا مُحَمَّدُ، يا فاطِمَةُ
a person addressed by rolethe same ḍammaيا سائِقُ، يا أُسْتاذُ
dual / sound masculine pluralas in the nominativeيا مُهَنْدِسانِ، يا مُهَنْدِسونَ
first half of an إِضافَةمَنْصوبيا صاحِبَ البَيْتِ، يا مُديرَ المَدْرَسَةِ
one of the five nouns, annexedمَنْصوب with ـايا أَبا خالِدٍ، يا أَبا عُمَرَ
annexed to a pronounمَنْصوب, ending hiddenيا أُسْتاذي، يا أُمّي
a noun carrying الـيا أَيُّها / أَيَّتُها + مَرْفوعيا أَيُّها الطّالِبُ، يا أَيَّتُها الطّالِبَةُ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
اُكْتُبْ رَقْمَ هاتِفِكَ هُنا، مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.Write your phone number here, please.
أَغْلِقِ البابَ؛ الجَوُّ بارِدٌ اليَوْمَ.Close the door; it’s cold today.
اِفْتَحي النّافِذَةَ قَليلًا.Open the window a little.
اِجْلِسوا هُنا، مِنْ فَضْلِكُمْ.Sit here, please.
قُلْ لي ماذا حَدَثَ بِالضَّبْطِ.Tell me exactly what happened.
كونوا في المَطارِ قَبْلَ السّاعَةِ السّادِسَةِ.Be at the airport before six o’clock.
اِمْشِ بِبُطْءٍ؛ الطَّريقُ زَلِقٌ.Walk slowly; the road is slippery.
أَرْسِلْ لي العُنْوانَ اليَوْمَ، لَوْ سَمَحْتَ.Send me the address today, please.
لا تَنْسَ جَوازَ سَفَرِكَ.Don’t forget your passport.
لا تَتَأَخَّري غَدًا؛ الدَّرْسُ في السّابِعَةِ.Don’t be late tomorrow; the lesson is at seven.
لا تَكْتُبوا بِالقَلَمِ الأَحْمَرِ.Don’t write in red pen.
يا مُحَمَّدُ، هَلْ سَمِعْتَ الخَبَرَ؟Muhammad, did you hear the news?
يا صاحِبَ البَيْتِ، الماءُ مَقْطوعٌ مُنْذُ الصَّباحِ.Landlord, the water has been off since this morning.
يا أَيُّها الطُّلّابُ، اِفْتَحوا كُتُبَكُمْ.Students, open your books.

Common mistakes

  • أُكْتُبْ -> اُكْتُبْ - the connecting alif is bare. Writing أ makes it a هَمْزَةُ القَطْع, which would still be pronounced after another word (wa-uktub instead of wa-ktub).
  • اِكْتُبْ -> اُكْتُبْ - the alif echoes the stem vowel, and يَكْتُبُ has a ḍamma. Save the kasra for stems with a kasra or a fatḥa: اِجْلِسْ، اِفْتَحْ.
  • تَكْتُبْ رَقْمَكَ (as an order) -> اُكْتُبْ رَقْمَكَ - the تـ must actually come off. Left on, the form is only a jussive waiting for a لَمْ or a لا.
  • اُكْتُبونَ -> اُكْتُبوا - the imperative is jussive, so نونُ الرَّفْعِ is deleted and the plural ends in ـوا with its silent alif. Only اُكْتُبْنَ keeps a ن, and that ن is the subject.
  • لا تَكْتُبُ هٰذا هُنا. (meaning “don’t write”) -> لا تَكْتُبْ هٰذا هُنا. - with a ḍamma the sentence is a plain statement, “you do not write this here”. A prohibition needs the jussive sukūn.
  • لا اُكْتُبْ -> لا تَكْتُبْ - the imperative has no negative form of its own. Forbidding always sends you back to the second-person مُضارِع مَجْزوم.
  • اُقولْ -> قُلْ - a hollow verb shortens in the jussive, and the shortened stem starts with a vowel, so there is nothing for a helping alif to do.
  • اِمْشي (to a man) -> اِمْشِ - the weak final letter drops in the jussive. The written ي belongs to the feminine singular only.
  • يا مُحَمَّدٌ -> يا مُحَمَّدُ - a called name never carries tanwīn. One ḍamma and stop.
  • يا صاحِبُ البَيْتِ -> يا صاحِبَ البَيْتِ - once the addressee owns a following noun it is an إِضافَة, and the first half goes مَنْصوب. Same reason for يا أَبا عُمَرَ, not *يا أَبو عُمَرَ.
  • يا الأُسْتاذُ -> يا أَيُّها الأُسْتاذُ - يا cannot stand in front of الـ; أَيُّها (or أَيَّتُها) is the required buffer.

Tips

  • Never build an imperative from scratch. Say the أَنْتَ jussive out loud, drop the تـ, and listen: if what is left cannot be pronounced, add the alif. Three seconds, no new paradigm.
  • The alif’s vowel is an echo, not a rule to look up. Chant اُدْخُلْ، اُنْظُرْ، اُكْتُبْ against اِجْلِسْ، اِفْتَحْ، اِذْهَبْ and your ear will start choosing correctly.
  • Learn the short irregulars as vocabulary items, not as derivations: قُلْ، كُنْ، خُذْ، كُلْ، بِعْ، قِفْ، نَمْ. Seven one-syllable words cover most of the commands you will ever give.
  • Do not avoid the imperative out of politeness - Arabic uses it freely and softens it with a phrase, not with grammar: مِنْ فَضْلِكَ، لَوْ سَمَحْتَ، رَجاءً، تَفَضَّلْ.
  • Drill positive and negative side by side (اُكْتُبْ / لا تَكْتُبْ, خُذْ / لا تَأْخُذْ). They look unrelated but come from the same مَجْزوم, and pairing them stops you inventing *لا اُكْتُبْ.
  • When reading, stop hunting for the لا النّاهِيَة / لا النّافِيَة vowel. Real Arabic is unvocalized and the distinction is invisible; a sign, a recipe or an instruction manual is giving orders, an article is describing.
  • With يا, ask one question: is the name standing alone or does it own something? Alone gives a ḍamma with no tanwīn; owning something (or carrying ـي) gives a fatḥa.
  • Park لِيَكْتُبْ and لِنَذْهَبْ for now. Recognising them in a text is enough at A2; the five second-person forms are what you actually need to speak.

A2 37 / 70

Negating the past and the future

نَفْيُ الماضي والمُسْتَقْبَل: ما، لَمْ، لَنْ

In short

Lesson 23 gave you لا for the present and لَيْسَ for the verbless sentence, and left two holes in the grid: “he did not write” and “he will not write”. This lesson fills them. Arabic has three tools here, not one: ما in front of an unchanged past verb, لَمْ in front of a jussive imperfect, and لَنْ in front of a subjunctive imperfect. Two of the three negate the past, and in ordinary sentences either of them will do.

The part that costs learners the most is not the list but one strange fact inside it: لَمْ negates the past, yet the verb it takes is a مُضارِع. لَمْ يَكْتُبْ looks like a present-tense verb and means “he did not write” - the particle flips the time backwards by itself. Get that one sentence into your head now, because everything else in the lesson is bookkeeping: which ending the verb wears after لَمْ (a sukūn, or a missing letter) and which one it wears after لَنْ (a fatḥa). You already built both shapes in lessons 35 and 38; here they finally get a job.

The rule

1. The three-way split. One shape of verb each; the first two share the past between them:

  • ما + الماضي - the past verb stands exactly as it is: ما كَتَبَ “he did not write”.
  • لَمْ + المُضارِعُ المَجْزوم - the same meaning, the modern default: لَمْ يَكْتُبْ.
  • لَنْ + المُضارِعُ المَنْصوب - the future: لَنْ يَكْتُبَ “he will not write”.

A fourth particle, لَمّا, is a specialised past negator meaning “not yet” and takes the jussive like لَمْ: لَمّا يَصِلْ “he has not arrived yet”. It gets its own rule below.

2. ما changes nothing at all. The past tense is مَبْنِيٌّ - frozen (lesson 18) - so no particle can bend its ending. Put ما immediately in front and stop: ما ذَهَبْتُ، ما كَتَبَتْ، ما وَصَلوا، ما رَأَيْتُهُ. Object pronouns, subjects, word order: all untouched. This is by far the easiest of the three to produce, and it is correct MSA. It carries a faint flavour of emphasis or of speech, and modern written prose reaches for لَمْ far more often, but a plain ما + past verb is not an error.

Do not read this negating ما the same way in ما زالَ “he is still” or ما عادَ “he no longer”. The ما there is the same negator, but each pair has fused into one lexical unit built on a sister of كانَ (lesson 43): negating “he ceased” is how “he is still” comes out. And ما has several other lives - a question word, a relative pronoun - which are lesson 68.

3. لَمْ is the default past negation of MSA. In a newspaper, a report, a formal letter or a news broadcast, “did not” is لَمْ far more often than ما. Arabic grammarians label it حَرْفُ نَفْيٍ وجَزْمٍ وقَلْبٍ - “a particle of negation, of jussive-making, and of flipping” - and that third word is the whole trick: قَلْب, the flip, is what turns the time of the following مُضارِع from present into past.

4. Say the hard part out loud: لَمْ takes a مُضارِع and means the past. لَمْ يَكْتُبْ is “he did not write”, never “he does not write”. You are not building a past verb here; you are building a present-shaped verb behind a particle that has already moved the sentence into the past. There is no *لَمْ كَتَبَ - putting a past verb after لَمْ is the single most frequent error in this lesson, because the learner’s instinct says “past meaning, past form”. Arabic disagrees.

5. What المَجْزوم looks like after لَمْ. The jussive of lesson 35, unchanged. Its marker has three shapes depending on the verb:

  • السُّكون on a sound verb: يَكْتُبُ → لَمْ يَكْتُبْ، يَدْرُسُ → لَمْ يَدْرُسْ.
  • حَذْفُ النّون in الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَة: يَكْتُبونَ → لَمْ يَكْتُبوا، تَكْتُبينَ → لَمْ تَكْتُبي، يَكْتُبانِ → لَمْ يَكْتُبا. The silent أَلِف فارِقَة after ـوا is written as always.
  • حَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة in a verb ending in a weak letter: يَمْشي → لَمْ يَمْشِ، يَدْعو → لَمْ يَدْعُ، يَنْسى → لَمْ يَنْسَ. The final letter is amputated and the short vowel that fed it is all that remains.

And the two feminine plurals يَكْتُبْنَ / تَكْتُبْنَ never move: لَمْ يَكْتُبْنَ. Their ـنَ is the subject pronoun, not a mood marker.

6. Hollow verbs shorten their long vowel. This is the sub-rule worth drilling on its own. A verb like قالَ - يَقولُ carries a long ū in the middle. The jussive wants a sukūn on the last radical, and a long vowel cannot survive in front of a sukūn - two vowelless letters would collide

  • so the long vowel simply shortens:

يَقولُ → لَمْ يَقُلْ، يَنامُ → لَمْ يَنَمْ، يَبيعُ → لَمْ يَبِعْ، يَكونُ → لَمْ يَكُنْ، يَخافُ → لَمْ يَخَفْ.

The short vowel that appears matches the long one it replaces: ū → ḍamma, ā → fatḥa, ī → kasra. Nothing shortens when the ending is not a sukūn, so the الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة keep their long vowel: لَمْ يَقولوا، لَمْ تَقولي. The full behaviour of these verbs is lesson 50; here you only need the shortening after لَمْ.

7. لَنْ + المَنْصوب for the future. لَنْ is حَرْفُ نَفْيٍ ونَصْبٍ واسْتِقْبالٍ - negation, subjunctive-making, and futurity built in. The verb takes the fatḥa of lesson 33, or drops its ن: لَنْ أَكْتُبَ، لَنْ يَمْشِيَ، لَنْ يَكْتُبوا، لَنْ تَكْتُبي.

Because لَنْ already contains the future, it replaces سَـ and سَوْفَ; the two never combine. سَيَذْهَبُ negated is لَنْ يَذْهَبَ, and both *لَنْ سَيَذْهَبَ and *ما سَوْفَ يَذْهَبُ are dead wrong. Note also that لَنْ does not shorten a hollow verb - there is no sukūn to collide with - so لَمْ يَقُلْ but لَنْ يَقولَ، لَمْ يَنَمْ but لَنْ يَنامَ.

8. Where لا still belongs. لا + مُضارِع مَرْفوع (lesson 23) keeps the present: لا يَكْتُبُ “he does not write / is not writing”. Three particles, three times: لا for now, ما or لَمْ for before, لَنْ for after. English “not” plus a tense-carrying helper does all three, which is why learners reach for one Arabic word and use it everywhere.

9. لَمّا: “not yet”. لَمّا takes the jussive exactly like لَمْ, but adds that the thing is still expected: لَمّا يَصِلْ “he has not arrived yet”, لَمّا نَبْدَأْ “we have not started yet”. لَمْ يَصِلْ closes the file; لَمّا يَصِلْ keeps it open. It is a formal, written-register word - and it has an unrelated twin, لَمّا “when” followed by a past verb (لَمّا وَصَلَ “when he arrived”), which belongs to lesson 38. The verb form tells you which one you are reading.

10. Two sukūns meeting: a helping kasra. لَمْ يَكْتُبْ ends in a sukūn. If the next word begins with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل - الـ above all - two vowelless letters would collide, so the verb’s sukūn turns into a kasra in careful reading: لَمْ يَكْتُبِ الواجِبَ، لَمْ يَقُلِ الحَقيقَةَ، لَمْ يَكُنِ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا. It is a pronunciation repair, not a change of mood; the verb is still مَجْزوم.

11. Usually you cannot hear it and you cannot see it - so learn the rule. At a pause the final sukūn is inaudible by definition, and in ordinary unvocalized writing the verb of لم يكتب and of لن يكتب is spelled with the same four letters. The difference between المَجْزوم and المَنْصوب on a sound verb is therefore invisible on paper, and inaudible whenever the verb falls at a pause. What you can always see is the particle in front, and what you can always hear is the missing ن of الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة (لَمْ يَكْتُبوا) and the amputated letter of a weak-final verb (لَمْ يَمْشِ). Read the particle first and let it decide the ending; do not wait to hear it.

12. Not in this lesson. لا، لَيْسَ and غَيْر were lesson 23 and stay there. ما الحِجازِيَّة (the لَيْسَ-like ما of ما هٰذا بَشَرًا), لا النّافِيَةُ لِلْجِنْس (لا شَكَّ، لا مانِعَ), إِنْ النّافِيَة and the choice between all of them as one system are lesson 63. Negation inside a condition, and لَوْلا, are lessons 56 and 70.

Forms & patterns

The three-way split, and لَمّا beside it

الأَداةThe verb after itمِثالEnglish
ماالماضي, ending untouchedما كَتَبَhe did not write
لَمْالمُضارِعُ المَجْزوملَمْ يَكْتُبْhe did not write
لَنْالمُضارِعُ المَنْصوبلَنْ يَكْتُبَhe will not write
لَمّاالمُضارِعُ المَجْزوملَمّا يَكْتُبْhe has not written yet
لاالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوع (lesson 23)لا يَكْتُبُhe does not write

The three negations across the persons, on كَتَبَ - يَكْتُبُ

الضَّميرما + الماضيلَمْ + المَجْزوملَنْ + المَنْصوب
أَناما كَتَبْتُلَمْ أَكْتُبْلَنْ أَكْتُبَ
أَنْتَما كَتَبْتَلَمْ تَكْتُبْلَنْ تَكْتُبَ
أَنْتِما كَتَبْتِلَمْ تَكْتُبيلَنْ تَكْتُبي
هُوَما كَتَبَلَمْ يَكْتُبْلَنْ يَكْتُبَ
هِيَما كَتَبَتْلَمْ تَكْتُبْلَنْ تَكْتُبَ
نَحْنُما كَتَبْنالَمْ نَكْتُبْلَنْ نَكْتُبَ
أَنْتُماما كَتَبْتُمالَمْ تَكْتُبالَنْ تَكْتُبا
هُما (مُذَكَّر)ما كَتَبالَمْ يَكْتُبالَنْ يَكْتُبا
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)ما كَتَبَتالَمْ تَكْتُبالَنْ تَكْتُبا
أَنْتُمْما كَتَبْتُمْلَمْ تَكْتُبوالَنْ تَكْتُبوا
أَنْتُنَّما كَتَبْتُنَّلَمْ تَكْتُبْنَلَنْ تَكْتُبْنَ
هُمْما كَتَبوالَمْ يَكْتُبوالَنْ يَكْتُبوا
هُنَّما كَتَبْنَلَمْ يَكْتُبْنَلَنْ يَكْتُبْنَ

The jussive marker by verb class - what actually happens after لَمْ

الفِعْلالمَرْفوعبَعْدَ لَمْعَلامَةُ الجَزْم
كَتَبَ - يَكْتُبُيَكْتُبُلَمْ يَكْتُبْالسُّكون
قالَ - يَقولُيَقولُلَمْ يَقُلْالسُّكون, with ū shortened to ḍamma
نامَ - يَنامُيَنامُلَمْ يَنَمْالسُّكون, with ā shortened to fatḥa
باعَ - يَبيعُيَبيعُلَمْ يَبِعْالسُّكون, with ī shortened to kasra
كانَ - يَكونُيَكونُلَمْ يَكُنْالسُّكون, with ū shortened to ḍamma
مَشى - يَمْشييَمْشيلَمْ يَمْشِحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة
دَعا - يَدْعويَدْعولَمْ يَدْعُحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة
نَسِيَ - يَنْسىيَنْسىلَمْ يَنْسَحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة
هُمْ يَكْتُبونَيَكْتُبونَلَمْ يَكْتُبواحَذْفُ النّون
أَنْتِ تَكْتُبينَتَكْتُبينَلَمْ تَكْتُبيحَذْفُ النّون
هُما يَكْتُبانِيَكْتُبانِلَمْ يَكْتُباحَذْفُ النّون
هُنَّ يَكْتُبْنَيَكْتُبْنَلَمْ يَكْتُبْنَnone - مَبْنِيٌّ, frozen

لَمْ against لَنْ, same verbs. Read the two right-hand columns across: the hollow verbs shorten in one column and not in the other, and the weak-final verbs lose a letter in one and gain a fatḥa in the other.

الفِعْلبَعْدَ لَمْ (past)بَعْدَ لَنْ (future)
كَتَبَلَمْ يَكْتُبْلَنْ يَكْتُبَ
قالَلَمْ يَقُلْلَنْ يَقولَ
نامَلَمْ يَنَمْلَنْ يَنامَ
كانَلَمْ يَكُنْلَنْ يَكونَ
مَشىلَمْ يَمْشِلَنْ يَمْشِيَ
دَعالَمْ يَدْعُلَنْ يَدْعُوَ
نَسِيَلَمْ يَنْسَلَنْ يَنْسى
هُمْلَمْ يَكْتُبوالَنْ يَكْتُبوا
أَنْتِلَمْ تَكْتُبيلَنْ تَكْتُبي
هُنَّلَمْ يَكْتُبْنَلَنْ يَكْتُبْنَ

The last three rows are identical in both columns: once the ن is gone or the form is frozen, the two moods look the same, and only the particle tells you the tense.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ما ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى العَمَلِ أَمْسِ.I did not go to work yesterday.
ما رَأَيْتُهُ مُنْذُ سَنَةٍ كامِلَةٍ.I have not seen him for a whole year.
لَمْ أَذْهَبْ إِلَى العَمَلِ أَمْسِ.I did not go to work yesterday.
لَمْ يَكْتُبِ الطّالِبُ الواجِبَ.The student did not write the homework.
لِماذا لَمْ تَكْتُبي إِلى أُخْتِكِ؟Why didn’t you write to your sister?
الطُّلّابُ لَمْ يَكْتُبوا شَيْئًا في الامْتِحانِ.The students did not write anything in the exam.
لَمْ يَقُلْ لَنا شَيْئًا عَنِ الاجْتِماعِ.He did not tell us anything about the meeting.
لَمْ يَنَمِ الطِّفْلُ جَيِّدًا اللَّيْلَةَ الماضِيَةَ.The child did not sleep well last night.
لَمْ يَمْشِ إِلَى المَحَطَّةِ؛ رَكِبَ الحافِلَةَ.He did not walk to the station; he took the bus.
لَمْ يَكُنْ عِنْدَنا وَقْتٌ لِلْقَهْوَةِ.We did not have time for coffee.
لَنْ أَنْسى هٰذا اليَوْمَ أَبَدًا.I will never forget this day.
لَنْ نَصِلَ قَبْلَ السّاعَةِ الثّامِنَةِ.We will not arrive before eight o’clock.
الأَوْلادُ لَنْ يَلْعَبوا في الحَديقَةِ غَدًا.The children will not play in the garden tomorrow.
لَمّا يَصِلِ القِطارُ إِلَى المَحَطَّةِ.The train has not arrived at the station yet.

Common mistakes

  • لَمْ يَكْتُبَ -> لَمْ يَكْتُبْ - لَمْ makes the verb مَجْزوم, so a sound verb ends in a sukūn. A fatḥa there is the mood of لَنْ, and it says the wrong tense.
  • لَنْ يَكْتُبْ -> لَنْ يَكْتُبَ - the mirror error. لَنْ makes the verb مَنْصوب: fatḥa, never sukūn. Learners who have just drilled لَمْ tend to carry the sukūn over.
  • لَمْ ذَهَبَ -> لَمْ يَذْهَبْ - لَمْ never takes a past verb, however past the meaning is. If you want a past form there, the particle you need is ما: ما ذَهَبَ.
  • لَنْ كَتَبَ -> لَنْ يَكْتُبَ - same fault in the future. Nothing but a مُضارِع can stand after لَنْ.
  • ما سَوْفَ يَذْهَبُ -> لَنْ يَذْهَبَ - ما negates a past verb, not a marked future, and سَوْفَ itself cannot be negated. The whole future negative is packed into لَنْ.
  • لَنْ سَيَذْهَبَ -> لَنْ يَذْهَبَ - لَنْ already means “will not”, so the سَـ is not only unnecessary, it is impossible: two future markers cannot share one verb.
  • لَمْ يَكْتُبونَ -> لَمْ يَكْتُبوا - one of الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة, so the ن goes and the silent alif is written. This one is audible, so it is worth fixing first.
  • لَمْ يَقولْ -> لَمْ يَقُلْ - a hollow verb shortens its long vowel before the jussive sukūn. Compare لَنْ يَقولَ, where nothing shortens because there is no sukūn.
  • لَمْ يَمْشي -> لَمْ يَمْشِ - a weak-final verb marks the jussive by losing its last letter. The kasra underneath is the only trace left of the ي.
  • لا كَتَبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ -> ما كَتَبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ / لَمْ أَكْتُبِ الرِّسالَةَ - لا negates a present verb, not a past one. Note that the لَمْ version changes the verb to a مُضارِع.
  • لَمّا وَصَلَ القِطارُ (for “the train has not arrived yet”) -> لَمّا يَصِلِ القِطارُ - لَمّا + a past verb is the other لَمّا, “when the train arrived”. Only لَمّا + مُضارِع مَجْزوم means “not yet”.

Tips

  • Fix the odd one first: لَمْ = past meaning, present-shaped verb. Say لَمْ يَكْتُبْ = “he did not write” ten times. Every other mistake in this lesson follows from doubting that line.
  • Two spellings, one meaning: ما كَتَبَ and لَمْ يَكْتُبْ say the same thing. If the jussive deserts you mid-sentence, fall back on ما plus the past verb you already know - it is correct Arabic, not a cheat.
  • Drill in triplets, always in the same order: يَكْتُبُ - لَمْ يَكْتُبْ - لَنْ يَكْتُبَ. Then run the same triplet through يَقولُ، يَنامُ، يَمْشي. The contrast is what teaches the endings; a list of jussives on its own does not.
  • The two shortenings to over-practise are لَمْ يَكُنْ and لَمْ يَقُلْ - the commonest hollow verbs in real texts, and the pair that instantly marks out someone who knows the rule.
  • Watch what happens to لَيْسَ in the past: it has no past tense of its own, so “he was not a teacher” is ما كانَ مُدَرِّسًا or لَمْ يَكُنْ مُدَرِّسًا, with the predicate still مَنْصوب.
  • In an unvocalized text, do not look for the ending - look for the particle. لم tells you “past”, لن tells you “future”, and the verb behind them is bound to be a مُضارِع either way.
  • Save لَمّا for reading at first. It is precise and elegant, but “not yet” is safely said with لَمْ … بَعْدُ (لَمْ يَصِلْ بَعْدُ) while you are still building fluency.
  • Do not try to sort out the whole negation system now. لا الجِنْس، ما الحِجازِيَّة and the rest arrive together in lesson 63, when you have all the pieces they are built from.

A2 38 / 70

Time and reason clauses

أَدَواتُ الرَّبْطِ الزَّمَنِيَّةُ والسَّبَبِيَّة

In short

Everything you have written so far has been one event per sentence. This lesson bolts two together: “when I arrived, I found…”, “before the manager gets here”, “because the weather is cold”. Arabic does that with a small closed set of connectors - عِنْدَما، بَيْنَما، قَبْلَ أَنْ، بَعْدَ أَنْ، مُنْذُ، لِأَنَّ، بِسَبَبِ and a few more - and the whole difficulty is not their meanings, which are easy, but what each one is legally allowed to be followed by. Some demand a past verb, some demand المُضارِعُ المَنْصوبُ from lesson 33, and some refuse a verb altogether and insist on a noun in the genitive.

So learn each connector as a two-part chunk: the word plus its complement. قَبْلَ أَنْ is not “before”, it is “before + a subjunctive verb, always, even in a sentence about last Tuesday”. بِسَبَبِ is not “because”, it is “because of + a noun”. The reason half of the lesson is where English speakers lose the most marks, because English lets “because” and “because of” swap places with a little rewriting and Arabic does not: لِأَنَّ takes a clause and puts its subject into the accusative, بِسَبَبِ takes a bare noun, and لِذٰلِكَ turns the sentence round and announces the result instead.

The rule

1. Three possible complements. Every connector in this lesson takes one or two of exactly three things: a full verbal clause (normally a ماضٍ), أَنْ + المُضارِعُ المَنْصوبُ, or a noun in الجَرّ (usually a مَصْدَر). Once you know which slot a connector opens, you cannot go wrong; almost every learner error here is pouring the wrong complement into the right word.

2. عِنْدَما and حينَما - the everyday “when”. For one completed past event they take a ماضٍ: عِنْدَما وَصَلْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ، وَجَدْتُ رِسالَةً. For a habit or a general truth they take a مُضارِع: حينَما أَشْعُرُ بِالتَّعَبِ أَشْرَبُ القَهْوَةَ. The two words are interchangeable; حينَما is a shade more formal and commoner in writing. Neither of them ever takes أَنْ - عِنْدَما already is the linker - and عِنْدَما is one word, never written عِنْدَ ما. Either clause may come first; when the time clause opens the sentence, modern writing usually puts a «،» after it.

3. لَمّا - the narrative “when”. Same job as عِنْدَما but restricted: ماضٍ in the clause and ماضٍ in the main sentence, and it belongs to storytelling rather than to conversation. لَمّا سَمِعَ الخَبَرَ صَمَتَ طَويلًا. Be aware of a homograph: a different لَمّا means “not yet” and is followed by المَجْزوم (لَمّا يَصِلْ), which belongs to the negation system, not here. The word shape is identical; only the mood of the verb behind it and the sense tell them apart.

4. بَيْنَما - “while”, and it wants كانَ. بَيْنَما heads a whole clause, never a bare noun, and because “while” needs a background action that was already running, that clause is normally كانَ + مُضارِع (lesson 32): بَيْنَما كُنْتُ أَقْرَأُ الجَريدَةَ، رَنَّ الهاتِفُ. It can also head a nominal sentence: بَيْنَما هُوَ في الطَّريقِ، اتَّصَلَ بِهِ صَديقُهُ. A second, very common use is contrast - “whereas”: هُوَ يُفَضِّلُ الشّايَ بَيْنَما أُفَضِّلُ أَنا القَهْوَةَ. Never *بَيْنَما الدَّرْسِ and never *بَيْنَما أَنْ.

5. كُلَّما - “whenever”, past + past. This one looks wrong to an English eye and is worth memorizing as a fixed frame: كُلَّما + ماضٍ … ماضٍ, even though the meaning is habitual and timeless. كُلَّما زارَني جَدّي فَرِحْتُ. The same frame carries the “the more…, the more…” comparison: كُلَّما زادَ العَمَلُ زادَ التَّعَبُ. Do not confuse it with the two-word كُلُّ ما “everything that”, which is a quantifier plus a relative pronoun (lesson 39): كُلُّ ما قالَهُ صَحيحٌ.

6. قَبْلَ أَنْ - always المُضارِعُ المَنْصوبُ. This is the rule of the lesson. Whatever the tense of the main sentence, the verb after قَبْلَ أَنْ is a subjunctive: خَرَجْتُ مِنَ المَكْتَبِ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلَ المُديرُ - past main verb, subjunctive after قَبْلَ أَنْ. The logic is sound once you see it: at the moment of the first event the “before” event had not happened yet, so Arabic marks it as unrealized. Modern Arabic keeps to the subjunctive here, so *قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلُ with the indicative ḍamma is simply wrong, and *قَبْلَ أَنْ وَصَلَ - a shape a few classical writers did use - is not one to copy.

7. بَعْدَ أَنْ - ماضٍ or مَنْصوب, and the timeline chooses. If the whole sentence is in the past, use a ماضٍ: بَعْدَ أَنْ أَنْهَيْتُ واجِبي، شاهَدْتُ فيلْمًا. If the event is still ahead, use المَنْصوب: سَنَخْرُجُ بَعْدَ أَنْ نَتَناوَلَ الفَطورَ. Unlike قَبْلَ أَنْ, this one genuinely has two options, and picking the one that matches the main verb will always be idiomatic.

8. The مَصْدَر shortcut: قَبْلَ / بَعْدَ + a genitive noun. Instead of a clause you can put a verbal noun straight after قَبْلَ or بَعْدَ: قَبْلَ الوُصولِ “before arriving”, بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ “after the lesson”. قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ are ظَرْفانِ مَنْصوبانِ heading an إِضافَة, so whatever follows them is مَجْرور - that kasra is not optional. To name the subject, attach a pronoun to the مَصْدَر: قَبْلَ خُروجِهِ “before he goes out”, بَعْدَ وُصولِنا “after we arrived”. This shape is shorter, extremely common in writing, and safe whenever the subject is obvious; the full account of the مَصْدَر is lesson 54.

9. مُنْذُ - “since” and “for”. With a noun it means either a starting point or a stretch of time, and the noun is مَجْرور: مُنْذُ الصَّباحِ، مُنْذُ سَنَتَيْنِ. With a clause it takes أَنْ + ماضٍ: مُنْذُ أَنْ تَعَلَّمْتُ السِّباحَةَ. The main verb is then usually a plain مُضارِع, because the situation is still going on - أَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ مُنْذُ سَنَتَيْنِ is “I have been studying Arabic for two years”. Arabic has no separate “have been” tense; مُنْذُ carries that meaning by itself. مُذْ is a lighter twin of the same word.

10. حَتّى - “until”, and the mood tells you whether it happened. Lesson 33 promised this split. A ماضٍ after حَتّى reports something that really did take place: انْتَظَرْنا في المَحَطَّةِ حَتّى وَصَلَ القِطارُ. A مَنْصوب after حَتّى points at something still ahead, wanted or expected: سَأَنْتَظِرُ هُنا حَتّى يَعودَ أَخي. حَتّى also works as a plain preposition with a noun in the genitive - العَمَلُ مُسْتَمِرٌّ حَتّى المَساءِ - and, in a completely different job, as the particle “even”. Context separates them without trouble.

11. فَوْرَ - “as soon as”, noun only. فَوْرَ is a ظَرْف standing in an إِضافَة, so it must be followed by a noun, normally a مَصْدَر with an attached pronoun: فَوْرَ وُصولِهِ اتَّصَلَ بِنا “as soon as he arrived he called us”. A verb may never follow it directly. If you want a clause with a full verb, the ready-made equivalents are حالَما + ماضٍ or بِمُجَرَّدِ أَنْ + verb.

12. لِأَنَّ - “because” + a clause, subject in the accusative. لِأَنَّ is لِـ plus أَنَّ, and أَنَّ forces the noun behind it into النَّصْب while its predicate stays مَرْفوع: لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ بارِدٌ - الطَّقْسَ accusative, بارِدٌ nominative. The predicate can itself be a verb: لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ تَغَيَّرَ فَجْأَةً. When the subject is a pronoun it does not stand as a separate word; it attaches: لِأَنَّهُ مَريضٌ، لِأَنَّني نَسيتُ. So لِأَنَّ can never be followed immediately by a verb - “because I forgot” has to become “because-I I-forgot”. The rest of the أَنَّ family, and the difference between أَنْ and أَنَّ, is lesson 44.

13. بِسَبَبِ - “because of” + a noun. بِسَبَبِ is بِـ plus سَبَب in an إِضافَة, so what follows it is a genitive noun: تَأَخَّرَتِ الحافِلَةُ بِسَبَبِ الازْدِحامِ. You will also meet بِسَبَبِ أَنَّهُ … in the press - the أَنَّ clause is read as a مَصْدَر مُؤَوَّل, so the إِضافَة is not broken - but it is heavy, and most editors rebuild such a sentence with لِأَنَّهُ. Two relatives worth recognizing: نَظَرًا لِـ, a formal “owing to”, and بِفَضْلِ, “thanks to”, normally kept for good outcomes.

14. لِذٰلِكَ - the same link run backwards. لِأَنَّ and بِسَبَبِ put the cause second; لِذٰلِكَ puts it first and announces the result: المَطْعَمُ مُغْلَقٌ اليَوْمَ، لِذٰلِكَ سَنَأْكُلُ في البَيْتِ. Any cause-and-effect pair can be said in all three shapes, and choosing between them is a matter of what you want to foreground, not of grammar.

15. What is deliberately left out. The “when” that is really an “if” - إِذا - is a conditional and waits for lesson 56, and the unreal لَوْ and لَوْلا for lesson 65. The other way of saying “while”, hanging an accusative circumstantial clause on the sentence (خَرَجَ وَهُوَ يَبْتَسِمُ), is الحالُ, lesson 55. إِنَّ and its sisters as a system are lesson 44, and the connectors that stitch whole paragraphs together are lesson 66.

Forms & patterns

The ten time connectors with the complement each one opens. This table is the lesson in one screen.

الأَداةEnglishWhat must followمِثال
عِنْدَماwhenماضٍ - or مُضارِع for a habitعِنْدَما وَصَلْتُ، وَجَدْتُ رِسالَةً
حينَماwhenas عِنْدَما, slightly more formalحينَما أَراهُ أُسَلِّمُ عَلَيْهِ
لَمّاwhen (narrative)ماضٍ + ماضٍلَمّا سَمِعَ الخَبَرَ صَمَتَ
بَيْنَماwhile, whereasa full clause, usually كانَ + مُضارِعبَيْنَما كُنْتُ أَقْرَأُ، رَنَّ الهاتِفُ
كُلَّماwhenever, the moreماضٍ + ماضٍكُلَّما زارَني فَرِحْتُ
قَبْلَ أَنْbeforeمُضارِع مَنْصوب - alwaysخَرَجْتُ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلَ
بَعْدَ أَنْafterماضٍ - or مُضارِع مَنْصوببَعْدَ أَنْ أَكَلْنا خَرَجْنا
مُنْذُsince, forاسْم مَجْرور - or أَنْ + ماضٍأَدْرُسُ مُنْذُ سَنَتَيْنِ
حَتّىuntilماضٍ (it happened) / مَنْصوب (not yet)انْتَظَرْتُ حَتّى وَصَلَ
فَوْرَas soon asاسْم مَجْرور (a مَصْدَر) onlyفَوْرَ وُصولِهِ

قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ each have two shapes for the same meaning. The right-hand column is the shorter one and needs no mood decisions at all.

المَعْنىأَنْ + فِعْلمَصْدَر مَجْرور
before we eatقَبْلَ أَنْ نَأْكُلَقَبْلَ الأَكْلِ
before travellingقَبْلَ أَنْ نُسافِرَقَبْلَ السَّفَرِ
before he goes outقَبْلَ أَنْ يَخْرُجَقَبْلَ خُروجِهِ
after we arrivedبَعْدَ أَنْ وَصَلْنابَعْدَ وُصولِنا
after the lesson endedبَعْدَ أَنْ انْتَهى الدَّرْسُبَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ

لِأَنَّ with an attached pronoun subject. The duals لِأَنَّكُما، لِأَنَّهُما and the feminine plural لِأَنَّكُنَّ are built the same way and are left out to keep the table readable.

الضَّميرالشَّكْلمِثال
أَنالِأَنَّني (or لِأَنّي)لِأَنَّني مَشْغولٌ
نَحْنُلِأَنَّنالِأَنَّنا مُتْعَبونَ
أَنْتَلِأَنَّكَلِأَنَّكَ صَديقي
أَنْتِلِأَنَّكِلِأَنَّكِ مُجْتَهِدَةٌ
أَنْتُمْلِأَنَّكُمْلِأَنَّكُمْ تَعْرِفونَ الطَّريقَ
هُوَلِأَنَّهُلِأَنَّهُ مَريضٌ
هِيَلِأَنَّهالِأَنَّها مُسافِرَةٌ
هُمْلِأَنَّهُمْلِأَنَّهُمْ نائِمونَ
هُنَّلِأَنَّهُنَّلِأَنَّهُنَّ في الصَّفِّ

One cause, three sentences. Note where the accusative and the genitive fall.

الشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
لِأَنَّ + جُمْلَةتَأَخَّرْتُ لِأَنَّ الطَّريقَ مُزْدَحِمٌI was late because the road is crowded
بِسَبَبِ + اسْم مَجْرورتَأَخَّرْتُ بِسَبَبِ الازْدِحامِI was late because of the congestion
لِذٰلِكَ + النَّتيجَةالطَّريقُ مُزْدَحِمٌ، لِذٰلِكَ تَأَخَّرْتُThe road is crowded, so I was late

Examples

العربيةEnglish
عِنْدَما وَصَلْتُ إِلَى البَيْتِ، وَجَدْتُ رِسالَةً عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.When I got home, I found a letter on the table.
بَيْنَما كُنْتُ أَقْرَأُ الجَريدَةَ، رَنَّ الهاتِفُ.While I was reading the newspaper, the phone rang.
كُلَّما زارَني جَدّي فَرِحْتُ كَثيرًا.Every time my grandfather visited me I was very happy.
خَرَجْتُ مِنَ المَكْتَبِ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلَ المُديرُ.I left the office before the manager arrived.
أَغْسِلُ يَدَيَّ قَبْلَ الأَكْلِ دائِمًا.I always wash my hands before eating.
بَعْدَ أَنْ أَنْهَيْتُ واجِبي، شاهَدْتُ فيلْمًا قَصيرًا.After I finished my homework, I watched a short film.
سَنَخْرُجُ بَعْدَ أَنْ نَتَناوَلَ الفَطورَ.We will go out after we have breakfast.
أَدْرُسُ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ مُنْذُ سَنَتَيْنِ.I have been studying Arabic for two years.
انْتَظَرْنا في المَحَطَّةِ حَتّى وَصَلَ القِطارُ.We waited at the station until the train arrived.
سَأَنْتَظِرُ هُنا حَتّى يَعودَ أَخي.I will wait here until my brother comes back.
فَوْرَ وُصولِ الطّائِرَةِ اتَّصَلْتُ بِأُمّي.As soon as the plane landed I called my mother.
لَمْ نَخْرُجْ أَمْسِ لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ كانَ بارِدًا.We did not go out yesterday because the weather was cold.
تَأَخَّرَتِ الحافِلَةُ بِسَبَبِ الازْدِحامِ الشَّديدِ.The bus was late because of the heavy traffic.
المَطْعَمُ مُغْلَقٌ اليَوْمَ، لِذٰلِكَ سَنَأْكُلُ في البَيْتِ.The restaurant is closed today, so we will eat at home.

Common mistakes

  • قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلُ -> قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلَ - أَنْ always puts the verb into المَنْصوب, so the final ḍamma has to become a fatḥa. This is the single commonest slip in the lesson.
  • خَرَجْتُ قَبْلَ أَنْ وَصَلَ المُديرُ -> خَرَجْتُ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَصِلَ المُديرُ - a past main verb does not drag the قَبْلَ أَنْ clause into the past. That clause is unrealized by definition and stays subjunctive.
  • عِنْدَما أَنْ وَصَلْتُ -> عِنْدَما وَصَلْتُ - عِنْدَما is already the whole connector. Adding أَنْ is like saying “when that I arrived”.
  • بَيْنَما أَقْرَأُ، رَنَّ الهاتِفُ -> بَيْنَما كُنْتُ أَقْرَأُ، رَنَّ الهاتِفُ - “while” needs a background that was already running, and that is كانَ + مُضارِع. A bare مُضارِع reads as a present habit.
  • كُلَّما أَزورُهُ أَفْرَحُ -> كُلَّما زُرْتُهُ فَرِحْتُ - كُلَّما is a past + past frame even when the meaning is a repeated habit. Do not translate the English present.
  • لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسُ بارِدٌ -> لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ بارِدٌ - أَنَّ takes its noun in النَّصْب. The predicate بارِدٌ keeps the ḍamma; only the subject moves.
  • لِأَنَّ هُوَ مَريضٌ -> لِأَنَّهُ مَريضٌ - a pronoun subject after أَنَّ can only be an attached one. The independent pronouns of lesson 6 are impossible in this slot.
  • لِأَنَّ نَسيتُ المِفْتاحَ -> لِأَنَّني نَسيتُ المِفْتاحَ - a verb may never come straight after لِأَنَّ. Attach the pronoun first, then put the verb.
  • بِسَبَبِ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ -> لِأَنَّهُ مَريضٌ - بِسَبَبِ is built for a plain noun. When what follows is a whole sentence, the word to reach for is لِأَنَّ.
  • فَوْرَ وَصَلَ إِلَى المَطارِ -> فَوْرَ وُصولِهِ إِلَى المَطارِ - فَوْرَ needs a مَصْدَر, never a verb. For a full verb clause, switch to حالَما وَصَلَ.

Tips

  • Store each connector as word + complement, never as a bare gloss. “قَبْلَ أَنْ + مَنْصوب” is one item to memorize; “before” is a translation that will get the ending wrong.
  • The escape hatch when you are unsure of the mood: use the مَصْدَر. قَبْلَ الوُصولِ and بَعْدَ الاجْتِماعِ have no verb at all, so nothing can be misconjugated - and they sound more written, not less.
  • Use the English shape to pick the reason word: if you can say “because of” and a noun follows, it is بِسَبَبِ; if a whole sentence follows, it is لِأَنَّ. This test almost never fails.
  • Say the accusative after لِأَنَّ out loud - لِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ - until it feels automatic. It is audible in careful speech, so it is one of the few case endings that will actually be noticed.
  • Watch the kasra after مُنْذُ and بِسَبَبِ: مُنْذُ سَنَةٍ، بِسَبَبِ المَطَرِ. Both are genitive slots, so a tanwīn ḍamma there is an immediate giveaway.
  • Pair بَيْنَما with كانَ as a reflex, the way you pair لَنْ with the subjunctive. If a بَيْنَما clause has no كانَ, check whether you really meant “whereas”.
  • Do not chase إِذا yet. It looks like another “when”, but it is a conditional with its own machinery, and meeting it now will only blur the ten connectors you have here.

A2 39 / 70

Relative clauses, with and without alladhi

الاسْمُ المَوْصولُ وجُمْلَةُ الصِّلَة

In short

English attaches a clause to a noun with one small word - “the man who works here”, “the book that I read” - and English is even happy to drop it (“the book I read”). Arabic makes two decisions instead of one. First, is the noun you are describing definite or indefinite? A definite noun takes an اسْم مَوْصول, a relative pronoun chosen for its gender and number: الرَّجُلُ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا. An indefinite noun takes nothing at all - the clause is simply hung on the noun the way an adjective is: رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا يَعْمَلُ هُنا. Writing الَّذي after an indefinite noun is the single error this lesson exists to prevent.

The second half is the pronoun that English throws away and Arabic never does: العائِد, “the returner”. The clause after the مَوْصول has to be complete, with a pronoun inside it pointing back at the noun. “The book I read” is الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ - literally “the book which I read it”. And because an Arabic preposition can never be left dangling at the end the way English leaves it in “the house I live in”, the preposition goes into the clause too, with a pronoun stuck to it: البَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ فيهِ.

The rule

1. The forms, and the one that moves. There are six shapes, matching the head noun in gender and number:

  • singular: الَّذي (m.) / الَّتي (f.)
  • dual: اللَّذانِ ~ اللَّذَيْنِ (m.) / اللَّتانِ ~ اللَّتَيْنِ (f.)
  • plural: الَّذينَ (m.) / اللّاتي، اللَّواتي (f.)

All of them except the dual are مَبْنِيّ - frozen. الَّذي is الَّذي whether the phrase is the subject, the object or after a preposition; you never put a case vowel on it. Only the dual declines, with the ordinary dual endings of lesson 12: اللَّذانِ when the head is مَرْفوع, اللَّذَيْنِ when it is مَنْصوب or مَجْرور (جاءَ الطّالِبانِ اللَّذانِ نَجَحا, but سَأَلْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ اللَّذَيْنِ نَجَحا). Why the dual behaves this way, and what “مَبْنِيّ” means in full, is lesson 40.

2. Watch the spelling of the ل. The written forms are not as regular as they sound. الَّذي، الَّتي and الَّذينَ are written with one ل carrying a shadda; the duals اللَّذانِ، اللَّتانِ and the feminine plurals اللّاتي، اللَّواتي are written with two. This is a fixed orthographic quirk, not a rule you can derive, and *اللَّذي or *الَّذانِ is a spelling error even though nothing about the pronunciation changes. Copy the table in the next section by hand once and it will stick.

3. The rule that carries the lesson: definite head, مَوْصول; indefinite head, nothing. This is the same agreement reflex you already have from lesson 8. An adjective copies its noun’s definiteness (بَيْتٌ كَبيرٌ / البَيْتُ الكَبيرُ), and a relative clause is a describer too. The مَوْصول is a definite word - it begins with الـ - so the noun it attaches to has to be definite too:

  • definite head: رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا. - “I saw the man who works here.”
  • indefinite head: رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا يَعْمَلُ هُنا. - “I saw a man who works here.”

In the second sentence there is no relative pronoun anywhere, and none is missing: the clause يَعْمَلُ هُنا is a صِفَة, a describing clause, and it does the same job that كَبيرًا would do in رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا كَبيرًا. English learners find this hard because English needs “who” in both sentences. Arabic needs it in neither - it needs a match.

The headline mistake is therefore *رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا: an indefinite noun followed by a definite describer, exactly as broken as *بَيْتٌ الكَبيرُ.

The traditional formula is worth memorizing as it stands: الجُمَلُ بَعْدَ النَّكِراتِ صِفاتٌ، وبَعْدَ المَعارِفِ أَحْوالٌ - “clauses after indefinites are descriptions, after definites they are circumstantials”. The second half explains what happens if you drop the مَوْصول after a definite noun: رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَ يَعْمَلُ هُنا is not wrong, but it no longer means “the man who works here”. It means “I saw the man while he was working here” - a حال, lesson 55. The مَوْصول is what keeps the clause attached to the noun instead of to the event.

4. “Definite” includes more than الـ. Anything definite counts, so the مَوْصول is required after a noun made definite by a possessive suffix (lesson 7), by an إِضافَة (lesson 20), or by being a name:

  • كِتابي الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ فِي الصَّيْفِ - “my book that I read in the summer”
  • سَيّارَةُ أَخي الَّتي اِشْتَراها أَمْسِ - “my brother’s car, which he bought yesterday”
  • القاهِرَةُ الَّتي زُرْتُها - “the Cairo I visited”

5. Agreement, and the non-human plural. The مَوْصول copies the head’s gender and number, with one exception that is not an exception at all once you remember lesson 11: a plural of non-human things counts as feminine singular, so it takes الَّتي, never الَّذينَ:

  • الكُتُبُ الَّتي اِشْتَرَيْتُها - “the books I bought”
  • المُدُنُ الَّتي زُرْناها - “the cities we visited”
  • but المُوَظَّفونَ الَّذينَ يَعْمَلونَ هُنا - “the employees who work here”

الَّذينَ is for human males and for mixed groups; اللّاتي and اللَّواتي are for groups of women. Both feminine plurals are current in MSA and interchangeable; pick اللّاتي and stay with it.

6. العائِد - the clause must point back. After the مَوْصول comes جُمْلَةُ الصِّلَة, and it must be a complete clause containing a pronoun that refers to the head. Which pronoun depends on the job the head does inside that clause:

  • the head is the subject - the pronoun is already inside the verb, so nothing is written: الرَّجُلُ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا. The ي of يَعْمَلُ is the reference.
  • the head is the direct object - attach the object pronoun of lesson 29 to the verb: الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ، المَقالَةُ الَّتي كَتَبْتُها.
  • the head follows a preposition - preposition plus pronoun: البَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ فيهِ، الرَّجُلُ الَّذي تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَهُ، المُشْكِلَةُ الَّتي تَحَدَّثْنا عَنْها.
  • the head is the possessor - the pronoun sits on the noun it owns: الطّالِبَةُ الَّتي أَبوها طَبيبٌ، الرَّجُلُ الَّذي بَيْتُهُ كَبيرٌ. This is how Arabic says “whose”.

Only the first case looks empty to an English eye, and it is not: an Arabic verb carries its subject. In every other case, modern written Arabic keeps the pronoun; leave it out and the sentence reads as unfinished. *الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُ stops mid-thought: “the book which I read…”.

7. A preposition can never strand. English happily ends a relative clause with a bare preposition - “the house I live in”, “the man I spoke to”, “the problem we talked about”. Arabic has no such position. The preposition stays with its object, and its object here is the عائِد pronoun, so the two are written as one word:

English tailArabic
… I live in… أَسْكُنُ فيهِ
… I spoke with… تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَهُ
… we talked about… تَحَدَّثْنا عَنْها
… I work for… أَعْمَلُ لَها

*الرَّجُلُ الَّذي تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَ is the classic transfer error from English and is not a sentence at all - مَعَ without a following word is half a word.

8. Indefinite heads need the عائِد too. Dropping the مَوْصول does not mean dropping the pronoun. The clause still has to be complete:

  • قَرَأْتُ مَقالًا كَتَبَهُ صَحَفِيٌّ مِصْرِيٌّ. - “I read an article written by an Egyptian journalist.”
  • أَسْكُنُ في بَيْتٍ نافِذَتُهُ كَبيرَةٌ. - “I live in a house whose window is big.”

So the two rules are independent: the مَوْصول tracks definiteness, the عائِد tracks the role the head plays inside its own clause.

9. What the صِلَة can be. Usually a verbal sentence, but a nominal sentence and a bare prepositional phrase work just as well:

  • verbal: الطّالِبُ الَّذي نَجَحَ فِي الاِمْتِحانِ
  • nominal: الطّالِبُ الَّذي أَبوهُ مُهَنْدِسٌ
  • prepositional: الطّالِبُ الَّذي فِي الغُرْفَةِ

What it can never be is a fragment with a hole in it. If you can still ask “which one?” after reading the clause, something is missing.

10. Left for later. The مَوْصول can also stand with no head noun in front of it - “the one who”, “what” - using مَنْ and ما (مَنْ يَدْرُسُ يَنْجَحُ). Those free relatives, and the fused forms مِمَّنْ، عَمّا، مِمّا, are lesson 68. The dual’s endings and the meaning of مَبْنِيّ belong to lesson 40. And the حال reading of a clause after a definite noun - the second half of the formula in rule 3 - is lesson 55.

Forms & patterns

الأَسْماءُ المَوْصولَة - the whole set. Read the two dual rows as one item that changes shape; everything else is one fixed word:

العَدَدمُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّثEnglish
مُفْرَدالَّذيالَّتيwho, which, that
مُثَنّى (مَرْفوع)اللَّذانِاللَّتانِthe two who
مُثَنّى (مَنْصوب/مَجْرور)اللَّذَيْنِاللَّتَيْنِthe two who
جَمْعالَّذينَاللّاتي / اللَّواتيwho (pl.)

Left out here: the further feminine plurals اللّائي - still current in formal writing - and the much rarer اللّاءِ, which you will meet in reading but need not write yourself, and the free-standing مَنْ and ما of lesson 68.

Written with one ل or with two. No rule, just the list:

One لTwo ل
الَّذياللَّذانِ / اللَّذَيْنِ
الَّتياللَّتانِ / اللَّتَيْنِ
الَّذينَاللّاتي / اللَّواتي

The decision that starts every relative clause:

The head nounThe linkExample
مَعْرِفَة (الـ, a suffix, an إِضافَة, a name)اسْم مَوْصولالرَّجُلُ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا
نَكِرَةnothing - the clause is a صِفَةرَجُلٌ يَعْمَلُ هُنا

العائِد, by the job the head does inside the clause:

الوَظيفَةThe عائِدمِثالEnglish
فاعِلinside the verbالرَّجُلُ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُناthe man who works here
مَفْعول بِهِـهُ / ـها on the verbالكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُthe book I read
مَجْرور بِحَرْفحَرْف + ضَميرالبَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ فيهِthe house I live in
مُضاف إِلَيْهِـهُ / ـها on a nounالطّالِبَةُ الَّتي أَبوها طَبيبٌthe student whose father is a doctor
مُضاف إِلَيْهِ (والصِّلَة اسْمِيَّة)ـهُ / ـها on the مُبْتَدَأالرَّجُلُ الَّذي بَيْتُهُ كَبيرٌthe man whose house is big

Prepositions with their عائِد pronouns - learn these as ready-made tails:

الحَرْف+ هُ+ ها+ هُمْ
فيفيهِفيهافيهِمْ
مَعَمَعَهُمَعَهامَعَهُمْ
عَنْعَنْهُعَنْهاعَنْهُمْ
عَلىعَلَيْهِعَلَيْهاعَلَيْهِمْ
إِلىإِلَيْهِإِلَيْهاإِلَيْهِمْ
مِنْمِنْهُمِنْهامِنْهُمْ
بِـبِهِبِهابِهِمْ
لِـلَهُلَهالَهُمْ

The same clause on a definite and an indefinite head - drill these in pairs, out loud:

مَعْرِفَةنَكِرَة
الطّالِبُ الَّذي يَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَطالِبٌ يَدْرُسُ العَرَبِيَّةَ
الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُكِتابٌ قَرَأْتُهُ
المَدينَةُ الَّتي زُرْناهامَدينَةٌ زُرْناها
المُوَظَّفونَ الَّذينَ يَعْمَلونَ هُنامُوَظَّفونَ يَعْمَلونَ هُنا

Examples

العربيةEnglish
رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا.I saw the man who works here.
رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا يَعْمَلُ هُنا.I saw a man who works here.
الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ أَمْسِ مُفيدٌ جِدًّا.The book I read yesterday is very useful.
هٰذا هُوَ البَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ فيهِ.This is the house I live in.
الرَّجُلُ الَّذي تَحَدَّثْتُ مَعَهُ مُديرُ الشَّرِكَةِ.The man I spoke with is the company’s manager.
الطّالِبَةُ الَّتي أَبوها طَبيبٌ تَدْرُسُ الطِّبَّ.The student whose father is a doctor is studying medicine.
الكُتُبُ الَّتي اِشْتَرَيْتُها غالِيَةٌ.The books I bought are expensive.
المُهَنْدِسانِ اللَّذانِ وَصَلا أَمْسِ يَسْكُنانِ فِي الفُنْدُقِ.The two engineers who arrived yesterday are staying at the hotel.
سَأَلْتُ المُهَنْدِسَيْنِ اللَّذَيْنِ وَصَلا أَمْسِ.I asked the two engineers who arrived yesterday.
الطّالِباتُ اللّاتي نَجَحْنَ فِي الاِمْتِحانِ سَعيداتٌ.The students who passed the exam are happy.
عِنْدي صَديقٌ يَعْمَلُ فِي البَنْكِ.I have a friend who works at the bank.
قَرَأْتُ مَقالًا كَتَبَهُ صَحَفِيٌّ مِصْرِيٌّ.I read an article written by an Egyptian journalist.
المَدينَةُ الَّتي زُرْناها فِي الصَّيْفِ جَميلَةٌ.The city we visited in the summer is beautiful.
هٰذِهِ سَيّارَتي الَّتي اِشْتَرَيْتُها فِي العامِ الماضي.This is my car, which I bought last year.

Common mistakes

  • رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا. -> رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا يَعْمَلُ هُنا. - the headline error. An indefinite head takes no مَوْصول at all; the clause simply follows, like an adjective.
  • الرَّجُلُ يَعْمَلُ هُنا صَديقي. (meaning “the man who works here is my friend”) -> الرَّجُلُ الَّذي يَعْمَلُ هُنا صَديقي. - the mirror error. Without الَّذي a definite head plus a clause is read as a حال, “the man, while working here…”, and the sentence falls apart.
  • الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُ مُفيدٌ. -> الكِتابُ الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ مُفيدٌ. - the عائِد is obligatory. English drops “it”, modern Arabic keeps it: “the book which I read it”.
  • الرَّجُلُ الَّذي تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَ. -> الرَّجُلُ الَّذي تَكَلَّمْتُ مَعَهُ. - an Arabic preposition cannot be stranded. Whatever English leaves at the end, Arabic writes with a pronoun glued to it.
  • البَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ كَبيرٌ. -> البَيْتُ الَّذي أَسْكُنُ فيهِ كَبيرٌ. - here the whole preposition went missing. سَكَنَ normally reaches its place through في, and the عائِد rides on it.
  • الكُتُبُ الَّذينَ اِشْتَرَيْتُهُمْ. -> الكُتُبُ الَّتي اِشْتَرَيْتُها. - a non-human plural is feminine singular for every kind of agreement (lesson 11), so both the مَوْصول and the عائِد go to the ـها form.
  • الطّالِباتُ الَّذينَ نَجَحْنَ. -> الطّالِباتُ اللّاتي نَجَحْنَ. - الَّذينَ is masculine. A group of women takes اللّاتي (or اللَّواتي).
  • الطّالِبانِ الَّذينَ نَجَحا. -> الطّالِبانِ اللَّذانِ نَجَحا. - the dual has its own form, and it is not the plural one.
  • سَأَلْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ اللَّذانِ نَجَحا. -> سَأَلْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ اللَّذَيْنِ نَجَحا. - the dual is the only مَوْصول that declines: اللَّذانِ goes with a مَرْفوع head, اللَّذَيْنِ with a مَنْصوب or مَجْرور one.
  • اللَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ -> الَّذي قَرَأْتُهُ - a spelling slip worth naming: the singular and الَّذينَ are written with one ل, the duals and اللّاتي with two.
  • المَرْأَةُ الَّذي تَعيشُ فِي القاهِرَةِ. -> المَرْأَةُ الَّتي تَعيشُ فِي القاهِرَةِ. - the مَوْصول copies the head’s gender, exactly as an adjective does.

Tips

  • Before you write anything, ask one question: does the head carry الـ, a possessive suffix, or a name? Yes → مَوْصول. No → nothing. That single check removes the commonest error.
  • Reuse the reflex from lesson 8. الَّذي is a definite word, and definiteness has to match; a clause after a noun is just a longer adjective.
  • Then ask the second question: what job does the head do inside its own clause? If it is not the subject, you owe the clause a pronoun.
  • Translate English “the man I spoke to” by moving the stranded preposition inside and giving it a pronoun - مَعَهُ، عَنْهُ، فيهِ، عَلَيْها. Collect these tails as whole words.
  • For anything non-human and plural, one switch flips everything: الَّتي plus ـها. Books, cities, cars, ideas - all of them.
  • Say each new sentence back to yourself in literal English (“the book which I read it”). If the literal version has no extra pronoun in it, the Arabic is probably incomplete.
  • Copy the six forms out by hand once, with their shaddas and their one-or-two ل. The shape is the only part that has to be memorized; the usage is a two-question rule.
  • Ignore مَنْ and ما for now. Every relative clause you build at this level hangs on a noun that is actually written.

B1 40 / 70

The case system: irab and its markers

الإِعْرابُ وعَلاماتُهُ الأَصْلِيَّةُ والفَرْعِيَّة

In short

Every Arabic noun and every imperfect verb carries a small ending that announces its job in the sentence. الْمُدَرِّسُ with a ḍamma is the one doing something; الْمُدَرِّسَ with a fatḥa is the one something is done to; الْمُدَرِّسِ with a kasra sits after a preposition or after a possessed noun. You have been meeting these endings one at a time since lesson 2 - a مُبْتَدَأ here, a مَفْعول بِهِ there. This lesson puts the whole system on one page and names it: الإِعْرابُ.

Two things make it more than a table of three vowels. First, a handful of word classes refuse those vowels and use a letter instead - a و، ا، ي or a ن you can hear across a room, or in one famous case a kasra where you expected a fatḥa. Those substitutes are الْعَلاماتُ الْفَرْعِيَّةُ, and they are where learners lose marks. Second, the imperfect verb plays the same game with a fourth state of its own, الْجَزْم. Learn to read all of it here; how much of it you will ever hear is the last thing this lesson tells you.

The rule

1. What إِعْراب actually is. A word’s ending is not chosen by the word. It is imposed by whatever governs it - the sentence position, the preceding particle, the preceding verb. Arabic calls the four resulting states الرَّفْعُ، النَّصْبُ، الجَرُّ، الجَزْمُ, and calls the vowel or letter that shows the state الْعَلامَة, “the marker”. Nouns take the first three and never the fourth; imperfect verbs take the first, the second and the fourth, and never الجَرّ. One line holds the division in place: الجَرُّ لِلْأَسْماءِ والجَزْمُ لِلْأَفْعالِ.

The English names work as labels - مَرْفوع = nominative, مَنْصوب = accusative, مَجْرور = genitive, مَجْزوم = jussive - but as labels only: Arabic’s مَنْصوب covers the direct object, the adverbial, the خَبَر of كانَ and much else besides.

2. The default markers, on an ordinary singular noun. For the great majority of nouns the marker is the vowel you expect: ḍamma for الرَّفْع, fatḥa for النَّصْب, kasra for الجَرّ. Indefinite, that vowel is doubled into tanwīn - مُدَرِّسٌ، مُدَرِّسًا، مُدَرِّسٍ. Definite, whether by الـ or by being the first term of an إِضافَة, it collapses to a single vowel - الْمُدَرِّسُ، الْمُدَرِّسَ، الْمُدَرِّسِ and مُدَرِّسُ الْمَدْرَسَةِ. Tanwīn can share a word neither with الـ nor with a following مُضاف إِلَيْهِ.

3. What puts a noun in each state. Each item on this short list is a lesson you already have. مَرْفوع: المُبْتَدَأ and الخَبَر (lesson 2), and الفاعِل, the doer of a verb (lesson 19). مَنْصوب: المَفْعولُ بِهِ (lesson 29), the adverbial of time or place (lesson 31), خَبَرُ كانَ (lesson 32). مَجْرور: after any حَرْف جَرّ (lesson 16), and as the second term of an إِضافَة (lesson 20).

4. Writing the accusative: the alif that is spelling, not sound. Indefinite النَّصْب adds a written alif after the noun: كِتابٌ → كِتابًا، بَيْتٌ → بَيْتًا، دَرْسٌ → دَرْسًا. Print the fatḥatān over the letter before that alif. It has no sound of its own in connected speech; it is there so the eye can see the accusative in an unvocalized text - and, as point 10 explains, it is what you hear when the speaker stops.

Two classes of word take no alif here (a third, the اسْم مَقْصور, is lesson 41). A noun ending in ة simply switches the tanwīn: مَدْرَسَةٌ → مَدْرَسَةً، سَيّارَةٌ → سَيّارَةً. Nor does a noun ending in ء that already sits on a long ā: سَماءٌ → سَماءً، ماءٌ → ماءً، مَساءٌ → مَساءً. Where the hamza is not preceded by that alif, the written alif comes back: شَيْءٌ → شَيْئًا.

5. الْعَلاماتُ الْفَرْعِيَّةُ: four classes that use something else. These are the exceptions worth memorising, because they are visible and audible where ordinary endings are neither.

  • الأَسْماءُ الخَمْسَةُ - five nouns (أَبٌ، أَخٌ، حَمٌ، فو، ذو) which, when they are singular and the first term of an إِضافَة to anything but ـي, show their case with a long vowel letter: و for الرَّفْع، ا for النَّصْب، ي for الجَرّ. جاءَ أَبو الطّالِبِ - رَأَيْتُ أَبا الطّالِبِ
    • سَلَّمْتُ عَلى أَبي الطّالِبِ. Standing alone they are perfectly ordinary: أَبٌ، أَبًا، أَبٍ, and with “my” they freeze - أَبي is “my father” in all three cases. In modern prose you will really only meet أَب، أَخ and ذو.
  • المُثَنّى - the dual (lesson 12) has two forms for three cases: ـانِ for الرَّفْع، ـيْنِ for both النَّصْب and الجَرّ. الطّالِبانِ نَجَحا - رَأَيْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ - مَعَ الطّالِبَيْنِ. The ن of the dual always carries a kasra.
  • جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِمُ - the sound masculine plural (lesson 9) does the same with ـونَ and ـينَ, and here the ن always carries a fatḥa: الْمُدَرِّسونَ حاضِرونَ - سَأَلْتُ الْمُدَرِّسينَ.
  • جَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السّالِمُ - the sound feminine plural keeps a vowel but borrows the wrong one: its accusative takes a kasra, never a fatḥa. الْمُعَلِّماتُ حاضِراتٌ - رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّماتِ - مَعَ الْمُعَلِّماتِ. Indefinite, the same: رَأَيْتُ مُعَلِّماتٍ, kasratān and no alif. This is the most-corrected error at B1: the ear wants a fatḥa on an object, and this ending refuses to give one.

6. The verb’s three states. Of the verbs, only the imperfect, المُضارِع, is مُعْرَب - and even it freezes in the two cells that end in نون النِّسْوَة (point 7). Its default is المَرْفوع, with a ḍamma - يَكْتُبُ. A subjunctive particle (lesson 33) swaps that for a fatḥa - لَنْ يَكْتُبَ. A jussive particle (lesson 35) swaps it for a sukūn - لَمْ يَكْتُبْ. So الجَزْم is simply “no vowel at all”, the fourth state and the one nouns never see.

7. The verb’s own فَرْعِيّ markers: two deletions. Where a verb cannot show a vowel, it shows the state by dropping something.

  • حَذْفُ النّونِ. الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ - the five cells ending in ن (تَكْتُبينَ، تَكْتُبانِ، يَكْتُبانِ، تَكْتُبونَ، يَكْتُبونَ) - are مَرْفوع with that ن and lose it in both المَنْصوب and المَجْزوم: يَكْتُبونَ → لَنْ يَكْتُبوا، لَمْ يَكْتُبوا. The silent alif after ـوا is compulsory spelling.
  • حَذْفُ حَرْفِ الْعِلَّةِ. A verb whose last letter is و، ا or ي (lesson 51) has nowhere to put a sukūn, so المَجْزوم amputates that letter: يَمْشي → لَمْ يَمْشِ، يَدْعو → لَمْ يَدْعُ، يَنْسى → لَمْ يَنْسَ. The short vowel left behind is the trace of the missing letter, and the whole visible difference between “he walks” and “he did not walk”.

And two cells move for nobody: يَكْتُبْنَ and تَكْتُبْنَ are مَبْنِيّ, identical in all three states, because their ن is the subject pronoun and not a marker.

8. المَبْنِيُّ: the words that never change. A large part of the language is exempt. مَبْنِيّ means “built, fixed” - one shape, kept whatever the word’s job. The main groups: the pronouns (أَنا، هُوَ، هُمْ، and the attached ـهُ، ـكَ، ـي), the demonstratives (هٰذا، هٰذِهِ، ذٰلِكَ، أُولٰئِكَ), the relatives (الَّذي، الَّتي، الَّذينَ), the past tense (كَتَبَ، كَتَبْتُ، كَتَبوا), the imperative (اُكْتُبْ، اِجْلِسْ), and most question words (مَنْ، ما، كَيْفَ، مَتى). The duals are the exception inside the exception: هٰذانِ / هٰذَيْنِ and اللَّذانِ / اللَّذَيْنِ do inflect, exactly like المُثَنّى.

9. مَحَلُّ الإِعْرابِ, in one paragraph. A مَبْنِيّ word still has a job, so grammarians say it is in the position of a case: فِي مَحَلِّ رَفْعٍ، فِي مَحَلِّ نَصْبٍ، فِي مَحَلِّ جَرٍّ. In قَرَأْتُ هٰذا الْكِتابَ the object is هٰذا - frozen in shape, but فِي مَحَلِّ نَصْبٍ, with the following الْكِتابَ showing the fatḥa on its behalf. In بَيْتُهُ the ـهُ is فِي مَحَلِّ جَرٍّ, and whole clauses get the same treatment. You never have to produce this vocabulary, but it explains why an Arabic grammar will call a word “accusative” when it visibly has no fatḥa on it.

10. Almost none of this is audible. In الْوَقْف - stopping at the end of a phrase - Arabic drops the final short vowel and the tanwīn, as the pronunciation guide sets out. الْمُدَرِّسُ، الْمُدَرِّسَ and الْمُدَرِّسِ are all pronounced الْمُدَرِّسْ; لَنْ يَكْتُبَ and لَمْ يَكْتُبْ come out the same. The one survivor is the indefinite accusative, whose alif is read as a long ā: رَأَيْتُ كِتابًا ends in . So the vowel markers are heard only where nothing is dropped - careful reading aloud, a newsreader’s delivery, formal speeches, recitation - and inside a phrase that runs on.

The letter markers are a different story. ـونَ against ـينَ، ـانِ against ـيْنِ، أَبو against أَبا against أَبي، and a missing ن are consonantal: they cannot be dropped, and they are heard whenever anyone speaks فُصْحى at all. Hence the practical rank order of this lesson - the فَرْعِيّ markers you need for speech, the أَصْلِيّ ones for writing and reading aloud.

11. Left to the next lesson. المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ refuses tanwīn and takes a fatḥa instead of a kasra in الجَرّ, and الاسْمُ المَقْصورُ (مُسْتَشْفى) and المَنْقوصُ (القاضي) hide their endings inside a final long vowel. All of that is lesson 41.

Forms & patterns

The four states and their default markers:

الحالَةالعَلامَةُ الأَصْلِيَّةاِسْمفِعْل مُضارِع
الرَّفْعالضَّمَّةالْمُدَرِّسُيَكْتُبُ
النَّصْبالفَتْحَةالْمُدَرِّسَيَكْتُبَ
الجَرّالكَسْرَةالْمُدَرِّسِ- (لا يوجَدُ)
الجَزْمالسُّكون- (لا يوجَدُ)يَكْتُبْ

An ordinary indefinite noun:

الحالَةالشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
مَرْفوعمُدَرِّسٌجاءَ مُدَرِّسٌ جَديدٌa new teacher came
مَنْصوبمُدَرِّسًارَأَيْتُ مُدَرِّسًا جَديدًاI saw a new teacher
مَجْرورمُدَرِّسٍتَحَدَّثْتُ مَعَ مُدَرِّسٍ جَديدٍI spoke with a new teacher

The same noun made definite - one vowel instead of tanwīn:

الحالَةالشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
مَرْفوعالْمُدَرِّسُجاءَ الْمُدَرِّسُthe teacher came
مَنْصوبالْمُدَرِّسَرَأَيْتُ الْمُدَرِّسَI saw the teacher
مَجْرورالْمُدَرِّسِمَعَ الْمُدَرِّسِwith the teacher

الْعَلاماتُ الْفَرْعِيَّةُ, all four classes in one grid:

النَّوْعمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْرورالعَلامَة
الأَسْماءُ الخَمْسَةأَبو الطّالِبِأَبا الطّالِبِأَبي الطّالِبِو / ا / ي
المُثَنّىالطّالِبانِالطّالِبَيْنِالطّالِبَيْنِـانِ / ـيْنِ
جَمْعُ المُذَكَّرِ السّالِمالْمُدَرِّسونَالْمُدَرِّسينَالْمُدَرِّسينَـونَ / ـينَ
جَمْعُ المُؤَنَّثِ السّالِمالْمُعَلِّماتُالْمُعَلِّماتِالْمُعَلِّماتِكَسْرَة مَكانَ الفَتْحَة

The written alif of the indefinite accusative:

الاسْممَنْصوبلِماذا
كِتابٌكِتابًاordinary final consonant - the alif is written
شَيْءٌشَيْئًاhamza not preceded by a long ā - the alif is written
مَدْرَسَةٌمَدْرَسَةًends in ة - no alif
سَيّارَةٌسَيّارَةًends in ة - no alif
سَماءٌسَماءًhamza after a long ā - no alif

The imperfect verb across its three states - the sound verb first, then the cells that drop a ن, then the weak-final verbs that drop a letter. The duals of the weak verbs are left out; they behave like the plurals.

الضَّميرمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْزومالعَلامَة
هُوَيَكْتُبُيَكْتُبَيَكْتُبْضَمَّة / فَتْحَة / سُكون
أَنْتِتَكْتُبينَتَكْتُبيتَكْتُبيحَذْفُ النّون
هُمايَكْتُبانِيَكْتُبايَكْتُباحَذْفُ النّون
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبونَتَكْتُبواتَكْتُبواحَذْفُ النّون
هُمْيَكْتُبونَيَكْتُبوايَكْتُبواحَذْفُ النّون
هُنَّيَكْتُبْنَيَكْتُبْنَيَكْتُبْنَمَبْنِيّ - لا يَتَغَيَّرُ
الفِعْلمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْزومالعَلامَة
مَشىيَمْشييَمْشِيَيَمْشِحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة
دَعايَدْعويَدْعُوَيَدْعُحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة
نَسِيَيَنْسىيَنْسىيَنْسَحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّة

Words that sit outside the system altogether:

النَّوْعأَمْثِلَةمُلاحَظَة
الضَّمائِرأَنا، هُوَ، هُمْ، ـهُ، ـكَمَبْنِيَّة دائِمًا
أَسْماءُ الإِشارَةهٰذا، هٰذِهِ، ذٰلِكَ، أُولٰئِكَمَبْنِيَّة - عَدا هٰذانِ / هٰذَيْنِ
الأَسْماءُ المَوْصولَةالَّذي، الَّتي، الَّذينَمَبْنِيَّة - عَدا اللَّذانِ / اللَّذَيْنِ
الفِعْلُ الماضي وفِعْلُ الأَمْركَتَبَ، كَتَبْتُ، اُكْتُبْمَبْنِيّ دائِمًا
أَدَواتُ الاسْتِفْهاممَنْ، ما، كَيْفَ، مَتىمَبْنِيَّة

Examples

العربيةEnglish
وَصَلَ الْمُدَرِّسُ إِلَى الْمَدْرَسَةِ مُبَكِّرًا.The teacher arrived at the school early.
سَأَلْتُ الْمُدَرِّسَ عَنْ واجِبِ الْيَوْمِ.I asked the teacher about today’s homework.
جَلَسْتُ مَعَ الْمُدَرِّسِ فِي الْمَكْتَبِ.I sat with the teacher in the office.
قَرَأْتُ كِتابًا طَويلًا فِي اللَّيْلِ.I read a long book at night.
زُرْنا مَدْرَسَةً قَديمَةً فِي وَسَطِ الْمَدينَةِ.We visited an old school in the city centre.
رَأَيْنا سَماءً صافِيَةً بَعْدَ الْمَطَرِ.We saw a clear sky after the rain.
جاءَ أَبو الطّالِبِ إِلَى الْمَدْرَسَةِ.The student’s father came to the school.
شَكَرْتُ أَبا الطّالِبِ عَلى مُساعَدَتِهِ.I thanked the student’s father for his help.
تَحَدَّثْتُ إِلى أَخي صَديقي أَمْسِ.I spoke to my friend’s brother yesterday.
قابَلْتُ الطّالِبَيْنِ بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.I met the two students after the lesson.
يَعْمَلُ الْمُهَنْدِسونَ فِي الشَّرِكَةِ الْجَديدَةِ.The engineers work at the new company.
رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّماتِ فِي ساحَةِ الْمَدْرَسَةِ.I saw the (female) teachers in the school courtyard.
لَمْ يَكْتُبْ أَحْمَدُ واجِبَهُ أَمْسِ.Ahmad did not write his homework yesterday.
لَمْ يَمْشِ الْمَريضُ فِي الْحَديقَةِ الْيَوْمَ.The patient did not walk in the garden today.

Common mistakes

  • رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّماتَ -> رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّماتِ - the sound feminine plural has no fatḥa at all. Its accusative borrows the genitive’s kasra, and looks identical to it.
  • سَأَلْتُ الْمُدَرِّسونَ -> سَأَلْتُ الْمُدَرِّسينَ - ـونَ marks الرَّفْع only. An object, and anything after a preposition, takes ـينَ.
  • مَعَ الطّالِبانِ -> مَعَ الطّالِبَيْنِ - the dual works the same way: ـانِ for the subject, ـيْنِ everywhere else, with a kasra on the ن.
  • رَأَيْتُ أَبو الطّالِبِ -> رَأَيْتُ أَبا الطّالِبِ - one of الأَسْماء الخَمْسَة, so its accusative is the letter ا, not a fatḥa on a ب.
  • قَرَأْتُ كِتابٍ -> قَرَأْتُ كِتابًا - a direct object is مَنْصوب. The kasratān belongs after a preposition or in an إِضافَة, not after a transitive verb.
  • زُرْنا مَدْرَسَةاً -> زُرْنا مَدْرَسَةً - a noun ending in ة takes no written alif, and neither does سَماءً after its long ā. Adding one is a spelling error, not a variant.
  • لَمْ يَكْتُبُ -> لَمْ يَكْتُبْ - لَمْ demands الجَزْم, and the marker of الجَزْم is the absence of a vowel.
  • لَمْ يَكْتُبونَ -> لَمْ يَكْتُبوا - one of الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة: الجَزْم removes the ن, and the silent alif is written in its place.
  • لَمْ يَمْشي -> لَمْ يَمْشِ - a weak-final verb marks الجَزْم by deleting its last letter, leaving only the kasra that used to support it.
  • كَتَبُ الطّالِبُ الدَّرْسَ -> كَتَبَ الطّالِبُ الدَّرْسَ - the past tense is مَبْنِيّ. Its fatḥa is fixed and has nothing to do with case; it never turns into a ḍamma.

Tips

  • Learn the system as two lists, not one: the three plain vowels for ordinary nouns, and the four فَرْعِيّ classes. Almost every ending you will ever write is in one list or the other.
  • Drill the four فَرْعِيّ classes out loud in triplets - أَبو أَبا أَبي، الطّالِبانِ الطّالِبَيْنِ الطّالِبَيْنِ، الْمُدَرِّسونَ الْمُدَرِّسينَ الْمُدَرِّسينَ. They are consonants, so they survive into real speech and repay the effort immediately.
  • Keep one sentence permanently in your head as the antidote to the commonest error in this lesson: رَأَيْتُ الْمُعَلِّماتِ. Kasra on an object, and it is correct.
  • Use the memory line الجَرُّ لِلْأَسْماءِ والجَزْمُ لِلْأَفْعالِ whenever you are unsure which of the four states a word can even be in.
  • Do not hunt for case endings in an ordinary unvocalized newspaper - they are not printed. Look instead for what is spelled: the alif of ـًا, the ـونَ / ـينَ pair, a missing ن.
  • Practise by reading a vocalized text aloud without stopping between words. Running the phrase on is the only situation that forces you to pronounce these endings.
  • Ignore, for now, formal إِعْراب parsing - the exercise where you label every word مَرْفوعٌ وعَلامَةُ رَفْعِهِ كَذا. It is a school tradition, not a route to fluency.

B1 41 / 70

Diptotes and other declension classes

المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ والاسْمُ المَقْصورُ والمَنْقوصُ والمَمْدود

In short

Lesson 40 gave you the standard machine: ـٌ in the nominative, ـً in the accusative, ـٍ in the genitive, with the tanwīn disappearing as soon as الـ arrives. A large and entirely ordinary set of nouns does not obey that machine. Some refuse tanwīn altogether and answer the genitive with a fatḥa: مَساجِدُ، أَحْمَدُ، صَحْراءُ. Others end in a long vowel that cannot carry a case mark at all, so the three cases look identical: فَتًى، مُسْتَشْفًى. A third group drops its final ي while indefinite and grows it back in the accusative: قاضٍ، قاضِيًا.

None of this is rare vocabulary. مَدارِس، مَفاتيح، مُسْتَشْفى، مُحامٍ، أَصْدِقاء، أَحْمَر are words you have been using since A1, and every one of them is irregular in precisely the way described here. Each class has one short rule, and naming them is most of the work: once you can see them coming, the classic errors - فِي مَدارِسٍ، إِلى لَنْدَنِ، مُحامي - stop happening.

The rule

1. المَمْنوعُ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ means “barred from tanwīn”. الصَّرْف here is the tanwīn itself, so the name says exactly what happens: the noun never takes ـٌ ـً ـٍ. And because it has lost the tanwīn, it also loses one of its three endings. Instead of ḍamma / fatḥa / kasra it has only two vowels: a ḍamma for the nominative, and a fatḥa for both the accusative and the genitive.

جاءَ أَحْمَدُ (nominative) - رَأَيْتُ أَحْمَدَ (accusative) - سَلَّمْتُ عَلى أَحْمَدَ (genitive). Not عَلى أَحْمَدٍ, not عَلى أَحْمَدِ.

2. The fatḥa in the genitive is the whole difficulty. This is one of the عَلاماتٌ فَرْعِيَّةٌ you met in lesson 40: a substitute mark standing in for the expected one. The preposition still puts the noun in the genitive; the genitive simply shows up wearing a fatḥa. Learners rarely get the nominative or the accusative wrong here, because those look normal. They get the genitive wrong, because everything they have learnt says “after a preposition, kasra”. Say the phrase سافَرْتُ إِلى لَنْدَنَ out loud twenty times until the fatḥa after إِلى stops feeling like a mistake.

Watch what happens to an accompanying adjective, which is usually an ordinary noun and keeps its normal ending: دَرَسَتْ فِي مَدارِسَ كَبيرَةٍ. The noun takes the fatḥa without tanwīn, the adjective takes the kasra with tanwīn - side by side in the same phrase, both correct.

3. The reversal almost everyone misses: الـ and إِضافَة give the kasra back. A diptote is only “defective” while it stands alone and indefinite. Attach the article, or make it the first term of an إِضافَة, and the genitive returns to a plain kasra:

  • فِي مَدارِسَ كَبيرَةٍ - indefinite, alone → fatḥa.
  • فِي المَدارِسِ الكَبيرَةِ - definite with الـ → kasra.
  • فِي مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ - first term of an إِضافَة → kasra.

The tanwīn never comes back - الـ and an إِضافَة exclude tanwīn anyway (lessons 4 and 24), so there is nothing to restore. Only the vowel changes. A useful way to hold it: the ban on tanwīn is permanent, the fatḥa-for-kasra swap is temporary, and it switches off the moment the word becomes definite.

4. The categories. There are seven you actually need. They are listed in the table below with one example each; here is what to notice about them.

أَعْلامٌ أَعْجَمِيَّةٌ - foreign proper names: إِبْراهيمُ، يوسُفُ، باريسُ، لَنْدَنُ، بَرْلينُ. مُؤَنَّثٌ - feminine proper names, whether or not they end in ة: فاطِمَةُ، زَيْنَبُ، سُعادُ، مَكَّةُ. وَزْنُ أَفْعَلَ - the pattern itself, whichever job it is doing: the name أَحْمَدُ, the elative أَكْبَرُ of lesson 28, the colour adjective أَحْمَرُ. الأَلِفُ والنّونُ الزّائِدَتانِ - words ending in ـانُ: the name عُثْمانُ, the adjective عَطْشانُ. وَزْنُ فُعَلَ - a small closed set of names: عُمَرُ، زُحَلُ، قُزَحُ. صيغَةُ مُنْتَهَى الجُموعِ - the broken-plural shape مَفاعِلُ / مَفاعيلُ: مَساجِدُ، مَكاتِبُ، تَجارِبُ، مَفاتيحُ، عَصافيرُ، مَصابيحُ. أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَمْدودَةُ - the ending ـاءُ used as a feminine marker: صَحْراءُ، حَمْراءُ، أَصْدِقاءُ، أَطِبّاءُ.

By far the most frequent of these in running text is مُنْتَهَى الجُموع, because it covers hundreds of everyday plurals. Recognise it by shape rather than by memorising members: a broken plural with an alif followed by two letters (مَساجِدُ، دَراهِمُ) or by three with a long vowel in the middle (مَفاتيحُ، قَناديلُ) is a diptote. How those plurals are built is lesson 10; how they decline is here.

5. The near-misses. Three traps sit next to the categories above.

  • A three-letter foreign name with a sukūn in the middle is not a diptote: نوحٌ، لوطٌ decline normally. So does the feminine name هِنْدٌ, where both treatments are permitted and the tanwīn is the ordinary choice.
  • An adjective in ـانُ is a diptote only when its feminine is فَعْلى: عَطْشانُ / عَطْشى. Where the feminine is فَعْلانَةٌ, the word is regular: نَدْمانٌ / نَدْمانَةٌ. A name in ـانُ - عُثْمانُ، مَرْوانُ - is a diptote whatever its feminine would be, because being a name is already half the reason.
  • The same split runs through أَفْعَلُ. An adjective on that pattern is a diptote only when its feminine is فَعْلاءُ or فُعْلى: أَحْمَرُ / حَمْراءُ, أَكْبَرُ / كُبْرى. أَرْمَلٌ, whose feminine is أَرْمَلَةٌ, is an ordinary noun and takes tanwīn. The name أَحْمَدُ, by contrast, is a diptote in any event.

6. الاسْمُ المَقْصورُ: an ending you cannot hear. A مَقْصور noun ends in a fixed alif, written ى or ا: فَتًى، مُسْتَشْفًى، مَقْهًى، مَعْنًى، عَصًا، هُدًى، ذِكْرى، كُبْرى. That alif cannot carry a vowel, so the case ending is مُقَدَّر - assumed, not written. The consequence is the friendliest rule in Arabic grammar: the word never changes.

هٰذا مُسْتَشْفًى كَبيرٌ - دَخَلْتُ مُسْتَشْفًى كَبيرًا - عَمِلْتُ في مُسْتَشْفًى كَبيرٍ. One shape in all three cases. Only the adjective moves, and it moves normally.

Indefinite, the tanwīn is written on the letter before the alif, and it is always the tanwīn fatḥ: فَتًى، مُسْتَشْفًى، مَقْهًى. Definite, nothing at all is written: الفَتى، المُسْتَشْفى، المَقْهى. Two words in the list above never take that tanwīn at all: in ذِكْرى and كُبْرى the alif is the feminine ending أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَقْصورَةُ, which makes them diptotes as well as مَقْصور.

7. الاسْمُ المَنْقوصُ: the ي that comes and goes. A مَنْقوص noun ends in an unstressed ي after a kasra: القاضي، المُحامي، الوادي، النّادي، المُشْتَري، الماضي. Definite, the ي stays and the case ending is again مُقَدَّر in the nominative and the genitive, but visible in the accusative:

حَضَرَ القاضي - رَأَيْتُ القاضِيَ - ذَهَبْتُ إِلَى القاضي.

Indefinite, something more dramatic happens. In the nominative and the genitive the ي drops out of the written word and its place is taken by a tanwīn kasr on the letter before it: قاضٍ، مُحامٍ، وادٍ، نادٍ. In the accusative the ي returns and takes an ordinary tanwīn fatḥ: قاضِيًا، مُحامِيًا، وادِيًا. So the indefinite مَنْقوص has two shapes, and the odd-looking short one covers two cases out of three.

As first term of an إِضافَة the ي is kept and no tanwīn appears: قاضي المَدينَةِ، مُحامي الشَّرِكَةِ.

8. الاسْمُ المَمْدودُ: usually nothing special. A مَمْدود noun ends in a hamza after a long alif: بِناءٌ، سَماءٌ، دَواءٌ، شِتاءٌ. The hamza is a consonant, it holds a vowel perfectly well, and these nouns decline exactly like كِتابٌ: بِناءٌ / بِناءً / بِناءٍ. Say the whole set aloud once and you are done.

The one thing to check is why the word ends in اء. If the hamza is the feminine marker - أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَمْدودَةُ - the noun is a diptote, which is category seven above: صَحْراءُ، حَمْراءُ، أَصْدِقاءُ، أَطِبّاءُ، أَصْفِياءُ. If it is not (سَماءٌ from the root س م و, بِناءٌ from ب ن ي, دَواءٌ from د و ي), the noun is ordinary. Two words that look identical in shape can therefore behave differently: فِي صَحْراءَ واسِعَةٍ but فِي سَماءٍ صافِيَةٍ.

9. What this lesson leaves alone. How broken plurals are formed - which noun gives مَفاتيح and which gives كُتُب - is lesson 10; only their declension is treated here. The basic case system, the names of the cases and the standard endings are lesson 40 and are assumed. The dual and the sound masculine plural, which also use substitute markers, belong to lesson 40 as well. And the rarest corners of the diptote list - compound place names of the type حَضْرَمَوْتُ, and the licence poetry takes to add tanwīn to a diptote for the metre - are not part of the modern standard you need.

Forms & patterns

The two-ending declension, with the الـ and إِضافَة reversal in the last two columns. Read the bottom row across - that is the entire lesson in one line:

الحالَةكِتاب (مُنْصَرِف)مَساجِد (نَكِرَة)المَساجِدمَساجِد + مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ
مَرْفوعكِتابٌمَساجِدُالمَساجِدُمَساجِدُ المَدينَةِ
مَنْصوبكِتابًامَساجِدَالمَساجِدَمَساجِدَ المَدينَةِ
مَجْروركِتابٍمَساجِدَالمَساجِدِمَساجِدِ المَدينَةِ

The seven categories, one example each, shown in the genitive because that is where they betray themselves:

الصِّنْفمِثالفي الجَرّEnglish
عَلَمٌ أَعْجَمِيّإِبْراهيمُ، باريسُمِنْ إِبْراهيمَ، إِلى باريسَforeign proper names
عَلَمٌ مُؤَنَّثفاطِمَةُ، زَيْنَبُعَنْ فاطِمَةَ، مَعَ زَيْنَبَfeminine proper names
عَلى وَزْنِ أَفْعَلأَحْمَدُ، أَكْبَرُ، أَحْمَرُإِلى أَحْمَدَ، في مَكْتَبٍ أَكْبَرَthe pattern أَفْعَل
مَخْتومٌ بِـ ـانعُثْمانُ، عَطْشانُعِنْدَ عُثْمانَ، لِرَجُلٍ عَطْشانَnames and adjectives in ـان
عَلى وَزْنِ فُعَلعُمَرُ، زُحَلُمِنْ عُمَرَ، عَنْ زُحَلَa closed set of names
صيغَةُ مُنْتَهَى الجُموعمَساجِدُ، مَفاتيحُفي مَساجِدَ، بِمَفاتيحَbroken plurals مَفاعِل / مَفاعيل
أَلِفُ التَّأْنيثِ المَمْدودَةصَحْراءُ، أَصْدِقاءُفي صَحْراءَ، مَعَ أَصْدِقاءَthe feminine ending ـاء

The three “hidden ending” classes. In the مَقْصور and مَنْقوص rows the bolded cells are the only ones where anything visibly moves; the two مَمْدود rows at the bottom decline in plain sight:

النَّوْعمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْرور
مَقْصور، نَكِرَةفَتًىفَتًىفَتًى
مَقْصور، مَعْرِفَةالفَتىالفَتىالفَتى
مَقْصور، نَكِرَةمُسْتَشْفًىمُسْتَشْفًىمُسْتَشْفًى
مَنْقوص، نَكِرَةقاضٍقاضِيًاقاضٍ
مَنْقوص، مَعْرِفَةالقاضيالقاضِيَالقاضي
مَمْدود، مُنْصَرِفبِناءٌبِناءًبِناءٍ
مَمْدود، مَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْفصَحْراءُصَحْراءَصَحْراءَ

Words that look like diptotes and are not. Each takes full tanwīn:

الكَلِمَةلِماذا تُنَوَّنُمِثال
نوحٌعَلَمٌ أَعْجَمِيٌّ ثُلاثِيٌّ ساكِنُ الوَسَطِقِصَّةُ نوحٍ
هِنْدٌعَلَمٌ مُؤَنَّثٌ ثُلاثِيٌّ ساكِنُ الوَسَطِذَهَبْتُ مَعَ هِنْدٍ
نَدْمانٌمُؤَنَّثُهُ نَدْمانَةٌ لا نَدْمىرَجُلٌ نَدْمانٌ
أَرْمَلٌمُؤَنَّثُهُ أَرْمَلَةٌ لا رَمْلاءُلِرَجُلٍ أَرْمَلٍ
سَماءٌهَمْزَتُها لَيْسَتْ لِلتَّأْنيثِفي سَماءٍ صافِيَةٍ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
سافَرَتْ أُخْتي إِلى لَنْدَنَ في الشَّهْرِ الماضي.My sister travelled to London last month.
وَصَلَ إِبْراهيمُ مِنْ باريسَ صَباحَ اليَوْمِ.Ibrahim arrived from Paris this morning.
دَرَسَتْ نَجْوى في مَدارِسَ كَثيرَةٍ.Najwa studied at many schools.
المُعَلِّمونَ يَعْمَلونَ في المَدارِسِ الحُكومِيَّةِ.The teachers work in the state schools.
اِجْتَمَعَ الوَزيرُ بِمُديري مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ.The minister met the city’s school principals.
بَحَثْتُ عَنْ مَفاتيحِ السَّيّارَةِ نِصْفَ ساعَةٍ.I looked for the car keys for half an hour.
زُرْنا مَساجِدَ قَديمَةً في دِمَشْقَ.We visited old mosques in Damascus.
خَرَجَتْ مِنْ سَيّارَةٍ حَمْراءَ أَمامَ الفُنْدُقِ.She got out of a red car in front of the hotel.
عاشَتِ القَبيلَةُ في صَحْراءَ واسِعَةٍ.The tribe lived in a wide desert.
نَقَلوا المَريضَ إِلى مُسْتَشْفًى حَديثٍ.They moved the patient to a modern hospital.
شاهَدْتُ فَتًى يَبيعُ الصُّحُفَ عِنْدَ المَحَطَّةِ.I saw a youth selling newspapers by the station.
تَحَدَّثَ مُحامٍ إِلَى الصُّحُفِيّينَ بَعْدَ الجَلْسَةِ.A lawyer spoke to the journalists after the session.
عَيَّنَتِ المَحْكَمَةُ مُحامِيًا لِلْمُتَّهَمِ.The court appointed a lawyer for the accused.
سَأَلْتُ القاضِيَ عَنْ مَوْعِدِ الجَلْسَةِ القادِمَةِ.I asked the judge about the date of the next session.

Common mistakes

  • فِي مَدارِسٍ كَبيرَةٍ -> فِي مَدارِسَ كَبيرَةٍ - مَدارِس is صيغَةُ مُنْتَهَى الجُموعِ, so it refuses tanwīn and shows the genitive with a fatḥa. The adjective keeps its normal kasra tanwīn.
  • إِلى لَنْدَنِ -> إِلى لَنْدَنَ - a foreign proper name is a diptote; the preposition still governs the genitive, but the mark for it is a fatḥa.
  • فِي المَدارِسَ -> فِي المَدارِسِ - the fatḥa is only for the bare indefinite word. Once الـ is attached the ordinary kasra comes back.
  • فِي مَدارِسَ المَدينَةِ -> فِي مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ - the same reversal for an إِضافَة: as first term the noun takes a plain kasra.
  • سَلَّمْتُ عَلى أَحْمَدٍ -> سَلَّمْتُ عَلى أَحْمَدَ - أَحْمَد is on the pattern أَفْعَل. No tanwīn ever, in any case.
  • سَيّارَةٌ حَمْراءٌ -> سَيّارَةٌ حَمْراءُ - the ـاء of حَمْراء is the feminine marker, so the adjective is a diptote even though the noun in front of it is not.
  • مُحامي -> مُحامٍ - an indefinite مَنْقوص loses its ي in the nominative and the genitive; a tanwīn kasr on the preceding letter is all that is left of it.
  • رَأَيْتُ مُحامٍ -> رَأَيْتُ مُحامِيًا - in the accusative the ي comes back and takes a normal tanwīn fatḥ. This is the only case where the indefinite مَنْقوص is written in full.
  • فَتاً -> فَتًى - the مَقْصور is written with ى and the tanwīn sits on the letter before it, not on the alif. The word is identical in all three cases, so there is nothing to add for the accusative either: دَخَلْتُ مُسْتَشْفًا is likewise دَخَلْتُ مُسْتَشْفًى.
  • فِي بِناءَ قَديمٍ -> فِي بِناءٍ قَديمٍ - بِناء is not a diptote. Its hamza is not a feminine ending, so the word declines like any other noun.

Tips

  • Learn the categories as a checklist you run only when the word is indefinite and you are about to say a kasra. That is the single moment where the whole topic matters.
  • The shape test for the commonest class is faster than any list: broken plural, alif, then two letters (مَكاتِبُ) or three with a long vowel between them (مَصابيحُ) → diptote.
  • Proper names are the other half of the everyday load. Run the categories over them: foreign (باريسُ، لَنْدَنُ، إِبْراهيمُ), feminine (فاطِمَةُ، زَيْنَبُ، مَكَّةُ), أَفْعَل (أَحْمَدُ), ـان (عُثْمانُ), فُعَل (عُمَرُ) → diptote. An Arabic masculine name that fits none of them is an ordinary noun and takes tanwīn: مُحَمَّدٌ، خالِدٌ، سَعيدٌ، زَيْدٌ.
  • Say مَعَ أَصْدِقاءَ، فِي صَحْراءَ، إِلى باريسَ as fixed blocks. The fatḥa after a preposition has to become a sound you expect, not a rule you compute.
  • For the مَقْصور, celebrate: فَتًى، مُسْتَشْفًى، مَقْهًى، مَعْنًى never change. Put them in your sentences freely and spend the attention elsewhere.
  • For the مَنْقوص, remember the trade: the ي and the tanwīn kasr are the same thing wearing different clothes. Where one is present the other is absent - قاضٍ / القاضي - and the accusative is the exception that shows both the ي and a tanwīn.
  • In unvocalized text almost all of this is invisible, with two loud exceptions you can actually see while reading: the missing ي of محام / قاض, and the ى of فتى. Those are worth recognising on sight; the rest matters when you write and speak.
  • Ignore the classical fine print for now - diptotes that regain tanwīn in poetry, and plurals that are diptote and مَنْقوص at once (لَيالٍ، أَراضٍ، جَوارٍ). Meet the second group as vocabulary and copy the forms you see.

B1 42 / 70

Quantifiers and longer idafa chains

أَلْفاظُ الكَمِّ والإِضافَةُ المُرَكَّبَة

In short

English quantifies with small function words in front of the noun: “all the students”, “every student”, “most people”, “both men”. Arabic has almost none of these. What it has instead is a handful of ordinary nouns meaning “the totality of”, “a part of”, “the greater part of”, and they take the noun they quantify as the second term of an إِضافَة. كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ is, word for word, “the-totality-of the-students”. That insight makes the whole set predictable: no article on the quantifier, genitive on the noun, and the quantifier alone carrying whatever case the sentence hands it.

The second half of the lesson is what happens when constructs get long. Because quantifiers are themselves first terms, chains of three and four nouns are completely ordinary in writing: كُلُّ طُلّابِ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ. A long chain is not a new construction - it is lesson 20’s rules applied at every joint - but two things now need planning: what each non-final word has to give up, and where an adjective can stand once the chain has closed off the middle.

The rule

1. كُلّ is a noun, and what follows it decides the meaning. Three patterns, three senses; learn them as three separate items, not as one word with a vague meaning:

  • كُلُّ + definite plural = all of: كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ - all the students.
  • كُلُّ + indefinite singular = every, each: كُلُّ طالِبٍ - every student.
  • كُلُّ + definite singular = the whole of: كُلُّ اليَوْمِ - the whole day.

In all three, كُلّ is the مُضاف: it never takes الـ and never takes tanwīn, and the noun after it is مَجْرور. The case on كُلّ itself is free and comes from the sentence: هٰذا كُلُّ ما عِنْدي (subject), قَرَأْتُ كُلَّ الكِتابِ (object), في كُلِّ بَيْتٍ (after a preposition).

One footnote: when the second term is dropped because it is obvious, كُلّ takes a tanwīn to stand in for it - كُلٌّ يَعْمَلُ بِطَريقَتِهِ (each works in his own way). That is the only time you see a tanwīn on this word.

2. Agreement follows the pattern you chose.

  • With كُلُّ طالِبٍ, everything downstream is singular: كُلُّ طالِبٍ يَحْمِلُ بِطاقَتَهُ - every student carries his card. Not يَحْمِلونَ, not بِطاقاتِهِمْ.
  • With كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ, a verb that comes first stays singular, because its فاعِل is كُلُّ: حَضَرَ كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ. When the phrase comes first and the verb follows, Arabic normally goes by sense: كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ حَضَروا.
  • With a non-human plural, lesson 11 still rules: كُلُّ المُدُنِ جَميلَةٌ - feminine singular, whatever the quantifier.

3. The appositive pattern: الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ. The same words can follow the noun instead of preceding it, in a fixed shape: the noun, then كُلّ carrying the same case as the noun, then an attached pronoun agreeing with the noun.

  • الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ نَجَحوا. / رَأَيْتُ الطُّلّابَ كُلَّهُمْ. / تَحَدَّثْتُ مَعَ الطُّلّابِ كُلِّهِمْ.
  • قَرَأْتُ الكُتُبَ كُلَّها. - non-human plural, so the pronoun is ـها.

This is emphasis - formally التَّوْكيد, which lesson 58 names and systematises. Take the pattern now and the label later. جَميعُ works the same way (الطُّلّابُ جَميعُهُمْ), and جَميعًا also exists as a plain adverbial accusative: حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ جَميعًا.

4. The construct family: بَعْضُ، مُعْظَمُ، جَميعُ، أَغْلَبُ. All four behave exactly like كُلّ - bare first term, definite noun in the genitive, no مِنْ needed:

  • بَعْضُ الطُّلّابِ - some of the students; بَعْضُ الوَقْتِ - some of the time.
  • مُعْظَمُ النّاسِ - most people; أَغْلَبُ الشَّرِكاتِ - most companies.
  • جَميعُ المَوادِّ - all the subjects (a more formal كُلّ, with no “every” reading).

Their agreement copies rule 2: each is grammatically a masculine singular noun, so a verb before them is singular (يَعْمَلُ مُعْظَمُ السُّكّانِ في المَصْنَعِ) while a verb after them follows the sense (مُعْظَمُ السُّكّانِ يَعْمَلونَ في المَصْنَعِ), and a non-human plural inside the construct pulls the predicate to the feminine singular: مُعْظَمُ الشَّرِكاتِ صَغيرَةٌ.

5. The مِنْ family: كَثيرٌ مِنَ، قَليلٌ مِنَ، عَدَدٌ مِنَ. In this quantifying sense these are not first terms. They are ordinary indefinite nouns, they keep their tanwīn, and they reach the quantified noun through the preposition مِنْ:

  • كَثيرٌ مِنَ الطُّلّابِ - many of the students.
  • قَليلٌ مِنَ الوَقْتِ - a little of the time.
  • عَدَدٌ مِنَ الزُّوّارِ - a number of the visitors.

Being free nouns, they decline normally, tanwīn and all: رَأَيْتُ عَدَدًا مِنَ الزُّوّارِ. They also take an adjective of their own, right where English puts it - عَدَدٌ كَبيرٌ مِنَ الزُّوّارِ - which the construct family cannot do, because nothing may stand between a quantifier and its noun. Modern prose often puts الـ on the first word instead (الكَثيرُ مِنَ النّاسِ), which is fine; mixing the two families is not. Drop the مِنْ and you get a real construct with a different meaning: عَدَدُ الطُّلّابِ is “the number of the students”, a count, not “some of them”.

6. كِلا and كِلْتا: “both”, and only with a dual. كِلا is for two masculine things, كِلْتا for two feminine things. What follows is either a definite dual in the genitive or a dual pronoun - nothing else:

  • كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ، كِلا الطّالِبَيْنِ / كِلْتا الشَّرِكَتَيْنِ، كِلْتا الطّالِبَتَيْنِ.
  • كِلاهُما / كِلْتاهُما - both of them.

Before a noun, كِلا never changes shape. Its final alif carries the case invisibly, exactly like the مَقْصور nouns of lesson 41: جاءَ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ / رَأَيْتُ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ / مَعَ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ - one form in all three slots. With a pronoun attached it declines like a dual: كِلاهُما in the nominative, كِلَيْهِما in the accusative and genitive (feminine: كِلْتاهُما / كِلْتَيْهِما). The pronoun form is where you will most often meet it, standing after a dual noun as an appositive: سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما.

Agreement: treat كِلا as masculine singular and كِلْتا as feminine singular. كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ ناجِحٌ. كِلْتا الشَّرِكَتَيْنِ جَديدَةٌ.

7. Chains of three and more. The مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ of one pair can be the مُضاف of the next, and the chain simply keeps going: مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ - the headmaster of the village school. Read it from its first word, dropping an “of” at each joint. Two facts govern every chain, however long:

  • Every term after the first is مَجْرور. Only the first word answers to the outer sentence.
  • Every term except the last is a مُضاف, and therefore strips down: no الـ, no tanwīn, and no ن of the dual or the sound masculine plural. مُعَلِّمونَ + المَدْرَسَةِ gives مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِ, مُعَلِّمانِ gives مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِ (and مُعَلِّمَيْنِ gives مُعَلِّمَيِ المَدْرَسَةِ). The sound feminine plural and the broken plurals have no ن to lose and just drop the tanwīn: مُعَلِّماتُ المَدْرَسَةِ، كُتُبُ المَكْتَبَةِ - while a diptote such as مَدارِس, which never had a tanwīn to lose, simply stands bare: مَدارِسُ المَدينَةِ.

Definiteness still comes from the last word alone: مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ قَرْيَةٍ is “a headmaster of a village school”. One article, at the end, for the whole chain - and a quantifier bolts onto the front to make a four-term chain with that same single article: كُلُّ طُلّابِ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ.

8. Nothing may be inserted between مُضاف and مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ. Not an adjective, not a demonstrative, not an adverb. The two words are welded, so everything that would sit in the middle in English queues up after the chain ends. Hence a word order that surprises learners: هٰذِهِ سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ is a full sentence, “this is the manager’s car”, and the noun phrase “this car of the manager” has to put the demonstrative last - سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ هٰذِهِ.

9. The adjective follows the whole chain, and its endings say what it modifies. An adjective still obeys lesson 8 - gender, number, case, definiteness - so when it lands at the end of a chain its agreement points back at exactly one term:

  • سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُ - the manager’s new car (feminine + nominative = سَيّارَةُ).
  • سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدِ - the new manager’s car (masculine + genitive = المُديرِ).

With three terms there are three candidate heads: مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ الجَديدُ is the new headmaster, while مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ الجَديدَةِ is the new village or the new school - both are feminine singular genitive, so the ending cannot separate them. Where candidates share gender, number and case, Arabic goes by sense or the writer rephrases with a preposition (مُديرُ المَدْرَسَةِ في القَرْيَةِ الجَديدَةِ). Adjectives for more than one term come out nearest-term-first: مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ الكَبيرَةِ الجَديدُ.

10. The ة is pronounced as a ت before the next term. مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ is said with a full ت - as ة is anywhere the word is not in pause, and a مُضاف never is - but the letter is still written ة, never rewritten as ت. It goes silent again only in the pausal form, and in a long chain the effect repeats at every feminine joint: مَكْتَبَةُ جامِعَةِ المَدينَةِ.

Forms & patterns

The quantifiers, with the shape each one demands and the agreement it triggers:

اللَّفْظWhat followsAgreementمِثالEnglish
كُلُّdefinite pluralplural by senseكُلُّ الطُّلّابِall the students
كُلُّindefinite singularsingular throughoutكُلُّ طالِبٍevery student
كُلُّdefinite singularsingularكُلُّ اليَوْمِthe whole day
جَميعُdefinite plural / massplural by senseجَميعُ المَوادِّall the subjects
بَعْضُdefinite plural / massplural by senseبَعْضُ الأَسْئِلَةِsome of the questions
مُعْظَمُdefinite plural / massplural by senseمُعْظَمُ النّاسِmost people
أَغْلَبُdefinite plural / massplural by senseأَغْلَبُ الشَّرِكاتِmost companies
كَثيرٌ مِنَمِنْ + definite genitiveplural by senseكَثيرٌ مِنَ الطُّلّابِmany of the students
قَليلٌ مِنَمِنْ + definite genitivesingular / by senseقَليلٌ مِنَ الوَقْتِa little of the time
عَدَدٌ مِنَمِنْ + definite genitivesingularعَدَدٌ مِنَ الزُّوّارِa number of visitors
كِلاdefinite masculine dualmasculine singularكِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِboth men
كِلْتاdefinite feminine dualfeminine singularكِلْتا الشَّرِكَتَيْنِboth companies

The dividing line: the first seven rows are first terms of an إِضافَة (no tanwīn, no مِنْ), and so are the last two - كِلا and كِلْتا, over a dual only; rows eight to ten are free nouns (tanwīn, and مِنْ obligatory).

كِلا and كِلْتا through the three cases:

الحالَة+ noun (invariable)+ pronoun (declines)
مَرْفوعجاءَ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِالرَّجُلانِ كِلاهُما
مَنْصوبرَأَيْتُ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِرَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما
مَجْرورمَعَ كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِمَعَ الرَّجُلَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما
مَرْفوع (م)جاءَتْ كِلْتا الطّالِبَتَيْنِالطّالِبَتانِ كِلْتاهُما
مَنْصوب / مَجْرور (م)رَأَيْتُ كِلْتا الطّالِبَتَيْنِمَعَ الطّالِبَتَيْنِ كِلْتَيْهِما

The appositive pattern - the quantifier copies the case of the noun, the pronoun copies its gender and number:

الجُمْلَةEnglish
الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ نَجَحوا.The students all passed.
رَأَيْتُ الطُّلّابَ كُلَّهُمْ.I saw all the students.
تَحَدَّثْتُ مَعَ الطُّلّابِ كُلِّهِمْ.I spoke with all the students.
قَرَأْتُ الكُتُبَ كُلَّها.I read all the books.

Building a chain, one link at a time - watch what each non-final word gives up:

السِّلْسِلَةWhat the non-final terms lostEnglish
مُديرُ المَدْرَسَةِtanwīn on مُديرٌthe school’s headmaster
مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِtanwīn, then الـ on مَدْرَسَةِthe headmaster of the village school
كُلُّ طُلّابِ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِالـ on طُلّابِ as wellall the pupils of the village school
مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِthe ن of مُعَلِّمونَthe school’s teachers
مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِthe ن of مُعَلِّمانِthe school’s two teachers

Where the adjective lands, and what its endings point at:

العِبارَةIt describesEnglish
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُسَيّارَةُ (f, مَرْفوع)the manager’s new car
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدِالمُديرِ (m, مَجْرور)the new manager’s car
مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ الجَديدُمُديرُ (m, مَرْفوع)the village school’s new headmaster
مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ الكَبيرَةِالقَرْيَةِ or المَدْرَسَةِ (ambiguous)the headmaster of the big village, or of the big school
بابُ بَيْتٍ قَديمٍبَيْتٍ (indefinite, مَجْرور)the door of an old house

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ في القاعَةِ الآنَ.All the students are in the hall now.
كُلُّ طالِبٍ يَحْمِلُ بِطاقَتَهُ الجامِعِيَّةَ.Every student carries his university card.
قَرَأْتُ كُلَّ الكِتابِ في لَيْلَةٍ واحِدَةٍ.I read the whole book in one night.
الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ نَجَحوا في الامْتِحانِ.The students all passed the exam.
مُعْظَمُ المُوَظَّفينَ يَصِلونَ قَبْلَ التّاسِعَةِ.Most of the employees arrive before nine.
بَعْضُ الأَسْئِلَةِ كانَتْ صَعْبَةً جِدًّا.Some of the questions were very difficult.
حَضَرَ عَدَدٌ كَبيرٌ مِنَ الزُّوّارِ.A large number of visitors attended.
كَثيرٌ مِنَ النّاسِ لا يَعْرِفونَ هٰذا الشّارِعَ.Many people do not know this street.
كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ وَقَّعَ العَقْدَ أَمْسِ.Both men signed the contract yesterday.
سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما عَنِ الدَّواءِ.I asked both doctors about the medicine.
اِجْتَمَعَ مُعَلِّمو مَدارِسِ المَدينَةِ أَمْسِ.The teachers of the city’s schools met yesterday.
سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُ أَمامَ البابِ.The manager’s new car is in front of the door.
تَحَدَّثْتُ إِلى مُديرِ مَكْتَبِ الشَّرِكَةِ.I spoke to the head of the company’s office.

Common mistakes

  • السَّيّارَةُ المُديرِ -> سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ - the first term of a construct drops الـ no matter how definite the English is; definiteness arrives from the last word of the chain.
  • الكُلُّ الطُّلّابِ -> كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ - a quantifier is a مُضاف, so it too refuses الـ. (الكُلُّ exists standing alone - الكُلُّ يَعْرِفُ ذٰلِكَ - but never before a genitive.)
  • كُلُّ الطّالِبِ يَحْمِلُ بِطاقَتَهُ -> كُلُّ طالِبٍ يَحْمِلُ بِطاقَتَهُ - “every” needs an indefinite singular. With الـ the phrase means “the whole of the student”.
  • كَثيرُ الطُّلّابِ -> كَثيرٌ مِنَ الطُّلّابِ - كَثيرٌ، قَليلٌ، عَدَدٌ keep their tanwīn and need مِنْ. As quantifiers they are not first terms - عَدَدُ الطُّلّابِ is a perfectly good construct, but it means “the number of the students”.
  • بَعْضٌ مِنَ الطُّلّابِ -> بَعْضُ الطُّلّابِ - and the reverse error: بَعْضُ، مُعْظَمُ، جَميعُ، أَغْلَبُ take the noun directly, with no مِنْ and no tanwīn.
  • كِلا الرَّجُلانِ -> كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ - the noun after كِلا is the second term of a construct, so it is a genitive dual: الرَّجُلَيْنِ، الشَّرِكَتَيْنِ.
  • رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَيْنِ كِلاهُما -> رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما - once a pronoun is attached, كِلا declines like a dual: كِلاهُما only in the nominative.
  • مُعَلِّمونَ المَدْرَسَةِ -> مُعَلِّمو المَدْرَسَةِ - the ن of the sound masculine plural (and of the dual: مُعَلِّمانِ المَدْرَسَةِ -> مُعَلِّما المَدْرَسَةِ) falls before the next term.
  • مُديرُ المَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ -> مُديرُ مَدْرَسَةِ القَرْيَةِ - in a chain only the last word keeps الـ; every middle word is stripped bare.
  • سَيّارَةُ الجَديدَةُ المُديرِ -> سَيّارَةُ المُديرِ الجَديدَةُ - nothing comes between the two terms; the adjective waits until the chain is finished.

Tips

  • One question sorts the whole quantifier list: does the word carry tanwīn in front of the noun? كُلُّ، بَعْضُ، مُعْظَمُ، جَميعُ، أَغْلَبُ، كِلا never do and take the noun directly; كَثيرٌ، قَليلٌ، عَدَدٌ always do and bring مِنْ with them.
  • Say a chain out loud starting from its first word, inserting “of” at each joint: مُديرُ - of - مَدْرَسَةِ - of - القَرْيَةِ. If the English needs “the” in the middle, the Arabic still does not.
  • Drill the ن-drop until it is automatic. مُعَلِّمو and مُعَلِّما look wrong to a beginner’s eye and are the most visible sign that you have understood constructs.
  • Whenever an adjective wants to sit in the middle of a construct, finish the construct first, then attach the adjective and let its endings do the pointing.
  • If two candidate heads share gender, number and case, do not trust the ending to disambiguate - even a native reader cannot. Rephrase with a preposition (في القَرْيَةِ) instead.
  • Learn الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ as a fixed three-piece shape: noun, then كُلّ in the same case, then a pronoun matching the noun. The label for it comes in lesson 58.
  • Ignore for now the accusative that specifies an amount (اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءً) - that is التَّمْييز, lesson 61. Nothing in this lesson puts a fatḥa on the quantified noun.

B1 43 / 70

kana and its sisters

كانَ وأَخَواتُها

In short

Lesson 32 taught you one verb and one case rule: put كانَ in front of a verbless sentence, and the first noun keeps its ḍamma while the second takes a fatḥa - كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. That machine was never about كانَ alone. Arabic has a small closed set of words that all do exactly the same thing, and grammarians call them أَخَواتُ كانَ, “the sisters of كانَ”.

There are nine you actually need. Each one adds a shade of meaning to the sentence - became, turned out, stayed, is still, as long as, is not - and each one leaves the sentence’s structure untouched: اسْمُها مَرْفوع، خَبَرُها مَنْصوب. So the grammar of this lesson is one line you already know, and the work is elsewhere: learning what each sister means, and surviving their stems. Five of them are hollow (كانَ، صارَ، باتَ، زالَ، دامَ) and lose their long vowel without warning, one is doubled (ظَلَّ), and one refuses to appear without a negative particle glued to its front (ما زالَ). Those three facts cause nearly every error in this lesson.

The rule

1. One machine, nine operators. Take any nominal sentence - مُبْتَدَأ plus خَبَر - and put a sister in front of it. The مُبْتَدَأ is renamed اسْمُها, “its noun”, and keeps its مَرْفوع ending; the خَبَر is renamed خَبَرُها and goes مَنْصوب. Nothing is deleted, nothing is reordered:

الطَّقْسُ بارِدٌ. → كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. / أَصْبَحَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. / ما زالَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. / لَيْسَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.

Four different meanings, one identical piece of grammar. If you can produce the كانَ sentence, you can produce all four; only the front word changes.

2. What each sister adds. They fall into three meaning groups, and it is worth learning them in groups rather than as a list of nine:

  • becoming - أَصْبَحَ، صارَ، أَمْسى، باتَ: the subject was not X and now is X.
  • staying - ظَلَّ، ما زالَ / لا يَزالُ، ما دامَ: the subject was X and still is.
  • negating - لَيْسَ: the subject is not X, right now.

كانَ itself belongs to none of them: it adds only past time.

3. أَصْبَحَ، أَمْسى، باتَ once told the time, and no longer do. Their roots are transparent - صَباحٌ “morning”, مَساءٌ “evening”, باتَ يَبيتُ “spend the night” (the root of بَيْتٌ “house”) - and أَصْبَحَ once meant “he became X in the morning”. In modern written Arabic that clock has faded out almost completely: أَصْبَحَ is simply the ordinary word for “became”, used at any hour, and it is the commonest sister after كانَ. أَمْسى keeps a faint evening flavour and is much rarer; باتَ is now a favourite of journalists meaning “has come to be, is now” - باتَ الأَمْرُ واضِحًا “the matter is now clear”. Do not translate the time back in.

4. صارَ is the neutral “become”. أَصْبَحَ and صارَ overlap almost entirely: صارَ الوَلَدُ طَبيبًا = أَصْبَحَ الوَلَدُ طَبيبًا, with أَصْبَحَ a shade more formal on the page. Neither needs a preposition - Arabic says صارَ مُدَرِّسًا, with a bare accusative, where English needs “became a teacher”.

5. ظَلَّ means “stayed”, not “became”. ظَلَّ is “kept on being, remained”: ظَلَّ البابُ مَفْتوحًا “the door stayed open”. It is the sister you want for a state that persisted through a stretch of past time, and it very often takes a مُضارِع predicate: ظَلَّ يَنْتَظِرُ ساعَتَيْنِ “he kept waiting for two hours”.

6. ما زالَ and لا يَزالُ never appear bare. This is the one form-fact of the lesson that has nothing to do with case. The verb زالَ on its own means “to cease, to go away” - so the sentence needs a negation to say “has not ceased to be”, i.e. “is still”. The negative is not optional and it is not detachable:

  • past shape: ما زالَ الطَّريقُ مُغْلَقًا. - The road is still closed.
  • present shape: لا يَزالُ الطَّريقُ مُغْلَقًا. - The road is still closed.

Both mean the present. Choose by the person you need: ما زِلْتُ، ما زالَتْ، ما زالوا on one side, لا أَزالُ، لا تَزالُ، لا يَزالونَ on the other. What you may never write is *زالَ يَعْمَلُ - without ما it says the opposite of what you mean. (ما is the ما of lesson 37, negating a past verb; لا is the لا of lesson 23, negating a مُضارِع. Nothing new, just fused into an idiom.)

The other “still” sisters - ما بَرِحَ، ما انْفَكَّ، ما فَتِئَ - behave identically and are worth recognising, but ما زالَ / لا يَزالُ will carry everything you need to say.

7. ما دامَ always leans on a main clause. ما دامَ means “as long as, so long as”, and unlike the others it cannot stand as a sentence by itself - it introduces a subordinate clause attached to a main one: اِقْرَأْ ما دُمْتَ مُسْتَيْقِظًا “read as long as you are awake”; ما دامَ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا فَلْنَخْرُجْ “as long as the weather is fine, let’s go out”. It appears only in the past shape (ما دامَ، ما دُمْتَ، ما دامَتْ) whatever the time meaning, and the ما here is not a negation - it is a different ما entirely, one you will meet again in lesson 68.

8. لَيْسَ is the family’s present-tense negator. You met it in lesson 23 and it has not changed: لَيْسَ الجَوابُ سَهْلًا. Two things distinguish it from its sisters. It is جامِد - frozen: there is no مُضارِع *يَلْيَسُ and no أَمْر, only the past-shaped forms, which nonetheless mean the present. And to negate any of the other sisters in the past you do not use it at all - you use ما or لَمْ on the sister itself: ما كانَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا / لَمْ يَكُنِ الجَوُّ جَميلًا.

9. Five sisters are أَجْوَف, and their stems shorten. كانَ (ك-و-ن)، صارَ (ص-ي-ر)، باتَ (ب-ي-ت)، زالَ (ز-ي-ل)، دامَ (د-و-م) all have a weak middle radical stretched into a long alif in the third person. A long vowel cannot stand in front of a sukūn, so the moment you add a consonant-initial ending the alif collapses to a short vowel - and in these five the short vowel matches the hidden radical: و gives a ḍamma, ي gives a kasra. (That shortcut is not the general rule for hollow verbs: نامَ - يَنامُ has a و and still gives نِمْتُ. Lesson 50 sorts it out.)

كانَ → كُنْتُ ، صارَ → صِرْتُ ، باتَ → بِتُّ ، ما زالَ → ما زِلْتُ ، ما دامَ → ما دُمْتُ

Endings that begin with a vowel leave the long alif alone: كانَتْ، كانوا، صارَتْ، صاروا، ما زالوا. The same collapse happens in the مُضارِع whenever the jussive puts a sukūn on the end: يَكونُ → لَمْ يَكُنْ، يَصيرُ → لَمْ يَصِرْ. The collapse itself is what every hollow verb does - lesson 50 makes it a general rule - and it explains بِتُّ, where the shortened stem بِتْ meets the ـتُ ending and the two تs merge under a shadda.

10. ظَلَّ is مُضَعَّف, and it un-doubles. ظَلَّ hides a repeated radical: ظ-ل-ل. The two لs sit together under a shadda as long as the ending is a vowel (ظَلَّ، ظَلَّتْ، ظَلّوا، يَظَلُّ), but a consonant-initial ending forces them apart and the original stem vowel resurfaces as a kasra: ظَلِلْتُ، ظَلِلْنا، ظَلِلْتُمْ. There is no *ظَلَّتُ. This is exactly the same trigger as the hollow collapse - a consonant-initial ending - applied to a different weakness.

11. The خَبَر can be a whole clause or a شِبْه جُمْلَة. A one-word predicate goes مَنْصوب; anything bigger has no ending to change, and then the sister simply stands there:

  • جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة: كانَ الوَلَدُ يَلْعَبُ في الحَديقَةِ. / أَصْبَحَتْ تَتَكَلَّمُ العَرَبِيَّةَ بِطَلاقَةٍ.
  • شِبْه جُمْلَة: كانَ في البَيْتِ. / ما زالَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.

In the first group the مُضارِع keeps its ordinary مَرْفوع ending - يَلْعَبُ, never *يَلْعَبَ - because a sentence has no case. كانَ plus a مُضارِع is the “used to / was doing” pattern of lesson 32; كانَ plus a past verb is a different construction, the past perfect, and it needs قَدْ - كانَ قَدْ خَرَجَ. That whole compound-tense system is lesson 45; leave it there for now.

12. Order can move, the cases cannot. Arabic will happily front the خَبَر when the اسْم is indefinite: كانَ في القاعَةِ طُلّابٌ كَثيرونَ “there were many students in the hall”. Read that slowly - طُلّابٌ is مَرْفوع because it is the delayed اسْمُ كانَ, not the predicate. The reflex “كانَ means an accusative somewhere” is what produces the classic *كانَ عِنْدي كِتابًا. Identify which word is the predicate first, then apply the case.

13. You often cannot hear the accusative, and you can never see it unvocalized. Case endings die at a pause and are simply absent from ordinary Arabic print. But the accusative is the one that partly survives: at a pause the tanwīn of بارِدًا drops while its alif stays, so كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدا really does end in an audible long ā, and مَريضًا is audibly different from مَريضٌ. What you do not hear is the ـةً of مَريضَةً (at a pause it is just مَريضَهْ), the ـٍ of مُجْتَهِداتٍ, or the bare fatḥa of a definite predicate. So half the rule is audible and half of it is knowledge - which is why you write the ending even when nobody would pronounce it.

14. Not in this lesson. Two neighbouring families look similar and are deliberately held back. كادَ “almost” and ظَنَّ “thought” also reshape the sentence, but ظَنَّ takes two accusatives, not one - that is lesson 59. إِنَّ and its sisters do the mirror image of this lesson, accusative first and nominative second - lesson 44, immediately next. And كانَ inside an unreal condition (لَوْ كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ) waits for lesson 65.

Forms & patterns

The nine sisters

الأُخْتMeaningمِثال
كانَwas, wereكانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.
أَصْبَحَbecame, has becomeأَصْبَحَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.
صارَbecame, turned intoصارَ الوَلَدُ طَبيبًا.
أَمْسىbecame (evening flavour)أَمْسى الجَوُّ لَطيفًا.
ظَلَّstayed, kept on beingظَلَّ البابُ مَفْتوحًا.
باتَhas come to be, is nowباتَ الأَمْرُ واضِحًا.
ما زالَ / لا يَزالُis stillما زالَ الطَّريقُ مُغْلَقًا.
ما دامَas long asاِقْرَأْ ما دُمْتَ مُسْتَيْقِظًا.
لَيْسَis notلَيْسَ الجَوابُ سَهْلًا.

كانَ: the shortening in one table (the pattern every hollow sister copies)

الصّيغَةالشَّكْلWhy
أَنا، الماضيكُنْتُـْتُ begins with a consonant → alif collapses to ḍamma
نَحْنُ، الماضيكُنّاsame collapse; the ن of كُنْ meets the ن of ـنا under a shadda
هُمْ، الماضيكانواthe ending begins with a vowel → the alif survives
هُوَ، المُضارِعيَكونُno sukūn on the stem → the long ū survives
هُوَ، المَجْزوملَمْ يَكُنْthe jussive sukūn → ū shortens to a ḍamma

The five hollow sisters side by side

الفِعْلالجَذْرأَناهِيَهُمْالمُضارِع
كانَك-و-نكُنْتُكانَتْكانوايَكونُ
صارَص-ي-رصِرْتُصارَتْصاروايَصيرُ
باتَب-ي-تبِتُّباتَتْباتوايَبيتُ
زالَز-ي-لما زِلْتُما زالَتْما زالوالا يَزالُ
دامَد-و-مما دُمْتُما دامَتْما داموا- (past shape only)

The non-hollow sisters

الفِعْلأَناهِيَهُمْالمُضارِع
أَصْبَحَأَصْبَحْتُأَصْبَحَتْأَصْبَحوايُصْبِحُ
أَمْسىأَمْسَيْتُأَمْسَتْأَمْسَوْايُمْسي
ظَلَّظَلِلْتُظَلَّتْظَلّوايَظَلُّ
لَيْسَلَسْتُلَيْسَتْلَيْسوا- (جامِد)

One sentence through the whole family

الجُمْلَةEnglish
الطَّقْسُ بارِدٌ.The weather is cold.
كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather was cold.
أَصْبَحَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather has become cold.
صارَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather has turned cold.
ظَلَّ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather stayed cold.
ما زالَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather is still cold.
لَيْسَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا.The weather is not cold.

What the خَبَر can be

نَوْعُ الخَبَرمِثالThe ending
مُفْرَد (one word)أَصْبَحَ الوَلَدُ طَبيبًا.مَنْصوب - fatḥa
مُفْرَد, ending in ةكانَتِ الغُرْفَةُ نَظيفَةً.مَنْصوب - fatḥa on the ة
جَمْع مُذَكَّر سالِمأَصْبَحَ الطُّلّابُ مُتَأَخِّرينَ.ـونَ becomes ـينَ
جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّةكانَ الوَلَدُ يَلْعَبُ.none - the verb stays مَرْفوع
شِبْه جُمْلَةكانَ الكِتابُ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ.none

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا في تِلْكَ اللَّيْلَةِ.The weather was cold that night.
أَصْبَحَتِ المَدينَةُ كَبيرَةً جِدًّا في السَّنَواتِ الأَخيرَةِ.The city has become very big in recent years.
صارَ أَخي طَبيبًا بَعْدَ سَبْعِ سَنَواتٍ مِنَ الدِّراسَةِ.My brother became a doctor after seven years of study.
أَمْسى الجَوُّ لَطيفًا بَعْدَ غُروبِ الشَّمْسِ.The weather turned pleasant after sunset.
ظَلَّ البابُ مَفْتوحًا طَوالَ النَّهارِ.The door stayed open all day.
ظَلِلْتُ أَنْتَظِرُ في المَحَطَّةِ ساعَتَيْنِ.I kept waiting at the station for two hours.
باتَ الأَمْرُ واضِحًا لِلْجَميعِ.The matter is now clear to everyone.
ما زالَ الطَّريقُ مُغْلَقًا بِسَبَبِ الثَّلْجِ.The road is still closed because of the snow.
لا يَزالُ البَحْثُ مُسْتَمِرًّا حَتَّى الآنَ.The research is still going on until now.
ما زِلْتُ أَذْكُرُ اسْمَ مُعَلِّمَتي الأُولى.I still remember my first teacher’s name.
اِقْرَأْ ما شِئْتَ ما دُمْتَ مُسْتَيْقِظًا.Read as much as you like as long as you are awake.
لَيْسَ الجَوابُ سَهْلًا كَما تَظُنُّ.The answer is not as easy as you think.
كُنْتُ في البَيْتِ عِنْدَما وَصَلَتِ الرِّسالَةُ.I was at home when the letter arrived.
أَصْبَحَتْ تَتَكَلَّمُ العَرَبِيَّةَ بِطَلاقَةٍ.She has come to speak Arabic fluently.

Common mistakes

  • كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدٌ. -> كانَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. - The خَبَر of every sister is مَنْصوب. Leaving it مَرْفوع is the error the whole family exists to catch.
  • أَصْبَحَتِ المَدينَةُ كَبيرَةٌ. -> أَصْبَحَتِ المَدينَةُ كَبيرَةً. - The rule is not about كانَ, it is about the family. Every sister pulls its predicate into the accusative.
  • زالَ يَعْمَلُ في الشَّرِكَةِ. -> ما زالَ يَعْمَلُ في الشَّرِكَةِ. / لا يَزالُ يَعْمَلُ في الشَّرِكَةِ. - Bare زالَ means “he stopped”. The negative particle is part of the word, not an optional extra.
  • كانَ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدًا. -> كانَ الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدًا. - The cases reversed. اسْمُ كانَ is مَرْفوع and only the second element moves; two accusatives in a row is impossible here.
  • صارْتُ مُعَلِّمًا. -> صِرْتُ مُعَلِّمًا. - A long alif cannot stand before a sukūn. The hollow stem collapses, and the ي of ص-ي-ر leaves a kasra behind.
  • ظَلَّتُ أَنْتَظِرُ. -> ظَلِلْتُ أَنْتَظِرُ. - A doubled verb splits its shadda before a consonant-initial ending. (ظَلَّتْ, with a sukūn, is the perfectly good “she stayed”.)
  • لَيْسَ الجَوابُ سَهْلٌ. -> لَيْسَ الجَوابُ سَهْلًا. - لَيْسَ is a sister like the rest, and it has been governing an accusative since lesson 23.
  • كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتًا كَثيرًا. -> كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ كَثيرٌ. - Here عِنْدي is the predicate and وَقْتٌ is the delayed اسْمُ كانَ, so it stays مَرْفوع. Find the predicate first.
  • أَصْبَحَ الوَلَدُ يَلْعَبَ في الحَديقَةِ. -> أَصْبَحَ الوَلَدُ يَلْعَبُ في الحَديقَةِ. - A clause predicate has no case to take, so the مُضارِع keeps its ordinary ḍamma.
  • لَيْسَ كانَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. -> ما كانَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. / لَمْ يَكُنِ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. - لَيْسَ negates a nominal sentence; it never negates a past verb. Past كانَ is negated with ما or لَمْ (lesson 37).

Tips

  • Learn the family as one sentence run through all of it - الطَّقْسُ بارِدٌ → كانَ / أَصْبَحَ / ظَلَّ / ما زالَ / لَيْسَ الطَّقْسُ بارِدًا. Nine meanings for the price of one syntax rule.
  • Sort them by group before you memorise: four “become”, three “stay”, one “is not”, one bare past. Nine unconnected items is hard; four labelled boxes is not.
  • The stem test is always the same question: does the ending begin with a consonant? If yes, كانَ → كُنْ، صارَ → صِرْ، باتَ → بِتْ، زالَ → زِلْ، دامَ → دُمْ، ظَلَّ → ظَلِلْ. If no, leave the stem alone.
  • Store ما زالَ and لا يَزالُ as single words with the negative baked in, exactly as you store English “no longer”. You will then never be tempted to strip the ما off.
  • باتَ and أَصْبَحَ are all over the news; ظَلَّ and ما زالَ are all over ordinary description; أَمْسى you mostly need to recognise. Spend your effort accordingly.
  • Say the predicate out loud with its alif attached - بارِدًا، واضِحًا، مَفْتوحًا. It is the one ending in this lesson your listener will actually hear, so it repays drilling more than the silent ones do.
  • Do not reach yet for كادَ يَسْقُطُ or ظَنَّ الوَلَدَ نائِمًا. They look like this family and behave differently; lesson 59 is where they belong.

B1 44 / 70

inna and its sisters; anna, li-anna and qala inna

إِنَّ وأَخَواتُها

In short

Lesson 43 gave you a family of words that leave the subject alone and pull the predicate into the accusative: كانَ الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدًا. This lesson gives you the family that does the exact opposite. Put إِنَّ in front of the same sentence and the first noun takes the fatḥa while the second keeps its ḍamma: إِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ. Two families, one mirror. Once you can see which of the two words moved, you can name the word that moved it.

There are six of them - إِنَّ، أَنَّ، كَأَنَّ، لٰكِنَّ، لَيْتَ، لَعَلَّ - covering emphasis, the “that” of reported speech and of opinions, comparison, contrast, wishes and hopes. The case rule is one line wide; the real work is elsewhere. English hands over a single word “that” where Arabic has three - إِنَّ، أَنَّ and the أَنْ of lesson 34 - and picking the right one is the skill this lesson actually buys you.

The rule

1. The frame: إِنَّ + اسْمُها مَنْصوب + خَبَرُها مَرْفوع. Take a nominal sentence and put إِنَّ in front of it. Nothing is deleted or reordered; only the ending of the first word changes.

الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدٌ. -> إِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ. / الجَوُّ بارِدٌ. -> إِنَّ الجَوَّ بارِدٌ.

The two halves take new names, exactly as they did with كانَ: the first noun is اسْمُ إِنَّ, the second خَبَرُ إِنَّ. Arabic grammar calls the six الحُروفُ المُشَبَّهَةُ بِالفِعْل, “the particles that resemble a verb”, because they govern a noun the way a verb governs its object - but they are particles, not verbs: no conjugation, no tense, no person.

What does إِنَّ mean? Usually nothing you can translate. It marks the sentence as asserted with weight - “the student really is hard-working” - and in ordinary prose it is simply how a statement is opened. Do not force an English word into it.

2. The accusative on اسْمُها is a case, not a mark. Every declension class shows it its own way - the same list you drilled for the predicate of كانَ, applied to the other slot.

  • definite singular: إِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ / إِنَّ المُديرَ مَشْغولٌ
  • ending in ة: إِنَّ المُدَرِّسَةَ غائِبَةٌ
  • sound masculine plural: إِنَّ المُهَنْدِسينَ مَشْغولونَ (not *المُهَنْدِسونَ)
  • sound feminine plural: إِنَّ الطّالِباتِ مُجْتَهِداتٌ - a kasra, never a fatḥa
  • dual: إِنَّ الوَلَدَيْنِ نائِمانِ
  • first term of an إِضافَة: إِنَّ مُديرَ الشَّرِكَةِ مُسافِرٌ

3. خَبَرُها stays مَرْفوع, and it has the same three shapes as any خَبَر. Lesson 17’s classification survives intact: the predicate can be a single word, a whole sentence, or a شِبْه جُمْلَة.

  • مُفْرَد: إِنَّ الاِمْتِحانَ صَعْبٌ.
  • جُمْلَة: إِنَّ الطُّلّابَ يَسْتَعِدّونَ لِلاِمْتِحانِ.
  • شِبْه جُمْلَة: إِنَّ المُديرَ في مَكْتَبِهِ.

The sentence-shaped predicate matters, because it is the only way a verb gets into an إِنَّ sentence: إِنَّ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ غَدًا is fine, *إِنَّ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ is not.

4. اسْمُها is normally definite, and what licenses an indefinite one is a fronted predicate. The old rule that a مُبْتَدَأ is normally definite (lesson 2) carries over, licences and all: a bare indefinite needs something to justify it, and in practice that something is the fronted predicate below. So *إِنَّ رَجُلًا في البَيْتِ is not how you say “there is a man in the house”. Instead you use the fronted شِبْه جُمْلَة of lesson 17, and the delayed اسْم - now indefinite and مَنْصوب - follows it:

إِنَّ في البَيْتِ رَجُلًا. / إِنَّ هُناكَ مُشْكِلَةً كَبيرَةً. / إِنَّ عِنْدَنا وَقْتًا كافِيًا. / إِنَّ لِلطُّلّابِ حُقوقًا وواجِباتٍ.

Compare them without إِنَّ - في البَيْتِ رَجُلٌ، هُناكَ مُشْكِلَةٌ كَبيرَةٌ، عِنْدَنا وَقْتٌ كافٍ - and you see exactly which word إِنَّ reached for. Note what did not change: في البَيْتِ is a preposition with its noun and stays مَجْرور. إِنَّ never touches a شِبْه جُمْلَة.

5. With a pronoun, the pronoun is the اسْم - and it is the attached one. An independent pronoun (هُوَ، أَنا) has no case form at all, so it cannot fill an accusative slot. What goes onto إِنَّ is the attached set of lesson 29, the same one a verb takes for its object. Grammar books call it في مَحَلِّ نَصْب, “in the accusative position”: the slot is accusative even though nothing shows.

إِنَّهُ مُهَنْدِسٌ. / إِنَّها مَشْغولَةٌ. / إِنَّكَ عَلى حَقٍّ. / إِنَّهُمْ في الطَّريقِ.

For “I” the ending is ـني, not ـي: the extra ن (نونُ الوِقايَة, “the protecting nūn”) keeps the particle out of a kasra. إِنَّني and the contracted إِنِّي are both correct and common; لَيْتَ in practice keeps the ن - لَيْتَني - while لَعَلَّ is more often heard contracted, لَعَلِّي. The خَبَر after the pronoun stays مَرْفوع: إِنَّني مُتْعَبٌ.

6. The other five, one line each. أَنَّ gets its own sub-rules below; here are the rest.

  • كَأَنَّ - “as if, like”. كَأَنَّ الجَوَّ رَبيعٌ. كَأَنَّهُ لا يَسْمَعُني.
  • لٰكِنَّ - “but”. It needs a noun or pronoun after it: لٰكِنَّ الوَقْتَ قَصيرٌ، لٰكِنَّها رَفَضَتْ. Its lighter twin لٰكِنْ, with a sukūn and no shadda, governs nothing and may be followed by a verb: أَرَدْتُ أَنْ أَتَّصِلَ بِهِ لٰكِنْ نَسيتُ. Both are usually written without the small alif - لكِنَّ، لكِنْ - and both are pronounced with a long ā.
  • لَيْتَ - “if only, I wish”, for something unlikely or impossible. لَيْتَ العُطْلَةَ أَطْوَلُ. يا لَيْتَني كُنْتُ مَعَكُمْ. The يا in front is optional and very common.
  • لَعَلَّ - “perhaps, maybe, hopefully”, for something still possible. لَعَلَّ الطَّبيبَ يَعْرِفُ الحَلَّ. لَعَلَّكَ عَلى حَقٍّ.

7. إِنَّ versus أَنَّ: position decides, not meaning. These two are the same word grammatically - identical case effect, identical pronoun forms - and they split by where they stand.

  • إِنَّ opens a sentence: at the very start, or after وَ or فَ (فَإِنَّ الوَضْعَ خَطيرٌ), or as the start of a quoted statement. A few fixed openers count as sentence-initial too; the one you will meet is حَيْثُ - حَيْثُ إِنَّ, “since”, never *حَيْثُ أَنَّ.
  • أَنَّ is embedded. It is the “that” that hangs off a preceding word - a verb, a preposition, a fixed expression - and it can never begin a sentence.

أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ. / سَمِعْتُ أَنَّ الأَسْعارَ اِرْتَفَعَتْ. / مِنَ المَعْروفِ أَنَّ التَّدْخينَ ضارٌّ. / أَعْلَنَتِ الوِزارَةُ أَنَّ الدِّراسَةَ تَبْدَأُ في أَيْلولَ.

أَنَّ also lives inside a set of very frequent compounds, worth learning as single items: لِأَنَّ (because), بِما أَنَّ (since), رَغْمَ أَنَّ / بِالرَّغْمِ مِنْ أَنَّ (although), مَعَ أَنَّ (even though), كَما أَنَّ (just as), بِأَنَّ (after verbs that take بِ - أَخْبَرَني بِأَنَّ). In every one the noun that follows is مَنْصوب: لِأَنَّ الجَوَّ بارِدٌ، رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ.

8. After قالَ the particle is إِنَّ. Reported speech is the one place where the position rule looks broken - the clause is clearly embedded, yet Arabic uses إِنَّ. The clause after “say” is a quoted sentence, not a fact-object, so it keeps its sentence-opening particle.

قالَ إِنَّهُ مَريضٌ. / قالَ المُديرُ إِنَّ الاِجْتِماعَ سَيَبْدَأُ في التّاسِعَةِ. / تَقولُ الصَّحيفَةُ إِنَّ المُفاوَضاتِ مُسْتَمِرَّةٌ.

This holds for the whole family of قالَ - يَقولُ، قالَتْ، قيلَ، يُقالُ - and *قالَ أَنَّهُ is one of the most visible errors in learner Arabic. Two details come free with it. Arabic does not shift the tense back the way English does: قالَ إِنَّهُ مَريضٌ is “he said he was ill” - the predicate stays exactly as the speaker said it. And other verbs of communication are not verbs of saying, so they take أَنَّ normally: ذَكَرَ أَنَّ، أَضافَ أَنَّ، أَعْلَنَ أَنَّ، صَرَّحَ بِأَنَّ. Even قالَ switches to أَنَّ once a preposition intervenes - قالَ بِأَنَّهُ مَريضٌ, frequent in the press, though careful writers avoid it.

9. أَنْ، أَنَّ، إِنَّ - the three-way test. This is the point of the lesson. All three are “that” in English; none of them is interchangeable with another. Ask what comes next.

  • A مُضارِع verb comes next -> أَنْ (sukūn, no shadda), and that verb goes مَنْصوب. This is lesson 34: أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ، يَجِبُ أَنْ تَدْرُسَ.
  • A noun or attached pronoun comes next, inside a larger sentence -> أَنَّ, and the noun goes مَنْصوب: أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ، أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّهُ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ.
  • A noun or attached pronoun comes next and the clause starts the sentence, or follows قالَ -> إِنَّ: إِنَّ الطَّقْسَ جَميلٌ، قالَ إِنَّ الطَّقْسَ جَميلٌ.

“I think it will improve” and “I want it to improve” are twins in English and different machines in Arabic: أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّهُ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ against أُريدُ أَنْ يَتَحَسَّنَ. In the first the pronoun sits on أَنَّ; in the second the person is on the verb, and nothing sits on أَنْ at all - أَنْ never takes a pronoun. One further word is nearby and is not part of this system: إِنْ with a sukūn is the conditional “if” (lesson 56) - same letters, no shadda, no case effect.

10. A verb may never follow the six directly. *إِنَّ يَذْهَبُ is impossible, and so is *لٰكِنَّ يَعْمَلُ. What comes next is the اسْم - a noun or an attached pronoun - or, in the pattern of rule 4, a fronted شِبْه جُمْلَة and then the اسْم. The repairs are mechanical: supply the noun (إِنَّ الوَلَدَ يَذْهَبُ), attach a pronoun (لٰكِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ), or switch to a particle that takes a verb (لٰكِنْ يَعْمَلُ).

11. Read but do not write: اللّامُ المُزَحْلَقَة. In formal prose a لَـ is sometimes prefixed to the خَبَر: إِنَّ الطّالِبَ لَمُجْتَهِدٌ. It changes no case and is optional - recognise it, do not produce it.

12. Not in this lesson. أَنَّ and أَنْ with their clauses can be repackaged as a noun - المَصْدَرُ المُؤَوَّل - and that is lesson 54. The verbs that take two accusatives, ظَنَّ وأَخَواتُها, reshape a sentence in a third way again and wait for lesson 59.

Forms & patterns

The six sisters

الحَرْفEnglishExample
إِنَّindeed (sentence-opening; untranslated)إِنَّ الخَبَرَ صَحيحٌ.
أَنَّthat (embedded)أَعْرِفُ أَنَّ الخَبَرَ صَحيحٌ.
كَأَنَّas if, likeكَأَنَّ الجَوَّ رَبيعٌ.
لٰكِنَّbutلٰكِنَّ الوَقْتَ قَصيرٌ.
لَيْتَif only, I wishلَيْتَ العُطْلَةَ أَطْوَلُ.
لَعَلَّperhaps, hopefullyلَعَلَّ الطَّبيبَ يَعْرِفُ الحَلَّ.

إِنَّ with the attached pronouns

الضَّميرWith إِنَّEnglish
أَناإِنَّني / إِنِّيI (indeed)
أَنْتَإِنَّكَyou (m sg)
أَنْتِإِنَّكِyou (f sg)
هُوَإِنَّهُhe, it
هِيَإِنَّهاshe, it
نَحْنُإِنَّناwe
أَنْتُمْإِنَّكُمْyou (m pl)
أَنْتُنَّإِنَّكُنَّyou (f pl)
هُمْإِنَّهُمْthey (m pl)
هُنَّإِنَّهُنَّthey (f pl)

The two dual cells follow the same pattern and are left out only for length: إِنَّكُما، إِنَّهُما.

The same endings on the other five

الحَرْف+ ني/ي+ هُ+ ها+ كَ+ نا
أَنَّأَنَّني / أَنِّيأَنَّهُأَنَّهاأَنَّكَأَنَّنا
كَأَنَّكَأَنَّني / كَأَنِّيكَأَنَّهُكَأَنَّهاكَأَنَّكَكَأَنَّنا
لٰكِنَّلٰكِنَّني / لٰكِنِّيلٰكِنَّهُلٰكِنَّهالٰكِنَّكَلٰكِنَّنا
لَيْتَلَيْتَنيلَيْتَهُلَيْتَهالَيْتَكَلَيْتَنا
لَعَلَّلَعَلَّني / لَعَلِّيلَعَلَّهُلَعَلَّهالَعَلَّكَلَعَلَّنا

How the نَصْب shows on اسْمِ إِنَّ

Shape of the nounAlone (مَرْفوع)After إِنَّ (مَنْصوب)Mark
definite singularالطّالِبُالطّالِبَplain fatḥa
ending in ةالمُدَرِّسَةُالمُدَرِّسَةَplain fatḥa
indefinite (delayed اسْم)رَجُلٌرَجُلًاfatḥa-tanwīn on a supporting alif
sound masculine pluralالمُهَنْدِسونَالمُهَنْدِسينَـونَ becomes ـينَ
sound feminine pluralالطّالِباتُالطّالِباتِkasra, never a fatḥa
dualالوَلَدانِالوَلَدَيْنِـانِ becomes ـَيْنِ
one of the five nouns (lesson 40)أَخوكَأَخاكَa long alif

The mirror: كانَ against إِنَّ

اسْمُهاخَبَرُها
كانَ وأَخَواتُهامَرْفوع - كانَ الطّالِبُمَنْصوب - مُجْتَهِدًا
إِنَّ وأَخَواتُهامَنْصوب - إِنَّ الطّالِبَمَرْفوع - مُجْتَهِدٌ

They stack, in that order: إِنَّ الطّالِبَ كانَ مُجْتَهِدًا، إِنَّ الجَوَّ كانَ بارِدًا أَمْسِ.

Choosing between أَنْ، أَنَّ، إِنَّ

ParticleWhat followsWhat it doesExample
أَنْa مُضارِع verbverb goes مَنْصوبأُريدُ أَنْ أُسافِرَ.
أَنَّa noun / attached pronoun, embeddednoun goes مَنْصوبأَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّ السَّفَرَ مُتْعِبٌ.
إِنَّa noun / attached pronoun, sentence-initial or after قالَnoun goes مَنْصوبقالَ إِنَّ السَّفَرَ مُتْعِبٌ.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
إِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ ونَشيطٌ.The student is hard-working and energetic.
إِنَّ المُهَنْدِسينَ مَشْغولونَ بِالمَشْروعِ الجَديدِ.The engineers are busy with the new project.
إِنَّ الطّالِباتِ مُجْتَهِداتٌ جِدًّا هٰذا الفَصْلَ.The students are very hard-working this term.
إِنَّ في البَيْتِ رَجُلًا يَنْتَظِرُكَ مُنْذُ ساعَةٍ.There is a man in the house who has been waiting for you for an hour.
إِنَّ لِلطُّلّابِ حُقوقًا وواجِباتٍ.Students have rights and duties.
قالَ المُديرُ إِنَّ الاِجْتِماعَ سَيَبْدَأُ في التّاسِعَةِ.The manager said the meeting would start at nine.
قالَ لي إِنَّهُ مَريضٌ ولَنْ يَحْضُرَ.He told me he was ill and would not come.
أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ في نِهايَةِ الأُسْبوعِ.I think the weather will improve at the weekend.
مِنَ المَعْروفِ أَنَّ التَّدْخينَ ضارٌّ بِالصِّحَّةِ.It is well known that smoking is harmful to health.
لَمْ أَخْرُجْ لِأَنَّ الجَوَّ كانَ بارِدًا جِدًّا.I did not go out because the weather was very cold.
رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ تَعِبٌ، فَإِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ حَتَّى المَساءِ.Although he is tired, he works until the evening.
حاوَلْتُ أَنْ أَتَّصِلَ بِها، لٰكِنَّ هاتِفَها كانَ مُغْلَقًا.I tried to call her, but her phone was switched off.
كَأَنَّهُ لا يَسْمَعُ شَيْئًا مِمّا نَقولُ.It is as if he hears nothing of what we say.
يا لَيْتَنا كُنّا مَعَكُمْ في تِلْكَ الرِّحْلَةِ، ولَعَلَّ الفُرْصَةَ تَعودُ.If only we had been with you on that trip; perhaps the chance will come again.

Common mistakes

  • إِنَّ الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدٌ. -> إِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ. - The اسْم takes the fatḥa and the خَبَر keeps its ḍamma. Leaving both words مَرْفوع is the single most frequent إِنَّ error.
  • قالَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ. -> قالَ إِنَّهُ مَريضٌ. - After قالَ and everything built on it the particle is إِنَّ, because what follows is a quoted sentence, not a fact-object.
  • أَعْتَقِدُ أَنْ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ. -> أَعْتَقِدُ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ سَيَتَحَسَّنُ. - أَنْ takes a verb, أَنَّ takes a noun. A noun after أَنْ is always the wrong particle.
  • أُريدُ أَنَّ أُسافِرَ. -> أُريدُ أَنْ أُسافِرَ. - The mirror error: with a verb behind it, the word is the bare أَنْ of lesson 34, sukūn and no shadda.
  • إِنَّ هُوَ طَبيبٌ. -> إِنَّهُ طَبيبٌ. - An independent pronoun has no case and cannot be اسْمُ إِنَّ. Use the attached set: إِنَّهُ، إِنَّها، إِنَّكَ، إِنَّني.
  • إِنَّ يَذْهَبُ إِلى العَمَلِ مُبَكِّرًا. -> إِنَّهُ يَذْهَبُ إِلى العَمَلِ مُبَكِّرًا. - إِنَّ cannot be followed by a verb; the اسْم comes first, and a verb can only come later, as the خَبَر.
  • إِنَّ الطُّلّابَ مُجْتَهِدينَ. -> إِنَّ الطُّلّابَ مُجْتَهِدونَ. - Only the first word changes. The خَبَر stays مَرْفوع, and here that means ـونَ, not ـينَ.
  • أَنَّ الأَسْعارَ اِرْتَفَعَتْ هٰذا العامَ. -> إِنَّ الأَسْعارَ اِرْتَفَعَتْ هٰذا العامَ. - أَنَّ can never open a sentence. If nothing precedes it, the word you want is إِنَّ.
  • إِنَّ رَجُلًا في البَيْتِ. -> إِنَّ في البَيْتِ رَجُلًا. - An indefinite اسْم needs a شِبْه جُمْلَة predicate in front of it. Move the preposition phrase forward.
  • لٰكِنَّ نَسيتُ أَنْ أَتَّصِلَ بِهِ. -> لٰكِنْ نَسيتُ أَنْ أَتَّصِلَ بِهِ. - Before a verb use the light لٰكِنْ. The heavy لٰكِنَّ needs a noun or a pronoun: لٰكِنَّني نَسيتُ.

Tips

  • One question sorts the whole family: which word changed? Predicate moved to the accusative -> كانَ’s family. Subject moved to the accusative -> إِنَّ’s family. Nothing moved -> neither.
  • Learn the compounds as whole words, not as أَنَّ plus something: لِأَنَّ، رَغْمَ أَنَّ، بِما أَنَّ، مَعَ أَنَّ، مِنَ المَعْروفِ أَنَّ. The case rule rides along inside them.
  • Drill the pronoun forms out loud in one string - إِنَّني، إِنَّكَ، إِنَّهُ، إِنَّها، إِنَّنا، إِنَّهُمْ - then swap the head: أَنَّهُ، لٰكِنَّها، لَعَلَّكَ، لَيْتَنا. It is one list, not six.
  • For the أَنْ / أَنَّ choice, do not translate from English at all. Look ahead: verb -> أَنْ; noun -> أَنَّ. It takes half a second and it is never wrong.
  • Take قالَ إِنَّ as a fixed collocation and rehearse it attached: قالَ إِنَّ… قالَتْ إِنَّ… يَقولونَ إِنَّ… Then the embedded-versus-initial logic never gets a chance to interfere.
  • In news writing, watch for فَإِنَّ: after a fronted phrase the main statement is regularly opened with فَـ + إِنَّ - أَمّا الأَسْعارُ فَإِنَّها مُسْتَقِرَّةٌ. It is still ordinary إِنَّ.
  • A شِبْه جُمْلَة has nothing to give: in إِنَّ في البَيْتِ رَجُلًا the preposition phrase is untouched, and the accusative lands on the noun that follows it.
  • Do not go hunting yet for المَصْدَرُ المُؤَوَّل (lesson 54) or for ظَنَّ وأَخَواتُها (lesson 59). One particle, one accusative, one nominative is a complete and immediately usable skill.

B1 45 / 70

qad and the compound tenses

قَدْ ولَقَدْ والأَزْمِنَةُ المُرَكَّبَة

In short

Arabic runs on two verb forms: الماضي for what happened and المُضارِع for what is happening. There is no third form for “had done”, “will have done”, “used to do” or “may do”. Arabic builds those the way English builds “had gone” - out of two words - and it builds them from parts you already own: كانَ and its sisters (lessons 32 and 48), the future سَـ (lesson 24), and one small particle that is new here: قَدْ.

قَدْ is worth meeting on its own first, because its meaning is decided by the verb behind it. In front of a past verb it seals the action shut - قَدْ وَصَلَ, “it has arrived, that is done”. In front of a present verb it does the opposite and prises it open - قَدْ يَصِلُ, “it may arrive”. One particle, two readings, and the only thing that distinguishes them is the shape of the next word. Learn that pair, add كانَ in front, and every compound tense in the language is assembly work.

The rule

1. قَدْ + الماضي: the action is complete. Put قَدْ immediately before a past verb and you mark the event as done, and usually as still relevant now - the nearest English is the present perfect, often with “already” or “just”:

قَدْ وَصَلَ القِطارُ. - The train has arrived. / قَدْ قَرَأْتُ الرِّسالَةَ. - I have already read the letter.

Bare وَصَلَ القِطارُ is not wrong; it simply reports. قَدْ adds the sense of an accomplished fact. The particle itself never changes - no gender, no number, no person. It is always قَدْ, with a sukūn on the د, and it takes no ending of any kind.

One spelling detail: if the verb begins with هَمْزة الوَصْل - the bare ا of اِنْتَهى، اِسْتَقالَ and their pattern-mates - two sukūns would collide, so the د borrows a kasra: قَدْ + اِنْتَهى → قَدِ انْتَهى الاجْتِماعُ. Likewise قَدِ اسْتَقالَ الوَزيرُ، قَدِ اتَّفَقوا عَلَى المَوْعِدِ.

2. لَقَدْ is قَدْ with the volume up. Prefix the لام التَّوْكيد, “the لـ of emphasis”, and you get لَقَدْ - written as one word, standing at the head of its clause (a linking وَ may precede it: وَلَقَدْ), and in modern Arabic used with الماضي. It asserts against doubt: “I really did”, “he certainly has”.

لَقَدْ نَجَحْتُ في الامْتِحانِ. - I really did pass the exam.

Translate it with stress rather than with an extra word; English does the same job by leaning on “did”. Modern prose does not write لَقَدْ يَفْعَلُ - the moment a مُضارِع follows, drop the لَـ and the meaning changes to possibility (rule 3). (Classical Arabic does put لَقَدْ before a مُضارِع in emphatic assertions; that use is not current, so recognise it and do not produce it.)

3. قَدْ + المُضارِع المَرْفوع: possibility. The same particle in front of a present verb means “may, might, possibly” - roughly what رُبَّما does with a whole sentence:

قَدْ يَصِلُ المُديرُ غَدًا. - The manager may arrive tomorrow.

Two things to hold on to. First, the verb stays مَرْفوع with its ordinary ḍamma: قَدْ is neither a ناصِب (lesson 33) nor a جازِم (lesson 35), so يَصِلُ, never *يَصِلَ and never *يَصِلْ. Second, to deny the possibility you keep قَدْ and negate the verb itself: قَدْ لا يَصِلُ في الوَقْتِ المُحَدَّدِ, “he may not arrive on time”.

A weaker second reading exists: in a general statement, قَدْ + مُضارِع can mean “sometimes” - قَدْ يَتَأَخَّرُ القِطارُ في الشِّتاءِ. Recognise it; produce the possibility reading.

4. قَدْ is glued to its verb, and is never itself negated. Nothing may stand between قَدْ and the verb - no subject, no adverb, no object. If the subject is a noun it goes after the verb in the ordinary way: قَدْ نَجَحَ الطّالِبُ, not *قَدِ الطّالِبُ نَجَحَ. And no negating particle attaches to قَدْ itself: *لَمْ قَدْ، *ما قَدْ يَصِلُ، *قَدْ لَمْ are all impossible. The negative of قَدْ وَصَلَ is simply لَمْ يَصِلْ or ما وَصَلَ (lesson 37) - the particle drops out with the positive meaning it carried. (قَدْ لا يَصِلُ in rule 3 is not an exception: there لا negates the event inside a possibility that قَدْ still asserts.)

5. The compound tense: كانَ carries the time, the second verb carries the aspect. Everything from here on is one structure. A form of كانَ (or one of its sisters) takes a whole verbal sentence as its خَبَر - lesson 43 rule 11 - and that clause has no case ending to worry about. So there are only two questions to answer, and they are answered by two different words:

  • When? - decided by كانَ: كانَ past, يَكونُ / سَيَكونُ present or future.
  • What kind of action? - decided by the second verb: مُضارِع = ongoing or habitual, قَدْ + ماضٍ = already complete, سَـ + مُضارِع = still ahead.

Cross the two axes and you get the whole grid in the Forms section below. No new endings appear anywhere in it.

6. كانَ + مُضارِع = “used to do / was doing”. You built this in lesson 32 and it is the first row of the grid: كانَ يَدْرُسُ covers both English readings, the habit and the action in progress, and context separates them. كُنّا نَسْكُنُ قُرْبَ البَحْرِ - “we used to live near the sea”.

7. كانَ قَدْ + ماضٍ = “had done”. This is the pluperfect: an event finished before another past event. كانَ places you in the past; قَدْ + ماضٍ says the action was already over when you got there:

وَصَلْتُ مُتَأَخِّرًا، فَكانَ المُحاضِرُ قَدْ بَدَأَ دَرْسَهُ. - I arrived late, so the lecturer had already begun his lesson.

In modern written Arabic قَدْ is not decorative here: it is what marks the two past verbs as one tense rather than two separate statements. Write كانَ قَدْ خَرَجَ. Bare كانَ خَرَجَ is not impossible - older texts drop قَدْ freely and modern prose does so occasionally - but it is rare enough to read as a slip, so keep the particle. The order is fixed too - قَدْ sits between the two verbs. قَدْ كانَ الأَمْرُ صَعْبًا is a different sentence: there قَدْ is emphasising كانَ itself (rule 1), and there is no second verb at all.

8. سَيَكونُ قَدْ + ماضٍ = “will have done”. Move كانَ into the future and the same قَدْ + ماضٍ now sits before a point ahead of you: سَيَكونُ الضُّيوفُ قَدْ وَصَلوا قَبْلَ الغُروبِ. The مُضارِع يَكونُ also appears under أَنْ, where it goes مَنْصوب (lesson 34) and the whole thing expresses an inference rather than a time: لا بُدَّ أَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ نَسِيَ المَوْعِدَ, “he must have forgotten the appointment”. That one pattern covers English “must have / may have done”.

9. كانَ سَـ + مُضارِع = “was going to do”. Keep كانَ in the past and hand the second verb the future prefix, and you get an intention that was never carried out: كانَ سَيُسافِرُ إِلى تونِسَ، لٰكِنَّهُ مَرِضَ. Note where the سَـ goes - on the مُضارِع, always. *سَكانَ is not a word.

10. ما زالَ / لا يَزالُ + مُضارِع = “is still doing”. Lesson 43 gave you these with a one-word predicate (ما زالَ الطَّريقُ مُغْلَقًا). With a verb they express a continuing action: ما زالَ يَعْمَلُ في الشَّرِكَةِ. Both shapes mean the present; pick by person - ما زِلْتُ أَنْتَظِرُ or لا أَزالُ أَنْتَظِرُ. For a past “was still doing”, stack كانَ on the front: كانَ لا يَزالُ يَعْمَلُ هُناكَ. The natural opposite is not a negated ما زالَ but a different verb: لَمْ يَعُدْ يَعْمَلُ هُناكَ, “he no longer works there” - the jussive of عادَ (lesson 35) plus a مُضارِع.

11. أَصْبَحَ / صارَ + مُضارِع = “came to do, now does”. The “becoming” sisters take a verb clause as readily as a noun, and then mark entry into a state or habit: أَصْبَحْتُ أَفْهَمُ الأَخْبارَ بِالعَرَبِيَّةِ. Compare أَصْبَحْتُ مُهَنْدِسًا with its مَنْصوب noun (lesson 43): a single word takes the accusative, a clause takes nothing.

12. Both verbs agree, every time. كانَ is a real verb with a real subject, and so is the second one, so both carry the person: كُنْتُ أَدْرُسُ، كُنّا قَدْ دَرَسْنا، كانوا يَدْرُسونَ. There is no *كانَ يَدْرُسونَ. The one apparent exception is not one: when a noun subject stands between the two verbs, lesson 19 applies to each verb separately - كانَ precedes its subject and stays singular, the second verb follows it and agrees fully:

كانَ الطُّلّابُ يَنْتَظِرونَ أَمامَ البابِ. / كانَتِ الطّالِباتُ قَدْ خَرَجْنَ.

13. Negation lands on كانَ, not on the second verb. To negate a compound tense you negate its first word, exactly as you learned in lesson 37, and the rest of the structure is untouched: لَمْ يَكُنْ يَدْرُسُ “he did not use to study”, لَمْ يَكُنْ قَدْ وَصَلَ “he had not arrived”, لَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ وَصَلَ “he will not have arrived”. قَدْ survives inside لَمْ يَكُنْ قَدْ وَصَلَ, and rule 4 is not broken: لَمْ negates يَكُنْ, while قَدْ stays welded to its own verb وَصَلَ.

14. Not in this lesson. Three close relatives are held back. وَ + قَدْ + ماضٍ hung on a sentence (خَرَجَ وقَدْ حَمَلَ حَقيبَتَهُ) is a circumstantial clause and belongs with الحال in lesson 55. قَدْ in front of a passive - قَدْ كُتِبَتِ الرِّسالَةُ - waits for lesson 52, where the passive is built. And لَوْ كانَ قَدْ فَعَلَ, the unreal “if he had done”, is lesson 65. All three reuse this lesson’s grammar; none needs a new rule.

Forms & patterns

The three faces of قَدْ

التَّرْكيبReadingمِثالEnglish
قَدْ + ماضٍcompleted, “has already”قَدْ وَصَلَ القِطارُ.The train has arrived.
لَقَدْ + ماضٍemphatic assertionلَقَدْ نَجَحْتُ.I really did pass.
قَدْ + مُضارِع مَرْفوعpossibility, “may”قَدْ يَصِلُ غَدًا.He may arrive tomorrow.
قَدْ + لا + مُضارِعdenied possibilityقَدْ لا يَصِلُ غَدًا.He may not arrive tomorrow.

The compound tenses

التَّرْكيبTime and aspectمِثالEnglish
كانَ + مُضارِعhabit or action in progress, in the pastكانَ يَدْرُسُhe used to study, was studying
كانَ قَدْ + ماضٍfinished before another past pointكانَ قَدْ خَرَجَhe had gone out
سَيَكونُ قَدْ + ماضٍfinished before a future pointسَيَكونُ قَدْ وَصَلَhe will have arrived
أَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ + ماضٍinferred completionلا بُدَّ أَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ وَصَلَhe must have arrived
كانَ سَـ + مُضارِعpast intention, not carried outكانَ سَيُسافِرُhe was going to travel
ما زالَ / لا يَزالُ + مُضارِعstill going on nowما زالَ يَعْمَلُhe is still working
كانَ لا يَزالُ + مُضارِعstill going on thenكانَ لا يَزالُ يَعْمَلُhe was still working
أَصْبَحَ / صارَ + مُضارِعentry into a state or habitأَصْبَحَ يَفْهَمُhe came to understand
لَمْ يَعُدْ + مُضارِعexit from a state or habitلَمْ يَعُدْ يَعْمَلُhe no longer works

The two commonest compounds through the persons

الضَّميركانَ + مُضارِعكانَ قَدْ + ماضٍ
أَناكُنْتُ أَدْرُسُكُنْتُ قَدْ دَرَسْتُ
أَنْتَكُنْتَ تَدْرُسُكُنْتَ قَدْ دَرَسْتَ
أَنْتِكُنْتِ تَدْرُسينَكُنْتِ قَدْ دَرَسْتِ
هُوَكانَ يَدْرُسُكانَ قَدْ دَرَسَ
هِيَكانَتْ تَدْرُسُكانَتْ قَدْ دَرَسَتْ
نَحْنُكُنّا نَدْرُسُكُنّا قَدْ دَرَسْنا
أَنْتُمْكُنْتُمْ تَدْرُسونَكُنْتُمْ قَدْ دَرَسْتُمْ
هُمْكانوا يَدْرُسونَكانوا قَدْ دَرَسوا
هُنَّكُنَّ يَدْرُسْنَكُنَّ قَدْ دَرَسْنَ

The duals and أَنْتُنَّ are left out only to keep the table short (كُنْتُما تَدْرُسانِ، كانا قَدْ دَرَسا، كُنْتُنَّ قَدْ دَرَسْتُنَّ). No new morphology appears anywhere in it - this is the lesson-22 past set standing beside the lesson-18 present set.

How each one is negated

PositiveNegativeEnglish
قَدْ دَرَسَلَمْ يَدْرُسْ / ما دَرَسَhe has not studied (قَدْ disappears)
قَدْ يَدْرُسُقَدْ لا يَدْرُسُhe may not study
كانَ يَدْرُسُلَمْ يَكُنْ يَدْرُسُ / ما كانَ يَدْرُسُhe did not use to study
كانَ قَدْ دَرَسَلَمْ يَكُنْ قَدْ دَرَسَhe had not studied
سَيَكونُ قَدْ دَرَسَلَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ دَرَسَhe will not have studied
ما زالَ يَدْرُسُلَمْ يَعُدْ يَدْرُسُhe no longer studies

Examples

العربيةEnglish
قَدْ وَصَلَ القِطارُ إِلَى المَحَطَّةِ قَبْلَ دَقيقَتَيْنِ.The train arrived at the station two minutes ago.
قَدِ انْتَهى الاجْتِماعُ وخَرَجَ الجَميعُ.The meeting has ended and everyone has left.
لَقَدْ نَجَحْتُ في الامْتِحانِ بَعْدَ عَمَلٍ طَويلٍ.I really did pass the exam after a lot of work.
قَدْ يَصِلُ المُديرُ غَدًا، ولٰكِنَّني لَسْتُ مُتَأَكِّدًا.The manager may arrive tomorrow, but I am not sure.
قَدْ لا نَجِدُ مَكانًا في القاعَةِ الصَّغيرَةِ.We may not find a seat in the small hall.
كُنّا نَسْكُنُ قُرْبَ البَحْرِ عِنْدَما كُنْتُ صَغيرًا.We used to live near the sea when I was small.
كانَ الطُّلّابُ يَنْتَظِرونَ أَمامَ البابِ.The students were waiting in front of the door.
وَصَلْتُ مُتَأَخِّرًا، فَكانَ المُحاضِرُ قَدْ بَدَأَ دَرْسَهُ.I arrived late, so the lecturer had already begun his lesson.
لَمْ يَكُنْ أَخي قَدْ عادَ مِنَ السَّفَرِ حينَ اتَّصَلْتُ بِهِ.My brother had not come back from his trip when I called him.
سَيَكونُ الضُّيوفُ قَدْ وَصَلوا قَبْلَ الغُروبِ.The guests will have arrived before sunset.
لا بُدَّ أَنْ يَكونَ قَدْ نَسِيَ المَوْعِدَ.He must have forgotten the appointment.
كانَ سَيُسافِرُ إِلى تونِسَ، لٰكِنَّهُ مَرِضَ فَجْأَةً.He was going to travel to Tunis, but he suddenly fell ill.
ما زالَ جَدّي يَقْرَأُ الصَّحيفَةَ كُلَّ صَباحٍ.My grandfather still reads the newspaper every morning.
أَصْبَحْتُ أَفْهَمُ الأَخْبارَ بِالعَرَبِيَّةِ بِسُهولَةٍ.I have come to understand the news in Arabic easily.

Common mistakes

  • كانَ خَرَجَ قَبْلَ وُصولي. -> كانَ قَدْ خَرَجَ قَبْلَ وُصولي. - Two bare past verbs do not on their own read as one tense. قَدْ is the joint between them, and in modern writing it is all but obligatory.
  • كانَ يَدْرُسونَ في المَكْتَبَةِ. -> كانوا يَدْرُسونَ في المَكْتَبَةِ. - Both verbs carry the person. كانَ may only stay singular when a noun subject follows it: كانَ الطُّلّابُ يَدْرُسونَ.
  • قَدْ يَذْهَبَ إِلَى المَطارِ. -> قَدْ يَذْهَبُ إِلَى المَطارِ. - قَدْ is not a ناصِب. The مُضارِع after it keeps its ordinary مَرْفوع ḍamma, whatever أَنْ and لَنْ do (lesson 33).
  • لَمْ قَدْ يَصِلْ. -> لَمْ يَصِلْ. - قَدْ itself is never negated. To deny قَدْ وَصَلَ you drop قَدْ and use لَمْ or ما (lesson 37); only قَدْ لا + مُضارِع (rule 3) puts a negative after قَدْ, and there it is the verb that is negated.
  • لَقَدْ يَنْجَحُ في الامْتِحانِ. -> لَقَدْ نَجَحَ في الامْتِحانِ. - لَقَدْ asserts a fact and in modern Arabic it precedes الماضي. For a مُضارِع the particle is bare قَدْ, and the meaning becomes “may”.
  • قَدِ الطّالِبُ نَجَحَ. -> قَدْ نَجَحَ الطّالِبُ. - Nothing at all comes between قَدْ and its verb; the noun subject follows the verb as in any جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة (lesson 19).
  • سَكانَ قَدْ وَصَلَ. -> سَيَكونُ قَدْ وَصَلَ. - The سَـ of the future attaches to a مُضارِع only (lesson 24). The future of كانَ is سَيَكونُ, never a prefix on the past form.
  • ما زالَ عَمِلَ في الشَّرِكَةِ. -> ما زالَ يَعْمَلُ في الشَّرِكَةِ. - “Still doing” is an action in progress, so the second verb is a مُضارِع. ما زالَ plus a past verb says nothing.
  • كانَتْ قَدْ وَصَلوا مُتَأَخِّرينَ. -> كانوا قَدْ وَصَلوا مُتَأَخِّرينَ. - كانَ agrees with its own subject too. A mismatch between the two verbs is the commonest slip in this structure.
  • كانَ قَدْ يَخْرُجُ كُلَّ مَساءٍ. -> كانَ يَخْرُجُ كُلَّ مَساءٍ. - قَدْ belongs with the past verb inside كانَ. With a مُضارِع it produces nothing usable; the habit needs كانَ + مُضارِع alone.

Tips

  • Before you translate قَدْ, look at the next word, not at قَدْ. Past verb behind it means certainty, present verb means doubt. That one reflex handles ninety per cent of the particle.
  • Hold the compound tenses as two slots: كانَ says when, the second verb says what kind. You are not memorising nine idioms, you are crossing two short lists.
  • Say the three-word compounds as a single lump - كانَقَدْخَرَجَ، سَيَكونُقَدْوَصَلَ - so قَدْ is never left out under pressure. It is the one piece learners drop.
  • لَقَدْ is a single word, it opens its clause (only a connecting وَ may come before it), and in modern Arabic it takes الماضي. If you can put “did” in the English (I did pay), لَقَدْ fits.
  • Ordinary print gives you قد with no vowels at all, so the following verb is your only signal
    • the skill the pronunciation guide drills: قد وصل is “has arrived”, قد يصل is “may arrive”. Read the verb, then the particle.
  • Harvest كانَ قَدْ from any news report - narrative prose runs on it, and copying real sentences fixes the word order faster than drills do.
  • Leave three relatives alone for now: وقَدْ in a حال clause (lesson 55), قَدْ with a passive verb (lesson 52), and لَوْ كانَ قَدْ for unreal past conditions (lesson 65).

B1 46 / 70

The derived verb forms: the system

الفِعْلُ المُجَرَّدُ والمَزيد

In short

A three-letter root is not one verb. It is a small factory that can turn out up to ten verbs, each built on a different mould and each meaning something predictably different. From ع-ل-م Arabic makes عَلِمَ “he knew”, عَلَّمَ “he taught”, أَعْلَمَ “he informed”, تَعَلَّمَ “he learned” and اِسْتَعْلَمَ “he inquired”. English needs five unrelated words for that; Arabic needs one root and five shapes. Those shapes are called الأَوْزان, the measures, and Western books number them with Roman numerals I to X.

This lesson is the map, not the territory. You will not conjugate anything here - that is lessons 47 and 53. What you get is the whole grid on one page: which measure looks like what, what each one tends to do to the root’s meaning, and two small diagnostics that let you name a verb’s measure the moment you see it. It is the single highest-value hour in the Arabic verb, because after it every new verb you meet arrives pre-sorted: not “another word to memorise” but “ع-ل-م, Form X”.

The rule

1. الميزانُ الصَّرْفِيُّ: weighing a verb against فعل. Lesson 22 introduced the measuring stick. The root ف-ع-ل is used as a ruler: ف stands for the first root letter, ع for the second, ل for the third, and everything else printed in the mould - a shadda, a long ا, a hamza, a تـ, a نـ, a سـ - belongs to the mould and not to your root. So دَرَّسَ is on the measure فَعَّلَ, اِسْتَقْبَلَ is on the measure اِسْتَفْعَلَ, and اِجْتَمَعَ is on the measure اِفْتَعَلَ. Say the measure out loud after the verb and the shape will start to be visible to you: اِسْتَقْبَلَ اِسْتَفْعَلَ.

2. مُجَرَّد against مَزيد. A verb whose past tense contains nothing but its three root letters and their vowels is مُجَرَّد, “stripped bare”: كَتَبَ، شَرِبَ، كَبُرَ. That is Form I, and it is the only measure with no added material at all. Every other measure is مَزيد, “augmented” - it adds one, two or three letters to the skeleton. The additions are never random. They come from the same small stock lesson 22 taught you to suspect: a doubled middle radical (II), a lengthening ا (III), a hamza (IV), a تـ in front (V, VI), a نـ in front (VII), a ت pushed inside (VIII), a doubled last radical (IX), and اِسْتـ in front (X).

3. Two names for every measure. Arabs name a measure by its own shape - الوَزْنُ فَعَّلَ - or by an ordinal, الوَزْنُ الثّاني. English-language books and dictionaries use Roman numerals, because “Form II” is easier to index than فَعَّلَ. Both name the same thing, and a root-ordered dictionary prints the measures of a root in exactly this order: I, then II, then III, down to X. Learn the numbers as a filing system and the shapes as the reality.

4. What each measure does - a tendency, never a law. The table below gives each measure’s characteristic effect: II intensifies or makes someone do it, III aims the action at another party, IV makes someone do it, V is the reflexive of II, VI is the reciprocal of III, VII is what happens to something with nobody named as the doer, VIII is often a middle voice or simply another lexical verb, IX is colours and bodily defects, X is asking or seeking. These are tendencies that hold often enough to be worth knowing and not often enough to be trusted. اِسْتَخْدَمَ is Form X and means “he used”, not “he sought service”. اِسْتَطاعَ is Form X and means “he was able”. Read the tendency as a first guess that the dictionary either confirms or overrides.

5. One root straight across. The clean case is ع-ل-م, “knowing”, where five measures are in everyday use and their meanings really do follow the tendencies: عَلِمَ “he knew” (I), عَلَّمَ “he taught”, literally “he made someone know” (II), أَعْلَمَ “he informed” (IV), تَعَلَّمَ “he learned”, the reflexive of “teach” (V), اِسْتَعْلَمَ “he inquired”, the seeking of knowledge (X). Notice that ع-ل-م has no ordinary Forms III, VI, VII, VIII or IX in modern use. That is normal. No root fills all ten slots; a typical root has three or four live measures, and the dictionary is the only authority on which. You may recognise a measure, but you may not invent one.

6. First diagnostic: the vowel on حَرْفُ المُضارَعَة. Every imperfect verb starts with a prefix letter - أ، ن، ي، ت. Of the ten measures, that prefix carries a ḍamma in Forms II, III and IV, and a fatḥa in all the others:

  • ḍamma: يُدَرِّسُ (II)، يُساعِدُ (III)، يُرْسِلُ (IV).
  • fatḥa: يَكْتُبُ (I)، يَتَعَلَّمُ (V)، يَتَعاوَنُ (VI)، يَنْكَسِرُ (VII)، يَجْتَمِعُ (VIII)، يَحْمَرُّ (IX)، يَسْتَقْبِلُ (X).

This is the most useful single fact in the whole system, because it splits the ten measures into three and seven at a glance. Two things sit outside that split. The passive also takes a ḍamma prefix - يُكْتَبُ “it is written” is Form I, not Form IV. The two are told apart by the vowel before the last radical (a fatḥa in the passive: يُكْتَبُ against يُرْسِلُ), and by the fact that the passive of a Form I verb has no visible augment. Lesson 52 handles it properly. And the four-letter measure فَعْلَلَ takes a ḍamma too: تَرْجَمَ ← يُتَرْجِمُ (point 10). So for now, read a ḍamma prefix as “II, III, IV - a four-letter root - or a passive”.

7. Second diagnostic: هَمْزَةُ القَطْعِ against هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ. Four measures begin their past tense with an alif, and the alif is not the same alif.

  • Form IV begins with هَمْزَةُ القَطْع, written أَ and always pronounced: أَعْلَمَ، أَرْسَلَ، أَغْلَقَ. It is a genuine consonant. In the imperfect it disappears altogether: أَرْسَلَ ← يُرْسِلُ، not يُأَرْسِلُ.
  • Forms VII, VIII, IX and X begin with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل, written as a bare ا and pronounced i- only when the word starts a phrase: اِنْكَسَرَ، اِجْتَمَعَ، اِحْمَرَّ، اِسْتَقْبَلَ. Mid-sentence it is elided - you write the alif but do not pronounce it: وانْكَسَرَ الزُّجاجُ، ثُمَّ اجْتَمَعوا. In the imperfect it vanishes from the writing too: يَنْكَسِرُ، يَجْتَمِعُ، يَسْتَقْبِلُ.

So among the derived measures a past-tense verb starting with أ is Form IV, and one starting with a bare ا is VII, VIII, IX or X. (A hamza-initial Form I verb like أَكَلَ “he ate” or أَخَذَ “he took” also opens with أَ, but there the hamza is a root letter, not a measure marker.) This is a spelling rule with teeth: writing أَسْتَقْبَلَ for اِسْتَقْبَلَ is an error, not a variant, and it is one of the commonest in learner writing.

8. Neither diagnostic survives an unvocalized page. Both clues live in marks that ordinary Arabic does not print. Unvocalized, يدرس is either يَدْرُسُ “he studies” or يُدَرِّسُ “he teaches”; علم is عَلِمَ، عَلَّمَ، عُلِمَ، عِلْمٌ or عَلَمٌ. What you actually read is the consonant skeleton plus the context, exactly as lesson 22 predicted: the letters give you the root, the mould gives you the measure, and the sentence chooses between the moulds that fit. يدرس الأستاذ اللغة العربية في الجامعة is “the professor studies”; يدرس الأستاذ الطلاب اللغة العربية is “the professor teaches”, because a second accusative has appeared and, of the readings this skeleton allows, only the causative measure governs two objects. Note that the subject has to be named for the test to work: يدرس الطلاب اللغة العربية on its own is still ambiguous, since الطلاب can just as well be the nominative subject of يَدْرُسُ. Train the habit now: when a skeleton is ambiguous, ask what the surrounding nouns are doing.

9. Form I’s imperfect vowel is lexical - stop looking for a rule. The augmented measures are regular: once you know a verb is Form II, يُفَعِّلُ is guaranteed. Form I is not. Its imperfect takes a ḍamma, a kasra or a fatḥa on the middle radical, and the choice is a property of the individual verb that you must learn with it: كَتَبَ/يَكْتُبُ، ضَرَبَ/يَضْرِبُ، فَتَحَ/يَفْتَحُ، شَرِبَ/يَشْرَبُ، كَبُرَ/يَكْبُرُ. Two weak tendencies help a little - a past with a kasra (شَرِبَ) usually gives a fatḥa imperfect, and a root containing a throat letter (ح، خ، ع، غ، ه، ء) often takes a fatḥa: فَتَحَ/يَفْتَحُ، ذَهَبَ/يَذْهَبُ. Neither is reliable. Write the imperfect into your notebook every time you meet a new Form I verb.

10. Which measures you actually meet. I, II, V, VIII and X are everywhere in modern prose. III, IV, VI and VII are common. IX is marginal - it exists almost only for colours and physical defects (اِحْمَرَّ “turn red”, اِسْوَدَّ “turn black”, اِعْوَجَّ “become crooked”) and you will meet it mostly in reading. Classical grammars also list measures XI to XV (اِحْمارَّ and friends); they are vanishingly rare in Modern Standard Arabic and you can ignore them entirely. Four-letter roots run on their own small system, فَعْلَلَ - تَرْجَمَ “he translated” - which lesson 48 covers.

11. What this lesson deliberately leaves alone. Conjugating each measure through the persons, the moods and the imperative is lessons 47-53; roots containing ء، و، ي or a doubled radical distort these shapes and get lessons 49-56. The passive is lesson 52, the participles and place nouns lesson 53, and the verbal noun - largely regular for II-X, wildly irregular for I - lesson 54. For now, learn to name a measure and expect a meaning.

Forms & patterns

The ten measures, in the الماضي and the المُضارِع المَرْفوع of هُوَ only. Everything else - the other persons, the moods, the imperative, the مَصْدَر - is left to lessons 47-53 and 59.

#الماضيالمُضارِع المَرْفوعمَيْلُ المَعْنى (tendency)
Iفَعَلَيَفْعُلُ / يَفْعِلُ / يَفْعَلُthe bare meaning of the root
IIفَعَّلَيُفَعِّلُmake someone do it; do it intensively or repeatedly
IIIفاعَلَيُفاعِلُdo it to or with another party
IVأَفْعَلَيُفْعِلُmake someone do it, cause it to happen
Vتَفَعَّلَيَتَفَعَّلُreflexive of II - do it to oneself, become it
VIتَفاعَلَيَتَفاعَلُreciprocal of III - do it to one another
VIIاِنْفَعَلَيَنْفَعِلُit happens to the subject; no doer is named
VIIIاِفْتَعَلَيَفْتَعِلُmiddle voice, do it for oneself - often just lexical
IXاِفْعَلَّيَفْعَلُّturn a colour; acquire a physical defect
Xاِسْتَفْعَلَيَسْتَفْعِلُseek it, ask for it, consider it to be so

The same ten with a live verb in each slot:

#الوَزْنمِثال - الماضيالمُضارِعEnglish
Iفَعَلَكَتَبَيَكْتُبُto write
IIفَعَّلَدَرَّسَيُدَرِّسُto teach
IIIفاعَلَساعَدَيُساعِدُto help
IVأَفْعَلَأَرْسَلَيُرْسِلُto send
Vتَفَعَّلَتَعَلَّمَيَتَعَلَّمُto learn
VIتَفاعَلَتَعاوَنَيَتَعاوَنُto cooperate
VIIاِنْفَعَلَاِنْكَسَرَيَنْكَسِرُto break (by itself)
VIIIاِفْتَعَلَاِجْتَمَعَيَجْتَمِعُto meet, to assemble
IXاِفْعَلَّاِحْمَرَّيَحْمَرُّto turn red
Xاِسْتَفْعَلَاِسْتَقْبَلَيَسْتَقْبِلُto receive, to welcome

One root traced across the system - ع-ل-م. The empty measures are empty in real usage:

#الفِعْلالمُضارِعEnglish
Iعَلِمَيَعْلَمُto know
IIعَلَّمَيُعَلِّمُto teach (make know)
IVأَعْلَمَيُعْلِمُto inform
Vتَعَلَّمَيَتَعَلَّمُto learn (make oneself know)
Xاِسْتَعْلَمَيَسْتَعْلِمُto inquire (seek to know)

Diagnostic 1 - the vowel on the prefix letter:

حَرَكَةُ حَرْفِ المُضارَعَةالأَوْزانأَمْثِلَة
ضَمَّةII, III, IV, and فَعْلَلَيُعَلِّمُ، يُشاهِدُ، يُعْلِمُ، يُتَرْجِمُ
فَتْحَةI, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, Xيَعْلَمُ، يَتَعَلَّمُ، يَتَعاوَنُ، يَنْكَسِرُ، يَجْتَمِعُ، يَحْمَرُّ، يَسْتَعْلِمُ
ضَمَّةالمَبْنِيُّ لِلْمَجْهول (lesson 52)يُكْتَبُ، يُعْلَمُ

Diagnostic 2 - which alif starts the past tense:

الهَمْزَةالوَزْنالماضيالمُضارِع
هَمْزَةُ القَطْع (أَ)IVأَعْلَمَ، أَرْسَلَيُعْلِمُ، يُرْسِلُ
هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل (ا)VIIاِنْقَطَعَيَنْقَطِعُ
هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل (ا)VIIIاِنْتَظَرَيَنْتَظِرُ
هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل (ا)IXاِسْوَدَّيَسْوَدُّ
هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل (ا)Xاِسْتَخْدَمَيَسْتَخْدِمُ

Form I’s imperfect vowel, which no rule predicts:

الماضيالمُضارِعالنَّمَطEnglish
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُفَعَلَ / يَفْعُلُto write
ضَرَبَيَضْرِبُفَعَلَ / يَفْعِلُto hit
فَتَحَيَفْتَحُفَعَلَ / يَفْعَلُto open
شَرِبَيَشْرَبُفَعِلَ / يَفْعَلُto drink
كَبُرَيَكْبُرُفَعُلَ / يَفْعُلُto grow big

What an unvocalized skeleton hides - the measure is a guess until the sentence decides:

بِلا تَشْكيلالقِراءات المُمْكِنَةكَيْفَ نَخْتار
يدرسيَدْرُسُ (I) / يُدَرِّسُ (II) / يُدْرَسُ (passive I)a named subject plus two objects forces II
علمعَلِمَ (I) / عَلَّمَ (II) / عُلِمَ (passive) / عِلْمٌ / عَلَمٌa following subject forces a verb
استقبلاِسْتَقْبَلَ (X, past) / اِسْتَقْبِلْ (X, imperative)the sentence’s tense frame

Examples

العربيةEnglish
يَدْرُسُ أَخي فِي الجامِعَةِ، ويُدَرِّسُ أَبي فِي المَدْرَسَةِ.My brother studies at the university, and my father teaches at the school.
عَلَّمَتْنا المُعَلِّمَةُ قَواعِدَ اللُّغَةِ العَرَبِيَّةِ.The teacher taught us the rules of the Arabic language.
أَعْلَمَ المُديرُ المُوَظَّفينَ بِالقَرارِ الجَديدِ.The manager informed the employees of the new decision.
تَعَلَّمْتُ العَرَبِيَّةَ فِي سَنَتَيْنِ.I learned Arabic in two years.
اِسْتَعْلَمْنا عَنْ مَواعيدِ القِطارِ.We inquired about the train times.
ساعَدَ الجارُ جارَهُ فِي نَقْلِ الأَثاثِ.The neighbour helped his neighbour move the furniture.
تَعاوَنَ الطُّلّابُ عَلى تَنْظيفِ الصَّفِّ.The students cooperated in cleaning the classroom.
اِنْكَسَرَ الزُّجاجُ بَعْدَ العاصِفَةِ.The glass broke after the storm.
اِجْتَمَعَ الوُزَراءُ فِي العاصِمَةِ صَباحَ أَمْسِ.The ministers met in the capital yesterday morning.
اِسْتَقْبَلَ الرَّئيسُ ضُيوفَهُ فِي المَطارِ.The president received his guests at the airport.
اِحْمَرَّ وَجْهُهُ مِنَ الخَجَلِ.His face turned red with embarrassment.
أَرْسَلْتُ الرِّسالَةَ ثُمَّ انْتَظَرْتُ الجَوابَ.I sent the letter and then waited for the answer.
يَسْتَخْدِمُ المُهَنْدِسونَ بَرْنامَجًا جَديدًا فِي الشَّرِكَةِ.The engineers use a new program at the company.
هَلْ تُشاهِدُ المُباراةَ مَعَنا اللَّيْلَةَ؟Are you watching the match with us tonight?

Common mistakes

  • دَرَسَ الأُسْتاذُ الطُّلّابَ -> دَرَّسَ الأُسْتاذُ الطُّلّابَ - one shadda is the whole difference between studying something and teaching someone. Read the shadda before you translate.
  • يُدْرُسُ الطّالِبُ -> يَدْرُسُ الطّالِبُ - an active Form I never takes a ḍamma on the prefix. The ḍamma belongs to II, III and IV, to the four-letter فَعْلَلَ, and to the passive.
  • يُجْتَمِعُ الوُزَراءُ -> يَجْتَمِعُ الوُزَراءُ - Form VIII is outside the ḍamma group; every measure from V to X starts its imperfect with a fatḥa.
  • أَسْتَقْبَلَ الرَّئيسُ ضُيوفَهُ -> اِسْتَقْبَلَ الرَّئيسُ ضُيوفَهُ - Form X begins with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل, a bare alif. Only Form IV is spelled with أ.
  • اِعْلَمَ المُديرُ المُوَظَّفينَ -> أَعْلَمَ المُديرُ المُوَظَّفينَ - and the trap in the other direction: Form IV’s hamza is a real consonant, so it must be written and pronounced.
  • يُأَرْسِلُ الوَلَدُ الرِّسالَةَ -> يُرْسِلُ الوَلَدُ الرِّسالَةَ - Form IV’s hamza survives only in the past. The imperfect drops it and keeps the ḍamma prefix as its trace.
  • يَتَعَلِّمُ الأَطْفالُ -> يَتَعَلَّمُ الأَطْفالُ - Form V keeps a fatḥa on the doubled radical (يَتَفَعَّلُ). The kasra there belongs to Form II, يُعَلِّمُ.
  • كَتَبَ ← يَكْتِبُ -> كَتَبَ ← يَكْتُبُ - Form I’s imperfect vowel is a lexical fact, not a derivation. Learn it as part of the word, the way you learn a plural.
  • اِنْكَسَرَ الوَلَدُ الزُّجاجَ -> كَسَرَ الوَلَدُ الزُّجاجَ - Form VII names no doer and takes no object. If you want an agent and an object, use Form I.
  • اِسْتَخْدَمَ = “he asked for service” -> اِسْتَخْدَمَ = “he used” - the “seeking” of Form X is a tendency in the mould, not a promise in the dictionary. Always confirm the actual meaning.

Tips

  • Memorise the two vocalized skeletons فَعَّلَ/يُفَعِّلُ and اِسْتَفْعَلَ/يَسْتَفْعِلُ first. They are among the most productive measures in modern Arabic, and everything else fits around them.
  • Chant the prefix rule as a single line - ضَمَّة في الثّاني والثّالِثِ والرّابِعِ، وفَتْحَة في الباقي. It resolves most identification questions in under a second.
  • Keep a page in your notebook per root, laid out as ten numbered rows, and fill in a row whenever you meet a new verb. Seeing the gaps is as instructive as seeing the entries.
  • Whenever you learn a new verb, record three things and never fewer: the past, the imperfect and the measure number. With Form I, the imperfect vowel is the part you will forget.
  • Treat the meaning column as a hypothesis generator, then confirm it in the dictionary. Ignore Form IX until you read a novel, and ignore measures XI-XV forever - they are Classical shapes.
  • Practise on headlines, where the measures are dense: اِجْتَمَعَ، اِسْتَقْبَلَ، أَعْلَنَ، اِسْتَأْنَفَ. Name the measure before you look for the meaning.
  • Do not try to conjugate yet. Recognition first, production in the next two lessons - the shapes need to be familiar before the paradigms will stick.

B1 47 / 70

Forms II-VI

الأَوْزان: فَعَّلَ، فاعَلَ، أَفْعَلَ، تَفَعَّلَ، تَفاعَلَ

In short

Lesson 46 laid out the grid: one root, a set of moulds, each mould a verb with its own shape and its own slant of meaning. This lesson conjugates the first five of those moulds - II فَعَّلَ, III فاعَلَ, IV أَفْعَلَ, V تَفَعَّلَ, VI تَفاعَلَ - the five you meet most often on a page of modern Arabic. دَرَّسَ “he taught”, سافَرَ “he travelled”, أَرْسَلَ “he sent”, تَعَلَّمَ “he learned”, تَعاوَنَ “he cooperated”: one completely ordinary verb from each.

The good news is that you already know the endings. Every person marker you learned for the plain verb - ـْتُ، ـْنا، ـوا at the back in الماضي, and the أَـ نَـ تَـ يَـ prefixes in المُضارِع - is exactly the same here. What changes is only the stem they attach to. So this lesson is not five new paradigms; it is five new stems plus two small vowel rules, and once those click you can conjugate a derived verb you have never seen, from its headword alone.

The rule

1. New stems, old endings. دَرَّسْتُ is a new stem plus the same ـْتُ that gave you كَتَبْتُ; يُدَرِّسونَ is a new stem inside the same يـ … ـونَ frame that gave you يَكْتُبونَ. Nothing about the ماضي endings, the مُضارِع frame, the silent alif of ـوا or the dual is renegotiated by the derived forms. Build the stem and the conjugation is free.

2. Form II فَعَّلَ doubles the middle radical. That is the whole shape: take د-ر-س, put a shadda on the ر, and you have دَرَّسَ. The past is three fatḥas - دَرَّسَ - and the imperfect is يُدَرِّسُ. Because the shadda is the only difference between دَرَسَ (Form I, “he studied”) and دَرَّسَ (Form II, “he taught”), and because ordinary Arabic rarely prints the shadda, this pair is the classic reading trap of the whole system. Write the shadda yourself, always.

3. Forms III and IV: a long ā, and a hamza that does not survive. Form III فاعَلَ inserts a long ا after the first radical: س-ف-ر gives سافَرَ, ش-ه-د gives شاهَدَ. Form IV أَفْعَلَ bolts a هَمْزَةُ قَطْعٍ onto the front and puts a sukūn on the first radical: ر-س-ل gives أَرْسَلَ, ع-ل-ن gives أَعْلَنَ. That أَ is a genuine قَطْع hamza in the past - you hear it, you write the seat - but it vanishes in the imperfect: أَرْسَلَ becomes يُرْسِلُ, never *يُأَرْسِلُ. In the first person only one hamza survives the collision: أُرْسِلُ, “I send”, not *أُأَرْسِلُ. Of the five moulds here, Form IV is the only one that loses a letter between its two tenses.

4. The prefix vowel splits the five forms into two families. This is the single most useful fact in the lesson, and the one beginners get wrong first:

  • Forms II, III and IV take a ḍamma on the imperfect prefix: يُدَرِّسُ، يُسافِرُ، يُرْسِلُ. Not يَـ - and in every person: أُدَرِّسُ، تُسافِرُ، نُرْسِلُ، يُشاهِدونَ.
  • Forms V and VI take a fatḥa, exactly like the plain verb: يَتَعَلَّمُ، يَتَعاوَنُ، أَتَكَلَّمُ، نَتَبادَلُ.

Say it as one sentence: the middle three take ḍamma, the تَـ pair takes fatḥa. Lesson 48 will confirm the generalisation behind it: among the ten triliteral forms only II, III and IV take a ḍamma there in the active. (The four-letter verb يُتَرْجِمُ of lesson 48 joins them, and the passive of lesson 52 vowels every prefix with a ḍamma - neither is a counter-example you need yet.)

5. The vowel before the last radical splits them the same way. II, III and IV carry a kasra on the letter in front of the last one - يُدَرِّسُ، يُسافِرُ، يُرْسِلُ - while V and VI carry a fatḥa there: يَتَعَلَّمُ، يَتَعاوَنُ. So the two rules travel together and you learn one thing, not two: يُـ + kasra against يَـ + fatḥa. The kasra also matters for a reason you meet in lesson 52: يُدَرَّسُ, with a fatḥa in that slot, is not a mistake but a different word - the passive, “is taught”.

6. Forms V and VI are Forms II and III with a تَـ in front. V تَفَعَّلَ is the doubled middle radical of II with تَـ prefixed; VI تَفاعَلَ is the long ā of III with تَـ prefixed. That تَـ is part of the word, not a person marker, which produces two consequences:

  • The V and VI past carries a fatḥa on every letter that has a vowel at all: تَعَلَّمَ، تَكَلَّمَ، تَعاوَنَ، تَبادَلَ. No kasra, no ḍamma, anywhere in the stem.
  • The imperfect of “you” and “she” ends up with two تs, one from the pattern and one from the person: تَتَعَلَّمُ “you learn / she learns”, تَتَكَلَّمينَ “you (f.) speak”. They look odd and they are correct. Never delete one.

7. تَعَلَّمَ is “he learned”, not “you learned”. A تَـ at the front of an Arabic verb usually means “you” or “she” - but only in المُضارِع. الماضي has no person prefix at all, so the تَـ of تَعَلَّمَ، تَكَلَّمَ، تَعاوَنَ can only be the pattern. تَعَلَّمَ is the dictionary headword, “he learned”; “you learned” adds the ordinary ending at the back, تَعَلَّمْتَ.

8. The نون of الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة is the مَرْفوع marker - and a second نون is not. Five cells of the imperfect end in ن: تُدَرِّسينَ، تُدَرِّسانِ، يُدَرِّسانِ، تُدَرِّسونَ، يُدَرِّسونَ. Those are الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ of lesson 40, and their final ن is نونُ الرَّفْعِ - it is how they show المُضارِع المَرْفوع, exactly as the ḍamma of يُدَرِّسُ shows it. In a plain statement the ن must be there; after لَنْ or أَنْ or لَمْ it drops (لَنْ يُدَرِّسوا). Two more cells end in ن - تُدَرِّسْنَ and يُدَرِّسْنَ - but theirs is نونُ النِّسْوَةِ, the pronoun itself, and it never falls off, because those cells are مَبْنِيّ.

9. What the forms mean: a strong tendency, not a formula. Each mould has a job, and knowing it turns half your vocabulary into something you can reconstruct instead of memorise:

  • II فَعَّلَ - makes a verb causative (عَلِمَ “knew” → عَلَّمَ “taught”, i.e. caused to know; دَرَسَ “studied” → دَرَّسَ “taught”), or intensifies it (كَسَرَ “broke” → كَسَّرَ “smashed to pieces”).
  • III فاعَلَ - aims the action at another party: كَتَبَ “wrote” → كاتَبَ “wrote to someone”; قَبِلَ “accepted” → قابَلَ “met, interviewed”; دَرَسَ → دارَسَ “studied with”. Form III verbs are usually transitive, and where the mould’s own sense is live the object is that other party.
  • IV أَفْعَلَ - causative again, often more bookish than II: عَلِمَ → أَعْلَمَ “informed”; خَرَجَ “went out” → أَخْرَجَ “took out, produced”.
  • V تَفَعَّلَ - the reflexive or the result of II. عَلَّمَ “taught” → تَعَلَّمَ “learned” (taught himself); حَرَّكَ “moved something” → تَحَرَّكَ “moved, set off”.
  • VI تَفاعَلَ - the reciprocal of III. كاتَبَ “wrote to” → تَكاتَبَ “wrote to each other”; قابَلَ “met” → تَقابَلَ “met one another”. A VI verb usually has a plural or dual subject.

10. Look it up anyway. Those tendencies are how the language got built, not a machine you can run in reverse. شاهَدَ is Form III but means plain “to watch”, with no second party in sight; سافَرَ is Form III with no Form I “travel” behind it; تَقَبَّلَ (V) is not the passive of قَبَّلَ (II) but “to receive, to accept graciously”. Use the pattern to remember a meaning you have read in a dictionary and to guess intelligently in a text - never to invent a verb. Most roots use only three or four of the ten forms, and which ones is a fact about the root.

11. Sound stems only, and only the two tenses. Every verb here conjugates like a sound triliteral: no hamza, no doubled radical, nothing inside the stem that shifts or drops. (تَعاوَنَ does carry a و in its root ع-و-ن, but the long ا of III and VI holds a weak middle radical in place as a consonant, so it behaves exactly like تَبادَلَ.) The roots that really do reshape these patterns are lessons 49-56. Also deliberately absent: the مَصْدَر of each form (lesson 54), the participles مُدَرِّس and مُتَعَلِّم (lesson 53), the passive يُدَرَّسُ (lesson 52), and Forms VII-X (lesson 48).

Forms & patterns

Form II in full. دَرَّسَ / يُدَرِّسُ (root د-ر-س, “to teach”), all thirteen persons in الماضي and in المُضارِع المَرْفوع:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع المَرْفوعEnglish
أَنادَرَّسْتُأُدَرِّسُI taught / I teach
أَنْتَدَرَّسْتَتُدَرِّسُyou (m. sg.)
أَنْتِدَرَّسْتِتُدَرِّسينَyou (f. sg.)
هُوَدَرَّسَيُدَرِّسُhe
هِيَدَرَّسَتْتُدَرِّسُshe
نَحْنُدَرَّسْنانُدَرِّسُwe
أَنْتُمادَرَّسْتُماتُدَرِّسانِyou two
هُما (مُذَكَّر)دَرَّسايُدَرِّسانِthose two (m.)
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)دَرَّسَتاتُدَرِّسانِthose two (f.)
أَنْتُمْدَرَّسْتُمْتُدَرِّسونَyou (m. pl.)
أَنْتُنَّدَرَّسْتُنَّتُدَرِّسْنَyou (f. pl.)
هُمْدَرَّسوايُدَرِّسونَthey (m. pl.)
هُنَّدَرَّسْنَيُدَرِّسْنَthey (f. pl.)

The five cells تُدَرِّسينَ، تُدَرِّسانِ، يُدَرِّسانِ، تُدَرِّسونَ، يُدَرِّسونَ are الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ, and their final ن is نونُ الرَّفْعِ, the marker of المَرْفوع. تُدَرِّسْنَ and يُدَرِّسْنَ end in ن too, but theirs is نونُ النِّسْوَةِ, a pronoun that never drops.

Forms III to VI, five slots each (أَنا، هُوَ، هِيَ، نَحْنُ، هُمْ). The eight cells not shown

  • أَنْتَ، أَنْتِ، أَنْتُمْ، أَنْتُنَّ، هُنَّ and the three duals - take exactly the endings of the Form II table above, on the same stem:
الوَزْنالفِعْلأَناهُوَهِيَنَحْنُهُمْ
III فاعَلَسافَرَ (to travel)سافَرْتُسافَرَسافَرَتْسافَرْناسافَروا
III فاعَلَيُسافِرُأُسافِرُيُسافِرُتُسافِرُنُسافِرُيُسافِرونَ
III فاعَلَشاهَدَ (to watch)شاهَدْتُشاهَدَشاهَدَتْشاهَدْناشاهَدوا
III فاعَلَيُشاهِدُأُشاهِدُيُشاهِدُتُشاهِدُنُشاهِدُيُشاهِدونَ
IV أَفْعَلَأَرْسَلَ (to send)أَرْسَلْتُأَرْسَلَأَرْسَلَتْأَرْسَلْناأَرْسَلوا
IV أَفْعَلَيُرْسِلُأُرْسِلُيُرْسِلُتُرْسِلُنُرْسِلُيُرْسِلونَ
IV أَفْعَلَأَعْلَنَ (to announce)أَعْلَنْتُأَعْلَنَأَعْلَنَتْأَعْلَنَّاأَعْلَنوا
IV أَفْعَلَيُعْلِنُأُعْلِنُيُعْلِنُتُعْلِنُنُعْلِنُيُعْلِنونَ
V تَفَعَّلَتَعَلَّمَ (to learn)تَعَلَّمْتُتَعَلَّمَتَعَلَّمَتْتَعَلَّمْناتَعَلَّموا
V تَفَعَّلَيَتَعَلَّمُأَتَعَلَّمُيَتَعَلَّمُتَتَعَلَّمُنَتَعَلَّمُيَتَعَلَّمونَ
V تَفَعَّلَتَكَلَّمَ (to speak)تَكَلَّمْتُتَكَلَّمَتَكَلَّمَتْتَكَلَّمْناتَكَلَّموا
V تَفَعَّلَيَتَكَلَّمُأَتَكَلَّمُيَتَكَلَّمُتَتَكَلَّمُنَتَكَلَّمُيَتَكَلَّمونَ
VI تَفاعَلَتَعاوَنَ (to cooperate)تَعاوَنْتُتَعاوَنَتَعاوَنَتْتَعاوَنَّاتَعاوَنوا
VI تَفاعَلَيَتَعاوَنُأَتَعاوَنُيَتَعاوَنُتَتَعاوَنُنَتَعاوَنُيَتَعاوَنونَ
VI تَفاعَلَتَبادَلَ (to exchange)تَبادَلْتُتَبادَلَتَبادَلَتْتَبادَلْناتَبادَلوا
VI تَفاعَلَيَتَبادَلُأَتَبادَلُيَتَبادَلُتَتَبادَلُنَتَبادَلُيَتَبادَلونَ

Two cells there deserve a second look. أَعْلَنَّا and تَعاوَنَّا carry a shadda because the last radical of ع-ل-ن and ع-و-ن is itself a ن and merges with the ن of the ending ـْنا. Nothing to do with the derived forms - Form I سَكَنَ does the same: سَكَنَّا.

The five moulds side by side. This is the table to memorise:

الوَزْنالماضيالمُضارِعprefixbefore the last radicaltypical job
II فَعَّلَدَرَّسَيُدَرِّسُـُـِcausative, intensive
III فاعَلَسافَرَيُسافِرُـُـِdone to / with someone
IV أَفْعَلَأَرْسَلَيُرْسِلُـُـِcausative, transitive
V تَفَعَّلَتَعَلَّمَيَتَعَلَّمُـَـَreflexive / result of II
VI تَفاعَلَتَعاوَنَيَتَعاوَنُـَـَmutual, reciprocal of III

Meaning read off the root. A dash means the root does not use that form in ordinary MSA:

الجَذْرIIIIIIIVVVI
ع-ل-معَلِمَ (knew)عَلَّمَ (taught)-أَعْلَمَ (informed)تَعَلَّمَ (learned)-
د-ر-سدَرَسَ (studied)دَرَّسَ (taught)دارَسَ (studied with)--تَدارَسَ (studied together)
ك-ت-بكَتَبَ (wrote)-كاتَبَ (wrote to)--تَكاتَبَ (corresponded)
ق-ب-لقَبِلَ (accepted)قَبَّلَ (kissed)قابَلَ (met)أَقْبَلَ (came forward)تَقَبَّلَ (received)تَقابَلَ (met each other)
ع-ر-فعَرَفَ (knew)عَرَّفَ (introduced)--تَعَرَّفَ (got acquainted)تَعارَفَ (got to know each other)
ك-س-ركَسَرَ (broke)كَسَّرَ (smashed up)--تَكَسَّرَ (shattered)-

Examples

العربيةEnglish
يُدَرِّسُ أَخي اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ في جامِعَةٍ صَغيرَةٍ.My brother teaches Arabic at a small university.
هَلْ تُدَرِّسينَ في هٰذِهِ المَدْرَسَةِ مُنْذُ سَنَواتٍ؟Have you (f.) been teaching at this school for years?
هُمْ يُدَرِّسونَ التّاريخَ، ونَحْنُ نُدَرِّسُ الرِّياضِيّاتِ.They teach history, and we teach mathematics.
دَرَسْتُ في القاهِرَةِ سَنَتَيْنِ، ثُمَّ دَرَّسْتُ فيها سَنَةً.I studied in Cairo for two years, then I taught there for a year.
سافَرْنا إِلى تونِسَ في الصَّيْفِ الماضي.We travelled to Tunisia last summer.
يُشاهِدُ الأَوْلادُ فيلْمًا قَصيرًا بَعْدَ الدَّرْسِ.The children watch a short film after the lesson.
أَرْسَلَتِ الشَّرِكَةُ رِسالَةً إِلى كُلِّ المُوَظَّفينَ.The company sent a letter to all the employees.
أُرْسِلُ إِلَيْكَ العُنْوانَ بَعْدَ قَليلٍ.I will send you the address shortly.
أَعْلَنَتِ الوِزارَةُ نَتائِجَ الامْتِحانِ أَمْسِ.The ministry announced the exam results yesterday.
تَعَلَّمْتُ العَرَبِيَّةَ وَحْدي، وأُخْتي تَتَعَلَّمُ الفارِسِيَّةَ الآنَ.I learned Arabic on my own, and my sister is learning Persian now.
هَلْ تَتَكَلَّمُ الإِنْجِليزِيَّةَ مَعَ زُمَلائِكَ؟Do you speak English with your colleagues?
تَعاوَنَ الجيرانُ في تَنْظيفِ الشّارِعِ.The neighbours cooperated in cleaning the street.
نَتَبادَلُ الرَّسائِلَ مُنْذُ سَنَواتٍ طَويلَةٍ.We have been exchanging letters for many years.
عَلَّمَني أَبي القِراءَةَ قَبْلَ المَدْرَسَةِ.My father taught me to read before school.

Common mistakes

  • يَدَرِّسُ -> يُدَرِّسُ - Forms II, III and IV vowel their imperfect prefix with a ḍamma. A fatḥa there belongs to Form I and to Forms V-VI.
  • يُتَعَلَّمُ -> يَتَعَلَّمُ - the mirror image of the rule above: the تَـ forms keep the fatḥa prefix. Fix the prefix and the stem vowel usually follows.
  • يُدَرَّسُ for “he teaches” -> يُدَرِّسُ - the vowel before the last radical is a kasra. With a fatḥa the word is real but passive, “is taught” (lesson 52).
  • دَرَّسْتُ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ سَنَتَيْنِ meaning “I studied Arabic for two years” -> دَرَسْتُ اللُّغَةَ العَرَبِيَّةَ سَنَتَيْنِ - دَرَسَ (I) is “study”, دَرَّسَ (II) is “teach”. One shadda, opposite sides of the classroom - and unvowelled text prints neither.
  • يُأَرْسِلُ -> يُرْسِلُ - the هَمْزَةُ القَطْعِ of أَرْسَلَ lives only in the past. Every imperfect prefix swallows it.
  • أُأَرْسِلُ -> أُرْسِلُ - same rule in the first person: one hamza, not two. Compare أُعْلِنُ from أَعْلَنَ.
  • تَعَلَّمَ العَرَبِيَّةَ meaning “you learned Arabic” -> تَعَلَّمْتَ العَرَبِيَّةَ - in الماضي there are no person prefixes at all, so the تَـ of تَعَلَّمَ is the pattern. The headword means “he learned”.
  • تَعَلِّمْتُ -> تَعَلَّمْتُ - the Form V past is fatḥa throughout; there is no kasra anywhere in تَفَعَّلَ.
  • أَتَعَلَّمُ الطُّلّابَ العَرَبِيَّةَ -> أُعَلِّمُ الطُّلّابَ العَرَبِيَّةَ - V تَعَلَّمَ is what you do to yourself, “learn”. “Teach” is II عَلَّمَ.
  • هُمْ يُدَرِّسوا في المَدْرَسَةِ -> هُمْ يُدَرِّسونَ في المَدْرَسَةِ - a plain statement needs المُضارِع المَرْفوع, whose marker in الأَفْعال الخَمْسَة is the ن. The bare يُدَرِّسوا appears only after a particle that puts the verb in النَّصْب or الجَزْم - لَنْ، أَنْ، لَمْ and the like.

Tips

  • Learn every derived verb as a pair, headword plus imperfect: دَرَّسَ / يُدَرِّسُ، أَرْسَلَ / يُرْسِلُ، تَعَلَّمَ / يَتَعَلَّمُ. One glance at the pair tells you the form, the prefix vowel and the stem vowel at once.
  • Chant the two families until they are reflexes, not decisions: يُدَرِّسُ، يُسافِرُ، يُرْسِلُ in one breath, then يَتَعَلَّمُ، يَتَعاوَنُ in the next. Three ḍammas, then two fatḥas.
  • Learn V next to II and VI next to III, never as a flat list of five. عَلَّمَ / تَعَلَّمَ and كاتَبَ / تَكاتَبَ are two pairs, and the تَـ is what “turns the action back” in each.
  • Say the pattern name out loud after the verb, as you did in lesson 22: سافَرَ فاعَلَ، تَعاوَنَ تَفاعَلَ. Naming the mould is what makes you spot it in the next text.
  • Write the shadda by hand every single time. دَرَسَ / دَرَّسَ، عَلِمَ / عَلَّمَ - the pairs that lose their difference in unvowelled print are the ones worth over-writing now.
  • When you meet an unknown verb, strip it to the root and ask which of the five moulds it fits. That plus the context usually carries the sentence, and it always tells you which entry to open.
  • Ignore for now: the مَصْدَر shapes (lesson 54), the participles (lesson 53), the passive (lesson 52), and any root whose hamza, و، ي or doubled radical actually reshapes the stem (lessons 49-56).

B1 48 / 70

Forms VII-X and the quadriliteral verb

الأَوْزان: انْفَعَلَ، افْتَعَلَ، اسْتَفْعَلَ، فَعْلَلَ

In short

Lesson 47 built its forms by working inside the word: doubling a radical, stretching a vowel, gluing a تَ on the front. The remaining forms do something visibly different - they start the past tense with an extra alif: اِنْكَسَرَ، اِجْتَمَعَ، اِحْمَرَّ، اِسْتَقْبَلَ. The reason is mechanical. The patterns themselves begin with a vowelless consonant (نْكَسَرَ، سْتَقْبَلَ) and no Arabic word may begin that way, so the language props the word up with an alif and a kasra. That prop is هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ, and understanding it is most of this lesson.

These are not exotic forms. اِسْتَخْدَمَ، اِسْتَعْمَلَ، اِجْتَمَعَ، اِخْتَلَفَ، اِتَّصَلَ، اِنْتَظَرَ، اِنْقَطَعَ are among the most frequent verbs in any newspaper, and the four-radical verbs تَرْجَمَ and بَرْمَجَ are how modern Arabic coins new ones. Learn the six patterns in this lesson and, together with lesson 47, you can conjugate essentially any sound MSA verb you meet.

The rule

1. What is added, and where. Each form adds fixed material to the three radicals ف ع ل. Form VII prefixes نْ; Form VIII inserts a تَ after the first radical; Form IX doubles the last radical and adds nothing else; Form X prefixes سْتَ. Because all four then begin with a consonant carrying a sukūn, the past tense - unlike the imperfect - needs the supporting alif in front.

  • VII: نْ in front of the root → اِنْفَعَلَ.
  • VIII: تَ inserted after the first radical → اِفْتَعَلَ.
  • IX: the last radical doubled, nothing else → اِفْعَلَّ.
  • X: سْتَ in front of the root → اِسْتَفْعَلَ.

2. The central point: that alif is هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ, never هَمْزَةُ القَطْعِ. You met the distinction in the pronunciation guide’s hamza lesson. A قَطْع hamza is a real consonant and is written with a seat - أَكَلَ، إِسْلامٌ. A وَصْل hamza is a disposable launching device: it exists only so the word can be started, and in these forms it is written as a bare alif with a kasra under it. So the correct spellings are اِنْكَسَرَ، اِجْتَمَعَ، اِسْتَقْبَلَ. Writing إِنْكَسَرَ or إِسْتَقْبَلَ with إ is one of the most visible spelling errors in learner Arabic, and unlike most of the vowelling in this path it stays visible when the vowel marks are stripped: استقبل is right, إستقبل is wrong on any page.

The same applies to everything else built on these patterns, including the verbal nouns you will meet in lesson 54: اِسْتِقْبالٌ، اِجْتِماعٌ، اِنْكِسارٌ, never إِسْتِقْبال.

3. It is pronounced only at the very start of an utterance. Put any word in front and the alif falls silent - the preceding word runs straight into the following consonant. In وَصَلَ المُهَنْدِسونَ وَاجْتَمَعوا فِي المَكْتَبِ the alif of اِجْتَمَعوا is written but not heard; the وَ attaches directly to the ج. This is exactly what الـ does in الكِتاب, and for the same reason.

If the preceding word ends in a sukūn, it cannot run into anything, so it takes a helping vowel, usually a kasra: هَلْ + اِسْتَخْدَمْتَ gives هَلِ اسْتَخْدَمْتَ. Notice how the fully vocalized spelling records this: the kasra moves onto the هَلْ and the alif is left bare.

4. There is no alif at all in the مُضارِع. The imperfect prefixes يَ تَ أَ نَ already supply an opening consonant and vowel, so the prop is not needed and is simply not there: يَنْكَسِرُ، يَجْتَمِعُ، يَسْتَقْبِلُ. The form يَاسْتَقْبِلُ does not exist, and neither does يِسْتَقْبِلُ. For Forms VII, VIII and X the prefix vowel is a fatḥa, as it is in Form I and in Forms V-VI, and the stem vowel is a kasra; only the quadriliteral behaves differently (point 11).

The imperative, which you built in lesson 36, keeps the waṣl alif because it too begins with a sukūn: اِسْتَقْبِلْ، اِجْتَمِعوا، اِنْتَظِرْ.

5. Form VII اِنْفَعَلَ: it happened by itself. Form VII takes a transitive Form I verb and makes it intransitive, with the sense that the action simply occurred and no agent is mentioned: كَسَرَ “he broke (something)” → اِنْكَسَرَ “it broke”; قَطَعَ → اِنْقَطَعَ “it was cut off”; فَتَحَ → اِنْفَتَحَ “it opened”; شَغَلَ → اِنْشَغَلَ “he became busy”. Because of that meaning, a Form VII verb never takes a direct object. If you want “the boy broke the window”, the verb is Form I: كَسَرَ الوَلَدُ النّافِذَةَ.

Form VII is far less productive than VIII and X: roots beginning with ن، ر، ل، م، و، ي practically never use it, and where the verb is missing Arabic reaches for Form VIII instead.

6. Form VIII اِفْتَعَلَ: the ت that moves in after the first radical. It is one of the busiest forms in the language, alongside II and IV. Its classical value is reflexive or middle - جَمَعَ “he gathered (things)” → اِجْتَمَعَ “they gathered, met” - but in practice most Form VIII verbs are just independent vocabulary: اِنْتَظَرَ “wait”, اِخْتَلَفَ “differ”, اِعْتَمَدَ “rely”, اِشْتَغَلَ “work”. Learn the meaning from the dictionary; use the pattern to conjugate.

7. Form VIII’s ت changes shape after certain first radicals. The infixed ت sits immediately after the first radical, and Arabic will not tolerate some of the resulting pairs. Three adjustments cover everything you will meet:

  • After the emphatics ص ض ط ظ the ت hardens into ط: ص ب ر → اِصْطَبَرَ، ض ر ب → اِضْطَرَبَ. Where the radical is itself ط or ظ, the two merge into one doubled letter: ط ل ع → اِطَّلَعَ.
  • After the voiced dentals ز د ذ the ت voices into د: ز ح م → اِزْدَحَمَ. Again, a د or ذ radical merges: ذ خ ر → اِدَّخَرَ.
  • A first radical و disappears into the ت and doubles it: و ص ل → اِتَّصَلَ، و ف ق → اِتَّفَقَ. This is the assimilated verb (المِثال) of lesson 49; the same swallowing happens when the radical is ت: ت ب ع → اِتَّبَعَ.

None of this is optional and none of it is spelling licence. اِزْتَحَمَ and اِضْتَرَبَ are simply not Arabic words.

8. Form IX اِفْعَلَّ, in two lines. A closed little pattern for colours and physical defects, with the third radical doubled from the start: اِحْمَرَّ / يَحْمَرُّ “turn red”, اِصْفَرَّ / يَصْفَرُّ “turn yellow, go pale”, اِعْوَجَّ / يَعْوَجُّ “become crooked”. Because the doubling is built into the pattern, every Form IX verb is a مُضَعَّف verb and behaves like one: the two letters separate again before a consonant ending (اِحْمَرَرْتُ), which is lesson 49’s subject. Note the stem vowel: the imperfect is يَفْعَلُّ with a fatḥa, not the kasra of VII, VIII and X.

9. Form X اِسْتَفْعَلَ: asking, seeking, deeming. The سْتَ prefix classically means “ask for” or “seek” the meaning of Form I - عَلِمَ “know” → اِسْتَعْلَمَ “inquire” - or “consider something to be”: حَسُنَ “be good” → اِسْتَحْسَنَ “find good, approve of”. Many Form X verbs have drifted away from that into plain vocabulary, and these are the frequent ones: اِسْتَقْبَلَ “receive, welcome”, اِسْتَخْدَمَ “use, employ”, اِسْتَعْمَلَ “use”, اِسْتَخْرَجَ “extract”, اِسْتَمَرَّ “continue”.

10. The trap: count the radicals before you call something Form X. اِسْتَمَعَ / يَسْتَمِعُ “listen” looks like a Form X verb and is not. Its root is س م ع, and the س you see is the first radical, not the س of سْتَ; the verb is Form VIII, with the ordinary ت infix. Counting settles it instantly: after the alif, a Form X verb has five consonants (س، ت، then three radicals), a Form VIII verb has four.

اِسْتَقْبَلَ → س ت ق ب ل = five = Form X of ق ب ل. اِسْتَمَعَ → س ت م ع = four = Form VIII of س م ع.

The same root can even give you both, with different meanings: اِسْتَلَمَ “take delivery of” is Form VIII of س ل م, while اِسْتَسْلَمَ “surrender” is Form X of the same root - and there you can literally see the extra س.

11. The quadriliteral verb: four radicals, no alif. A small but useful class of verbs has four root letters instead of three. The base pattern is فَعْلَلَ: تَرْجَمَ “translate” (ت ر ج م), بَرْمَجَ “program” (ب ر م ج), فَلْسَفَ “philosophize” (ف ل س ف), زَلْزَلَ “shake”. It begins with a vowelled consonant, so no waṣl alif is involved at all.

Its imperfect is where learners slip: يُتَرْجِمُ, with a ḍamma on the prefix, exactly like Form II يُعَلِّمُ. Pair the two in your memory and you will never write يَتَرْجِمُ. The derived quadriliteral تَفَعْلَلَ adds a تَ in front - تَدَحْرَجَ “roll along” (د ح ر ج) - and it behaves like Form V instead: fatḥa prefix, fatḥa stem vowel, يَتَدَحْرَجُ. The rule of thumb from lesson 47 holds here too: a تَ at the front of the past means a fatḥa prefix in the present.

12. What this lesson leaves to others. The verbal nouns of these forms - اِنْكِسارٌ، اِجْتِماعٌ، اِسْتِقْبالٌ، تَرْجَمَةٌ - are lesson 54; their participles (مُجْتَمِعٌ، مُسْتَخْدَمٌ) are lesson 53; their passives are lesson 52. Roots with a weak middle radical, which reshape these patterns badly (اِخْتارَ، اِسْتَقالَ), wait for lesson 50, and doubled and assimilated roots for lesson 49. Apart from the Form VIII و of point 7 and the doubling built into Form IX, everything below uses sound roots.

Forms & patterns

The six patterns at a glance, third person masculine singular:

الوَزْنالرَّقْمالمُضارِعمِثالEnglish
اِنْفَعَلَVIIيَنْفَعِلُاِنْكَسَرَ / يَنْكَسِرُto break, get broken
اِفْتَعَلَVIIIيَفْتَعِلُاِجْتَمَعَ / يَجْتَمِعُto meet, assemble
اِفْعَلَّIXيَفْعَلُّاِحْمَرَّ / يَحْمَرُّto turn red
اِسْتَفْعَلَXيَسْتَفْعِلُاِسْتَقْبَلَ / يَسْتَقْبِلُto receive, welcome
فَعْلَلَرُباعِيّيُفَعْلِلُتَرْجَمَ / يُتَرْجِمُto translate
تَفَعْلَلَرُباعِيّ مَزيديَتَفَعْلَلُتَدَحْرَجَ / يَتَدَحْرَجُto roll along

Form VII, ك س ر:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع المَرْفوع
أَنااِنْكَسَرْتُأَنْكَسِرُ
هُوَاِنْكَسَرَيَنْكَسِرُ
هِيَاِنْكَسَرَتْتَنْكَسِرُ
نَحْنُاِنْكَسَرْنانَنْكَسِرُ
هُمْاِنْكَسَروايَنْكَسِرونَ

Form VIII, ج م ع:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع المَرْفوع
أَنااِجْتَمَعْتُأَجْتَمِعُ
هُوَاِجْتَمَعَيَجْتَمِعُ
هِيَاِجْتَمَعَتْتَجْتَمِعُ
نَحْنُاِجْتَمَعْنانَجْتَمِعُ
هُمْاِجْتَمَعوايَجْتَمِعونَ

Form X, two verbs side by side - ق ب ل and خ د م:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِعالماضيالمُضارِع
أَنااِسْتَقْبَلْتُأَسْتَقْبِلُاِسْتَخْدَمْتُأَسْتَخْدِمُ
هُوَاِسْتَقْبَلَيَسْتَقْبِلُاِسْتَخْدَمَيَسْتَخْدِمُ
هِيَاِسْتَقْبَلَتْتَسْتَقْبِلُاِسْتَخْدَمَتْتَسْتَخْدِمُ
نَحْنُاِسْتَقْبَلْنانَسْتَقْبِلُاِسْتَخْدَمْنانَسْتَخْدِمُ
هُمْاِسْتَقْبَلوايَسْتَقْبِلونَاِسْتَخْدَموايَسْتَخْدِمونَ

Form IX, ح م ر. Watch the doubled ر come apart before ـتُ and ـنا:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع المَرْفوع
أَنااِحْمَرَرْتُأَحْمَرُّ
هُوَاِحْمَرَّيَحْمَرُّ
هِيَاِحْمَرَّتْتَحْمَرُّ
نَحْنُاِحْمَرَرْنانَحْمَرُّ
هُمْاِحْمَرّوايَحْمَرّونَ

The two quadriliterals - ت ر ج م and د ح ر ج. Compare the prefix vowels in the two imperfect columns; that ḍamma is the whole difference:

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِعالماضيالمُضارِع
أَناتَرْجَمْتُأُتَرْجِمُتَدَحْرَجْتُأَتَدَحْرَجُ
هُوَتَرْجَمَيُتَرْجِمُتَدَحْرَجَيَتَدَحْرَجُ
هِيَتَرْجَمَتْتُتَرْجِمُتَدَحْرَجَتْتَتَدَحْرَجُ
نَحْنُتَرْجَمْنانُتَرْجِمُتَدَحْرَجْنانَتَدَحْرَجُ
هُمْتَرْجَموايُتَرْجِمونَتَدَحْرَجوايَتَدَحْرَجونَ

Form VIII’s assimilated ت:

الجَذْرالشَّكْلُ المُتَوَقَّعالصَّحيحالمُضارِعEnglish
ز ح ماِزْتَحَمَاِزْدَحَمَيَزْدَحِمُto be crowded
ذ خ راِذْتَخَرَاِدَّخَرَيَدَّخِرُto save up, store
ص ب راِصْتَبَرَاِصْطَبَرَيَصْطَبِرُto be patient
ض ر باِضْتَرَبَاِضْطَرَبَيَضْطَرِبُto be shaken, agitated
ط ل عاِطْتَلَعَاِطَّلَعَيَطَّلِعُto look into, examine
و ص لاِوْتَصَلَاِتَّصَلَيَتَّصِلُto contact, phone
ت ب عاِتْتَبَعَاِتَّبَعَيَتَّبِعُto follow

The tables show five of the thirteen person slots. The dual, the feminine plural and the second person are built with the endings you already know from lessons 14 and 22 - the stem never changes. The verbal noun, the participles and the passive are left to lessons 52, 58 and 59.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
اِنْكَسَرَ الكوبُ حينَ سَقَطَ عَلَى الأَرْضِ.The cup broke when it fell on the floor.
لا تَنْكَسِرُ هٰذِهِ الصُّحونُ بِسُهولَةٍ.These plates do not break easily.
يَجْتَمِعُ مَجْلِسُ الإِدارَةِ مَرَّةً في الشَّهْرِ.The board meets once a month.
وَصَلَ المُهَنْدِسونَ وَاجْتَمَعوا في المَكْتَبِ.The engineers arrived and met in the office.
اِسْتَقْبَلَتِ الوَزيرَةُ الضُّيوفَ في المَطارِ.The minister received the guests at the airport.
نَسْتَخْدِمُ هٰذَا البَرْنامَجَ في تَرْجَمَةِ النُّصوصِ.We use this program for translating texts.
هَلِ اسْتَخْدَمْتَ القاموسَ الجَديدَ؟Have you used the new dictionary?
اِحْمَرَّ وَجْهُهُ مِنَ الخَجَلِ.His face turned red with embarrassment.
تَزْدَحِمُ الشَّوارِعُ في ساعاتِ الذُّرْوَةِ.The streets get crowded at rush hour.
اِضْطَرَبَتِ الأَسْواقُ بَعْدَ إِعْلانِ النَّتائِجِ.The markets were shaken after the results were announced.
سَأَتَّصِلُ بِكَ مَساءً.I will call you in the evening.
يُتَرْجِمُ أَخي الوَثائِقَ مِنَ الفَرَنْسِيَّةِ إِلَى العَرَبِيَّةِ.My brother translates documents from French into Arabic.
تَدَحْرَجَتِ الكُرَةُ تَحْتَ الطّاوِلَةِ.The ball rolled under the table.
لَمْ يَسْتَمِعْ أَحَدٌ إِلى نَصيحَتي.Nobody listened to my advice.

Common mistakes

  • إِسْتَقْبَلَ الرَّئيسُ الضُّيوفَ -> اِسْتَقْبَلَ الرَّئيسُ الضُّيوفَ - the alif of Form X is هَمْزَةُ وَصْلٍ and is written bare, never with a seat. The same goes for the verbal noun: اِسْتِقْبالٌ, not إِسْتِقْبال.
  • إِنْكَسَرَ الزُّجاجُ -> اِنْكَسَرَ الزُّجاجُ - identical rule for Form VII, and for VIII and IX. If a form begins with an added alif, that alif is وَصْل by definition.
  • يَاسْتَخْدِمُ المُهَنْدِسُ الحاسوبَ -> يَسْتَخْدِمُ المُهَنْدِسُ الحاسوبَ - the waṣl alif belongs to the past tense only. The imperfect prefix already gives the word a vowel to start on, so nothing is propped up and nothing is written.
  • اِزْتَحَمَ السّوقُ -> اِزْدَحَمَ السّوقُ - Form VIII’s ت becomes د after a ز. The written form follows the pronunciation; there is no “underlying” spelling to preserve.
  • اِضْتَرَبَ الوَضْعُ -> اِضْطَرَبَ الوَضْعُ - after an emphatic radical the ت becomes ط. Learn اِضْطَرَبَ، اِصْطَبَرَ، اِطَّلَعَ as whole words and the rule takes care of itself.
  • اِوْتَصَلَ بي أَمْسِ -> اِتَّصَلَ بي أَمْسِ - a first radical و is swallowed by the ت and leaves a shadda behind. The root is still و ص ل, which is where the dictionary puts the verb.
  • اِسْتَلَمَ الجَيْشُ لِلْعَدُوِّ -> اِسْتَسْلَمَ الجَيْشُ لِلْعَدُوِّ - اِسْتَلَمَ is Form VIII of س ل م (“take delivery of”); “surrender” is the Form X of the same root, with the extra س of سْتَ in front of all three radicals. Count the consonants: four means VIII, five means X.
  • يَتَرْجِمُ الطّالِبُ الرِّسالَةَ -> يُتَرْجِمُ الطّالِبُ الرِّسالَةَ - the plain quadriliteral takes a ḍamma on the imperfect prefix, like Form II يُعَلِّمُ. Its تَ-form relative is the one with the fatḥa: يَتَدَحْرَجُ.
  • اِحْمَرَ وَجْهُها -> اِحْمَرَّ وَجْهُها - Form IX is doubled by definition. Drop the shadda and the word is not a weaker Form IX, it is nothing at all.
  • اِنْكَسَرَ الوَلَدُ النّافِذَةَ -> كَسَرَ الوَلَدُ النّافِذَةَ - Form VII says that something broke, not that somebody broke it, so it can never carry a direct object. Name the agent and you need Form I.

Tips

  • Fix one sentence per pattern in memory with the alif at the very front, where it is actually pronounced: اِجْتَمَعَ المُدَراءُ، اِسْتَقْبَلْنا الضُّيوفَ. Then every other occurrence is just that word with the alif gone quiet.
  • Always store a new verb as a pair, past and present: اِسْتَخْدَمَ / يَسْتَخْدِمُ. The second half of the pair is where the pattern is clearest, because the distracting alif is not there.
  • Count consonants before you name a form. Five after the alif with سـ تـ in front is Form X; four with a ت in second place is Form VIII. اِسْتَمَعَ is the verb that catches everyone.
  • Meaning hooks, rough but useful: VII “it happened by itself”, VIII “middle voice, or just a new word”, IX “it changed colour”, X “ask for it, or consider it so”.
  • For the dictionary, strip the alif and the pattern letters and look up the radicals: ج م ع for اِجْتَمَعَ, و ص ل for اِتَّصَلَ. Lesson 22 is the drill for this, and Form VIII with an assimilated و is the case where it saves you the most time.
  • Quadriliterals are how the language keeps growing: بَرْمَجَ from a borrowed noun, فَلْسَفَ from a borrowed one too. When you meet a new four-consonant verb, assume فَعْلَلَ / يُفَعْلِلُ and you will almost always be right.
  • Ignore for now which verbs each root happens to have. Almost no root fills out all ten forms, and guessing a Form VII that does not exist is a more common failure than mis-conjugating one that does. Read, collect, and use what you have seen.

B1 49 / 70

Verb classes: hamzated, doubled and assimilated

الفِعْلُ الصَّحيحُ والمُعْتَلّ: المَهْموزُ والمُضَعَّفُ والمِثال

In short

Lessons 46-53 sorted verbs by their pattern - what is added around the root. This lesson sorts them the other way, by the root letters themselves. Three letters cause trouble when you try to build a word on them: the hamza ء, a radical that is repeated, and the weak letters و and ي. Everything else conjugates like كَتَبَ and always has.

The good news first: the endings you learned in lessons 14, 22 and 41 never change. أَنا always ends in ـتُ in the past and starts with أَ in the present; هُمْ is always ـوا / ـونَ. What changes is whether the stem survives the collision. This lesson names all seven root classes so you can look at any verb and know what it is, then conjugates the three manageable ones: مَهْموز, مُضَعَّف and مِثال. The two genuinely difficult classes get lessons of their own immediately after.

The rule

1. Two families, seven classes. A root is صَحيح (“sound”) if none of its three letters is و or ي, and مُعْتَلّ (“weak”) if one or two of them are. Each family splits further, and the grammarians’ names are worth learning because dictionaries and grammars use them constantly:

  • صَحيح سالِم - nothing special at all: كَتَبَ (ك-ت-ب)، دَرَسَ، جَلَسَ.
  • صَحيح مَهْموز - one radical is a hamza: أَكَلَ (أ-ك-ل)، سَأَلَ (س-أ-ل)، قَرَأَ (ق-ر-أ).
  • صَحيح مُضَعَّف - the second and third radicals are the same letter: مَدَّ (م-د-د)، رَدَّ.
  • مُعْتَلّ مِثال - the first radical is و or ي: وَصَلَ (و-ص-ل)، يَبِسَ (ي-ب-س).
  • مُعْتَلّ أَجْوَف - the middle radical is weak: قالَ (ق-و-ل)، باعَ (ب-ي-ع).
  • مُعْتَلّ ناقِص - the last radical is weak: رَمى (ر-م-ي)، دَعا (د-ع-و).
  • مُعْتَلّ لَفيف - two of the three are weak: وَقى (و-ق-ي)، طَوى (ط-و-ي).

Note where the hamza lands: ء is a consonant, so مَهْموز sits inside the sound family, not the weak one. It does not melt into a long vowel the way a و does; apart from a few frequent verbs (كُلْ، خُذْ، مُرْ in rule 4, and يَرى in rule 13) it only makes spelling hard.

2. Find the root first (lesson 22), then the class. Ask three questions in this order. Is one of the radicals ء? Are the second and third the same letter? Is the first, middle or last a و / ي? The answer tells you which paradigm to reach for, and it is why dictionaries print the root - قَرَأَ tells you nothing about يَقْرَأُ until you see ق-ر-أ.

3. مَهْموز الفاء: two hamzas contract into a مَدَّة. أَكَلَ conjugates completely normally in the past - أَكَلْتُ، أَكَلَتْ، أَكَلوا - and normally in the present too: يَأْكُلُ، تَأْكُلُ، نَأْكُلُ. The one form that breaks is أَنا, where the prefix أَ meets the root’s أْ. Arabic refuses هَمْزَتان in a row when the second one carries a sukūn: أَأْكُلُ becomes آكُلُ, written with a مَدَّة exactly as you learned in the pronunciation guide’s hamza lesson. The same contraction runs wherever a vowelled أ prefix meets a root hamza with a sukūn: آخُذُ، آمُرُ، آسَفُ، and Form IV آمَنَ / أُومِنُ (there أُ + ؤْ gives a long ū instead of a مَدَّة). Where the root hamza has a vowel of its own there is nothing to contract, and both hamzas stay: Form II أَثَّرَ → أُؤَثِّرُ.

4. Three imperatives throw the hamza away. The imperative is the jussive minus its prefix (lesson 36). For أَكَلَ that gives أْكُلْ, which begins with a hamza carrying a sukūn - and propping it up with a helping hamza would again give two in a row. So the root hamza is simply dropped: كُلْ، خُذْ، مُرْ. Only these three verbs do it. Others keep the hamza and seat it on a ئ after the helping kasra: أَذِنَ → اِئْذَنْ “give permission”. (After وَ or فَ, أَمَرَ recovers its full shape: وَأْمُرْ.)

5. مَهْموز العَيْن and مَهْموز اللّام: the letter stays, the seat moves. In سَأَلَ and قَرَأَ nothing is deleted and nothing contracts. The only difficulty is orthographic: which chair the hamza sits on. The seat follows the stronger of two vowels - the hamza’s own and the one before it - ranked kasra > ḍamma > fatḥa > sukūn:

  • قَرَأَ (fatḥa on fatḥa) → أ; قَرَأْتُ (sukūn on fatḥa) → أ; يَقْرَؤونَ (ḍamma) → ؤ
  • سَأَلَ، يَسْأَلُ، سَأَلْتُ → أ; the noun مَسْؤولٌ (ḍamma) → ؤ; سائِلٌ (kasra) → ئ
  • one addition to the ladder: a sukūn ي in front of the hamza counts as a kasra → شَيْئًا، هَيْئَةٌ، يَيْئَسُ

سَأَلَ has a second, shorter imperative beside the regular اِسْأَلْ: سَلْ، سَلي، سَلوا. Both are fully standard modern Arabic: dictionaries cite اِسْأَلْ, and the short سَلْ is very common in speech and in print alike.

6. مُضَعَّف: the shadda holds until a sukūn arrives. م-د-د should give مَدَدَ, but two identical letters with a vowel between them collapse into one doubled letter: مَدَّ. That merger (إِدْغام) survives as long as whatever follows begins with a vowel:

مَدَّ، مَدَّتْ، مَدُّوا، يَمُدُّ، يَمُدّونَ، تَمُدّينَ

The moment an ending begins with a consonant - and in practice that means the sukūn-initial suffixes: the whole ـْتُ / ـْتَ / ـْتِ / ـْتُمْ set, plus ـْنا and ـْنَ - the two letters are forced apart again (فَكُّ الإِدْغام) and the buried third radical reappears:

مَدَدْتُ، مَدَدْنا، مَدَدْتُمْ، مَدَدْنَ - never *مَدَّتُ

This is the same trigger you met with كانَ → كُنْتُ in lesson 43, applied to a different weakness. The feminine plural does it in the present too: هُنَّ يَمْدُدْنَ, because ـْنَ carries a sukūn.

7. Which vowel comes back. When the letters split, the vowel between them is the verb’s own stem vowel from the dictionary: فَعَلَ verbs bring back a fatḥa (مَدَّ → مَدَدْتُ، رَدَّ → رَدَدْتُ), فَعِلَ verbs bring back a kasra (ظَلَّ → ظَلِلْتُ، مَلَّ → مَلِلْتُ). In the present the returning vowel is the مُضارِع vowel: يَمُدُّ → يَمْدُدْنَ، يَحُلُّ → يَحْلُلْنَ.

8. Doubled roots in the derived Forms behave identically. أَحَبَّ (Form IV of ح-ب-ب) gives أَحَبَّ، أَحَبَّتْ، أَحَبّوا، يُحِبُّ - but أَحْبَبْتُ، أَحْبَبْنا، أَحْبَبْتُمْ. So do اِسْتَعَدَّ → اِسْتَعْدَدْتُ، اِهْتَمَّ → اِهْتَمَمْتُ، اِسْتَمَرَّ → اِسْتَمْرَرْتُ.

9. مِثال: the و evaporates in the Form I present. This is the single most useful fact in the lesson. A verb whose first radical is و keeps it in the past and loses it in the مُضارِع:

وَصَلَ → يَصِلُ، وَجَدَ → يَجِدُ، وَقَفَ → يَقِفُ، وَعَدَ → يَعِدُ، وَزَنَ → يَزِنُ، وَضَعَ → يَضَعُ، وَهَبَ → يَهَبُ، وَسِعَ → يَسَعُ

Note وَضَعَ / يَضَعُ: the fatḥa is there because of the throaty ع, yet the و drops all the same. A tiny group of stative verbs keeps it - وَجِلَ / يَوْجَلُ “to be afraid”, وَدَّ / يَوَدُّ “to wish” - but they are rare enough to learn one by one when you meet them.

10. So the imperative of a مِثال is two letters long. Strip the prefix off تَصِلْ and the stem already begins with a consonant, so no helping hamza is needed at all: صِلْ، جِدْ، قِفْ، ضَعْ، عِدْ، زِنْ، صِفْ، هَبْ. A handful of nouns show the same loss with a ة sewn on the end to compensate: وَعَدَ → عِدَةٌ “a promise”، وَزَنَ → زِنَةٌ “a weight”، وَهَبَ → هِبَةٌ “a gift”.

11. Outside Form I the و is safe - except in Form VIII, where it becomes ت. Forms II, IV and X keep the و in plain sight: وَظَّفَ / يُوَظِّفُ، أَوْقَفَ / يُوقِفُ، اِسْتَوْرَدَ / يَسْتَوْرِدُ. Form VIII is different, because its ت infix lands immediately after the first radical: اِوْتَصَلَ is unpronounceable, so the و assimilates into the ت and the two merge under a shadda - اِتَّصَلَ. This produces a whole family of very common modern verbs: اِتَّصَلَ بِـ “contact”، اِتَّفَقَ عَلى “agree”، اِتَّحَدَ “unite”، اِتَّجَهَ إِلى “head for”، اِتَّسَعَ “widen”. اِتَّخَذَ “take, adopt” joins them from a hamzated root (أ-خ-ذ), by the same logic. Whenever you meet a verb beginning اِتَّـ, suspect a hidden و.

12. ي-initial roots do not drop anything. The rule above is about و only. Roots beginning with ي keep it right through: يَبِسَ / يَيْبَسُ “dry out”، يَئِسَ / يَيْئَسُ “despair”، يَسُرَ / يَيْسُرُ “become easy”. The doubled ي looks wrong and is correct. Luckily these verbs are few, because there is nothing to reason about here - you simply remember them.

13. Some verbs belong to two classes at once. رَأى is مَهْموز العَيْن and ناقِص (ر-أ-ي), and it loses the hamza outright in the present: يَرى، نَرى، أَرى. جاءَ is أَجْوَف and مَهْموز اللّام (ج-ي-أ). أَتى is مَهْموز الفاء and ناقِص (أ-ت-ي). لَفيف is the official name for one overlap only - two weak radicals in the same root, never a hamza plus a weak letter: وَقى (و-ق-ي) drops its و like a مِثال and ends like a ناقِص, which is how Arabic ends up with a one-letter imperative, قِ. Do not study any of these as a class; conjugate them by applying the two relevant rules in turn, and check the ones you use often.

14. Reading a doubled verb without vowel marks: count the letters. Unvocalized, مد can be مَدَّ “he stretched”, مُدَّ “stretch!”, or the noun مَدٌّ “extension, high tide”. But مدد has three consonants written out, so in a Form I verb it can only be the split stem - مَدَدْتُ، مَدَدْنا. (Outside Form I the same three letters can still be the noun مَدَدٌ “reinforcements” or the Form II verb مَدَّدَ “he extended”.) The letter count tells you whether a sukūn-initial ending is attached - a genuinely useful shortcut in unvocalized text.

15. Not in this lesson. The jussive of a doubled verb has two permitted shapes, لَمْ يَمُدَّ and لَمْ يَمْدُدْ - that was lesson 35, and nothing here changes it. Hollow verbs (قالَ، باعَ، نامَ) are lesson 50; verbs with a weak final radical (رَمى، دَعا، نَسِيَ) are lesson 51; and what all of these classes do in the passive - قيلَ، سُئِلَ، قُرِئَ - waits for lesson 52.

Forms & patterns

The seven classes at a glance

الصِّنْفThe root containsمِثالTaught in
صَحيح سالِمnothing awkwardكَتَبَ (ك-ت-ب)lessons 14, 22
صَحيح مَهْموزa hamza radicalأَكَلَ، سَأَلَ، قَرَأَthis lesson
صَحيح مُضَعَّفR2 = R3مَدَّ (م-د-د)this lesson
مُعْتَلّ مِثالو / ي as R1وَصَلَ (و-ص-ل)this lesson
مُعْتَلّ أَجْوَفو / ي as R2قالَ (ق-و-ل)lesson 50
مُعْتَلّ ناقِصو / ي as R3رَمى (ر-م-ي)lesson 51
مُعْتَلّ لَفيفtwo weak radicalsوَقى (و-ق-ي)55 + 56 together

المَهْموز: the three positions

النَّوْعالجَذْرالماضيالمُضارِعأَنا (الماضي)الأَمْر
مَهْموز الفاءأ-ك-لأَكَلَيَأْكُلُأَكَلْتُكُلْ
مَهْموز الفاءأ-خ-ذأَخَذَيَأْخُذُأَخَذْتُخُذْ
مَهْموز الفاءأ-م-رأَمَرَيَأْمُرُأَمَرْتُمُرْ
مَهْموز الفاءأ-ذ-نأَذِنَيَأْذَنُأَذِنْتُاِئْذَنْ
مَهْموز العَيْنس-أ-لسَأَلَيَسْأَلُسَأَلْتُاِسْأَلْ / سَلْ
مَهْموز اللّامق-ر-أقَرَأَيَقْرَأُقَرَأْتُاِقْرَأْ
مَهْموز اللّامب-د-أبَدَأَيَبْدَأُبَدَأْتُاِبْدَأْ

أَكَلَ in the مُضارِع - only أَنا is irregular; the duals and هُنَّ are left out because they add nothing new

الضَّميرالفِعْل
أَناآكُلُ
نَحْنُنَأْكُلُ
أَنْتَ / أَنْتِتَأْكُلُ / تَأْكُلينَ
هُوَ / هِيَيَأْكُلُ / تَأْكُلُ
هُمْيَأْكُلونَ

مَدَّ in the past - the full set, because the split is the whole point

الضَّميرالفِعْلالشَّدَّة
أَنامَدَدْتُsplit
أَنْتَمَدَدْتَsplit
أَنْتِمَدَدْتِsplit
هُوَمَدَّheld
هِيَمَدَّتْheld
نَحْنُمَدَدْناsplit
أَنْتُمْمَدَدْتُمْsplit
هُمْمَدُّواheld
هُنَّمَدَدْنَsplit

مَدَّ elsewhere, and two derived Forms

الصّيغَةالشَّكْل
المُضارِع، هُوَيَمُدُّ
المُضارِع، هُمْيَمُدّونَ
المُضارِع، هُنَّيَمْدُدْنَ
الأَمْرمُدَّ (also اُمْدُدْ)
IV: أَحَبَّ، هُوَ / أَناأَحَبَّ / أَحْبَبْتُ
VIII: اِهْتَمَّ، هُوَ / أَنااِهْتَمَّ / اِهْتَمَمْتُ

المِثال: the و goes missing in the present

الجَذْرالماضيالمُضارِعالأَمْرMeaning
و-ص-لوَصَلَيَصِلُصِلْarrive
و-ج-دوَجَدَيَجِدُجِدْfind
و-ق-فوَقَفَيَقِفُقِفْstand, stop
و-ع-دوَعَدَيَعِدُعِدْpromise
و-ز-نوَزَنَيَزِنُزِنْweigh
و-ص-فوَصَفَيَصِفُصِفْdescribe
و-ض-عوَضَعَيَضَعُضَعْput
و-ه-بوَهَبَيَهَبُهَبْgrant

The same root و across the Forms

الوَزْنالفِعْلالمُضارِعWhat the و does
Iوَصَلَيَصِلُdrops in the مُضارِع
IIوَظَّفَيُوَظِّفُstays
IVأَوْصَلَيُوصِلُstays, stretched into a long ū
VIIIاِتَّصَلَيَتَّصِلُmerges with the ت infix
Xاِسْتَوْرَدَيَسْتَوْرِدُstays

Examples

العربيةEnglish
آكُلُ الفَطورَ في السّاعَةِ السّابِعَةِ كُلَّ صَباحٍ.I eat breakfast at seven o’clock every morning.
كُلْ طَعامَكَ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَبْرُدَ.Eat your food before it gets cold.
سَأَلْتُ المُوَظَّفَ عَنْ مَوْعِدِ القِطارِ.I asked the clerk about the train’s departure time.
لا تَتَرَدَّدْ، سَلْ إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمْ شَيْئًا.Don’t hesitate - ask if you haven’t understood something.
قَرَأْتُ الخَبَرَ في جَريدَةِ الصَّباحِ.I read the news in the morning paper.
الطُّلّابُ يَقْرَؤونَ النَّصَّ بِصَوْتٍ عالٍ.The students are reading the text aloud.
مَدَّتِ الطَّبيبَةُ يَدَها إِلَى الطِّفْلِ.The doctor stretched out her hand to the child.
مَدَدْتُ يَدي لِأُصافِحَهُ.I put out my hand to shake his.
أَحْبَبْتُ هذِهِ المَدينَةَ مِنَ اليَوْمِ الأَوَّلِ.I loved this city from the first day.
يَصِلُ القِطارُ إِلَى المَحَطَّةِ بَعْدَ قَليلٍ.The train arrives at the station shortly.
قِفْ هُنا وَانْتَظِرْ إِشارَةَ المُرورِ.Stand here and wait for the traffic light.
ضَعِ الكِتابَ عَلَى الطّاوِلَةِ مِنْ فَضْلِكَ.Put the book on the table, please.
سَأَتَّصِلُ بِكَ غَدًا بَعْدَ الظُّهْرِ.I’ll call you tomorrow afternoon.
يَيْبَسُ العُشْبُ في الصَّيْفِ الحارِّ.The grass dries out in the hot summer.

Common mistakes

  • أَأْكُلُ الفَطورَ -> آكُلُ الفَطورَ - Two hamzas cannot stand in a row. The prefix أَ plus the root’s أْ contract into a single letter with a مَدَّة.
  • اُأْكُلْ الآنَ -> كُلِ الآنَ - كُلْ، خُذْ، مُرْ drop the root hamza in the imperative rather than propping it up. There is no helping hamza to add.
  • قَرَئْتُ الكِتابَ -> قَرَأْتُ الكِتابَ - The seat follows the stronger of the hamza’s own vowel and the one before it. Here that is sukūn against fatḥa, so the chair is ا, not ي.
  • سَئَلْتُ المُعَلِّمَ -> سَأَلْتُ المُعَلِّمَ - Same rule: fatḥa on fatḥa gives أ. A ئ needs a kasra somewhere in the pair, as in سائِلٌ or سُئِلَ.
  • مَدَّتُ يَدي -> مَدَدْتُ يَدي - The ending ـْتُ begins with a sukūn, so the shadda has to split. (مَدَّتْ, with the sukūn on the ت, is the perfectly good “she stretched”.)
  • أَحَبَّتُ هذِهِ المَدينَةَ -> أَحْبَبْتُ هذِهِ المَدينَةَ - Doubled roots split in the derived Forms exactly as in Form I; the doubling is a property of the root, not of the pattern.
  • يَوْصِلُ القِطارُ -> يَصِلُ القِطارُ - The و of a Form I مِثال is deleted in the مُضارِع. Keeping it is the commonest error in this whole class.
  • اِوْضَعِ الكِتابَ هُنا -> ضَعِ الكِتابَ هُنا - Take the prefix off تَضَعْ and the stem already starts with a consonant, so nothing needs to be added in front of it.
  • اِنْتَصَلَ بي أَمْسِ -> اِتَّصَلَ بي أَمْسِ - Form VIII of و-ص-ل is not built with ن. The و merges into the ت of the pattern and the two are written as one doubled letter.
  • يَبَسُ العُشْبُ في الصَّيْفِ -> يَيْبَسُ العُشْبُ في الصَّيْفِ - Only و-initial roots drop their first radical. A ي-initial root keeps it, doubled ي and all.

Tips

  • Always in this order: find the root, name the class, then conjugate. Three quick questions - any hamza? any repeated radical? any و/ي, and where? - settle almost any verb you meet.
  • One trigger runs through half of this lesson and all of lesson 50: does the ending begin with a sukūn? The culprits are the ت-endings (ـْتُ، ـْتَ، ـْتِ، ـْتُمْ) plus ـْنا and ـْنَ. Learn them as a set.
  • Store مِثال verbs as pairs, وَصَلَ / يَصِلُ, never as single words - which is exactly why dictionaries print both. The present cannot be predicted from the past by ear.
  • Memory hook for the imperatives: a مِثال command is about the shortest thing you can say in Arabic. صِلْ، قِفْ، ضَعْ، عِدْ - two letters, no prop, no prefix.
  • Any modern verb starting اِتَّـ almost certainly hides a و: اِتَّصَلَ، اِتَّفَقَ، اِتَّجَهَ. Look under و-ص-ل، و-ف-ق، و-ج-ه in the dictionary, not under ا or ت.
  • For the hamza seats, do not memorise a table - memorise the ladder kasra > ḍamma > fatḥa > sukūn and read the two vowels around the hamza.
  • Ignore لَفيف as a category for now, and ignore رَأى، جاءَ، أَتى as puzzles. They are frequent enough that you will simply know them before you can analyse them.

B1 50 / 70

Hollow verbs

الفِعْلُ الأَجْوَف

In short

A hollow verb - الفِعْلُ الأَجْوَفُ, “the verb with a hollow middle” - is one whose second radical is a و or a ي: ق و ل، ب ي ع، ن و م، خ و ف. In the dictionary form that weak letter has already melted into a long alif, so what you actually see is قالَ، باعَ، نامَ، خافَ. The root is invisible on the page, the verb looks a letter short, and none of the endings you drilled on دَرَسَ seem to fit.

They fit perfectly, once you know the single law that governs the whole class: a long vowel cannot stand immediately before a vowelless consonant - the only systematic exception being a following doubled consonant, as in دابَّة. Attach a suffix that begins with a consonant - ـتُ، ـنا، ـنَ - so that the last radical loses its vowel, and the long vowel has to give way to its own short version - قالَ but قُلْتُ. Put the verb into the jussive or the imperative, where the last radical itself takes a sukūn, and it gives way again - لَمْ يَقُلْ، قُلْ. That is the shortening this lesson is named after, and it is the same event in both halves of the verb.

The rule

1. Three Form I types, told apart by the مُضارِع, not by the ماضٍ. The past-tense form is no help: قالَ، باعَ and نامَ all show a bare long alif, and you cannot tell from it whether the middle radical is a و or a ي. The imperfect shows it:

  • و-type: قالَ - يَقولُ (ق و ل) “to say”. Also زارَ - يَزورُ، عادَ - يَعودُ، دارَ - يَدورُ، كانَ - يَكونُ.
  • ي-type: باعَ - يَبيعُ (ب ي ع) “to sell”. Also سارَ - يَسيرُ، عاشَ - يَعيشُ، زادَ - يَزيدُ، صارَ - يَصيرُ.
  • a-type: نامَ - يَنامُ (ن و م) “to sleep”, خافَ - يَخافُ (خ و ف) “to fear”. Also نالَ - يَنالُ (ن ي ل)، plus derived-measure verbs like اِحْتاجَ - يَحْتاجُ.

Look at the third group closely. نامَ and خافَ have a و in the root, and their imperfect is still يَنامُ، يَخافُ with an alif. The type is a fact about the individual verb, exactly like the middle vowel of يَكْتُبُ against يَجْلِسُ in a sound verb. Learn every hollow verb as a pair, قالَ - يَقولُ, and the rest of this lesson is predictable from that pair.

2. The ماضٍ: shorten when the last radical loses its vowel, keep the alif otherwise. The past-tense endings split into two camps. The camp that puts a sukūn on the last radical - ـْتُ، ـْتَ، ـْتِ، ـْتُما، ـْتُمْ، ـْتُنَّ، ـْنا، ـْنَ - forces the shortening. The camp that leaves that radical vowelled, or adds nothing at all - the bare هُوَ form, ـَتْ، ـا، ـَتا، ـوا - leaves the long alif standing:

قالَ، قالَتْ، قالا، قالوا but قُلْتُ، قُلْنا، قُلْنَ.

3. The colour of the short vowel in the ماضٍ. It is not random and it is not always the short twin of the imperfect vowel:

  • و-type → ḍamma: قُلْتُ، زُرْتُ، كُنْتُ، دُرْتُ.
  • ي-type → kasra: بِعْتُ، سِرْتُ، عِشْتُ، صِرْتُ.
  • a-type → kasra, whichever letter the root has: نِمْتُ (و root!)، خِفْتُ (و root!)، نِلْتُ.

So a-type verbs behave one way in the past (kasra) and another in the imperfect (fatḥa). نامَ gives نِمْتُ but لَمْ يَنَمْ, and that split is worth a flashcard of its own.

4. The مُضارِعُ المَرْفوعُ: nothing shortens except before the نون of the feminine plural. The long vowel sits comfortably in يَقولُ، تَقولينَ، يَقولونَ، نَبيعُ، يَنامانِ, because every one of those words ends in a vowel. Only the two frozen feminine-plural cells attach a ـْنَ directly to the last radical and therefore trigger the law: يَقُلْنَ، تَقُلْنَ، يَبِعْنَ، تَبِعْنَ، يَنَمْنَ، يَخَفْنَ. Compare يَقولونَ “they (m.) say” with يَقُلْنَ “they (f.) say” - the same tense, and the length of the stem is the only visible difference.

5. The مَنْصوب keeps the long vowel. Its ending is a fatḥa, a vowel, so no cluster arises and nothing happens: لَنْ يَقولَ، أُريدُ أَنْ أَبيعَ، لَنْ يَنامَ، حَتّى يَعودَ. Learners shorten here out of habit; there is no reason to. The five ن-dropping cells end in a long vowel too and are equally safe: لَنْ يَقولوا، لَنْ تَبيعي.

6. The مَجْزوم shortens - and here the colour follows the imperfect. After لَمْ، لا النّاهِيَة and لامُ الأَمْرِ the last radical takes a sukūn, the law bites, and the long vowel of the imperfect becomes its own short twin:

لَمْ يَقُلْ (و → ḍamma)، لَمْ يَبِعْ (ي → kasra)، لَمْ يَنَمْ and لَمْ يَخَفْ (ا → fatḥa).

The restriction from lesson 35 applies unchanged: only the cells that actually end in a sukūn shorten. The الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ drop their نون and end in a long vowel, so they keep the stem intact - لَمْ يَقولوا، لَمْ تَبيعي، لَمْ يَناموا. And the feminine plurals were already short in the indicative, so they look identical in all three moods: يَقُلْنَ / لَنْ يَقُلْنَ / لَمْ يَقُلْنَ.

7. The imperative is the jussive with the prefix taken off - so it is short too. Take لَمْ تَقُلْ, remove the تَـ, and you have قُلْ “say!”. Nothing else is needed: unlike اُدْرُسْ, the hollow stem begins with a vowelled consonant, so no هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ has to be added. The plural and feminine forms come from the jussive in the same mechanical way, and the cells that end in a long vowel keep it: قُلْ، قولي، قولا، قولوا، قُلْنَ. The same for بِعْ، بيعي، بيعوا and نَمْ، نامي، ناموا and خَفْ، خافي، خافوا. Prohibitions use the jussive directly: لا تَقُلْ هٰذا، لا تَخَفْ.

8. Two sukūns cannot meet. A shortened jussive or imperative ends in a vowelless consonant, and if the next word begins with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ - above all the article - Arabic repairs the collision with a kasra on the verb: قُلِ الحَقيقَةَ، لَمْ يَقُلِ المُديرُ شَيْئًا، لَمْ يَنَمِ الطِّفْلُ. The mood has not changed; only the pronunciation has been smoothed.

9. Derived measures: IV, VII, VIII and X shorten exactly as Form I does. أَقامَ - يُقيمُ، اِخْتارَ - يَخْتارُ، اِسْتَقالَ - يَسْتَقيلُ are all hollow, and all three obey the same law. Two details make them easier than Form I, not harder:

  • In the ماضٍ the short vowel is always a fatḥa, whatever the root letter: أَقَمْتُ، أَرَدْتُ، اِخْتَرْتُ، اِحْتَجْتُ، اِسْتَقَلْتُ، اِسْتَطَعْتُ. No three-way choice.
  • In the مُضارِع the short vowel is the twin of the long one, as always: يُقيمُ → لَمْ يُقِمْ، أَقِمْ; يَخْتارُ → لَمْ يَخْتَرْ، اِخْتَرْ; يَسْتَقيلُ → لَمْ يَسْتَقِلْ، اِسْتَقِلْ.

10. Measures II, III, V and VI keep the weak letter as a real consonant. In فَعَّلَ and تَفَعَّلَ the middle radical is doubled, and a doubled letter cannot melt: حَوَّلَ - يُحَوِّلُ، عَيَّنَ - يُعَيِّنُ، تَحَوَّلَ - يَتَحَوَّلُ. In فاعَلَ and تَفاعَلَ a long alif already stands in front of it, so it stays a consonant there too: عاوَنَ - يُعاوِنُ، تَعاوَنَ - يَتَعاوَنُ، شاوَرَ - يُشاوِرُ. These verbs are conjugated like any sound verb: حَوَّلْتُ، تَعاوَنّا، لَمْ يَتَحَوَّلْ. A root with a weak middle radical is therefore hollow in some measures and not in others.

11. Reading the skeleton. Hollow verbs are one of the few places where unvocalized Arabic shows you the grammar anyway, because the shortening removes a letter, not just a mark: قال against قلت, يقول against لم يقل, اختار against اخترت. When you meet a bare قل in a text, the word in front of it decides: لم قل is impossible, so لم يقل is a jussive and a lone قل is normally the imperative.

12. Left to later lessons. The passive قيلَ - يُقالُ and بيعَ - يُباعُ belongs to lesson 52 and has its own vowel pattern; the participles قائِلٌ، مَقولٌ، مُقيمٌ، مُخْتارٌ are lesson 53; the verbal nouns قَوْلٌ، بَيْعٌ، نَوْمٌ، إِقامَةٌ، اِخْتِيارٌ are lesson 54. كانَ appears below only as a piece of morphology - what it does to the sentence around it is lessons 32 and 48.

Forms & patterns

الماضي - the past of the three Form I types, with two a-type verbs side by side. Read down the قالَ column and you see the split: the five cells with a long alif are the ones whose ending leaves the ل vowelled, or adds nothing at all.

الضَّميرقالَ (و)باعَ (ي)نامَ (a)خافَ (a)
أَناقُلْتُبِعْتُنِمْتُخِفْتُ
أَنْتَقُلْتَبِعْتَنِمْتَخِفْتَ
أَنْتِقُلْتِبِعْتِنِمْتِخِفْتِ
أَنْتُماقُلْتُمابِعْتُمانِمْتُماخِفْتُما
أَنْتُمْقُلْتُمْبِعْتُمْنِمْتُمْخِفْتُمْ
أَنْتُنَّقُلْتُنَّبِعْتُنَّنِمْتُنَّخِفْتُنَّ
هُوَقالَباعَنامَخافَ
هِيَقالَتْباعَتْنامَتْخافَتْ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)قالاباعاناماخافا
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)قالَتاباعَتانامَتاخافَتا
هُمْقالواباعوانامواخافوا
هُنَّقُلْنَبِعْنَنِمْنَخِفْنَ
نَحْنُقُلْنابِعْنانِمْناخِفْنا

المُضارِعُ المَرْفوعُ. Only the two feminine plurals are short.

الضَّميريَقولُيَبيعُيَنامُ
أَناأَقولُأَبيعُأَنامُ
أَنْتَتَقولُتَبيعُتَنامُ
أَنْتِتَقولينَتَبيعينَتَنامينَ
أَنْتُماتَقولانِتَبيعانِتَنامانِ
أَنْتُمْتَقولونَتَبيعونَتَنامونَ
أَنْتُنَّتَقُلْنَتَبِعْنَتَنَمْنَ
هُوَيَقولُيَبيعُيَنامُ
هِيَتَقولُتَبيعُتَنامُ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَقولانِيَبيعانِيَنامانِ
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)تَقولانِتَبيعانِتَنامانِ
هُمْيَقولونَيَبيعونَيَنامونَ
هُنَّيَقُلْنَيَبِعْنَيَنَمْنَ
نَحْنُنَقولُنَبيعُنَنامُ

The three moods and the imperative, third person masculine singular. This table is the takeaway of the lesson in one screen.

الفِعْلمَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْزومالأَمْرEnglish
قالَ (ق و ل)يَقولُلَنْ يَقولَلَمْ يَقُلْقُلْto say
باعَ (ب ي ع)يَبيعُلَنْ يَبيعَلَمْ يَبِعْبِعْto sell
نامَ (ن و م)يَنامُلَنْ يَنامَلَمْ يَنَمْنَمْto sleep
خافَ (خ و ف)يَخافُلَنْ يَخافَلَمْ يَخَفْخَفْto be afraid
كانَ (ك و ن)يَكونُلَنْ يَكونَلَمْ يَكُنْكُنْto be
زارَ (ز و ر)يَزورُلَنْ يَزورَلَمْ يَزُرْزُرْto visit
سارَ (س ي ر)يَسيرُلَنْ يَسيرَلَمْ يَسِرْسِرْto walk, to proceed

The imperative across the persons. Only the two cells whose last radical takes a sukūn are short.

الضَّميرقالَباعَنامَخافَ
أَنْتَقُلْبِعْنَمْخَفْ
أَنْتِقوليبيعيناميخافي
أَنْتُماقولابيعاناماخافا
أَنْتُمْقولوابيعوانامواخافوا
أَنْتُنَّقُلْنَبِعْنَنَمْنَخَفْنَ

Note the trap in the last row: قُلْنَ is both “they (f.) said” and “say! (to women)”, and نَمْنَ “sleep! (to women)” is not the past نِمْنَ “they (f.) slept”. Only the context separates them.

Hollow verbs in the derived measures. The dual and the feminine forms are left out; they follow the Form I pattern exactly.

الوَزْنالماضيالمُضارِعأَنا في الماضيمَعَ لَمْالأَمْرEnglish
IV أَفْعَلَأَقامَيُقيمُأَقَمْتُلَمْ يُقِمْأَقِمْto stay, to set up
IV أَفْعَلَأَعادَيُعيدُأَعَدْتُلَمْ يُعِدْأَعِدْto repeat, to return sth
VII اِنْفَعَلَاِنْقادَيَنْقادُاِنْقَدْتُلَمْ يَنْقَدْاِنْقَدْto be led
VIII اِفْتَعَلَاِخْتارَيَخْتارُاِخْتَرْتُلَمْ يَخْتَرْاِخْتَرْto choose
VIII اِفْتَعَلَاِحْتاجَيَحْتاجُاِحْتَجْتُلَمْ يَحْتَجْاِحْتَجْto need
X اِسْتَفْعَلَاِسْتَقالَيَسْتَقيلُاِسْتَقَلْتُلَمْ يَسْتَقِلْاِسْتَقِلْto resign
X اِسْتَفْعَلَاِسْتَطاعَيَسْتَطيعُاِسْتَطَعْتُلَمْ يَسْتَطِعْاِسْتَطِعْto be able

The measures that are not hollow at all, built on roots with a weak middle radical:

الوَزْنالماضيالمُضارِعأَنا في الماضيمَعَ لَمْEnglish
II فَعَّلَحَوَّلَيُحَوِّلُحَوَّلْتُلَمْ يُحَوِّلْto transfer, to convert
II فَعَّلَعَيَّنَيُعَيِّنُعَيَّنْتُلَمْ يُعَيِّنْto appoint
III فاعَلَعاوَنَيُعاوِنُعاوَنْتُلَمْ يُعاوِنْto assist
V تَفَعَّلَتَحَوَّلَيَتَحَوَّلُتَحَوَّلْتُلَمْ يَتَحَوَّلْto turn into
VI تَفاعَلَتَعاوَنَيَتَعاوَنُتَعاوَنْتُلَمْ يَتَعاوَنْto cooperate

Examples

العربيةEnglish
قُلْتُ لَهُ الحَقيقَةَ كُلَّها.I told him the whole truth.
ماذا قالَتْ لَكِ المُديرَةُ أَمْسِ؟What did the director say to you yesterday?
لَمْ يَقُلِ الشُّهودُ شَيْئًا جَديدًا.The witnesses did not say anything new.
الطّالِباتُ يَقُلْنَ إِنَّ الدَّرْسَ صَعْبٌ.The students say that the lesson is difficult.
هَلْ بِعْتُمْ سَيّارَتَكُمُ القَديمَةَ؟Did you sell your old car?
لَنْ نَبيعَ البَيْتَ في هٰذِهِ السَّنَةِ.We will not sell the house this year.
نِمْتُ جَيِّدًا بَعْدَ يَوْمٍ طَويلٍ.I slept well after a long day.
لَمْ يَنَمِ الطِّفْلُ حَتّى مُنْتَصَفِ اللَّيْلِ.The child did not sleep until midnight.
خِفْتُ مِنَ الظَّلامِ عِنْدَما كُنْتُ طِفْلًا.I was afraid of the dark when I was a child.
قُلِ الحَقيقَةَ ولا تَخَفْ.Tell the truth and do not be afraid.
أَقَمْنا في فُنْدُقٍ صَغيرٍ قُرْبَ المَحَطَّةِ.We stayed in a small hotel near the station.
لَمْ أَسْتَطِعْ أَنْ أَنامَ بِسَبَبِ الضَّجيجِ.I could not sleep because of the noise.
أَعْضاءُ اللَّجْنَةِ لَمْ يَخْتاروا رَئيسًا بَعْدُ.The members of the committee have not chosen a chairman yet.
تَحَوَّلَتِ القَرْيَةُ إِلى مَدينَةٍ صِناعِيَّةٍ.The village turned into an industrial town.

Common mistakes

  • قالْتُ -> قُلْتُ - the suffix ـتُ puts a sukūn on the ل, and a long alif cannot stand in front of it. The alif goes and leaves a ḍamma behind, because قالَ is a و-type verb.
  • كانْتُ -> كُنْتُ - the same verb class and the most frequent word it touches. Do not confuse it with كانَتْ “she was”, where the ن keeps its fatḥa and nothing shortens.
  • بَعْتُ -> بِعْتُ - the shortening is real, but a ي-type verb leaves a kasra, not a fatḥa. Same for سِرْتُ، عِشْتُ، صِرْتُ.
  • نُمْتُ -> نِمْتُ - نامَ has a و in its root, yet its past shortens to a kasra, because it is an a-type verb (يَنامُ). Likewise خِفْتُ، not خُفْتُ.
  • لَمْ يَقولْ -> لَمْ يَقُلْ - the جَزْم puts a sukūn on the ل, and a long و immediately before it is impossible. The و disappears from the writing as well.
  • لَنْ يَقُلَ -> لَنْ يَقولَ - the مَنْصوب ends in a fatḥa, not a sukūn, so there is no cluster and no reason to shorten. Only the jussive and the imperative are short.
  • يَقولْنَ -> يَقُلْنَ - the ـْنَ of the feminine plural attaches to a vowelless consonant, so it shortens the stem in the indicative too, exactly as لَمْ does.
  • قولْ -> قُلْ - the imperative is built from the jussive لَمْ تَقُلْ, so it is short from the start. Only the plural and feminine forms keep the long vowel: قولوا، قولي.
  • أَقامْتُ -> أَقَمْتُ - the derived measures shorten as well, and in the past their short vowel is always a fatḥa: اِخْتَرْتُ، اِسْتَقَلْتُ، اِحْتَجْتُ.
  • قُلْ الحَقيقَةَ -> قُلِ الحَقيقَةَ - two vowelless consonants would meet across the word boundary, so the verb takes a kasra. This is pronunciation, not a change of mood.

Tips

  • Store every hollow verb as a triple: قالَ - يَقولُ - قُلْتُ. The first two come from any dictionary; the third is the only thing you have to add, and it fixes the whole past paradigm.
  • Two separate colour rules, one per half of the verb. Past: ḍamma for و-type, kasra for everything else. Imperfect side (jussive, imperative, feminine plural): the short twin of the long vowel you already see - يَقولُ → ـُ، يَبيعُ → ـِ، يَنامُ → ـَ.
  • Before writing any ending, ask one question: does it leave the last radical without a vowel? ـْتُ، ـْنا، ـْنَ and the sukūn of the jussive do; ـَتْ، ـوا، ـينَ، ـانِ and the fatḥa of the مَنْصوب do not.
  • كانَ is worth its own card, drilled as a block: كُنْتُ، كانَ، كانوا، يَكونُ، لَمْ يَكُنْ، كُنْ. It is the hollow verb you will read most often, in texts of every register.
  • Practise in minimal pairs and say them aloud: قالَ / قُلْتُ، يَقولونَ / يَقُلْنَ، لَنْ يَقولَ / لَمْ يَقُلْ. The difference is one beat of length, and your ear learns it faster than your eye.
  • When a hollow verb blocks you in speech, escape into the past with ما: ما زارَنا is correct and buys you a second while لَمْ يَزُرْنا settles.
  • Ignore for now: the passive قيلَ، the participle قائِلٌ and the verbal noun قَوْلٌ all reshape the weak radical again, and each has its own lesson coming. Master the active paradigm first.

B1 51 / 70

Verbs with a weak final radical

الفِعْلُ المُعْتَلُّ الآخِر (النّاقِص)

In short

A verb whose third root letter is و or ي is called ناقِص, “deficient”, and the name is fair: the weak letter sits at the very end of the word, exactly where the endings go, so it is constantly being squeezed, swallowed or deleted. رَمى، دَعا، مَشى، نَسِيَ، بَقِيَ، أَعْطى، اِشْتَرى - these are not exotic verbs, they are among the most common verbs in the language, and their forms look far shorter than a learner expects. لَمْ يَشْتَرِ is a complete, correct, four-letter word.

The good news is that there are only three patterns, and the whole system is one idea repeated: a long final vowel survives where the ending is a long vowel, and collapses everywhere else. Once you can hear that, رَمَتْ، رَمَوْا، لَنْ يَرْمِيَ، لَمْ يَرْمِ، اِرْمِ stop being separate facts and become one verb seen from five angles. The derived measures add nothing new at all: أَعْطى and اِسْتَدْعى end exactly like رَمى.

The rule

1. The three Form I classes. The dictionary gives you the ماضي and the مُضارِع; that pair, not the root alone, tells you which class you are in.

  • و-class: دَعا - يَدْعو (د ع و) “to invite, to call”. Also نَجا - يَنْجو “to escape”, شَكا - يَشْكو “to complain”.
  • ي-class: رَمى - يَرْمي (ر م ي) “to throw”; مَشى - يَمْشي “to walk”; بَنى - يَبْني “to build”; جَرى - يَجْري “to run, to happen”.
  • a-class (فَعِلَ - يَفْعَلُ): نَسِيَ - يَنْسى “to forget”; لَقِيَ - يَلْقى “to meet”; رَضِيَ - يَرْضى “to be content”; بَقِيَ - يَبْقى “to remain”. Their ماضي has a kasra on the middle radical and their مُضارِع ends in ـى whatever the root letter is.

2. Spelling: ا or ى at the end of the ماضي. In a three-letter verb the final long vowel of the هُوَ form is written ا if the root letter is و (دَعا، نَجا، دَنا) and ى if it is ي (رَمى، مَشى، بَنى، جَرى). That final letter is a reliable clue to the class: a past-tense verb spelled with ا has a و-root and therefore a مُضارِع in ـو. In verbs of more than three letters the ending is written ى: أَعْطى، اِشْتَرى، تَمَنّى، اِسْتَدْعى - unless the letter in front of it is a ي, and then it is a plain ا (أَحْيا، اِسْتَحْيا) - see [Hamza, madda and alif maqsura__XLINK__.

3. The ماضي: the weak letter survives before a consonant. Endings that begin with a consonant - ـتُ، ـتَ، ـنا، ـنَ - leave the root intact, so you can still see the ي or the و: رَمَيْتُ، رَمَيْنا، رَمَيْنَ / دَعَوْتُ، دَعَوْنا، دَعَوْنَ. Endings that begin with a vowel squeeze it: هِيَ رَمَتْ (not رَمَيَتْ), هُمْ رَمَوْا (not رَمَيوا), هِيَ دَعَتْ، هُمْ دَعَوْا. The هُوَ form has no ending at all and the weak letter has become the long vowel itself: رَمى، دَعا.

The a-class behaves differently and more simply: its ي stays visible in the third person singular - نَسِيَ، نَسِيَتْ - and contracts to a long ي before the consonant endings (نَسيتُ، نَسينا، نَسينَ) and to a long و in the masculine plural (نَسُوا).

4. The مُضارِع المَرْفوع and its invisible ḍamma. يَرْمي، يَدْعو، يَنْسى are indicative forms, but you cannot write a ḍamma on a long vowel. In the terms of The case system: irab and its markers the ending is مُقَدَّر, estimated: it is there grammatically and absent phonetically. For يَرْمي and يَدْعو the reason given is الثِّقَل (heaviness - the vowel is simply too heavy to pronounce there); for يَنْسى it is التَّعَذُّر (impossibility - the alif maqṣūra can carry nothing at all).

5. Homographs to memorise now. In the ي-class, أَنْتِ تَرْمينَ and أَنْتُنَّ تَرْمينَ are identical - and so are أَنْتِ تَنْسَيْنَ and أَنْتُنَّ تَنْسَيْنَ in the a-class. In the و-class, هُمْ يَدْعونَ and هُنَّ يَدْعونَ are identical. Nothing distinguishes them in the indicative - only the surrounding sentence, or a change of mood, tells you which is which: لَنْ تَرْمي (أَنْتِ) against لَنْ تَرْمينَ (أَنْتُنَّ). The feminine plural, as always, is frozen and never changes for mood.

6. The مَنْصوب: a fatḥa is light enough to appear - except on ى. After أَنْ، لَنْ، لِـ، حَتّى the ي and و classes take a visible fatḥa, and the long vowel becomes a plain consonant again:

لَنْ يَرْمِيَ “he will not throw”, لَنْ يَدْعُوَ “he will not invite”.

The a-class cannot do this, because ى takes no vowel: لَنْ يَنْسى looks exactly like the indicative, and the fatḥa is مُقَدَّر. So of the three classes, two show the subjunctive clearly and one hides it completely.

7. The مَجْزوم deletes the weak letter and keeps its short vowel. This is the headline rule of the lesson. After لَمْ، لا النّاهِيَة، لامُ الأَمْرِ and the conditional particles, the final long vowel is not shortened but removed, leaving the preceding consonant with the matching short vowel: ي leaves a kasra, و leaves a ḍamma, ى leaves a fatḥa.

لَمْ يَرْمِ ، لَمْ يَدْعُ ، لَمْ يَنْسَ ، لَمْ يَمْشِ ، لَمْ يَبْقَ.

Grammatically the mood marker is not a sukūn here but حَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّةِ, “the deletion of the weak letter”. A practical consequence: because these forms end in a short vowel and not in a sukūn, they never collide with a following هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ. لَمْ يَقُلِ الحَقيقَةَ needs a repair kasra; لَمْ يَرْمِ الكُرَةَ needs nothing, it already has one.

8. Where the ending is a long vowel, nothing is deleted. The five cells that end in ـينَ، ـانِ، ـونَ behave as they do in any verb: they drop the نون and keep the vowel. لَمْ يَرْموا ، لَمْ تَرْمي ، لَمْ يَدْعوا ، لَمْ يَنْسَوْا. And the two feminine plurals never move at all: لَمْ يَرْمينَ، لَمْ يَدْعونَ، لَمْ يَنْسَيْنَ. So the visible collapse belongs to the four suffixless cells أَـ، تَـ، يَـ، نَـ - the same four that mattered in The jussive of the imperfect.

9. The imperative is the jussive with the prefix removed. Take لَمْ يَرْمِ، strip يَـ، prefix a هَمْزَةُ وَصْلٍ vowelled to match the stem: اِرْمِ “throw!”, اُدْعُ “invite!”, اِنْسَ “forget!”, اِمْشِ “walk!”. They are startlingly short - a هَمْزَةُ وَصْلٍ, two consonants and a bare short vowel - and learners routinely refuse to believe them. The prohibition uses the same shape: لا تَرْمِ، لا تَدْعُ، لا تَنْسَ. Feminine and plural addressees keep their long vowel: اِرْمي، اِرْموا، اُدْعي، اُدْعوا، اِنْسَيْ، اِنْسَوْا.

10. The derived measures end identically. Every measure whose مُضارِع ends in ـي inflects like يَرْمي, and the two measures that end in ـى (V تَفَعَّلَ and VI تَفاعَلَ) inflect like يَنْسى. أَعْطى - يُعْطي (IV), اِشْتَرى - يَشْتَري (VIII), اِسْتَدْعى - يَسْتَدْعي (X) all give أَعْطَيْتُ، أَعْطَتْ، أَعْطَوْا and لَمْ يُعْطِ، أَعْطِ; تَمَنّى - يَتَمَنّى (V) gives تَمَنَّيْتُ، تَمَنَّتْ، تَمَنَّوْا and لَمْ يَتَمَنَّ، تَمَنَّ. There is genuinely no new paradigm to learn after Form I.

11. One verb worth flagging: رَأى - يَرى. It is both hamzated and ناقِص, and it loses its hamza in the imperfect: يَرى، تَرى، نَرى, jussive لَمْ يَرَ “he did not see”. Treat it as a memorised item; its ماضي رَأى، رَأَتْ، رَأَوْا is regular for the ي-class.

12. What is left to other lessons. The passive دُعِيَ - يُدْعى and its deputy agent are The passive and the deputy agent. The participles داعٍ and مَدْعُوٌّ, which are where a ناقِص verb becomes a noun, are Derived nouns: participles, place, time and instrument. The behaviour of nouns like قاضٍ - القاضي - قاضِيًا was Diptotes and other declension classes; today is only the verb.

Forms & patterns

The ماضي of all three classes. The third-person dual cells are included; for أَنْتُما the forms are رَمَيْتُما، دَعَوْتُما، نَسيتُما.

الضَّميررَمى (ي)دَعا (و)نَسِيَ (a)
أَنارَمَيْتُدَعَوْتُنَسيتُ
أَنْتَرَمَيْتَدَعَوْتَنَسيتَ
أَنْتِرَمَيْتِدَعَوْتِنَسيتِ
أَنْتُمْرَمَيْتُمْدَعَوْتُمْنَسيتُمْ
أَنْتُنَّرَمَيْتُنَّدَعَوْتُنَّنَسيتُنَّ
هُوَرَمىدَعانَسِيَ
هِيَرَمَتْدَعَتْنَسِيَتْ
هُما (مُذَكَّر)رَمَيادَعَوَانَسِيا
هُما (مُؤَنَّث)رَمَتادَعَتانَسِيَتا
هُمْرَمَوْادَعَوْانَسُوا
هُنَّرَمَيْنَدَعَوْنَنَسينَ
نَحْنُرَمَيْنادَعَوْنانَسينا

Two traps in that table: رَمَيْنا (نَحْنُ) and رَمَيْنَ (هُنَّ) differ only by the final alif, and the dual دَعَوَا differs from the plural دَعَوْا only by the vowel on the و.

The مُضارِع المَرْفوع.

الضَّميريَرْمييَدْعويَنْسى
أَناأَرْميأَدْعوأَنْسى
أَنْتَتَرْميتَدْعوتَنْسى
أَنْتِتَرْمينَتَدْعينَتَنْسَيْنَ
أَنْتُمْتَرْمونَتَدْعونَتَنْسَوْنَ
أَنْتُنَّتَرْمينَتَدْعونَتَنْسَيْنَ
هُوَيَرْمييَدْعويَنْسى
هِيَتَرْميتَدْعوتَنْسى
هُما (مُذَكَّر)يَرْمِيانِيَدْعُوانِيَنْسَيانِ
هُمْيَرْمونَيَدْعونَيَنْسَوْنَ
هُنَّيَرْمينَيَدْعونَيَنْسَيْنَ
نَحْنُنَرْمينَدْعونَنْسى

Note أَنْتِ تَدْعينَ against هُمْ/هُنَّ يَدْعونَ: the و-class takes a kasra and a long ي in the feminine singular, because ـو plus ـينَ cannot coexist.

The three moods side by side, third person and the cells where the mood is visible.

الضَّميرمَرْفوعمَنْصوب (لَنْ)مَجْزوم (لَمْ)
هُوَ (رَمى)يَرْميلَنْ يَرْمِيَلَمْ يَرْمِ
هِيَ (رَمى)تَرْميلَنْ تَرْمِيَلَمْ تَرْمِ
أَنْتِ (رَمى)تَرْمينَلَنْ تَرْميلَمْ تَرْمي
هُمْ (رَمى)يَرْمونَلَنْ يَرْموالَمْ يَرْموا
هُنَّ (رَمى)يَرْمينَلَنْ يَرْمينَلَمْ يَرْمينَ
هُوَ (دَعا)يَدْعولَنْ يَدْعُوَلَمْ يَدْعُ
هُمْ (دَعا)يَدْعونَلَنْ يَدْعوالَمْ يَدْعوا
هُوَ (نَسِيَ)يَنْسىلَنْ يَنْسىلَمْ يَنْسَ
هُمْ (نَسِيَ)يَنْسَوْنَلَنْ يَنْسَوْالَمْ يَنْسَوْا
نَحْنُ (نَسِيَ)نَنْسىلَنْ نَنْسىلَمْ نَنْسَ

The duals follow the same logic and are left out for space: لَنْ يَرْمِيا، لَمْ يَرْمِيا.

The imperative.

الفِعْلأَنْتَأَنْتِأَنْتُمْ
رَمى - يَرْمياِرْمِاِرْمياِرْموا
مَشى - يَمْشياِمْشِاِمْشياِمْشوا
دَعا - يَدْعواُدْعُاُدْعياُدْعوا
نَسِيَ - يَنْسىاِنْسَاِنْسَيْاِنْسَوْا

Derived measures - the same endings, one row each.

الوَزْنالماضيالمُضارِعمَعَ لَمْالأَمْر
IIرَبّىيُرَبّيلَمْ يُرَبِّرَبِّ
IVأَعْطىيُعْطيلَمْ يُعْطِأَعْطِ
Vتَمَنّىيَتَمَنّىلَمْ يَتَمَنَّتَمَنَّ
VIIIاِشْتَرىيَشْتَريلَمْ يَشْتَرِاِشْتَرِ
Xاِسْتَدْعىيَسْتَدْعيلَمْ يَسْتَدْعِاِسْتَدْعِ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
رَمَيْتُ الوَرَقَةَ في سَلَّةِ المُهْمَلاتِ.I threw the piece of paper into the wastepaper basket.
الفَتاةُ رَمَتْ حَجَرًا صَغيرًا في الماءِ.The girl threw a small stone into the water.
الأَوْلادُ رَمَوْا كُرَتَهُمْ فَوْقَ السّورِ.The boys threw their ball over the wall.
لِماذا تَرْمينَ الطَّعامَ يا سَلْمى؟Why are you throwing the food away, Salma?
دَعَوْتُ أَصْدِقائي إِلَى العَشاءِ يَوْمَ الجُمْعَةِ.I invited my friends to dinner on Friday.
المُديرَةُ دَعَتِ المُوَظَّفينَ إِلَى الاجْتِماعِ.The manager invited the staff to the meeting.
نَسيتُ اسْمَ الشّارِعِ، فَسَأَلْتُ شُرْطِيًّا.I forgot the name of the street, so I asked a policeman.
هَلْ نَسِيَتْ أُخْتُكَ مِفْتاحَها مَرَّةً أُخْرى؟Has your sister forgotten her key again?
الطُّلّابُ نَسُوا دَفاتِرَهُمْ في الصَّفِّ.The students left their notebooks behind in the classroom.
الأَطْفالُ يَنْسَوْنَ الخِلافَ بَعْدَ دَقائِقَ.Children forget a quarrel within minutes.
يَمْشي جَدّي في الحَديقَةِ كُلَّ صَباحٍ.My grandfather walks in the garden every morning.
لَنْ أَنْسى ما قُلْتَهُ لي أَمْسِ.I will never forget what you said to me yesterday.
لَمْ يَشْتَرِ الجيرانُ سَيّارَةً جَديدَةً هٰذِهِ السَّنَةَ.The neighbours have not bought a new car this year.
اُدْعُ زُمَلاءَكَ إِلَى الحَفْلَةِ ولا تَنْسَ أَحَدًا.Invite your colleagues to the party and don’t forget anyone.

Common mistakes

  • لَمْ يَمْشي -> لَمْ يَمْشِ - the مَجْزوم does not shorten the weak letter, it deletes it. What is left is the kasra that was under the م-consonant all along.
  • لَمْ يَدْعو -> لَمْ يَدْعُ - same rule in the و-class. The word is three letters long and that is correct.
  • يَرْميونَ -> يَرْمونَ - the plural ـونَ replaces the final ي; it is never added on top of it. Likewise يَنْسَيونَ is يَنْسَوْنَ.
  • رَموا -> رَمَوْا - write the sukūn on the و, and remember the alif after it is silent (أَلِفٌ فارِقَةٌ, a purely graphic mark). Reading it as a vowel is the single most audible learner error in this class - the same alif sits in دَعَوْا and نَسُوا.
  • لَنْ يَرْمي -> لَنْ يَرْمِيَ - a fatḥa is light enough to be pronounced on the ي, so in the مَنْصوب it must actually be written and said.
  • لَنْ يَنْسَ -> لَنْ يَنْسى - the opposite trap: the a-class keeps its ى in the مَنْصوب (the fatḥa is merely estimated). Only لَمْ deletes it.
  • دَعى / رَمي -> دَعا / رَمى - the root decides the spelling: و-root gives a final ا، ي-root gives a final ى. Dropping the two dots off ي, or adding them to ى, changes the word.
  • نَسَيْتُ -> نَسيتُ - the a-class contracts to a long ي before the ت endings; only the ي-class keeps a diphthong there (رَمَيْتُ).
  • دَعَيْتُ -> دَعَوْتُ - د ع و has a و, and the consonant endings show it. If you can say يَدْعو you can predict دَعَوْتُ.
  • اِرْمي الكُرَةَ (to a man) -> اِرْمِ الكُرَةَ - اِرْمي with a long ي is the feminine singular imperative. The masculine really does end in a bare kasra.

Tips

  • Learn every ناقِص verb as a pair: رَمى - يَرْمي، دَعا - يَدْعو، نَسِيَ - يَنْسى. The class is not predictable from the ماضي alone (compare دَعا with رَمى - the same shape on the page in an unvocalized text).
  • Memory hook for the jussive and the imperative: the tail falls off and leaves its vowel behind. ي leaves a kasra, و leaves a ḍamma, ى leaves a fatḥa. Three facts, and they cover لَمْ يَرْمِ، لَمْ يَدْعُ، لَمْ يَنْسَ، اِرْمِ، اُدْعُ، اِنْسَ.
  • Drill the هُمْ ماضي out loud - رَمَوْا، دَعَوْا، نَسُوا - because that is where the three classes sound different from each other, and it is the form that most often appears in narrative prose.
  • Do not be alarmed by very short words in the press: لَمْ يَبْقَ مِنَ الوَقْتِ شَيْءٌ، لَمْ يَنْتَهِ التَّحْقيقُ، لَمْ يُعْطِ جَوابًا. Each is a normal jussive with its tail deleted.
  • When you are unsure of a jussive, escape to ما plus the ماضي: ما رَمى، ما نَسِيَ are correct and buy you thinking time, though لَمْ is the commoner choice in modern prose.
  • The homograph pairs (تَرْمينَ for أَنْتِ and أَنْتُنَّ; يَدْعونَ for هُمْ and هُنَّ) are worth a flashcard each. Context resolves them; guessing does not.
  • Ignore for now what these verbs do in the passive and as participles. داعٍ، مَدْعُوٌّ، مُشْتَرٍ are coming, and they will make more sense once the active conjugation is automatic.

B1 52 / 70

The passive and the deputy agent

المَبْنِيُّ لِلْمَجْهولِ ونائِبُ الفاعِل

In short

English builds a passive with two words - “was written”. Arabic rebuilds the one word from the inside: كَتَبَ becomes كُتِبَ، يَكْتُبُ becomes يُكْتَبُ. Nothing is added and nothing is removed; only the vowels change. And the doer does not get demoted to a “by” phrase - it disappears completely. That is what the Arabic name says: المَبْنِيُّ لِلْمَجْهولِ, “built for the unknown”, against المَبْنِيُّ لِلْمَعْلومِ, “built for the known”. What used to be the object then steps into the empty subject slot, takes the nominative, and is called نائِبُ الفاعِلِ - the deputy agent.

This is a reading skill before it is a writing skill. News reports, official prose, science and law run on the passive, and two of the commonest verbs in everyday MSA are passives you have already been using as phrases: وُلِدَ “he was born” (lesson 27) and لا يوجَدُ “there is no” (lesson 17). The mechanics are small - one vowel recipe and two riders - and once you have them, every verb in the language, weak roots included, is covered.

The rule

1. The recipe, both tenses. Learn it as two syllables and you have the whole system.

  • الماضي: a ḍamma on the first letter, a kasra on the letter before the last. كَتَبَ → كُتِبَ، فَتَحَ → فُتِحَ، عَلَّمَ → عُلِّمَ، أَرْسَلَ → أُرْسِلَ.
  • المُضارِع: a ḍamma on the prefix letter, a fatḥa on the letter before the last. يَكْتُبُ → يُكْتَبُ، يُعَلِّمُ → يُعَلَّمُ، يُشاهِدُ → يُشاهَدُ، يُرْسِلُ → يُرْسَلُ.

“The letter before the last” means the last letter of the word itself, not the case ending - in كُتِبَ the final فَتْحة is the past-tense ending, and the kasra sits on the ت before it. Say كُتِبَ - يُكْتَبُ out loud a few times: u-i in the past, u-a in the present. Every other statement in this lesson is a footnote to those two syllables.

2. Rider one: a word starting with هَمْزَةُ الوَصْلِ takes a second ḍamma, on the third letter. Forms VII, VIII, IX and X begin their past tense with the propping alif of lesson 48, which has no vowel of its own to change. So Arabic gives the alif the ḍamma and gives one to the third letter as well: اِنْتَخَبَ → اُنْتُخِبَ، اِسْتَخْدَمَ → اُسْتُخْدِمَ، اِعْتَقَلَ → اُعْتُقِلَ. Note the spelling: the alif stays bare (وَصْل), it simply carries a ḍamma instead of its usual kasra. The imperfect has no such alif and needs no rider: يُنْتَخَبُ، يُسْتَخْدَمُ.

3. Rider two: a past tense starting with an added تَ takes the second ḍamma on the letter right after that تَ. The تَ is the first letter, so it takes the ordinary ḍamma of rule 1, and the first radical takes the extra one. This covers Forms V and VI: تَعَلَّمَ → تُعُلِّمَ، تَبادَلَ → تُبودِلَ. These passives are rare, but one of them is everyday newspaper Arabic: تُوُفِّيَ “he passed away”, the passive of تَوَفّى.

4. Long vowels bend to fit the recipe. Where the pattern has a long ا that must now carry a ḍamma, it surfaces as و: Form III شاهَدَ → شوهِدَ، ساعَدَ → سوعِدَ; Form VI تَبادَلَ → تُبودِلَ. In the imperfect the ا is unaffected, because a fatḥa is exactly what it already holds: يُشاهَدُ، يُتَبادَلُ. Nothing here is an exception - the vowel recipe simply wins.

5. Forms VII and IX have no passive in ordinary use. اِنْكَسَرَ already means “it broke, with no doer named”, and اِحْمَرَّ “it turned red” has no object to promote. Both are intransitive and already agentless, so a dictionary or a conjugator simply prints no مَجْهول column for them. If a text needs “the door was opened by someone unnamed”, the choice is فُتِحَ البابُ (true passive of Form I) or اِنْفَتَحَ البابُ (Form VII, “the door opened”). The shape اُنْفُتِحَ is not something you will meet.

6. A ḍamma prefix does not by itself mean passive. Lesson 46 warned about this and here is where it bites. Forms II, III and IV and the quadriliteral take a ḍamma prefix in the active too. What tells them apart is the vowel before the last letter - kasra for those actives, fatḥa for any passive:

يُعَلِّمُ “teaches” against يُعَلَّمُ “is taught”; يُشاهِدُ “watches” against يُشاهَدُ “is watched”; يُرْسِلُ “sends” against يُرْسَلُ “is sent”; يُتَرْجِمُ “translates” against يُتَرْجَمُ “is translated”. One mark, two opposite meanings - which is the best argument this path can make for printing the تَشْكيل.

7. نائِبُ الفاعِلِ is مَرْفوع, and the verb agrees with it. Take كَتَبَ الطّالِبُ الرِّسالَةَ. Delete the agent, and الرِّسالَةَ - accusative because it was the object - moves into the vacated slot and becomes مَرْفوع: كُتِبَتِ الرِّسالَةُ. Two things changed together, and learners usually do only one of them: the case and the agreement. The verb now agrees in gender with its deputy, so كُتِبَتْ with a تاء, not كُتِبَ.

Agreement follows the ordinary rules you already have. Verb before its deputy stays singular: اُعْتُقِلَ المُتَّهَمونَ. Non-human plurals take feminine singular agreement (lesson 11): تُباعُ الكُتُبُ، أُرْسِلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ، تُرْجِمَتْ رِواياتُهُ. A deputy agent behaves in every respect like any other subject of a verbal sentence (lesson 19) - it is only the verb’s shape that is unusual.

8. When the verb reaches its object through a preposition, the جارّ والمَجْرور takes over. Verbs like عَثَرَ عَلى “find”, أَشارَ إِلى “point out”, أَعْلَنَ عَنْ “announce” have no accusative object to promote (lesson 30), so the prepositional phrase stands in as the deputy - and because a شِبْه جُمْلَة has no gender or number of its own, the verb freezes in the masculine singular: عُثِرَ عَلَى الحَقيبَةِ، أُشيرَ إِلى أَنَّ…، أُعْلِنَ عَنْ نَتائِجِ الاِنْتِخاباتِ. Writing عُثِرَتِ الحَقيبَةُ is the standard error here: الحَقيبَة never was an object and cannot become a deputy.

9. Two objects, one deputy. Verbs that take two accusatives - أَعْطى، مَنَحَ، عَلَّمَ - promote the first and leave the second where it was: أَعْطى المُديرُ الطّالِبَ جائِزَةً → أُعْطِيَ الطّالِبُ جائِزَةً. The second accusative is not a leftover mistake; it simply has no slot to move into. (The ظَنَّ family, whose two accusatives behave differently, is lesson 59.)

10. The passive normally names no agent. This is the point where English habits do the most damage. The passive exists precisely because the doer is unknown, irrelevant or deliberately unsaid, so classical usage attaches no “by” phrase at all - if you want to name the doer, use the active. Two modern workarounds exist and both need care:

  • بِواسِطَةِ means “by means of, via” and belongs with instruments and channels: أُرْسِلَتِ الوَثائِقُ بِواسِطَةِ البَريدِ الإِلِكْتْرونِيِّ. Using it for a person - قُتِلَ بِواسِطَةِ الجُنودِ - is a translation reflex, and it reads badly.
  • مِنْ قِبَلِ + genitive (اُعْتُقِلَ الرَّجُلُ مِنْ قِبَلِ الشُّرْطَةِ) is what the press actually writes. Recognise it; it is press register and belongs to lesson 69, not to your own neutral prose.

11. Moods and قَدْ change nothing internal. The passive takes the same endings as the active, because the endings never were the passive’s business: لَنْ يُباعَ البَيْتُ (subjunctive, lesson 33), لَمْ يُنْشَرِ الخَبَرُ (jussive, lesson 35), قَدْ كُتِبَتِ الرِّسالَةُ (lesson 45), كانَ البابُ قَدْ فُتِحَ. There is no passive imperative - you cannot order someone to undergo something.

12. Unvocalized, the two voices are the same letters. كتب الدرس is either كَتَبَ الدَّرْسَ “he wrote the lesson” or كُتِبَ الدَّرْسُ “the lesson was written”, and only the context decides. This is the single most useful case of the unvocalized-reading skill: look for a named agent (if one is present, the verb is active), and read on - a following مِنْ قِبَلِ، أَمْسِ في الجَريدَةِ or a lone noun after the verb with nothing else to be the doer all point to a passive. لا يوجَدُ leaves nothing to resolve at all - its active يَجِدُ is written without the و - and ولد followed by a date or a place is read وُلِدَ as a matter of course.

13. Left to other lessons. The passive participle مَفْعولٌ - مَكْتوبٌ، مُسْتَخْدَمٌ - covers a lot of the same ground with a noun instead of a verb, and it is lesson 53. Passives of the ظَنَّ family are lesson 59.

Forms & patterns

The recipe in one table. Everything else follows from these four cells.

أَوَّلُ الكَلِمَةِما قَبْلَ الآخِرِمِثالٌ
الماضيضَمَّةكَسْرةكُتِبَ
المُضارِعضَمَّة عَلى حَرْفِ المُضارَعَةِفَتْحةيُكْتَبُ

The forms, active against passive. Form I here is كَتَبَ, then عَلَّمَ (II), شاهَدَ (III), أَرْسَلَ (IV), تَعَلَّمَ (V), تَبادَلَ (VI), اِنْكَسَرَ (VII), اِنْتَخَبَ (VIII), اِسْتَخْدَمَ (X) and the quadriliteral تَرْجَمَ. Form IX is left out for the same reason as VII.

الوَزْنالمَعْلوم (ماضٍ)المَجْهول (ماضٍ)المَعْلوم (مُضارِع)المَجْهول (مُضارِع)
Iكَتَبَكُتِبَيَكْتُبُيُكْتَبُ
IIعَلَّمَعُلِّمَيُعَلِّمُيُعَلَّمُ
IIIشاهَدَشوهِدَيُشاهِدُيُشاهَدُ
IVأَرْسَلَأُرْسِلَيُرْسِلُيُرْسَلُ
Vتَعَلَّمَتُعُلِّمَيَتَعَلَّمُيُتَعَلَّمُ
VIتَبادَلَتُبودِلَيَتَبادَلُيُتَبادَلُ
VIIاِنْكَسَرَلا مَجْهولَ لَهُيَنْكَسِرُلا مَجْهولَ لَهُ
VIIIاِنْتَخَبَاُنْتُخِبَيَنْتَخِبُيُنْتَخَبُ
Xاِسْتَخْدَمَاُسْتُخْدِمَيَسْتَخْدِمُيُسْتَخْدَمُ
رُباعِيّتَرْجَمَتُرْجِمَيُتَرْجِمُيُتَرْجَمُ

A full person paradigm - سُئِلَ / يُسْأَلُ, “to be asked”. The endings are the ones you learned in lessons 14 and 22, unchanged. Only the inside of the stem is new. The dual and the second-person feminine plural are omitted; they take the endings you already know.

الضَّميرالماضي المَجْهولالمُضارِع المَجْهول
أَناسُئِلْتُأُسْأَلُ
أَنْتَسُئِلْتَتُسْأَلُ
أَنْتِسُئِلْتِتُسْأَلينَ
هُوَسُئِلَيُسْأَلُ
هِيَسُئِلَتْتُسْأَلُ
نَحْنُسُئِلْنانُسْأَلُ
هُمْسُئِلوايُسْأَلونَ
هُنَّسُئِلْنَيُسْأَلْنَ

Weak and awkward roots. This is where the passive is easier than the active: whatever the active class did, the passive collapses it into one shape. Every أَجْوَف verb that shortens in the active - Form I and measures IV, VIII and X (lesson 50) - is قيلَ / يُقالُ shaped: ي in the past, ا in the present. Every ناقِص verb ends in ـِيَ in the past and in ـى in the present, whichever letter its active used.

النَّوْعالمَعْلومالمَجْهول (ماضٍ)المَجْهول (مُضارِع)English
أَجْوَف Iقالَ - يَقولُقيلَيُقالُto be said
أَجْوَف Iباعَ - يَبيعُبيعَيُباعُto be sold
أَجْوَف IVأَقامَ - يُقيمُأُقيمَيُقامُto be held (an event)
أَجْوَف VIIIاِخْتارَ - يَخْتارُاُخْتيرَيُخْتارُto be chosen
ناقِص Iدَعا - يَدْعودُعِيَيُدْعىto be invited, called
ناقِص Iرَمى - يَرْميرُمِيَيُرْمىto be thrown
ناقِص Iبَنى - يَبْنيبُنِيَيُبْنىto be built
ناقِص IVأَعْطى - يُعْطيأُعْطِيَيُعْطىto be given
مِثال Iوَجَدَ - يَجِدُوُجِدَيوجَدُto be found, exist
مُضَعَّف Iرَدَّ - يَرُدُّرُدَّيُرَدُّto be returned
مَهْموز Iسَأَلَ - يَسْأَلُسُئِلَيُسْأَلُto be asked
مَهْموز Iقَرَأَ - يَقْرَأُقُرِئَيُقْرَأُto be read

The hamzated verbs change seat, not sound: a hamza with a kasra on it or before it sits on a ي (سُئِلَ، قُرِئَ), and a hamza with a sukūn after a ḍamma sits on a و (يُؤْخَذُ, from أَخَذَ).

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كُتِبَتِ الرِّسالَةُ بِخَطٍّ جَميلٍ.The letter was written in a beautiful hand.
تُباعُ الكُتُبُ القَديمَةُ في هٰذَا السّوقِ.Old books are sold in this market.
اُنْتُخِبَ رَئيسٌ جَديدٌ لِلْجامِعَةِ.A new president was elected for the university.
يُسْتَخْدَمُ هٰذَا البَرْنامَجُ في كُلِّ المَدارِسِ.This program is used in every school.
وُلِدَ الشّاعِرُ في قَرْيَةٍ صَغيرَةٍ قُرْبَ دِمَشْقَ.The poet was born in a small village near Damascus.
سُئِلْتُ عَنْ رَأْيي في المَوْضوعِ.I was asked about my opinion on the subject.
يُقالُ إِنَّ الطَّريقَ سَيُغْلَقُ غَداً.It is said that the road will be closed tomorrow.
بُنِيَتِ المَدْرَسَةُ قَبْلَ خَمْسينَ عاماً.The school was built fifty years ago.
دُعيتُ إِلى مُؤْتَمَرٍ في تونِسَ.I was invited to a conference in Tunis.
شوهِدَ المُتَّهَمُ قُرْبَ المَحَطَّةِ.The accused was seen near the station.
لا يوجَدُ حَلٌّ سَهْلٌ لِهٰذِهِ المُشْكِلَةِ.There is no easy solution to this problem.
عُثِرَ عَلَى الحَقيبَةِ في المَطارِ.The bag was found at the airport.
تُرْجِمَتْ رِوايَتُهُ إِلى عَشْرِ لُغاتٍ.His novel has been translated into ten languages.
أُعْطِيَ كُلُّ طالِبٍ نُسْخَةً مِنَ الكِتابِ.Each student was given a copy of the book.

Common mistakes

  • كُتِبَ الرِّسالَةَ -> كُتِبَتِ الرِّسالَةُ - the old object is now نائِبُ الفاعِلِ. Two things must change at once: the case becomes مَرْفوع, and the verb agrees with it in gender.
  • يُكْتِبُ الدَّرْسُ -> يُكْتَبُ الدَّرْسُ - the imperfect passive has a fatḥa before the last letter. A kasra there gives an active verb of a different form, not a passive.
  • إِنْتُخِبَ الرَّئيسُ -> اُنْتُخِبَ الرَّئيسُ - that alif is هَمْزَةُ وَصْلٍ (lesson 48) and is written bare in the passive exactly as in the active; only its vowel changes, kasra to ḍamma.
  • اِنْتُخِبَ الرَّئيسُ -> اُنْتُخِبَ الرَّئيسُ - and the ḍamma goes on the alif as well as on the third letter. Same for Form X: اُسْتُخْدِمَ، not اِسْتُخْدِمَ.
  • قُوِلَ لَنا إِنَّهُ مُسافِرٌ -> قيلَ لَنا إِنَّهُ مُسافِرٌ - a hollow root cannot keep its middle و here; the past passive of a Form I أَجْوَف verb is the قيلَ shape.
  • يُقولُ إِنَّ الاِجْتِماعَ غَداً -> يُقالُ إِنَّ الاِجْتِماعَ غَداً - and the imperfect passive of a hollow verb is the يُقالُ shape, with ا. يَقولُ with a fatḥa prefix is the active.
  • كَيْفَ يُدْعي هٰذَا الطَّبَقُ؟ -> كَيْفَ يُدْعى هٰذَا الطَّبَقُ؟ - the imperfect passive of a ناقِص verb always ends in أَلِف مَقْصورة, never in ي, whatever the active ending was.
  • يُباعُ الكُتُبُ هُنا -> تُباعُ الكُتُبُ هُنا - a non-human plural deputy agent takes feminine singular agreement, just like any other subject (lesson 11).
  • قُتِلَ الرَّجُلُ بِواسِطَةِ الجُنودِ -> قَتَلَ الجُنودُ الرَّجُلَ - the Arabic passive names no agent, and بِواسِطة is “by means of”, for instruments and channels. Name the doer and you want the active.
  • اُنْفُتِحَ البابُ -> فُتِحَ البابُ - Form VII is intransitive and already agentless, so it has no passive to build. Use the Form I passive, or اِنْفَتَحَ البابُ.

Tips

  • Drill the recipe as sound, not as a list: u-i for the past, u-a for the present. كُتِبَ / يُكْتَبُ is the tuning fork - hum it and any verb you meet falls into place.
  • Conjugate the active you already know, then repaint the vowels. The endings, the personal prefixes and the moods are untouched, so there is no second paradigm to memorise.
  • A ḍamma on the prefix is not a passive on its own - يُعَلِّمُ، يُشاهِدُ، يُرْسِلُ، يُتَرْجِمُ are all active. Your eye should go to the vowel before the last letter every time.
  • Weak roots are a relief here. Every hollow verb that shortens in the active is قيلَ - يُقالُ, every defective verb is رُمِيَ - يُرْمى, and the active’s و/ي split stops mattering.
  • Read a news page and collect the frozen press formulas whole: يُذْكَرُ أَنَّ، أُشيرَ إِلى أَنَّ، أُعْلِنَ عَنْ، عُثِرَ عَلى. They are passives with a prepositional deputy and they never change shape.
  • If you are unsure of a vowelled passive, look the verb up rather than guess - a conjugator such as qutrub.arabeyes.org prints the المَجْهول column beside the المَعْلوم one.
  • A labelled contrast, not something to imitate: the internal passive has largely disappeared from the spoken dialects, which use an اِنْفَعَل / اِتْفَعَل type verb instead. In writing, MSA expects the vowel-change passive.
  • Ignore for now the passive participle مَكْتوبٌ (lesson 53) and any deputy agent that is not a promoted object. Object-to-subject is the case that covers almost everything you will read.

B1 53 / 70

Derived nouns: participles, place, time and instrument

المُشْتَقّات: اسْمُ الفاعِلِ والمَفْعولِ واسْما الزَّمانِ والمَكانِ واسْمُ الآلَة

In short

Arabic does not have separate words for “to write”, “writer”, “written”, “desk” and “office”. It has the root ك-ت-ب and a set of moulds that turn a verb into a noun: كاتِبٌ the one writing, مَكْتوبٌ the thing written, مَكْتَبٌ the place of writing, مَكْتَبَةٌ the place of books. These noun-moulds are called المُشْتَقّات, “the derived ones”, and there are only four families of them worth learning as a system: the doer, the done-to, the place-or-time, and the tool.

This is the highest-leverage vocabulary lesson in the path. Every measure from lessons 46-53 feeds these moulds automatically, so one new verb hands you three or four new nouns for free - and a strange noun in a newspaper stops being strange the moment you see its mould. The cost is one habit: from Form II upwards the doer and the done-to normally differ by exactly one vowel, and ordinary Arabic prints neither.

The rule

1. Everything starts from the verb. A derived noun is built on a mould, and the mould is chosen by the verb’s measure (Form I or Forms II-X), not by its meaning. So the first question is always the same one lesson 46 taught you to ask: is this verb مُجَرَّد (Form I, three bare radicals) or مَزيد (anything augmented)? Form I has its own idiosyncratic moulds; Forms II-X share one mechanical recipe with the passive of lesson 52.

2. اسْمُ الفاعِلِ from Form I: the mould فاعِل. Slot the three radicals into فاعِل and you have the active participle - the one doing the action: كَتَبَ ← كاتِبٌ، دَرَسَ ← دارِسٌ، عَمِلَ ← عامِلٌ، جَلَسَ ← جالِسٌ. Weak radicals bend the shape in the ways lessons 49-56 predicted:

  • الأَجْوَف (weak middle): the و or ي surfaces as a hamza on an alif seat - قالَ ← قائِلٌ، باعَ ← بائِعٌ، نامَ ← نائِمٌ.
  • النّاقِص (weak final): the ي is squeezed out and the word ends in ـٍ - دَعا ← داعٍ، قَضى ← قاضٍ، مَشى ← ماشٍ. See rule 10.
  • المُضَعَّف (doubled): the two identical radicals merge under a shadda - مَرَّ ← مارٌّ، ضَرَّ ← ضارٌّ.

3. اسْمُ الفاعِلِ from Forms II-X: مُـ plus the imperfect stem plus a كَسْرَة. This is mechanical and almost exception-free - only the أَجْوَف behaves differently, see rule 5. Take the هُوَ imperfect, throw away the prefix letter, put مُـ in its place, and make sure the vowel before the last radical is a كَسْرَة:

يُدَرِّسُ ← مُدَرِّسٌ، يُسافِرُ ← مُسافِرٌ، يُرْسِلُ ← مُرْسِلٌ، يَتَعَلَّمُ ← مُتَعَلِّمٌ، يَتَعاوَنُ ← مُتَعاوِنٌ، يَنْكَسِرُ ← مُنْكَسِرٌ، يَجْتَمِعُ ← مُجْتَمِعٌ، يَسْتَخْدِمُ ← مُسْتَخْدِمٌ. Four-letter roots behave identically: يُتَرْجِمُ ← مُتَرْجِمٌ.

Notice that Forms II, III and IV already had a ḍamma on the imperfect prefix, so for them the change is only a letter; Forms V-X had a fatḥa, so you change both the letter and its vowel.

4. اسْمُ المَفْعولِ from Form I: the mould مَفْعول. The done-to noun of a sound Form I verb is مَفْعول - note the فَتْحَة on the م and the long و: كَتَبَ ← مَكْتوبٌ، عَرَفَ ← مَعْروفٌ، فَتَحَ ← مَفْتوحٌ، شَرِبَ ← مَشْروبٌ. The weak classes again contract:

  • الأَجْوَف: the long و collapses into the root vowel - قالَ ← مَقولٌ، باعَ ← مَبيعٌ (a ي root keeps a ي).
  • النّاقِص: the final radical doubles under a shadda - دَعا ← مَدْعُوٌّ، رَمى ← مَرْمِيٌّ (و roots in ـوٌّ، ي roots in ـيٌّ).
  • المُضَعَّف: مَدَّ ← مَمْدودٌ.

5. اسْمُ المَفْعولِ from Forms II-X: the same مُـ shape with a فَتْحَة. Identical recipe to rule 3, one vowel different: يُدَرِّسُ ← مُدَرَّسٌ، يُشاهِدُ ← مُشاهَدٌ، يُرْسِلُ ← مُرْسَلٌ، يَتَوَقَّعُ ← مُتَوَقَّعٌ، يَحْتَرِمُ ← مُحْتَرَمٌ، يَسْتَخْدِمُ ← مُسْتَخْدَمٌ.

The one class that escapes the vowel contrast is the أَجْوَف of Forms VII and VIII: its middle radical is already a long ا in both moulds, so the two participles fall together - اِخْتارَ / يَخْتارُ gives مُخْتارٌ for “choosing” and “chosen” alike, and اِحْتاجَ gives مُحْتاجٌ for both. Forms IV and X keep them apart, because their active middle stays a long ي: أَقامَ / يُقيمُ ← مُقيمٌ against مُقامٌ, and اِسْتَقامَ / يَسْتَقيمُ ← مُسْتَقيمٌ against مُسْتَقامٌ.

Say this out loud once, because it is the whole lesson: مُدَرِّسٌ and مُدَرَّسٌ differ by one vowel, and unvocalized they are the same four letters, مدرس. So are مُسْتَخْدِمٌ “user” and مُسْتَخْدَمٌ “used”، مُتَّهِمٌ “accuser” and مُتَّهَمٌ “accused”، مُصَدِّرٌ “exporter” and مُصَدَّرٌ “exported”. Real Arabic prints no mark at all, so you decide from the sentence, exactly as the pronunciation guide trained you to: a doer usually has something under it doing something, a done-to usually describes a thing that was acted on.

6. What participles do in a sentence. They are nouns with adjective behaviour. They inflect for gender, number and case like any noun - مُدَرِّسٌ، مُدَرِّسَةٌ، مُدَرِّسونَ، مُدَرِّساتٌ - and they appear in three roles:

  • as a plain noun: كاتِبٌ “a writer”, مُهَنْدِسونَ “engineers”, مَشْروبٌ “a drink”.
  • as an adjective agreeing with its noun (lesson 8): الطَّريقُ المَقْطوعُ.
  • as the predicate of a nominal sentence, where the active participle very often carries an ongoing or an about-to-happen sense: أَنا ذاهِبٌ إِلى السّوقِ “I am going / I am off to the market”, هُمْ قادِمونَ غَدًا “they are coming tomorrow”.

One practical asymmetry: Form I participles of human beings often take a broken plural (كُتّابٌ، عُمّالٌ، طُلّابٌ، قُضاةٌ), while those from Forms II-X take the sound plurals (مُدَرِّسونَ، مُسافِرونَ، مُتَرْجِماتٌ).

7. Not every فاعِل word is a live participle. Many have frozen into ordinary dictionary nouns: عالِمٌ is a scholar or a scientist, not merely “someone who knows”; شاعِرٌ is a poet; طالِبٌ is a student, not “a requester”. The mould tells you where the word came from, the dictionary what it means now. Recognise freely, but do not coin new derived nouns and expect them to be words.

8. اسْما الزَّمانِ والمَكانِ: one mould for two jobs. From Form I the place noun and the time noun share a single shape with a فَتْحَة on the م, and the choice between مَفْعَل and مَفْعِل follows the imperfect vowel:

  • imperfect in ـُ or ـَمَفْعَل: يَكْتُبُ ← مَكْتَبٌ، يَطْبُخُ ← مَطْبَخٌ، يَلْعَبُ ← مَلْعَبٌ، يَخْرُجُ ← مَخْرَجٌ.
  • imperfect in ـِمَفْعِل: يَجْلِسُ ← مَجْلِسٌ، يَنْزِلُ ← مَنْزِلٌ، and so does the مِثال verb (weak first radical) even where its imperfect is not a kasra: يَعِدُ ← مَوْعِدٌ، يَقِفُ ← مَوْقِفٌ، يَضَعُ ← مَوْضِعٌ.

The same mould often carries a ة: مَدْرَسَةٌ، مَكْتَبَةٌ، مَزْرَعَةٌ، مَحَطَّةٌ. It is not a free variant of the bare shape - where a root has both, they are two separate words (مَكْتَبٌ an office, مَكْتَبَةٌ a library). A handful of very common words are simply irregular and must be learned as vocabulary - مَسْجِدٌ sits on مَفْعِل although يَسْجُدُ has a ḍamma, and so do مَشْرِقٌ، مَغْرِبٌ، مَطْلِعٌ. Weak roots behave as expected: زارَ ← مَزارٌ، جَرى ← مَجْرًى، مَشى ← مَمْشًى، and the everyday المَقْهى “the café” is the same shape.

Two further facts make this family pay. First, from a sound root the plural is predictable: مَفاعِل، a صيغَةُ مُنْتَهى الجُموعِ from lesson 10, hence also a diptote (lesson 41) - no tanwīn, and a fatḥa for the genitive unless it is definite: مَكاتِبُ، مَدارِسُ، مَساجِدُ، في مَكاتِبَ حَديثَةٍ، في المَكاتِبِ. (Place nouns from a hollow root stand outside this and take ـات: مَزارٌ ← مَزاراتٌ.) Second, time and place are the same word - مَوْعِدٌ is the time of an appointment, مَغْرِبٌ is both the west and sunset. Only the sentence decides.

From the derived measures there is no separate mould at all: the place noun is identical to the passive participle, and context alone separates them. مُسْتَشْفًى literally “a place where a cure is sought” is a hospital, مُجْتَمَعٌ is a society, مُخْتَبَرٌ is a laboratory, مُسْتَوْدَعٌ is a warehouse, مُلْتَقًى is a meeting point.

9. اسْمُ الآلَةِ: the tool, with a كَسْرَة on the م. Three classical moulds, all from Form I, and all beginning مِـ:

  • مِفْعال: مِفْتاحٌ a key, مِنْشارٌ a saw, مِصْباحٌ a lamp, مِيزانٌ a set of scales.
  • مِفْعَل: مِبْرَدٌ a file, مِقَصٌّ a pair of scissors, مِصْعَدٌ a lift.
  • مِفْعَلَة: مِكْنَسَةٌ a broom, مِلْعَقَةٌ a spoon, مِسْطَرَةٌ a ruler, مِطْرَقَةٌ a hammer.

Modern machines are named on a newer, fully productive pattern فَعّالَة: غَسّالَةٌ a washing machine, ثَلّاجَةٌ a fridge, سَمّاعَةٌ a receiver. Alongside it sit فَعّال (خَلّاطٌ a blender, سَخّانٌ a heater) and فاعِلَة (رافِعَةٌ a crane, طائِرَةٌ an aeroplane).

Now the contrast that matters: مِـ is the tool, مَـ is the place or the time. مِكْنَسَةٌ is a broom, مَدْرَسَةٌ is a school - the same frame around the root, one vowel apart on the م. A single root can serve both jobs: from غ-س-ل، مَغْسَلَةٌ is the washbasin, the place of washing, and غَسّالَةٌ is the machine. Unvocalized the difference is invisible, which is one more reason these words are learned as vocabulary and not generated on the fly.

10. المَنْقوص participles end in ـٍ when indefinite. قاضٍ، داعٍ، ماشٍ، مُحامٍ lose their final ي in the nominative and the genitive when indefinite and take a plain kasratān; they keep a full ـِيًا in the accusative, and the ي returns whenever the word is definite or the first term of an إِضافَة: القاضي، قاضي المَحْكَمَةِ. This is lesson 41’s declension class met in its commonest habitat, since most مَنْقوص nouns are participles. Their plurals: قُضاةٌ، دُعاةٌ، مُحامونَ.

11. What this lesson leaves alone. A participle can govern an object exactly as its verb does - هُوَ كاتِبٌ رِسالَةً - and that whole topic is lesson 67. The مَصْدَر, the noun of the action itself (كِتابَةٌ، تَدْريسٌ), is lesson 54 - and be warned that one of its shapes, المَصْدَر المِيمِيّ, looks exactly like a place noun (مَطْلَبٌ “a demand”).

Forms & patterns

اسْمُ الفاعِلِ across the measures. The هُوَ imperfect is printed so you can see where the noun comes from:

الوَزْنالفِعْلالمُضارِعاسْمُ الفاعِلEnglish
Iكَتَبَيَكْتُبُكاتِبٌwriting, a writer
I (أَجْوَف)قالَيَقولُقائِلٌsaying, a speaker
I (ناقِص)دَعايَدْعوداعٍ / الدّاعيcalling, a caller
I (مُضَعَّف)مَرَّيَمُرُّمارٌّpassing, a passer-by
IIدَرَّسَيُدَرِّسُمُدَرِّسٌa teacher
IIIسافَرَيُسافِرُمُسافِرٌtravelling, a traveller
IVأَرْسَلَيُرْسِلُمُرْسِلٌa sender
Vتَعَلَّمَيَتَعَلَّمُمُتَعَلِّمٌa learner
VIIIاِجْتَمَعَيَجْتَمِعُمُجْتَمِعٌmeeting, gathering
Xاِسْتَخْدَمَيَسْتَخْدِمُمُسْتَخْدِمٌa user
فَعْلَلَتَرْجَمَيُتَرْجِمُمُتَرْجِمٌa translator

اسْمُ المَفْعولِ. Form I is مَفْعول; everything else repeats the مُـ shape with a فَتْحَة:

الوَزْنالفِعْلاسْمُ المَفْعولEnglish
Iكَتَبَمَكْتوبٌwritten
Iعَرَفَمَعْروفٌknown, well-known
I (أَجْوَف و)قالَمَقولٌsaid
I (أَجْوَف ي)باعَمَبيعٌsold
I (ناقِص و)دَعامَدْعُوٌّinvited
I (ناقِص ي)رَمىمَرْمِيٌّthrown
IIدَرَّسَمُدَرَّسٌtaught
IVأَرْسَلَمُرْسَلٌsent
VIIIاِحْتَرَمَمُحْتَرَمٌrespected
Xاِسْتَخْدَمَمُسْتَخْدَمٌused

One vowel, two opposite meanings - and nothing at all in unvocalized print:

بِلا تَشْكيلاسْمُ الفاعِلاسْمُ المَفْعول
مدرسمُدَرِّسٌ - a teacherمُدَرَّسٌ - taught
مستخدممُسْتَخْدِمٌ - a userمُسْتَخْدَمٌ - used; an employee
متهممُتَّهِمٌ - an accuserمُتَّهَمٌ - accused, a defendant
مصدرمُصَدِّرٌ - an exporterمُصَدَّرٌ - exported (and مَصْدَرٌ “source”, lesson 54)

اسْما الزَّمانِ والمَكانِ from Form I. The plural column is the payoff - from a sound root it is مَفاعِل, and a diptote every time:

الفِعْلالمُضارِعالوَزْنالاسْمEnglishالجَمْع
كَتَبَيَكْتُبُمَفْعَلمَكْتَبٌdesk, officeمَكاتِبُ
طَبَخَيَطْبُخُمَفْعَلمَطْبَخٌkitchenمَطابِخُ
لَعِبَيَلْعَبُمَفْعَلمَلْعَبٌplaying field, stadiumمَلاعِبُ
جَلَسَيَجْلِسُمَفْعِلمَجْلِسٌcouncil, sitting roomمَجالِسُ
نَزَلَيَنْزِلُمَفْعِلمَنْزِلٌhouse, dwellingمَنازِلُ
وَعَدَيَعِدُمَفْعِلمَوْعِدٌappointment, time setمَواعِدُ
وَقَفَيَقِفُمَفْعِلمَوْقِفٌstop, car park, stanceمَواقِفُ
دَرَسَيَدْرُسُمَفْعَلَةمَدْرَسَةٌschoolمَدارِسُ
سَجَدَيَسْجُدُمَفْعِل (شاذٌّ)مَسْجِدٌmosqueمَساجِدُ
جَرىيَجْريمَفْعَلمَجْرًىwatercourse, channelمَجارٍ

From Forms II-X the place noun is the passive participle:

الفِعْلالوَزْنالاسْمEnglish
اِسْتَشْفىXمُسْتَشْفًى / المُسْتَشْفىhospital
اِجْتَمَعَVIIIمُجْتَمَعٌsociety
اِخْتَبَرَVIIIمُخْتَبَرٌlaboratory
اِلْتَقىVIIIمُلْتَقًىmeeting point, forum
اِسْتَوْدَعَXمُسْتَوْدَعٌwarehouse

اسْمُ الآلَةِ - the three classical moulds and the modern ones:

الوَزْنالآلَةEnglishالجَمْع
مِفْعالمِفْتاحٌkeyمَفاتيحُ
مِفْعالمِنْشارٌsawمَناشيرُ
مِفْعالمِيزانٌscalesمَوازينُ
مِفْعَلمِصْعَدٌlift, elevatorمَصاعِدُ
مِفْعَلَةمِكْنَسَةٌbroomمَكانِسُ
مِفْعَلَةمِلْعَقَةٌspoonمَلاعِقُ
فَعّالَةغَسّالَةٌwashing machineغَسّالاتٌ
فَعّالَةثَلّاجَةٌfridgeثَلّاجاتٌ
فاعِلَةرافِعَةٌcraneرافِعاتٌ

The مَنْقوص participle, declined (lesson 41). Only the accusative shows the ي when indefinite:

الحالَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَة
مَرْفوعقاضٍالقاضي
مَنْصوبقاضِيًاالقاضِيَ
مَجْرورقاضٍالقاضي

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الكاتِبُ جالِسٌ في المَقْهى مُنْذُ الصَّباحِ.The writer has been sitting in the café since the morning.
مُدَرِّسُ الرِّياضِيّاتِ غائِبٌ اليَوْمَ.The maths teacher is absent today.
الطَّرْدُ مُرْسَلٌ بِالبَريدِ السَّريعِ.The parcel has been sent by express post.
اسْمُ المُرْسِلِ مَكْتوبٌ عَلى الظَّرْفِ.The sender’s name is written on the envelope.
هٰذا الشّارِعُ مَعْروفٌ بِمَطاعِمِهِ.This street is known for its restaurants.
الضَّيْفُ الأَخيرُ مَدْعُوٌّ إِلى العَشاءِ أَيْضًا.The last guest is invited to dinner as well.
في المَحْكَمَةِ قاضٍ ومُحامٍ وكاتِبٌ.In the court there are a judge, a lawyer and a clerk.
أَبي مُسافِرٌ إِلى تونِسَ غَدًا.My father is travelling to Tunis tomorrow.
وَضَعْتُ الكُتُبَ عَلى المَكْتَبِ ثُمَّ خَرَجْتُ.I put the books on the desk and then went out.
تَقَعُ المَدْرَسَةُ الجَديدَةُ بِجانِبِ المَلْعَبِ.The new school is next to the sports ground.
نُقِلَ المَريضُ إِلى المُسْتَشْفى بَعْدَ الحادِثِ.The patient was taken to the hospital after the accident.
لِلاجْتِماعِ مَوْعِدٌ ثابِتٌ كُلَّ يَوْمِ اثْنَيْنِ.The meeting has a fixed time every Monday.
أَيْنَ مِفْتاحُ البابِ؟Where is the door key?
اِشْتَرَيْنا غَسّالَةً جَديدَةً.We bought a new washing machine.

Common mistakes

  • مُكْتوبٌ عَلى الوَرَقَةِ -> مَكْتوبٌ عَلى الوَرَقَةِ - the Form I passive participle starts with a فَتْحَة on the م. The مُـ prefix belongs to the augmented measures (and to the quadriliteral), never to Form I.
  • أَرْسَلَ ← مَرْسولٌ -> أَرْسَلَ ← مُرْسَلٌ - مَفْعول only ever weighs a Form I verb. From an augmented measure you must go through the imperfect: يُرْسِلُ ← مُرْسَلٌ.
  • مُدَرَّسُ اللُّغَةِ العَرَبِيَّةِ for “the Arabic teacher” -> مُدَرِّسُ اللُّغَةِ العَرَبِيَّةِ - kasra before the last radical is the doer, fatḥa the done-to.
  • مُسافَرٌ إِلى بَيْروتَ -> مُسافِرٌ إِلى بَيْروتَ - سافَرَ is intransitive, so it has no plain passive participle; in ordinary use only مُسافِرٌ occurs.
  • دَخَلَ قاضِيٌ إِلى القاعَةِ -> دَخَلَ قاضٍ إِلى القاعَةِ - an indefinite مَنْقوص participle drops the ي and takes ـٍ. It reappears the moment the word is definite: دَخَلَ القاضي.
  • مَدْعِيٌّ إِلى الحَفْلِ -> مَدْعُوٌّ إِلى الحَفْلِ - a ناقِص root in و doubles as ـوٌّ (دَعا ← مَدْعُوٌّ); only ي roots give ـيٌّ (رَمى ← مَرْمِيٌّ).
  • مِكْتَبُ المُديرِ -> مَكْتَبُ المُديرِ - a kasra on the م announces a tool. The office is a place, so it takes a fatḥa; the broom مِكْنَسَةٌ takes the kasra.
  • في مَكاتِبٍ جَديدَةٍ -> في مَكاتِبَ جَديدَةٍ - مَفاعِل is مُنْتَهى الجُموعِ, hence a diptote: no tanwīn, and a fatḥa for the genitive when indefinite.
  • الشّاعِرُ = the one who is feeling -> الشّاعِرُ = the poet - dozens of فاعِل words have hardened into ordinary nouns (عالِمٌ، طالِبٌ، تاجِرٌ). Read them as vocabulary first, as participles only if the sentence demands it.

Tips

  • Derive from the imperfect, never from the past. For any Form II-X verb the whole procedure is “swap the prefix letter for مُـ, then choose the vowel”: kasra for the doer, fatḥa for the done-to. Two seconds - only a hollow verb needs a second look, since there the two can coincide (يَخْتارُ ← مُخْتارٌ for both).
  • Chant the pair يُدَرِّسُ ← مُدَرِّسٌ / مُدَرَّسٌ until it is automatic. Every other measure is the same movement, and this pair carries the hardest fact in the lesson.
  • Learn place nouns as vocabulary with a bonus: the singular’s vowel (مَفْعَل or مَفْعِل) is only semi-predictable and worth memorising word by word, but from a sound root the plural مَفاعِل is free every time - and it is a diptote.
  • Make the م-prefix your reading reflex: strip the م off an unknown word, read the three letters underneath, and you have the root and a first guess at the meaning.
  • Recognise widely, coin narrowly. These moulds explain existing words beautifully; they do not license you to invent a مِفْعال for every gadget.
  • Leave two things for later on purpose: how a participle takes its own object (lesson 67), and the مَصْدَر, which is the noun of the action rather than of a person, place or thing (lesson 54).

B1 54 / 70

The verbal noun, plain and clausal

المَصْدَرُ الصَّريحُ والمَصْدَرُ المُؤَوَّل

In short

Every Arabic verb has a noun that names its action: كَتَبَ “he wrote” has كِتابَةٌ “writing”, اِسْتَخْدَمَ “he used” has اِسْتِخْدامٌ “use”. That noun is the مَصْدَر, and Arabic reaches for it constantly where English would use a gerund, an infinitive, or a whole subordinate clause. Signs, headlines, contracts and academic prose are built out of مَصادِر: الدُّخولُ مَمْنوعٌ، التَّدْخينُ مُضِرٌّ، اِسْتِمْرارُ الحِوارِ.

There are two of them. The plain one - المَصْدَر الصَّريح - is a single word from the dictionary. The clausal one - المَصْدَر المُؤَوَّل - is the أَنْ clause you already build in lesson 34: أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ. Arabic treats those two as the same grammatical object, so you can swap one for the other, and that swap is the practical skill of this lesson. Once you can turn أَنْ أَذْهَبَ into الذَّهابَ you have a second register available in every sentence you write.

The rule

1. What a مَصْدَر is. It is a noun, not a verb form. It names the action in the abstract, with no person, no tense and no mood attached: قِراءَةٌ is “reading” as such, not “I read” or “he was reading”. Because it is a noun it takes ال, takes tanwīn, takes case endings, takes adjectives, and can be the مُبْتَدَأ, the خَبَر, the فاعِل, the مَفْعول بِه, or the noun after a preposition - anything a noun can be.

2. Form I: the مَصْدَر is lexical. For the simple triliteral verb there is no reliable rule. The shape must be learned with the verb, exactly as you learn the plural of a noun. كَتَبَ gives كِتابَةٌ but دَخَلَ gives دُخولٌ and فَهِمَ gives فَهْمٌ, and nothing in the three radicals predicts which. When you meet a new Form I verb, write down three things: الماضي، المُضارِع، المَصْدَر. Dictionaries print all three for exactly this reason.

3. The Form I families are worth recognizing, not deriving. A handful of shapes cover most of what you will read, and there are loose tendencies: verbs of craft and occupation like كِتابَة and زِراعَة tend to فِعالَة; verbs of coming and going like دُخول and خُروج tend to فُعول. Treat those as recognition aids for guessing at a word you half-remember, never as a licence to invent one. The table below gives the frequent families with real pairs.

4. From Form II upward the مَصْدَر is predictable. This is the good news, and it is most of the lesson’s practical value: each derived form has a regular مَصْدَر shape - point 5 below names the two places where a second shape competes - and you can build it from the verb without a dictionary. Learn a hook word for each row of the derived table - تَدْريس، مُشاهَدَة، إِرْسال، تَعَلُّم، تَعاوُن، اِنْكِسار، اِجْتِماع، اِسْتِخْدام - and you have the whole system. Notice the internal signature of the last three: a kasra sits immediately before the long ا, which is what makes اِنْفِعال، اِفْتِعال، اِسْتِفْعال instantly recognizable on a page.

5. Two details inside the derived table. First, Form II is تَفْعيل, but when the third radical is weak (a ناقِص verb, lesson 51) the shape becomes تَفْعِلَة: رَبّى → تَرْبِيَةٌ، سَمّى → تَسْمِيَةٌ، صَفّى → تَصْفِيَةٌ. A few sound-rooted verbs took تَفْعِلَة lexically as well - جَرَّبَ → تَجْرِبَةٌ - so if a word looks like that shape, do not “correct” it. Second, Form III has two shapes: the regular مُفاعَلَة (شاهَدَ → مُشاهَدَةٌ، ساعَدَ → مُساعَدَةٌ) and a shorter فِعال that some verbs prefer or allow alongside it (دافَعَ → دِفاعٌ، حاوَرَ → حِوارٌ، حافَظَ → حِفاظٌ). The فِعال ones are frequent nouns in their own right; collect them as vocabulary.

6. The hamza tells you which form you are looking at. Form IV’s مَصْدَر إِفْعال begins with هَمْزَة قَطْع, written on a seat with a kasra: إِرْسالٌ، إِعْلامٌ، إِغْلاقٌ. Forms VII, VIII, IX and X begin with هَمْزَة وَصْل, the bare propping alif of lesson 48: اِنْكِسارٌ، اِجْتِماعٌ، اِسْتِخْدامٌ. This difference survives the stripping of the vowel marks, so it is visible in ordinary unvocalized text: إعلام is right and اعلام is wrong; استخدام is right and إستخدام is wrong. If you remember one spelling fact from this lesson, make it this one.

7. A مَصْدَر behaves like any other noun. It takes the definite article where English uses a bare gerund - التَّدْخينُ مَمْنوعٌ “smoking is forbidden” - and Arabic uses that definite form far more readily than English uses “the”. It declines normally: مَرْفوع as a subject, مَنْصوب as an object, مَجْرور after a preposition or as the second term of an إِضافَة. A few مَصادِر have even drifted into concrete countable nouns and take plurals: اِجْتِماعٌ / اِجْتِماعاتٌ “meeting(s)”, مُقابَلَةٌ / مُقابَلاتٌ “interview(s)”.

8. المَصْدَر المُؤَوَّل: a clause doing a noun’s job. Arabic can also build the same meaning out of a small clause, and the grammarians call that clause an interpreted مَصْدَر - a مَصْدَر in disguise. Two constructions do it:

  • أَنْ + المُضارِع المَنْصوب, from lesson 34: أَنْ تَنْجَحَ = نَجاحُكَ. The verb after أَنْ is in the subjunctive, so it never carries a ḍamma: an ordinary verb takes a fatḥa, the forms that end in نُون drop it, and a verb ending in ى shows no change at all.
  • أَنَّ + اسْم مَنْصوب + خَبَر, from lesson 44: أَنَّ الطّالِبَ ناجِحٌ = نَجاحُ الطّالِبِ.

There is a third, less obvious member: أَنْ + الماضي, which is common after time words - خَرَجْنا بَعْدَ أَنِ انْتَهَى الدَّرْسُ. (Note the kasra on أَنِ there: it is a helping vowel before the silent وَصْل alif of اِنْتَهى, exactly as in هَلِ اسْتَخْدَمْتَ.)

Keep أَنْ and أَنَّ apart by what follows: أَنْ takes a verb, أَنَّ takes a noun. The two are not interchangeable, and mixing them is a very common error in this area.

9. Swapping the two, and the case that results. To convert a clause into a plain مَصْدَر: take the verb’s مَصْدَر, attach the subject as a pronoun suffix or as the second term of an إِضافَة, and give the noun the case of the slot the clause was filling. The clause itself shows no ending - that is precisely why the swap is worth practising, because it forces you to name the slot.

  • Subject slot → مَرْفوع: يَسُرُّني أَنْ تَنْجَحَ → يَسُرُّني نَجاحُكَ.
  • Object slot → مَنْصوب: أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ → أُريدُ الذَّهابَ.
  • After a preposition, or after ظَرْف like قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ → مَجْرور: دَرَسْتُ لِأَنْجَحَ → دَرَسْتُ لِلنَّجاحِ; وَصَلَ قَبْلَ أَنْ نَخْرُجَ → وَصَلَ قَبْلَ خُروجِنا.

10. Which one to use. Both are correct and both are current; the difference is texture. The أَنْ clause is the everyday spoken-formal choice and fits almost anywhere a plain مَصْدَر would, even when you cannot recall the مَصْدَر of the verb - the exception being verbs that report a fact (عَلِمَ، سَمِعَ), which want أَنَّ with a noun rather than أَنْ with a verb. The plain مَصْدَر is denser and more written: press headlines, official notices and academic prose prefer it because it packs a whole clause into a single noun, and because a notice or a headline often has no room for a verb at all - مَمْنوعٌ التَّدْخينُ، اِسْتِمْرارُ الحِوارِ. Read for the صَريح, speak with the مُؤَوَّل, and you will be idiomatic in both directions.

11. What this lesson leaves to others. A مَصْدَر can carry its own object, either in an إِضافَة or in the accusative, and it can be described by an adjective while it does so; that whole construction is lesson 67, and every example here is deliberately built without it. The مَصْدَر used to intensify its own verb - دَرَسَ دِراسَةً جادَّةً - is المَفْعول المُطْلَق, lesson 60. The مَصادِر of derived forms built on weak roots (تَمَنّى → تَمَنٍّ) and the rarer المَصْدَر الميمِيّ are beyond this step.

Forms & patterns

A note on the tables: the وَزْن column shows a bare template, and a bare template carries no case ending - فِعالَة، فُعول، تَفْعيل are pattern names, not words. Every real word is printed with its full ending, and takes whatever case its sentence gives it.

Form I - the frequent families, with the verb they belong to:

الوَزْنالفِعْلالمَصْدَرEnglish
فِعالَةكَتَبَكِتابَةٌwriting
فِعالَةدَرَسَدِراسَةٌstudying, study
فِعالَةقَرَأَقِراءَةٌreading
فُعولدَخَلَدُخولٌentering, entry
فُعولخَرَجَخُروجٌgoing out, exit
فُعولجَلَسَجُلوسٌsitting
فَعْلفَهِمَفَهْمٌunderstanding
فَعْلأَكَلَأَكْلٌeating
فَعَلعَمِلَعَمَلٌwork, doing
فَعالذَهَبَذَهابٌgoing
فَعالنَجَحَنَجاحٌsuccess
فُعالسَأَلَسُؤالٌasking, question

Those six shapes are not the whole list - Form I has dozens - but they cover the great majority of the verbs you have met so far.

The derived forms, one shape each:

الوَزْنالرَّقْممَصْدَرُهُمِثالEnglish
فَعَّلَIIتَفْعيلدَرَّسَ → تَدْريسٌteaching
فَعَّلَIIتَفْعيلعَلَّمَ → تَعْليمٌinstruction, education
فَعَّلَ (ناقِص)IIتَفْعِلَةرَبّى → تَرْبِيَةٌupbringing, education
فَعَّلَ (ناقِص)IIتَفْعِلَةسَمّى → تَسْمِيَةٌnaming
فاعَلَIIIمُفاعَلَةشاهَدَ → مُشاهَدَةٌwatching, viewing
فاعَلَIIIفِعالدافَعَ → دِفاعٌdefence
أَفْعَلَIVإِفْعالأَرْسَلَ → إِرْسالٌsending
أَفْعَلَIVإِفْعالأَعْلَمَ → إِعْلامٌinforming, media
تَفَعَّلَVتَفَعُّلتَعَلَّمَ → تَعَلُّمٌlearning
تَفاعَلَVIتَفاعُلتَعاوَنَ → تَعاوُنٌcooperation
اِنْفَعَلَVIIاِنْفِعالاِنْكَسَرَ → اِنْكِسارٌbreaking, fracture
اِفْتَعَلَVIIIاِفْتِعالاِجْتَمَعَ → اِجْتِماعٌmeeting
اِسْتَفْعَلَXاِسْتِفْعالاِسْتَخْدَمَ → اِسْتِخْدامٌuse
فَعْلَلَرُباعِيّفَعْلَلَةتَرْجَمَ → تَرْجَمَةٌtranslation

Form IX, the colour verbs, follows اِفْعِلال: اِحْمَرَّ → اِحْمِرارٌ. It is rare enough to leave at that.

Watch the vowel that sits before the last radical: تَفَعُّل has a ḍamma (تَعَلُّمٌ) and so does تَفاعُل (تَعاوُنٌ), while the past-tense verbs they come from have a fatḥa (تَعَلَّمَ، تَعاوَنَ).

The two clausal types, and their plain equivalents:

النَّوْعالتَّرْكيبمِثالالمَصْدَر الصَّريح
أَنْ + مُضارِع مَنْصوبأَنْ + فِعْلأُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَالذَّهابَ
أَنْ + ماضٍأَنْ + فِعْلبَعْدَ أَنْ وَصَلَبَعْدَ وُصولِهِ
أَنَّ + اسْم مَنْصوبأَنَّ + اسْمعَلِمْتُ أَنَّ الطّالِبَ ناجِحٌنَجاحَ الطّالِبِ

And the case the plain noun then carries, which is decided by the slot, not by the noun:

مَوْقِعُ الجُمْلَةالمَصْدَر المُؤَوَّلالمَصْدَر الصَّريحالحالَة
فاعِليَسُرُّني أَنْ تَنْجَحَيَسُرُّني نَجاحُكَمَرْفوع
مُبْتَدَأ مُؤَخَّرمِنَ المُمْكِنِ أَنْ نَبْدَأَمِنَ المُمْكِنِ البَدْءُمَرْفوع
مَفْعول بِهأُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَأُريدُ الذَّهابَمَنْصوب
بَعْدَ حَرْفِ جَرّدَرَسْتُ لِأَنْجَحَدَرَسْتُ لِلنَّجاحِمَجْرور
مُضاف إِلَيْهِقَبْلَ أَنْ نَخْرُجَقَبْلَ خُروجِنامَجْرور

Examples

العربيةEnglish
الكِتابَةُ بِخَطٍّ واضِحٍ مُهِمَّةٌ في الامْتِحانِ.Writing in a clear hand is important in the exam.
الدُّخولُ مَمْنوعٌ بَعْدَ السّاعَةِ التّاسِعَةِ.Entry is forbidden after nine o’clock.
يَعْمَلُ صَديقي في التَّدْريسِ مُنْذُ عَشْرِ سَنَواتٍ.My friend has worked in teaching for ten years.
طَلَبْتُ مُقابَلَةً قَصيرَةً مَعَ المُديرِ.I asked for a short interview with the manager.
تَأَخَّرَ الإِرْسالُ بِسَبَبِ عُطْلَةِ البَريدِ.The dispatch was late because of the postal holiday.
التَّعَلُّمُ بَعْدَ الأَرْبَعينَ مُمْكِنٌ ولٰكِنَّهُ بَطيءٌ.Learning after forty is possible, but it is slow.
بَدَأَ الاجْتِماعُ في التّاسِعَةِ صَباحاً.The meeting began at nine in the morning.
زادَ الاسْتِخْدامُ اليَوْمِيُّ لِلْهاتِفِ بَيْنَ الطُّلّابِ.Daily phone use among students has increased.
التَّعاوُنُ بَيْنَ الوِزارَتَيْنِ ضَرورِيٌّ.Cooperation between the two ministries is necessary.
التَّرْجَمَةُ الفَوْرِيَّةُ مِهْنَةٌ مُتْعِبَةٌ.Simultaneous interpreting is a tiring profession.
أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ إِلَى السّوقِ.I want to go to the market.
أُريدُ الذَّهابَ إِلَى السّوقِ.I want to go to the market.
يَسُرُّني أَنْ تَنْجَحَ في الامْتِحانِ.I am glad that you are passing the exam.
يَسُرُّني نَجاحُكَ في الامْتِحانِ.I am glad about your passing the exam.

Common mistakes

  • الكُتوبُ صَعْبٌ -> الكِتابَةُ صَعْبَةٌ - Form I’s مَصْدَر cannot be built from a template. Reaching for the فُعول of دُخول and خُروج gives كُتوبٌ, which is not a word. كَتَبَ happens to take كِتابَةٌ, and the only way to know that is to have learned the verb with its مَصْدَر.
  • إِسْتِخْدامُ الحاسوبِ -> اِسْتِخْدامُ الحاسوبِ - the alif of اِسْتِفْعال is هَمْزَة وَصْل and is written bare, never with a seat. The same for اِجْتِماع، اِنْكِسار، اِسْتِقْبال.
  • ارْسالٌ سَريعٌ -> إِرْسالٌ سَريعٌ - Form IV goes the other way: its مَصْدَر starts with a real هَمْزَة قَطْع on a seat. Pair the two in memory - إِعْلام with a seat, اِسْتِعْلام without.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبُ -> أُريدُ أَنْ أَذْهَبَ - أَنْ puts the following مُضارِع in the مَنْصوب (lessons 33 and 39). A ḍamma there is not a small slip; it means the clause is no longer a مَصْدَر مُؤَوَّل at all.
  • أُريدُ الذَّهابُ -> أُريدُ الذَّهابَ - when you swap the clause for a plain noun, the noun must take the case of the slot. Here it is the object of أُريدُ, so مَنْصوب.
  • يَسُرُّني نَجاحَكَ -> يَسُرُّني نَجاحُكَ - same rule, opposite outcome: this مَصْدَر is the فاعِل of يَسُرُّ, so مَرْفوع. Always ask what job the clause was doing before you choose an ending.
  • أَنَّ تَنْجَحَ -> أَنْ تَنْجَحَ - أَنْ is followed by a verb, أَنَّ by a noun in the accusative. Use أَنَّكَ ناجِحٌ if you want the shadda.
  • أُحِبُّ التَّعْليمَ (meaning “I like learning”) -> أُحِبُّ التَّعَلُّمَ - تَعْليم is Form II, what the teacher does; تَعَلُّم is Form V, what the student does. The مَصْدَر inherits the meaning of its form, so picking the wrong form picks the wrong meaning.
  • تَرْبيٌ -> تَرْبِيَةٌ - a Form II verb with a weak final radical takes تَفْعِلَة, not تَفْعيل. Same for تَسْمِيَة، تَصْفِيَة.
  • اِجْتَماعٌ طَويلٌ -> اِجْتِماعٌ طَويلٌ - the مَصْدَر of Form VIII is اِفْتِعال with a kasra on the ت, even though the verb اِجْتَمَعَ has a fatḥa there. That kasra before the long ا is the signature of VII, VIII and X alike.

Tips

  • Store every new Form I verb as a triple in your notes: كَتَبَ / يَكْتُبُ / كِتابَةٌ. Adding the مَصْدَر later, from memory, almost never works.
  • For the derived forms, memorize one hook word per row of the table rather than the abstract pattern. تَدْريس، مُشاهَدَة، إِرْسال، تَعَلُّم، تَعاوُن، اِنْكِسار، اِجْتِماع، اِسْتِخْدام is eight words and it is the whole system.
  • A quick self-test on the derived side: cover the مَصْدَر column and rebuild it from the verb. If you can do that for eight verbs, you can do it for eight hundred.
  • Turn the swap into a daily drill. Take any أَنْ sentence you wrote and rewrite it with a plain مَصْدَر, saying out loud which slot it fills and therefore which ending it takes.
  • If the مَصْدَر escapes you mid-sentence, use the أَنْ clause. Almost anywhere a plain مَصْدَر fits, the clause fits too - a working escape hatch, not a second-best.
  • Read headlines. Arabic press headlines are chains of مَصادِر, so ten minutes of front pages will give you more of these nouns in context than any list.
  • Leave for later: مَصادِر that carry their own objects (lesson 67), the intensifying مَفْعول مُطْلَق (lesson 60), and the مَصادِر of derived forms on weak roots. Sound roots first.

B1 55 / 70

The circumstantial accusative (hal)

الحال

In short

English has a quiet little slot at the end of a sentence for the state someone was in while something happened: “he arrived exhausted”, “she left smiling”, “I drank the tea hot”. The word in that slot is not saying what the person or the thing is - it is saying how they were at that moment. Arabic has one dedicated grammatical form for exactly this job, and it is an ending, not a word: put the description in the accusative and leave it indefinite. جاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا “the student came in a hurry”. That مُسْرِعًا is الحال.

It is worth a whole lesson for two reasons. First, الحال is a slot, not a single word class: you can fill it with one participle, with a whole clause introduced by وَ, with a bare present-tense verb, or with a prepositional phrase - four shapes, one meaning. Second, one tiny rule keeps it apart from an ordinary adjective: the word whose state is being described (صاحِبُ الحالِ) is definite, and the حال itself is indefinite. Flip that and the sentence quietly turns into something else.

The rule

1. The definition, and the question it answers. الحال is an indefinite accusative that describes the state of someone or something at the moment of the action. It answers كَيْفَ جاءَ؟ “how / in what state did he come?”. The noun it belongs to is called صاحِبُ الحالِ, “the owner of the state”, and it is normally definite - a proper name, a noun with الـ, a pronoun, or the first term of a definite إِضافَة. So a full حال sentence has three parts: a verb, a definite صاحِب, and an indefinite accusative hanging off the end:

  • عادَ الوَلَدُ باكِيًا. - The boy came back in tears.
  • خَرَجَ الرَّجُلُ غاضِبًا. - The man went out angry.

صاحِبُ الحالِ is usually the subject, but it can just as well be the object: in شَرِبْتُ الشّايَ ساخِنًا it is the tea that was hot, not I. Sense and agreement decide between them, and when both are possible the reader takes the nearer, more plausible one: قَرَأْتُ الرِّسالَةَ واقِفًا can only describe me, because a letter does not stand.

2. Shape one: a single word (حالٌ مُفْرَدٌ). This is the everyday shape and the one to master first. The filler is almost always a participle from lesson 53 - اسْمُ الفاعِلِ for a state the person is in of their own doing (مُسْرِعًا، ضاحِكًا، واقِفًا، جالِسًا), or اسْمُ المَفْعولِ for a state something has been put in (مَفْتوحَةً، مَكْسورًا، مَشْوِيًّا). Adjectives of temporary condition work too: ساخِنًا، بارِدًا، مُتْعَبَةً، سَعيدًا.

Two properties never vary: it is مَنْصوب and it is نَكِرَة. No الـ and no preposition in front of it - just the accusative ending.

3. Agreement: gender and number, never definiteness. Unlike the adverbs of lesson 31, which are frozen, a حالٌ مُفْرَدٌ agrees with صاحِبِ الحالِ in gender and number exactly as an adjective does: عادَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مُتْعَبَةً، خَرَجوا ضاحِكينَ، وَصَلَ الطّالِبانِ مُتَأَخِّرَيْنِ. It simply refuses to copy the definiteness. And the non-human plural rule of lesson 11 still holds: وَصَلَتِ الرَّسائِلُ مَفْتوحَةً, feminine singular for a plural of things.

That agreement is also your practical test against a manner adverb: سارَ سَريعًا “he walked quickly” describes the walking and never changes shape, while جاءَ مُسْرِعًا describes him and becomes مُسْرِعَةً، مُسْرِعينَ as the subject changes.

4. Shape two: a nominal clause with واو الحال. A whole sentence can occupy the slot. If it is a جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّة (subject + predicate), it is introduced by واو الحال - a واو that means “while, with”, not “and”:

  • خَرَجَ وَهُوَ يَبْتَسِمُ. - He went out smiling.
  • دَخَلْتُ البَيْتَ وَالمَطَرُ يَنْزِلُ. - I came into the house with the rain pouring down.

The clause must be tied back to صاحِبِ الحالِ by a رابِط, a link. There are two: the واو itself, and a pronoun referring back. When the clause is about the same person, you need the pronoun: وَهُوَ، وَهِيَ، وَأَنا، وَهُمْ. When it is about something else, as with وَالمَطَرُ يَنْزِلُ, the واو alone does the linking. Note that nothing here carries an accusative ending you can see; the whole clause is in the position of an accusative (في مَحَلِّ نَصْبٍ), which is all the grammar needs.

5. Shape three: a verbal clause with a bare مُضارِع - and no واو. When the state is an ongoing action by the same person, Arabic drops the pronoun and the واو and simply lets a present-tense verb follow:

  • ذَهَبَ يَجْري. - He went off at a run.
  • وَقَفَ يَنْتَظِرُ الحافِلَةَ. - He stood waiting for the bus.
  • جَلَسَتْ تَقْرَأُ في الحَديقَةِ. - She sat reading in the garden.

The link is the pronoun already inside the verb, so a واو would be wrong: not *ذَهَبَ وَيَجْري. This is one of the most natural-sounding structures in Arabic narration, and it translates the English “-ing” almost word for word. A negated مُضارِع behaves the same way and stays واو-less: جَلَسَ لا يَتَكَلَّمُ “he sat there saying nothing”.

6. A past-tense clause needs قَدْ. A ماضٍ verb cannot describe a present state on its own, so the حال clause built on one takes قَدْ (lesson 45), normally with the واو:

  • جاءَ وَقَدْ تَعِبَ. - He arrived worn out.
  • وَصَلْنا وَقَدْ غابَتِ الشَّمْسُ. - We arrived after the sun had set.

Leave قَدْ out and the reader will normally take the واو as plain coordination instead: جاءَ وَتَعِبَ reads as two events in a row, “he came and got tired”. The negative counterpart uses لَمْ + jussive, again with the واو: خَرَجَ مِنَ القاعَةِ وَلَمْ يَقُلْ شَيْئًا “he left the hall without saying a word” - a very common way of rendering English “without …ing”.

7. Shape four: a prepositional or adverbial phrase (شِبْهُ جُمْلَةٍ). A حَرْفُ جَرٍّ + noun, or a ظَرْف, can fill the slot too:

  • رَأَيْتُهُ عَلى الشّاطِئِ. - I saw him on the beach.
  • وَجَدْتُ القِطَّةَ تَحْتَ الطّاوِلَةِ. - I found the cat under the table.

Nothing is marked accusative here either - عَلى still takes the genitive inside its own phrase, تَحْتَ is still first term of an إِضافَة. The phrase as a whole simply sits in the حال slot.

8. The definiteness contrast with النَّعْت. This is the single decision that makes or breaks the construction. Compare:

  • عادَ الوَلَدُ باكِيًا. - The boy came back in tears. (حال - a state, indefinite)
  • عادَ الوَلَدُ الباكي. - The crying boy came back. (نَعْت - a description, definite)

The second sentence is perfectly grammatical, but it has no حال in it: الباكي has become an adjective glued to الوَلَدُ, and the sentence only tells you which boy. So the rule is a mirror image of lesson 8: an adjective copies the definiteness of its noun, a حال never does.

The other half of the same rule: صاحِبُ الحالِ should be definite. Write جاءَ رَجُلٌ مُسْرِعًا and the reader will simply take مُسْرِعٌ as an adjective on رَجُلٌ, because an indefinite noun invites an adjective. Make the noun definite - جاءَ الرَّجُلُ مُسْرِعًا - or rephrase. Fronted حال with an indefinite صاحِب does exist in careful writing, but you do not need to produce it.

9. Writing and hearing the ending. The accusative on a حالٌ مُفْرَدٌ is written with a prop alif - مُسْرِعًا، ساخِنًا، واقِفًا - with two exceptions you already met in lesson 31: a word ending in ة carries the tanwīn on the ة (مُسْرِعَةً، مُتْعَبَةً, never *مُتْعَبَةاً), and a word ending in a hamza after a long alif carries it on the hamza (مَساءً, never *مَساءاً). A diptote (lesson 41) takes a bare fatḥa with no tanwīn at all: رَجَعَ الطِّفْلُ جَوْعانَ.

One reward for the effort: the pausal form drops ـٌ and ـٍ, but the ـً does not - it is still heard as a long ā. So مُسْرِعًا، ضاحِكًا، واقِفًا keep an audible ending even from speakers who pronounce no other case. The ة type is the one exception the pronunciation guide flagged: it has no prop alif to fall back on, so مُتْعَبَةً stops as مُتْعَبَهْ. If you learn to say this ending out loud, you sound right.

10. The frozen ones. A small set of accusatives - some حال in origin, some an old مَفْعول مُطْلَق - now work simply as adverbs. Do not parse them - memorise them: مَعًا “together”, جَميعًا “all together”, أَيْضًا “also”, مَثَلًا “for example”, طَبْعًا “of course”, أَوَّلًا “first”, ثانِيًا “second”, عادَةً “usually”, خُصوصًا “especially”. They never agree with anything and they are among the most frequent words in written Arabic.

11. Two neighbours it is not. خَبَرُ كانَ is also accusative (كانَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا), but it is the whole point of the sentence: delete it and nothing is left. A حال is an extra - delete مُسْرِعًا from جاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا and you still have a complete sentence. And an adverb of manner (lesson 31) never agrees, while a حالٌ مُفْرَدٌ does.

Two further accusatives are left to their own lessons: the accusative that specifies what a quantity or a comparison is measured in (التَّمْييز, lesson 61), and the one that repeats the verb’s own مَصْدَر for emphasis (المَفْعولُ المُطْلَقُ, lesson 60). Both look like a حال on the page; neither describes a state.

Forms & patterns

The four shapes of الحال:

الشَّكْلWhat fills the slotمِثالEnglish
مُفْرَدone word, مَنْصوب + نَكِرَةجاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًاThe student came in a hurry
جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّةواو الحال + مُبْتَدَأ + خَبَرخَرَجَ وَهُوَ يَبْتَسِمُHe went out smiling
جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة (مُضارِع)the bare verb, no واوذَهَبَ يَجْريHe went off at a run
جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّة (ماضٍ)وَقَدْ + الماضيجاءَ وَقَدْ تَعِبَHe arrived worn out
شِبْه جُمْلَةجارّ ومَجْرور or ظَرْفرَأَيْتُهُ عَلى الشّاطِئِI saw him on the beach

Agreement of the single-word حال (stem مُسْرِع “hurrying”):

صاحِبُ الحالِالحالالجُمْلَة
مُذَكَّر مُفْرَدمُسْرِعًاجاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا
مُؤَنَّث مُفْرَدمُسْرِعَةًجاءَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مُسْرِعَةً
مُثَنّى مُذَكَّرمُسْرِعَيْنِجاءَ الطّالِبانِ مُسْرِعَيْنِ
مُثَنّى مُؤَنَّثمُسْرِعَتَيْنِجاءَتِ الطّالِبَتانِ مُسْرِعَتَيْنِ
جَمْع مُذَكَّرمُسْرِعينَجاءَ الطُّلّابُ مُسْرِعينَ
جَمْع مُؤَنَّثمُسْرِعاتٍجاءَتِ الطّالِباتُ مُسْرِعاتٍ
جَمْع غَيْرِ العاقِلِمُسْرِعَةًوَصَلَتِ القِطاراتُ مُسْرِعَةً

How the clause is linked back (الرّابِط):

The حال clauseLinked byمِثال
مُضارِع, same subjectthe pronoun inside the verb, no واووَقَفَ يَنْتَظِرُ
جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّة, same subjectواو + ضَميروَقَفَ وَهُوَ يَنْتَظِرُ
clause about someone elseواو aloneوَقَفْتُ وَالحافِلَةُ تَقْتَرِبُ
ماضٍواو + قَدْوَقَفَ وَقَدْ تَأَخَّرَتِ الحافِلَةُ
negated pastواو + لَمْ + مَجْزومخَرَجَ وَلَمْ يَقُلْ شَيْئًا
negated مُضارِعلا, no واوجَلَسَ لا يَتَكَلَّمُ

Writing the accusative ending:

الحالThe word ends inThe ending
مُسْرِعًاa plain consonantـًا with a prop alif
مُتْعَبَةًةtanwīn on the ة, no alif
مَساءًء after a long aliftanwīn on the hamza, no alif
باكِيًاـٍ (اسْم مَنْقوص)the ي comes back, then ـًا
جَوْعانَمَمْنوع مِنَ الصَّرْفِa bare fatḥa, no tanwīn
ضاحِكَيْنِdualـَيْنِ
ضاحِكينَsound masculine pluralـينَ
ضاحِكاتٍsound feminine pluralـاتٍ - kasratān, not fatḥatān

Frozen accusatives to learn as vocabulary:

الكَلِمَةEnglish
مَعًاtogether
جَميعًاall of them, all together
أَيْضًاalso, too
مَثَلًاfor example
طَبْعًاof course
أَوَّلًا / ثانِيًاfirst / second (listing)
عادَةًusually
خُصوصًاespecially

Examples

العربيةEnglish
جاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا لِأَنَّ الدَّرْسَ بَدَأَ.The student came in a hurry because the lesson had started.
عادَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مِنَ المَكْتَبَةِ مُتْعَبَةً.The student came back from the library tired.
خَرَجوا مِنَ القاعَةِ ضاحِكينَ.They left the hall laughing.
شَرِبْتُ الشّايَ ساخِنًا وَأَكَلْتُ اللَّحْمَ مَشْوِيًّا.I drank the tea hot and ate the meat grilled.
قَرَأْتُ الرِّسالَةَ واقِفًا أَمامَ البابِ.I read the letter standing in front of the door.
خَرَجَ مِنَ المَكْتَبِ وَهُوَ يَبْتَسِمُ.He left the office smiling.
دَخَلْتُ البَيْتَ وَالمَطَرُ يَنْزِلُ بِغَزارَةٍ.I came into the house with the rain pouring down.
دَخَلَ المُعَلِّمُ وَالطُّلّابُ يَكْتُبونَ.The teacher came in while the students were writing.
ذَهَبَ إِلى المَحَطَّةِ يَجْري.He went off to the station at a run.
وَقَفَتْ تَنْتَظِرُ الحافِلَةَ نِصْفَ ساعَةٍ.She stood waiting for the bus for half an hour.
وَصَلَ صَديقي وَقَدْ تَعِبَ مِنَ السَّفَرِ.My friend arrived, worn out from the journey.
خَرَجَ مِنَ الاِجْتِماعِ وَلَمْ يَقُلْ شَيْئًا.He left the meeting without saying a word.
رَأَيْتُهُ عَلى الشّاطِئِ مَساءَ الجُمُعَةِ.I saw him on the beach on Friday evening.
سافَرْنا مَعًا وَعُدْنا جَميعًا في اليَوْمِ نَفْسِهِ.We travelled together and all came back the same day.

Common mistakes

  • جاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعٌ -> جاءَ الطّالِبُ مُسْرِعًا - a حال is مَنْصوب, always. The ḍamma would make it a second subject, which the sentence has no room for.
  • عادَ الوَلَدُ الباكِيَ -> عادَ الوَلَدُ باكِيًا - a حال is indefinite. Adding الـ turns the word into a نَعْت (lesson 8), so الوَلَدُ الباكي only says which boy came back.
  • جاءَ رَجُلٌ مُسْرِعًا -> جاءَ الرَّجُلُ مُسْرِعًا - صاحِبُ الحالِ needs to be definite; after an indefinite noun the reader takes the word as its adjective (جاءَ رَجُلٌ مُسْرِعٌ).
  • عادَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مُتْعَبًا -> عادَتِ الطّالِبَةُ مُتْعَبَةً - the حال agrees in gender with its owner, even though it never agrees in definiteness.
  • خَرَجوا ضاحِكًا -> خَرَجوا ضاحِكينَ - and in number: the sound masculine plural is ـينَ in the accusative, not ـونَ and not the singular.
  • خَرَجْنَ ضاحِكاتً -> خَرَجْنَ ضاحِكاتٍ - the sound feminine plural takes kasratān in the accusative (lessons 9 and 45). Writing a fatḥatān on ـات is always wrong.
  • ذَهَبَ وَيَجْري -> ذَهَبَ يَجْري - a bare مُضارِع joins with no واو at all; the link is the pronoun already inside the verb. With the واو it reads as a second, separate action.
  • خَرَجَ وَيَبْتَسِمُ -> خَرَجَ وَهُوَ يَبْتَسِمُ - واو الحال introduces a nominal clause, so it needs a subject pronoun. Dropping the واو (خَرَجَ يَبْتَسِمُ) is the other fix.
  • جاءَ وَتَعِبَ -> جاءَ وَقَدْ تَعِبَ - a past-tense حال clause needs قَدْ; without it the واو is plain coordination, “he came and got tired”.
  • رَأَيْتُهُ عَلى الشّاطِئَ -> رَأَيْتُهُ عَلى الشّاطِئِ - the phrase as a whole occupies the accusative slot, but inside it عَلى still governs the genitive. Never mark شِبْهَ الجُمْلَةِ with a fatḥa.

Tips

  • Test any candidate with كَيْفَ؟ - if the answer describes the doer’s state it is a حال; if it describes the action it is a manner adverb (lesson 31), and it will not agree.
  • Second test, for telling حال from خَبَرِ كانَ: delete the accusative. If the sentence still stands, it was a حال; if it collapses, it was the predicate.
  • When you are unsure which shape to use, fall back on وَ + pronoun + verb (خَرَجَ وَهُوَ يَجْري). It is always grammatical, while the bare-verb shape only works with a مُضارِع and the قَدْ shape only with a ماضٍ.
  • Learn the frozen set (مَعًا، أَيْضًا، مَثَلًا، طَبْعًا، أَوَّلًا) as plain vocabulary. Their fatḥatān is not something you compute each time.
  • Pick your participle by voice: اسْمُ الفاعِلِ for what the owner is doing (ضاحِكًا، واقِفًا), اسْمُ المَفْعولِ for what has been done to it (مَفْتوحَةً، مَشْوِيًّا). Lesson 53 has the patterns.
  • Say the ـً out loud in every حال written with the prop alif. It is the one case ending that survives the pausal form, so it is the ending you will actually hear in a news broadcast.
  • Reading unvocalized text, this is the signature: a complete sentence, then a bare noun with no الـ and no preposition in front of it. Read it as a حال and supply the fatḥatān yourself.
  • “Without …ing” almost always comes out as وَلَمْ + jussive (خَرَجَ وَلَمْ يَنْظُرْ إِلَيَّ) or as دونَ أَنْ + subjunctive from lesson 34. Do not look for a single Arabic word for it.

B1 56 / 70

Conditional sentences

أُسْلوبُ الشَّرْط

In short

Arabic builds a condition out of three parts and no more: a word that opens it, the verb of the condition, and the answer. إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ - “if you study, you will pass”. English marks the two halves with if and a future tense; Arabic marks them by reshaping the two verbs, and the reshaping is the مَجْزوم you already own from lesson 35, now working twice in one sentence and with no negation anywhere in sight.

The lesson turns on a single split. Most conditional words - إِنْ and the “who/what/when/where” family - put both verbs into the jussive. Two of the commonest, إِذا and كُلَّما, govern nothing at all and take a past-tense form even when the meaning is the future. Add the فَ that certain answers demand and real conditions are finished. Unreal ones - “if I had known”, “were it not for” - run on لَوْ and لَوْلا and are lesson 65; do not borrow them here.

The rule

1. The three parts. Every conditional sentence is أَداةُ الشَّرْطِ (the conditional word) + فِعْلُ الشَّرْطِ (the verb of the condition) + جَوابُ الشَّرْطِ (the answer, also called جَزاءُ الشَّرْطِ). The whole thing is one sentence and the أَداة stands at its head; nothing goes in front of it except a connector such as وَ or a topic phrase. No comma is required between the two halves - modern editing often puts a ، there, but nothing grammatical hangs on it; the boundary is the end of the first verb’s clause.

2. Two families, and this is the whole lesson. أَدَواتُ الشَّرْطِ split into those that cause جَزْم and those that do not.

  • الجازِمَة - إِنْ، مَنْ، ما، مَهْما، مَتى، أَيْنَما، كَيْفَما، أَيّ. Both verbs go into the مَجْزوم: إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ.
  • غَيْرُ الجازِمَة - إِذا and كُلَّما. Nothing is put into any mood; the verb after them is normally a past-tense form: إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ.

Those two example sentences translate identically into English (“if/when you study, you will pass”) and share not one grammatical feature. Learn them as a matched pair and half the errors in this area never happen.

3. إِنْ: two jussives, and the second one is the surprise. After إِنْ the verb of the condition takes the جَزْم exactly as it does after لَمْ. What is new is that the answer takes it too, although no particle stands in front of the answer at all:

إِنْ تَجْتَهِدْ (شَرْط، مَجْزوم) تَنْجَحْ (جَواب، مَجْزوم).

Nothing negates, nothing prohibits, nothing orders; the sukūn on تَنْجَحْ is caused by the conditional structure alone. Two verbs, two sukūns, one إِنْ.

4. Where the جَزْم is actually visible. On a sound verb the mark is a bare sukūn and unvocalized text hides it completely. On the other classes the word visibly shrinks, and those are the forms to drill - a reader hears your mistake there:

  • الصَّحيحُ السّالِمُ: تَدْرُسُ → تَدْرُسْ. A sukūn replaces the ḍamma.
  • النّاقِص (weak final letter): تَمْشي → تَمْشِ. The ي is deleted and its kasra stays.
  • الأَجْوَف (weak middle letter): تَزورُ → تَزُرْ. The long و shortens to a ḍamma.
  • الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ: تَدْرُسونَ → تَدْرُسوا. The نون drops, the silent alif is written.

5. Past-tense forms inside a jussive frame. After إِنْ you may equally use a past-tense verb, and this is very common in writing: إِنْ دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ. The past form is مَبْنِيّ - built, unchangeable - so nothing visible happens to it; the grammarians say it is فِي مَحَلِّ جَزْمٍ, in the position of a jussive. Mixing is allowed in one direction: a past شَرْط with a jussive جَواب is good Arabic (إِنْ دَرَسْتَ تَنْجَحْ). The reverse - a jussive شَرْط with a past جَواب - is not something to produce; keep to the three frames in the table below.

6. إِذا: the past form that means the future. إِذا is not a governing particle at all. Arabic grammar classes it as a time word (ظَرْف) carrying conditional force, and a time word puts nothing into a mood. Its verb is a past-tense form and its time reference is the future:

إِذا وَصَلَ القِطارُ رَكِبْنا مَعًا. - “When the train arrives we will get on together.”

Two proofs that إِذا governs nothing. First, a present-tense verb in the answer keeps its ḍamma untouched: إِذا زارَني صَديقي أُقَدِّمُ لَهُ القَهْوَةَ. Second, when you do see a sukūn after إِذا it always has another cause - إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمْ فَاسْأَلْ: that sukūn belongs to لَمْ, which is a jussive particle in its own right. In modern prose إِذا is followed directly by its verb; you will also meet إِذا ما, where the ما adds nothing to the meaning.

7. إِنْ or إِذا - a real difference in meaning. They are not stylistic variants.

  • إِذا = the speaker expects it to happen, or knows it will: إِذا جاءَ الصَّيْفُ سافَرْنا. It is “when” as much as “if”, and it is by far the commoner of the two in modern prose.
  • إِنْ = the speaker is genuinely unsure, or thinks it unlikely: إِنْ تَتَغَيَّرْ خُطَّتُهُمْ نُخْبِرْكَ. It is the hypothetical “if”, and it dominates conditions with لَمْ, formal writing and set phrases such as إِنْ شاءَ اللهُ.

8. The rest of the جازِمَة family: they hold a job inside the clause. إِنْ is a particle and does nothing else. The others are nouns or adverbs, so besides opening the condition they fill a slot in it - subject, object, place, manner:

  • مَنْ “whoever”, for people: مَنْ يَعْمَلْ بِجِدٍّ يَنَلْ ما يُريدُ.
  • ما and مَهْما “whatever”, for things; مَهْما is the emphatic one and cannot refer to a person: مَهْما تَقُلْ فَلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي.
  • مَتى “whenever”: مَتى تَصِلْ إِلى المَطارِ أَسْتَقْبِلْكَ. Same word as the question مَتى؟ “when?”, different job - here it is not a question and takes no question mark.
  • أَيْنَما “wherever” and كَيْفَما “however, in whatever way”: أَيْنَما تَذْهَبْ تَجِدْ أَصْدِقاءَ.
  • أَيّ “whichever”, which is unique in taking a following noun in إِضافَة and in changing its own ending according to its role: أَيُّ طالِبٍ يَجْتَهِدْ يَنْجَحْ (مُبْتَدَأ، مَرْفوع) beside أَيَّ كِتابٍ تَقْرَأْ تَسْتَفِدْ مِنْهُ (مَفْعول بِهِ، مَنْصوب).

9. فاءُ الجَوابِ - the فَ that is not optional. A jussive or a past-tense answer attaches directly with nothing between: إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ، إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ. But some answers cannot be a jussive at all, and Arabic then requires فَـ glued to the front of the answer. The list is short and worth memorizing as a list:

  1. the answer is a nominal sentence: إِذا نَجَحْتَ فَلَكَ جائِزَةٌ.
  2. the answer is an imperative (or a prohibition with لا): إِذا وَصَلْتَ فَاتَّصِلْ بي.
  3. the answer opens with سَـ / سَوْفَ: إِنْ تَحْضُرْ فَسَنَبْدَأُ فَوْرًا.
  4. the answer opens with قَدْ: إِنْ تَسْأَلْهُ فَقَدْ يُساعِدُكَ.
  5. the answer opens with ما: إِنْ تَبْحَثْ عَنْهُ فَما هُوَ هُنا.
  6. the answer opens with لَنْ: مَهْما تَقُلْ فَلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي.

One test covers all six: if the answer cannot itself be put into the jussive, it needs the فَ. A noun has no mood; an imperative is already fixed; سَـ، سَوْفَ، قَدْ، ما، لَنْ each block the jussive by occupying the slot in front of the verb. The same applies to the frozen verbs لَيْسَ and عَسى: إِذا تَأَخَّرَ فَلَيْسَ ذٰلِكَ خَطَأَهُ. Because إِذا so often introduces a nominal or a future answer, you will see فَ with إِذا constantly - but the فَ belongs to the answer’s shape, not to إِذا.

10. Negating inside a condition. “If … not” is إِنْ لَمْ or إِذا لَمْ plus a jussive; لَمْ does the work, so the pattern is identical either way: إِنْ لَمْ تُسافِرْ غَدًا فَاتَّصِلْ بي، إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمِ الدَّرْسَ فَاسْأَلِ المُعَلِّمَ. The compact alternative is وَإِلّا “otherwise”, which packs وَ + إِنْ + لا into one word and drops the verb of the condition - so its own verb still comes out مَجْزوم: اُدْرُسْ وَإِلّا تَرْسُبْ.

11. Two sukūns cannot meet - the same repair as in lesson 35. A jussive ending in a sukūn followed by the article takes a kasra: كَيْفَما تُعامِلِ النّاسَ يُعامِلوكَ، إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمِ الدَّرْسَ. This is pronunciation repair only; the verb is still مَجْزوم.

12. What is deliberately left out. لَوْ and لَوْلا - the unreal conditions, “if you had studied you would have passed” - are lesson 65 in full, and using لَوْ for a real, open condition is the single commonest mistake in this area. كُلَّما as a time expression was lesson 38 and appears here only to sit in the جازِمة / غَيْر جازِمة column. Linking whole paragraphs with فِي حالِ، شَريطَةَ أَنْ، بِشَرْطِ أَنْ belongs to lesson 66. And the older أَدَوات إِذْما، أَنّى، حَيْثُما، أَيّانَ are jussive-causing too but uncommon in modern prose - recognise them, do not produce them. Of the four only حَيْثُما “wherever” is still met with any regularity.

Forms & patterns

The particles, sorted by the only thing that matters. The last two rows are the ones that govern nothing:

الأَداةالمَعْنىجازِمَة؟مِثال
إِنْifنَعَمْإِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ
مَنْwhoeverنَعَمْمَنْ يُساعِدْني أَشْكُرْهُ
ماwhateverنَعَمْما تَكْتُبْ فِي دَفْتَرِكَ تَقْرَأْهُ غَدًا
مَهْماwhatever, no matter whatنَعَمْمَهْما تَقُلْ فَلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي
مَتىwheneverنَعَمْمَتى تَصِلْ أَسْتَقْبِلْكَ
أَيْنَماwhereverنَعَمْأَيْنَما تَذْهَبْ تَجِدْ أَصْدِقاءَ
كَيْفَماhowever, in whatever wayنَعَمْكَيْفَما تُعامِلِ النّاسَ يُعامِلوكَ
أَيّwhicheverنَعَمْأَيَّ كِتابٍ تَقْرَأْ تَسْتَفِدْ مِنْهُ
إِذاif, when (expected)لاإِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ
كُلَّماwhenever, the moreلاكُلَّما قَرَأْتُ فَهِمْتُ أَكْثَرَ

The jussive across the verb classes, so that the mark is visible somewhere. Second person masculine singular, since that is the form a condition usually lands on:

الصِّنْفالفِعْلالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوعمَعَ إِنْ (مَجْزوم)عَلامَةُ الجَزْم
صَحيحٌ سالِمٌدَرَسَتَدْرُسُإِنْ تَدْرُسْالسُّكونُ
ناقِصٌمَشىتَمْشيإِنْ تَمْشِحَذْفُ حَرْفِ العِلَّةِ
أَجْوَفُزارَتَزورُإِنْ تَزُرْالسُّكونُ (ويُحْذَفُ حَرْفُ العِلَّةِ مِنَ الوَسَطِ)
الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُدَرَسَتَدْرُسونَإِنْ تَدْرُسواحَذْفُ النّونِ
مُضَعَّفٌرَدَّتَرُدُّإِنْ تَرُدَّالسُّكونُ، ويُحَرَّكُ بِالفَتْحِ (أَوْ تَرْدُدْ)

The doubled verb is added for completeness only: it behaves as in lesson 35, where the three permitted shapes were laid out.

The three frames you should actually produce. Everything else is recognition:

الإِطارفِعْلُ الشَّرْطِجَوابُ الشَّرْطِمِثال
إِنْ + مُضارِع + مُضارِعمَجْزوممَجْزومإِنْ تُساعِدْني أُساعِدْكَ
إِنْ + ماضٍ + ماضٍماضٍماضٍإِنْ دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ
إِذا + ماضٍ + ماضٍماضٍماضٍإِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ

When فاءُ الجَوابِ is compulsory - the whole list, with the trigger in bold:

نَوْعُ الجَوابِمِثالEnglish
جُمْلَةٌ اسْمِيَّةٌإِذا نَجَحْتَ فَـلَكَ جائِزَةٌIf you pass, you get a prize
أَمْرٌإِذا وَصَلْتَ فَـاتَّصِلْ بيWhen you arrive, call me
نَهْيٌإِنْ تَشْعُرْ بِالتَّعَبِ فَـلا تُسافِرْIf you feel tired, don’t travel
سَـ / سَوْفَإِنْ تَحْضُرْ فَـسَنَبْدَأُ فَوْرًاIf you attend, we will start at once
قَدْإِنْ تَسْأَلْهُ فَـقَدْ يُساعِدُكَIf you ask him, he may help you
ماإِنْ تَبْحَثْ عَنْهُ فَـما هُوَ هُناIf you are looking for him, he is not here
لَنْمَهْما تَقُلْ فَـلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْييWhatever you say, I will not change my mind

Examples

العربيةEnglish
إِنْ تَجْتَهِدْ تَنْجَحْ فِي الامْتِحانِ.If you work hard, you will pass the exam.
إِذا دَرَسْتَ جَيِّدًا نَجَحْتَ بِسُهولَةٍ.If you study well, you will pass easily.
إِنْ تُساعِدْني أُساعِدْكَ غَدًا.If you help me, I will help you tomorrow.
إِذا وَصَلَ القِطارُ مُتَأَخِّرًا اِنْتَظَرْنا فِي المَحَطَّةِ.If the train arrives late, we will wait at the station.
إِنْ تَزُرْ دِمَشْقَ تَرَ مَدينَةً قَديمَةً جَميلَةً.If you visit Damascus, you will see a beautiful old city.
مَنْ يَعْمَلْ بِجِدٍّ يَنَلْ ما يُريدُ.Whoever works hard gets what he wants.
مَهْما تَقُلْ فَلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي.Whatever you say, I will not change my mind.
أَيْنَما تَذْهَبْ تَجِدْ أَصْدِقاءَ جُدُدًا.Wherever you go, you will find new friends.
مَتى تَصِلْ إِلى المَطارِ أَسْتَقْبِلْكَ.Whenever you get to the airport, I will meet you.
كَيْفَما تُعامِلِ النّاسَ يُعامِلوكَ.However you treat people, they will treat you the same.
أَيَّ كِتابٍ تَقْرَأْ تَسْتَفِدْ مِنْهُ.Whichever book you read, you will benefit from it.
إِذا نَجَحْتَ فَلَكَ جائِزَةٌ كَبيرَةٌ.If you pass, there is a big prize for you.
إِذا زُرْتَ القاهِرَةَ فَسَتُحِبُّ شَوارِعَها.If you visit Cairo, you will love its streets.
إِنْ لَمْ تُسافِرْ غَدًا فَاتَّصِلْ بي مَساءً.If you are not travelling tomorrow, call me in the evening.

Common mistakes

  • إِنْ تَدْرُسُ تَنْجَحُ -> إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ - إِنْ is jussive-causing and it reaches both verbs. Two ḍammas here is the single commonest error in the whole topic.
  • إِذا تَدْرُسُ تَنْجَحُ -> إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ - إِذا takes a past-tense form even though the meaning is future. A present-tense verb straight after إِذا does occur in Classical Arabic (إِذا تُتْلى عَلَيْهِ آياتُنا), but it is rare; in modern prose write the past form.
  • إِذا نَجَحْتَ لَكَ جائِزَةٌ -> إِذا نَجَحْتَ فَلَكَ جائِزَةٌ - the answer is a nominal sentence, so فاءُ الجَوابِ is obligatory. Dropping it leaves two sentences stuck together.
  • إِذا وَصَلْتَ اِتَّصِلْ بي -> إِذا وَصَلْتَ فَاتَّصِلْ بي - an imperative answer needs the same فَ. It is glued to the verb, never written as a separate word.
  • مَهْما تَقُلْ لَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي -> مَهْما تَقُلْ فَلَنْ أُغَيِّرَ رَأْيي - لَنْ blocks the jussive, so the answer takes the فَ. Same for سَـ، سَوْفَ، قَدْ، ما.
  • لَوْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ -> إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ - لَوْ is for conditions the speaker treats as unreal or already lost. For an open, still-possible condition use إِنْ or إِذا.
  • إِنْ تَزورْني أَزورْكَ -> إِنْ تَزُرْني أَزُرْكَ - a sukūn cannot follow a long vowel, so the hollow verb shortens in the jussive: تَزورُ becomes تَزُرْ.
  • إِنْ تَمْشي تَصِلْ -> إِنْ تَمْشِ تَصِلْ - in a final-weak verb the ي is deleted outright and only its kasra remains. The word really is that short.
  • إِنْ تَدْرُسونَ تَنْجَحونَ -> إِنْ تَدْرُسوا تَنْجَحوا - the الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَةُ drop their نون in the jussive, in the answer just as in the condition.
  • إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمَ الدَّرْسَ -> إِذا لَمْ تَفْهَمِ الدَّرْسَ - لَمْ demands a sukūn (not the fatḥa of the subjunctive), and the sukūn turns into a kasra before the article.

Tips

  • Learn إِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ and إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ as one flashcard with two faces. Everything else in this lesson is an expansion of that contrast.
  • A shortcut for choosing: if you would naturally say “when” in English, write إِذا; if you would insist on “if”, write إِنْ. In modern prose إِذا wins most of the time.
  • Do not practise conditions on sound verbs alone - إِنْ تَدْرُسْ hides its own grammar in unvocalized text. Build your sentences on زارَ، قالَ، مَشى، رَأى، اِسْتَطاعَ, where the collapse of the form is impossible to fake.
  • Whenever you write إِذا, look at your answer clause before you finish the sentence. If it starts with a noun, a command, سَـ، سَوْفَ، قَدْ، ما or لَنْ, the فَ goes in. That check alone removes a whole class of errors.
  • The negative frame إِنْ لَمْ / إِذا لَمْ is worth drilling on its own, because it stacks two jussive-causing words and learners routinely leave the ending open.
  • Keep لَوْ out of your production entirely until lesson 65. If you are unsure whether a condition is real, it is real - unreal ones are the ones the speaker treats as contrary to fact.
  • Read newspaper editorials for إِذا: it opens a great many sentences there, and seeing it followed by a past-tense verb fifty times will fix the pattern faster than any table.
  • Ignore for now the archaic إِذْما، أَنّى، حَيْثُما and any classical example where a noun sits between إِذا and its verb. Modern written Arabic nearly always puts the verb straight after the particle.

B2 57 / 70

The diminutive

التَّصْغير

In short

Arabic can shrink a noun by re-vowelling it instead of adding a word. كَلْبٌ “dog” becomes كُلَيْبٌ، نَهْرٌ “river” becomes نُهَيْرٌ: the consonants stay exactly where they were, the vowels are replaced by a fixed pattern, and a ي appears after the second consonant. The signature is short and never varies - a ḍamma on the first consonant, then ـَيْ - so a word that looks unfamiliar on the page often turns out to be a word you already know, wearing this one costume.

Treat this as a recognition lesson. Modern prose hardly ever coins a diminutive on the spot; to say “a small book” it says كِتابٌ صَغيرٌ. What it does use is a small stock of diminutives that have hardened into ordinary vocabulary - كُتَيِّبٌ a booklet, بُحَيْرَةٌ a lake, جُسَيْمٌ a particle, دُوَيْلَةٌ a statelet said with contempt - plus the two press adverbs قُبَيْلَ and بُعَيْدَ. Your job is to strip the pattern back to the root, look the base up, and learn that dozen of words as vocabulary. Producing new diminutives is not your job.

The rule

1. The signature: ـُ then ـَيْ. Every diminutive in the language, whatever its size, begins the same way: the first consonant carries a ḍamma, the second carries a fatḥa, and a ي with sukūn follows immediately. كُـ لَـ يْـ … is the whole alarm bell. What comes after that depends on how long the base word is, and there are only three continuations, listed below. If a word does not open with ـُ ـَيْ, it is not a diminutive, no matter what it means.

2. فُعَيْل - the three-consonant base. The commonest and simplest shape. Take a noun of three consonants, throw away its own vowels, and pour it into فُعَيْل:

كَلْبٌ → كُلَيْبٌ، نَهْرٌ → نُهَيْرٌ، جَبَلٌ → جُبَيْلٌ، قَلَمٌ → قُلَيْمٌ، جِسْمٌ → جُسَيْمٌ.

A base whose middle radical is a weak letter is no exception - that ي or و is a real radical and comes back into view. بَيْتٌ (root ب ي ت) → بُيَيْتٌ, with two ي in a row and no shadda between them. دارٌ (root د و ر) → دُوَيْرَةٌ، نارٌ (root ن و ر) → نُوَيْرَةٌ: the و that the alif was standing in for reappears (both are feminine, hence the added ة of rule 6). This is the same “restore the weak radical” move you learnt for hollow verbs in lesson 50.

3. فُعَيِّل - when the three-consonant base carries a long vowel after the second radical. This sub-case matters because it produces the single most useful diminutive in modern print. In كِتابٌ the ا sits in third place, after ك and ت; in the diminutive that long vowel turns into ي and fuses with the diminutive’s own ي under a shadda:

كِتابٌ → كُتَيِّبٌ (booklet)، رَغيفٌ → رُغَيِّفٌ (a small loaf)، غَزالٌ → غُزَيِّلٌ.

Note what the shadda tells you when you read: a doubled ي before the last consonant of a diminutive means the base had a long vowel there, whichever one it was. A doubled ي at the very end is something else - بُنَيٌّ، كُرَيَّةٌ - and comes from a weak final radical.

4. فُعَيْعِل - the four-consonant base. Four consonants leave no room for a long vowel, so the extra letter simply takes a kasra:

دَفْتَرٌ → دُفَيْتِرٌ، دِرْهَمٌ → دُرَيْهِمٌ، عَقْرَبٌ → عُقَيْرِبٌ، مَكْتَبٌ → مُكَيْتِبٌ.

A long ا in second place counts as one of the four slots and surfaces as و: كاتِبٌ → كُوَيْتِبٌ، شاعِرٌ → شُوَيْعِرٌ. The second of those is a real, still-used word for a bad little poet, and it shows you the contemptuous edge the pattern can carry.

5. فُعَيْعيل - four consonants with a long vowel in fourth place. If the base has a long vowel between its last two consonants, that vowel survives, and it always comes out as ي, whatever it was originally:

مِفْتاحٌ → مُفَيْتيحٌ، عُصْفورٌ → عُصَيْفيرٌ، قِنْديلٌ → قُنَيْديلٌ، مِصْباحٌ → مُصَيْبيحٌ، سُلْطانٌ → سُلَيْطينٌ.

The alif of مِفْتاح, the و of عُصْفور and the ي of قِنْديل all end up as the same ي. Notice how closely this tracks the broken plurals of lesson 10: مَفاتيحُ / مُفَيْتيحٌ، عَصافيرُ / عُصَيْفيرٌ، قَناديلُ / قُنَيْديلٌ - one skeleton, two sets of vowels.

6. An unmarked feminine base grows a ة. Arabic has a set of nouns that are feminine by nature but carry no feminine ending: شَمْسٌ، أَرْضٌ، عَيْنٌ، يَدٌ، نارٌ، دارٌ، حَرْبٌ، بِئْرٌ (lesson 5). When such a three-consonant noun is made diminutive, the missing ة is supplied:

شَمْسٌ → شُمَيْسَةٌ، أَرْضٌ → أُرَيْضَةٌ، عَيْنٌ → عُيَيْنَةٌ، يَدٌ → يُدَيَّةٌ.

A base that already has a ة simply keeps it: شَجَرَةٌ → شُجَيْرَةٌ، دَوْلَةٌ → دُوَيْلَةٌ، حَديقَةٌ → حُدَيِّقَةٌ (four letters plus the ة, so rule 3 applies inside it too). And longer feminines do not take the added ة: عَقْرَبٌ, feminine and four-lettered, gives عُقَيْرِبٌ, not عُقَيْرِبَةٌ.

7. They decline like any ordinary noun. Nothing about the shape blocks tanwīn or changes the case endings. A diminutive is a plain triptote:

كُتَيِّبٌ / كُتَيِّبًا / كُتَيِّبٍ, and with the article الكُتَيِّبُ / الكُتَيِّبَ / الكُتَيِّبِ.

Plurals are the ordinary sound ones: كُتَيِّباتٌ، دُوَيْلاتٌ، جُسَيْماتٌ، شُجَيْراتٌ. The diminutive shape itself is not a diptote trigger, so a diminutive name is declined by the ordinary criteria of lesson 41: حُسَيْنٌ takes full tanwīn - جاءَ حُسَيْنٌ، سَلَّمْتُ عَلى حُسَيْنٍ - because فُعَيْل is not one of the diptote categories. A name barred from tanwīn on some other ground - a feminine name, say - stays barred.

8. What the pattern means is decided by context, not by shape. Four readings are live in modern Arabic: literal smallness (شُجَيْرَةٌ a shrub, بُحَيْرَةٌ a lake, عُصَيْفيرٌ a little bird); affection, mostly in speech to children and in reported speech - يا بُنَيَّ، يا أُخَيَّ; contempt or belittling, which is what a journalist means by دُوَيْلَةٌ or by شُوَيْعِرٌ; and a purely technical use, where the diminutive was chosen to coin a term and no smallness is felt any more - جُسَيْمٌ a particle in physics, كُرَيَّةٌ a corpuscle in medicine (الكُرَيّاتُ الحَمْراءُ, the red blood cells). Only the surrounding sentence tells you which one you are looking at, so read the whole clause before you decide the writer is sneering.

9. How to look one up. The dictionary has no entry for a diminutive; it has the base. Reverse the pattern in three steps (lesson 22): delete the ي that follows the second consonant, undo the doubling if there is a shadda, and read what is left as a root. عُصَيْفير → ع ص ف ر → عُصْفور. مُفَيْتيح → م ف ت ح → the م is an augment, so the root is ف ت ح and the base is مِفْتاح. دُفَيْتِر → د ف ت ر → دَفْتَر. كُتَيِّب → the doubled ي unpacks into a long vowel → كِتاب. In unvocalized print the ḍamma and the fatḥa are invisible, but the ي is not: كتيب against كتاب، عصيفير against عصفور، دفيتر against دفتر. That ي - inserted, or standing where the base had ا or و - is your reading cue in unvocalized text.

10. Frozen diminutives are not diminutives any more. A large number of names froze in this shape centuries ago and are now simply names: حُسَيْنٌ، زُبَيْرٌ، سُهَيْلٌ، عُبَيْدٌ، جُبَيْلٌ، الكُوَيْتُ، القُنَيْطِرَةُ. Read them as names and translate them as names. Writing “little Ḥasan” for حُسَيْن or “the little fort” for الكُوَيْت is an etymology, not a translation, and in a news report it is simply wrong. The same holds for بُحَيْرَةٌ, which is a lake of any size, and for جُسَيْمٌ, which is a technical term.

11. What this lesson leaves alone. The classical shortening of a name in the vocative - التَّرْخيم، يا فاطِمَ for يا فاطِمَةُ - is a separate device and is not taught in this path; it is not part of modern written usage. The derived nouns built on فاعِل، مَفْعول، مَفْعَل، مِفْعال belong to lesson 53, and the elative أَفْعَل to lesson 28; those are patterns that make new meanings, while the diminutive only re-tunes a meaning you already have. Diminutives of adjectives and of the plural itself exist in the classical language and can be safely ignored.

Forms & patterns

The three continuations after the ـُ ـَيْ signature, with real bases. Learn to read the middle two columns as a pair:

القالِبشَكْلُ الأَصْلالأَصْلالتَّصْغيرEnglish
فُعَيْلثَلاثَةُ حُروفٍكَلْبٌكُلَيْبٌa little dog
فُعَيْلثَلاثَةُ حُروفٍنَهْرٌنُهَيْرٌa small river
فُعَيْلمُعْتَلُّ الوَسَطِبَيْتٌبُيَيْتٌa little house
فُعَيِّلثَلاثَةٌ + مَدٌّ ثالِثٌكِتابٌكُتَيِّبٌa booklet
فُعَيِّلثَلاثَةٌ + مَدٌّ ثالِثٌرَغيفٌرُغَيِّفٌa small loaf
فُعَيْعِلأَرْبَعَةُ حُروفٍدَفْتَرٌدُفَيْتِرٌa little notebook
فُعَيْعِلأَرْبَعَةُ حُروفٍدِرْهَمٌدُرَيْهِمٌa paltry dirham
فُعَيْعِلمَدٌّ في الثّانيشاعِرٌشُوَيْعِرٌa poetaster
فُعَيْعيلمَدٌّ رابِعٌ (ا)مِفْتاحٌمُفَيْتيحٌa little key
فُعَيْعيلمَدٌّ رابِعٌ (و)عُصْفورٌعُصَيْفيرٌa little sparrow
فُعَيْعيلمَدٌّ رابِعٌ (ي)قِنْديلٌقُنَيْديلٌa small lamp

The ة. Left column: feminine with no ending, so the diminutive supplies one. Right column: the ending was already there and stays:

مُؤَنَّثٌ بِلا عَلامَةٍالتَّصْغيرمُؤَنَّثٌ بِالتّاءِالتَّصْغير
شَمْسٌشُمَيْسَةٌشَجَرَةٌشُجَيْرَةٌ
أَرْضٌأُرَيْضَةٌدَوْلَةٌدُوَيْلَةٌ
عَيْنٌعُيَيْنَةٌحَديقَةٌحُدَيِّقَةٌ
دارٌدُوَيْرَةٌمَدينَةٌمُدَيِّنَةٌ
يَدٌيُدَيَّةٌقَنْطَرَةٌقُنَيْطِرَةٌ

Declension - ordinary and dull, which is the point:

الحالَةنَكِرَةمَعْرِفَةجَمْعٌ سالِمٌ
مَرْفوعكُتَيِّبٌالكُتَيِّبُكُتَيِّباتٌ
مَنْصوبكُتَيِّبًاالكُتَيِّبَكُتَيِّباتٍ
مَجْروركُتَيِّبٍالكُتَيِّبِكُتَيِّباتٍ

The vocabulary that actually earns its place - lexicalised diminutives you will meet in print:

الكَلِمَةمِنْالمَعْنى
كُتَيِّبٌكِتابٌbooklet, pamphlet, manual
بُحَيْرَةٌبَحْرٌlake (no smallness felt)
شُجَيْرَةٌشَجَرَةٌshrub, bush
دُوَيْلَةٌدَوْلَةٌstatelet - usually pejorative
جُسَيْمٌجِسْمٌparticle (physics)
كُرَيَّةٌكُرَةٌcorpuscle, blood cell
شُوَيْعِرٌشاعِرٌpoetaster, versifier
بُنَيٌّابْنٌmy boy (يا بُنَيَّ)
أُخَيٌّأَخٌdear brother (يا أُخَيَّ)
قُبَيْلَقَبْلَshortly before
بُعَيْدَبَعْدَshortly after

Left out of these tables: the diminutive of colour adjectives (أَحْمَر → أُحَيْمِر) and of plurals, both classical and both rare enough in modern prose to meet as vocabulary if you ever meet them.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
وَزَّعَتِ الوِزارَةُ كُتَيِّبًا إِرْشادِيًّا عَلى الطُّلّابِ.The ministry distributed a guidance booklet to the students.
صَدَرَ الكُتَيِّبُ في طَبْعَةٍ ثانِيَةٍ هٰذا الأُسْبوعَ.The booklet came out in a second edition this week.
وَصَلَ الوَفْدُ إِلى العاصِمَةِ قُبَيْلَ مُنْتَصَفِ اللَّيْلِ.The delegation reached the capital shortly before midnight.
أُعْلِنَتِ النَّتائِجُ بُعَيْدَ إِغْلاقِ صَناديقِ الاقْتِراعِ.The results were announced shortly after the ballot boxes closed.
وَصَفَتِ الصَّحيفَةُ جارَتَها بِأَنَّها دُوَيْلَةٌ تابِعَةٌ.The newspaper described its neighbour as a client statelet.
قالَ الشَّيْخُ لِحَفيدِهِ: يا بُنَيَّ، اِصْبِرْ قَليلًا.The old man said to his grandson: my boy, be patient a little.
زَرَعْنا شُجَيْراتٍ صَغيرَةً عَلى جانِبَيِ الطَّريقِ.We planted small shrubs on both sides of the road.
تَقَعُ القَرْيَةُ عَلى ضِفَّةِ بُحَيْرَةٍ هادِئَةٍ.The village lies on the shore of a quiet lake.
يَدْرُسُ العُلَماءُ سُلوكَ الجُسَيْماتِ في المُخْتَبَرِ.The scientists study the behaviour of the particles in the laboratory.
أَظْهَرَ التَّحْليلُ نَقْصًا في الكُرَيّاتِ الحَمْراءِ.The test showed a shortage of red blood cells.
حَطَّ عُصَيْفيرٌ عَلى حافَّةِ الشُّبّاكِ.A little sparrow landed on the edge of the window.
لَمْ تَظْهَرْ خَلْفَ الغُيومِ إِلّا شُمَيْسَةٌ باهِتَةٌ.Only a pale little sun showed behind the clouds.
اِشْتَرَيْتُ دُفَيْتِرًا صَغيرًا لِتَدْوينِ المُلاحَظاتِ.I bought a little notebook for jotting down notes.
سافَرَ الوَزيرُ إِلى الكُوَيْتِ في جَوْلَتِهِ الخَليجِيَّةِ.The minister travelled to Kuwait on his Gulf tour.

Common mistakes

  • شُمَيْس -> شُمَيْسَةٌ - شَمْس is feminine although it carries no feminine ending, and a three-letter feminine base grows a ة in the diminutive. The same for أَرْضٌ → أُرَيْضَةٌ and عَيْنٌ → عُيَيْنَةٌ.
  • أُقَيْلامٌ (for أَقْلامٌ) -> قُلَيْماتٌ - modern prose does not shrink a broken plural. Shrink the singular first, قَلَمٌ → قُلَيْمٌ, then give the diminutive an ordinary sound plural. (The old language does diminutivise a جَمْعُ قِلَّةٍ on its own shape, أَقْلامٌ → أُقَيْلامٌ, but that is not what you write today.)
  • كُتَيْبٌ -> كُتَيِّبٌ - the ا of كِتاب becomes a second ي and fuses with the diminutive ي, so the word carries a shadda. Dropping it gives the diminutive of a three-letter كَتْب, not of كِتاب.
  • مُفَيْتاحٌ -> مُفَيْتيحٌ - the long vowel in fourth place surfaces as ي in فُعَيْعيل, whether the base had ا، و or ي: عُصْفورٌ → عُصَيْفيرٌ, not عُصَيْفورٌ.
  • دُفَيْتَرٌ -> دُفَيْتِرٌ - in فُعَيْعِل the letter before the last takes a kasra. A fatḥa there is the most frequent slip with four-consonant bases.
  • بِيَيْتٌ -> بُيَيْتٌ - the first consonant of a diminutive carries a ḍamma, without exception. If it does not, the word is not a diminutive.
  • بُنَيِّي -> بُنَيَّ - the ي of the diminutive and the possessive ي of “my” merge into one doubled ي with a fatḥa: يا بُنَيَّ، يا أُخَيَّ.
  • قُبَيْلُ الغُروبِ -> قُبَيْلَ الغُروبِ - قُبَيْلَ and بُعَيْدَ are adverbials fixed in the accusative and followed by an إِضافَة, exactly like قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ (lesson 31).
  • جاءَ حُسَيْنَ -> جاءَ حُسَيْنٌ - the diminutive shape is not one of the diptote classes. حُسَيْنٌ takes full tanwīn in all three cases, and so does كُتَيِّبٌ.
  • “the little state of Kuwait” -> “Kuwait” - الكُوَيْت، حُسَيْن، جُبَيْل، القُنَيْطِرَة are frozen names. Their diminutive origin is etymology, not meaning, and must not reach your translation.

Tips

  • Train one reflex only: ḍamma - fatḥa - ي. When you see it, stop, strip the ي, and look up the base. That single move is 90% of what this lesson is for.
  • In unvocalized print the vowels are gone but the ي is still visible. كتيب / كتاب، عصيفير / عصفور، دفيتر / دفتر - in each pair the spelling that shows a ي in that slot is the diminutive.
  • Do not produce them. Modern prose writes كِتابٌ صَغيرٌ, and a coined diminutive in your own writing will read as either archaic or sarcastic - rarely what you intended.
  • Learn the lexicalised handful as flat vocabulary items instead of as derivations: كُتَيِّب، بُحَيْرَة، شُجَيْرَة، دُوَيْلَة، جُسَيْم، كُرَيَّة، قُبَيْلَ، بُعَيْدَ.
  • قُبَيْلَ and بُعَيْدَ are worth real effort - they are everywhere in news reporting and they are more precise than قَبْلَ and بَعْدَ: “shortly before”, “just after”.
  • Use the broken plurals you already know as a hook for the long shapes: if مَفاتيحُ and عَصافيرُ feel familiar, then مُفَيْتيحٌ and عُصَيْفيرٌ are the same skeletons with the diminutive vowels.
  • Tone is contextual. دُوَيْلَة is normally an insult (though دُوَيْلاتُ الطَّوائِفِ is a neutral historical label), بُنَيّ is tender, جُسَيْم is neutral physics - read the clause, never the pattern alone.
  • One frozen adverb is worth recognising in older or literary prose: رُوَيْدَكَ, “gently now, not so fast”. Take it as a fixed expression; do not try to analyse it.

B2 58 / 70

Emphasis and apposition

التَّوْكيدُ والبَدَل

In short

Arabic has a small closed class of words called التَّوابِع - “followers”. A تابِع is a word that attaches to a word already in the sentence - nearly always a noun - and copies its case automatically, whatever that case happens to be. You own two of the four already: the adjective of lesson 8 (الكِتابُ الجَديدُ) and the coordinated noun of lesson 25 (الكِتابُ والدَّفْتَرُ). This lesson finishes the set with the other two - التَّوْكيد, which emphasises a noun (“the manager himself”, “the whole book”), and البَدَل, which re-identifies it (“the caliph Umar”, “I ate the loaf, half of it”).

Both are worth learning as one lesson because they share a single mechanism: you never choose a case for them. The follower takes whatever the word in front of it took, so جاءَ المُديرُ نَفْسُهُ but رَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسَهُ. That makes them the cleanest test in the language of whether you really see the case of a noun as you write it. They are also everywhere in real prose: البَدَل is how a news report puts a title in front of a name, and التَّوْكيد is how MSA says “himself”, “the very same”, “all of it” and “both of them” - none of which has a dedicated little word.

The rule

1. The four followers, and the one thing they have in common. A تابِع follows its head - the مَتْبوع - and repeats its إِعْراب. Nothing else in Arabic behaves this way; an object is accusative because it is an object, but a تابِع is accusative only because the word before it was.

التّابِعLessonمِثال
النَّعْت12رَأَيْتُ الكِتابَ الجَديدَ
العَطْف30رَأَيْتُ الكِتابَ والدَّفْتَرَ
التَّوْكيدhereرَأَيْتُ الكِتابَ نَفْسَهُ
البَدَلhereقَرَأْتُ الكِتابَ نِصْفَهُ

2. التَّوْكيدُ المَعْنَوِيّ: a noun plus a matching pronoun. The emphasising words are ordinary nouns - نَفْس، عَيْن، كُلّ، جَميع، عامّة، كِلا، كِلْتا - and each of them must carry an attached pronoun (lesson 7) pointing back at the head. The pronoun is not optional decoration: without it the phrase is not Arabic at all. So the shape is always three pieces:

head noun (any case) + emphasiser in the same case + pronoun agreeing with the head

  • جاءَ المُديرُ نَفْسُهُ. - the manager himself came.
  • رَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسَهُ. - I saw the manager himself.
  • سَلَّمْتُ عَلى المُديرِ نَفْسِهِ. - I greeted the manager himself.

عَيْن does exactly the same job with the same shape (وَصَلَ الخَبَرُ عَيْنُهُ), and is a shade more formal. In modern prose ذات is a third option of the same kind: الشَّيْءُ ذاتُهُ، في الوَقْتِ ذاتِهِ.

3. The head must be definite, and the pronoun must really agree. You cannot emphasise an indefinite noun this way: جاءَ رَجُلٌ نَفْسُهُ is not a sentence. And the pronoun copies the head’s gender and number, which is where most errors happen - الطّالِباتُ كُلُّهُنَّ, not كُلُّهُمْ.

4. A plural head takes the plural أَنْفُس / أَعْيُن. نَفْس and عَيْن are singular nouns, so with a plural head they become أَنْفُس and أَعْيُن: حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ أَنْفُسُهُمْ، اِسْتَقْبَلَتْنا المُعَلِّماتُ أَنْفُسُهُنَّ. With a non-human plural, lesson 11 rules and the pronoun is feminine singular: القَوانينُ نَفْسُها. For a dual head, MSA normally reaches for كِلا / كِلْتا rather than a dual of نَفْس.

5. كُلّ، جَميع، عامّة emphasise totality. Lesson 42 already gave you the pattern; here is its name. The word stands after the noun in the noun’s own case, with a pronoun attached:

  • قَرَأْتُ الكِتابَ كُلَّهُ. - I read the whole book (accusative, because الكِتابَ is).
  • نَجَحَ الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ. / اِطَّلَعْتُ عَلى المِلَفّاتِ كُلِّها.
  • حَضَرَ المُوَظَّفونَ جَميعُهُمْ. - جَميع is the formal twin of كُلّ.

Note the difference from the construct كُلُّ الطُّلّابِ: there كُلّ comes first and the noun after it is genitive; here the noun comes first and كُلّ copies its case. Same meaning, opposite mechanics.

6. كِلا and كِلْتا have two shapes, and which one you use depends on what follows. Before a noun (a definite dual in the genitive) they never change: جاءَ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِ / رَأَيْتُ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِ / مَعَ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِ - one form for all three cases, like the مَقْصور nouns of lesson 41. Before a pronoun they decline like a dual: كِلاهُما in the nominative, كِلَيْهِما in the accusative and genitive (feminine: كِلْتاهُما / كِلْتَيْهِما). It is the pronoun form that is a true تَوْكيد, standing after a dual noun: سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما.

7. Stacking, and the modern preposed نَفْس. Two emphasisers can stack, and the traditional order is نَفْس/عَيْن first, then كُلّ/جَميع: حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ أَنْفُسُهُمْ كُلُّهُمْ. Separately, modern prose very often puts نَفْس in front of the noun as a first term - نَفْسُ الكِتابِ، في نَفْسِ الوَقْتِ - meaning “the same”. That is an إِضافَة, not a تَوْكيد, and careful writers prefer the appositive الكِتابُ نَفْسُهُ، في الوَقْتِ نَفْسِهِ. Recognise both; write the second.

8. التَّوْكيدُ اللَّفْظِيّ: say it twice. The other kind of emphasis is literal repetition of the same word, with no pronoun and no change of shape. It works on anything - a particle (نَعَمْ نَعَمْ، لا لا), a verb (أَسْرِعْ أَسْرِعْ), a noun (الحَذَرَ الحَذَرَ) or a pronoun (أَنْتَ أَنْتَ المَسْؤولُ). Both copies carry the same ending. It belongs to speech, headlines and warnings; do not sprinkle it through ordinary written prose.

9. البَدَل: a noun that replaces the noun before it. A بَدَل is a second noun standing for the first, in the same case, with no connector at all. The test that separates it from a نَعْت is that a بَدَل is the word actually meant: you could delete the head and the sentence would still work. Three kinds, and the last two behave differently from the first.

  • بَدَلُ كُلٍّ مِنْ كُلٍّ - the two nouns are the same thing: الخَليفَةُ عُمَرُ، العاصِمَةُ بَيْروتُ، أَخي خالِدٌ، المُهَنْدِسَةُ سَلْمى. This is the title-then-name pattern of the press. (The demonstrative phrase هٰذا الرَّجُلُ is traditionally parsed the same way, with الرَّجُلُ a بَدَل from هٰذا.)
  • بَدَلُ بَعْضٍ مِنْ كُلٍّ - the second noun is an actual part of the first, a piece of it or a subset of it: أَكَلْتُ الرَّغيفَ نِصْفَهُ، قَرَأْتُ الرِّوايَةَ نِصْفَها، نَجَحَ الطُّلّابُ مُعْظَمُهُمْ.
  • بَدَلُ اشْتِمالٍ - the second noun is a quality or aspect the first “contains”, not a piece of it: أَعْجَبَني الكِتابُ أُسْلوبُهُ، سَرَّني الطّالِبُ أَدَبُهُ، أَزْعَجَني الجارُ صَوْتُهُ.

10. The last two kinds need a linking pronoun. In بَدَلُ بَعْضٍ and بَدَلُ اشْتِمالٍ the second noun must carry an attached pronoun tying it to the head - نِصْفَهُ، أُسْلوبُهُ. Drop it and the sentence collapses (أَكَلْتُ الرَّغيفَ النِّصْفَ). بَدَلُ كُلٍّ mostly does not take one, because the two nouns are simply the same entity.

11. Watch the case on a proper name, especially a diptote. The most common بَدَل in real writing is a name after a title, and it must copy the title’s case. Because many names are مَمْنوع مِنَ الصَّرْف (lesson 41), that case shows up as a bare fatḥa with no tanwīn in both the accusative and the genitive: رَأَيْتُ الخَليفَةَ عُمَرَ، قَرَأْتُ عَنِ الخَليفَةِ عُمَرَ، زُرْتُ العاصِمَةَ بَيْروتَ، وَصَلْتُ إِلى العاصِمَةِ بَيْروتَ. Names ending in ى (سَلْمى، لَيْلى) show nothing at all - the alif carries every case invisibly.

12. You will not hear this at the end of a sentence. In the pausal form the ending of the word you stop on drops, so رَأَيْتُ الخَليفَةَ عُمَرْ sounds caseless, and unvocalized text shows nothing anywhere. That does not make the ending optional: it is present in every vocalized text, in careful continuous reading, and the moment another word follows. Write it.

Forms & patterns

One head, one emphasiser, all three cases - the whole point of the lesson in four lines:

الحالَةالجُمْلَةEnglish
مَرْفوعجاءَ المُديرُ نَفْسُهُ.The manager himself came.
مَنْصوبرَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسَهُ.I saw the manager himself.
مَجْرورسَلَّمْتُ عَلى المُديرِ نَفْسِهِ.I greeted the manager himself.

The attached pronoun follows the head’s gender and number, and نَفْس goes plural when the head does:

المُؤَكَّدالتَّوْكيدEnglish
المُديرُالمُديرُ نَفْسُهُthe manager himself
المُديرَةُالمُديرَةُ نَفْسُهاthe manager herself
الطُّلّابُالطُّلّابُ أَنْفُسُهُمْthe students themselves
الطّالِباتُالطّالِباتُ أَنْفُسُهُنَّthe students themselves
القَوانينُالقَوانينُ نَفْسُهاthe laws themselves, the same laws
أَناأَنا نَفْسيI myself
أَنْتَ / أَنْتِأَنْتَ نَفْسُكَ / أَنْتِ نَفْسُكِyou yourself

The totality words, in the case handed down by the head:

الجُمْلَةEnglish
قَرَأْتُ الكِتابَ كُلَّهُ.I read the whole book.
نَجَحَ الطُّلّابُ كُلُّهُمْ.The students all passed.
اِطَّلَعْتُ عَلى المِلَفّاتِ كُلِّها.I looked through all the files.
حَضَرَ المُوَظَّفونَ جَميعُهُمْ.The employees all attended.

كِلا and كِلْتا: invariable before a noun, declined before a pronoun.

الحالَة+ noun (one shape)+ pronoun (declines)
مَرْفوع (مُذَكَّر)حَضَرَ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِحَضَرَ الطَّبيبانِ كِلاهُما
مَنْصوب (مُذَكَّر)رَأَيْتُ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِرَأَيْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما
مَجْرور (مُذَكَّر)مَعَ كِلا الطَّبيبَيْنِمَعَ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما
مَرْفوع (مُؤَنَّث)حَضَرَتْ كِلْتا الطَّبيبَتَيْنِحَضَرَتِ الطَّبيبَتانِ كِلْتاهُما
مَنْصوب (مُؤَنَّث)رَأَيْتُ كِلْتا الطَّبيبَتَيْنِرَأَيْتُ الطَّبيبَتَيْنِ كِلْتَيْهِما
مَجْرور (مُؤَنَّث)مَعَ كِلْتا الطَّبيبَتَيْنِمَعَ الطَّبيبَتَيْنِ كِلْتَيْهِما

The three kinds of بَدَل:

النَّوْعمِثالLinking pronounEnglish
بَدَلُ كُلٍّ مِنْ كُلٍّحَكَمَ الخَليفَةُ عُمَرُ.noThe caliph Umar ruled.
بَدَلُ بَعْضٍ مِنْ كُلٍّأَكَلْتُ الرَّغيفَ نِصْفَهُ.yesI ate half the loaf.
بَدَلُ اشْتِمالٍأَعْجَبَني الكِتابُ أُسْلوبُهُ.yesI liked the book’s style.

A name in apposition, through the cases - note the diptote عُمَر:

الحالَةالجُمْلَة
مَرْفوعحَكَمَ الخَليفَةُ عُمَرُ سِنينَ طَويلَةً.
مَنْصوبذَكَرَ الكِتابُ الخَليفَةَ عُمَرَ.
مَجْرورقَرَأْتُ عَنِ الخَليفَةِ عُمَرَ.

Left out here on purpose: the fourth kind of بَدَل recognised by the old grammarians (بَدَلُ الغَلَط, correcting a slip mid-sentence), which has no place in written MSA.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
كَتَبَ الوَزيرُ التَّقْريرَ بِنَفْسِهِ.The minister wrote the report himself.
اِسْتَقْبَلَنا المُديرُ نَفْسُهُ في المَطارِ.The manager himself met us at the airport.
رَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسَهُ أَمامَ البابِ.I saw the manager himself in front of the door.
تَحَدَّثْتُ إِلى الطُّلّابِ أَنْفُسِهِمْ قَبْلَ الامْتِحانِ.I spoke to the students themselves before the exam.
الطّالِباتُ كُلُّهُنَّ حَضَرْنَ الدَّرْسَ.The students all attended the lesson.
شَرَحَ الأُسْتاذُ الدَّرْسَ كُلَّهُ في ساعَةٍ.The teacher explained the whole lesson in an hour.
وَقَّعَ الطَّرَفانِ كِلاهُما الاتِّفاقَ.Both parties signed the agreement.
سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَتَيْنِ كِلْتَيْهِما عَنِ النَّتيجَةِ.I asked both doctors about the result.
نَعَمْ نَعَمْ، سَمِعْتُ ما قُلْتَهُ.Yes, yes, I heard what you said.
زُرْتُ العاصِمَةَ بَيْروتَ في الصَّيْفِ الماضي.I visited the capital, Beirut, last summer.
قابَلْتُ المُهَنْدِسَةَ سَلْمى في الشَّرِكَةِ.I met the engineer Salma at the company.
قَرَأْتُ الرِّوايَةَ نِصْفَها ثُمَّ تَرَكْتُها.I read half the novel and then left it.
أَعْجَبَني الكِتابُ أُسْلوبُهُ أَكْثَرَ مِنْ مَوْضوعِهِ.I liked the book’s style more than its subject.
أَزْعَجَني الجارُ صَوْتُهُ طَوالَ اللَّيْلِ.The neighbour’s noise annoyed me all night.

Common mistakes

  • جاءَ المُديرُ نَفْس -> جاءَ المُديرُ نَفْسُهُ - نَفْس is a noun in a construct, so it must carry an attached pronoun. Bare نَفْس is never a تَوْكيد.
  • رَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسُهُ -> رَأَيْتُ المُديرَ نَفْسَهُ - a تابِع copies the head’s case. The head is accusative here, so the emphasiser is too.
  • الطّالِباتُ كُلُّهُمْ -> الطّالِباتُ كُلُّهُنَّ - the pronoun must match the head’s gender and number, not the nearest one you remember.
  • حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ نَفْسُهُمْ -> حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ أَنْفُسُهُمْ - a plural head needs the plural noun أَنْفُس (or أَعْيُن), not the singular.
  • جاءَ رَجُلٌ نَفْسُهُ -> جاءَ الرَّجُلُ نَفْسُهُ - التَّوْكيدُ المَعْنَوِيّ works only on a definite head. An indefinite noun cannot be emphasised this way.
  • كِلا الرَّجُلانِ وَقَّعَ -> كِلا الرَّجُلَيْنِ وَقَّعَ - the noun after كِلا is the second term of a construct, so it is a genitive dual.
  • سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلاهُما -> سَأَلْتُ الطَّبيبَيْنِ كِلَيْهِما - once a pronoun is attached, كِلا declines like a dual; كِلاهُما is nominative only.
  • رَأَيْتُ الخَليفَةَ عُمَرُ -> رَأَيْتُ الخَليفَةَ عُمَرَ - the بَدَل copies the case of the head, and عُمَر is a diptote (46): a bare fatḥa, with no tanwīn, in the accusative and genitive.
  • أَكَلْتُ الرَّغيفَ النِّصْفَ -> أَكَلْتُ الرَّغيفَ نِصْفَهُ - بَدَلُ بَعْضٍ مِنْ كُلٍّ is built with a linking pronoun, not with الـ.
  • أَعْجَبَني الكِتابُ الأُسْلوبُ -> أَعْجَبَني الكِتابُ أُسْلوبُهُ - same rule for بَدَلُ اشْتِمالٍ: the aspect noun must be tied back to the head by a pronoun.

Tips

  • Drill the three-piece shape aloud until it is automatic: noun - emphasiser in the same case - pronoun matching the noun. If any of the three is missing, the phrase is wrong.
  • Quick test for بَدَل against نَعْت: delete the head. الخَليفَةُ عُمَرُ still works as عُمَرُ, so عُمَرُ is a بَدَل; الكِتابُ الجَديدُ does not work as الجَديدُ alone, so that is a نَعْت.
  • Quick test between the kinds of بَدَل: no pronoun on the second noun means كُلٍّ مِنْ كُلٍّ; a pronoun plus an actual part of the head means بَعْضٍ مِنْ كُلٍّ; a pronoun plus a quality means اشْتِمال.
  • For كِلا, memorise exactly two pronoun shapes - كِلاهُما and كِلَيْهِما - and stop worrying about the rest. Before a noun there is only one form to write.
  • Read the news with an eye on the title-plus-name pattern (قالَ الرَّئيسُ فُلانٌ). It is the single most frequent بَدَل in print, and the name is where an unnoticed diptote will trip you.
  • Do not confuse these accusatives with the ones coming next. In التَّمْييز (lesson 61) and the المَفْعولُ المُطْلَق (lesson 60) the accusative comes from the construction itself; here the case is only ever borrowed from the head, and can just as easily be nominative or genitive.
  • Ignore التَّوْكيدُ اللَّفْظِيّ in your own writing for now. Recognising نَعَمْ نَعَمْ is enough; repetition in a written report reads as shouting.

B2 59 / 70

Verbs that reshape the sentence: zanna and kada

ظَنَّ وأَخَواتُها وكادَ وأَخَواتُها

In short

Lessons 43 and 49 showed you two machines that take a verbless sentence and re-case it: كانَ leaves the first word مَرْفوع and pushes the second into the accusative, إِنَّ does the mirror image. This lesson adds the last two machines of that kind. ظَنَّ وأَخَواتُها swallow the whole nominal sentence and turn both of its parts into accusatives - الجَوُّ جَميلٌ becomes ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. كادَ وأَخَواتُها keep the first part مَرْفوع and demand that the predicate be a مُضارِع verb rather than a noun - كِدْتُ أَسْقُطُ, “I almost fell”.

They share a page because they share a habit: each takes a sentence you can already build and bends its endings. The work is in three places - remembering that ظَنَّ wants two accusatives and not one, remembering which كادَ-sister insists on أَنْ and which forbids it, and surviving two awkward stems (ظَنَّ is doubled, كادَ is hollow) that reshape themselves the moment a suffix begins with a consonant.

The rule

1. ظَنَّ eats a nominal sentence and outputs two objects. Start from any مُبْتَدَأ plus خَبَر, put one of these verbs in front, and both words go مَنْصوب:

الجَوُّ جَميلٌ. → ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. - “I thought the weather was nice.”

Traditional grammar calls the two words مَفْعولانِ أَصْلُهُما المُبْتَدَأُ والخَبَر - “two objects whose origin is subject and predicate”. Keep that name, because it hands you the test: if the two words are not a sentence on their own, they are not a ظَنَّ pair. الجَوُّ جَميلٌ is a sentence, so ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا works; الكِتابُ الجَديدُ is only a noun plus its adjective, so *ظَنَنْتُ الكِتابَ الجَديدَ says nothing.

2. The members you actually need. The traditional list is long and half of it is dead. These eight carry modern Arabic:

ظَنَّ، حَسِبَ، وَجَدَ، رَأى، عَلِمَ، اِعْتَبَرَ، جَعَلَ، اِتَّخَذَ

They fall into three meaning groups, and grouping them is easier than listing them:

  • thinking it likely - ظَنَّ “think, suppose”، حَسِبَ “reckon, take to be”. The speaker may be wrong, and very often is.
  • knowing or judging it to be so - عَلِمَ “know (to be)”، وَجَدَ “find (to be)” report a fact; رَأى “deem, regard”، اِعْتَبَرَ “consider, count as” deliver a verdict.
  • turning X into Y - جَعَلَ “make into”، اِتَّخَذَ “take as”. Here the second accusative is a result, not an opinion.

3. Both objects are مَنْصوب, and the order is fixed. The first accusative is the thing being judged, the second is the judgement: اِعْتَبَرْتُ القَرارَ خَطَأً. Swap them and you swap the meaning, exactly as in English “I consider the decision a mistake” versus “I consider the mistake a decision”. The second object may also be a phrase or a clause, and then there is no ending to change: ظَنَنْتُهُ في المَكْتَبِ. / ظَنَنْتُ الطَّبيبَ يَنْتَظِرُني.

The first object is frequently an attached pronoun - ظَنَنْتُهُ نائِمًا “I thought he was asleep”، وَجَدْتُها مُغْلَقَةً “I found it (fem.) closed”. The pronoun is doing accusative duty just as in lesson 29; only the second word still shows a visible fatḥa.

4. Half of these verbs lead a double life. رَأى، وَجَدَ، عَلِمَ and جَعَلَ are ordinary transitive verbs too, and with one object they mean something quite different:

One objectTwo objects
رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَ. - I saw the man (with my eyes).رَأَيْتُ الرَّجُلَ صادِقًا. - I regarded the man as truthful.
وَجَدْتُ المِفْتاحَ. - I found the key (it was lost).وَجَدْتُ الدَّرْسَ سَهْلًا. - I found the lesson easy.
عَلِمْتُ الخَبَرَ. - I learned the news.عَلِمْتُ الخَبَرَ صَحيحًا. - I knew the news to be true.
جَعَلَ الكِتابَ عَلى الطّاوِلَةِ. - He put the book on the table.جَعَلَ الغُرْفَةَ مَكْتَبًا. - He turned the room into an office.

Nothing marks the difference except the number of accusatives. Count them before you translate.

5. اِعْتَبَرَ is the workhorse of the press. It is a Form VIII verb from the root عبر (اِعْتَبَرَ، يَعْتَبِرُ), and modern journalism runs on it: اِعْتَبَرَتِ الصَّحيفَةُ القَرارَ خَطَأً فادِحًا. Learn its passive at the same time, because the passive is even commoner than the active. When a two-object verb goes passive, the first object becomes نائِبُ الفاعِل and goes مَرْفوع, while the second stays مَنْصوب exactly where it was (lesson 52):

اِعْتَبَرَ الخُبَراءُ الاتِّفاقَ ناجِحًا. → يُعْتَبَرُ الاتِّفاقُ ناجِحًا.

That lone accusative trailing a مَرْفوع subject - يُعْتَبَرُ المَشْروعُ ضَرورِيًّا - is one of the most recognisable shapes on a news page.

6. The escape hatch: أَنَّ. The verbs of thinking and judging - ظَنَّ، حَسِبَ، عَلِمَ، وَجَدَ، رَأى، اِعْتَبَرَ - also accept a whole أَنَّ clause instead of two objects, and in modern prose that is the commoner construction:

ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. = ظَنَنْتُ أَنَّ الجَوَّ جَميلٌ.

Watch the endings flip. Inside أَنَّ the rule of lesson 44 applies: the noun after أَنَّ is مَنْصوب (الجَوَّ) and its predicate is مَرْفوع (جَميلٌ). So the second word is accusative in the two-object version and nominative in the أَنَّ version - اِعْتَبَرَتِ الوِزارَةُ أَنَّ الخُطَّةَ ناجِحَةٌ. The two verbs of turning X into Y have no such route: جَعَلَ and اِتَّخَذَ need two real objects, and *جَعَلْتُ أَنَّ الغُرْفَةَ مَكْتَبٌ is not Arabic.

7. ظَنَّ is مُضَعَّف, and the doubling breaks. The root is ظنن, so the two نs sit under a shadda only while the ending begins with a vowel: ظَنَّ، ظَنَّتْ، ظَنّوا، يَظُنُّ. The moment an ending begins with a consonant the letters split and the stem vowel comes back - a fatḥa, because ظَنَّ is a فَعَلَ verb (lesson 49):

ظَنَّ → ظَنَنْتُ، ظَنَنّا، ظَنَنْتُمْ، ظَنَنَّ - never *ظَنَّتُ

The same split runs through the present with نونُ النِّسْوَة: يَظُنُّ but هُنَّ يَظْنُنَّ. This is the ظَلَّ / ظَلِلْتُ behaviour of lesson 43 with a different vowel.

8. The second family: كادَ plus a bare مُضارِع. كادَ وأَخَواتُها - traditionally أَفْعالُ المُقارَبَةِ والرَّجاءِ والشُّروع, “verbs of nearness, hope and beginning” - leave their subject مَرْفوع and take a verb as their predicate, always a مُضارِع:

كادَ الوَلَدُ يَسْقُطُ. - The boy almost fell. كِدْتُ أَسْقُطُ عَلى الدَّرَجِ. - I almost fell on the stairs.

كادَ means “was on the point of, nearly did” - and in the affirmative it means the thing did not happen. كادَ الوَلَدُ يَسْقُطُ says the boy stayed on his feet.

9. Who takes أَنْ and who refuses it. This is the whole practical difficulty of the family, and it splits three ways:

  • كادَ - no أَنْ. كادَ يَسْقُطُ، كِدْنا نَصِلُ. The مُضارِع keeps its ordinary مَرْفوع ḍamma.
  • أَوْشَكَ and عَسى - with أَنْ. أَوْشَكَ القِطارُ أَنْ يَتَحَرَّكَ. / عَسى المَطَرُ أَنْ يَتَوَقَّفَ. Because أَنْ is there, the verb goes مَنْصوب (lesson 34): يَتَحَرَّكَ, not يَتَحَرَّكُ.
  • شَرَعَ، بَدَأَ، أَخَذَ - never أَنْ. شَرَعَ الطُّلّابُ يَكْتُبونَ. / بَدَأَ المُديرُ يَشْرَحُ الخُطَّةَ. / أَخَذَ الطِّفْلُ يَبْكي. *شَرَعَ أَنْ يَكْتُبَ is simply wrong.

The verbs of beginning have one extra restriction: in this construction they appear only in the past. You say شَرَعَ يَكْتُبُ, never *يَشْرَعُ يَكْتُبُ - for a present “he is beginning to” use بَدَأَ with a مَصْدَر: يَبْدَأُ العَمَلَ. Note too that جَعَلَ turns up here in the sense “he set about”: جَعَلَ يَضْحَكُ “he burst out laughing”. The same verb, two families.

10. أَوْشَكَ and عَسى. أَوْشَكَ (Form IV, root وشك) conjugates normally: أَوْشَكَ، أَوْشَكَتْ، أَوْشَكْتُ، يُوشِكُ. It is the neutral “be about to”, slightly more formal than كادَ and preferred when the event is expected rather than narrowly avoided.

عَسى is جامِد - frozen. It has no مُضارِع, no أَمْر and no participle, and in modern writing it is effectively invariable: عَسى أَنْ يَصِلَ الوَفْدُ غَدًا “the delegation may arrive tomorrow”. It expresses hope, and you will meet it far more often in reading than in your own writing - لَعَلَّ (lesson 44) does the same job more naturally. It also takes a glued pronoun, and in that one shape the أَنْ is usually dropped: عَساهُ يَعودُ.

11. لَمْ يَكَدْ … حَتّى - “no sooner … than”. Negated, كادَ normally reads the other way round: affirmative كادَ = it nearly happened but did not; negated كادَ followed by حَتّى = it barely did happen. Hence the fixed frame:

لَمْ يَكَدْ يَجْلِسُ حَتّى رَنَّ الهاتِفُ. - He had hardly sat down when the phone rang. ما كادَ يَبْدَأُ الحَديثَ حَتّى قاطَعَهُ أَحَدُهُمْ. - He had barely begun to speak when someone interrupted him.

ما كادَ and لَمْ يَكَدْ are interchangeable here. The same reading gives you the very useful لا أَكادُ أَسْمَعُكَ “I can hardly hear you” - I do hear you, only just. Outside these two frames a negated كادَ can equally be a flat denial (“was nowhere near doing it”), which is why grammarians have argued about it for centuries; read it from the context, not from a formula. Note that لَمْ puts the jussive only on يَكَدْ; the second verb keeps its ḍamma, because لَمْ reaches no further than the verb it precedes, and that مُضارِع is a clause of its own - the خَبَر of كادَ.

12. كادَ is أَجْوَف, and its stem shortens. The root is كود, and a long alif cannot stand in front of a sukūn (lesson 50), so before a consonant-initial ending it collapses to a short vowel: كادَ → كِدْتُ، كِدْنا، كِدْتُمْ. Note that the vowel is a kasra: a و root normally leaves a ḍamma (قالَ → قُلْتُ), but كادَ is underlyingly كَوِدَ / يَكادُ, the خافَ / خِفْتُ class, and that class keeps a kasra. The مُضارِع is يَكادُ with a fatḥa, and the jussive shortens it again: لَمْ يَكَدْ.

13. كادَ أَنْ - the honest note. You will constantly see كادَ أَنْ يَسْقُطَ in newspapers and novels. Classical grammar disapproves - أَنْ with كادَ is described as قَليل, rare, and the bare مُضارِع is the standard - but modern usage has largely ignored that. So recognise كادَ أَنْ without flinching and write كادَ يَسْقُطُ, which nobody will ever mark wrong.

14. Not in this lesson. When a particle such as ما، لا or إِنَّ comes between ظَنَّ and its objects, the verb’s case work is suspended and the clause keeps its own endings. Grammarians call it التَّعْليق, and it belongs with the other faces of ما in lesson 68. The rarer classical members of both families (كَرَبَ، طَفِقَ، حَرى، اِخْلَوْلَقَ، خالَ، زَعَمَ) belong to lesson 70’s register.

Forms & patterns

ظَنَّ - the doubled paradigm, where the split is visible

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع
أَناظَنَنْتُأَظُنُّ
أَنْتَظَنَنْتَتَظُنُّ
أَنْتِظَنَنْتِتَظُنّينَ
هُوَظَنَّيَظُنُّ
هِيَظَنَّتْتَظُنُّ
نَحْنُظَنَنّانَظُنُّ
أَنْتُمْظَنَنْتُمْتَظُنّونَ
هُمْظَنّوايَظُنّونَ
هُنَّظَنَنَّيَظْنُنَّ

(The dual forms are left out; they keep the shadda - ظَنّا، ظَنَّتا، يَظُنّانِ.)

The eight sisters of ظَنَّ

الفِعْلالمُضارِعMeaningمِثال
ظَنَّيَظُنُّthink, supposeظَنَنْتُ الطَّريقَ قَصيرًا.
حَسِبَيَحْسَبُreckon, take to beحَسِبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ عاجِلَةً.
وَجَدَيَجِدُfind (to be)وَجَدْتُ الدَّرْسَ سَهْلًا.
رَأىيَرىdeem, regardرَأَيْتُ الفِكْرَةَ مُمْتازَةً.
عَلِمَيَعْلَمُknow (to be)عَلِمْتُ الخَبَرَ صَحيحًا.
اِعْتَبَرَيَعْتَبِرُconsider, count asاِعْتَبَرْتُ القَرارَ خَطَأً.
جَعَلَيَجْعَلُmake intoجَعَلَ الغُرْفَةَ مَكْتَبًا.
اِتَّخَذَيَتَّخِذُtake as, adopt asاِتَّخَذَ الأَمْرَ ذَريعَةً.

One sentence, three operations

الجُمْلَةEnglish
الطَّقْسُ مُعْتَدِلٌ.The weather is mild.
ظَنَنْتُ الطَّقْسَ مُعْتَدِلًا.I thought the weather was mild.
اِعْتَبَرْتُ الطَّقْسَ مُعْتَدِلًا.I considered the weather mild.
ظَنَنْتُ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ مُعْتَدِلٌ.I thought that the weather was mild.

كادَ - the hollow paradigm

الضَّميرالماضيالمُضارِع
أَناكِدْتُأَكادُ
أَنْتَكِدْتَتَكادُ
هُوَكادَيَكادُ
هِيَكادَتْتَكادُ
نَحْنُكِدْنانَكادُ
أَنْتُمْكِدْتُمْتَكادونَ
هُمْكادوايَكادونَ
المَجْزوم (هُوَ)لَمْ يَكَدْ-

The كادَ family and the أَنْ question

الفِعْلTakes أَنْمِثالMeaning
كادَ / يَكادُnoكادَ الوَلَدُ يَسْقُطُ.almost, nearly did
أَوْشَكَ / يُوشِكُyesأَوْشَكَ القِطارُ أَنْ يَصِلَ.be about to
عَسى (جامِد)yesعَسى المَطَرُ أَنْ يَتَوَقَّفَ.may, hopefully
شَرَعَnoشَرَعَ الطُّلّابُ يَكْتُبونَ.began (past only)
بَدَأَnoبَدَأَ المُديرُ يَشْرَحُ.began (past only)
أَخَذَnoأَخَذَ الطِّفْلُ يَبْكي.started (past only)
جَعَلَnoجَعَلَ يَضْحَكُ.set about (past only)

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ظَنَنْتُ الطَّريقَ قَصيرًا، فَمَشَيْتُ ساعَتَيْنِ.I thought the road was short, so I walked for two hours.
حَسِبْتُ الرِّسالَةَ عاجِلَةً فَفَتَحْتُها فَوْرًا.I reckoned the letter was urgent, so I opened it at once.
وَجَدْتُ الغُرْفَةَ نَظيفَةً عِنْدَ عَوْدَتي.I found the room clean when I got back.
رَأَيْتُ الفِكْرَةَ مُمْتازَةً مُنْذُ البِدايَةِ.I regarded the idea as excellent from the start.
اِعْتَبَرَتِ الصَّحيفَةُ القَرارَ خَطَأً فادِحًا.The newspaper considered the decision a grave mistake.
جَعَلَ المُهَنْدِسُ الغُرْفَةَ مَكْتَبًا صَغيرًا.The engineer turned the room into a small office.
اِتَّخَذَتِ الحُكومَةُ الأَمْرَ ذَريعَةً لِلتَّأْجيلِ.The government took the matter as a pretext for postponement.
ظَنَنْتُهُ نائِمًا فَخَرَجْتُ بِهُدوءٍ.I thought he was asleep, so I left quietly.
ظَنَنّا أَنَّ الطَّريقَ مُغْلَقٌ بِسَبَبِ المَطَرِ.We thought that the road was closed because of the rain.
كِدْتُ أَسْقُطُ عَلى الدَّرَجِ.I almost fell on the stairs.
أَوْشَكَ القِطارُ أَنْ يَتَحَرَّكَ حينَ وَصَلْنا.The train was about to move when we arrived.
عَسى المَطَرُ أَنْ يَتَوَقَّفَ قَبْلَ المَساءِ.Hopefully the rain will stop before evening.
شَرَعَ الطُّلّابُ يَكْتُبونَ أَجْوِبَتَهُمْ.The students began writing their answers.
لَمْ يَكَدْ يَجْلِسُ حَتّى رَنَّ الهاتِفُ.He had hardly sat down when the phone rang.

Common mistakes

  • ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلٌ. -> ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. - The old خَبَر does not keep its ḍamma. Both halves of the swallowed sentence go مَنْصوب, and the second is the half learners forget.
  • ظَنَنْتُ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. -> ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. - The first half too. A leftover nominative is the reflex of كانَ وأَخَوات, and this is the wrong family for it.
  • ظَنَّتُ أَنَّ الخَبَرَ صَحيحٌ. -> ظَنَنْتُ أَنَّ الخَبَرَ صَحيحٌ. - ظَنَّ is doubled: a consonant-initial ending splits the shadda. (ظَنَّتْ, with a sukūn on the ت, is the perfectly good “she thought”.)
  • ظَنَنْتُ أَنَّ الجَوَّ جَميلًا. -> ظَنَنْتُ أَنَّ الجَوَّ جَميلٌ. - Once أَنَّ is in the sentence, أَنَّ governs, not ظَنَّ: accusative noun, nominative predicate (lesson 44). You cannot use both systems at once.
  • وَجَدْتُ البابَ مَفْتوحٌ. -> وَجَدْتُ البابَ مَفْتوحًا. - If وَجَدَ has two complements it is a ظَنَّ-sister, and the second one takes a fatḥa.
  • شَرَعَ أَنْ يَكْتُبَ الرِّسالَةَ. -> شَرَعَ يَكْتُبُ الرِّسالَةَ. - The verbs of beginning refuse أَنْ, and with no أَنْ there is nothing to make the مُضارِع مَنْصوب.
  • كادَ الوَلَدُ يَسْقُطَ. -> كادَ الوَلَدُ يَسْقُطُ. - The manṣūb ending arrived without its cause. كادَ takes a bare مُضارِع, and a bare مُضارِع is مَرْفوع.
  • كادْتُ أَسْقُطُ. -> كِدْتُ أَسْقُطُ. - كادَ is hollow: the long alif collapses before the consonant-initial ـْتُ, and the vowel it leaves behind is a kasra, because كادَ conjugates like خافَ / خِفْتُ, not like قالَ / قُلْتُ.
  • أَوْشَكَ القِطارُ يَتَحَرَّكُ. -> أَوْشَكَ القِطارُ أَنْ يَتَحَرَّكَ. - أَوْشَكَ with a bare مُضارِع is allowed and does occur, but أَنْ is the normal modern shape by a wide margin; keep أَنْ, and keep the subjunctive after it.
  • يَعْسى الطَّقْسُ أَنْ يَتَحَسَّنَ. -> عَسى الطَّقْسُ أَنْ يَتَحَسَّنَ. - عَسى is جامِد: no *يَعْسى, no أَمْر, no participle. The past-shaped form carries every meaning.

Tips

  • Use the sentence test before writing a double accusative: strip the verb off and see whether the two words stand alone as جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّة. الجَوُّ جَميلٌ passes, so ظَنَنْتُ الجَوَّ جَميلًا is safe.
  • When the two accusatives make you hesitate after a verb of thinking or judging, take the أَنَّ route. It is more frequent in modern prose anyway, and its endings are the ones you drilled in lesson 44. (جَعَلَ and اِتَّخَذَ have no أَنَّ route - they need two real objects.)
  • Memorise the أَنْ split as a three-beat chant - كادَ never, أَوْشَكَ and عَسى always, the beginning verbs never. Most errors in the second family are a wrong answer to that one question.
  • One stem test covers both families, the one from lessons 49 and 55: does the ending begin with a consonant? If yes, ظَنَّ → ظَنَنْ and كادَ → كِدْ. If no, leave the stem alone.
  • Learn اِعْتَبَرَ together with يُعْتَبَرُ - the passive is the shape you meet first in any newspaper.
  • Keep the two families apart by what follows the subject: كانَ وأَخَوات take a noun predicate in the accusative, كادَ وأَخَوات take a verb. كانَ الوَلَدُ نائِمًا against كادَ الوَلَدُ يَنامُ.
  • Ignore for now: التَّعْليق, the frozen relatives كَرَبَ and طَفِقَ, and the dual paradigms. Eight ظَنَّ-verbs and the seven in the كادَ table is the whole working set.

B2 60 / 70

The absolute object and the object of purpose

المَفْعولُ المُطْلَقُ والمَفْعولُ لِأَجْلِه

In short

English strengthens a verb with an adverb: “I thanked him warmly”, “the news spread like wildfire”, “she knocked twice”. Arabic has a neater trick. It takes the verb’s own مَصْدَر - the verbal noun of lesson 54 - puts it in the accusative and lays it straight after the verb: شَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرًا. Literally “I thanked him a thanking”. That echo is called المَفْعولُ المُطْلَقُ, and once you can build it you can intensify, characterise or count any action in the language, because every verb has a مَصْدَر.

The lesson’s second half is a different accusative مَصْدَر. المَفْعولُ لِأَجْلِهِ gives the reason for the action: قُمْتُ اِحْتِرامًا لِلْأُسْتاذِ “I stood up out of respect for the teacher”. Both are مَصادِر, both are مَنْصوب, and one question each tells them apart: المُطْلَق answers “how / how many times?”, لِأَجْلِهِ answers “why?”. A bonus comes with them: شُكْرًا، عَفْوًا، أَهْلًا وَسَهْلًا، حَقًّا are all frozen absolute objects, so you have been using this construction since your first week.

The rule

1. What “absolute” means. Arabic’s other objects are named after a preposition - المَفْعولُ بِهِ (lesson 29), المَفْعولُ فيهِ (lesson 31), المَفْعولُ لِأَجْلِهِ below. This one hangs off the verb with no preposition at all, “absolutely”. It is a مَصْدَر of the same verb, always مَنْصوب, and changes nothing around it: كَتَبَ الطّالِبُ الرِّسالَةَ كِتابَةً keeps its subject and its ordinary object, with the مَصْدَر added on top.

The one hard requirement is that the مَصْدَر must come from that verb, in that form. عَلَّمَ is Form II, so its مَصْدَر is تَعْليمًا and nothing else; عِلْمًا belongs to عَلِمَ.

2. Job one: تَوْكيد, plain emphasis. The bare مَصْدَر doubles down on the verb: it happened, and it happened properly. English reaches for “really”, “indeed”, “warmly”, or a stressed verb.

  • شَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرًا. - I thanked him sincerely.
  • فَرِحَ الأَوْلادُ فَرَحًا. - The children were truly delighted.
  • تَغَيَّرَتِ المَدينَةُ تَغَيُّرًا. - The city has genuinely changed.

In this job the مَصْدَر stands alone, indefinite: no plural, no الـ.

3. Job two: نَوْع, what kind of doing it was. This is the productive one. The مَصْدَر is no longer bare: it is either followed by an adjective or made the first term of an إِضافَة (lesson 20), and the description does the real work.

  • نامَ الطِّفْلُ نَوْمًا عَميقًا. - The child slept deeply.
  • تَصَرَّفَ تَصَرُّفًا حَكيمًا. - He acted wisely.
  • اِنْتَشَرَ الخَبَرُ اِنْتِشارَ النّارِ في الهَشيمِ. - The news spread like fire in dry brush.
  • عَمِلَ عَمَلَ المُحْتَرِفينَ. - He worked the way professionals work.

Notice what the إِضافَة version buys you: it is Arabic’s normal way of building a simile out of a verb. The مَصْدَر loses its tanwīn because it is مُضاف (اِنْتِشارَ, not *اِنْتِشارًا), exactly as any first term does.

4. Job three: عَدَد, how many times. Add the ة of the single instance and you can count the action: ضَرَبَ gives ضَرْبَةً “one blow”, دارَ gives دَوْرَةً “one turn”, and from there the dual and the plural do the counting:

  • دارَتِ الأَرْضُ دَوْرَتَيْنِ. - The earth turned twice.
  • طَرَقَ البابَ طَرْقَتَيْنِ. - He knocked on the door twice.
  • قَفَزَ ثَلاثَ قَفَزاتٍ. - He jumped three times.

With a number in front, the number takes the accusative and the مَصْدَر becomes its مُضاف إِلَيْهِ (lesson 26): ثَلاثَ قَفَزاتٍ, genitive after the accusative ثَلاثَ.

5. Building the مَصْدَر: match the form. This is where learners really go wrong, and it is pure lesson 54. Take the verb, identify its measure, take that measure’s مَصْدَر:

ضَرَبَ (I) → ضَرْبًا، عَلَّمَ (II) → تَعْليمًا، تَقَدَّمَ (V) → تَقَدُّمًا، اِهْتَمَّ (VIII) → اِهْتِمامًا، اِسْتَقْبَلَ (X) → اِسْتِقْبالًا. Form I is lexical, so look it up; from Form II up it is mechanical. Watch the مُضَعَّف verb اِهْتَمَّ: its shadda unpacks in the مَصْدَر (اِهْتِمامًا), because the noun’s shape separates the two identical radicals.

6. النّائِبُ عَنِ المَفْعولِ المُطْلَقِ - the stand-ins. Arabic often skips the مَصْدَر and puts something that points at it in the same accusative slot. Four cover almost everything:

  • كُلَّ / بَعْضَ + the مَصْدَر: أُحِبُّهُ كُلَّ الحُبِّ “I love him with all my heart”, فَهِمْتُ بَعْضَ الفَهْمِ “I understood in part”.
  • an adverb of degree: أَحْتَرِمُهُ كَثيرًا “I respect him greatly”, تَأَخَّرَ قَليلًا “he was a little late”.
  • a demonstrative: جَلَسْتُ هٰذِهِ الجِلْسَةَ “I sat in this particular way”.
  • the adjective on its own, with the مَصْدَر deleted: سِرْنا سَريعًا “we walked fast”, where the full form would be سَيْرًا سَريعًا.

That last one explains a whole class of Arabic adverbs: there is no separate part of speech for “quickly”, only an accusative sitting in the absolute-object slot.

7. The frozen ones - your biggest payoff. A set of everyday words are accusatives whose verb has been deleted and is never said aloud. Most of them are absolute objects - the مَصْدَر left standing on its own:

  • شُكْرًا - أَشْكُرُ شُكْرًا is understood. “Thanks.”
  • عَفْوًا - “excuse me / you’re welcome”, from عَفا “to pardon”.
  • حَقًّا - “really, truly”. صَبْرًا - “patience!”. مَهْلًا - “gently, hold on”.
  • أَهْلًا وَسَهْلًا - “welcome”, the odd one out: here the deleted verb takes the two nouns as an object and a place, not as مَصادِر (وَجَدْتَ أَهْلًا “you have found family”), but the accusative behaves the same way.

This is why they carry that ـً: not politeness spelling, grammar. Once you see شُكْرًا as an absolute object, the fatḥatān stops being arbitrary and you will never write *شُكْرٌ.

8. المَفْعولُ لِأَجْلِهِ: the reason. Take a مَصْدَر that names an inner state - a feeling, a wish, a motive - put it in the accusative after the verb, and it tells you why:

  • قُمْتُ اِحْتِرامًا لِلْأُسْتاذِ. - I stood up out of respect for the teacher.
  • سافَرَ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ. - He travelled in pursuit of knowledge.
  • صَمَتَ خَوْفًا مِنَ الخَطَأِ. - He kept quiet for fear of a mistake.
  • تَبَرَّعَ بِالمالِ رَغْبَةً في المُساعَدَةِ. - He donated the money out of a wish to help.

It answers لِماذا؟ and it is a compact alternative to a whole لِأَنَّ clause (lesson 38): صَمَتَ خَوْفًا مِنَ الخَطَأِ = صَمَتَ لِأَنَّهُ خافَ مِنَ الخَطَأِ.

9. The three conditions it must meet. A مَصْدَر only occupies this slot if all three hold:

  1. It is a قَلْبِيّ مَصْدَر - a “heart” noun: اِحْتِرام، خَوْف، رَغْبَة، طَمَع، حُبّ، كَراهِيَة، طَلَب، أَمَل، رَجاء، حِرْص، إِكْرام، تَقْدير. A مَصْدَر of a plain physical action normally does not qualify.
  2. It shares the same doer as the verb: the traveller is the one who wants the knowledge.
  3. It shares the same time as the verb: the wanting and the travelling are simultaneous.

Break condition 1 and the sentence collapses: *سافَرَ العَمَلَ is not Arabic, because عَمَل is not a feeling. You must say سافَرَ لِلْعَمَلِ. Break condition 2 - if the reason belongs to someone else - and you again need لِـ or a clause.

10. Indefinite, مُضاف, definite. The accusative is at home when the مَصْدَر is indefinite and alone. Make it a مُضاف and both routes are open - the accusative, or لِـ + genitive; give it الـ and Arabic prefers لِـ + genitive:

  • سافَرَ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ. - indefinite: accusative.
  • سافَرَ طَلَبَ العِلْمِ / سافَرَ لِطَلَبِ العِلْمِ. - مُضاف: both are correct.
  • سافَرَ لِلطَّلَبِ. - definite with الـ: لِـ + genitive.

All of these are good Arabic; لِطَلَبِ العِلْمِ is the most common in modern prose. Note that the accusative usually trails its own complement - اِحْتِرامًا لِـ، خَوْفًا مِنْ، رَغْبَةً في - and that little preposition is fixed per noun, so learn the pair.

11. Writing the ـً, and hearing it. Both constructions end in fatḥatān, and lesson 55’s spelling rule applies unchanged. A word ending in a plain consonant takes the prop alif: شُكْرًا، تَعْليمًا، اِحْتِرامًا، طَلَبًا. Words that already end in something else take no alif: those ending in ة, which carry the tanwīn on the ة (رَغْبَةً، مُساعَدَةً، دَوْرَةً - never *رَغْبَةاً), those ending in a hamza after a long alif (مَساءً، اِبْتِداءً، بِناءً), and those ending in ى (رِضًا). The اِسْم مَنْقوص brings its ي back first: تَمَنٍّ → تَمَنِّيًا.

And the reward from the pausal rules: of the three tanwīns, only this one survives الوَقْف. In pause ـٌ and ـٍ go silent, but ـً is pronounced as a long ā - which is why شُكْرًا is heard as “shukrā” by everyone, and why these accusatives are the endings you can safely say out loud.

12. Telling the two apart, and what is not here. Ask the question. شَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرًا - how did I thank him? Absolute object. قُمْتُ اِحْتِرامًا - why did I stand up? Object of purpose. A second test: the absolute object proper is built on the verb’s own root - that is the whole point of it - while the object of purpose comes from a different root, since a verb is rarely its own motive.

One accusative more is left to lesson 61: the noun saying what a quantity or a comparison is measured in (اِشْتَرَيْتُ كيلو سُكَّرًا، أَكْثَرُ طُلّابًا). That is التَّمْييز, and it is neither a مَصْدَر nor an echo of the verb.

Forms & patterns

The three jobs of المَفْعول المُطْلَق:

الوَظيفَةالشَّكْلمِثالEnglish
تَوْكيدbare مَصْدَرشَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرًاI thanked him sincerely
نَوْعمَصْدَر + صِفَةنامَ نَوْمًا عَميقًاHe slept deeply
نَوْعمَصْدَر مُضافاِنْتَشَرَ اِنْتِشارَ النّارِIt spread like fire
عَدَدمَصْدَر مَرَّةدارَتْ دَوْرَتَيْنِIt turned twice

Verb → its مَصْدَر, by measure. Take the row that matches your verb and nothing will mismatch:

الفِعْلالوَزْنالمَفْعول المُطْلَقالجُمْلَة
ضَرَبَIضَرْبًاضَرَبَ الكُرَةَ ضَرْبًا قَوِيًّا
فَهِمَIفَهْمًافَهِمَ الدَّرْسَ فَهْمًا جَيِّدًا
عَلَّمَIIتَعْليمًاعَلَّمَهُ العَرَبِيَّةَ تَعْليمًا مُمْتازًا
ساعَدَIIIمُساعَدَةًساعَدَني مُساعَدَةً كَبيرَةً
أَرْسَلَIVإِرْسالًاأَرْسَلَ الرِّسالَةَ إِرْسالًا سَريعًا
تَقَدَّمَVتَقَدُّمًاتَقَدَّمَ العَمَلُ تَقَدُّمًا واضِحًا
تَعاوَنَVIتَعاوُنًاتَعاوَنّا تَعاوُنًا وَثيقًا
اِنْكَسَرَVIIاِنْكِسارًااِنْكَسَرَ الزُّجاجُ اِنْكِسارًا تامًّا
اِهْتَمَّVIII (مُضَعَّف)اِهْتِمامًااِهْتَمَّ بِالمَشْروعِ اِهْتِمامًا بالِغًا
اِسْتَقْبَلَXاِسْتِقْبالًااِسْتَقْبَلَنا اِسْتِقْبالًا حارًّا

The stand-ins (النّائِبُ عَنِ المَفْعولِ المُطْلَقِ):

النّائِبمِثالEnglish
كُلَّ + المَصْدَرأُحِبُّهُ كُلَّ الحُبِّI love him with all my heart
بَعْضَ + المَصْدَرنِمْتُ بَعْضَ النَّوْمِI slept a little
صِفَة المَصْدَر (الدَّرَجَة)أَحْتَرِمُهُ كَثيرًاI respect him greatly
العَدَدضَرَبَهُ ضَرْبَتَيْنِHe struck him twice
صِفَة المَصْدَر (النَّوْع)سِرْنا سَريعًاWe walked fast

Frozen accusatives with a deleted verb - learn them as vocabulary, not as grammar:

الكَلِمَةالأَصْل المُقَدَّرEnglish
شُكْرًاأَشْكُرُكَ شُكْرًاthank you
عَفْوًاأَعْفو عَفْوًاexcuse me / you’re welcome
أَهْلًا وَسَهْلًاوَجَدْتَ أَهْلًا وَنَزَلْتَ سَهْلًاwelcome
حَقًّايَحِقُّ حَقًّاreally, truly
مَثَلًاأَضْرِبُ مَثَلًاfor example
صَبْرًااِصْبِرْ صَبْرًاpatience!
مَهْلًاأَمْهِلْ مَهْلًاeasy, hold on

Common heart-مَصادِر in the لِأَجْلِهِ slot, with the preposition each one prefers:

المَصْدَرحَرْفُ الجَرِّ بَعْدَهُمِثال
اِحْتِرامًالِـوَقَفْتُ اِحْتِرامًا لِلضُّيوفِ
طَلَبًالِـسافَرَ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ
خَوْفًامِنْصَمَتَ خَوْفًا مِنَ الخَطَأِ
رَغْبَةًفيتَطَوَّعَ رَغْبَةً في الخَيْرِ
حِرْصًاعَلىراجَعَ الحِسابَ حِرْصًا عَلى الدِّقَّةِ
تَقْديرًالِـكَرَّمَتْهُ الجامِعَةُ تَقْديرًا لِجُهودِهِ
إِكْرامًالِـسَكَتْنا إِكْرامًا لِلْجَدِّ

The accusative and its لِـ paraphrase:

الحالَةالتَّرْكيبمِثال
نَكِرَة مُجَرَّدَةمَنْصوبسافَرَ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ
مُضافمَنْصوب أَو لِـ + مَجْرورسافَرَ طَلَبَ العِلْمِ / سافَرَ لِطَلَبِ العِلْمِ
مُعَرَّف بِالـلِـ + مَجْرور (الأَكْثَر)سافَرَ لِلطَّلَبِ

Examples

العربيةEnglish
شَكَرْتُ المُديرَ شُكْرًا عَلى مُساعَدَتِهِ.I thanked the manager sincerely for his help.
نامَ الطِّفْلُ نَوْمًا عَميقًا بَعْدَ اللَّعِبِ.The child slept deeply after playing.
اِنْتَشَرَ الخَبَرُ اِنْتِشارَ النّارِ في الهَشيمِ.The news spread like fire in dry brush.
دارَتِ السَّيّارَةُ حَوْلَ المَيْدانِ دَوْرَتَيْنِ.The car went round the square twice.
اِسْتَقْبَلَنا أَهْلُ القَرْيَةِ اِسْتِقْبالًا حارًّا.The villagers gave us a warm welcome.
اِهْتَمَّتِ الجامِعَةُ بِالبَحْثِ اِهْتِمامًا بالِغًا.The university took a keen interest in the research.
أُحِبُّ هٰذِهِ المَدينَةَ كُلَّ الحُبِّ.I love this city with all my heart.
أَحْتَرِمُ رَأْيَكَ كَثيرًا.I respect your opinion greatly.
وَقَفَ الطُّلّابُ اِحْتِرامًا لِلْأُسْتاذِ.The students stood up out of respect for the teacher.
سافَرَ إِلى القاهِرَةِ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ.He travelled to Cairo in pursuit of knowledge.
صَمَتَ في الاِجْتِماعِ خَوْفًا مِنَ الخَطَأِ.He kept quiet in the meeting for fear of making a mistake.
تَبَرَّعَتْ بِراتِبِها رَغْبَةً في مُساعَدَةِ الفُقَراءِ.She donated her salary out of a wish to help the poor.
عَفْوًا، هَلْ تَسْمَحُ لي بِالمُرورِ؟Excuse me, may I get past?

Common mistakes

  • عَلَّمْتُهُ عِلْمًا -> عَلَّمْتُهُ تَعْليمًا - the مَصْدَر must come from the same measure as the verb. عِلْم belongs to عَلِمَ (Form I); عَلَّمَ is Form II and its مَصْدَر is تَعْليم.
  • سافَرَ العَمَلَ -> سافَرَ لِلْعَمَلِ - المَفْعول لِأَجْلِهِ has to be a feeling or a motive. عَمَل is a physical activity, so it needs لِـ and the genitive.
  • شَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرٌ -> شَكَرْتُهُ شُكْرًا - the absolute object is مَنْصوب without exception. A ḍamma would make it a stray subject the sentence has no room for.
  • دارَتْ الدَّوْرَةَ -> دارَتْ دَوْرَتَيْنِ - to count instances, use the ة form in the dual or plural. The bare definite مَصْدَر counts nothing.
  • سافَرَ طَلَبًا العِلْمِ -> سافَرَ طَلَبًا لِلْعِلْمِ - one word cannot carry a tanwīn and a مُضاف إِلَيْهِ at once. Keep the tanwīn and link with لِـ, or drop it and build the إِضافَة: سافَرَ طَلَبَ العِلْمِ and سافَرَ لِطَلَبِ العِلْمِ are both correct too.
  • تَبَرَّعَ رَغْبَةاً في المُساعَدَةِ -> تَبَرَّعَ رَغْبَةً في المُساعَدَةِ - a word ending in ة never takes the prop alif, and neither does one ending in hamza after a long alif (مَساءً, not *مَساءاً); the tanwīn sits on the last letter itself.
  • اِنْتَشَرَ اِنْتِشارًا النّارِ -> اِنْتَشَرَ اِنْتِشارَ النّارِ - a مُضاف loses its tanwīn. The accusative is still there; it is just a bare fatḥa now.
  • أُحِبُّهُ كُلُّ الحُبِّ -> أُحِبُّهُ كُلَّ الحُبِّ - the stand-in inherits the case of the word it replaces, so كُلَّ is accusative and الحُبِّ is its مُضاف إِلَيْهِ.
  • اِهْتَمَّ اِهْتِمَّامًا -> اِهْتَمَّ اِهْتِمامًا - the doubled radical of a مُضَعَّف verb unpacks in the مَصْدَر. Write no shadda and one long ا.

Tips

  • Two questions sort every accusative مَصْدَر you meet: كَيْفَ / كَمْ مَرَّةً؟ gives المُطْلَق، لِماذا؟ gives لِأَجْلِهِ. Ask before you parse.
  • Do not sprinkle bare تَوْكيد everywhere. In real modern prose the useful shape is مَصْدَر + adjective (تَقَدُّمًا مَلْحوظًا، اِهْتِمامًا بالِغًا), which is how Arabic says what English says with an adverb.
  • Collect the إِضافَة similes as ready phrases - اِنْتِشارَ النّارِ، عَمَلَ المُحْتَرِفينَ، وُقوفَ الجُنودِ. They are the most idiomatic thing here and cannot be built by rule.
  • Learn each heart-مَصْدَر together with the preposition that follows it: خَوْفًا مِنْ، رَغْبَةً في، حِرْصًا عَلى، اِحْتِرامًا لِـ. Half the errors here are the wrong preposition, not the wrong case.
  • When you are unsure whether a noun is “of the heart”, write the safe لِـ paraphrase instead. سافَرَ لِلْعِلاجِ is always right; *سافَرَ العِلاجَ never is.
  • Say the ـً. It is the one ending that survives the pausal form, so pronouncing شُكْرًا، حَقًّا، اِهْتِمامًا correctly costs nothing and immediately sounds native.
  • Reading unvocalized prose, a bare noun straight after a complete verb phrase - no الـ, no preposition - is usually one of these two. Supply the fatḥatān and read on.

B2 61 / 70

The accusative of specification

التَّمْييز

In short

“Twenty students”, “a kilo of honey”, “two years older”, “richer in oil”: in each of these the first word is vague on its own, and a second word arrives to say what is being counted, weighed or compared. English does that four different ways; Arabic does it with one ending. Put the clarifying noun in the accusative, keep it singular, keep it indefinite, and you are done: عِشْرونَ طالِبًا “twenty students”, أَكْبَرُ سِنًّا “older in age”. That accusative is التَّمْييز, “the distinguisher”.

Two things make it worth a lesson of its own. First, you have been using half of it since lesson 26 without a name for it - the counted noun after 11-99 is a تَمْييز. Second, modern written Arabic has concentrated the construction into one very productive frame: an elative plus a تَمْييز - الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا “best-selling”, الأَفْضَلُ أَداءً “best-performing”, أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ إِنْتاجًا “the most productive country”. On the page it looks exactly like a حال from lesson 55, and a short test tells the two apart.

The rule

1. The definition, and the question it answers. التَّمْييز is a noun that removes the vagueness - الإِبْهامُ - of what came just before it. Its question is not “how?” but مِنْ أَيِّ ناحِيَةٍ؟, “in what respect?”. Three properties define it, and the first two never bend:

  • مَنْصوبٌ - accusative; the fatḥatān is the only mark of the relation.
  • نَكِرَةٌ - indefinite. No الـ, no إِضافَة, no attached pronoun.
  • مُفْرَدٌ - singular, whatever the number or gender of the word it explains. The point of the rule is that it never copies anything; a few fillers happen to be plural nouns in their own right (أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ سُكّانًا), and even those agree with nothing.

A fourth property is a very strong tendency rather than a law: the filler is a جامِدٌ noun - a plain noun (ماءً، قَمْحًا، سِنًّا) or a مَصْدَر from lesson 54 (اِجْتِهادًا، إِنْتاجًا، حَرارَةً). A participle in the slot normally points to a حال instead - the press’s frozen مَبيعًا is the one common exception. That is where الحال goes the other way, and section 9 turns it into a test.

2. The two types. Arabic sorts تَمْييز by how much it clarifies:

  • تَمْييزُ المُفْرَدِ (also تَمْييزُ الذّاتِ) clarifies one word right in front of it - a number, a weight, a volume, an area. عِشْرونَ is vague until طالِبًا lands.
  • تَمْييزُ النِّسْبَةِ (also تَمْييزُ الجُمْلَةِ) clarifies the whole clause. In اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًا nothing is vague about الطّالِبُ; what is vague is the claim that he “increased” - increased in what? اجْتِهادًا answers it.

3. Type one: after a quantity. Four families, all behaving identically:

  • العَدَدُ - the numbers. عِشْرونَ طالِبًا، خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَ كِتابًا، اِثْنانِ وأَرْبَعونَ يَوْمًا.
  • الوَزْنُ - weight. كيلوغْرامٌ عَسَلًا، طُنٌّ قَمْحًا.
  • الكَيْلُ - volume and measure. لِتْرٌ زَيْتًا، صُنْدوقٌ بُرْتُقالًا.
  • المِساحَةُ - area and length. هَكْتارٌ قُطْنًا، مِتْرٌ قُماشًا.

Interrogative كَمْ from lesson 15 behaves the same way: كَمْ كِتابًا قَرَأْتَ؟

4. Numbers: a recap, not a new rule. Lessons 26 and 32 gave you the polarity and the three regimes; nothing here changes them. Only the label is new: of the three regimes, 11-99 is the one that puts the counted noun in the accusative, and that is a تَمْييز in this lesson’s technical sense. After 3-10 and after مِائَة / أَلْف the counted noun is genitive as the second term of an إِضافَة, and lesson 26 calls it تَمْييز in the looser sense of “the noun the number counts”.

5. What modern prose actually writes for measures. The accusative after a measure word is correct and you will meet it in careful writing, but today’s default is the preposition مِنْ: كيلو مِنَ العَسَلِ، لِتْرٌ مِنَ الزَّيْتِ، كوبٌ مِنَ الشّايِ. An إِضافَة is just as normal in the shops: كيلوغْرامُ عَسَلٍ. So recognise the accusative and produce مِنْ. The numbers are the exception - عِشْرونَ طالِبًا has no مِنْ variant, and the accusative is obligatory.

6. Type two, converted from the فاعِل. A family of verbs of increase, decrease, filling, overflowing and being-good states the subject first and then names the respect. The traditional analysis is that the تَمْييز was originally the فاعِل and has swapped places with it:

  • اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًا ← اِزْدادَ اجْتِهادُ الطّالِبِ.
  • حَسُنَ الطّالِبُ خُلُقًا ← حَسُنَ خُلُقُ الطّالِبِ.
  • فاضَ النَّهْرُ ماءً ← فاضَ ماءُ النَّهْرِ.
  • اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءً.

The conversion is not something you perform in order to write the sentence; it is a way of seeing why the noun is neither a subject nor an object. What you do need is the verb list, because the construction is lexical: اِزْدادَ، زادَ، اِمْتَلَأَ، فاضَ، حَسُنَ، طابَ، اِشْتَدَّ. زادَ الأَمْرُ تَعْقيدًا “the matter got more complicated” is a staple of Arabic journalism.

7. Type two, converted from the مَفْعولِ بِهِ. The same swap, but with a transitive verb whose object is already in place:

  • زَرَعْتُ الأَرْضَ قَمْحًا ← زَرَعْتُ قَمْحَ الأَرْضِ.
  • مَلَأْتُ الكوبَ ماءً ← مَلَأْتُ ماءَ الكوبِ.

The “original” here is frankly a grammarians’ reconstruction - nobody writes مَلَأْتُ ماءَ الكوبِ. Treat the arrow as a diagnostic, not as a style model.

8. Type two after اسْمِ التَّفْضيلِ - the frame to master. This is where تَمْييز lives in modern Arabic, and it deserves more of your practice time than everything above. An elative from lesson 28 is vague in exactly the way a number is: أَكْبَرُ - bigger in what?

  • Comparative: أَخي أَكْبَرُ سِنًّا مِنّي. The تَمْييز may sit before or after مِنْ: أَكْبَرُ مِنّي سِنًّا is just as good.
  • Superlative with الـ: الرِّوايَةُ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا، الفَريقُ الأَفْضَلُ أَداءً، الطَّريقُ الأَقَلُّ تَكْلِفَةً. This is the press’s standard way of forming an English-style compound adjective.
  • Superlative with an إِضافَة: أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ إِنْتاجًا، أَكْثَرُ المُدُنِ ازْدِحامًا. Note where the accusative falls: the إِضافَة ends at الدُّوَلِ, and the تَمْييز stands outside it with its own fatḥatān.
  • The no-elative repair from lesson 28 §11: adjectives that cannot form أَفْعَلُ are graded with أَكْثَرُ / أَشَدُّ / أَقَلُّ plus their مَصْدَر - أَشَدُّ حَرارَةً، أَكْثَرُ ازْدِحامًا، أَقَلُّ رُطوبَةً. That accusative was always a تَمْييز; now you know why it is there.

Two details catch people out. The elative still takes whatever case the sentence gives it (هُوَ الأَكْثَرُ خِبْرَةً، رَأَيْتُ الأَكْثَرَ خِبْرَةً), while the تَمْييز never moves off the fatḥa. And it never agrees with anything, so a plural changes nothing: الكُتُبُ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا, never *مَبيعاتٍ.

9. Telling it from الحال. Both are indefinite accusatives hanging off the end of a complete sentence, and the deletion test does not separate them - you can drop either. Three things do:

  • Word type. الحال is مُشْتَقّ, a participle or an adjective; التَّمْييز is جامِد, a plain noun or a مَصْدَر. This is the fastest test, and it decides all but a handful of cases.
  • What it describes. الحال describes the doer or the thing; التَّمْييز names the respect in which a statement holds.
  • Agreement. الحال agrees in gender and number; التَّمْييز never does.

The pair to keep in your head: عادَ الجُنودُ مُنْتَصِرينَ - the soldiers came back victorious, a state of theirs, derived, plural to match them. Against اِزْدادَ الجَيْشُ عَدَدًا - the army grew in number, a plain noun naming the dimension, singular whatever the army does.

10. Telling it from the مَفْعولِ بِهِ. اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءً looks like a verb with an object, and learners duly write *اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ الماءَ. Two checks. The verb: اِمْتَلَأَ is لازِم (lesson 30), so there is no object slot to fill. And definiteness: an object may carry الـ, a تَمْييز may not. In مَلَأْتُ الكوبَ ماءً the object slot is visibly taken by الكوبَ, which leaves ماءً no other job.

11. Writing the ending. The same three spellings as in lesson 55: a prop alif on an ordinary consonant (كِتابًا، قَمْحًا), the tanwīn on the ة with no alif (حَرارَةً، تَكْلِفَةً), and the tanwīn on the hamza after a long alif (ماءً، أَداءً). Because the slot is indefinite and copies nothing, no dual or sound-plural ending is ever needed here. And as in the pausal form, the prop-alif spelling survives the pausal form as an audible ā - the ة type has no alif to fall back on and stops as حَرارَهْ - so this is a case ending you will really hear.

One further accusative is still to come: the noun after إِلّا in an exception. That belongs to lesson 62 and follows entirely different rules - do not treat it as a تَمْييز.

Forms & patterns

The two types side by side

النَّوْعWhat it clarifiesمِثالEnglish
تَمْييزُ المُفْرَدِone word: a number or a measureعِشْرونَ طالِبًاtwenty students
تَمْييزُ النِّسْبَةِthe whole clauseاِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًاthe student grew more diligent

Type one: quantities, and what modern prose prefers

The quantityمَعَ التَّمْييزِEnglishUsual modern wording
العَدَدُ 11-99عِشْرونَ طالِبًاtwenty studentsobligatory - no alternative
الوَزْنُكيلوغْرامٌ عَسَلًاa kilogram of honeyكيلو مِنَ العَسَلِ
الكَيْلُلِتْرٌ زَيْتًاa litre of oilلِتْرٌ مِنَ الزَّيْتِ
المِساحَةُهَكْتارٌ قُطْنًاa hectare of cottonهَكْتارٌ مِنَ القُطْنِ
كَمِ الاسْتِفْهامِيَّةُكَمْ كِتابًا قَرَأْتَ؟How many books did you read?obligatory

The numbers - recap only; lesson 26 has the full grid

The numberForm of the counted nounمِثال
3-10plural + مَجْرور (إِضافَة)ثَلاثَةُ كُتُبٍ
11-99singular + مَنْصوب - the تَمْييز of this lessonعِشْرونَ كِتابًا
مِائَة / أَلْفsingular + مَجْرور (إِضافَة)مِائَةُ كِتابٍ

Type two: the conversion that explains the case

الجُمْلَةُ بِالتَّمْييزِأَصْلُهاConverted from
اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًااِزْدادَ اجْتِهادُ الطّالِبِالفاعِل
حَسُنَ الطّالِبُ خُلُقًاحَسُنَ خُلُقُ الطّالِبِالفاعِل
فاضَ النَّهْرُ ماءًفاضَ ماءُ النَّهْرِالفاعِل
زَرَعْتُ الأَرْضَ قَمْحًازَرَعْتُ قَمْحَ الأَرْضِالمَفْعول بِهِ
مَلَأْتُ الكوبَ ماءًمَلَأْتُ ماءَ الكوبِالمَفْعول بِهِ

The verbs that take a تَمْييزُ نِسْبَةٍ

الفِعْلُمِثالEnglish
اِزْدادَاِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًاThe student grew more diligent
زادَزادَ الأَمْرُ تَعْقيدًاThe matter got more complicated
اِمْتَلَأَاِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءًThe cup filled with water
فاضَفاضَ النَّهْرُ ماءًThe river overflowed with water
حَسُنَحَسُنَ الرَّجُلُ خُلُقًاThe man is of fine character
طابَطابَ الضَّيْفُ نَفْسًاThe guest was thoroughly content

The elative frames - the productive core

الإِطارُمِثالEnglish
أَفْعَلُ + تَمْييز + مِنْأَخي أَكْبَرُ سِنًّا مِنّيMy brother is older than me
الأَفْعَلُ + تَمْييزالرِّوايَةُ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًاthe best-selling novel
أَفْعَلُ + إِضافَة + تَمْييزأَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ إِنْتاجًاthe most productive of countries
أَقَلُّ + تَمْييزالطَّريقُ الأَقَلُّ تَكْلِفَةًthe cheapest route
أَشَدُّ / أَكْثَرُ + مَصْدَرالجَوُّ أَشَدُّ حَرارَةًThe weather is hotter

التَّمْييز against الحال

الفَرْقُالحال (lesson 55)التَّمْييز (this lesson)
Word typeمُشْتَقّ - participle or adjectiveجامِد - plain noun or مَصْدَر
Its questionكَيْفَ؟ - in what stateمِنْ أَيِّ ناحِيَةٍ؟ - in what respect
Agreementagrees in gender and numbernever agrees - keeps its own shape
Definitenessنَكِرَةنَكِرَة
Caseمَنْصوبمَنْصوب
مِثالعادَ الجُنودُ مُنْتَصِرينَاِزْدادَ الجَيْشُ عَدَدًا

Writing the accusative ending

التَّمْييزThe word ends inThe ending
كِتابًاa plain consonantـًا with a prop alif
حَرارَةًةtanwīn on the ة, no alif
ماءًء after a long aliftanwīn on the hamza, no alif
نُمُوًّاa doubled وـًا after the shadda

Examples

العربيةEnglish
في الصَّفِّ عِشْرونَ طالِبًا وثَلاثونَ طالِبَةً.There are twenty male and thirty female students in the class.
قَرَأْتُ هٰذا العامَ خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَ كِتابًا.I have read fifteen books this year.
عِنْدَنا في البَيْتِ كيلوغْرامٌ عَسَلًا.We have a kilogram of honey at home.
كَمْ كِتابًا قَرَأْتَ في العُطْلَةِ؟How many books did you read over the holiday?
اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًا بَعْدَ الاِمْتِحانِ الأَوَّلِ.The student became much more diligent after the first exam.
اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءً حَتّى فاضَ.The cup filled with water until it overflowed.
فاضَ النَّهْرُ ماءً بَعْدَ الأَمْطارِ الغَزيرَةِ.The river overflowed after the heavy rains.
زَرَعْتُ الأَرْضَ قَمْحًا في الخَريفِ.I planted the field with wheat in the autumn.
أَخي أَكْبَرُ مِنّي سِنًّا بِثَلاثِ سَنَواتٍ.My brother is three years older than me.
الصّينُ أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ سُكّانًا في العالَمِ.China is the most populous country in the world.
هٰذِهِ الرِّوايَةُ هِيَ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا هٰذا العامَ.This novel is the best-selling one this year.
الجَوُّ في الجَنوبِ أَشَدُّ حَرارَةً وأَقَلُّ رُطوبَةً.The weather in the south is hotter and less humid.
عادَ الجُنودُ مُنْتَصِرينَ، وقَدِ ازْدادَ الجَيْشُ عَدَدًا.The soldiers came back victorious, and the army had grown in number.

Common mistakes

  • عِشْرونَ كُتُبًا -> عِشْرونَ كِتابًا - after 11-99 the تَمْييز is singular. Arabic counts in single items: “twenty as far as a book is concerned”.
  • عِشْرونَ كِتابٌ -> عِشْرونَ كِتابًا - and accusative. The ḍamma turns the noun into a second subject, and the number is left with nothing to specify it.
  • اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ الماءَ -> اِمْتَلَأَ الكوبُ ماءً - a تَمْييز is indefinite, always. اِمْتَلَأَ is intransitive as well, so الماءَ could not be an object either.
  • أَكْثَرُ سُكّانٌ -> أَكْثَرُ سُكّانًا - after an elative the fatḥatān is the only thing linking the two words. Without it the phrase falls apart.
  • أَخي أَكْبَرُ في السِّنِّ -> أَخي أَكْبَرُ سِنًّا - the elative asks for a bare accusative, not a prepositional phrase. (أَكْبَرُ مِنّي في السِّنِّ is heard in modern prose, but the تَمْييز is the frame this lesson trains and the one that always works.)
  • الكُتُبُ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعاتٍ -> الكُتُبُ الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا - a تَمْييز never agrees with anything. Plural owner, singular تَمْييز.
  • اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدًا -> اِزْدادَ الطّالِبُ اجْتِهادًا - the slot takes a جامِد noun, here a مَصْدَر. A participle in it would be read as a حال and say something else.
  • الجَوُّ أَشَدُّ حارًّا -> الجَوُّ أَشَدُّ حَرارَةً - the same point inside the elative frame: convert the adjective to its noun (حارٌّ → حَرارَةٌ) before you put the fatḥa on it.
  • أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ إِنْتاجٍ -> أَكْثَرُ الدُّوَلِ إِنْتاجًا - the إِضافَة stops at الدُّوَلِ. The تَمْييز stands outside it and keeps its own accusative.
  • كيلوغْرامٌ عَسَلٍ -> كيلوغْرامٌ عَسَلًا - pick one structure and finish it: with the tanwīn on the measure word the noun after it is a تَمْييز, as an إِضافَة it is كيلوغْرامُ عَسَلٍ, and in ordinary modern prose it is كيلو مِنَ العَسَلِ.

Tips

  • One question does the recognising: “in what respect?”. If the answer is a bare noun with a fatḥatān and no preposition, you are looking at a تَمْييز.
  • Chant the three properties as one word - singular-indefinite-accusative. Every learner error in this lesson is one of the three going wrong.
  • Put your practice into the elative frame, where the construction actually lives today. Ten ready-made chunks will carry you a long way: أَكْبَرُ سِنًّا، أَكْثَرُ سُكّانًا، أَكْثَرُ اسْتِخْدامًا، الأَكْثَرُ مَبيعًا، الأَفْضَلُ أَداءً، الأَعْلى دَخْلًا، أَشَدُّ حَرارَةً، أَقَلُّ تَكْلِفَةً، أَسْرَعُ نُمُوًّا، أَوْسَعُ انْتِشارًا.
  • For measures, split your skills: produce مِنْ (كوبٌ مِنَ الشّايِ), recognise the accusative (كوبٌ شايًا). Both are correct; one sounds current.
  • The جامِد / مُشْتَقّ test against الحال is quicker than any meaning test. Noun in the slot -> تَمْييز. Participle in the slot -> حال, the elative’s frozen مَبيعًا aside.
  • Say the ـً out loud wherever it is written with a prop alif. Of the three tanwīns it is the one that survives a pause, so it is audible even from a speaker who drops every other case ending.
  • Reading unvocalized text, do not go hunting: تَمْييز has three shapes on the page - after a quantity, after an elative, and after a verb of increase or filling. Everything else parses as something else.
  • Keep إِلّا out of this box. The accusative after an exception is lesson 62 and has its own conditions.

B2 62 / 70

Exception

الاسْتِثْناء

In short

الاسْتِثْناء is how Arabic takes something out of a set: “everyone came except one student”. The machinery is small - a particle, إِلّا, plus two nouns that can stand around it - but the case on the excepted noun is not free. It is decided by the shape of the sentence, and there are only three shapes to recognise. Learn to sort the sentence first, and the ending falls out by itself.

The pay-off is bigger than “except”, because the third shape is one of the two standard ways Modern Standard Arabic says only. Alongside the plain adverb فَقَطْ, written Arabic negates the sentence and puts إِلّا in front of the one thing that survives: ما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابًا = “I read only one book”, literally “I did not read except one book”. That pattern is on every page of a newspaper, and it is the part of this lesson you will use daily.

The rule

1. The three pieces. A full exception sentence has a المُسْتَثْنى مِنْهُ (the set you are taking from), an أَداةُ الاسْتِثْناء (the exception word - إِلّا، غَيْر، سِوى …), and the المُسْتَثْنى (the item taken out, which comes last of the three):

حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ ← المُسْتَثْنى مِنْهُ · إِلّا ← الأَداةُ · طالِبًا ← المُسْتَثْنى

The only question the lesson answers is what ending that last noun carries. Two yes/no questions settle it: is the set named? and is the sentence negative?

2. تامٌّ مُوجَبٌ - set named, no negation: the accusative is obligatory. This is the classic “except” sentence, and it has exactly one possible ending, no matter what case the set is in:

  • حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبًا. - All the students came except one.
  • قَرَأْتُ الكُتُبَ إِلّا كِتابًا. - I read the books except one.
  • سَلَّمْتُ عَلى الطُّلّابِ إِلّا طالِبًا. - I greeted the students except one.

Notice the third example: the set is genitive after عَلى, and the excepted noun is still accusative. The excepted noun is not a تابِع here - it does not copy anything. Grammarians call its ending النَّصْبُ عَلى الاسْتِثْناء, “accusative because it is an exception”, and it is the single most reliable rule in this lesson. If the sentence is positive and the set is there, write a fatḥa.

3. تامٌّ مَنْفِيٌّ - set named, sentence negative: بَدَل is preferred, نَصْب is allowed. Once a negator (ما، لَمْ، لَنْ، لا، لَيْسَ) is in front, the excepted noun may instead be read as a بَدَل from the set - the apposition of lesson 58 - and simply copy the set’s case. That reading is the better one, and the one you should write:

  • ما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبٌ. (بَدَل, nominative like الطُّلّابُ) - also possible: إِلّا طالِبًا.
  • ما مَرَرْتُ بِالطُّلّابِ إِلّا طالِبٍ. (بَدَل, genitive like الطُّلّابِ) - also possible: إِلّا طالِبًا.

The choice is only visible when the set is nominative or genitive. If the set is accusative (ما رَأَيْتُ الطُّلّابَ إِلّا طالِبًا) both analyses produce the same fatḥa and nothing is at stake.

4. مُفَرَّغ - no set named, sentence negative: إِلّا becomes transparent. Delete the set, and the verb is left “emptied” (مُفَرَّغ) of its complement. The noun after إِلّا then falls into that empty slot and takes the case its own job in the sentence demands, exactly as if إِلّا were not written. Cover إِلّا with a finger and read the sentence: the ending you get is the right one.

  • ما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ. - the noun is the فاعِل, so مَرْفوع.
  • ما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابًا. - the noun is the مَفْعولٌ بِهِ, so مَنْصوب.
  • ما سَلَّمْتُ إِلّا عَلى طالِبٍ. - the slot is a prepositional phrase, so إِلّا stands in front of the whole phrase and عَلى does the governing: مَجْرور.
  • ما هٰذا إِلّا خَبَرٌ قَديمٌ. - the noun is the خَبَر of a nominal sentence, so مَرْفوع.
  • لا أَعْمَلُ إِلّا صَباحًا. - an adverbial slot (lesson 31), so مَنْصوب.

This is the shape that means “only”, and it is the centre of the lesson. Everything except the case is fixed: negator + verb + إِلّا + the one surviving element.

5. What licenses a مُفَرَّغ clause. Any negation will do - ما، لَمْ، لَنْ، لا، لَيْسَ (lessons 23 and 42) - and so will a prohibition (لا تَثِقْ إِلّا بِنَفْسِكَ) or a rhetorical question that expects “no one” for an answer (هَلْ يَنْجَحُ إِلّا المُجْتَهِدُ؟). What you cannot do is build one in a plain affirmative sentence: حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ is not Arabic. For an affirmative “only”, use فَقَطْ, or إِنَّما at the head of the sentence (lesson 68): حَضَرَ طالِبٌ فَقَطْ / إِنَّما حَضَرَ طالِبٌ واحِدٌ.

6. لَيْسَ … إِلّا, and فَقَطْ. لَيْسَ negates like any other negator and licenses the same مُفَرَّغ pattern - لَيْسَ في الغُرْفَةِ إِلّا كُرْسِيٌّ (اسْمُ لَيْسَ، مَرْفوعٌ)، لَسْتُ إِلّا مُوَظَّفًا (خَبَرُ لَيْسَ، مَنْصوبٌ). Separately, لَيْسَ إِلّا is a frozen tag dropped at the end of a sentence to mean “and nothing more”: مُلاحَظَةٌ صَغيرَةٌ، لَيْسَ إِلّا. Nothing follows it and nothing changes shape. فَقَطْ is the plain modern adverb “only”; it is indeclinable, ends in a sukūn, and stands after the element it limits: قَرَأْتُ صَفْحَةً واحِدَةً فَقَطْ. Use one device or the other - stacking ما … إِلّا with فَقَطْ is a beginner’s tautology.

7. غَيْر and سِوى: nouns, not particles. These say the same thing as إِلّا, but they are nouns, so they behave in two layers at once:

  • The case on غَيْر / سِوى itself is the case إِلّا’s noun would have taken. Same three sentence types, same decision: حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرَ طالِبٍ (تامٌّ مُوجَبٌ → نَصْبٌ)، ما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرُ طالِبٍ (تامٌّ مَنْفِيٌّ → بَدَلٌ)، ما حَضَرَ غَيْرُ طالِبٍ (مُفَرَّغٌ، فاعِلٌ → رَفْعٌ)، ما قَرَأْتُ غَيْرَ كِتابٍ (مُفَرَّغٌ، مَفْعولٌ بِهِ → نَصْبٌ)، ما سَلَّمْتُ عَلى غَيْرِ طالِبٍ (مَجْرورٌ بِـعَلى).
  • What follows them is مَجْرور, every time a noun follows, because غَيْر/سِوى is the first term of an إِضافَة (lesson 20) and the excepted noun is its مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ: غَيْرُ طالِبٍ، غَيْرَ الطّالِبِ، سِوى يَوْمَيْنِ.

Two layers, two independent decisions. Learners who freeze غَيْرَ in the accusative get the second layer right and the first one wrong.

8. سِوى shows nothing. سِوى is an اسْمٌ مَقْصورٌ - it ends in ى, so its ending is مُقَدَّر (lesson 41): invisible on the page and inaudible in speech, in all three cases. That makes it comfortable to use, since there is no ending to get wrong, but the noun after it is still a genitive you must vocalize: لَمْ يَبْقَ سِوى يَوْمَيْنِ عَلى الامْتِحانِ (genitive dual, not يَوْمانِ).

9. بِاسْتِثْناءِ، ما عَدا، ما خَلا. Modern prose has three more ways of saying it:

  • بِاسْتِثْناءِ + genitive - a compound preposition, and the safest thing to write, because the following noun is a مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ every single time: حَضَرَ الجَميعُ بِاسْتِثْناءِ طالِبٍ.
  • ما عَدا / ما خَلا + accusative - here عَدا and خَلا are verbs and the noun after them is their مَفْعولٌ بِهِ: نَجَحوا جَميعًا ما عَدا واحِدًا. The press variant فيما عَدا works identically: المَكْتَبُ مَفْتوحٌ فيما عَدا الجُمُعَةَ.
  • Without ما, عَدا and خَلا may be read either as verbs (accusative) or as prepositions (genitive), so both حَضَرَ الجَميعُ عَدا طالِبًا and عَدا طالِبٍ are correct. Write ما عَدا and the ambiguity disappears.

10. One thing this lesson is not: إِلّا أَنَّ. When إِلّا is followed by أَنَّ it is not excepting anything - it is the connector “however, except that”: الفِكْرَةُ جَيِّدَةٌ، إِلّا أَنَّها مُكْلِفَةٌ. That belongs with the discourse connectors of lesson 66. A different thing again is الاسْتِثْناءُ المُنْقَطِع, where the excepted item is not a member of the set at all (وَصَلَ المُسافِرونَ إِلّا حَقائِبَهُمْ). It is not confined to older Arabic, and its noun is accusative whatever the shape of the sentence - but لٰكِنْ or بَلْ says the same thing more plainly.

Forms & patterns

The whole decision, in one table. Sort the sentence, then read off the ending:

النَّوْعالشَّرْطحُكْمُ المُسْتَثْنىمِثال
تامٌّ مُوجَبٌالمُسْتَثْنى مِنْهُ مَذْكورٌ، لا نَفْيَالنَّصْبُ واجِبٌحَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبًا
تامٌّ مَنْفِيٌّالمُسْتَثْنى مِنْهُ مَذْكورٌ، مَعَ النَّفْيِبَدَلٌ (الأَفْضَل) أَوِ النَّصْبُما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبٌ / طالِبًا
ناقِصٌ مُفَرَّغٌلا مُسْتَثْنى مِنْهُ، مَعَ النَّفْيِحَسَبَ مَوْقِعِهِ مِنَ الجُمْلَةِما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ

The مُفَرَّغ pattern across the slots - this is the “only” table:

المَوْقِعالجُمْلَةالحالَةEnglish
فاعِلما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ.مَرْفوعOnly one student came.
نائِبُ فاعِلٍلَمْ يُنْشَرْ إِلّا تَقْريرٌ واحِدٌ.مَرْفوعOnly one report was published.
خَبَرما هٰذا إِلّا خَبَرٌ قَديمٌ.مَرْفوعThis is nothing but old news.
اسْمُ لَيْسَلَيْسَ في الغُرْفَةِ إِلّا كُرْسِيٌّ.مَرْفوعThere is only a chair in the room.
مَفْعولٌ بِهِما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابًا.مَنْصوبI read only one book.
خَبَرُ لَيْسَلَسْتُ إِلّا مُوَظَّفًا.مَنْصوبI am only an employee.
ظَرْفلا أَعْمَلُ إِلّا صَباحًا.مَنْصوبI work only in the morning.
جارٌّ ومَجْرورٌما سَلَّمْتُ إِلّا عَلى طالِبٍ.مَجْرور بِـعَلىI greeted only one student.

The same three types with إِلّا، غَيْر and سِوى side by side. Read the columns downwards: only the first word of the pair changes case, and the second is always genitive after غَيْر/سِوى.

النَّوْعبِـ«إِلّا»بِـ«غَيْر»بِـ«سِوى»
تامٌّ مُوجَبٌحَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبًاحَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرَ طالِبٍحَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ سِوى طالِبٍ
تامٌّ مَنْفِيٌّما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبٌما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرُ طالِبٍما حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ سِوى طالِبٍ
مُفَرَّغ - فاعِلما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌما حَضَرَ غَيْرُ طالِبٍما حَضَرَ سِوى طالِبٍ
مُفَرَّغ - مَفْعولٌ بِهِما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابًاما قَرَأْتُ غَيْرَ كِتابٍما قَرَأْتُ سِوى كِتابٍ
مُفَرَّغ - بَعْدَ حَرْفِ جَرٍّما سَلَّمْتُ إِلّا عَلى طالِبٍما سَلَّمْتُ عَلى غَيْرِ طالِبٍما سَلَّمْتُ عَلى سِوى طالِبٍ

The remaining exception words, sorted by what they do to the noun after them:

الأَداةما بَعْدَهامِثال
بِاسْتِثْناءِمَجْرور (مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ)حَضَرَ الجَميعُ بِاسْتِثْناءِ طالِبٍ.
ما عَدامَنْصوب (مَفْعولٌ بِهِ)نَجَحوا جَميعًا ما عَدا واحِدًا.
ما خَلامَنْصوب (مَفْعولٌ بِهِ)أُغْلِقَتِ المَكاتِبُ ما خَلا مَكْتَبًا.
فيما عَدامَنْصوب (مَفْعولٌ بِهِ)المَكْتَبُ مَفْتوحٌ فيما عَدا الجُمُعَةَ.
عَدا / خَلا (بِلا «ما»)مَنْصوب أَوْ مَجْرورحَضَرَ الجَميعُ عَدا طالِبًا / عَدا طالِبٍ.

Left out on purpose: حاشا, the third verb of this family, which survives in MSA chiefly in the fixed exclamation حاشا لِلهِ and is not worth a rule; and the classical liberty of putting the excepted noun before the set, which modern prose rarely takes.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
وَصَلَ المُوَظَّفونَ كُلُّهُمْ إِلّا واحِدًا.All the employees arrived except one.
زُرْتُ المُدُنَ الكُبْرى إِلّا مَدينَةً واحِدَةً.I visited the big cities except one.
ما نَجَحَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبٌ مِنْ عِشْرينَ.None of the students passed except one out of twenty.
ما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبانِ رَغْمَ الإِعْلانِ.Only two students came, in spite of the announcement.
لا يَعْرِفُ الحَقيقَةَ إِلّا المُديرُ.Only the manager knows the truth.
ما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا نِصْفَ الرِّوايَةِ.I read only half the novel.
لَمْ أَتَحَدَّثْ إِلّا عَنِ المَشْروعِ.I spoke only about the project.
ما جِئْتُ إِلّا لِأَشْكُرَكُمْ.I came only to thank you.
هٰذا رَأْيٌ شَخْصِيٌّ، لَيْسَ إِلّا.This is a personal opinion, nothing more.
لَسْتُ إِلّا قارِئًا عادِيًّا.I am only an ordinary reader.
لَمْ يَحْضُرِ الاجْتِماعَ غَيْرُ المُديرِ.Only the manager attended the meeting.
اِنْتَهَتِ الأَعْمالُ غَيْرَ عَمَلٍ واحِدٍ.The tasks are finished except one.
لَمْ يَبْقَ سِوى يَوْمَيْنِ عَلى الامْتِحانِ.Only two days are left before the exam.
فُتِحَتِ الأَبْوابُ بِاسْتِثْناءِ البابِ الخَلْفِيِّ.The doors were opened except the back door.

Common mistakes

  • حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبٌ -> حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ إِلّا طالِبًا - the sentence is positive and the set is named, so the accusative is obligatory. This is the one case with no alternative.
  • ما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبًا -> ما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ - in a مُفَرَّغ clause إِلّا governs nothing. The noun is the subject of حَضَرَ, so it is nominative.
  • ما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابٌ -> ما قَرَأْتُ إِلّا كِتابًا - the same rule pulling the other way: here the noun is the object of قَرَأْتُ, so it is accusative. Read the slot, not the particle.
  • ما سَلَّمْتُ إِلّا طالِبًا -> ما سَلَّمْتُ إِلّا عَلى طالِبٍ - إِلّا does not swallow the preposition. سَلَّمَ still needs عَلى (lesson 30), and إِلّا goes in front of the whole phrase.
  • حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ -> ما حَضَرَ إِلّا طالِبٌ / حَضَرَ طالِبٌ فَقَطْ - the مُفَرَّغ pattern needs a negation to empty the slot. Without one, use فَقَطْ.
  • ما حَضَرَ غَيْرَ طالِبٍ -> ما حَضَرَ غَيْرُ طالِبٍ - غَيْر is not frozen in the accusative. It occupies the فاعِل slot here, so it is nominative.
  • حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرُ طالِبٍ -> حَضَرَ الطُّلّابُ غَيْرَ طالِبٍ - and the same word in a positive complete sentence takes the accusative that إِلّا’s noun would have taken.
  • ما حَضَرَ غَيْرُ طالِبٌ -> ما حَضَرَ غَيْرُ طالِبٍ - whatever case غَيْر itself is in, the noun after it is a مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ and is always genitive.
  • لَمْ يَبْقَ سِوى يَوْمانِ -> لَمْ يَبْقَ سِوى يَوْمَيْنِ - سِوى shows no ending of its own, but it is still a مُضاف, and a genitive dual is يَوْمَيْنِ.
  • ما عَدا طالِبٍ / بِاسْتِثْناءِ طالِبًا -> ما عَدا طالِبًا / بِاسْتِثْناءِ طالِبٍ - the two are mirror images: ما عَدا is a verb and takes an object, بِاسْتِثْناءِ is a construct and takes a genitive.

Tips

  • Two questions, in this order: is the set named? is the sentence negative? Named + positive = fatḥa, no thinking. Named + negative = copy the set’s case. Not named = read the slot.
  • For the مُفَرَّغ type, physically cover ما … إِلّا with two fingers and read what is left: حَضَرَ … طالِبٌ، قَرَأْتُ … كِتابًا. The ending that sounds right without إِلّا is the right one.
  • Translate ما … إِلّا as “only”, not as “not … except”. The literal reading is what makes learners hesitate over the case; the “only” reading makes the slot obvious.
  • Pick one device per sentence. ما … إِلّا or فَقَطْ or بِاسْتِثْناءِ - never two at once.
  • غَيْر does two jobs you now know: negating a following noun or adjective (غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ, lesson 23) and excepting. The mechanics are identical - it is a مُضاف both times.
  • سِوى and بِاسْتِثْناءِ are the low-risk choices when you are writing under pressure: neither asks you to compute an ending on the excepted noun beyond “genitive”.
  • Spelling watch, especially in unvocalized text: إِلّا (except, only), إِلى (to), and أَلّا (أَنْ + لا, “that … not”, lesson 34) are three different words with three different shapes.
  • Do not over-use the frozen لَيْسَ إِلّا. It is a light conversational tag; in a report, a plain فَقَطْ is better.

B2 63 / 70

Negation as a system

أَساليبُ النَّفْي

In short

You have met the negators one at a time and in different lessons: لا، لَيْسَ and غَيْر in 28, ما، لَمْ، لَنْ in 42, ما زالَ among the sisters of كانَ in 48. Each arrived with the structure it needed. The result is that most learners can produce every negator and still hesitate over which one a given sentence wants. This lesson does one thing: it lays the whole set on a single axis - what the negator governs, and what time it points at - so that the choice becomes mechanical.

Two devices are new here, and they are the ones that separate a learner’s Arabic from written Arabic. The first is عَدَم + مَصْدَر, the standard way a newspaper negates an event without using a verb at all: عَدَمُ الالْتِزامِ “non-compliance”. The second is لا النّافِيَةُ لِلْجِنْس, the لا that takes a bare indefinite noun with a fatḥa and no tanwīn - لا شَكَّ، لا مانِعَ - and denies the whole category. Everything else on this page you have seen; the job is to stop treating the pieces as separate lessons.

The rule

1. One axis, nine slots. Every negator in MSA answers two questions: what kind of word comes after it, and what ending that word must wear. Time reference follows from the pair. The master table below is the lesson; these paragraphs explain the entries that still cost errors.

2. لا + المُضارِع المَرْفوع - the present and the general. لا يَعْمَلُ هُنا “he does not work here”. The verb keeps its ḍamma, or its نَ in الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَة: لا يَعْمَلونَ. It also negates standing truths and rules - لا تَقْبَلُ الشَّرِكَةُ الدَّفْعَ نَقْدًا - which is why it dominates in regulations and manuals.

3. ما + الماضي - the past, with nothing moved. ما وَصَلَتِ الرِّسالَةُ. The past verb is مَبْنِيّ, so no particle can bend its ending. This is fully correct MSA, slightly weightier than لَمْ, and it is the safe fallback when the jussive fails you mid-sentence. (You will also meet ما in front of a مُضارِع in older and more formal prose - ما أَعْرِفُ. Read it; write لا.)

4. لَمْ + المُضارِع المَجْزوم - the default past of written Arabic. لَمْ يَصِلْ، لَمْ يَقُلْ، لَمْ يَمْشِ، لَمْ يَصِلوا. Past meaning, present-shaped verb: the particle carries the time by itself. In a news report the ratio to ما is not close - لَمْ is simply what “did not” looks like in print.

5. لَمّا + المَجْزوم - “not yet”, with the door still open. لَمّا يَصْدُرِ القَرارُ “the decision has not been issued yet”. Two things separate it from لَمْ. Its negation runs uninterrupted from the past up to the moment you are speaking, and it carries an expectation: the event is still awaited. لَمْ يَصْدُرِ القَرارُ merely reports a fact about the past. Because “yet” is already inside لَمّا, do not add بَعْدُ to it; بَعْدُ belongs with لَمْ - لَمْ يَصْدُرْ بَعْدُ, which is the everyday way to say the same thing. Beware the homograph: لَمّا + a past verb is the completely different لَمّا “when” (لَمّا وَصَلَ، اِتَّصَلَ بي “when he arrived, he called me”).

6. لَنْ + المُضارِع المَنْصوب - the future. لَنْ نَقْبَلَ, with a fatḥa; حَذْفُ النّون in الأَفْعالُ الخَمْسَة: لَنْ يَقْبَلوا. لَنْ usually reads as firmer than a merely negated future, but it does not by itself mean “never”: the old claim that it negates for ever (التَّأْبيد) was rejected by the grammarians, and لَنْ يُسافِرَ اليَوْمَ is an ordinary “he will not travel today”. It never takes سَـ or سَوْفَ in front of it.

7. In unvocalized text, the particle is the only evidence. لَمْ يَكْتُبْ and لَنْ يَكْتُبَ differ in the vowel on the last letter, and that vowel is invisible in ordinary Arabic writing. Both appear as لم يكتب / لن يكتب. So when you read, do not look at the verb for the tense - read the particle: م means past, ن means future. Only two verb classes leak the difference into the consonants themselves: hollow verbs (لم يقل vs لن يقول) and weak-final verbs (لم يمش vs لن يمشي), where the jussive amputates a letter that the subjunctive keeps.

8. لَيْسَ - the negator of the verbless sentence, with a مَنْصوب predicate. A جُمْلَة اسْمِيَّة has no verb for لا to attach to, so لَيْسَ supplies one. It takes the old مُبْتَدَأ as its اسْم (still مَرْفوع) and turns the خَبَر مَنْصوب:

الجَوُّ جَميلٌ. -> لَيْسَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا.

The alternative with a redundant بِـ is common and completely standard; the بِـ then governs the predicate, so it appears in the genitive and the meaning is unchanged: لَيْسَ الأَمْرُ بِسَهْلٍ = لَيْسَ الأَمْرُ سَهْلًا. Note the frames built on it: لَيْسَ مِنَ السَّهْلِ أَنْ نَتَّفِقَ “it is not easy to agree”, لَيْسَ هُناكَ ما يَدْعو لِلْقَلَقِ “there is nothing to worry about”. And if the predicate is a شِبْه جُمْلَة there is nothing to put in the accusative at all: لَيْسَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ - وَقْتٌ is the delayed subject, not the predicate.

9. لَيْسَ is conjugated, and it has no past. لَسْتُ، لَسْنا، لَيْسوا, and the rest of the table below. It is shaped like a past verb but means the present. For the past you borrow كانَ: ما كانَ مُدَرِّسًا / لَمْ يَكُنْ مُدَرِّسًا, predicate still مَنْصوب. For the future: لَنْ يَكونَ مُدَرِّسًا.

10. غَيْر negates a word, not a sentence. غَيْر is a noun meaning “other than”, and it builds an إِضافَة, so the word behind it is مَجْرور and frozen there: غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ، إِجْراءٌ غَيْرُ قانونِيٍّ، مَعْلوماتٌ غَيْرُ دَقيقَةٍ. غَيْر itself declines according to its own slot: هٰذا غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ / في وَقْتٍ غَيْرِ مُناسِبٍ / قَرَأْتُ تَقْريرًا غَيْرَ مُفيدٍ. Annexed to a definite noun it describes a definite one: الدُّوَلُ غَيْرُ الأَعْضاءِ “the non-member states”. Where English prefixes “un-”, “in-” or “non-”, غَيْر is usually what Arabic reaches for - though عَدَم below, and the لا- prefix, cover part of the same ground.

11. عَدَم + مَصْدَر - how modern prose negates an event. عَدَمٌ is a noun, “absence, non-existence”. Put a مَصْدَر (lesson 54) behind it in an إِضافَة and you have negated the event without conjugating anything: عَدَمُ الالْتِزامِ “non-compliance”, عَدَمُ الاسْتِقْرارِ “instability”, عَدَمُ تَوَفُّرِ البَياناتِ “the unavailability of the data”. This matters because Arabic prefers noun phrases exactly where English prefers clauses, and the slots that demand a noun - after a preposition above all - cannot take a negated verb directly:

  • بِسَبَبِ عَدَمِ تَوَفُّرِ البَياناتِ - “because the data were not available”.
  • في حالَةِ عَدَمِ الدَّفْعِ - “in case of non-payment”.
  • أَعْلَنَتِ الوِزارَةُ عَدَمَ وُجودِ خَطَرٍ - “the ministry announced that there was no danger”.

The one iron rule: عَدَم takes a مَصْدَر, never a verb. If you cannot name the مَصْدَر, use a verb clause instead (بِسَبَبِ أَنَّ البَياناتِ لَمْ تَتَوَفَّرْ) rather than inventing a form.

12. لا النّافِيَةُ لِلْجِنْس - “no … at all”. This لا denies a whole category, not one instance. Its noun must be indefinite, must follow it immediately, and is مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الفَتْح - a bare fatḥa with no tanwīn and no ال:

لا شَكَّ، لا بَأْسَ، لا مانِعَ، لا بُدَّ، لا أَحَدَ، لا شَيْءَ، لا فائِدَةَ، لا مَجالَ.

The missing tanwīn is the whole visible signal, and it is what learners drop. The predicate is usually just left out - لا شَكَّ is a complete sentence - or continued with أَنَّ or a preposition: لا شَكَّ أَنَّ الوَضْعَ تَغَيَّرَ، لا بُدَّ مِنْ إِصْلاحٍ، لا عَلاقَةَ لَهُ بِالمَوْضوعِ، لا أَحَدَ في المَكْتَبِ. If the noun is itself annexed it stops being مَبْنِيّ and takes an ordinary accusative: لا رَجُلَ في الغُرْفَةِ but لا طالِبَ عِلْمٍ يَكْرَهُ القِراءَةَ.

Separately, modern Arabic also uses لا as a prefix on nouns and nisba adjectives, the way English uses “non-”: اللاعُنْفُ “non-violence”, اللامَرْكَزِيَّةُ “decentralization”, جِهازٌ لاسِلْكِيٌّ “a wireless device” - recognise it as vocabulary; it is word-formation, not a slot in the system above.

13. لَمْ يَعُدْ “no longer” and ما زالَ / لا يَزالُ “still”. عادَ يَعودُ “to return” turns into an auxiliary of ceasing: لَمْ يَعُدْ + a مُضارِع verb, or + a noun, means “no longer”. It is a hollow verb, so the jussive shortens: لَمْ أَعُدْ، لَمْ نَعُدْ، لَمْ تَعُدْ، لَمْ يَعودوا. لَمْ يَعُدْ يَعْمَلُ هُنا “he no longer works here”، لَمْ تَعُدْ هُناكَ حاجَةٌ إِلى ذٰلِكَ “there is no longer any need for that”. ما عادَ means the same.

Its mirror image is ما زالَ, one of the sisters of كانَ (lesson 43): a negator plus “to cease”, so the whole thing means “still”, and its predicate is مَنْصوب - ما زالَ الوَضْعُ صَعْبًا. The pairing is fixed: ما goes with the past زالَ, لا goes with the present يَزالُ. لا يَزالُ البَحْثُ مُسْتَمِرًّا. لا زالَ does exist, but as a wish - لا زِلْتَ بِخَيْرٍ “may you always be well” - not as “still”.

14. قَطُّ looks backwards, أَبَدًا looks forwards. Both translate as “never”, and they are not interchangeable. قَطُّ attaches only to a negated past: ما زُرْتُ اليابانَ قَطُّ / لَمْ أَزُرِ اليابانَ قَطُّ “I have never visited Japan”. أَبَدًا attaches to the future or to an open-ended present: لَنْ أَنْسى هٰذا أَبَدًا “I will never forget this”. And بَعْدُ, “yet”, attaches to لَمْ: لَمْ يَصِلْ بَعْدُ. It is مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الضَّمّ - the ḍamma is not a case ending and never changes.

15. Not in this lesson. ما and لا have lives outside negation - the relative ما, the لا that answers a question, the ما that means nothing after another particle. Those are lesson 68; the exclamatory ما أَجْمَلَ is lesson 64, next. Here every ما and every لا is a plain negator.

Forms & patterns

The system on one table. This is the page to memorise.

الأَداةWhat follows itEnding it forcesTime reference
لافِعْل مُضارِعمَرْفوع: ـُ / ـونَpresent, habitual, general
مافِعْل ماضٍnone (the past is مَبْنِيّ)past
لَمْفِعْل مُضارِعمَجْزوم: ـْ / حَذْفpast (the default in writing)
لَمّافِعْل مُضارِعمَجْزوم: ـْ / حَذْفpast up to now: “not yet”, still expected
لَنْفِعْل مُضارِعمَنْصوب: ـَ / حَذْفُ النّونfuture
لَيْسَجُمْلَة اسْمِيَّةخَبَر مَنْصوب (or بِـ + مَجْرور)present (no past of its own)
غَيْراسْم أو صِفَةمَجْرور (مُضاف إِلَيْه)tenseless: negates a word
عَدَممَصْدَرمَجْرور (مُضاف إِلَيْه)tenseless: negates an event
لا النّافِيَةُ لِلْجِنْسنَكِرَةمَبْنِيّ عَلى الفَتْح, no tanwīnpresent, absolute

One verb through the verbal negators. Read each row across; the last two rows are the ones where لَمْ and لَنْ produce an identical verb form.

المُضارِعلامالَمْلَنْ
يَكْتُبُلا يَكْتُبُما كَتَبَلَمْ يَكْتُبْلَنْ يَكْتُبَ
يَقولُلا يَقولُما قالَلَمْ يَقُلْلَنْ يَقولَ
يَمْشيلا يَمْشيما مَشىلَمْ يَمْشِلَنْ يَمْشِيَ
يَكْتُبونَلا يَكْتُبونَما كَتَبوالَمْ يَكْتُبوالَنْ يَكْتُبوا
يَكْتُبْنَلا يَكْتُبْنَما كَتَبْنَلَمْ يَكْتُبْنَلَنْ يَكْتُبْنَ

لَيْسَ conjugated. The duals لَسْتُما، لَيْسا، لَيْسَتا are left out; they follow the past-tense pattern of lesson 18 exactly.

الضَّميرلَيْسَمِثال
أَنالَسْتُلَسْتُ مُسْتَعِدًّا.
أَنْتَلَسْتَلَسْتَ وَحْدَكَ.
أَنْتِلَسْتِلَسْتِ مُتَأَخِّرَةً.
هُوَلَيْسَلَيْسَ مَوْجودًا.
هِيَلَيْسَتْلَيْسَتْ جاهِزَةً.
نَحْنُلَسْنالَسْنا مَسْؤولينَ.
أَنْتُمْلَسْتُمْلَسْتُمْ مُلْزَمينَ بِذٰلِكَ.
أَنْتُنَّلَسْتُنَّلَسْتُنَّ مَعْنِيّاتٍ بِالأَمْرِ.
هُمْلَيْسوالَيْسوا مِنْ هُنا.
هُنَّلَسْنَلَسْنَ مُشارِكاتٍ.

The three nominal devices side by side.

الأَداةShapeمِثالEnglish
غَيْر+ اسْم مَجْرورقَرارٌ غَيْرُ نِهائِيٍّa non-final decision
غَيْر+ اسْم مَجْرورغَيْرُ قانونِيٍّillegal, unlawful
عَدَم+ مَصْدَر مَجْرورعَدَمُ الالْتِزامِnon-compliance
عَدَم+ مَصْدَر مَجْرورعَدَمُ تَوَفُّرِ البَياناتِthe unavailability of the data
لا الجِنْس+ نَكِرَة بِالفَتْحلا مانِعَthere is no objection
لا الجِنْس+ نَكِرَة بِالفَتْحلا بُدَّ مِنْ حَلٍّa solution is unavoidable
لا السّابِقَةprefixed to a nounاللامَرْكَزِيَّةُdecentralization

Examples

العربيةEnglish
لا أُوافِقُ عَلى هٰذا القَرارِ.I do not agree with this decision.
لَمْ تَنْشُرِ الجَريدَةُ الخَبَرَ أَمْسِ.The newspaper did not publish the news yesterday.
لَمّا تَنْتَهِ المُفاوَضاتُ.The negotiations are not over yet.
لَنْ نَقْبَلَ هٰذِهِ الشُّروطَ.We will not accept these conditions.
لَيْسَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا اليَوْمَ.The weather is not nice today.
لَيْسوا مَسْؤولينَ عَنِ التَّأْخيرِ.They are not responsible for the delay.
هٰذا الإِجْراءُ غَيْرُ قانونِيٍّ.This measure is illegal.
اِعْتَذَرَتِ الشَّرِكَةُ عَنْ عَدَمِ الالْتِزامِ بِالمَواعيدِ.The company apologised for not keeping to the deadlines.
تَأَجَّلَ الاجْتِماعُ بِسَبَبِ عَدَمِ تَوَفُّرِ البَياناتِ.The meeting was postponed because the data were not available.
لا شَكَّ أَنَّ الوَضْعَ قَدْ تَغَيَّرَ.There is no doubt that the situation has changed.
لَمْ يَعُدْ يَسْكُنُ في هٰذِهِ المَدينَةِ.He no longer lives in this city.
لا يَزالُ البَحْثُ مُسْتَمِرًّا.The research is still ongoing.
ما دَخَلْتُ ذٰلِكَ المَبْنى قَطُّ.I have never entered that building.
لَنْ أَنْسى هٰذا اليَوْمَ أَبَدًا.I will never forget this day.

Common mistakes

  • لَمْ أَذْهَبُ -> لَمْ أَذْهَبْ - لَمْ demands the مَجْزوم. The ḍamma of the ordinary مُضارِع has to go; a sukūn takes its place.
  • لَنْ أَذْهَبْ -> لَنْ أَذْهَبَ - the mirror error. لَنْ demands the مَنْصوب, a fatḥa. Drill the pair together: لَمْ أَذْهَبْ / لَنْ أَذْهَبَ.
  • لَيْسَ الجَوُّ جَميلٌ -> لَيْسَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا - لَيْسَ leaves its اسْم مَرْفوع and puts its خَبَر مَنْصوب. The fatḥa-tanwīn is audible even at a pause, so this one is heard.
  • أَنا لَيْسَ مُتَأَكِّدًا -> لَسْتُ مُتَأَكِّدًا - لَيْسَ must be conjugated like a past verb. An unchanged لَيْسَ with a first-person or feminine subject is simply not Arabic.
  • لا شَكٌّ -> لا شَكَّ - the noun after لا النّافِيَة لِلْجِنْس is مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الفَتْح and loses its tanwīn entirely. Same for لا بَأْسَ، لا مانِعَ، لا أَحَدَ.
  • غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٌ -> غَيْرُ مُمْكِنٍ - غَيْر is a noun heading an إِضافَة, so what follows is مُضاف إِلَيْه and therefore مَجْرور, whatever case غَيْر itself is in.
  • بِسَبَبِ عَدَمِ تَتَوَفَّرُ البَياناتُ -> بِسَبَبِ عَدَمِ تَوَفُّرِ البَياناتِ - عَدَم annexes a مَصْدَر, never a conjugated verb. If the مَصْدَر will not come, rewrite with a clause.
  • لا يَعودُ يَسْكُنُ هُنا -> لَمْ يَعُدْ يَسْكُنُ هُنا - “no longer” is built on the negated عادَ, and the standard form is the jussive لَمْ يَعُدْ, with the hollow vowel gone.
  • لا زالَ الوَضْعُ صَعْبًا -> لا يَزالُ الوَضْعُ صَعْبًا / ما زالَ الوَضْعُ صَعْبًا - the halves are fixed: ما with the past زالَ, لا with the present يَزالُ. Mixing them is the commonest slip in this pair.
  • لَنْ أَنْساهُ قَطُّ -> لَنْ أَنْساهُ أَبَدًا - قَطُّ only ever follows a negated past. For anything future or open-ended the word is أَبَدًا.

Tips

  • Learn the master table as a set of pairs, not a list: لا/مَرْفوع، لَمْ/مَجْزوم، لَنْ/مَنْصوب، لَيْسَ/خَبَر مَنْصوب، غَيْر وعَدَم/مَجْرور، لا الجِنْس/فَتْحة بِلا تَنْوين. The ending is the memory hook; the meaning follows it.
  • When you read, take the tense from the particle, never from the verb: لم = past, لن = future, and the verb behind both is a مُضارِع either way.
  • A three-second self-check before you negate: is there a verb? If no, you need لَيْسَ, غَيْر, عَدَم or لا الجِنْس. If yes, what time? - then pick from لا / ما / لَمْ / لَنْ.
  • When you want to sound like the press, look for the noun: “because they did not attend” becomes بِسَبَبِ عَدَمِ حُضورِهِمْ, not a negated verb clause. Turn five negated verbs a day into عَدَم + مَصْدَر.
  • Treat لا النّافِيَة لِلْجِنْس as vocabulary, not as a productive rule. Learn لا شَكَّ، لا بُدَّ، لا بَأْسَ، لا مانِعَ، لا أَحَدَ، لا شَيْءَ as whole phrases and you will get the missing tanwīn right automatically.
  • Keep ما + الماضي as your emergency exit. If the jussive of an awkward verb deserts you mid-sentence, ما plus the past verb you already know is correct Arabic, not a shortcut.
  • Two adverbs, two directions: قَطُّ backwards, أَبَدًا forwards, and بَعْدُ with لَمْ.
  • Do not chase the fancy uses of ما and لا yet - the ones where a negation is really an emphasis or an exclamation. They are lessons 64 and 73, and they only make sense once the plain system here is automatic.

B2 64 / 70

Wonder and exclamation

أُسْلوبُ التَّعَجُّب

In short

English expresses wonder by reshuffling a sentence: “how beautiful the sky is!”, “what a day that was!”. Arabic does it with two fixed formulas, and the striking thing about them is that both are قِياسِيّ - regular. You do not learn a list of exclamations; you take a root, pour it into ما أَفْعَلَهُ or أَفْعِلْ بِهِ, and the exclamation exists. ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! and أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ! both mean “how beautiful the sky is”, and both were built on the spot from جَمُلَ.

The reason this lesson sits at B2 rather than A2 is that the first pattern is invisible without the vowel marks. ما أجمل السماء is three words that can be an exclamation, a question, or a flat denial, depending entirely on the fatḥas and ḍammas you cannot see. This is the clearest case in the whole path of التَّشْكيل carrying the meaning by itself, so read every vowel here as information, not ornament.

The rule

1. Pattern one: ما + أَفْعَلَ + an accusative noun. The core formula is ما أَفْعَلَهُ. Take a three-radical root, cast it in the shape أَفْعَلَ (a past-tense form), and put the thing you are marvelling at straight after it in the accusative:

  • ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! - how beautiful the sky is.
  • ما أَسْرَعَ الوَقْتَ! - how quickly time goes.
  • ما أَطْيَبَ الطَّعامَ! - how good the food is.
  • ما أَشَدَّ الحَرَّ! - how intense the heat is.

Two fatḥas carry the whole construction: one on the last radical of the verb, one on the end of the noun. Lose either and you have written something else.

2. Why the noun is accusative. A compact parse, because it explains the ending rather than just asserting it. Here ما is not the question word and not the negator: it is an indefinite noun meaning roughly “something great”, and it is the مُبْتَدَأ. أَجْمَلَ is a genuine past-tense verb whose subject is a hidden pronoun referring back to ما. السَّماءَ is therefore its مَفْعولٌ بِهِ, and the little verbal sentence is the خَبَر. Literally: “something has made the sky beautiful” - hence the accusative, and hence the past-tense shape for a present-tense meaning.

3. The verb is frozen. أَجْمَلَ in this pattern never agrees with anything and never changes tense. It stays third-person masculine singular past whatever follows it: ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماواتِ!، ما أَكْرَمَ المُعَلِّماتِ!، ما أَذْكاهُنَّ! Never ما أَجْمَلَتْ, never ما أَجْمَلوا. The two exclamation verbs are جامِدان - frozen - in Arabic grammar, and this is one of them.

4. A pronoun object attaches directly. When the thing admired is already known, it becomes an attached accusative pronoun (lesson 29): ما أَجْمَلَها!، ما أَرْوَعَهُ!، ما أَصْعَبَهُمْ! The pronoun must be the attached object form; a free pronoun after the verb is not Arabic.

5. The noun must be definite or clearly specified. المُتَعَجَّبُ مِنْهُ - the thing you wonder at - is normally definite (ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ!) or an indefinite carrying its own description (ما أَجْمَلَ سَماءً صافِيَةً!). A bare indefinite on its own - ما أَجْمَلَ سَماءً! - has nothing to be astonished at and does not work. A مُضاف counts as specified: ما أَجْمَلَ سَماءَ الصَّحْراءِ!

6. Pattern two: أَفْعِلْ بِـ. The same root in a different mould: أَفْعِلْ بِهِ. It looks like an imperative and is read like one, but it is not a command - grammarians call it a past-tense verb that came out in the shape of an imperative, and its meaning is exactly that of pattern one.

  • أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ! - how beautiful the sky is.
  • أَكْرِمْ بِهِ رَجُلًا! - what a fine man he is.
  • أَعْظِمْ بِالصَّبْرِ! - how great patience is.

7. In pattern two the بـ is redundant and the form never inflects. The noun after بـ is مَجْرور in writing but is the logical subject; the بـ is a حَرْفُ جَرٍّ زائِد, added for the shape of the formula and translating nothing. Because the verb only wears an imperative costume, it takes no imperative endings at all: you write أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ! to a woman, to a crowd, to anyone - never أَجْمِلي بِالسَّماءِ, never أَجْمِلوا. What does vary is the pronoun after بـ, since that is a real object of a real preposition: أَكْرِمْ بِهِ!، أَكْرِمْ بِها!، أَكْرِمْ بِهِمْ! An indefinite accusative may follow as a تَمْييز, naming what the wonder is about: أَكْرِمْ بِهِ رَجُلًا!، أَعْظِمْ بِها فِكْرَةً!

8. The flagship contrast: three readings of the same letters. Unvocalized, ما أكرم الرجل is ambiguous three ways. Vocalized, it is not ambiguous at all:

  • ما أَكْرَمَ الرَّجُلَ! - exclamation. Verb + accusative object, closed with ”!”.
  • ما أَكْرَمُ الرَّجُلِ؟ - question. ما is the interrogative, أَكْرَمُ is the elative of lesson 28 as a nominative predicate, and الرَّجُلِ is genitive as the second term of an إِضافَة: “what is the most generous thing about the man?”
  • ما أَكْرَمَ الرَّجُلُ ضَيْفَهُ. - denial. ما is the past negator of lesson 37, أَكْرَمَ is Form IV “he honoured”, الرَّجُلُ is its nominative subject: “the man did not honour his guest.”

Same consonants; the ending on the noun and the mark at the end of the sentence do all the work. One practical note on that mark: Arabic has no separate exclamation point. The character is the ordinary ASCII ”!” that English uses, sitting at the left-hand end of the line. Since Arabic questions do have their own «؟», the pair ”!” vs «؟» is a real visual cue in print, and often the only one an unvocalized text gives you.

9. The six conditions. Not every verb can enter these patterns. The list is exactly the one that governs the elative in lesson 28, which is the cheapest way to remember it: if a root cannot make أَفْعَل as a comparative, it cannot make an exclamation either. The verb must be

  1. ثُلاثِيّ - three radicals, so Forms II-X are out (lessons 47-53);
  2. تامّ - a full verb, so كانَ وأَخَواتُها (lesson 43) are out;
  3. مُتَصَرِّف - it must conjugate, so the frozen verbs لَيْسَ، عَسى، نِعْمَ، بِئْسَ are out;
  4. مَبْنِيٌّ لِلْمَعْلوم - active, so a passive (lesson 52) is out;
  5. مُثْبَت - affirmative, so a negated verb is out;
  6. قابِلٌ لِلتَّفاوُت - gradable, so ماتَ، فَنِيَ، غَرِقَ, which admit no more and no less, are out.

10. And one more exclusion: the أَفْعَل adjectives. If the verb’s own adjective already has the shape أَفْعَل - the colours and the bodily defects - the slot is taken and the pattern is blocked: حَمِرَ / أَحْمَر، خَضِرَ / أَخْضَر، عَرِجَ / أَعْرَج، عَمِيَ / أَعْمى. So ما أَحْمَرَ الوَرْدَ! is not an intensified red rose; it is a broken sentence.

11. When a condition fails, use a helper verb plus a مَصْدَر. The repair is mechanical and extremely common in real prose. Put a suitable ثُلاثِيّ verb into the pattern - ما أَشَدَّ، ما أَكْثَرَ، ما أَعْظَمَ، ما أَجْمَلَ - and hand it the مَصْدَر (lesson 54) of the blocked verb as its accusative object. The noun you actually care about then follows as a مُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ or an attached pronoun:

  • ما أَشَدَّ حُمْرَةَ الوَرْدِ! - how red the roses are (colour, blocked by rule 10).
  • ما أَكْثَرَ اسْتِخْدامَهُ! - how much it is used (Form X, blocked by condition 1).
  • ما أَعْظَمَ انْتِشارَ الظّاهِرَةِ! - how widespread the phenomenon is.
  • ما أَشَدَّ تَأَثُّرَهُ بِالخَبَرِ! - how affected he was by the news.

Pattern two takes the same repair: أَشْدِدْ بِحُمْرَةِ الوَرْدِ! For a passive or a negated verb, the helper takes a مَصْدَرٌ مُؤَوَّل instead: ما أَعْظَمَ ما كُتِبَ!، ما أَقْبَحَ أَلّا يَعْتَذِرَ! That مَصْدَرٌ مُؤَوَّل is also the ordinary way to marvel at an action rather than a thing: ما أَجْمَلَ أَنْ نَلْتَقِيَ بَعْدَ سِنينَ!

12. The سَماعِيّ formulas you will actually meet in print. Beside the two regular patterns there are heard, unanalysable expressions. Two are worth owning:

  • يا لَهُ مِنْ + indefinite genitive - “what a …”: يا لَهُ مِنْ يَوْمٍ!، يا لَها مِنْ لَيْلَةٍ!، يا لَهُمْ مِنْ رِجالٍ! The pronoun on لَـ agrees with the noun; مِنْ is fixed in modern use - the older variant يا لَهُ رَجُلًا, with an accusative تَمْييز instead, is rare today.
  • يا لَـ + genitive - “how great the …!”: يا لَجَمالِ السَّماءِ!، يا لَلْعَجَبِ!، يا لَرَوْعَةِ المَنْظَرِ! Note the fatḥa on the لام here; a plain call carries no لام at all.

Also fully current in modern writing: ما هٰذا الجَمالُ!، أَيُّ يَوْمٍ كانَ ذٰلِكَ! These are nominal sentences with an exclamation mark, not a special pattern, so no case surprises.

13. Two boundaries. يا here is not the vocative particle of lesson 36 - يا وَلَدُ! calls someone, يا لَهُ مِنْ وَلَدٍ! marvels at him. And how formal all of this sounds, and where a modern newspaper prefers a plain intensifier instead, belongs to the register lessons at the end of the path.

Forms & patterns

The two قِياسِيّ patterns, piece by piece:

النَّمَطحَرْفٌ / أَداةالفِعْلالمُتَعَجَّبُ مِنْهُمِثال
ما أَفْعَلَهُما (اسْمٌ نَكِرَةٌ، مُبْتَدَأ)أَفْعَلَ (ماضٍ جامِد)مَفْعولٌ بِهِ مَنْصوبما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ!
أَفْعِلْ بِهِبِـ (حَرْفُ جَرٍّ زائِد)أَفْعِلْ (ماضٍ بِصورَةِ الأَمْر)فاعِلٌ مَجْرورٌ لَفْظًاأَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ!

One root through both moulds, so you can see they are the same object twice:

الجَذْرالفِعْلُ الثُّلاثِيّما أَفْعَلَهُأَفْعِلْ بِهِ
ج م لجَمُلَما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ!أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ!
ك ر مكَرُمَما أَكْرَمَ الرَّجُلَ!أَكْرِمْ بِالرَّجُلِ!
ن ف عنَفَعَما أَنْفَعَ الكِتابَ!أَنْفِعْ بِالكِتابِ!
ع ظ معَظُمَما أَعْظَمَ الصَّبْرَ!أَعْظِمْ بِالصَّبْرِ!
ص ع بصَعُبَما أَصْعَبَ الامْتِحانَ!أَصْعِبْ بِالامْتِحانِ!

Weak and doubled roots behave exactly as lessons 49-56 predict - the shape absorbs them:

النَّوْعالفِعْلالتَّعَجُّبمُلاحَظَة
مُضَعَّفشَدَّما أَشَدَّ الحَرَّ!the doubling stays, with a shadda
أَجْوَفطالَما أَطْوَلَ اللَّيْلَ!the hidden و resurfaces
ناقِصحَلاما أَحْلى القَهْوَةَ!ends in ى; the fatḥa is مُقَدَّرَة, so it is not written
ناقِصقَساما أَقْسى الشِّتاءَ!same - nothing visible on the verb
مِثاليَسُرَما أَيْسَرَ الأَمْرَ!the و/ي of the first radical is written plainly

The blocked verbs and their repairs:

الشَّرْطُ المَفْقودمِثالٌ مَمْنوعالبَديلُ الصَّحيح
لَيْسَ ثُلاثِيًّاما أَسْتَخْدَمَهُ!ما أَكْثَرَ اسْتِخْدامَهُ!
لَيْسَ ثُلاثِيًّاما أَتَعاوَنَهُمْ!ما أَجْمَلَ تَعاوُنَهُمْ!
الوَصْفُ عَلى وَزْنِ أَفْعَلما أَحْمَرَ الوَرْدَ!ما أَشَدَّ حُمْرَةَ الوَرْدِ!
مَبْنِيٌّ لِلْمَجْهولما أَكْتُبَ الرِّسالَةَ!ما أَجْمَلَ ما كُتِبَ!
مَنْفِيّ-ما أَقْبَحَ أَلّا يَعْتَذِرَ!
غَيْرُ قابِلٍ لِلتَّفاوُتما أَمْوَتَهُ!ما أَفْجَعَ مَوْتَهُ!

The heard formulas, with the ending each one demands:

الصّيغَةمِثالEnglish
يا لَهُ مِنْ + نَكِرَةٍ مَجْرورَةٍيا لَهُ مِنْ يَوْمٍ!what a day!
يا لَها مِنْ + نَكِرَةٍ مَجْرورَةٍيا لَها مِنْ فِكْرَةٍ!what an idea!
يا لَـ + مَجْروريا لَجَمالِ السَّماءِ!how beautiful the sky is!
ما هٰذا + مَرْفوعما هٰذا الجَمالُ!what beauty this is!

Left out on purpose: the classical licences the old grammarians allow around these patterns - separating the verb from its noun by a ظَرْف, exclaiming at an exclamation, and formulas such as لِلَّهِ دَرُّهُ. They belong to older texts, not to written MSA.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ بَعْدَ المَطَرِ!How beautiful the sky is after the rain!
ما أَسْرَعَ الوَقْتَ! لَمْ أَشْعُرْ بِمُرورِ السّاعَةِ.How fast time goes! I did not notice the hour pass.
ما أَطْيَبَ الطَّعامَ في هٰذا المَطْعَمِ الصَّغيرِ!How good the food is in this little restaurant!
ما أَشَدَّ الحَرَّ في شَهْرِ أَغُسْطُسَ!How intense the heat is in August!
ما أَصْعَبَ الامْتِحانَ الَّذي قَدَّموهُ لَنا!How hard the exam they gave us was!
زُرْتُ دِمَشْقَ مَرَّةً واحِدَةً، ما أَجْمَلَها!I visited Damascus once - how beautiful it is!
ما أَحْلى أَنْ نَلْتَقِيَ بَعْدَ كُلِّ هٰذِهِ السِّنينَ!How lovely it is to meet after all these years!
أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ في لَيالي الصَّيْفِ!How beautiful the sky is on summer nights!
أَكْرِمْ بِهِ رَجُلًا! لَمْ يَتَأَخَّرْ عَنّا يَوْمًا واحِدًا.What a fine man he is! He never let us down for a single day.
أَعْظِمْ بِالصَّبْرِ في وَقْتِ الشِّدَّةِ!How great patience is in hard times!
ما أَشَدَّ حُمْرَةَ الوَرْدِ في حَديقَةِ جارِنا!How red the roses are in our neighbour’s garden!
ما أَكْثَرَ اسْتِخْدامَ الهاتِفِ بَيْنَ الطُّلّابِ!How much students use their phones!
يا لَهُ مِنْ يَوْمٍ طَويلٍ!What a long day!
يا لَجَمالِ السَّماءِ هٰذِهِ اللَّيْلَةَ!How beautiful the sky is tonight!

Common mistakes

  • ما أَجْمَلُ السَّماءُ! -> ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! - both endings are wrong at once. The exclamation is a verb plus its accusative object, so it is fatḥa on the verb and fatḥa on the noun; the ḍammas turn it into a half-built question.
  • ما أَجْمَلُ السَّماءِ! -> ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! - a genitive after أَجْمَلُ is the elative reading of lesson 28, “the most beautiful part of the sky”, which needs «؟» and not ”!”.
  • ما أَحْمَرَ الوَرْدَ! -> ما أَشَدَّ حُمْرَةَ الوَرْدِ! - colours and defects already own the shape أَفْعَل as adjectives, so they cannot also use it as an exclamation. Go through a helper verb plus the مَصْدَر.
  • ما أَسْتَخْدَمَهُ! -> ما أَكْثَرَ اسْتِخْدامَهُ! - اِسْتَخْدَمَ is Form X, not ثُلاثِيّ. The pattern is built only on bare three-radical verbs, never straight off Form VIII or X.
  • ما أَجْمَلَتِ السَّماءُ! -> ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! - the verb in this pattern is frozen. It never takes a feminine ـتْ, a dual, or a plural ending, and the noun after it is not its subject.
  • أَجْمِلي بِالسَّماءِ! -> أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ! - أَفْعِلْ only looks like an imperative. It addresses nobody, so it takes none of the imperative’s person or gender endings.
  • أَجْمِلِ السَّماءَ! -> أَجْمِلْ بِالسَّماءِ! - drop the بـ and you have written a genuine command, “make the sky beautiful”. The redundant preposition is what marks the pattern.
  • ما أَجْمَلَ هِيَ! -> ما أَجْمَلَها! - the thing admired is an object, so a pronoun must be the attached accusative form of lesson 29, not a free pronoun.
  • ما أَجْمَلَ سَماءً! -> ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! / ما أَجْمَلَ سَماءً صافِيَةً! - the noun has to be definite or given a description; a bare indefinite gives the wonder nothing to hold onto.
  • يا لَهُ يَوْمٍ! -> يا لَهُ مِنْ يَوْمٍ! - the noun after مِنْ is an indefinite genitive. Drop مِنْ and the genitive is stranded: the only variant that goes without it puts the noun in the accusative as a تَمْييز (يا لَهُ يَوْمًا), and modern writing keeps مِنْ.

Tips

  • Anchor everything on lesson 28: the exclamation and the elative are the same أَفْعَل shape with the same entry requirements. If you can say هٰذا أَجْمَلُ, you can say ما أَجْمَلَ; if you cannot, reach for the helper verb.
  • Memorise three helpers - ما أَشَدَّ، ما أَكْثَرَ، ما أَعْظَمَ - plus ما أَجْمَلَ. With a مَصْدَر after them they cover every verb the direct pattern refuses, which in modern vocabulary is most verbs.
  • Say the formula with a deliberate double fatḥa, “-a … -a”, every time you drill it. The rhythm is the rule, and it will stop you writing a ḍamma out of habit.
  • Write pattern one; recognise pattern two. أَفْعِلْ بِهِ is alive in print and in speeches but is markedly more literary, and mixing up its redundant بـ is an easy way to write a command by accident.
  • In unvocalized text look for the accusative you can actually see. Sound masculine plurals and duals show it in the letters: ما أكرم المعلمين cannot be the denial reading, because ـينَ can only be accusative or genitive, never the nominative a subject would need.
  • Do not try to translate ما. It is neither “what” nor “not” here, and hunting for an English word for it will only push you toward the wrong vowels.
  • Keep يا لَهُ مِنْ … as a single frozen chunk with three slots (لَهُ / لَها / لَهُمْ). It is the most useful exclamation in this lesson for everyday writing, and it needs no root analysis at all.

B2 65 / 70

Unreal conditions with law and lawla

لَوْ ولَوْلا

In short

Lesson 56 built conditions that can still come true. This one builds the other kind - the door that is already shut. لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ says two things in three words: you did not study, and you did not pass. The Arabic grammarians name the particle after exactly that double denial - لَوْ is a حَرْفُ امْتِناعٍ لِامْتِناعٍ, “a particle of non-occurrence because of non-occurrence”. English needs a whole extra tense system for this (“if you had … you would have …”); Arabic needs one particle and the past forms you have had since lesson 18.

There are two particles and they split the work by what follows them: لَوْ wants a verb behind it, لَوْلا wants a noun. لَوْلا الماءُ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ - “were it not for water, people would perish” - is the mirror image: the thing named does exist, and that is why the other thing did not happen (امْتِناعٌ لِوُجودٍ). Both answers are opened by a single letter, the لام you already met inside لَقَدْ. No new verb form appears anywhere in this lesson.

The rule

1. The لَوْ frame: past form, past form, and a لام in the middle. The skeleton is لَوْ + ماضٍ … لَـ + ماضٍ:

لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَـنَجَحْتَ. / لَوْ حَضَرَ المُديرُ لَـبَدَأَ الاجْتِماعُ.

لَوْ is not a governing particle: it causes no جَزْم and no نَصْب, so nothing in the sentence changes shape because of it. What it does instead is fix the meaning - everything inside its scope is presented as not having happened.

2. لامُ الجَوابِ is one letter and it is not decoration. The answer half opens with لَـ written joined to the next word: لَنَجَحْتَ، لَزُرْتُكَ، لَاتَّصَلْتُ بِكَ. It is the same emphatic لام that sits inside لَقَدْ (lesson 45), and here it does a second job: it tells the reader where the condition ends and the answer begins, in a language that has no comma rule. Strictly it is optional - an affirmative answer may stand without it, in classical and in modern texts - but writing it is the normal practice, and this lesson always does. If the answer verb begins with هَمْزة الوَصْل the لام simply attaches and the alif goes silent: لَـ + اِتَّصَلْتُ → لَاتَّصَلْتُ، لَـ + اِنْتَهى → لَانْتَهى.

3. Negation: ما + ماضٍ in the answer, لَمْ in the condition.

  • The answer is normally negated with ما + a past verb: لَوْ دَرَسْتَ ما رَسَبْتَ, “if you had studied you would not have failed”. The لام is classically dropped in front of ما; modern prose very often writes لَما (لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَما رَسَبْتَ), and that is not an error - both are current. A second negative answer is also good Arabic and you will meet it in older and in formal prose: لَمْ + مُضارِع مَجْزوم, which after لَوْ reads as a past - لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَمْ تَرْسُبْ. That one never takes the لام. Produce the ما version; recognise the لَمْ one.
  • The condition is negated with لَمْ + مُضارِع مَجْزوم, exactly as in lesson 37: لَوْ لَمْ تَدْرُسْ لَرَسَبْتَ, “if you had not studied you would have failed”. لَمْ carries the jussive itself; لَوْ still governs nothing.

4. The past form carries no past time of its own. This is the sentence to reread. After لَوْ, الماضي marks unreality, not time; the time comes from كانَ (lessons 32, 48) and قَدْ (lesson 45).

  • Bare لَوْ + ماضٍ is neutral and takes its time from the context. لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ is read as a closed past by default.
  • Unreal now: كانَ + مُضارِع inside the condition. لَوْ كُنْتُ أَعْرِفُ لَأَخْبَرْتُكَ - “if I knew, I would tell you”, and I am telling you that I do not know, at this moment. Likewise لَوْ كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ لَزُرْتُكَ غَدًا.
  • Unreal then: كانَ قَدْ + ماضٍ, the pluperfect frame from lesson 45, on either side or both. لَوْ كُنْتُ قَدْ دَرَسْتُ لَـكُنْتُ نَجَحْتُ - “if I had studied, I would have passed”, and the exam is over.

Both halves keep full person agreement, because كانَ is a real verb with a real subject: كُنْتُ، كُنْتَ، كانوا. There is no *لَوْ كانَ دَرَسوا.

5. A noun after لَوْ needs a bridge. Since لَوْ wants a verb, you cannot write *لَوْ الطَّقْسُ جَميلٌ. Two repairs, both already in your hands:

  • كانَ, which supplies the verb and puts the predicate in the accusative: لَوْ كانَ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا لَخَرَجْنا إِلى الحَديقَةِ.
  • لَوْ أَنَّ, which supplies أَنَّ from lesson 44 - so the noun goes مَنْصوب and its predicate stays مَرْفوع: لَوْ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ جَميلٌ لَخَرَجْنا. With a pronoun this is the ordinary attached series: لَوْ أَنَّكَ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ، لَوْ أَنَّني كُنْتُ أَعْرِفُ.

لَوْ أَنَّ is very common in writing and slightly more formal than plain لَوْ + verb. The لام of the answer is unaffected by either repair.

6. وَلَوْ and حَتّى لَوْ = “even if”. Hang لَوْ on the back of a finished main clause and it stops being a condition and becomes a concession: سَأُساعِدُكَ وَلَوْ كُنْتُ مَشْغولًا، اِقْرَأْ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ وَلَوْ صَفْحَةً واحِدَةً. Because the main clause has already been said, there is no لام anywhere - the لام belongs to an answer, and here the answer came first. حَتّى لَوْ is the same thing with more force. Keep it apart from وَإِنْ (lesson 56), which concedes something the speaker treats as genuinely possible; وَلَوْ pushes to the extreme case.

7. لَوْ سَمَحْتَ is frozen. “If you would permit” long ago stopped being a condition and is now simply “please, excuse me”. It has no answer clause and takes no لام: لَوْ سَمَحْتَ، أَيْنَ مَحَطَّةُ القِطارِ؟ The one live part is agreement with the person you are addressing - لَوْ سَمَحْتَ، لَوْ سَمَحْتِ، لَوْ سَمَحْتُمْ. Learn it as vocabulary next to مِنْ فَضْلِكَ (lesson 36), not as grammar.

8. لَوْلا: the noun after it is the trap. لَوْلا denies its answer because something does exist. What follows it is a noun, and that noun is a مُبْتَدَأ مَرْفوع - the subject of a nominal sentence (lesson 2), not the object of a preposition:

لَوْلا الماءُ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ. / لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ لَما نَجَحْتُ.

الماءُ and مُساعَدَتُكَ carry a ḍamma. لَوْلا does not govern a genitive - the noun behind it is a subject, not the complement of a حَرْف جَرّ - and *لَوْلا مُساعَدَتِكَ with a kasra is the single most frequent error in this lesson.

9. The missing half of that nominal sentence. If الماءُ is a مُبْتَدَأ, where is its خَبَر? It is مَحْذوفٌ وُجوبًا - obligatorily deleted. The understood word is مَوْجودٌ (“exists”), and Arabic refuses to let you say it: لَوْلا الماءُ, never *لَوْلا الماءُ مَوْجودٌ. This is not a licence to shorten; it is a rule. So the whole first half of a لَوْلا sentence is one bare noun phrase, and the answer follows immediately with لَـ, ما or لَمْ.

10. لَوْلا with a pronoun, and لَوْلا أَنَّ. When the existing thing is a pronoun, it attaches directly: لَوْلاهُ، لَوْلاكَ، لَوْلاها، لَوْلايَ. Note that the shapes are the ones you know from prepositions and objects (ـهُ، ـكَ) even though the slot is a subject slot - it is an old irregularity, and لَوْلاكَ ما نَجَحْتُ is what people write. The regular alternative لَوْلا أَنْتَ, with the independent pronoun, is correct too and some grammarians prefer it; it is simply far rarer. When the existing thing is a whole clause rather than a noun, use لَوْلا أَنَّ + مَنْصوب: لَوْلا أَنَّ الطَّريقَ كانَ مُزْدَحِمًا لَوَصَلْنا مُبَكِّرينَ.

11. لَوْ لَمْ ≈ لَوْلا + مَصْدَر. These two say the same thing, and swapping between them is the fastest way to sound idiomatic: لَوْ لَمْ تُساعِدْني لَما نَجَحْتُ = لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ لَما نَجَحْتُ. The verbal noun (lesson 54) absorbs the verb and its subject, and the whole clause collapses into two words. The لَوْلا version is common in newspaper prose.

12. Not in this lesson. Three uses are recognition only. After وَدَّ and تَمَنّى, لَوْ is not conditional at all but a “that” (وَدِدْتُ لَوْ تَبْقى مَعَنا). كَما لَوْ, “as if”, is a text connective and belongs to lesson 66 with كَأَنَّ. And لَوْلا has an older second life meaning “why don’t you …”, which you will meet in the register of lesson 70 - do not produce it. Linking whole paragraphs with في المُقابِل، غَيْرَ أَنَّ and their kind is lesson 66.

Forms & patterns

Every frame in the lesson, in one table

التَّرْكيبالاسْتِعْمالمِثالEnglish
لَوْ + ماضٍ + لَـ + ماضٍthe basic counterfactualلَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ.If you had studied, you would have passed.
لَوْ + ماضٍ + ما + ماضٍnegative answerلَوْ دَرَسْتَ ما رَسَبْتَ.If you had studied, you would not have failed.
لَوْ لَمْ + مَجْزوم + لَـ + ماضٍnegative conditionلَوْ لَمْ تَدْرُسْ لَرَسَبْتَ.If you had not studied, you would have failed.
لَوْ كانَ + خَبَر مَنْصوبa noun in the conditionلَوْ كانَ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا لَخَرَجْنا.If the weather were nice, we would go out.
لَوْ أَنَّ + اسْم مَنْصوبa noun in the condition, formalلَوْ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ جَميلٌ لَخَرَجْنا.If the weather were nice, we would go out.
وَلَوْ / حَتّى لَوْ + ماضٍeven if - no لامسَأَذْهَبُ وَلَوْ نَزَلَ المَطَرُ.I will go even if it rains.
لَوْ سَمَحْتَfrozen politeness - no answerلَوْ سَمَحْتَ، أَيْنَ الصَّيْدَلِيَّةُ؟Excuse me, where is the pharmacy?
لَوْلا + اسْم مَرْفوعwere it not forلَوْلا الماءُ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ.Were it not for water, people would perish.
لَوْلا أَنَّ + اسْم مَنْصوبwere it not for the fact thatلَوْلا أَنَّ الطَّريقَ كانَ مُزْدَحِمًا لَوَصَلْنا.Had the road not been crowded, we would have arrived.

Where the time comes from

The particle never moves in time; كانَ and قَدْ do it.

الجُمْلَةالزَّمَنEnglish
لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ.closed past (default reading)If you had studied, you would have passed.
لَوْ كُنْتُ أَعْرِفُ لَأَخْبَرْتُكَ.nowIf I knew, I would tell you.
لَوْ كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ لَزُرْتُكَ غَدًا.now, looking forwardIf I had time, I would visit you tomorrow.
لَوْ كُنْتُ قَدْ دَرَسْتُ لَكُنْتُ نَجَحْتُ.past, explicitly markedIf I had studied, I would have passed.

كانَ through the persons, in both counterfactual frames

كانَ is أَجْوَف (root ك-و-ن), so the middle و disappears wherever the last radical takes a sukūn - كُنْتُ, not *كانْتُ, while هِيَ كانَتْ keeps it because there the ن carries a fatḥa. That collapse was lesson 50; here it is the pivot of the whole structure.

الضَّميرUnreal now: لَوْ كانَ + مُضارِعUnreal then: لَوْ كانَ قَدْ + ماضٍ
أَنالَوْ كُنْتُ أَعْرِفُلَوْ كُنْتُ قَدْ دَرَسْتُ
أَنْتَلَوْ كُنْتَ تَعْرِفُلَوْ كُنْتَ قَدْ دَرَسْتَ
أَنْتِلَوْ كُنْتِ تَعْرِفينَلَوْ كُنْتِ قَدْ دَرَسْتِ
هُوَلَوْ كانَ يَعْرِفُلَوْ كانَ قَدْ دَرَسَ
هِيَلَوْ كانَتْ تَعْرِفُلَوْ كانَتْ قَدْ دَرَسَتْ
نَحْنُلَوْ كُنّا نَعْرِفُلَوْ كُنّا قَدْ دَرَسْنا
أَنْتُمْلَوْ كُنْتُمْ تَعْرِفونَلَوْ كُنْتُمْ قَدْ دَرَسْتُمْ
هُمْلَوْ كانوا يَعْرِفونَلَوْ كانوا قَدْ دَرَسوا

The dual and the feminine plural are left out; they follow كانَ exactly as in lesson 43.

لَوْلا with an attached pronoun

الضَّميرأَنانَحْنُأَنْتَأَنْتِأَنْتُمْهُوَهِيَهُمْ
الصّيغَةلَوْلايَلَوْلانالَوْلاكَلَوْلاكِلَوْلاكُمْلَوْلاهُلَوْلاهالَوْلاهُمْ

Against lesson 56: the three-way contrast

الأَداةنَوْعُ الشَّرْطِفِعْلُ الشَّرْطِالجَوابمِثال
إِذاreal, expected to happenماضٍ، بِلا جَزْمماضٍ (+ فَـ when needed)إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ.
إِنْreal, uncertainمُضارِع مَجْزوممَجْزومإِنْ تَدْرُسْ تَنْجَحْ.
لَوْunreal, did not happenماضٍ، بِلا جَزْملَـ + ماضٍلَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ.

Examples

العربيةEnglish
لَوْ دَرَسْتَ جَيِّدًا لَنَجَحْتَ فِي الامْتِحانِ.If you had studied well, you would have passed the exam.
لَوْ دَرَسْتُ أَكْثَرَ ما رَسَبْتُ فِي مادَّةِ الرِّياضِيّاتِ.If I had studied more, I would not have failed maths.
لَوْ لَمْ تُساعِدْني لَما أَنْهَيْتُ العَمَلَ فِي مَوْعِدِهِ.If you had not helped me, I would not have finished the work on time.
لَوْ كُنْتُ أَعْرِفُ عُنْوانَكَ لَأَرْسَلْتُ لَكَ الكِتابَ.If I knew your address, I would send you the book.
لَوْ كانَ عِنْدي وَقْتٌ لَزُرْتُ المُتْحَفَ مَعَكُمْ غَدًا.If I had time, I would visit the museum with you tomorrow.
لَوْ كُنْتُ قَدْ دَرَسْتُ لَكُنْتُ نَجَحْتُ مِنَ المَرَّةِ الأُولى.If I had studied, I would have passed the first time.
لَوْ كُنْتُ مَكانَكَ لَقَبِلْتُ العَرْضَ فَوْرًا.If I were in your place, I would accept the offer at once.
لَوْ أَنَّ الطَّقْسَ جَميلٌ لَخَرَجْنا إِلى الحَديقَةِ.If the weather were nice, we would go out to the park.
سَأُساعِدُكَ وَلَوْ كُنْتُ مَشْغولًا.I will help you even if I am busy.
اِقْرَأْ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ وَلَوْ صَفْحَةً واحِدَةً.Read every day, even if only one page.
لَوْ سَمَحْتِ، هَلْ هٰذا المَقْعَدُ فارِغٌ؟Excuse me, is this seat free?
لَوْلا الماءُ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ.Were it not for water, people would perish.
لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ لَما نَجَحْتُ فِي هٰذا المَشْروعِ.Without your help I would not have succeeded in this project.
لَوْلاكَ ما وَصَلْتُ فِي الوَقْتِ المُناسِبِ.Were it not for you, I would not have arrived on time.

Common mistakes

  • لَوْ تَدْرُسُ لَتَنْجَحُ -> لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ - both halves of a لَوْ sentence take a past form. A مُضارِع after لَوْ is the commonest single error here, and it is what makes a counterfactual read as an open condition.
  • لَوْ دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ -> لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ - لامُ الجَوابِ is missing. It is not strictly obligatory, but without it the reader has nothing marking where the answer starts, and the sentence looks like an إِذا sentence with the wrong particle.
  • لَوْ دَرَسْتَ لَنْ تَرْسُبَ -> لَوْ دَرَسْتَ ما رَسَبْتَ - لَنْ negates the future and has no place in a counterfactual. The answer of لَوْ takes ما + ماضٍ (or لَما), or else لَمْ + مُضارِع مَجْزوم, which carries no لام.
  • لَوْ الطَّقْسُ جَميلٌ لَخَرَجْنا -> لَوْ كانَ الطَّقْسُ جَميلًا لَخَرَجْنا - لَوْ needs a verb behind it. Either bring in كانَ, with its accusative predicate, or write لَوْ أَنَّ.
  • لَوْ أَنَّ الوَقْتُ كافٍ -> لَوْ أَنَّ الوَقْتَ كافٍ - أَنَّ is أَنَّ, wherever it stands: its noun goes مَنْصوب and its predicate stays مَرْفوع (lesson 44).
  • لَوْلا مُساعَدَتِكَ لَما نَجَحْتُ -> لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ لَما نَجَحْتُ - لَوْلا is not a preposition. The noun after it is a مُبْتَدَأ and carries a ḍamma.
  • لَوْلا الماءُ مَوْجودٌ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ -> لَوْلا الماءُ لَهَلَكَ النّاسُ - the خَبَر of that مُبْتَدَأ is deleted obligatorily. Supplying it is not extra clarity, it is ungrammatical.
  • لَوْلا ساعَدْتَني ما نَجَحْتُ -> لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ ما نَجَحْتُ - لَوْلا الشَّرْطِيَّة wants a noun. Put a past verb straight behind it and you have written the old reproachful لَوْلا, “why didn’t you …?”, which is a different construction (rule 12).
  • لَوْ تَرْغَبُ فَاتَّصِلْ بي -> إِذا رَغِبْتَ فَاتَّصِلْ بي - this is a real, open invitation, so it belongs to إِذا (lesson 56). لَوْ would mean you are certain the person does not want to.
  • إِذا دَرَسْتَ لَنَجَحْتَ -> إِذا دَرَسْتَ نَجَحْتَ - the لام of the answer belongs to لَوْ and لَوْلا alone. After إِذا and إِنْ the connector, when one is needed at all, is فَـ.

Tips

  • One hook covers the whole lesson: لَوْ takes a verb, لَوْلا takes a noun. Everything else - the لام, the ما, the deleted خَبَر - hangs off that split.
  • Before you finish any لَوْ or لَوْلا sentence, look at the first word of the answer. It should be لَـ, ما, لَما or لَمْ. If it is none of those, something is missing.
  • To move a counterfactual in time, do not touch the particle - insert كانَ. كُنْتُ + مُضارِع for “now”, كُنْتُ قَدْ + ماضٍ for “then”. That one habit removes most of the ambiguity learners complain about.
  • Drill the pair لَوْ لَمْ تُساعِدْني / لَوْلا مُساعَدَتُكَ side by side. Being able to convert a negative لَوْ clause into a لَوْلا + مَصْدَر phrase is worth more than any table here.
  • Keep لَوْ سَمَحْتَ in your vocabulary list, not your grammar list. It is a fixed politeness formula and the only thing you conjugate in it is the addressee.
  • Do not look for a conditional mood. Arabic has none: unreality is carried by the particle, and the verb keeps a shape you have known since A1.
  • لَوْلا is a favourite opening for opinion columns and thank-you speeches. Read a few with your eye on the case ending of the noun immediately after it - that ending is the whole grammar.
  • Ignore for now the لَوْ that follows وَدَّ and تَمَنّى, and the old exhortative لَوْلا. Recognise them if you meet them; neither belongs in your own writing at this level.

B2 66 / 70

Connecting a text

أَدَواتُ الرَّبْطِ في النَّصّ

In short

You can now build any single Arabic sentence you like. This lesson is about the joints between sentences: the words that turn five separate statements into one paragraph that argues, concedes, explains and concludes. Arabic leans on these joints far harder than English does - a serious MSA paragraph has a connector at the head of almost every sentence, and a text without them reads as a pile of notes. The set is small and closed, and it sorts into six jobs: adding, contrasting, giving a cause, announcing a result, ordering steps, and restating.

The meanings are easy; the grammar attached to them is what this lesson buys you. Each connector belongs to a government class, and the class - not the meaning - decides what may follow it and what ending that word takes. لٰكِنَّ pulls the next noun into the accusative, بِسَبَبِ demands a genitive, and أَيْضًا is itself an accusative and governs nothing at all. Mixing the classes produces sentences that are perfectly intelligible and unmistakably foreign.

The rule

1. Six jobs, one toolbox. Fix the functional map first: addition (وَ، أَيْضًا، كَذٰلِكَ، بِالإِضافَةِ إِلى، فَضْلًا عَنْ), contrast (لٰكِنَّ، بَلْ، غَيْرَ أَنَّ، إِلّا أَنَّ، بَيْدَ أَنَّ، في المُقابِلِ), cause (لِأَنَّ، بِسَبَبِ، نَظَرًا لِـ، إِذْ), result (لِذٰلِكَ، وَبِالتّالي، وَمِنْ ثَمَّ، فَـ), sequence (أَوَّلًا… ثانِيًا… وَأَخيرًا), restatement (أَيْ، بِعِبارَةٍ أُخْرى). Cause and result are one relation seen from opposite ends: لِأَنَّ puts the reason after the fact, لِذٰلِكَ puts the fact after the reason.

2. Class one - the أَنَّ family: the following noun is مَنْصوب. Every connector built on أَنَّ - لٰكِنَّ، غَيْرَ أَنَّ، إِلّا أَنَّ، بَيْدَ أَنَّ، بِما أَنَّ، رَغْمَ أَنَّ، مَعَ أَنَّ، لِأَنَّ - is إِنَّ وأَخَواتُها (lesson 44) wearing a connector’s coat. The noun behind it takes the fatḥa and its predicate stays مَرْفوع:

لٰكِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ. / غَيْرَ أَنَّ الطَّريقَ طَويلٌ. / إِلّا أَنَّ الأَسْعارَ مُرْتَفِعَةٌ.

A pronoun subject attaches, exactly as it did to إِنَّ: لٰكِنَّهُ، غَيْرَ أَنَّها، بَيْدَ أَنَّني. And because a noun or pronoun is obligatory, none of these words may sit directly in front of a verb. غَيْرَ أَنَّ، إِلّا أَنَّ and بَيْدَ أَنَّ all say “however, except that”; بَيْدَ أَنَّ is the most formal, at home in editorials.

3. Class two - prepositional connectors: the following noun is مَجْرور. بِسَبَبِ، نَظَرًا لِـ، بِالإِضافَةِ إِلى، عَلى الرَّغْمِ مِنْ، فَضْلًا عَنْ، في المُقابِلِ end in a preposition or in the first term of an إِضافَة, so what follows carries a kasra and is a noun, usually a مَصْدَر:

بِسَبَبِ المَطَرِ / عَلى الرَّغْمِ مِنَ المَطَرِ / نَظَرًا لِارْتِفاعِ الأَسْعارِ / فَضْلًا عَنْ ذٰلِكَ

None of them may take a clause. Whenever the English has “because of / in view of / despite”, the Arabic slot behind it holds one genitive noun and nothing else.

4. Class three - accusative adverbials: they govern nothing. أَيْضًا، أَوَّلًا، ثانِيًا، أَخيرًا، عِلاوَةً، فَضْلًا، نَظَرًا، إِذًا are nouns frozen in the accusative and used as adverbs (lesson 31). Their whole grammar is the ending they wear: tanwīn fatḥa, written ـًا. They do nothing to the next word - نَجَحَ في الاِمْتِحانِ أَيْضًا is an ordinary sentence with an adverb stuck on the end. Two of them, فَضْلًا and نَظَرًا, always drag a preposition behind them.

5. Class four - the light particles, which govern nothing and demand nothing. وَ، فَـ، ثُمَّ، بَلْ، لٰكِنْ، أَيْ، إِذْ take whatever comes next, verb or noun, and change no ending.

6. Heavy لٰكِنَّ against light لٰكِنْ. Same three letters, two words, and the shadda is the whole difference. لٰكِنَّ belongs to the إِنَّ family and must be followed by an accusative noun or an attached pronoun - لٰكِنَّ الوَقْتَ قَصيرٌ، لٰكِنَّها رَفَضَتْ. لٰكِنْ (sukūn, no shadda) is a bare coordinator and usually has a verb behind it - حاوَلْتُ الاِتِّصالَ بِهِ لٰكِنْ نَسيتُ الرَّقْمَ. Both are commonly preceded by وَ with no change of meaning, and in unvocalized print both appear as لكن, so when reading you decide from what follows: a noun means heavy, a verb means light.

7. وَ، فَـ، ثُمَّ - three speeds of “and”. وَ merely adds and says nothing about order or cause. فَـ, written joined to the next word, says “and then at once” or “and therefore” - the shortest result connector in the language: سَمِعَ الخَبَرَ فَاتَّصَلَ بي. ثُمَّ says “then, after a gap”. A paragraph built only on وَ reads like a list; alternating the three makes Arabic prose move.

8. Cause, four ways. لِأَنَّ takes a clause with an accusative subject (lesson 38); بِسَبَبِ takes one genitive noun; نَظَرًا لِـ is the formal register of بِسَبَبِ and also takes a noun - نَظَرًا لِسوءِ الأَحْوالِ الجَوِّيَّةِ. إِذْ is the odd one out: a light particle that hangs a whole explanatory clause onto a finished sentence, close to “since, as, given that” - لَمْ نُسافِرْ، إِذْ كانَتِ الأَسْعارُ مُرْتَفِعَةً. It never opens a paragraph and never takes a bare noun.

9. Result, four ways. لِذٰلِكَ (“so, that is why”) is the everyday one and heads its sentence. وَبِالتّالي (“consequently”) and وَمِنْ ثَمَّ (“hence”) are the written registers of the same idea; مِنْ ثَمَّ is frozen - ثَمَّ here is the old word for “there”, not the ثُمَّ of sequence. The fourth is the bare فَـ, which does the same work in one letter.

10. Sequence: the ـًا series. أَوَّلًا، ثانِيًا، ثالِثًا، وَأَخيرًا number the steps of an argument or a set of instructions. They head their sentence, usually with a following «،», and only the last normally carries the وَ. Inside one sentence the same job is done by ثُمَّ and بَعْدَ ذٰلِكَ, and a wrap-up by وَفي النِّهايَةِ.

11. Restatement. أَيْ is “that is, i.e.” and simply precedes the rephrasing: يَصِلُ الوَفْدُ غَدًا، أَيْ قَبْلَ المُؤْتَمَرِ بِيَوْمٍ. For a fuller restatement use بِعِبارَةٍ أُخْرى or بِمَعْنًى آخَرَ, each followed by a «،» and a complete sentence. Note the endings: أُخْرى is مَقْصور and shows no case, while آخَرَ is a diptote (lesson 41) with a fatḥa where you expect a kasra.

12. أَمّا … فَـ - the topic frame, and the فَ is not optional. أَمّا announces a topic, “as for X”. The noun after it is a مُبْتَدَأ and stays مَرْفوع; the comment must begin with فَـ:

أَمّا زَيْدٌ فَمُسافِرٌ. / أَمّا الطُّلّابُ الجُدُدُ فَيَبْدَؤُونَ الدِّراسَةَ غَدًا. / أَمّا في المَساءِ فَنَبْقى في البَيْتِ.

Dropping the فَ is the classic learner error here; the frame is broken without it. أَمّا is the main tool for spreading a comparison over two sentences, and it pairs with في المُقابِلِ.

13. Concession: رَغْمَ أَنَّ … فَإِنَّ, and never a لٰكِنَّ on top. With رَغْمَ أَنَّ، بِالرَّغْمِ مِنْ أَنَّ or مَعَ أَنَّ in front, the main clause is regularly introduced by فَـ, often as فَإِنَّ: رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ فَإِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ. What you may not do is mark the contrast twice - *رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ لٰكِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ. One marker per sentence: either رَغْمَ أَنَّ … فَـ, or two sentences joined by لٰكِنَّ.

14. إِذًا is not إِذا. إِذًا (also written إِذَنْ) is the accusative adverb “so then, in that case”, drawing a conclusion from what was just said: لَنْ يَحْضُرَ، إِذًا نَبْدَأُ بِدونِهِ. إِذا with a plain alif and no tanwīn is the conditional “if” of lesson 56 - the tanwīn is the only visible difference.

15. Where the endings hide. In pause a final short vowel is dropped, so the fatḥa of لٰكِنَّ الطّالِبَ is audible only mid-sentence; the ـًا words are the exception, since their tanwīn fatḥa is pronounced as a long ā. And unvocalized print writes none of these endings: لكن الطالب مجتهد shows you nothing. You still owe them, and a careful reader still says them aloud.

16. Not in this lesson. When بِسَبَبِ takes a مَصْدَر that keeps its own subject and object - بِسَبَبِ إِهْمالِ الشَّرِكَةِ الصِّيانَةَ - that is lesson 67. The dense connectors of news writing

  • إِثْرَ، بِشَأْنِ، في ظِلِّ - belong to the press register, lesson 69.

Forms & patterns

The toolbox by function. The middle column is the one to memorize with the word.

الوَظيفَةالأَداةWhat followsمِثال
additionأَيْضًاnothing (adverb)وَهُوَ رَخيصٌ أَيْضًا
additionكَذٰلِكَanythingوَكَذٰلِكَ تُقَدِّمُ دُروسًا مَسائِيَّةً
additionبِالإِضافَةِ إِلى / فَضْلًا عَنْاسم مَجْرورفَضْلًا عَنِ التَّكاليفِ
contrastلٰكِنَّاسم مَنْصوب / ضَميرلٰكِنَّ الوَقْتَ قَصيرٌ
contrastبَلْanything (after a negative)بَلْ طَلَبَ مُهْلَةً
contrastغَيْرَ أَنَّ / إِلّا أَنَّ / بَيْدَ أَنَّاسم مَنْصوب / ضَميرغَيْرَ أَنَّ التَّنْفيذَ صَعْبٌ
contrastفي المُقابِلِnothing (phrase)وَفي المُقابِلِ تَزْدَحِمُ صَيْفًا
causeلِأَنَّاسم مَنْصوب / ضَميرلِأَنَّ الطَّقْسَ بارِدٌ
causeبِسَبَبِاسم مَجْروربِسَبَبِ الاِزْدِحامِ
causeنَظَرًا لِـاسم مَجْرورنَظَرًا لِارْتِفاعِ الأَسْعارِ
causeإِذْa whole clauseإِذْ كانَتِ الأَبْوابُ مُغْلَقَةً
resultلِذٰلِكَa whole clauseلِذٰلِكَ أَجَّلْنا الرِّحْلَةَ
resultوَبِالتّالي / وَمِنْ ثَمَّa whole clauseوَمِنْ ثَمَّ أُلْغِيَ الاِجْتِماعُ
sequenceأَوَّلًا… ثانِيًا… وَأَخيرًاa whole clause eachأَوَّلًا نَجْمَعُ البَياناتِ
restatementأَيْa word or a phraseأَيْ بَعْدَ أُسْبوعَيْنِ
restatementبِعِبارَةٍ أُخْرىa whole clauseبِعِبارَةٍ أُخْرى، القَرارُ نِهائِيٌّ

Government: the classes. Everything above sorts into these rows, and the row is what you actually have to know.

ClassMembersWhat it does to the next wordمِثال
أَنَّ familyلٰكِنَّ، غَيْرَ أَنَّ، إِلّا أَنَّ، بَيْدَ أَنَّ، بِما أَنَّ، رَغْمَ أَنَّ، مَعَ أَنَّ، لِأَنَّnoun → النَّصْب; pronoun attachesلٰكِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ / لٰكِنَّهُ مُجْتَهِدٌ
prepositionalبِسَبَبِ، نَظَرًا لِـ، بِالإِضافَةِ إِلى، عَلى الرَّغْمِ مِنْ، فَضْلًا عَنْ، في المُقابِلِnoun → الجَرّ; no clause allowedبِسَبَبِ المَطَرِ / عَلى الرَّغْمِ مِنَ المَطَرِ
accusative adverbialأَيْضًا، أَوَّلًا، ثانِيًا، أَخيرًا، عِلاوَةً، إِذًاnothing - it is itself مَنْصوب with tanwīnوَصَلَ أَخي أَيْضًا
light particleوَ، فَـ، ثُمَّ، بَلْ، لٰكِنْ، أَيْ، إِذْnothing at allلٰكِنْ نَسيتُ الرَّقْمَ

لٰكِنَّ against لٰكِنْ

لٰكِنَّلٰكِنْ
shapeshadda + fatḥasukūn, no shadda
what may followa noun or an attached pronoun onlyanything, a verb included
effectthe noun goes مَنْصوبnone
مِثاللٰكِنَّ الرِّحْلَةَ كانَتْ كامِلَةًلٰكِنْ لَمْ أَجِدْ مَقْعَدًا

The three speeds of joining

الأَداةMeaningمِثال
وَplain addition, no orderدَرَسْتُ وَكَتَبْتُ التَّقْريرَ
فَـat once / therefore, written joinedسَمِعَ الخَبَرَ فَاتَّصَلَ بي
ثُمَّthen, after an intervalدَرَسْتُ ثُمَّ نِمْتُ

The أَمّا frame

ShapeمِثالEnglish
أَمّا + اسم مَرْفوع + فَ + خَبَرأَمّا زَيْدٌ فَمُسافِرٌAs for Zayd, he is away
أَمّا + اسم مَرْفوع + فَ + جُمْلَة فِعْلِيَّةأَمّا الطُّلّابُ فَيَبْدَؤُونَ غَدًاAs for the students, they start tomorrow
أَمّا + شِبْه جُمْلَة + فَ + جُمْلَةأَمّا في المَساءِ فَنَبْقى في البَيْتِIn the evening, we stay at home

Examples

العربيةEnglish
السَّكَنُ قَريبٌ مِنَ الجامِعَةِ، وَهُوَ رَخيصٌ أَيْضًا.The flat is close to the university, and it is cheap as well.
وَبِالإِضافَةِ إِلى ذٰلِكَ، فَتَحَتِ الشَّرِكَةُ فَرْعًا في الشَّمالِ.In addition to that, the company opened a branch in the north.
حاوَلْتُ أَنْ أَحْجِزَ مَقْعَدًا، لٰكِنَّ الرِّحْلَةَ كانَتْ كامِلَةً.I tried to book a seat, but the flight was full.
لَمْ يَرْفُضِ العَرْضَ، بَلْ طَلَبَ مُهْلَةً لِلتَّفْكيرِ.He did not turn the offer down; rather he asked for time to think.
الفِكْرَةُ مُمْتازَةٌ، غَيْرَ أَنَّ تَنْفيذَها يَحْتاجُ إِلى سَنَواتٍ.The idea is excellent, except that carrying it out needs years.
المَدينَةُ هادِئَةٌ في الشِّتاءِ، وَفي المُقابِلِ تَزْدَحِمُ في الصَّيْفِ.The city is quiet in winter; by contrast it gets crowded in summer.
نَظَرًا لِارْتِفاعِ الأَسْعارِ، أَجَّلْنا شِراءَ السَّيّارَةِ.In view of the rise in prices, we put off buying the car.
لَمْ نُسافِرْ هٰذا العامَ، إِذْ كانَتِ الأَحْوالُ الجَوِّيَّةُ سَيِّئَةً.We did not travel this year, since the weather conditions were bad.
أُغْلِقَ الطَّريقُ، وَلِذٰلِكَ فاتَنا القِطارُ.The road was closed, and that is why we missed the train.
لَمْ تَصِلِ الأَوْراقُ في مَوْعِدِها، وَمِنْ ثَمَّ أُلْغِيَ الاِجْتِماعُ.The papers did not arrive on time, and hence the meeting was cancelled.
أَوَّلًا نَجْمَعُ البَياناتِ، وَثانِيًا نُحَلِّلُها، وَأَخيرًا نَكْتُبُ التَّقْريرَ.First we collect the data, secondly we analyse it, and finally we write the report.
أَمّا الطُّلّابُ الجُدُدُ فَيَبْدَؤُونَ الدِّراسَةَ في الأُسْبوعِ القادِمِ.As for the new students, they begin their studies next week.
رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ فَإِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ حَتَّى المَساءِ.Although he is ill, he works every day until the evening.

Common mistakes

  • لٰكِنَّ الطّالِبُ مُجْتَهِدٌ -> لٰكِنَّ الطّالِبَ مُجْتَهِدٌ - a sister of إِنَّ: the noun behind it takes the fatḥa while the predicate keeps its ḍamma.
  • لٰكِنَّ نَسيتُ الرَّقْمَ -> لٰكِنْ نَسيتُ الرَّقْمَ - a verb can only follow the light لٰكِنْ. With the heavy one you must attach the pronoun: لٰكِنَّني نَسيتُ.
  • بِسَبَبِ أَنَّ الطَّريقَ مُغْلَقٌ -> لِأَنَّ الطَّريقَ مُغْلَقٌ - بِسَبَبِ governs a noun, never a clause. Either switch to لِأَنَّ or nominalize: بِسَبَبِ إِغْلاقِ الطَّريقِ.
  • بِسَبَبِ المَطَرُ -> بِسَبَبِ المَطَرِ - the same kasra is owed after عَلى الرَّغْمِ مِنْ، نَظَرًا لِـ، بِالإِضافَةِ إِلى.
  • رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ لٰكِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ -> رَغْمَ أَنَّهُ مَريضٌ فَإِنَّهُ يَعْمَلُ - one concession marker per sentence. رَغْمَ أَنَّ is answered by فَـ, not by a second “but”.
  • أَمّا الطُّلّابُ يَبْدَأونَ غَدًا -> أَمّا الطُّلّابُ فَيَبْدَؤُونَ غَدًا - the فَـ is the second half of the أَمّا frame and is compulsory, however long the topic phrase is.
  • أَمّا زَيْدًا فَمُسافِرٌ -> أَمّا زَيْدٌ فَمُسافِرٌ - أَمّا governs nothing; the word after it is an ordinary مُبْتَدَأ and stays مَرْفوع. It is not a member of the أَنَّ family.
  • أَيْضًا نَحْتاجُ إِلى مُتَرْجِمٍ -> نَحْتاجُ أَيْضًا إِلى مُتَرْجِمٍ - Arabic does not open a sentence with أَيْضًا the way English opens one with “also”. To start it, use وَكَذٰلِكَ.
  • أَوَّلا نَجْمَعُ البَياناتِ -> أَوَّلًا نَجْمَعُ البَياناتِ - these adverbs are their accusative ending. Without the tanwīn fatḥa the word is not an adverb at all.
  • إِذا لَنْ نَنْتَظِرَهُ -> إِذًا لَنْ نَنْتَظِرَهُ - “so then, in that case” is إِذًا with a tanwīn (or إِذَنْ). Plain إِذا is the conditional “if” and needs a whole condition after it.

Tips

  • Learn every connector as word + slot: “لٰكِنَّ + accusative noun”, “بِسَبَبِ + genitive noun”, “أَيْضًا + nothing”. The gloss alone will get the ending wrong.
  • One quick test covers most of the set: if the word ends in ـنَّ, the next noun takes a fatḥa. If it ends in a preposition, the next noun takes a kasra. If it ends in ـًا, it takes nothing.
  • When you are unsure whether a clause is allowed, nominalize instead. بِسَبَبِ تَأَخُّرِ القِطارِ is safe, idiomatic and shorter than the clause you were about to attempt.
  • Build the habit of starting sentences with a connector when you write Arabic. English tolerates bare succession; MSA reads as unfinished without وَ، فَـ، لِذٰلِكَ، أَمّا at the head.
  • Read a news paragraph and mark only the connectors. Unvocalized text hides the endings, but the connectors are the visible skeleton of the argument.
  • Watch the two shadow pairs: لٰكِنَّ / لٰكِنْ and إِذًا / إِذا. Both look identical in ordinary print, and in both the difference is decided by what follows.
  • Keep pairs for the same idea in two registers - بِسَبَبِ / نَظَرًا لِـ، لِذٰلِكَ / وَبِالتّالي، لٰكِنَّ / بَيْدَ أَنَّ - and choose by how formal the text is, not for variety’s sake.
  • Do not chase the newspaper connectors yet (إِثْرَ، بِشَأْنِ، في ظِلِّ). The twenty words here already carry a full argument.

C1 67 / 70

When verbal nouns and participles take objects

عَمَلُ المَصْدَرِ واسْمِ الفاعِل

In short

Lesson 54 gave you the verbal noun as a word: كَتَبَ gives كِتابَةٌ, اِسْتَقْبَلَ gives اِسْتِقْبالٌ. This lesson gives it as a miniature sentence. A مَصْدَر has not stopped being a verb on the inside: it can still name who performs the action and what the action lands on, and it hands those two nouns their endings the way a verb would. اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ الأُسْتاذَ is not three loose words - it is “the student waited for the professor” compressed into a single noun phrase, with الطّالِب as the doer and الأُسْتاذ as the object.

Arabic grammarians call this العَمَل, “working” - a noun doing a verb’s job. Two families of words do it: the مَصْدَر, and the participles you built in lesson 53, اسْمُ الفاعِلِ and اسْمُ المَفْعولِ. It is worth the effort because this is the machinery of formal prose: a news headline, a contract clause, a ministry statement and an academic abstract are largely chains of these phrases, and they are unreadable until you can tell the doer slot from the object slot. Nothing here is about building the nouns - 58 and 59 own that. This lesson is only about what they do to the words around them.

The rule

1. What “working” means. A verb assigns cases: فاعِل مَرْفوع and مَفْعول بِهِ مَنْصوب. A مَصْدَر does the same thing in a compressed way - it takes the doer as the second term of an إِضافَة (genitive, lesson 20) and leaves the object in the accusative. So the verb’s ḍamma on the subject becomes a kasra, while the object’s fatḥa is untouched. That single swap is the whole construction:

قَرَأَ الطّالِبُ الْكِتابَ ← قِراءَةُ الطّالِبِ الْكِتابَ.

The مَصْدَر itself takes whatever case its own slot in the outer sentence demands - subject, object, or genitive after a preposition or a ظَرْف - exactly as lesson 54 taught. Its internal government is a separate question from its external case, and keeping those two apart is most of the skill.

2. The subject slot is a real إِضافَة, so it obeys إِضافَة law. A مُضاف carries no tanwīn and no ال: قِراءَةُ الطّالِبِ, never قِراءَةٌ الطّالِبِ and never الْقِراءَةُ الطّالِبِ. The doer may equally be a pronoun suffix, which is the commonest case of all: قِراءَتُهُ الْكِتابَ “his reading the book”, اِسْتِقْبالُنا الضُّيوفَ “our receiving the guests”.

3. With no doer named, the object moves into the إِضافَة slot. If the doer is obvious or irrelevant, the object itself becomes the مُضاف إِلَيْهِ and goes genitive: بَعْدَ قِراءَةِ الْكِتابِ “after reading the book”, عِنْدَ تَوْقيعِ الاتِّفاقِ “at the signing of the agreement”. Only one noun can occupy that slot, so the moment a doer appears the object is pushed out into the accusative. Read the two patterns as a pair:

  • بَعْدَ قِراءَةِ الْكِتابِ - no doer, object genitive.
  • بَعْدَ قِراءَةِ الطّالِبِ الْكِتابَ - doer genitive, object accusative.

4. The ambiguity, and the modern escape hatch لِـ. A phrase like مُساعَدَةُ الطّالِبِ can mean “helping the student” (genitive = object) or “the student’s helping” (genitive = doer). Context usually decides, but modern written Arabic has a tidier habit: put the doer in the إِضافَة and attach the object with لِـ. مُساعَدَةُ الْمُعَلِّمِ لِلطّالِبِ is unmistakable, and اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ لِلْأُسْتاذِ is what a newspaper is more likely to print than the classical accusative. Both are correct. Read the accusative version, write the لِـ version - you will never be wrong and never be misunderstood.

5. The order is fixed: doer first, object second. الْمَصْدَر, then the genitive doer, then the accusative object. You cannot front the object, and you cannot separate the مَصْدَر from its genitive. Anything else in the phrase - adverbs, prepositional phrases, a حال - comes after the object: سَماعُ النّاسِ الْخَبَرَ فَجْأَةً.

6. The tanwīned مَصْدَر: recognition only. Classically a مَصْدَر that carries tanwīn instead of being مُضاف keeps the full verbal pattern - the doer stays مَرْفوع and the object stays مَنْصوب: يُعْجِبُني إِتْقانٌ الْعامِلُ عَمَلَهُ. This is genuine Arabic but it belongs to older and very literary registers; you will meet it in classical quotations and in older prose, and you should never produce it. Its modern equivalent is the ordinary إِضافَة: إِتْقانُ الْعامِلِ عَمَلَهُ. The same goes for a مَصْدَر with ال governing an accusative - grammatical in principle, stilted in practice.

7. How it is read and how it is written. In قِراءَةُ الْكِتابِ the ة is a مُضاف’s final letter, so it is never in pause and is pronounced as a full t. And the entire lesson is invisible in ordinary text: قراءة الطالب الكتاب shows the same letters whether the last word is the object (accusative) or something else (genitive). The only signals a normal reader gets are word order and sense - which is exactly why the لِـ of rule 4 has spread in modern prose, since ل is a letter and survives the loss of the vowel marks.

8. اسْمُ الفاعِلِ with ال works without conditions. With the article the active participle behaves like a relative clause - الْكاتِبُ = “the one who writes / wrote / is writing” - and it governs freely, in any time frame: الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسَ عَلَى السَّبّورَةِ هُوَ الْمُعَلِّمُ. Alongside the accusative you will see the participle made مُضاف to its own object: الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسِ. That إِضافَة is called لَفْظِيَّة - “formal” - because it is a spelling convenience only: it does not make the participle definite, which is why ال can sit on it when the word after it is itself definite, and why the same phrase can describe an indefinite noun, هٰذا رَجُلٌ حافِظُ الْعَهْدِ.

9. A bare اسْمُ الفاعِلِ needs two things at once. Without the article, the participle governs only when (a) it means now or in the future, never the past, and (b) it leans on a licensing word in front of it - a negation, a question particle, a مُبْتَدَأ it is the خَبَر of, a noun it describes (مَوْصوف), or a حال position. أَقادِمٌ أَخوكَ؟ has both: future sense, and the interrogative hamza propping it up. Note what أَخوكَ is there - the participle’s own فاعِل, and therefore مَرْفوع. A bare participle standing at the head of a sentence with nothing to lean on is rejected by the standard grammars: write a verb instead.

10. اسْمُ الْمَفْعولِ raises a نائِبُ فاعِلٍ. The passive participle works on the same conditions as the active one, but what it raises is a deputy agent (lesson 52), so that noun is مَرْفوع: مَحْمودٌ خُلُقُهُ “his character is praised”, أَمَفْهومَةٌ الْقَواعِدُ؟ “are the rules understood?”. A useful test: if you can turn the phrase into “whose X is Y-ed”, you are looking at an اسْمُ مَفْعول with its نائِب فاعِل.

11. What this lesson leaves alone. The clause-forming ما المَصْدَرِيَّة - بَعْدَما وَصَلَ - belongs to lesson 68, and the intensive shapes such as فَعّال, which govern like an اسْمُ فاعِل, are beyond this path. Formation of every noun used here is in 58 and 59.

Forms & patterns

Table 1 - the مَصْدَر with its doer named: doer in the genitive, object in the accusative.

التَّرْكيبالمَصْدَرالفاعِل (مَجْرور)المَفْعول (مَنْصوب)English
اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ الأُسْتاذَاِنْتِظارُالطّالِبِالأُسْتاذَthe student’s waiting for the professor
بَعْدَ سَماعِ النّاسِ الْخَبَرَسَماعِالنّاسِالْخَبَرَafter the people heard the news
دِراسَةُ اللَّجْنَةِ التَّقْريرَدِراسَةُاللَّجْنَةِالتَّقْريرَthe committee’s studying of the report
مُساعَدَةُ الْمُعَلِّمِ الطُّلّابَمُساعَدَةُالْمُعَلِّمِالطُّلّابَthe teacher’s helping the students
اِسْتِقْبالُ الرَّئيسِ الْوَفْدَاِسْتِقْبالُالرَّئيسِالْوَفْدَthe president’s receiving the delegation
قِراءَتُهُ الْكِتابَقِراءَتُهُـهُالْكِتابَhis reading the book

Table 2 - no doer named: the object itself becomes the مُضاف إِلَيْهِ. The last row is the لِـ variant of rule 4: there a doer is named, and the object hangs off لِـ instead of that slot.

التَّرْكيبالمَصْدَرالمَفْعول (مُضاف إِلَيْهِ، مَجْرور)English
بَعْدَ قِراءَةِ الْكِتابِقِراءَةِالْكِتابِafter reading the book
عِنْدَ تَوْقيعِ الاتِّفاقِتَوْقيعِالاتِّفاقِat the signing of the agreement
كِتابَةُ الرِّسالَةِكِتابَةُالرِّسالَةِwriting the letter
اِسْتِقْبالُ الْوَفْدِاِسْتِقْبالُالْوَفْدِreceiving the delegation
مُساعَدَةُ الطُّلّابِمُساعَدَةُالطُّلّابِhelping the students (or: the students’ helping)
مُساعَدَةُ الْمُعَلِّمِ لِلطُّلّابِمُساعَدَةُلِلطُّلّابِ (مَجْرور بِاللّامِ)the teacher’s helping the students (the لِـ version)

Table 3 - the tanwīned مَصْدَر: classical, for recognition only. The doer, if named, stays nominative.

التَّرْكيبُ الْقَديمُالفاعِلالمَفْعولالْمُعادِلُ الْحَديثُ
يُعْجِبُني إِتْقانٌ الْعامِلُ عَمَلَهُالْعامِلُ (مَرْفوع)عَمَلَهُ (مَنْصوب)إِتْقانُ الْعامِلِ عَمَلَهُ
عَجِبْتُ مِنْ إِهْمالٍ الْواجِبَغَيْرُ مَذْكورٍالْواجِبَ (مَنْصوب)إِهْمالِ الْواجِبِ

Table 4 - the words used above, so you can see مَصْدَر and participle side by side. Formation is lesson 53 and lesson 54; here they are only the raw material.

الجَذْرالوَزْنالفِعْلالمَصْدَراسْمُ الفاعِلاسْمُ الْمَفْعول
ك-ت-بIكَتَبَكِتابَةٌكاتِبٌمَكْتوبٌ
د-ر-سIدَرَسَدِراسَةٌدارِسٌمَدْروسٌ
ق-ر-أI (مَهْموزُ اللّامِ)قَرَأَقِراءَةٌقارِئٌمَقْروءٌ
س-ع-دIIIساعَدَمُساعَدَةٌمُساعِدٌمُساعَدٌ
ق-ب-لXاِسْتَقْبَلَاِسْتِقْبالٌمُسْتَقْبِلٌمُسْتَقْبَلٌ

Table 5 - what licenses a bare اسْمُ فاعِل, i.e. one without ال. The last row needs no licenser at all.

المُسَوِّغمِثالEnglish
نَفْيما مُسافِرَةٌ أُخْتي غَدًاmy sister is not travelling tomorrow
اِسْتِفْهامأَقادِمٌ أَخوكَ؟is your brother coming?
خَبَرٌ عَنْ مُبْتَدَإٍأَنا قارِئٌ الْكِتابَ غَدًاI am going to read the book tomorrow
مَوْصوفجاءَ رَجُلٌ حافِظٌ عَهْدَهُa man who keeps his word came
حالدَخَلَ حامِلًا كُتُبَهُhe came in carrying his books
مُحَلًّى بِـ«ال»الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسَ / الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسِthe one writing the lesson

Examples

العربيةEnglish
طالَ اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ الأُسْتاذَ أَمامَ الْمَكْتَبِ.The student’s wait for the professor outside the office dragged on.
بَعْدَ سَماعِ النّاسِ الْخَبَرَ، خَرَجوا إِلَى الشّارِعِ.After the people heard the news, they went out into the street.
لا يَجوزُ التَّوْقيعُ قَبْلَ قِراءَةِ الْعَقْدِ كامِلًا.Signing is not permitted before reading the contract in full.
عِنْدَ تَوْقيعِ الاتِّفاقِ حَضَرَ وَزيرانِ.Two ministers were present at the signing of the agreement.
مُساعَدَةُ الْجارِ جارَهُ أَمْرٌ طَبيعِيٌّ.A neighbour’s helping his neighbour is a natural thing.
مِنَ الْمُنْتَظَرِ اسْتِقْبالُ الرَّئيسِ الْوَفْدَ غَدًا.The president is expected to receive the delegation tomorrow.
تَأَخَّرَ الْقَرارُ بِسَبَبِ مُراجَعَةِ الْوِزارَةِ لِلْأَرْقامِ.The decision was delayed because the ministry was reviewing the figures.
الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسَ عَلَى السَّبّورَةِ هُوَ الْمُعَلِّمُ الْجَديدُ.The one writing the lesson on the board is the new teacher.
جاءَنا رَجُلٌ حافِظٌ عَهْدَهُ.A man who keeps his word came to us.
أَقادِمٌ أَخوكَ مَعَنا إِلَى الْمَطارِ؟Is your brother coming with us to the airport?
ما مُسافِرَةٌ أُخْتي هٰذا الأُسْبوعَ.My sister is not travelling this week.
أَنا قارِئٌ الْكِتابَ كُلَّهُ قَبْلَ الامْتِحانِ.I am going to read the whole book before the exam.
دَخَلَ الطّالِبُ حامِلًا كُتُبَهُ.The student came in carrying his books.
هُوَ رَجُلٌ مَحْمودٌ خُلُقُهُ بَيْنَ زُمَلائِهِ.He is a man whose character is praised among his colleagues.

Common mistakes

  • اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ الأُسْتاذِ -> اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ الأُسْتاذَ - once the doer has taken the إِضافَة slot, the object cannot also be genitive. It is the مَفْعول بِهِ of the مَصْدَر, so fatḥa. If you dislike the accusative, write اِنْتِظارُ الطّالِبِ لِلْأُسْتاذِ.
  • قِراءَةٌ الْكِتابِ -> قِراءَةُ الْكِتابِ - a مُضاف never carries tanwīn. The moment a genitive follows, the ـٌ goes.
  • الْقِراءَةُ الْكِتابِ -> قِراءَةُ الْكِتابِ - and a مُضاف never carries ال either. The definiteness comes from the second term. (The one exception is the participle’s إِضافَة لَفْظِيَّة of rule 8: الْكاتِبُ الدَّرْسِ is right, because that إِضافَة is formal only.)
  • بَعْدَ سَماعِ النّاسُ الْخَبَرَ -> بَعْدَ سَماعِ النّاسِ الْخَبَرَ - the doer of a مَصْدَر is not مَرْفوع. It is مَجْرور in form, however loudly your ear says “subject”.
  • عِنْدَ تَوْقيعُ الاتِّفاقِ -> عِنْدَ تَوْقيعِ الاتِّفاقِ - عِنْدَ and بَعْدَ are ظُروف, and what follows them is a مُضاف إِلَيْهِ, so the مَصْدَر itself is genitive before it governs anything.
  • أَنا كاتِبُ الرِّسالَةَ -> أَنا كاتِبُ الرِّسالَةِ - you cannot mix the two constructions. Either the participle is مُضاف and the noun is genitive (كاتِبُ الرِّسالَةِ), or the participle keeps its tanwīn and the noun is accusative (كاتِبٌ الرِّسالَةَ).
  • هُوَ كاتِبٌ الرِّسالَةَ أَمْسِ -> هُوَ الَّذي كَتَبَ الرِّسالَةَ أَمْسِ - a bare participle cannot govern with past meaning. Use a verb, or use the article: هُوَ الْكاتِبُ الرِّسالَةَ أَمْسِ.
  • كاتِبٌ الطّالِبُ الدَّرْسَ -> الطّالِبُ كاتِبٌ الدَّرْسَ - an indefinite participle needs something in front of it to lean on. As the خَبَر of a fronted مُبْتَدَأ it is fine; opening a sentence with it is not.
  • مَحْمودٌ خُلُقَهُ -> مَحْمودٌ خُلُقُهُ - what an اسْمُ مَفْعول raises is a نائِب فاعِل, and a نائِب فاعِل is مَرْفوع. The accusative object belongs to the active participle.
  • أَقادِمٌ أَخاكَ؟ -> أَقادِمٌ أَخوكَ؟ - the noun after the participle here is its فاعِل, not its object; and أَخ is one of الأَسْماء الخَمْسَة, so the nominative shows as و.

Tips

  • Count the nouns after the مَصْدَر. One noun, and it is genitive - it is usually the object. Two nouns, and the first (genitive) is the doer, the second (accusative) is the object. That single question resolves most press sentences.
  • Translate every such phrase into an English clause before you move on: اِسْتِقْبالُ الرَّئيسِ الْوَفْدَ becomes “the president received the delegation”. If you cannot produce a clause, you have not parsed it.
  • Build the phrase from a real sentence, never from thin air: write the verbal sentence first, then demote the verb to its مَصْدَر, drop the subject into the إِضافَة, and leave the object alone.
  • For your own writing, prefer the لِـ version - مُراجَعَةُ الْوِزارَةِ لِلْأَرْقامِ. It is standard modern usage, it is unambiguous, and it survives unvocalized text.
  • Say the ة out loud as a t whenever the word is a مُضاف. Hearing قِراءَةُ الْكِتابِ with its t is a fast reminder that the phrase has not ended.
  • With participles, treat ال as the safe route: with the article they govern in any tense and need no licenser, so most of what you want to say can be said with الْـ plus an accusative.
  • Ignore the tanwīned مَصْدَر for production entirely. Recognize it in older prose, then convert it mentally to an إِضافَة and carry on.
  • Newspapers are the drill for this lesson. Take one headline a day, mark the مَصْدَر, mark the doer, mark the object, and rewrite it as a full verbal sentence.

C1 68 / 70

The many faces of ma and la

اسْتِعْمالاتُ «ما» و«لا»

In short

Arabic spells at least six different words as ما and five as لا. They are not shades of one meaning; they are separate grammatical objects that happen to share two letters. ما can be a question word, a relative pronoun, a negator, a clause-to-noun converter, a conditional particle, or padding with no meaning at all - and each choice changes the endings of the words around it. لا is the same story in miniature: the same two letters negate a present verb, forbid an action, deny a whole category, coordinate two nouns, or answer “no”.

Every one of these has appeared somewhere in this path, introduced with whatever structure needed it. At C1 the job runs the other way: you meet ما in a sentence and must decide within a second which ما it is, because the ending you put on the next word depends on that decision. So this lesson gives a test for each face rather than new rules, and collects the compounds - إِنَّما، رُبَّما، قَلَّما، بَعْدَما، لِئَلّا - that are best learned whole.

The rule

1. The faces of ما, and the tests that separate them. Work down the list; the first test that fits is your answer.

  1. Does ما open a sentence that ends in «؟» - اِسْتِفْهامِيَّة, “what”.
  2. Can you swap ما for الَّذي / الشَّيْءُ الَّذي - مَوْصولَة, “that which”.
  3. Does a past verb follow, and is something denied - نافِيَة.
  4. Does a nominal sentence follow that you could rewrite with لَيْسَ - حِجازِيَّة.
  5. Could you replace ما + verb with a مَصْدَر - مَصْدَرِيَّة, usually with a time flavour.
  6. Are there two jussive verbs, “whatever … then” - شَرْطِيَّة.
  7. Is it welded to another particle - إِنَّ، رُبَّ، قَلَّ، طالَ، بَعْدَ، كُلَّ، إِذا - زائِدَة / كافّة, with no meaning of its own.

2. ما الاِسْتِفْهامِيَّة, and why a verb needs ماذا. Interrogative ما asks about non-humans (مَنْ asks about people) and stands directly in front of a noun or pronoun: ما اسْمُ الشَّرِكَةِ؟، ما رَأْيُكَ؟، ما الفَرْقُ بَيْنَ النَّصَّيْنِ؟ In front of a verb modern written Arabic uses ماذا: ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟، ماذا قالَ المُديرُ؟ This is not style but safety - ما in front of a verb reads as the negator of rule 5, so ما تَفْعَلُ؟ says “you are not doing” to a modern eye and ما فَعَلْتَ؟ is flatly “you did not do”. Keep the division: ما + اسْم، ماذا + فِعْل.

3. After a preposition the interrogative loses its alif. This is the clearest mark of interrogative ما, and it is worth producing, not only recognising. The preposition and ما fuse and the alif is deleted, leaving a bare fatḥa: عَنْ + ما = عَمَّ، مِنْ + ما = مِمَّ، في

  • ما = فيمَ، بِـ + ما = بِمَ، لِـ + ما = لِمَ، عَلى + ما = عَلامَ. Hence عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ؟ “what are you looking for?”, لِمَ تَأَخَّرْتَ؟ “why were you late?” (لِمَ is the formal twin of لِماذا).

The deletion hits only the interrogative. Relative ما keeps its alif in the same environment, which gives a clean minimal pair: عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ؟ against بَحَثْتُ عَمّا طَلَبْتَ “I looked for what you asked for”. Two words, one alif, two different sentences.

4. ما المَوْصولَة, and the frames modern prose builds on it. Relative ما means “that which, whatever” and needs a صِلَة - a full clause - behind it, with a pronoun pointing back. That pronoun is normally dropped when it is a direct object: قَرَأْتُ ما كَتَبْتَ (= ما كَتَبْتَهُ). The whole ما-phrase then behaves as a single noun and takes whatever case its slot demands: ما لَدَيَّ قَليلٌ، اِسْتَمَعْتُ إِلى ما قالَتْهُ.

Own these frames as vocabulary: ما يَلي “the following”, بِما في ذٰلِكَ “including”, ما يُسَمّى “the so-called”, ما يَقْرُبُ مِنْ “nearly”, عَلى ما يَبْدو “apparently”, كُلُّ ما “everything that”. Note the two-word كُلُّ ما against the one-word كُلَّما of lesson 38: كُلُّ ما قُلْتَهُ صَحيحٌ is not كُلَّما قُلْتَ “whenever you said”.

5. ما النّافِيَة, and the lookalike ما زالَ. ما plus a past verb denies it: ما وَصَلَ الرَّدُّ حَتّى الآنَ. The past verb is مَبْنِيّ, so nothing changes shape - which makes this the safe fallback when the jussive of لَمْ deserts you mid-sentence (lesson 37). One warning about a pair that looks like rule 7: in ما زالَ and ما عادَ the ما really is this negator - “it has not ceased” = “it still is”. In ما دامَ it is the مَصْدَرِيَّة of rule 7. Identical shape, opposite analysis; both are sisters of كانَ, so both take an accusative predicate, which is the part that matters when you write.

6. ما الحِجازِيَّة: ما working like لَيْسَ. ما can negate a nominal sentence directly, leaving the مُبْتَدَأ مَرْفوع and putting the خَبَر in the accusative just as لَيْسَ does: ما الأَمْرُ سَهْلًا. Commoner in print is the variant with a redundant بِـ, which sends the predicate into the genitive with no change of meaning: ما هٰذا بِأَمْرٍ سَهْلٍ، ما القَرارُ بِنِهائِيٍّ.

Two things cancel the effect. If the predicate is moved in front of the subject, or if إِلّا comes between them, ما governs nothing and you get an ordinary negated nominal sentence with everything مَرْفوع: ما هٰذا إِلّا رَأْيٌ شَخْصِيٌّ “this is nothing but a personal opinion”. That ما … إِلّا frame is very common (lesson 62), so the nominative in it is worth drilling.

7. ما المَصْدَرِيَّة: turning a clause into a noun. This ما plus a verb equals a مَصْدَر (lesson 54). It rarely stands alone in MSA; it lives glued to a time word or a preposition, where it lets a verb fill a slot that would otherwise demand a noun:

  • بَعْدَما وَصَلَ = بَعْدَ وُصولِهِ; likewise قَبْلَما، مِثْلَما، بِقَدْرِ ما، رَغْمَ ما.
  • كُلَّما - the ظَرْفِيَّة variant, “every time that”: كُلَّما تَأَخَّرْنا اِرْتَفَعَتِ التَّكْلِفَةُ.
  • ما دامَ “for as long as”: سَنَبْقى في الحَديقَةِ ما دامَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا. It is frozen in the past shape (ما دُمْتُ، ما دامَتْ) whatever the time meaning, its predicate is مَنْصوب, and its clause always leans on a main clause in front of it.

8. ما الشَّرْطِيَّة: “whatever”, with two jussives. ما joins the جَوازِم of lesson 56: the condition verb and the answer verb both go into the مَجْزوم - ما تَزْرَعْهُ في الرَّبيعِ تَحْصُدْهُ في الخَريفِ. Its emphatic partner مَهْما “no matter what” never refers to people and normally needs فَـ before an answer opening with لَنْ: مَهْما حاوَلْتَ فَلَنْ تُقْنِعَهُ.

9. ما الزّائِدَة والكافّة: the ما that means nothing. Welded to another particle, ما either adds emphasis (زائِدَة) or cancels the host’s government (كافّة). The second kind is where endings get lost:

  • إِنَّما = إِنَّ + كافّة ما, “only, merely”. The ما has disarmed إِنَّ, so it no longer puts anything in the accusative and a plain nominal sentence follows: إِنَّما النَّجاحُ نَتيجَةُ عَمَلٍ طَويلٍ. Same for أَنَّما، كَأَنَّما، لٰكِنَّما.
  • رُبَّما “perhaps” - رُبَّ is a preposition and could never take a verb; ما frees it: رُبَّما يَتَأَخَّرُ القِطارُ.
  • قَلَّما “rarely” and طالَما - here ما disarms a verb so a whole sentence can follow: قَلَّما يَتَغَيَّبُ عَنِ العَمَلِ، طالَما حَذَّرْناهُ. Usage note: طالَما classically means “how often”, but today طالَما أَنَّ has largely taken over as “as long as, given that”.
  • Purely decorative ما after conditionals: إِذا ما وَصَلَتِ الرِّسالَةُ، مَتى ما، أَيْنَما. Delete it and the sense is unchanged. Also كَثيرًا ما “often”.

10. The five لا. لا is simpler, because four of the five are told apart by the ending on the very next word.

  • النّافِيَة لِلْمُضارِع - “does not”, verb مَرْفوع: لا أَعْرِفُ العُنْوانَ، لا يَعْمَلونَ يَوْمَ الجُمُعَةِ (the نون of الأَفْعالِ الخَمْسَةِ stays).
  • النّاهِيَة - “don’t”, verb مَجْزوم: لا تَنْسَ جَوازَ سَفَرِكَ، لا تَقْلَقوا.
  • النّافِيَة لِلْجِنْس - “no … at all”, with a bare indefinite noun مَبْنِيّ عَلى الفَتْح, no tanwīn and no ال: لا شَكَّ، لا بُدَّ، لا داعِيَ لِلْقَلَقِ (lesson 63). Add the frozen لا سِيَّما “especially”, built on the same لا: الأَسْعارُ مُرْتَفِعَةٌ، لا سِيَّما في المُدُنِ الكَبيرَةِ.
  • العاطِفَة - “not”, joining two single words and copying the case of the first: حَضَرَ المُديرُ لا نائِبُهُ، نَحْتاجُ إِلى حُلولٍ لا وُعودٍ. It works only after an affirmative statement or a command; to correct a negative you need بَلْ (lesson 25).
  • الجَوابِيَّة - the standalone answer: لا، لَمْ أَرَهُ.

11. أَلّا and لِئَلّا. أَنْ + لا fuse in writing into أَلّا, verb still مَنْصوب: أَرْجو أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ. With لِـ in front you get the standard “so that … not” - لِئَلّا, spelled with a hamza on a yāʾ seat: خَرَجْنا مُبَكِّرًا لِئَلّا نَتَأَخَّرَ. كَيْلا / لِكَيْلا mean the same. Do not confuse أَلّا (shadda) with أَلا, the literary opening particle “now then”, a different word entirely.

12. The flag: لا تَكْتُبُ and لا تَكْتُبْ can sound identical. لا تَكْتُبُ “you do not write” and لا تَكْتُبْ “do not write” differ only in the final vowel, and in pausal reading that vowel is not pronounced at all. Two places give it away: the plural, where the jussive drops the نون (لا تَكْتُبونَ against لا تَكْتُبوا), and the weak verbs, where the jussive amputates a visible letter (لا تَنْسى / لا تَنْسَ، لا تَقولُ / لا تَقُلْ).

13. What is not here. The exclamatory ما of ما أَجْمَلَ السَّماءَ! is lesson 64 - a seventh ما, an indefinite noun taking an accusative after it. Oath particles, ما as an indefinite noun (“a certain”), and the older uses of both letters belong to lesson 70.

Forms & patterns

The faces of ما. The middle column is the test; run it before you decide any ending.

الوَجْهWhat followsTestمِثال
اِسْتِفْهامِيَّةاسْم (ماذا + فِعْل)ما opens a sentence ending in «؟»ما رَأْيُكَ؟ / ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟
مَوْصولَةجُمْلَةُ صِلَةٍswap in الَّذي / الشَّيْءُ الَّذيقَرَأْتُ ما كَتَبْتَ.
نافِيَةفِعْلٌ ماضٍswap in لَمْ + مُضارِعما وَصَلَ الرَّدُّ.
حِجازِيَّةجُمْلَةٌ اسْمِيَّةswap in لَيْسَما هٰذا بِأَمْرٍ سَهْلٍ.
مَصْدَرِيَّة / ظَرْفِيَّةفِعْل، after a time wordswap the clause for a مَصْدَربَعْدَما وَصَلَ
شَرْطِيَّةفِعْلانِ مَجْزومانِ”whatever … then”ما تَزْرَعْهُ تَحْصُدْهُ.
زائِدَة / كافّةglued to إِنَّ، رُبَّ، إِذاdelete it; the sense survivesإِنَّما، رُبَّما

Preposition + ما: the alif tells you which ما it is. Left of the divide, a question; right of it, a relative clause.

الجارّاِسْتِفْهاممِثالمَوْصول
عَنْعَمَّعَمَّ تَبْحَثُ؟عَمّا حَدَثَ
مِنْمِمَّمِمَّ صُنِعَ هٰذا؟أَكْثَرُ مِمّا تَوَقَّعْنا
فيفيمَفيمَ تُفَكِّرُ؟فيما يَتَعَلَّقُ بِالعَقْدِ
بِـبِمَبِمَ أَجابَ؟بِما اِتَّفَقْنا عَلَيْهِ
لِـلِمَلِمَ تَأَخَّرْتَ؟مُتابَعَةً لِما سَبَقَ
عَلىعَلامَعَلامَ اِتَّفَقْتُمْ؟عَلى ما يَبْدو
إِلىإِلامَإِلامَ تُشيرُ؟إِلى ما قالَهُ

The faces of لا.

الوَجْهWhat followsEnding it forcesمِثال
النّافِيَةفِعْل مُضارِعمَرْفوع: ـُ / ـونَلا أَعْرِفُ العُنْوانَ.
النّاهِيَةفِعْل مُضارِعمَجْزوم: ـْ / حَذْفلا تَنْسَ جَوازَ سَفَرِكَ.
النّافِيَة لِلْجِنْساسْمٌ نَكِرَةمَبْنِيّ عَلى الفَتْح، بِلا تَنْوينلا داعِيَ لِلْقَلَقِ.
العاطِفَةاسْمٌ مُفْرَدthe case of the word before itحَضَرَ المُديرُ لا نائِبُهُ.
الجَوابِيَّةnothing-لا، لَمْ أَرَهُ.
أَلّا / لِئَلّافِعْل مُضارِعمَنْصوب: ـَأَرْجو أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ.

Negation against prohibition. Only the first row is invisible; learn the rest as the audible proof of the rule. Left out: the past-tense لا of the old prayer formulas, which is not modern usage.

الفِعْلنَفْي (مَرْفوع)نَهْي (مَجْزوم)Visible difference?
كَتَبَ - أَنْتَلا تَكْتُبُلا تَكْتُبْonly the final vowel - lost at a pause
كَتَبَ - أَنْتُمْلا تَكْتُبونَلا تَكْتُبواyes: the نون drops
نَسِيَ - أَنْتَلا تَنْسىلا تَنْسَyes: the ى goes
مَشى - أَنْتَلا تَمْشيلا تَمْشِyes: the ي goes
قالَ - أَنْتَلا تَقولُلا تَقُلْyes: the و goes

Examples

العربيةEnglish
ماذا قالَ المُديرُ في الاجْتِماعِ؟What did the manager say in the meeting?
عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ في هٰذِهِ المِلَفّاتِ؟What are you looking for in these files?
لَمْ أَفْهَمْ ما كَتَبْتَهُ في الهامِشِ.I did not understand what you wrote in the margin.
كُلُّ ما قُلْتَهُ في تَقْريرِكَ صَحيحٌ.Everything you said in your report is correct.
ما وَصَلَ الرَّدُّ حَتّى مَساءِ أَمْسِ.The reply had not arrived by yesterday evening.
ما هٰذا بِأَمْرٍ سَهْلٍ كَما تَظُنُّ.This is not an easy matter, as you think.
اِتَّصَلَ بي بَعْدَما أَغْلَقْنا المَكْتَبَ.He called me after we had closed the office.
سَنَبْقى في الحَديقَةِ ما دامَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا.We will stay in the park as long as the weather is nice.
ما تَزْرَعْهُ في الرَّبيعِ تَحْصُدْهُ في الخَريفِ.Whatever you sow in spring you reap in autumn.
إِنَّما الخِلافُ عَلى التَّفاصيلِ.The disagreement is only about the details.
قَلَّما يَتَغَيَّبُ زَميلي عَنِ العَمَلِ.My colleague rarely misses work.
لا تَنْسَ جَوازَ سَفَرِكَ، ولا تَتَأَخَّرْ عَلَيْنا.Do not forget your passport, and do not be late for us.
نَحْتاجُ إِلى حُلولٍ لا وُعودٍ، ولا داعِيَ لِلتَّأْجيلِ.We need solutions, not promises, and there is no need to postpone.
خَرَجْنا مُبَكِّرًا لِئَلّا نَتَأَخَّرَ عَنِ المَوْعِدِ.We left early so that we would not be late for the appointment.

Common mistakes

  • ما تَفْعَلُ؟ -> ماذا تَفْعَلُ؟ - in front of a verb the question word is ماذا. Bare ما plus a verb reads as a negation, so the “question” states that you are not doing it.
  • عَنْ ما تَبْحَثُ؟ -> عَمَّ تَبْحَثُ؟ - the interrogative ما drops its alif and fuses with the preposition: عَمَّ، مِمَّ، فيمَ، بِمَ، لِمَ، عَلامَ.
  • بَحَثْتُ عَمَّ طَلَبْتَ -> بَحَثْتُ عَمّا طَلَبْتَ - the mirror error. Only the interrogative shortens; the relative keeps its alif, and that alif is the reader’s signal that no question is being asked.
  • إِنَّما النَّجاحَ نَتيجَةُ عَمَلٍ -> إِنَّما النَّجاحُ نَتيجَةُ عَمَلٍ - the ما of إِنَّما is كافّة: it cancels إِنَّ’s power to put its اسْم in the accusative, leaving a plain nominal sentence.
  • لا تَنْسَى المَوْعِدَ -> لا تَنْسَ المَوْعِدَ - لا النّاهِيَة takes the jussive, and a weak-final verb loses its last letter there. Same for لا تَمْشِ، لا تَبْكِ.
  • ما دامَ الجَوُّ جَميلٌ -> ما دامَ الجَوُّ جَميلًا - ما دامَ is a sister of كانَ, so its predicate is مَنْصوب, exactly as with ما زالَ and لَيْسَ.
  • كُلَّما قُلْتَهُ صَحيحٌ -> كُلُّ ما قُلْتَهُ صَحيحٌ - two words with a ḍamma on كُلّ mean “everything that”; the single word كُلَّما means “whenever” and needs two clauses behind it.
  • ما تَزْرَعُهُ تَحْصُدُهُ -> ما تَزْرَعْهُ تَحْصُدْهُ - conditional ما is one of the جَوازِم and jussives both verbs, not only the first.
  • حَضَرَ المُديرُ لا نائِبَهُ -> حَضَرَ المُديرُ لا نائِبُهُ - لا العاطِفَة brings no case of its own; the second noun repeats the case of the first, here a nominative subject.
  • أُريدُ أَنْ لا تَتَأَخَّرَ -> أُريدُ أَلّا تَتَأَخَّرَ - أَنْ and لا are written as one word, and with لِـ in front the result is لِئَلّا, never لِأَنْ لا.

Tips

  • Run the seven-step test of rule 1 out loud on one newspaper paragraph a day. Naming the ما correctly builds faster than reciting the categories, and it is the skill that helps you read.
  • When ما is followed by a past verb, only two readings are live: negation or the relative. Ask whether something is being denied - that single question settles most real cases.
  • The alif survives unvocalized text, so it is a free clue: عم، مم، فيم، بم announce a question; عما، مما، فيما، بما announce a relative clause.
  • Learn the compounds - إِنَّما، رُبَّما، قَلَّما، طالَما، كُلَّما، بَعْدَما، لا بُدَّ، لا سِيَّما، أَلّا، لِئَلّا - as single vocabulary items. Re-analysing them as you write is slow and produces exactly the mistakes above.
  • For لا, decide first whether you are telling someone not to do something. If yes, the verb ends in a sukūn or loses a letter; if no, it keeps its ḍamma or its نون. In front of a verb there is no third option.
  • Drill لا تَنْسى / لا تَنْسَ and لا تَكْتُبونَ / لا تَكْتُبوا aloud. A vowel-only contrast will not stick, but these visible ones will, and they carry the same rule.
  • Do not force ما الحِجازِيَّة into your own writing. لَيْسَ says the same with fewer conditions; keep ما … بِـ for reading, and produce it only in phrases you have actually met.

C1 69 / 70

The register of the press

لُغَةُ الصِّحافَة

In short

A front page hands you one long sentence and no help with it. Fully marked, a typical headline runs: وَزيرُ خارِجِيَّةِ جُمْهورِيَّةِ مِصْرَ العَرَبِيَّةِ يَبْحَثُ في الرِّياضِ اسْتِئْنافَ المُفاوَضاتِ - “the foreign minister of the Arab Republic of Egypt discusses the resumption of the talks in Riyadh”. Nothing in it is new grammar: four words welded into one إِضافَة chain, an imperfect verb standing for a past event, a مَصْدَر doing the work of a second verb. What is new is the density - press Arabic packs more structure per word than any register you have met, and prints none of the endings that hold that structure together.

Here is the same line as a paper sets it - the bare unvocalized page, borrowed once more because a headline is exactly where you meet it: وزير خارجية جمهورية مصر العربية يبحث في الرياض استئناف المفاوضات. What this lesson builds is the set of parsing habits that survive that deletion: where a chain ends, which noun a trailing adjective belongs to, the twenty-odd مَصادِر and compound prepositions the style runs on, and how a source line is worded. Older and more literary registers belong to lesson 70; this is the Arabic of today’s news.

The rule

1. What a headline deletes, and what it puts in. A headline is a compressed sentence, and the compressions are regular:

  • The vowel marks go, as they do in most printed Arabic - the Qur’an, poetry and children’s books are the standing exceptions, and this path is another.
  • The imperfect stands for a completed event: الرَّئيسُ يَزورُ تونِسَ, exactly like English “President visits Tunisia”. The article’s body then switches to the past: زارَ الرَّئيسُ تونِسَ.
  • The topic comes first: a headline opens with the noun it is about (الرَّئيسُ يَزورُ…), where an ordinary narrative sentence opens with its verb (زارَ الرَّئيسُ…).
  • The verb may vanish altogether, leaving a pure nominal phrase built on a مَصْدَر: ارْتِفاعُ أَسْعارِ النِّفْطِ بَعْدَ قَرارِ التَّحالُفِ. This is the most typical shape of all.

2. The long إِضافَة chain: only the last term is definite. Lesson 20 gave you two-term إِضافَة and lesson 42 extended it; the press runs the same machine to four and five terms: اجْتِماعُ وُزَراءِ خارِجِيَّةِ دُوَلِ الاتِّحادِ الأُوروبِّيِّ - “the meeting of the foreign ministers of the states of the European Union”. Three properties do all the parsing work:

  • Only the first term takes the case the sentence assigns (اجْتِماعُ, nominative). Every later term is genitive, no exception.
  • Only the last term may carry الـ, or be a proper noun, or take an attached pronoun. A term in the middle can never be definite by itself.
  • Nothing may be inserted between the links - no adjective, no preposition, no number.

So the chain closes at the first word carrying الـ or a proper name, and everything that follows is commentary on one of the links. Read وَزيرُ - خارِجِيَّةِ - جُمْهورِيَّةِ - مِصْرَ and stop: مِصْرَ is a proper noun, so the chain has ended and العَرَبِيَّةِ after it is an adjective.

3. The trailing adjective: case first, then gender. Because adjectives have to wait until the chain is complete, the reader has to send each one back to its own noun. Case does it:

  • وَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ الأَمْريكِيُّ - nominative, so it can only describe وَزيرُ (also nominative). The American Secretary of State.
  • وَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ الأَمْريكِيَّةِ - genitive and feminine, so it describes الخارِجِيَّةِ: the minister of the American foreign ministry, a different claim.

On the bare page the case is invisible, but gender is not: the ة of الأَمْريكِيَّة is printed, so whenever the candidate nouns differ in gender the adjective still gives itself away. When they do not - مُنَظَّمَةُ الصِّحَّةِ العالَمِيَّةُ, where both are feminine - only knowledge of the world tells you that العالَمِيَّةُ belongs to مُنَظَّمَةُ.

4. Place names are diptotes. Most country and city names are مَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ (lesson 41): no tanwīn ever, and the genitive is a fatḥa, not a kasra - في مِصْرَ، إِلى تونِسَ، مِنْ لُبْنانَ، في بَيْروتَ. Names that carry الـ behave normally (في العِراقِ، في السّودانِ، في الرِّياضِ), and so does a diptote heading its own إِضافَة: مِنْ مَصادِرَ دِبْلوماسِيَّةٍ (fatḥa) against مِنْ مَصادِرِ الوِزارَةِ (kasra, because مَصادِر is now a مُضاف).

5. The nominal, مَصْدَر-heavy style. Where English writes a verb, the press writes its verbal noun and hangs the participants off it as an إِضافَة. The مَصْدَر keeps its verb’s government (lesson 67): its subject becomes the genitive second term, its object stays accusative.

  • ارْتَفَعَتْ أَسْعارُ النِّفْطِ → ارْتِفاعُ أَسْعارِ النِّفْطِ
  • أَعْلَنَتِ الحُكومَةُ رَفْعَ الدَّعْمِ → إِعْلانُ الحُكومَةِ رَفْعَ الدَّعْمِ (the second مَصْدَر is the object of the first, and stays in the accusative)

The productive inventory is small and almost entirely Forms II, IV, VI, VII, VIII and X (lessons 46-53): إِعْلانٌ، ارْتِفاعٌ، انْخِفاضٌ، اسْتِئْنافٌ، تَوْقيعٌ، تَراجُعٌ، اسْتِقْبالٌ، تَصْريحٌ. Twenty of them, learned with their verbs, open up most headlines.

6. The compound prepositions. These are nouns frozen in place, and every one of them puts the following noun in the genitive: إِثْرَ and عَقِبَ (in the immediate wake of), بِشَأْنِ (concerning), حَوْلَ (about), في إِطارِ (as part of), عَلى خَلْفِيَّةِ (against the background of), بِهَدَفِ (with the aim of), بِسَبَبِ، خِلالَ، مِنْ أَجْلِ. Four of them - إِثْرَ، عَقِبَ، حَوْلَ، خِلالَ - carry a visible fatḥa because they are adverbial accusatives (lesson 31) heading an إِضافَة, so what follows them is genitive all the same: إِثْرَ اجْتِماعٍ طارِئٍ.

7. Support verbs: قامَ بِـ، أَجْرى، شَهِدَ. Instead of a plain verb, the press often uses a light verb plus a مَصْدَر - it lets the writer attach adjectives to the action.

  • قامَ بِـ + genitive مَصْدَر: قامَ الوَزيرُ بِزِيارَةٍ رَسْمِيَّةٍ. Only بِـ works here.
  • أَجْرى (Form IV, defective - lesson 51) + accusative مَصْدَر: أَجْرى الطَّرَفانِ مُحادَثاتٍ - a sound feminine plural takes a kasra in the accusative (lesson 9).
  • شَهِدَ with a place or a period as its subject: شَهِدَتِ العاصِمَةُ ارْتِفاعًا حادًّا.

8. تَمَّ, the passive dodge. تَمَّ (root تمم, doubled - lesson 49) means “was completed”, and builds a passive out of any مَصْدَر without touching the verb: تَمَّ تَوْقيعُ الاتِّفاقِيَّةِ = “the agreement was signed”. The مَصْدَر is the فاعِل of تَمَّ, so it is nominative, and تَمَّ agrees with it: تَمَّتِ المُوافَقَةُ عَلى المَشْروعِ. جَرى works the same way. The genuine passive (lesson 52) lives on beside it - أُعْلِنَ عَنْ خُطَّةٍ جَديدَةٍ، عُقِدَ الاجْتِماعُ - and reads as less bureaucratic; prefer it in your own writing.

9. Sourcing and attribution. A news sentence says where it got its claim: ذَكَرَتْ وَكالَةُ الأَنْباءِ أَنَّ…، أَفادَتْ مَصادِرُ…، صَرَّحَ مَسْؤولٌ… Three frozen adverbials do the rest, all accusative مَصادِر (lesson 60): نَقْلًا عَنْ (quoting), وَفْقًا لِـ (according to - the لِـ is not negotiable), اسْتِنادًا إِلى. Further quotes hang off حال participles (lesson 55): مُشيرًا إِلى أَنَّ…، مُضيفًا أَنَّ…

The one rule to memorise: after قالَ the complementizer is إِنَّ, after everything else it is أَنَّ. قالَ الوَزيرُ إِنَّ الاجْتِماعَ مُثْمِرٌ - but أَكَّدَ الوَزيرُ أَنَّ الاجْتِماعَ مُثْمِرٌ. Both are إِنَّ and its sisters from lesson 44, so the noun after them is accusative either way. After a preposition only أَنَّ is possible: بِأَنَّ، إِلى أَنَّ.

10. Numbers, casualties and percentages. Papers print digits and leave you to supply the number word, but the counted noun still obeys lesson 26 - so the noun tells you how to read the digit. أَكْثَرُ مِنْ 20 قَتيلًا is singular accusative because 20 falls in the 11-99 band; 3 قَتْلى is plural because 3-10 annexes a plural. أَكْثَرُ is itself a diptote: إِلى أَكْثَرَ مِنْ 20 قَتيلًا. Percentages are بِنِسْبَةِ + digit + بِالمِئَةِ (also في المِئَةِ): ارْتَفَعَتِ الصّادِراتُ بِنِسْبَةِ 5 بِالمِئَةِ. Vague quantities use an إِضافَة: عَشَراتُ القَتْلى، مِئاتُ المُشارِكينَ، آلافُ النّازِحينَ.

A flag on the digits. Many Arab papers - Egyptian and Gulf ones above all - print Arabic-Indic numerals (٠١٢٣٤٥٦٧٨٩), while Maghrebi papers use 0-9. This path writes 0-9 throughout, so expect the other shapes on a real page; they change nothing about the grammar.

11. Six heuristics that survive the missing marks. (1) The first word with الـ closes the إِضافَة chain. (2) A bare final ا on an indefinite noun is an accusative - قتيلا، ارتفاعا، نقلا، وفقا - so it is a تَمْييز, a حال or an object. (3) ـون / ـين and ـان / ـين are printed, so sound plurals and duals keep their case even unvocalized: المشاركون is a subject, المشاركين is not. (4) The ة on a trailing adjective names its noun whenever the candidates differ in gender. (5) A feminine singular verb after a plural noun (الدول أعلنت) means the plural is non-human (lesson 11). (6) Do not attempt a full إِعْراب of a headline - find the chain, the مَصْدَر and the source, and read on.

Forms & patterns

The headline, taken apart

The wordIts jobWhy
وَزيرُمُبْتَدَأ, nominativefirst term of the chain; no الـ, no tanwīn
خارِجِيَّةِمُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ, genitivemiddle link - cannot take الـ
جُمْهورِيَّةِمُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ, genitivestill a middle link
مِصْرَمُضافٌ إِلَيْهِ, genitive in a fatḥaمَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ; closes the chain
العَرَبِيَّةِنَعْت, genitive femininedescribes جُمْهورِيَّةِ
يَبْحَثُخَبَر, a verbal sentenceimperfect standing for a past event
اسْتِئْنافَمَفْعولٌ بِهِ, accusativeمَصْدَر of Form X, heading its own إِضافَة

The press مَصادِر you cannot avoid

الفِعْلُالوَزْنُالمَصْدَرُIn a headline
أَعْلَنَIVإِعْلانٌإِعْلانُ نَتائِجِ الانْتِخاباتِ
ارْتَفَعَVIIIارْتِفاعٌارْتِفاعُ أَسْعارِ النِّفْطِ
انْخَفَضَVIIانْخِفاضٌانْخِفاضُ نِسْبَةِ البِطالَةِ
اسْتَأْنَفَXاسْتِئْنافٌاسْتِئْنافُ المُفاوَضاتِ
وَقَّعَIIتَوْقيعٌتَوْقيعُ اتِّفاقِيَّةِ التَّعاوُنِ
تَراجَعَVIتَراجُعٌتَراجُعُ الصّادِراتِ
عَقَدَIعَقْدٌعَقْدُ جَلْسَةٍ طارِئَةٍ

Compound prepositions - all of them govern the genitive

التَّعْبيرُEnglishمِثال
إِثْرَin the wake ofإِثْرَ اجْتِماعٍ طارِئٍ
عَقِبَright afterعَقِبَ لِقاءِ الوَزيرَيْنِ
بِشَأْنِconcerningبِشَأْنِ الأَزْمَةِ الاقْتِصادِيَّةِ
حَوْلَabout, aroundحَوْلَ مُسْتَقْبَلِ المِنْطَقَةِ
في إِطارِas part ofفي إِطارِ التَّحْضيرِ لِلْقِمَّةِ
عَلى خَلْفِيَّةِagainst the background ofعَلى خَلْفِيَّةِ تَصْريحاتٍ رَسْمِيَّةٍ
بِهَدَفِwith the aim ofبِهَدَفِ خَفْضِ البِطالَةِ

Support verbs and the case of the مَصْدَر

الإِطارُThe مَصْدَر isمِثال
قامَ بِـمَجْرور (object of بِـ)قامَ الرَّئيسُ بِزِيارَةٍ رَسْمِيَّةٍ
أَجْرىمَنْصوب (object)أَجْرى الطَّرَفانِ مُحادَثاتٍ
شَهِدَمَنْصوب (object)شَهِدَتِ العاصِمَةُ ارْتِفاعًا حادًّا
تَمَّ / جَرىمَرْفوع (فاعِل)تَمَّ تَوْقيعُ الاتِّفاقِيَّةِ

تَمَّ - the slice you need (a doubled verb, root تمم)

الصّيغَةُمُذَكَّرمُؤَنَّث
الماضيتَمَّتَمَّتْ
المُضارِعيَتِمُّتَتِمُّ
المُسْتَقْبَلسَيَتِمُّسَتَتِمُّ
المَجْزوملَمْ يَتِمَّلَمْ تَتِمَّ

Numbers as the page prints them

On the pageRead asThe counted noun
3 قَتْلىثَلاثَةُ قَتْلىplural, genitive (3-10)
أَكْثَرُ مِنْ 20 قَتيلًاأَكْثَرُ مِنْ عِشْرينَ قَتيلًاsingular, accusative تَمْييز (11-99)
نَحْوَ 300 شَخْصٍنَحْوَ ثَلاثِمِائَةِ شَخْصٍsingular, genitive
3 مَلايينِ دولارٍثَلاثَةُ مَلايينِ دولارٍمَلايينِ keeps its kasra as a مُضاف
بِنِسْبَةِ 5 بِالمِئَةِبِنِسْبَةِ خَمْسَةٍ بِالمِئَةِfixed frame for percentages

Examples

العربيةEnglish
وَزيرُ خارِجِيَّةِ جُمْهورِيَّةِ مِصْرَ العَرَبِيَّةِ يَصِلُ اليَوْمَ إِلى الرِّياضِ.The foreign minister of the Arab Republic of Egypt arrives in Riyadh today.
أَعْلَنَتِ الحُكومَةُ اسْتِئْنافَ المُفاوَضاتِ إِثْرَ لِقاءٍ عُقِدَ أَمْسِ.The government announced the resumption of the talks following a meeting held yesterday.
شَهِدَتِ العاصِمَةُ ارْتِفاعًا حادًّا في أَسْعارِ الوَقودِ.The capital has seen a sharp rise in fuel prices.
تَمَّ تَوْقيعُ الاتِّفاقِيَّةِ في مَقَرِّ الوِزارَةِ.The agreement was signed at the ministry’s headquarters.
قامَ الرَّئيسُ بِزِيارَةٍ رَسْمِيَّةٍ إِلى تونِسَ.The president paid an official visit to Tunisia.
ذَكَرَتْ وَكالَةُ الأَنْباءِ أَنَّ المُحادَثاتِ سَتُسْتَأْنَفُ الأُسْبوعَ المُقْبِلَ.The news agency reported that the talks would resume next week.
قالَ المُتَحَدِّثُ بِاسْمِ الوِزارَةِ إِنَّ الحُكومَةَ لَنْ تَتَراجَعَ عَنْ قَرارِها.The ministry spokesman said the government would not back down from its decision.
أَكَّدَ مَسْؤولٌ كَبيرٌ أَنَّ المُساعَداتِ سَتَصِلُ خِلالَ أَيّامٍ.A senior official confirmed that the aid would arrive within days.
ارْتَفَعَتْ حَصيلَةُ ضَحايا الزِّلْزالِ إِلى أَكْثَرَ مِنْ 20 قَتيلًا.The earthquake’s death toll has risen to more than twenty dead.
تَراجَعَتِ الصّادِراتُ بِنِسْبَةِ 5 بِالمِئَةِ خِلالَ الرُّبْعِ الأَوَّلِ.Exports fell by five per cent during the first quarter.
أُعْلِنَ عَنْ خُطَّةٍ جَديدَةٍ بِهَدَفِ خَفْضِ البِطالَةِ.A new plan was announced with the aim of reducing unemployment.
الدُّوَلُ المُشارِكَةُ أَعْلَنَتْ دَعْمَها لِلْمُبادَرَةِ في بَيانٍ مُشْتَرَكٍ.The participating states announced their support for the initiative in a joint statement.
نَشَرَتِ الصَّحيفَةُ الخَبَرَ نَقْلًا عَنْ مَصادِرَ دِبْلوماسِيَّةٍ، ووَفْقًا لِـبَيانٍ رَسْمِيٍّ.The paper published the report quoting diplomatic sources and according to an official statement.

Common mistakes

  • في مِصْرِ -> في مِصْرَ - most place names are مَمْنوعٌ مِنَ الصَّرْفِ: no tanwīn, and the genitive is a fatḥa. Same for إِلى تونِسَ، مِنْ لُبْنانَ، في بَيْروتَ - but في العِراقِ, because الـ restores the normal endings.
  • الوَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ -> وَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ - the first term of an إِضافَة never takes الـ. It is definite already, by way of the last term in the chain.
  • وَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ الأَمْريكِيَّةِ (meaning the minister) -> وَزيرُ الخارِجِيَّةِ الأَمْريكِيُّ - genitive feminine sends the adjective to الخارِجِيَّةِ; you wanted nominative masculine, on وَزيرُ.
  • قالَ الوَزيرُ أَنَّ الاجْتِماعَ مُثْمِرٌ -> قالَ الوَزيرُ إِنَّ الاجْتِماعَ مُثْمِرٌ - after قالَ it is always إِنَّ with a kasra. أَنَّ goes with أَكَّدَ، ذَكَرَ، أَضافَ، أَوْضَحَ and with every preposition.
  • الدُّوَلُ المُشارِكَةُ أَعْلَنوا -> الدُّوَلُ المُشارِكَةُ أَعْلَنَتْ - دُوَل is a non-human plural, so adjective and verb both go feminine singular (lesson 11).
  • أَكْثَرُ مِنْ 20 قَتْلى -> أَكْثَرُ مِنْ 20 قَتيلًا - the digit hides the word عِشْرينَ, and 11-99 takes a singular accusative تَمْييز. Read the digit before you spell the noun.
  • تَمَّ تَوْقيعَ الاتِّفاقِيَّةِ -> تَمَّ تَوْقيعُ الاتِّفاقِيَّةِ - after تَمَّ the مَصْدَر is the subject, not the object, so it is nominative. تَمَّ has no object at all.
  • إِعْلانُ الحُكومَةِ رَفْعُ الدَّعْمِ -> إِعْلانُ الحُكومَةِ رَفْعَ الدَّعْمِ - a مَصْدَر keeps its verb’s government (lesson 67): the doer becomes the genitive of the إِضافَة, the object stays accusative.
  • بِشَأْنَ الأَزْمَةِ -> بِشَأْنِ الأَزْمَةِ - بِشَأْنِ is بِـ plus a noun, so it is genitive itself. إِثْرَ، عَقِبَ، حَوْلَ and خِلالَ keep a fatḥa, being adverbial accusatives.
  • وَفْقًا إِلى بَيانٍ رَسْمِيٍّ -> وَفْقًا لِبَيانٍ رَسْمِيٍّ - each frozen adverbial has one fixed preposition: وَفْقًا لِـ، نَقْلًا عَنْ، اسْتِنادًا إِلى، بِناءً عَلى.

Tips

  • Parse every headline in the same order: find where الـ closes the chain, name the head noun, then attach the trailing adjectives by gender. Endings come last, if at all.
  • Twenty مَصادِر buy you most of a front page. Take them from real headlines with their verbs attached - ارْتَفَعَ / ارْتِفاعٌ، أَعْلَنَ / إِعْلانٌ - so the pair enters your memory as one item.
  • Recognise the support verbs, but write plainly: أَعْلَنَتِ الوِزارَةُ is better prose than قامَتِ الوِزارَةُ بِالإِعْلانِ, and Arab style guides say so too.
  • Keep قالَ إِنَّ as a single unbreakable chunk, the way you keep an English irregular verb.
  • The indefinite accusative alif is the one ending the page still shows you - قتيلا، ارتفاعا، نقلا. Train yourself to notice it; it marks objects, تَمْييز and حال for free.
  • Expect ٠١٢٣٤٥٦٧٨٩ on Egyptian and Gulf pages and 0-9 in the Maghreb. The digits differ, the grammar of the counted noun does not.
  • Read one lead paragraph a day out loud, in pausal form. Two weeks of that does more for this register than any amount of analysis.
  • Do not carry these habits backwards into literature or older texts: this nominal, agency-sourced style is a twentieth-century creation. Lesson 70 handles what came before it.

C1 70 / 70

Reading older and highly formal Arabic

مُسْتَوَياتُ الفُصْحى

In short

Everything in this path so far was written to be produced: learn the rule, use it. This last lesson is the opposite. It is a reading lesson. Arabic has one grammar spread over fourteen centuries, and the top of that range - the Qur’an, the classical library, a constitutional preamble, a sermon, the paragraph a columnist quotes to make a point - uses a handful of devices modern prose has quietly retired. They are not difficult, only unfamiliar, and each is a small visual marker you either recognise or trip over.

The goal is narrow and honest: recognise, do not produce. Afterwards you should be able to open an older page, see a لَـ in front of a predicate, a doubled نّ on the end of a verb, a بـ where no preposition belongs, or a name shaped أَبا, and know instantly what each is doing - without wanting to put any of them in an email. What separates the layers is frequency, not grammar: all of this is still formally correct MSA, and older writing simply uses the whole inventory at once, unvocalized. The one item below you do need actively is بَلى.

The rule

1. إِنَّ plus the sliding lām - اللّامُ المُزَحْلَقَة. إِنَّ came in lesson 44 as a plain emphasiser. In elevated Arabic it usually arrives with a partner: a لَـ carrying fatḥa, parked on the predicate.

  • إِنَّ الأَمْرَ لَخَطيرٌ. - the matter is truly serious.
  • إِنَّ الإِنْسانَ لَفي خُسْرٍ. (العصر 2)

Grammarians call it المُزَحْلَقَة, “the slid-over lām”: it belongs at the head of the sentence, where إِنَّ already sits, so it slides forward onto the خَبَر. It changes no case anywhere and always carries fatḥa - a kasra in that slot is the preposition لِـ and something else entirely. When the خَبَر is fronted (lesson 17) the lām lands on the delayed اسْم instead: إِنَّ في البَيْتِ لَرَجُلًا.

2. نونُ التَّوْكيد - the emphatic nūn. A نّ welded to the end of a verb, turning “I will do it” into “I shall most certainly do it”. It attaches only to the مُضارِع and the أَمْر, never to the past, in a heavy shape (لَأَفْعَلَنَّ، اِذْهَبَنَّ) and a rare light one with plain sukūn (اِذْهَبَنْ). The verb then stops inflecting for mood: it is مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الفَتْح, so the ـُ of the مَرْفوع (lesson 40) vanishes under a fatḥa. With plural and feminine subjects the endings collide and simplify - يَكْتُبونَ becomes لَيَكْتُبُنَّ and تَكْتُبينَ becomes لَتَكْتُبِنَّ - and the surviving ḍamma or kasra is the only trace of the lost letter. Outside a quotation, a sermon or a line of verse you will not meet this, and you should never write it.

3. القَسَم - the oath, and the answer it forces. An oath has three parts: a particle, the thing sworn by (always مَجْرور), and جَوابُ القَسَم, the clause the oath guarantees. The particles are وَ (وَاللهِ), بِ (بِاللهِ - the only one allowing an explicit verb, أُقْسِمُ بِاللهِ) and تَ (تَاللهِ). What makes the construction recognisable is that the answer is not free: its shape is dictated by the oath, and the table below lists all five patterns. وَتَاللهِ لَأَكيدَنَّ أَصْنامَكُمْ (الأنبياء 57) is the whole system in four words - particle, genitive, lām, emphatic nūn. Modern residue: وَاللهِ survives in speech, and the oath of office keeps the frame, أُقْسِمُ بِاللهِ العَظيمِ أَنْ أَحْتَرِمَ الدُّسْتورَ.

4. ما الحِجازِيَّة, and the redundant بـ. In lesson 68 ما negates a past verb. Older Arabic also lets it negate a nominal sentence, working exactly like لَيْسَ: the اسْم stays مَرْفوع and the خَبَر goes مَنْصوب - ما هٰذا بَشَرًا (يوسف 31). That is the Ḥijāzī treatment; the rival Tamīmī one leaves ما inert with both parts nominative, ما هٰذا بَشَرٌ. Very often the خَبَر instead carries a باءٌ زائِدَة, a redundant بـ that translates nothing and puts the word in the genitive by form while it stays accusative by function: ما هٰذا بِبَشَرٍ، ما أَنا بِنادِمٍ. That same redundant بـ is alive after لَيْسَ in modern formal prose - لَيْسَ الأَمْرُ بِسَهْلٍ - which is your hook for it.

5. يا أَيُّها النّاسُ - and why النّاسُ is nominative. Lesson 36 gave the rule: يا cannot meet الـ, so أَيُّها buffers. In elevated Arabic this is the standard address, and it hides a case trap. أَيُّ is the real مُنادى, مَبْنِيٌّ عَلى الضَّمّ; ها is a particle of attention; and the noun after it is a نَعْتٌ مَرْفوع agreeing with that ḍamma - not the accusative a vocative might suggest: يا أَيُّها النّاسُ / يا أَيُّها الَّذينَ آمَنوا (البقرة 183) / أَيَّتُها السَّيِّداتُ والسّادَةُ. Fully current - every speech and formal letter opens this way, usually with يا dropped.

6. The archaic connectors. Six worth knowing, running from fully alive to purely literary. Their government is the point; the meanings are easy, and the table below sets them side by side.

  • بَيْدَ أَنَّ - “however”. Locked to أَنَّ, so an accusative noun always follows (lesson 44). The most formal contrast connector of lesson 66, and still entirely usable today.
  • إِذْ - a past-time “when” (ذَكَرَ ذٰلِكَ إِذْ كُنّا صِغارًا) and a causal “since, for”, which is a press favourite: تَأَخَّرَ التَّقْريرُ، إِذْ لَمْ تَصِلِ البَياناتُ.
  • لَعَلَّ (“perhaps”) and لَيْتَ (“if only”) - two sisters of إِنَّ, so accusative noun, nominative predicate. لَعَلَّ is alive in careful prose; لَيْتَ, wishing for what is out of reach, is literary only.
  • لا سِيَّما - “especially”, usually with a preceding وَ. The noun after it is normally مَجْرور as the second term of an إِضافَة; a nominative reading is also correct classically.
  • ناهيكَ عَنْ - “let alone”, plus a genitive. A frozen participle with a frozen pronoun.

7. الأَسْماءُ الخَمْسَة - one word wearing three long vowels. Lesson 40 filed these as an oddity of the case system; here is where they pay off, because they show case as a letter, which survives even in unvocalized text. They are أَبٌ، أَخٌ، حَمٌ، فو، ذو, and they behave this way only when all four conditions hold: singular, not diminutive, مُضاف, and annexed to something other than ياء المُتَكَلِّم.

جاءَ أَبو خالِدٍ - رَأَيْتُ أَبا خالِدٍ - سَلَّمْتُ عَلى أَبي خالِدٍ

That last condition is what confuses learners: annex any of them to “my” and they collapse back to ordinary declension with invisible endings, so أَبي، أَخي look identical in all three cases. ذو is the special one - it means صاحِب, “possessor of”, and takes a noun after it, never a pronoun; its feminine ذاتُ / ذاتَ / ذاتِ declines with ordinary vowels, and its plural is ذَوو / ذَوي. None of this is a museum piece: it is load-bearing in names and fixed expressions - أَبو ظَبْيٍ، ذو الحِجَّةِ، مِنْ ذَوي الخِبْرَةِ، ذَوو الاحْتِياجاتِ الخاصَّةِ، شَرِكَةٌ ذاتُ مَسْؤولِيَّةٍ مَحْدودَةٍ. A place name still declines in careful writing (زُرْنا أَبا ظَبْيٍ), though print often freezes it as أَبو ظَبْي.

8. حينَئِذٍ and the compensating tanwīn. A closed family of time adverbs built from a ظَرْف plus إِذْ, written as one word with the hamza on a ya seat. The kasratān is تَنْوينُ العِوَض, tanwīn in compensation: it stands in for a whole deleted clause, “at the time when [that happened]”. It is therefore not a case ending and never varies - حينَئِذٍ stays حينَئِذٍ as subject, object, anywhere. The plain modern equivalents are عِنْدَها، حينَها، في ذٰلِكَ الوَقْتِ; the ـئِذٍ forms are the formal register’s version, and they are common in print.

9. Marks on the page that are not letters. The dagger alif you met with the vowel marks and again with the demonstratives - a long ā printed as a small vertical stroke instead of an alif - is dense in exactly these texts: هٰذا، ذٰلِكَ، أُولٰئِكَ، لٰكِنْ، الرَّحْمٰن، إِلٰه، هٰكَذا. Modern typesetting drops the stroke; the vowel is long either way. Beside it sits the waṣla ٱ, an alif with a small ص above it marking a هَمْزَةُ الوَصْل elided in connected reading - ordinary print writes a bare ا, a muṣḥaf writes ٱلْحَمْدُ.

10. Reading a printed Qur’an, and how to cite it. A muṣḥaf page is typeset for recitation, not for prose: waṣla signs, dagger alifs everywhere, extra recitation marks, an older orthography in some words (الصَّلوٰةَ for الصَّلاةَ), and verse numbers in Arabic-Indic digits inside a rosette, ٢٥٥ ۝. None of that is grammar or transfers to writing Arabic. This path prints Western digits, so a citation is the sura name in Arabic plus a Western verse number in parentheses: (البقرة 255)، (العصر 2)، (يوسف 31).

11. One live reflex: بَلى, not نَعَمْ. Lesson 15 gave you this, and it belongs here too, because it is the classical distinction modern Arabic has not dropped. After a negative question نَعَمْ agrees with the negative - it means “no, I’m not”. Only بَلى contradicts it: أَلَسْتَ طالِبًا؟ - بَلى، أَنا طالِبٌ.

12. Where the line is. Safe in your own formal Arabic: بَيْدَ أَنَّ، إِذْ، لَعَلَّ، لا سِيَّما، عِنْدَئِذٍ، أَيُّها الحُضورُ، the five nouns، بَلى. Not safe: نون التوكيد، القَسَم as a rhetorical device، ما الحِجازِيَّة، لَيْتَ، the emphatic لَـ. A report that reaches for لَأَفْعَلَنَّ does not sound learned; it sounds like a costume.

Forms & patterns

The markers, as they appear on the page:

العَلامَةما هِيَمِثال
اللّامُ المُزَحْلَقَةلَـ بِفَتْحَةٍ عَلى الخَبَرِ بَعْدَ إِنَّإِنَّ الأَمْرَ لَخَطيرٌ
نونُ التَّوْكيدِ الثَّقيلَةـَنَّ في آخِرِ المُضارِعِ أَوِ الأَمْرلَأَفْعَلَنَّ، اِذْهَبَنَّ
نونُ التَّوْكيدِ الخَفيفَةـَنْ ساكِنَةاِذْهَبَنْ
لامُ القَسَملَـ قَبْلَ جَوابِ القَسَموَاللهِ لَأَعودَنَّ
الباءُ الزّائِدَةبـ لا تُتَرْجَمُ في خَبَرِ ما أَوْ لَيْسَما هٰذا بِبَشَرٍ
تَنْوينُ العِوَضـٍ عِوَضًا عَنْ جُمْلَةٍ مَحْذوفَةحينَئِذٍ
الأَلِفُ الخَنْجَرِيَّةأَلِفٌ قَصيرَةٌ فَوْقَ الحَرْفهٰذا، الرَّحْمٰن
الوَصْلَةٱ في المُصْحَفِ المَطْبوعٱلْحَمْدُ

نونُ التَّوْكيد on كَتَبَ - the slice you will actually meet. The dual and feminine-plural forms (لَتَكْتُبانِّ، لَيَكْتُبْنانِّ) are left out: they are vanishingly rare, and the pattern decodes them if you ever hit one.

الضَّميرالمُضارِعُ المَرْفوعمَعَ نونِ التَّوْكيد
أَناأَكْتُبُلَأَكْتُبَنَّ
نَحْنُنَكْتُبُلَنَكْتُبَنَّ
أَنْتَتَكْتُبُلَتَكْتُبَنَّ
أَنْتِتَكْتُبينَلَتَكْتُبِنَّ
أَنْتُمْتَكْتُبونَلَتَكْتُبُنَّ
هُوَيَكْتُبُلَيَكْتُبَنَّ
هُمْيَكْتُبونَلَيَكْتُبُنَّ
الأَمْراُكْتُبْاُكْتُبَنَّ

جَوابُ القَسَم - the answer the oath forces:

نَوْعُ الجَوابالأَداةمِثال
مُضارِعٌ مُثْبَتلَـ + نونُ التَّوْكيدوَاللهِ لَأَحْضُرَنَّ غَدًا
ماضٍ مُثْبَتلَقَدْوَاللهِ لَقَدْ صَدَقْتَ
مَنْفِيٌّ في الماضيماوَاللهِ ما قُلْتُ ذٰلِكَ
مَنْفِيٌّ في المُسْتَقْبَللاوَاللهِ لا أَعودُ
جُمْلَةٌ اسْمِيَّةإِنَّ … لَـوَاللهِ إِنَّ الأَمْرَ لَجِدٌّ

الأَسْماءُ الخَمْسَة across all three cases:

الاسْممَرْفوعمَنْصوبمَجْرورمِثالٌ ثابِت
أَبٌأَبوأَباأَبيأَبو ظَبْيٍ، أَبو بَكْرٍ
أَخٌأَخوأَخاأَخيأَخو الزَّوْجِ
حَمٌحَموحَماحَميحَمو العَروسِ
فوفوفافينادِرَة؛ المُعْتادُ فَمٌ
ذوذوذاذيذو الحِجَّةِ، مِنْ ذَوي الخِبْرَةِ

The compensating tanwīn - the whole family, and it is short:

الكَلِمَةأَصْلُهاEnglish
حينَئِذٍحينَ + إِذْat that time, then
عِنْدَئِذٍعِنْدَ + إِذْat that point
وَقْتَئِذٍوَقْتَ + إِذْat that time
يَوْمَئِذٍيَوْمَ + إِذْon that day
ساعَتَئِذٍساعَةَ + إِذْat that hour
آنَئِذٍآنَ + إِذْat that moment

The archaic connectors and what they govern:

الأَداةالمَعْنىما بَعْدَها
بَيْدَ أَنَّhoweverاسْمٌ مَنْصوب
إِذْwhen / sinceجُمْلَة
لَعَلَّ / لَيْتَperhaps / if onlyاسْمٌ مَنْصوب
لا سِيَّماespeciallyاسْمٌ مَجْرور (أَوْ مَرْفوع)
ناهيكَ عَنْlet aloneاسْمٌ مَجْرور

Examples

العربيةEnglish
إِنَّ في ذٰلِكَ لَعِبْرَةً لِمَنْ يَقْرَأُ التّاريخَ.There is truly a lesson in that for anyone who reads history.
خَتَمَ الخَطيبُ كَلِمَتَهُ: وَاللهِ لَنَبْلُغَنَّ ما نُريدُ.The speaker closed his address: by God, we shall certainly reach what we want.
أَيُّها السّادَةُ، أَشْكُرُكُمْ عَلى حُضورِكُمْ.Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for attending.
يُعَلِّقُ الكاتِبُ ساخِرًا: ما هٰذا بِالأَمْرِ الهَيِّنِ.The writer remarks sarcastically: this is no easy matter.
النَّصُّ واضِحٌ، بَيْدَ أَنَّ تَفْسيرَهُ ما زالَ مَوْضِعَ خِلافٍ.The text is clear, but its interpretation is still disputed.
تَأَخَّرَ التَّقْريرُ، إِذْ لَمْ تَصِلِ البَياناتُ.The report was late, since the data did not arrive.
أَعْجَبَني المَعْرِضُ وَلا سِيَّما قِسْمِ المَخْطوطاتِ.I liked the exhibition, especially the manuscripts section.
الرِّحْلَةُ مُرْهِقَةٌ، ناهيكَ عَنْ تَكاليفِها.The trip is exhausting, let alone its cost.
زُرْنا أَبا ظَبْيٍ، ثُمَّ نَزَلْنا عِنْدَ أَبي خالِدٍ.We visited Abu Dhabi, then stayed with Abu Khalid.
نَبْحَثُ عَنْ مُرَشَّحينَ مِنْ ذَوي الخِبْرَةِ، ويَبْدَأُ العَمَلُ في ذي الحِجَّةِ.We are looking for candidates with experience, and work begins in Dhu al-Hijja.
صَدَرَ القانونُ سَنَةَ 1980، وكانَ عَدَدُ السُّكّانِ وَقْتَئِذٍ أَقَلَّ مِنْ مِلْيونٍ.The law was issued in 1980, and the population at that time was under a million.
أَلَسْتَ مِنْ سُكّانِ المَدينَةِ؟ - بَلى، وُلِدْتُ فيها.Aren’t you a resident of the city? - Yes, I was born here.

Common mistakes

  • أَلَسْتَ طالِبًا؟ - نَعَمْ. -> أَلَسْتَ طالِبًا؟ - بَلى. - after a negative question نَعَمْ confirms the negative, so you have just agreed that you are not a student.
  • هاذا -> هٰذا - the long ā here is written with the dagger alif, or with nothing at all, never with a full alif. Same for ذالك -> ذٰلِكَ and لاكن -> لٰكِنْ.
  • رَأَيْتُ أَبو خالِدٍ -> رَأَيْتُ أَبا خالِدٍ - أَبو، أَبا، أَبي are one word in three cases, not three words. After رَأَيْتُ it is مَفْعولٌ بِهِ, and its accusative marker is the long ا.
  • إِنَّ الرَّجُلَ لِرَجُلٌ كَريمٌ -> إِنَّ الرَّجُلَ لَرَجُلٌ كَريمٌ - the emphatic lām takes fatḥa. With a kasra it is the preposition لِـ, which would demand a genitive.
  • ما هٰذا بِبَشَرًا -> ما هٰذا بِبَشَرٍ - once the redundant بـ is there, the word after it takes the genitive form, though its job is still that of an accusative خَبَر. Pick one shape: ما هٰذا بَشَرًا or ما هٰذا بِبَشَرٍ.
  • يا أَيُّها النّاسَ -> يا أَيُّها النّاسُ - the noun after أَيُّها is a نَعْت agreeing with its ḍamma. The vocative accusative applies to an annexed مُنادى (يا صاحِبَ البَيْتِ), not here.
  • حينَئِذًا -> حينَئِذٍ - one word, hamza on a ya seat, and a fixed kasratān compensating for a deleted clause. It is not a case ending and never becomes ـًا.
  • وَلَأُرْسِلَنَّ النُّسْخَةَ غَدًا -> وَسَأُرْسِلُ النُّسْخَةَ غَدًا - flawless grammar, wrong register. نون التوكيد in an email reads as parody; سَـ plus a plain مُضارِع is what you want.

Tips

  • Read for markers, not for parsing. Four shapes carry most of the load: a fatḥa-lām before a predicate, a doubled نّ closing a verb, a بـ where no preposition belongs, and a long و/ا/ي ending أَب، أَخ، ذو. Spot those and the sentence resolves itself.
  • Keep two mental columns: import (بَيْدَ أَنَّ، إِذْ، لَعَلَّ، لا سِيَّما، عِنْدَئِذٍ، أَيُّها، بَلى) versus recognise only (نون التوكيد، القَسَم، ما الحِجازِيَّة، لَيْتَ، اللام المزحلقة). Every item in this lesson belongs to exactly one of them.
  • Drill the five nouns as spoken triplets - أَبو أَبا أَبي، أَخو أَخا أَخي، ذو ذا ذي - the way you drilled الطّالِبانِ الطّالِبَيْنِ in lesson 40. They are the one case marker that survives unvocalized text, so they earn more attention than their frequency suggests.
  • Treat the ـئِذٍ words as vocabulary, not grammar: six items, one fixed ending, no agreement, no case. Learn عِنْدَئِذٍ first - it is the one you will meet most.
  • بَلى is the single active item here. Wire it to the question, not the answer: if the question opened with أَلَـ، ما or لَمْ, the contradicting reply is بَلى.
  • To practise, read a column of a bilingual edition against the facing translation and mark only the constructions in this lesson. Fifteen minutes of that beats an hour of tables, and it is the natural next step now that the path is finished.